Ref541 - Sve Zstitne Funkcije Mergano

1MRS100080 RE_5_ _
Issued: 10/1997
Version: D
Auto-Reclosure Function
Data subject to change without notice (AR5Func)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3
1.3 Input description.................................................................................. 5
1.4 Output description ............................................................................... 6
2. Description of Operation.......................................................................... 7
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 7
2.1.1 General ...................................................................................... 7
2.1.2 Relay configuration .................................................................... 7
2.1.3 AR shots and final trip function................................................... 8
2.1.4 Shot selection............................................................................. 9
2.1.5 Initiation of auto-reclosing ........................................................ 10
2.1.6 Auto-reclose operation mode control........................................ 10
2.1.7 Auto-reclose shot initiated by a trip signal ................................ 11
2.1.8 Auto-reclose shot initiated by a start signal .............................. 11
2.1.9 Auto-reclose shot blocked by an initiation signal ...................... 11
2.1.10 Circuit breaker position inputs .................................................. 12
2.1.11 Delaying the CLOSE output signal ........................................... 13
2.1.12 Lock-out resetting..................................................................... 13
2.2 Test mode ......................................................................................... 13
2.3 Resetting........................................................................................... 14
2.4 General ............................................................................................. 15
2.4.1 Discriminating time and reclaim time ........................................ 15
2.4.2 Final trip function (6) ................................................................ 15
2.4.3 Lock-out ................................................................................... 15
2.4.4 Interruption of auto-reclosing.................................................... 16
2.4.5 Secured control of the circuit breaker....................................... 16
2.4.6 Circuit breaker supervision logic............................................... 17
2.4.7 Aids to circuit breaker maintenance ......................................... 18
2.4.8 Frequent-operation counter...................................................... 19
2.4.9 ACTIVE .................................................................................... 19
2.4.10 SHOT_ALARM......................................................................... 20
RE_5_ _ AR5Func ABB Automation
2.4.11 CBFAIL alarm ...........................................................................20

2.4.12 Synchrocheck input ARSYNC...................................................20
2.4.13 Inhibition of circuit breaker closing CINH ..................................20
2.4.14 AR inhibition and interruption input ARINH ...............................21
2.4.15 Recording of auto-reclose operations .......................................21
2.4.16 Resetting ..................................................................................21
2.4.17 Resetting the indications...........................................................21
2.4.18 Sequence control......................................................................22
2.4.19 Shot alarm ................................................................................23
3. Parameters and Events ..........................................................................24

3.1 General..............................................................................................24
3.2 Setting values ....................................................................................25
3.2.1 Actual settings ..........................................................................25
3.2.2 Control settings.........................................................................27
3.3 Measurement values .........................................................................29
3.3.1 Input data .................................................................................29
3.3.2 Output data...............................................................................30
3.3.3 Recorded data ..........................................................................31
3.3.4 Events ......................................................................................32
4. Technical Data.........................................................................................35
2
ABB Automation AR5Func RE_5_ _
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
One to five successive auto-reclose (AR) shots to select

Four AR initiation input signals: from either protection functions or external inputs
Final tripping by the protection functions or the auto-reclose function after a preset
time delay
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the auto-reclose function block AR5Func
used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The majority (about 80...85%) of MV overhead line faults are transient and are
automatically cleared by momentarily de-energizing the line, whereas the rest of the
faults (15...20%) can be cleared by longer interruptions. The de-energization of the
fault place for a desired period of time is implemented by auto-reclose relays or
functions. The auto-reclosers are capable of clearing most of the faults. At a
permanent fault, the auto-reclosing is followed by final tripping. A permanent fault
has to be located and cleared before the fault location can be re-energized.
The auto-reclose function AR5Func can be used for auto-reclosing together with any
circuit breaker that has the characteristics required for auto-reclosing. The function
block provides five programmable auto-reclose shots which can perform one to five
successive auto-reclosures of desired type and duration, such as one high-speed and
one delayed auto-reclosure. When the reclosing is initiated by the start of a protection
function, the auto-reclose function is capable of executing the final trip of the circuit
breaker in a short operate time in case the fault still persists when the last reclosure
selected has been carried out.
A typical auto-reclose situation where one auto-reclose shot has been performed after
the fault was detected is illustrated in Figure 1. In case a), the auto-reclose shot is
initiated by a start signal of the protection function after the start delay time has
elapsed, whereas in case b), the auto-reclose shot is initiated by a trip signal of the
protection function. In both cases, the auto-reclose sequence was successful.
3
a) Instant of fault
AR1
(Start signal
from protection)
Start delay time
ACTIVE
OPEN
Dead time
CLOSE
Reclaim time
TRDUE
Circuit breaker CLOSED OPEN CLOSED

(CB)
b) Instant of fault *) This signal is not

available to AR5Func
*) Start of
protection
Operate time
AR1
(Trip signal
from protection)
ACTIVE
Dead time
CLOSE
Reclaim time
TRDUE

(CB)
)LJXUH 6LJQDOVFKHPHLOOXVWUDWLQJWKHDXWRUHFORVHRSHUDWLRQZKHQLQLWLDWHGE\D
VWDUWVLJQDODRUDWULSVLJQDOERIWKHSURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQ
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERO)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOHOLQH

GLDJUDPVUHIHUWRWKHPDQXDO7HFKQLFDO'HVFULSWLRQVRI)XQFWLRQV
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
4
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORIWKHDXWRUHFORVXUHIXQFWLRQ$5)XQF
1.3 Input description
Name Type Description

AR1 Digital signal (BOOL, active high) AR initiation line
ARINH Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for AR interruption and
inhibition
ARSYNC Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for AR synchrocheck
CBOPEN Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Circuit breaker open signal
CBCLOSE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Circuit breaker close signal
CINH Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for blocking of CB closing
ON Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Operation mode of AR function
RESET Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) AR reset signal
LOCKOUT Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) AR lock-out reset signal
_RES
SHOT_INC Digital signal (BOOL, neg. edge) Sequence control signal
5
1.4 Output description

OPEN Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for CB opening
CLOSE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for CB closing
SHOT1 Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "AR shot 1 in progress"
AR1TRIP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "AR failed or final trip by
AR1"
AR2"
AR3"
AR4"
CBFAIL Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "CB opening or closing
failed"
DEFTRIP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "Alarm for definite
tripping"
LOCKOUT Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "AR5Func is locked out"
TRDUE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "Reclaim time running"
TDDUE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "Discriminating time
running"
ACTIVE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "AR shot 1...5 in
progress"
SHOT_ALA Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "Alarm after N shots"
RM
6
2. Description of Operation
2.1 Configuration
2.1.1 General
The configuration includes a description of the internal and external operation of the
function block. The internal operation is defined by setting the built-in parameters
according to the needs of the application. The parameters can be set either via the
MIMIC or the serial communication. The external operation, i.e. the logical
connection to process data, can be configured in the Relay Configuration Tool
included in the CAP 505 Tool Box.
2.1.2 Relay configuration
Because of the virtually boundless configuration, i.e. the possibilities of the Relay
Configuration Tool, there is no single way of building an auto-reclose system with the
AR5Func. The function block is equipped with all the essential functionality and can
be used as such by simply connecting the AR input(s) to a protection function(s) and
the OPEN and CLOSE outputs to the circuit breaker. The needs vary, however, and to
meet the different requirements, the operation of the AR5Func can be adjusted e.g.
with a few external components as presented in Figure 4 below.
25
&%B75,3
12&/2:
,/ 67$57
25 $5)XQF
,/ 75, 3 $5 23( 1
$5 &/26( &%B&/26(

$5 6+27
$5 6+27
12&+,*+
,/ 67$57 $5,1+ 6+27
,/ 75, 3 $56< 1& 6+27
&%23(1 6+27
&%&/26( $575,3
&,1+ $575,3
1( )/2:
,R 67$57 21 $575,3
%6 75, 3 5(6(7 $575,3
/2&.287B5(6 &%)$,/
6+27B,1& '()75,3 '(),1,7(B75,3
/2&.287
75'8(
$5B,1+,%,7 7''8(
&%B326,7,21 $&7,9( $5B,1B3 52*5(66
6+27B$/$50
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIDW\SLFDOFRQILJXUDWLRQIRUWKH$5)XQF
The examples presented below illustrate some of the special cases in configuration.
Most of the inputs and outputs in the figures are left floating for clarity reasons, as in
the example above. This does not mean that they should remain like that.
Figure 5, for example, illustrates the configuration of an application where the final
trip is carried out by the start of the protection function (AR2) but not until one auto-
7
reclose sequence i.e. one shot is completed by tripping of the protection function
(AR1). The operation of the start signal is blocked by an external AND gate until the
reclaim timer is started (TRDUE) by the first shot.
25
&%B23(1B6,*1$/
12&/2:
,/ 6 7$57
$5)XQF
,/ 75,3 $5 23(1
,/ &%)3 $5 &/26(
$1'
%6 (55 $5 6+27
%6 $5 6+27
75,** $5,1+ 6+27
*5283 $56<1& 6+27
'28%/( &%23(1 6+27

%65(* &%&/2 6( $575,3
5(6(7 &, 1+ $575,3
21 $575,3
5( 6(7 $575,3
/2 &.287B5(6 &%)$,/
6+27B,1& '()75,3
/2&.287
75'8(
7''8(
$&7,9(
6+27B$/$50
)LJXUH $QH[DPSOHRIWKHXVHRIH[WHUQDOFRPSRQHQWVLQFRQILJXUDWLRQ
2.1.3 AR shots and final trip function
The operation of the auto-recloser is illustrated in Figure 6. The shot pointer indicates
the shot to start when the auto-reclose function receives its AR initiation signal
through one of the initiation lines AR1...AR4. The boxes for each of the initiation
lines determine the action to be taken when an auto-reclose initiation signal is
received. Start means that an auto-reclose shot is initiated, while block means that
the auto-reclose shot is prevented when the initiation signal is active. A dash means
that no action will be taken.
Shot Pointer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5 Final Trip Lock-out

AR1
Start Block Yes
Initiation signals
Advance Shot Pointer
AR2
Start Start Yes
AR3
Shot Pointer = 1
Start Start No
AR4
Start Yes
Dead time Dead time Dead time Dead time Dead time
Circuit
td td td td Final trip breaker
closing
Reclaim time
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPIRUWKHDXWRUHFORVHIXQFWLRQ$5)XQF
The programmable start delay associated with the boxes in the grey area is activated if
the auto-reclose shot is initiated by the start signal of a protection stage (selected with
parameters ,QLWLDWLRQPRGH, ch8x/S1), see Figure 7. After the start delay, the circuit
breaker is opened by the auto-reclose function. When the auto-reclose shot is initiated
8
by the trip signal of the protection, a protection function trips the circuit breaker and
simultaneously initiates the AR shot.
The AR shots start from the tripping of the circuit breaker and simultaneously, the
dead time of the shot is started. When the dead time has elapsed, the circuit breaker is
closed and the reclaim and discrimination time starts running. A new initiation signal
received during the discrimination time will inhibit further AR shots and the shot
pointer will move to the final trip stage (6). An auto-reclose request received during
the reclaim time will increase the shot pointer and perform the function selected. If no
function is selected, the shot pointer moves right to the lock-out stage (7). At this
point, the AR function is locked-out during the reclaim time, after which the shot
pointer is reset and the function is prepared for a new AR sequence (lock-out reset
mode is automatic). If the lock-out reset is programmed to be manual, the only way to
cancel the lock-out of AR is to reset it locally over the MMI, via a digital input (or
any logic) or via serial communication.
AR1 oper. mode

(ch81/S2)
AR1 start delay

(ch81/S6)
Shot enabled
1
0
0
1 t
AR1
1 Shot in
2
1 & S
progress
R
0
Start
OPEN
AR2 1 End
of
1
pulse
AR3 shot
Initiation mode
AR4 (ch81/S1)
)LJXUH 3URJUDPPDEOHSDUDPHWHUVRI6KRW
2.1.4 Shot selection
There are two different methods of selecting the shots to be enabled and ready to react
on the initiation lines. The default method is that the shots with a number equal to or
greater than the current value (i.e. position) of the shot pointer are enabled. Which of
the enabled shots is to start depends only on the setting of the Start/Block/No action
of each shot. A shot with a smaller number takes precedence over shots with greater
numbers as well as over the final trip function. The other method is to enable exactly
one shot at a time, the one indicated by the shot pointer. Figure 8 illustrates the
operation of the shot pointer in shot selection, and the related parameters. No matter
which method is used, the final trip is enabled until the shot pointer reaches the
position 7 (lock-out).
9
1
ON 2 1 0
0
input signal AR operation
(ch80/S3)
Shots enable
(ch80/S9)
0 1
Shot Pointer
(ch80/V2)
1 7
Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable

Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5 Final Trip
)LJXUH 6KRWVHOHFWLRQORJLFUHODWHGSDUDPHWHUVDQGVKRWSRLQWHU
2.1.5 Initiation of auto-reclosing
The start of the AR shots is subject to the following conditions:
1 An AR shot of a value smaller than that indicated by the shot pointer cannot be
started.
2 An initiation signal (AR1...4) has to be active and the corresponding setting has to
be Start.
3 No initiation signal that inhibits (Block) the shot must be active.
4 Should a start delay have been set for the AR shot (see Auto-reclose shot initiated
by a start signal below), the initiation signal still has to be active when the start
delay elapses, to enable initiation of the AR shot.
Example (see Figure 6):
The initiation signals AR1 and AR2 are assumed to be activated when the position of
the shot pointer is 2 (AR shot 1 has just been made). AR shot 2 would be the next one
to start but it is blocked by AR1. The AR shots 3...5 have not been configured to be
initiated by either signal but the final trip function (6) has, and so the final tripping
operation will take place next.
2.1.6 Auto-reclose operation mode control
The operation mode of the AR5Func can be controlled in two ways:
1 When the setting parameter $5RSHUDWLRQV (ch80/S3) is 21LQSXW VHOHFW(2), the

operation mode of the function block is interpreted according to the ON input
signal: boolean FALSE at the input deactivates AR, while boolean TRUE is
interpreted as the operation mode being ON.
2 When the setting parameter $5RSHUDWLRQV (ch80/S3) is 21 (1, the default) or 2))
(0), the AR5Func will be correspondingly in use or not in use.
When the AR5Func is deactivated by the operation mode, the shot selection is
completely disabled (see Figure 8) and the shot pointer is set to the lock-out position
but not locked-out. The reclaim timer is armed to start (the TRDUE output is active)
10
as soon as the function block is put into use again. The operation mode does not affect
the LOCKOUT output or the locked-out condition.
2.1.7 Auto-reclose shot initiated by a trip signal
An AR shot initiated by a trip signal of the protection function will start immediately.
The circuit breaker is then opened by a protection function.
2.1.8 Auto-reclose shot initiated by a start signal
A start delay can be set to delay the start of an AR shot. Separate start delays can be
set for each box in the grey area in Figure 6.
When the AR shot is to be initiated by the start signal of the protection function, the
circuit breaker is opened by the auto-reclose function once the start delay time of the
concerned AR shot has elapsed. The zero value can also be selected for the start
delay.
What is important for the start delay is that the corresponding initiation signal remains
active throughout the time. Should the initiation signal reset, the time delay starts
from zero again. The use of another initiation signal for blocking the start of an AR
shot does not affect the time delay.
In the example in Figure 9, the input AR2 has a starting function and the input AR1 a
blocking function. In case a), a momentary activation of the input AR1 does not affect
the start of the AR shot nor the start delay. The input AR1 used for blocking in case b)
remains active for a longer time than the start delay of AR2. The AR shot is started 50
ms after the blocking is reset via AR1.
AR2
(Start)
Start delay time Start delay time
AR1
(Block)
t t
ACTIVE
t =50 ms delay after

a) b) block signal reset
)LJXUH ([DPSOHVRI$5LQLWLDWLRQ
2.1.9 Auto-reclose shot blocked by an initiation signal
An auto-reclose shot can be blocked by a high-set overcurrent stage. If the activation

of the initiation line AR1 is selected to block the shot 1, this will remain blocked as
long as the initiation line AR1 is activated. However, the shots 2, 3, 4, 5 or the final
trip function can be initiated. The block function does not increase the value (i.e.
position) of the shot pointer, so that if no shot or final trip can be initiated, the AR
11
function will wait until the block signal is reset or the protection function performs
definite tripping.
2.1.10 Circuit breaker position inputs
The position inputs CBOPEN and CBCLOSE should be connected to the circuit
breaker status signals. If these are not available, there are two alternatives. If the
inputs are configured as constant FALSE, the function block ignores the circuit
breaker position in all operations and the position is assumed to be correct, e.g.
open after an OPEN pulse of the specified width. The other alternative is to connect
the inputs to the trip signal of the protection function, as shown in Figure 10. The
operation is the same but in this case, the AR5Func can generate the DEFTRIP signal
and update the definite trip counters even if final tripping is not handled by the
function block.
&%B23(1B6,* 1$/
12& /2:
,/ 67$57
$5)XQF
,/ 75,3 $5 2 3( 1
$5 &/2 6(
$5 6+27
$5 6+27
$5,1+ 6+27
$56<1& 6+27
&%23(1 6+27
&%&/26( $575,3
&,1+ $575,3
21 $575,3
5(6(7 $575,3
/2&.2 87B5(6 &%)$,/
6+27B,1& '()75,3
/2&.2 87
75'8(
7''8(
$&7,9(
6+27B$/$50
)LJXUH &RQILJXUDWLRQRIFLUFXLWEUHDNHULQSXWVZKHQWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHUVWDWXVLV
QRWDYDLODEOHDQGILQDOWULSSLQJLVFDUULHGRXWE\SURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQV
The internal circuit breaker status (&%SRVLWLRQ, ch80/S3) is changed only when there
is no conflict between the position inputs CBOPEN and CBCLOSE. At power-on
reset, the status is set to undefined and it will remain so until no conflict exist
between the inputs. While the status is undefined, the AR5Func operates normally as
described above, always assuming that the state is correct. Figure 11 shows how the
circuit breaker status is decoded. It should be noted, however, that this is not a real-
life example of how the circuit breaker operates.
power-on
CBOPEN
CBCLOSE
Circuit breaker Undefined OPEN CLOSED OPEN

position
)LJXUH 'HFRGLQJRIWKHLQWHUQDOFLUFXLWEUHDNHUVWDWXV
12
2.1.11 Delaying the CLOSE output signal
After the dead time, the CLOSE output is not activated until certain conditions are
fulfilled. The conditions are:
the ARSYNC input must be TRUE if information about synchronism is required

(6\QFKURFKHFN, ch8x/S11) by the particular shot,
the CINH input must be FALSE,
the OPEN output must be inactive,
all the AR initiation inputs have been inactive for at least 50 ms,
the maintenance monitor (ch80/S27) must not be zero if configured ($WVWUHVVFQW
, ch80/S20) to inhibit closing and
the circuit breaker must not already be closed
If one of the above conditions is not fulfilled within two seconds, the auto-reclose
sequence will be locked out. Figure 12 shows an example where the CLOSE output is
delayed by the CINH input. When the AR input signal (AR1 in the example) is reset,
there must be a 50 ms time delay before reclosing is allowed. The 50 ms delay may
become significant with short dead times.
AR1
Start delay time t t =50 ms delay after
initiation signal reset
OPEN
ACTIVE
Dead time 2 s max
CINH
CLOSE
)LJXUH 'HOD\LQJWKH&/26(RXWSXWVLJQDO
2.1.12 Lock-out resetting
The LOCKOUT_RES input is edge-sensitive. The falling edge causes no operation,

whereas the rising edge may be used to release the function block from the lock-out
condition. The issue is explained thoroughly in paragraph Resetting further on in
this document.
2.2 Test mode
If required, the test functionality can be implemented with additional logic

components at each input and output.
The circuit breaker status inputs (CBOPEN and CBCLOSE) can be temporarily
disconnected by using the control setting &%SRVLQSXWV, ch80/V90, which is useful
especially in the regular maintenance of the relay. The control setting forces the
13
internal status of circuit breaker (&%SRVLWLRQ, ch80/S3) to the same undefined state
at which it was when the function block was initialized. By disconnecting the OPEN
and CLOSE output signals as well, the auto-reclose sequences can be carried out
while the circuit breaker remains closed all the time.
The normal operation of the circuit breaker status is resumed as soon as a change is
detected in either of the status inputs. Note that the control setting (&%SRVLQSXWV,
ch80/V90) should be used only if the status inputs are connected to reflect the current
status of the circuit breaker.
2.3 Resetting
The operation counters as well as the ARnTRIP (n =1...4) and LOCKOUT output
signals can be reset via the RESET input, or over the serial bus or the local MMI.
The operation indicators, latched output signals and operation counters can be reset as
follows:
Operation Latched Operation

indicators output counters
3)
signal
1)
RESET input of the function block X X
1)
Parameter ch80/V13 X X
2)
General parameter F001V011 X
2)
General parameter F001V012 X X
2)
General parameter F001V013 X X X
2)
Push-button C X
2)
Push-buttons C + E (2 s) X X
2)
Push-buttons C + E (5 s) X X X
1)
Resets the output signals and operation counters of the particular function block.
2)
Affects all function blocks.
3)
ARnTRIP (n = 1...4) and LOCKOUT
The operation counters subject to reset are:
counters of DEF.TRIP alarms initiated by each of the four AR inputs (1XP

'()75,3$U[, ch80/V2x),
counters of shots in the five most recent sequences (1XPVKRWV..., ch80/V3x),
counters of how many times each shot has been initiated by each of the four AR
inputs (1XPVKRWV..., ch8x/V1...), and
counters of how many times each shot initiated by each of the four AR inputs has
been successful (6XFFHVVIXO..., ch8x/V6...)
14
2.4 General
2.4.1 Discriminating time and reclaim time
When the circuit breaker is closed by the AR shots 1...4, a discriminating time td will
be started. Should one of the initiation signals AR1...AR4 be activated during the
discriminating time, the AR shot pointer moves to the position (6). Then further AR
shots are prevented and definite tripping will follow. This function is generally used
at inverse-time operation in order to limit the number of auto-reclosures when
reclosing further aggravates a fault situation. The discriminating time td can be set out
of use by selecting the value 0.
The reclaim time is always started or restarted at a circuit breaker close operation. A
new initiation signal during the reclaim time will perform the next shot if one has
been selected. When all shots have been executed, the auto-recloser is locked out.
When the reclaim time has elapsed and the automatic lock-out reset mode is selected,
the lock-out situation ends and the shot pointer returns to its nominal position (1).
2.4.2 Final trip function (6)
Definite tripping of the circuit breaker can be carried out by a trip signal of the
protection function or by the final trip function (6) of the auto-reclose function. The
final trip function (6) has to be initiated by the start of the protection function and it
allows final CB tripping to be carried out in a time shorter than the operate time of the
protection function. In this case, the fault is most probably of a permanent nature and
waiting for the protection function to trip might thus further aggravate the damage. In
the final trip function, the desired trip time (6) can be selected separately for each
initiation signal.
2.4.3 Lock-out
When the last shot or the final trip function (6) has been carried out, the shot pointer
indicates the position LOCK-OUT (7), which means that the auto-reclose function
does not respond to any initiation signal during the reclaim time. At this time, the
LOCKOUT output signal is high. In addition, the shot pointer indicates the position
(7) in the following situations:
the circuit breaker operation failed

the circuit breaker is manually closed during an auto-reclose sequence
the circuit breaker is closed under normal conditions by local or remote control
the input for inhibiting and interrupting auto-reclosing (ARINH) is active
the auto-reclose program has been set out of operation
start of the reclaim timer has been prevented for two minutes by an initiation
signal AR1...AR4
15
the auto-recloser is blocked by the frequent-operation counter

the circuit breaker is open at initialization of AR5Func, e.g. after connection of
auxiliary power to the system
Automatic Lock-out reset:
When the signal or situation that resulted in lock-out resets, the reclaim time (tr)
starts. When the set reclaim time has elapsed, the shot pointer returns to the
position (1), simultaneously clearing the LOCKOUT output.
Manual Lock-out reset:
The Lock-out is reset either locally via the MMI, a digital input or any logic
connected to the LOCKOUT_RES input, or via the serial communication.
Manually resetting the Lock-out immediately resets the LOCKOUT output. The
shot pointer is reset to 1 by the manual Lock-out reset or at end of the reclaim
time, whichever comes last.
The automatic or manual lock-out reset mode is selected by parameter /RFNRXWPRGH
(ch80/S5).
2.4.4 Interruption of auto-reclosing
An auto-reclose sequence (AR shots 1...5) can be interrupted or is interrupted in the

following cases:
the opening or closing of the circuit breaker fails (CBxxxx inputs do not change
status)
the CB status data changes from open to closed during the dead time of the
auto-reclosure e.g. due to manual closing of the circuit breaker
the ARINH input is activated
the circuit breaker is opened by local or remote control
the auto-reclose program is set out of use
the AR5Func is re-initialized for some reason, e.g. the auxiliary power supply to
the system is temporarily interrupted.
In all the cases mentioned above, specified information about the cause of interruption
can be obtained over the serial communication system.
2.4.5 Secured control of the circuit breaker
In addition to the circuit breaker control during auto-reclose sequences, the AR5Func
can be used to open and close the circuit breaker over the serial bus or the MMI. This
operation has two phases, selection and execution, and thus it is called secured
control. The selection phase is carried out by writing the value one to either the open
or the close operation parameter, both of which are function block specific. The
execution phase can be carried out by writing the value one either to the function
block specific parameter or to the common parameter on channel 900. The latter
16
allows multiple preselected operations to be accomplished simultaneously between

different function blocks.
The parameters for secured control are:
ch80/V6 Open operation selection of secured control. Value one (1) will select
open operation and cancel close operation if this was selected before.
The value zero (0) will deselect the open operation if selected.
ch80/V7 Close operation selection of secured control. Value one (1) will select
close operation and cancel open operation if this was selected before.
Value zero (0) will deselect the close operation if selected.
ch80/V11 Execution of secured control. Value one (1) will carry out the
operation selected by ch80/V6 or ch80/V7. Note that either the open or
close operation is assumed to be selected. If not, an event (ch80/E29)
is generated to indicate an error.
ch900/V251 Same as ch80/V11, but no event (as error message) will be generated
when no open or close operation has been selected. The command is
broadcasted to other function blocks as well.
ch80/V10 Deselection of secured control. Value one (1) will cancel the operation
possibly selected by ch80/V6 or ch80/V7. The operation selection
parameter, if one has been set, is reset to zero.
ch900/V252 Same as ch80/V10. The command is broadcasted to other function

blocks as well.
The parameters above are write-only parameters.
The secured open operation will abort an auto-reclose sequence running at the
moment of the execution phase. The event code ch80/E38 is generated to indicate an
abnormal termination of the sequence. Note that the circuit breaker can already be
open when the auto-reclose sequence is aborded - an active sequence is aborted
unconditionally at secured open - so this function is normally used as a remote reset
of an auto-reclose sequence.
The secured opening and closing are subject to the same rules as the opening and
closing by auto-reclose sequences. For example, a close operation is not carried out if
the circuit breaker is already closed or if the open output signal or an AR initiation
input signal is active at the moment of the execution phase. There are no dedicated
events (as error messages) for a secured control being ignored due to a conflict with
the rules.
2.4.6 Circuit breaker supervision logic
When the auto-reclose function operates the circuit breaker, it also checks that the
state of the CB changes properly during the set pulse width. To be able to check the
position data, the auto-reclose function block needs information about the position of
the circuit breaker (CBOPEN, CBCLOSE). When required, however, the auto-reclose
17
function is able to operate without this information. In such a case, the control
operations, i.e. whether they are successful or not, are not supervised.
For the operation of the circuit breaker, the width of the open pulse and the close
pulse is adjustable. These times are maximum times. If no CB position information is
available, the control impulses are in accordance with the setting. The open and close
signals cannot be active at the same time. If so, the open signal interrupts the close
signal. When CB position information is available, the impulse is interrupted once the
CB position has changed. Should the circuit breaker position remain unchanged
during the control operation, a circuit-breaker fail alarm will be issued (CBFAIL).
In addition, the following conditions are checked before the circuit breaker is closed:
the circuit breaker is open

the AR initiation signals AR1...4 are not active
the close inhibit input CINH is not active
if the circuit breaker maintenance monitor is programmed to inhibit closing, the
value of the monitor must be greater than zero
if the synchrocheck function is in use, the input ARSYNC has to be active
Once the conditions mentioned above are fulfilled, the circuit breaker is closed. The
maximum waiting time for the conditions to be fulfilled is 2 seconds. Should one or
several conditions prevent closing, an alarm signal CBFAIL will be given in 2
seconds.
2.4.7 Aids to circuit breaker maintenance
The purpose of the maintenance monitor (also called stress monitor) is to provide an
alarm signal or, possibly, to prevent the closing of the circuit breaker after a certain
number of CB operations. The operation of the maintenance monitor is based on
counting the number of times the circuit breaker has opened. As soon as the auto-
reclose function block notices a circuit breaker trip, the value of the maintenance
monitor decreases.
Different load on the circuit breaker influences the maintenance monitor in a different
way. For example, the overcurrent may have the weighting factor 20 and the manual
opening the weighting factor 1, which means that respectively, the monitor value is
decreased by 20 or 1. The AR5Func block has five different weighting factors: for
openings initiated by AR1, by AR2, by AR3, by AR4 and by manual control. The
weighting factors can be set in the range 0...50.
When the maintenance monitor reaches the value zero, a permanent CBFAIL alarm
signal is issued. The maintenance monitor can be configured so($WVWUHVVFQW,
ch80/S20) that the value zero prevents CB closing and auto-reclose operations. The
alarm is reset by giving the maintenance monitor a new value.
18
In addition, a pre-alarm level can be set for the maintenance monitor. When the
monitor reaches this level or falls below it, a pulse-shaped CBFAIL alarm signal is
given when the CB is opened. The pre-alarm function can be set out of use by
choosing the setting value zero (0) for it.
The maintenance monitor can be set out of use by setting all weighting factors to zero.
2.4.8 Frequent-operation counter
The frequent-operation counter is intended to block the auto-recloser in cases when

the fault causes repetitive auto-reclose sequences during a long period of time, e.g. if
a tree causes a short circuit and thus repeated auto-reclose shots with a few minutes
interval during a stormy night. This type of faults can easily damage the circuit
breaker if the auto-recloser is not locked out by the frequent-operation counter.
The frequent-operation counter can be described as a water tank with a small

adjustable leakage. Each trip adds a fixed amount of water into the tank. When the
selected water level is reached, the frequent-operation counter will cause the lockout
of the auto-reclose unit and prevent the shot from starting. The OPEN output is
activated (if configured to do so) along with the LOCKOUT output signal. The set
value of the leakage is in the range 1 to 50 trips per half an hour and the water level
limit ()UHTRSOLPLW, ch80/S18) can be set in the range of 1 to 100 trips.
When monitoring the water level i.e. the current value of the frequent-operation
counter parameter ()UHTXHQWRSFQW, ch80/S17), note that the parameter will be
decremented (by one) at intervals of 30 (minutes) divided by the leakage value ()UHT
RSOHDN, ch80/S19). No decrementing occurs when the zero value is reached. The
frequent-operation counter can be set out of use by setting the leak value at zero.
2.4.9 ACTIVE
This output signal indicates that the AR function is active. The signal goes up when a
shot (1...5) and its dead time is started. The signal is reset when the shot is completed
or aborted, i.e.:
the dead time of a shot has elapsed and the close signal is activated,
the logic is locked out,
a shot has been ready for two seconds without permission to activate the close
signal, or
either secured open or close control is selected (ch80/V6:1 or ch80/V7:1) and
executed (ch80/V11:1).
The ACTIVE output signal is produced by internally OR'ing the five AR shot Q in
progress output signals.
19
2.4.10 SHOT_ALARM
The shot alarm output is activated after the selected number of shots has been
performed. The signal is often used for selection of second settings of protection
function(s). If the programmed alarm limit (6KRWDODUPOHYHO, ch80/S6) matches with
the number of shots in sequence, the signal goes up when a shot (1...5) and its dead
time is started. The signal is reset
after elapse of the reclaim time,

after rising edge at the RESET input, or
after detected TRUE in any of the 5HVHWUHJLVWHUV or 5HVHWRXWSXWV parameters
(ch1/V12, ch1/V13 or ch80/V13).
2.4.11 CBFAIL alarm
The CBFAIL alarm is a 0.2 s pulse that is obtained when a CB operation fails or the
maintenance monitor reaches or falls below the set pre-alarm level, or when an auto-
reclose sequence in progress is interrupted by unsuccessful circuit breaker operation.
The CBFAIL alarm is permanently indicating that the value of the maintenance
monitor is zero.
2.4.12 Synchrocheck input ARSYNC
The ARSYNC input is used, for example, to delay or avoid the connection of
transmission lines fed from different directions when the phase angle difference of the
network sections is too large. Should there be no information about synchronism
within 2 seconds after the dead time has elapsed, the auto-reclose sequence will be
locked out and a CBFAIL alarm will be issued. When the ARSYNC input is activated,
the synchronism condition is assumed to be fulfilled and reclosing is allowed.
The setting parameters 6\QFKURFKHFN (e.g. ch81/S11) can be used to specify whether
information about synchronism is required for the individual AR shots. If the dead
time is short, the circuit breaker can be reclosed without synchronism being lost.
2.4.13 Inhibition of circuit breaker closing CINH
Activation of the CINH input prevents CB closing in situations where the CB spring
is not charged or the gas pressure is below the permitted level. When the CINH input
is activated, CB closing is inhibited. If the CINH input is not reset within two seconds
after the dead time has elapsed, the auto-reclose sequence will be locked out and a
CBFAIL alarm will be issued.
20
2.4.14 AR inhibition and interruption input ARINH
When the ARINH input is activated, any auto-reclose operation in progress will be
locked out. When the ARINH signal disappears, the reclaim time tr starts and an auto-
reclose sequence cannot be carried out until this time has elapsed.
2.4.15 Recording of auto-reclose operations
The auto-reclose function records all shots made as well as successful auto-reclosures.
Registers containing information about the number of successful auto-reclosures can
be accessed over the serial communication and over the event reporting system. The
auto-reclose function decides whether the auto-reclosure (the last AR shot) was
successful or not after the reclaim time tr has elapsed.
Registers containing information about the number of all shots made can be accessed
via the MMI or over the serial communication.
2.4.16 Resetting
The RESET input of the AR function is to be used for resetting the AR function
registers. The registers can also be reset over the serial bus or MMI.
2.4.17 Resetting the indications
Sometimes it may be useful to get all the indications on the MMI reset after an auto-
reclosure. This can be done with the INDRESET function block. Figure 13 shows an
example of the configuration for resetting the indications. The close pulse given by
the auto-reclose function will reset all indications on the MMI. The advantage is that
the MMI always shows the latest trip-indication.
)LJXUH 5HVHWWLQJWKHLQGLFDWLRQVDIWHUDFORVHSXOVHLVJLYHQE\WKH$5IXQFWLRQ
21
2.4.18 Sequence control
The SHOT_INC input is used to synchronize the shot pointer of the AR5Func with
the shot pointer of the downstream auto-recloser in the same network. An external
TON type timer circuit might be required for each AR input to reject e.g. inrush
currect peaks which do not cause auto-reclosing downstream. The timer circuit is
connected between the start signal of the protection function and the SHOT_INC
input. (Because the AR input can be connected either to the start or the trip signal of
the protection function, the timer circuit is not built-in in the AR5Func.) Figure 14
shows an example of the configuration for sequence control when the shots are
initiated by the tripping of the protection function. The delays must be set to a slightly
shorter operate time than the operate time of the downstream relay.
25
&%B23(1B6,* 1$/
12& /2:
,/ 67$57
$5)XQF
,/ 75,3 $5 2 3( 1
$5 &/2 6(
$5 6+27
$5 6+27
1( )/2:
,R 67$57 $5,1+ 6+27
%6 75,3 $56<1& 6+27
&%23(1 6+27
&%&/26( $575,3
&,1+ $575,3
721
,1 4 21 $575,3
37 (7 5(6(7 $575,3
/2&.2 87B5(6 &%)$,/
25
6+27B,1& '()75,3
721
,1 4 /2&.2 87
37 (7 75'8(
7''8(
$&7,9(
6+27B$/$50
)LJXUH &RQQHFWLQJWKHVHTXHQFHFRQWUROWLPHUVZKHQVKRWVDUHVWDUWHGE\WKH
WULSSLQJRIWKHSURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQ
When the relay downstream performs a trip, the start signal at the upstream relay
passes through the timer and the shot pointer is incremented at the falling edge if no
auto-reclose shot is started. The shot pointer is always incremented by one. If the
signal ACTIVE is activated, it means that the upstream relay has tripped and its own
auto-reclose shot has been started. Figure 15 is an example of the operation where the
shot pointer is incremented by sequence control twice before the start delay time is
exceeded and a shot is started.
Start of
protection
Start delay time Start delay time Start delay time
SHOT_INC
t t t
TRDUE
t =External TON
delay time
ACTIVE
Shot Pointer 1 2 3
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKHVHTXHQFHFRQWUROLQSXW6+27B,1&
22
2.4.19 Shot alarm
When the number of shots in sequence reach the preset limit (6KRWDODUPOHYHO,
ch80/S6), the SHOT_ALARM output is activated at the beginning of the dead time
along with the ACTIVE output. The SHOT_ALARM output is cleared at the end of
the reclaim time and also when outputs are reset by the RESET input or by one of the
reset parameters.
23
3. Parameters and Events
3.1 General
Usually each function block has a specific channel number for serial
communication parameters and events. However, the AR5Func function is divided
on channels 80 to 86 as follows:
Channel Parameters and events
80 General parameters and events;
input and output data
81 Shot 1
82 Shot 2
83 Shot 3
84 Shot 4
85 Shot 5
86 Final trip
The data direction of the parameters defines the use of each parameter as follows:
Data direction Description
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
The different event mask parameters (see section Control settings) affect the
visibility of events on the MMI or on serial communication (LON or SPA) as
follows:
Event mask 1 (FxxxV101/102) SPA / MMI (LON)
Event mask 2 (FxxxV103/104) LON
For example, if only the events E3, E4 and E5 are to be seen on the MMI of the
relay terminal, the event mask value 56 (8 + 16 + 32) is written to the Event mask
1 parameter (FxxxV101).
In case a function block includes more than 32 events, there are two parameters
instead of e.g. the Event mask 1 parameter: the parameter Event mask 1A
(FxxxV101) covers the events 0...31 and Event mask 1B(FxxxV102) the events
32...63.
24
3.2 Setting values
3.2.1 Actual settings
3.2.1.1 General settings
Parameter Code Values Unit Default Data Explanation

dir.
Reclaim time tr S1 0.20...300.00 s 10.00 R/W Reclaim time of AR-function
1)
AR operations S3 0...2 - 0 R/W Operation mode of AR-function
AR oper. status S4 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M AR-function currently in use or not

3)
Lock-out mode S5 0 or 1 - 0 R/W Lock-out reset mode; automatic, manual
Shot alarm level S6 0...4 - 0 R/W Number of shots required in AR

sequence to activate the SHOT_ALARM
output
Man. close inh. S7 0...2 4) - 0 R/W Function at manual CB closing
Shots enabled S9 0 or 1 5) - 0 R/W Enable all shots or only the next one
Frequent op. cnt S17 0...100 - 0 R/W Frequent Operation Counter: current
value in shots
Freq. op. limit S18 0...100 6) - 0 R/W Lock-out limit of the Frequent Operation
Counter in shots
Freq. op. leak S19 1...50 - 1 R/W Leakage of the Frequent Operation
Counter in shots per half an hour
At stress cnt 0 S20 0 or 1 7) - 0 R/W Operation of CB maintenance monitor

when 0
Manual stress S21 0...50 - 0 R/W Stress factor, when CB opened

manually
AR1 stress S22 0...50 - 0 R/W Stress factor, when CB opened via AR1
Stress pre-alarm S26 0...50 - 0 R/W Pre-alarm level of CB maintenance

monitor
Stress counter S27 0...999 - 999 R/W Value of CB maintenance monitor
Close pulse S28 0.10...7.00 s 0.20 R/W Width of closing pulse
Open pulse S29 0.10...7.00 s 0.20 R/W Width of opening pulse

1)
AR operations 0 = OFF; 1 = ON; 2 = Selected by the ON input
2)
AR oper. status 0 = OFF; 1 = ON
3)
Lock-out mode 0 = Automatic; 1 = Manual
4)
Man. close inh. 0 = Shots / Final Trip inhibited; 1 = Shots inhibited; 2 = Closing does not affect
5)
Shots enabled 0 = Enable all shots >= Shot Pointer; 1 = Enable the next shot (0Shot Pointer)
only
6)
Freq. op. limit 0 = Frequent Operation Counter disabled; 1...100 = Number of shots
7)
At stress cnt 0 0 = Alarm only; 1 = Inhibit closing / auto-reclosing
25
3.2.1.2 Settings for shots 15
Parameter Code Values Unit Default Data Explanation4)

direction
Initiation mode S1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/W Shot x initiation mode
AR1 oper. mode S2 0...2 2) - 0 R/W AR1 operation mode for shot x
2)
AR2 oper. mode S3 0...2 - 0 R/M AR2 operation mode for shot x
2)
AR4 oper. mode S5 0...2 - 0 R/W AR4 operation mode for shot x
AR1 start delay S6 0...10.00 s 0 R/W Start delay of AR1 signal
Dead time S10 0.20...300.00 s 5.00 R/W Dead time for AR shot x
3)
Synchrocheck S11 0 or 1 - 0 R/W Use of synchrocheck for AR shot x
Discr. time td S12 0...30.00 s 0 R/W Discriminating time for AR shot x

1)
Initiation mode 0 = Trip; 1 = Start
2)
AR_ oper. mode 0 = No operation; 1 = AR shot initiated; 2 = Initiation of AR shot blocked
3)
Synchrocheck 0 = Not in use; 1 = ARSYNC in use
4)
Character x in the explanation refers to the shot number (1,2,3,4 or 5). The above parameters can
be set separately for each shot.
3.2.1.3 Final trip settings

direction
AR1 init mode S2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/W AR1 initiation mode for final trip
1)
AR3 init mode S4 0 or 1 - 0 R/M AR3 initiation mode for final trip
AR1 trip delay S6 0...5.00 s 0 R/W Final trip delay, when initiated by AR1
1)
AR_ init mode 0 = No operation; 1 = Final Trip initiated
26
3.2.2 Control settings
3.2.2.1 General control settings

direction
AR in progress V1 0...5 1) - 0 R/M AR5Func status
Shot Pointer V2 1...7 - 1 R/M Current value of Shot Pointer
CB position V3 0...2 2) - 0 R/M Circuit Breaker status as seen

by AR5Func
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - 0 W Parameter for register reset

Note: Same effect as RESET
input signal of AR5Func
Event mask 1A V101 0...4294967295 - 42317907 R/W Event mask 1 for event
87 transmission (E0 ... E32)
Event mask 1B V102 0... - 127 R/W Event mask 1 for event
transmission (E32 ... E45)
1)
AR in progress 0 = AR not in progress; 1 = AR shot 1 in progress; 2 = AR shot 2 in progress;
3 = AR shot 3 in progress; 4 = AR shot 4 in progress; 5 = AR shot 5 in
progress
2)
CB position 0 = Unknown; 1 = Closed; 2 = Open
27
3.2.2.2 Control settings for shots 15
Parameter1) Code Values Unit Default Data Explanation

direction
Event mask 1 V101 0...127 - 2 R/W Event mask 1 for event
transmission (E0...E6)



1)
The event mask parameters can be set separately for each shot (15)
3.2.2.3 Final trip control settings

direction



28
3.3 Measurement values
3.3.1 Input data
Parameter Code Values Default Data Explanation

direction
In AR1 I1 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Input signal AR1
1)
In AR2 I2 0 or 1 0 R/M Input signal AR2

1)
In ARINH I5 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Input signal ARINH

1)
In ARSYNC I6 0 or 1 0 R/M Input signal ARSYNC
In CBOPEN I7 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Input signal CBOPEN

1)
In CBCLOSE I8 0 or 1 0 R/M Input signal CBCLOSE
In CINH I9 0 or 1 1) 1 R/M Input signal CINH

1)
In ON I10 0 or 1 0 R/M Input signal ON
In RESET I11 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Input signal RESET

1)
In LOCKOUT_RES I12 0 or 1 0 R/M Input signal LOCKOUT_RES
In SHOT_INC I13 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Input signal SHOT_INC

1)
Input 0 = Not active; 1 = active
29
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Out OPEN O1 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of OPEN signal
Out CLOSE O2 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of CLOSE signal

1)
Out SHOT1 O3 0 or 1 0 R/M Status of AR shot 1 due signal SHOT1
Out SHOT2 O4 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of AR shot 2 due signal SHOT2

1)

1)
Out AR1TRIP O8 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of DEF.TRIP alarm signal

AR1TRIP

AR2TRIP

AR3TRIP

AR4TRIP
Out CBFAIL O12 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of CBFAIL signal

1)
Out DEFTRIP O13 0 or 1 0 R/M Status of DEFTRIP signal
Out LOCKOUT O14 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of LOCKOUT signal

1)
Out TRDUE O15 0 or 1 0 R/M Status of TRDUE signal
Out TDDUE O16 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of TDDUE signal

1)
Out ACTIVE O17 0 or 1 0 R/M Status of ACTIVE signal
Out SHOT_ALARM O18 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of SHOT_ALARM signal

1)
Output 0 = Not active; 1 = active
30
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General recorded data

direction
Num DEF.TRIP AR1 V22 0...255 - 0 R/W Number of DEF.TRIP alarms
initiated by AR1

initiated by AR2
Num DEF.TRIP AR3 V24 0...255 - 0 R/M Number of DEF.TRIP alarms

initiated by AR3

initiated by AR4
Num shots last V31 0...11 1) - 0 R/W Shots / last AR sequence

1)
Num shots 2nd V32 0...11 - 0 R/W Shots / second last AR seq.
Num shots 3rd V33 0...11 1) - 0 R/W Shots / third last AR seq.
1)
Num shots 4th V34 0...11 - 0 R/W Shots / fourth last AR seq.
Num shots 5th V35 0...11 1) - 0 R/W Shots / fifth last AR seq.
1)
Num shots 0 = Dummy data; 1...5 = Shot count; 6...11 = Shot count (+6) with Def Trip
3.3.3.2 Recorded data for shots 15

direction
Num shots AR1 V2 0...255 - 0 R/W Number of shots initiated by AR1
Num shots AR3 V4 0...255 - 0 R/M Number of shots initiated by AR3
Successful AR1 V6 0...255 - 0 R/W Number of successful shots initiated

by AR1

by AR2

by AR3

by AR4
1)
The recorded data is available separately for each shot (15)
31
3.3.4 Events
3.3.4.1 General events
Code Weighting Default Event reason Event state

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Auto-reclosing seq. Ended
E1 2 1 Auto-reclosing seq. Started
E2 4 0 AR (shots 1...5) initiated by AR1 -
E6 64 1 DEF.TRIP alarm Reset
E7 128 1 DEF.TRIP alarm Activated
E8 256 0 DEF.TRIP alarm activated by AR1 -
E12 4096 0 AR seq. successful -
E13 8192 0 AR seq. initiated by AR1 successful -
E17 131072 0 Forced shot increment by the signal SHOT_INC -
E18 262144 1 Change in CB position: 1 -> 0 Open
E19 524288 1 Change in CB position: 0 -> 1 (closed) Close
E20 1048576 1 Manual/remote CB opening recognized Open
E21 2097152 1 Manual/remote CB closing recognized Close
E22 4194304 1 OPEN output Reset
E23 8388608 1 OPEN output Activated
E24 16777216 0 CLOSE output Reset
E25 33554432 0 CLOSE output activated Activated
E26 67108864 1 CB opening failed via auto-recloser -
E27 134217728 1 CB closing failed via auto-recloser -
E28 268435456 1 CB closing inhibited -
E29 536870912 1 Attempt to execute without open/close selection -
E30 1073741824 1 Maintenance monitor alarm reset Reset
Table continued on the next page.
32

coefficient mask
E31 2147483648 1 Alarm from maintenance monitor Activated
E32 1 1 Initiation signal AR1...4 activated >2 min Reset
E33 2 1 Initiation signal AR1...4 activated >2 min Activated
E34 4 1 AR not in use -
E35 8 1 AR in use -
E36 16 1 AR interrupted by the signal ARINH -
E37 32 1 AR interrupted by CB close during the seq. -
E38 64 1 AR interrupted by CB open during the seq. -
E39 128 0 AR interrupted by Frequent Operation Counter -
E40 256 0 Discriminating time td Elapsed
E41 512 0 Discriminating time td Started
E42 1024 0 Reclaim time tr Elapsed
E43 2048 0 Reclaim time tr Started or restarted
E44 4096 0 LOCKOUT Reset
E45 8192 0 LOCKOUT Activated
33
3.3.4.2 Events for shots 15
Code Weighting Default Event reason1) Event state

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 Auto-reclose shot x Concluded
E1 2 1 Auto-reclose shot x In progress
E2 4 0 AR shot x initiated via AR1 -
E6 64 0 AR shot x successful -
1)
Character x in the event reason refers to the shot number (1,2,3,4 or 5). The above events are
generated separately for each shot.
3.3.4.3 Final trip events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Final trip -
E1 2 0 Final trip via AR1 -
34
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies 1% of setting value or 30 ms
Configuration data Task execution interval (Relay Configuration Tool): 10 ms

at the rated frequency fn = 50 Hz
Technical revision history

Technical revision Change
A -
B No changes affecting the functionality of AR5Func
35
1MRS752297-MUM AR5Func
Issued: 10/1997
Version: E/17.01.2002
Auto-Reclosure Function
Data subject to change without notice
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 7
2.1.1 General ...................................................................................... 7
2.1.3 AR shots and final trip function................................................... 8
2.1.4 Shot selection............................................................................. 9
2.1.5 Initiation of auto-reclosing ........................................................ 10
2.1.6 Auto-reclose operation mode control........................................ 10
2.1.7 Auto-reclose shot initiated by a trip signal ................................ 11
2.1.8 Auto-reclose shot initiated by a start signal .............................. 11
2.1.9 Auto-reclose shot blocked by an initiation signal ...................... 11
2.1.10 Circuit breaker position inputs .................................................. 12
2.1.11 Delaying the CLOSE output signal ........................................... 13
2.1.12 Lock-out resetting..................................................................... 13
2.2 Test mode ......................................................................................... 13
2.3 Resetting........................................................................................... 14
2.4 General ............................................................................................. 15
2.4.1 Discriminating time and reclaim time ........................................ 15
2.4.2 Final trip function (6) ................................................................ 15
2.4.3 Lock-out ................................................................................... 15
2.4.4 Interruption of auto-reclosing.................................................... 16
2.4.5 Secured control of the circuit breaker....................................... 16
2.4.6 Circuit breaker supervision logic............................................... 17
2.4.7 Aids to circuit breaker maintenance ......................................... 18
2.4.8 Frequent-operation counter...................................................... 19
2.4.9 ACTIVE .................................................................................... 19
2.4.10 SHOT_ALARM......................................................................... 20
AR5Func Substation Automation
2.4.11 CBFAIL alarm ...........................................................................20

2.4.12 Synchrocheck input ARSYNC...................................................20
2.4.13 Inhibition of circuit breaker closing CINH ..................................20
2.4.14 AR inhibition and interruption input ARINH ...............................21
2.4.15 Recording of auto-reclose operations .......................................21
2.4.16 Resetting ..................................................................................21
2.4.17 Resetting the indications...........................................................21
2.4.18 Sequence control......................................................................22
2.4.19 Shot alarm ................................................................................23

3.1 General..............................................................................................24
3.2 Setting values ....................................................................................25
3.2.1 Actual settings ..........................................................................25
3.3.1 Input data .................................................................................29
3.3.2 Output data...............................................................................30
3.3.3 Recorded data ..........................................................................31
3.3.4 Events ......................................................................................32
4. Technical Data.........................................................................................35
2
Substation Automation AR5Func
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
One to five successive auto-reclose (AR) shots to select

Four AR initiation input signals: from either protection functions or external inputs
Final tripping by the protection functions or the auto-reclose function after a preset
time delay
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the auto-reclose function block AR5Func
The majority (about 80...85%) of MV overhead line faults are transient and are
automatically cleared by momentarily de-energizing the line, whereas the rest of the
faults (15...20%) can be cleared by longer interruptions. The de-energization of the
fault place for a desired period of time is implemented by auto-reclose relays or
functions. The auto-reclosers are capable of clearing most of the faults. At a
permanent fault, the auto-reclosing is followed by final tripping. A permanent fault
has to be located and cleared before the fault location can be re-energized.
The auto-reclose function AR5Func can be used for auto-reclosing together with any
circuit breaker that has the characteristics required for auto-reclosing. The function
block provides five programmable auto-reclose shots which can perform one to five
successive auto-reclosures of desired type and duration, such as one high-speed and
one delayed auto-reclosure. When the reclosing is initiated by the start of a protection
function, the auto-reclose function is capable of executing the final trip of the circuit
breaker in a short operate time in case the fault still persists when the last reclosure
selected has been carried out.
A typical auto-reclose situation where one auto-reclose shot has been performed after
the fault was detected is illustrated in Figure 1. In case a), the auto-reclose shot is
initiated by a start signal of the protection function after the start delay time has
elapsed, whereas in case b), the auto-reclose shot is initiated by a trip signal of the
protection function. In both cases, the auto-reclose sequence was successful.
3
a) Instant of fault
AR1
(Start signal
from protection)
Start delay time
ACTIVE
OPEN
Dead time
CLOSE
Reclaim time
TRDUE

(CB)
b) Instant of fault *) This signal is not

available to AR5Func
*) Start of
protection
Operate time
AR1
(Trip signal
from protection)
ACTIVE
Dead time
CLOSE
Reclaim time
TRDUE

(CB)
)LJXUH 6LJQDOVFKHPHLOOXVWUDWLQJWKHDXWRUHFORVHRSHUDWLRQZKHQLQLWLDWHGE\D
VWDUWVLJQDODRUDWULSVLJQDOERIWKHSURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQ

,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
4
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORIWKHDXWRUHFORVXUHIXQFWLRQ$5)XQF

ARINH Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for AR interruption and
inhibition
ARSYNC Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for AR synchrocheck
CBOPEN Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Circuit breaker open signal
CBCLOSE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Circuit breaker close signal
CINH Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for blocking of CB closing
ON Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Operation mode of AR function
RESET Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) AR reset signal
LOCKOUT Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) AR lock-out reset signal
_RES
SHOT_INC Digital signal (BOOL, neg. edge) Sequence control signal
5

OPEN Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for CB opening
CLOSE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for CB closing
AR1"
AR2"
AR3"
AR4"
CBFAIL Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "CB opening or closing
failed"
DEFTRIP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "Alarm for definite
tripping"
LOCKOUT Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "AR5Func is locked out"
TRDUE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "Reclaim time running"
TDDUE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "Discriminating time
running"
ACTIVE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "AR shot 1...5 in
progress"
SHOT_ALA Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal "Alarm after N shots"
RM
6
2.1 Configuration
2.1.1 General
The configuration includes a description of the internal and external operation of the
function block. The internal operation is defined by setting the built-in parameters
according to the needs of the application. The parameters can be set either via the
MIMIC or the serial communication. The external operation, i.e. the logical
connection to process data, can be configured in the Relay Configuration Tool
included in the CAP 505 Tool Box.
Because of the virtually boundless configuration, i.e. the possibilities of the Relay
Configuration Tool, there is no single way of building an auto-reclose system with the
AR5Func. The function block is equipped with all the essential functionality and can
be used as such by simply connecting the AR input(s) to a protection function(s) and
the OPEN and CLOSE outputs to the circuit breaker. The needs vary, however, and to
meet the different requirements, the operation of the AR5Func can be adjusted e.g.
with a few external components as presented in Figure 4 below.
25
&%B75,3
12&/2:
,/ 67$57
25 $5)XQF
,/ 75, 3 $5 23( 1
$5 &/26( &%B&/26(

$5 6+27
$5 6+27
12&+,*+
,/ 67$57 $5,1+ 6+27
,/ 75, 3 $56< 1& 6+27
&%23(1 6+27
&%&/26( $575,3
&,1+ $575,3
1( )/2:
,R 67$57 21 $575,3
%6 75, 3 5(6(7 $575,3
/2&.287B5(6 &%)$,/
6+27B,1& '()75,3 '(),1,7(B75,3
/2&.287
75'8(
$5B,1+,%,7 7''8(
&%B326,7,21 $&7,9( $5B,1B3 52*5(66
6+27B$/$50
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIDW\SLFDOFRQILJXUDWLRQIRUWKH$5)XQF
The examples presented below illustrate some of the special cases in configuration.
Most of the inputs and outputs in the figures are left floating for clarity reasons, as in
the example above. This does not mean that they should remain like that.
Figure 5, for example, illustrates the configuration of an application where the final
trip is carried out by the start of the protection function (AR2) but not until one auto-
7
reclose sequence i.e. one shot is completed by tripping of the protection function
(AR1). The operation of the start signal is blocked by an external AND gate until the
reclaim timer is started (TRDUE) by the first shot.
25
&%B23(1B6,*1$/
12&/2:
,/ 6 7$57
$5)XQF
,/ 75,3 $5 23(1
,/ &%)3 $5 &/26(
$1'
%6 (55 $5 6+27
%6 $5 6+27
75,** $5,1+ 6+27
*5283 $56<1& 6+27
'28%/( &%23(1 6+27

%65(* &%&/2 6( $575,3
5(6(7 &, 1+ $575,3
21 $575,3
5( 6(7 $575,3
/2 &.287B5(6 &%)$,/
6+27B,1& '()75,3
/2&.287
75'8(
7''8(
$&7,9(
6+27B$/$50
)LJXUH $QH[DPSOHRIWKHXVHRIH[WHUQDOFRPSRQHQWVLQFRQILJXUDWLRQ
2.1.3 AR shots and final trip function
The operation of the auto-recloser is illustrated in Figure 6. The shot pointer indicates
the shot to start when the auto-reclose function receives its AR initiation signal
through one of the initiation lines AR1...AR4. The boxes for each of the initiation
lines determine the action to be taken when an auto-reclose initiation signal is
received. Start means that an auto-reclose shot is initiated, while block means that
the auto-reclose shot is prevented when the initiation signal is active. A dash means
that no action will be taken.
Shot Pointer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5 Final Trip Lock-out

AR1
Start Block Yes
Initiation signals
Advance Shot Pointer
AR2
Start Start Yes
AR3
Shot Pointer = 1
Start Start No
AR4
Start Yes
Dead time Dead time Dead time Dead time Dead time
Circuit
td td td td Final trip breaker
closing
Reclaim time
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPIRUWKHDXWRUHFORVHIXQFWLRQ$5)XQF
The programmable start delay associated with the boxes in the grey area is activated if
the auto-reclose shot is initiated by the start signal of a protection stage (selected with
parameters ,QLWLDWLRQPRGH, ch8x/S1), see Figure 7. After the start delay, the circuit
breaker is opened by the auto-reclose function. When the auto-reclose shot is initiated
8
by the trip signal of the protection, a protection function trips the circuit breaker and
simultaneously initiates the AR shot.
The AR shots start from the tripping of the circuit breaker and simultaneously, the
dead time of the shot is started. When the dead time has elapsed, the circuit breaker is
closed and the reclaim and discrimination time starts running. A new initiation signal
received during the discrimination time will inhibit further AR shots and the shot
pointer will move to the final trip stage (6). An auto-reclose request received during
the reclaim time will increase the shot pointer and perform the function selected. If no
function is selected, the shot pointer moves right to the lock-out stage (7). At this
point, the AR function is locked-out during the reclaim time, after which the shot
pointer is reset and the function is prepared for a new AR sequence (lock-out reset
mode is automatic). If the lock-out reset is programmed to be manual, the only way to
cancel the lock-out of AR is to reset it locally over the MMI, via a digital input (or
any logic) or via serial communication.
AR1 oper. mode

(ch81/S2)
AR1 start delay

(ch81/S6)
Shot enabled
1
0
0
1 t
AR1
1 Shot in
2
1 & S
progress
R
0
Start
OPEN
AR2 1 End
of
1
pulse
AR3 shot
Initiation mode
AR4 (ch81/S1)
)LJXUH 3URJUDPPDEOHSDUDPHWHUVRI6KRW
2.1.4 Shot selection
There are two different methods of selecting the shots to be enabled and ready to react
on the initiation lines. The default method is that the shots with a number equal to or
greater than the current value (i.e. position) of the shot pointer are enabled. Which of
the enabled shots is to start depends only on the setting of the Start/Block/No action
of each shot. A shot with a smaller number takes precedence over shots with greater
numbers as well as over the final trip function. The other method is to enable exactly
one shot at a time, the one indicated by the shot pointer. Figure 8 illustrates the
operation of the shot pointer in shot selection, and the related parameters. No matter
which method is used, the final trip is enabled until the shot pointer reaches the
position 7 (lock-out).
9
1
ON 2 1 0
0
input signal AR operation
(ch80/S3)
Shots enable
(ch80/S9)
0 1
Shot Pointer
(ch80/V2)
1 7
Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable

Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5 Final Trip
)LJXUH 6KRWVHOHFWLRQORJLFUHODWHGSDUDPHWHUVDQGVKRWSRLQWHU
2.1.5 Initiation of auto-reclosing
The start of the AR shots is subject to the following conditions:
1 An AR shot of a value smaller than that indicated by the shot pointer cannot be
started.
2 An initiation signal (AR1...4) has to be active and the corresponding setting has to
be Start.
3 No initiation signal that inhibits (Block) the shot must be active.
4 Should a start delay have been set for the AR shot (see Auto-reclose shot initiated
by a start signal below), the initiation signal still has to be active when the start
delay elapses, to enable initiation of the AR shot.
Example (see Figure 6):
The initiation signals AR1 and AR2 are assumed to be activated when the position of
the shot pointer is 2 (AR shot 1 has just been made). AR shot 2 would be the next one
to start but it is blocked by AR1. The AR shots 3...5 have not been configured to be
initiated by either signal but the final trip function (6) has, and so the final tripping
operation will take place next.
2.1.6 Auto-reclose operation mode control
The operation mode of the AR5Func can be controlled in two ways:
1 When the setting parameter $5RSHUDWLRQV (ch80/S3) is 21LQSXW VHOHFW(2), the

operation mode of the function block is interpreted according to the ON input
signal: boolean FALSE at the input deactivates AR, while boolean TRUE is
interpreted as the operation mode being ON.
2 When the setting parameter $5RSHUDWLRQV (ch80/S3) is 21 (1, the default) or 2))
(0), the AR5Func will be correspondingly in use or not in use.
When the AR5Func is deactivated by the operation mode, the shot selection is
completely disabled (see Figure 8) and the shot pointer is set to the lock-out position
but not locked-out. The reclaim timer is armed to start (the TRDUE output is active)
10
as soon as the function block is put into use again. The operation mode does not affect
the LOCKOUT output or the locked-out condition.
2.1.7 Auto-reclose shot initiated by a trip signal
An AR shot initiated by a trip signal of the protection function will start immediately.
The circuit breaker is then opened by a protection function.
2.1.8 Auto-reclose shot initiated by a start signal
A start delay can be set to delay the start of an AR shot. Separate start delays can be
set for each box in the grey area in Figure 6.
When the AR shot is to be initiated by the start signal of the protection function, the
circuit breaker is opened by the auto-reclose function once the start delay time of the
concerned AR shot has elapsed. The zero value can also be selected for the start
delay.
What is important for the start delay is that the corresponding initiation signal remains
active throughout the time. Should the initiation signal reset, the time delay starts
from zero again. The use of another initiation signal for blocking the start of an AR
shot does not affect the time delay.
In the example in Figure 9, the input AR2 has a starting function and the input AR1 a
blocking function. In case a), a momentary activation of the input AR1 does not affect
the start of the AR shot nor the start delay. The input AR1 used for blocking in case b)
remains active for a longer time than the start delay of AR2. The AR shot is started 50
ms after the blocking is reset via AR1.
AR2
(Start)
Start delay time Start delay time
AR1
(Block)
t t
ACTIVE
t =50 ms delay after

a) b) block signal reset
)LJXUH ([DPSOHVRI$5LQLWLDWLRQ
2.1.9 Auto-reclose shot blocked by an initiation signal
An auto-reclose shot can be blocked by a high-set overcurrent stage. If the activation

of the initiation line AR1 is selected to block the shot 1, this will remain blocked as
long as the initiation line AR1 is activated. However, the shots 2, 3, 4, 5 or the final
trip function can be initiated. The block function does not increase the value (i.e.
position) of the shot pointer, so that if no shot or final trip can be initiated, the AR
11
function will wait until the block signal is reset or the protection function performs
definite tripping.
2.1.10 Circuit breaker position inputs
The position inputs CBOPEN and CBCLOSE should be connected to the circuit
breaker status signals. If these are not available, there are two alternatives. If the
inputs are configured as constant FALSE, the function block ignores the circuit
breaker position in all operations and the position is assumed to be correct, e.g.
open after an OPEN pulse of the specified width. The other alternative is to connect
the inputs to the trip signal of the protection function, as shown in Figure 10. The
operation is the same but in this case, the AR5Func can generate the DEFTRIP signal
and update the definite trip counters even if final tripping is not handled by the
function block.
&%B23(1B6,* 1$/
12& /2:
,/ 67$57
$5)XQF
,/ 75,3 $5 2 3( 1
$5 &/2 6(
$5 6+27
$5 6+27
$5,1+ 6+27
$56<1& 6+27
&%23(1 6+27
&%&/26( $575,3
&,1+ $575,3
21 $575,3
5(6(7 $575,3
/2&.2 87B5(6 &%)$,/
6+27B,1& '()75,3
/2&.2 87
75'8(
7''8(
$&7,9(
6+27B$/$50
)LJXUH &RQILJXUDWLRQRIFLUFXLWEUHDNHULQSXWVZKHQWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHUVWDWXVLV
QRWDYDLODEOHDQGILQDOWULSSLQJLVFDUULHGRXWE\SURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQV
The internal circuit breaker status (&%SRVLWLRQ, ch80/S3) is changed only when there
is no conflict between the position inputs CBOPEN and CBCLOSE. At power-on
reset, the status is set to undefined and it will remain so until no conflict exist
between the inputs. While the status is undefined, the AR5Func operates normally as
described above, always assuming that the state is correct. Figure 11 shows how the
circuit breaker status is decoded. It should be noted, however, that this is not a real-
life example of how the circuit breaker operates.
power-on
CBOPEN
CBCLOSE
Circuit breaker Undefined OPEN CLOSED OPEN

position
)LJXUH 'HFRGLQJRIWKHLQWHUQDOFLUFXLWEUHDNHUVWDWXV
12
2.1.11 Delaying the CLOSE output signal
After the dead time, the CLOSE output is not activated until certain conditions are
fulfilled. The conditions are:
the ARSYNC input must be TRUE if information about synchronism is required

(6\QFKURFKHFN, ch8x/S11) by the particular shot,
the CINH input must be FALSE,
the OPEN output must be inactive,
all the AR initiation inputs have been inactive for at least 50 ms,
the maintenance monitor (ch80/S27) must not be zero if configured ($WVWUHVVFQW
, ch80/S20) to inhibit closing and
the circuit breaker must not already be closed
If one of the above conditions is not fulfilled within two seconds, the auto-reclose
sequence will be locked out. Figure 12 shows an example where the CLOSE output is
delayed by the CINH input. When the AR input signal (AR1 in the example) is reset,
there must be a 50 ms time delay before reclosing is allowed. The 50 ms delay may
become significant with short dead times.
AR1
Start delay time t t =50 ms delay after
initiation signal reset
OPEN
ACTIVE
Dead time 2 s max
CINH
CLOSE
)LJXUH 'HOD\LQJWKH&/26(RXWSXWVLJQDO
2.1.12 Lock-out resetting
The LOCKOUT_RES input is edge-sensitive. The falling edge causes no operation,

whereas the rising edge may be used to release the function block from the lock-out
condition. The issue is explained thoroughly in paragraph Resetting further on in
this document.
2.2 Test mode
If required, the test functionality can be implemented with additional logic

components at each input and output.
The circuit breaker status inputs (CBOPEN and CBCLOSE) can be temporarily
disconnected by using the control setting &%SRVLQSXWV, ch80/V90, which is useful
especially in the regular maintenance of the relay. The control setting forces the
13
internal status of circuit breaker (&%SRVLWLRQ, ch80/S3) to the same undefined state
at which it was when the function block was initialized. By disconnecting the OPEN
and CLOSE output signals as well, the auto-reclose sequences can be carried out
while the circuit breaker remains closed all the time.
The normal operation of the circuit breaker status is resumed as soon as a change is
detected in either of the status inputs. Note that the control setting (&%SRVLQSXWV,
ch80/V90) should be used only if the status inputs are connected to reflect the current
status of the circuit breaker.
2.3 Resetting
The operation counters as well as the ARnTRIP (n =1...4) and LOCKOUT output
signals can be reset via the RESET input, or over the serial bus or the local MMI.
The operation indicators, latched output signals and operation counters can be reset as
follows:
Operation Latched Operation

indicators output counters
3)
signal
1)
1)
Parameter ch80/V13 X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
Resets the output signals and operation counters of the particular function block.
2)
3)
ARnTRIP (n = 1...4) and LOCKOUT
The operation counters subject to reset are:
counters of DEF.TRIP alarms initiated by each of the four AR inputs (1XP

'()75,3$U[, ch80/V2x),
counters of shots in the five most recent sequences (1XPVKRWV..., ch80/V3x),
counters of how many times each shot has been initiated by each of the four AR
inputs (1XPVKRWV..., ch8x/V1...), and
counters of how many times each shot initiated by each of the four AR inputs has
been successful (6XFFHVVIXO..., ch8x/V6...)
14
2.4 General
2.4.1 Discriminating time and reclaim time
When the circuit breaker is closed by the AR shots 1...4, a discriminating time td will
be started. Should one of the initiation signals AR1...AR4 be activated during the
discriminating time, the AR shot pointer moves to the position (6). Then further AR
shots are prevented and definite tripping will follow. This function is generally used
at inverse-time operation in order to limit the number of auto-reclosures when
reclosing further aggravates a fault situation. The discriminating time td can be set out
of use by selecting the value 0.
The reclaim time is always started or restarted at a circuit breaker close operation. A
new initiation signal during the reclaim time will perform the next shot if one has
been selected. When all shots have been executed, the auto-recloser is locked out.
When the reclaim time has elapsed and the automatic lock-out reset mode is selected,
the lock-out situation ends and the shot pointer returns to its nominal position (1).
2.4.2 Final trip function (6)
Definite tripping of the circuit breaker can be carried out by a trip signal of the
protection function or by the final trip function (6) of the auto-reclose function. The
final trip function (6) has to be initiated by the start of the protection function and it
allows final CB tripping to be carried out in a time shorter than the operate time of the
protection function. In this case, the fault is most probably of a permanent nature and
waiting for the protection function to trip might thus further aggravate the damage. In
the final trip function, the desired trip time (6) can be selected separately for each
initiation signal.
2.4.3 Lock-out
When the last shot or the final trip function (6) has been carried out, the shot pointer
indicates the position LOCK-OUT (7), which means that the auto-reclose function
does not respond to any initiation signal during the reclaim time. At this time, the
LOCKOUT output signal is high. In addition, the shot pointer indicates the position
(7) in the following situations:
the circuit breaker operation failed

the circuit breaker is manually closed during an auto-reclose sequence
the circuit breaker is closed under normal conditions by local or remote control
the input for inhibiting and interrupting auto-reclosing (ARINH) is active
the auto-reclose program has been set out of operation
start of the reclaim timer has been prevented for two minutes by an initiation
signal AR1...AR4
15
the auto-recloser is blocked by the frequent-operation counter

the circuit breaker is open at initialization of AR5Func, e.g. after connection of
auxiliary power to the system
Automatic Lock-out reset:
When the signal or situation that resulted in lock-out resets, the reclaim time (tr)
starts. When the set reclaim time has elapsed, the shot pointer returns to the
position (1), simultaneously clearing the LOCKOUT output.
Manual Lock-out reset:
The Lock-out is reset either locally via the MMI, a digital input or any logic
connected to the LOCKOUT_RES input, or via the serial communication.
Manually resetting the Lock-out immediately resets the LOCKOUT output. The
shot pointer is reset to 1 by the manual Lock-out reset or at end of the reclaim
time, whichever comes last.
The automatic or manual lock-out reset mode is selected by parameter /RFNRXWPRGH
(ch80/S5).
2.4.4 Interruption of auto-reclosing
An auto-reclose sequence (AR shots 1...5) can be interrupted or is interrupted in the

following cases:
the opening or closing of the circuit breaker fails (CBxxxx inputs do not change
status)
the CB status data changes from open to closed during the dead time of the
auto-reclosure e.g. due to manual closing of the circuit breaker
the ARINH input is activated
the circuit breaker is opened by local or remote control
the auto-reclose program is set out of use
the AR5Func is re-initialized for some reason, e.g. the auxiliary power supply to
the system is temporarily interrupted.
In all the cases mentioned above, specified information about the cause of interruption
can be obtained over the serial communication system.
2.4.5 Secured control of the circuit breaker
In addition to the circuit breaker control during auto-reclose sequences, the AR5Func
can be used to open and close the circuit breaker over the serial bus or the MMI. This
operation has two phases, selection and execution, and thus it is called secured
control. The selection phase is carried out by writing the value one to either the open
or the close operation parameter, both of which are function block specific. The
execution phase can be carried out by writing the value one either to the function
block specific parameter or to the common parameter on channel 900. The latter
16
allows multiple preselected operations to be accomplished simultaneously between

different function blocks.
The parameters for secured control are:
ch80/V6 Open operation selection of secured control. Value one (1) will select
open operation and cancel close operation if this was selected before.
The value zero (0) will deselect the open operation if selected.
ch80/V7 Close operation selection of secured control. Value one (1) will select
close operation and cancel open operation if this was selected before.
Value zero (0) will deselect the close operation if selected.
ch80/V11 Execution of secured control. Value one (1) will carry out the
operation selected by ch80/V6 or ch80/V7. Note that either the open or
close operation is assumed to be selected. If not, an event (ch80/E29)
is generated to indicate an error.
ch900/V251 Same as ch80/V11, but no event (as error message) will be generated
when no open or close operation has been selected. The command is
broadcasted to other function blocks as well.
ch80/V10 Deselection of secured control. Value one (1) will cancel the operation
possibly selected by ch80/V6 or ch80/V7. The operation selection
parameter, if one has been set, is reset to zero.
ch900/V252 Same as ch80/V10. The command is broadcasted to other function

blocks as well.
The parameters above are write-only parameters.
The secured open operation will abort an auto-reclose sequence running at the
moment of the execution phase. The event code ch80/E38 is generated to indicate an
abnormal termination of the sequence. Note that the circuit breaker can already be
open when the auto-reclose sequence is aborded - an active sequence is aborted
unconditionally at secured open - so this function is normally used as a remote reset
of an auto-reclose sequence.
The secured opening and closing are subject to the same rules as the opening and
closing by auto-reclose sequences. For example, a close operation is not carried out if
the circuit breaker is already closed or if the open output signal or an AR initiation
input signal is active at the moment of the execution phase. There are no dedicated
events (as error messages) for a secured control being ignored due to a conflict with
the rules.
2.4.6 Circuit breaker supervision logic
When the auto-reclose function operates the circuit breaker, it also checks that the
state of the CB changes properly during the set pulse width. To be able to check the
position data, the auto-reclose function block needs information about the position of
the circuit breaker (CBOPEN, CBCLOSE). When required, however, the auto-reclose
17
function is able to operate without this information. In such a case, the control
operations, i.e. whether they are successful or not, are not supervised.
For the operation of the circuit breaker, the width of the open pulse and the close
pulse is adjustable. These times are maximum times. If no CB position information is
available, the control impulses are in accordance with the setting. The open and close
signals cannot be active at the same time. If so, the open signal interrupts the close
signal. When CB position information is available, the impulse is interrupted once the
CB position has changed. Should the circuit breaker position remain unchanged
during the control operation, a circuit-breaker fail alarm will be issued (CBFAIL).
In addition, the following conditions are checked before the circuit breaker is closed:
the circuit breaker is open

the AR initiation signals AR1...4 are not active
the close inhibit input CINH is not active
if the circuit breaker maintenance monitor is programmed to inhibit closing, the
value of the monitor must be greater than zero
if the synchrocheck function is in use, the input ARSYNC has to be active
Once the conditions mentioned above are fulfilled, the circuit breaker is closed. The
maximum waiting time for the conditions to be fulfilled is 2 seconds. Should one or
several conditions prevent closing, an alarm signal CBFAIL will be given in 2
seconds.
2.4.7 Aids to circuit breaker maintenance
The purpose of the maintenance monitor (also called stress monitor) is to provide an
alarm signal or, possibly, to prevent the closing of the circuit breaker after a certain
number of CB operations. The operation of the maintenance monitor is based on
counting the number of times the circuit breaker has opened. As soon as the auto-
reclose function block notices a circuit breaker trip, the value of the maintenance
monitor decreases.
Different load on the circuit breaker influences the maintenance monitor in a different
way. For example, the overcurrent may have the weighting factor 20 and the manual
opening the weighting factor 1, which means that respectively, the monitor value is
decreased by 20 or 1. The AR5Func block has five different weighting factors: for
openings initiated by AR1, by AR2, by AR3, by AR4 and by manual control. The
weighting factors can be set in the range 0...50.
When the maintenance monitor reaches the value zero, a permanent CBFAIL alarm
signal is issued. The maintenance monitor can be configured so($WVWUHVVFQW,
ch80/S20) that the value zero prevents CB closing and auto-reclose operations. The
alarm is reset by giving the maintenance monitor a new value.
18
In addition, a pre-alarm level can be set for the maintenance monitor. When the
monitor reaches this level or falls below it, a pulse-shaped CBFAIL alarm signal is
given when the CB is opened. The pre-alarm function can be set out of use by
choosing the setting value zero (0) for it.
The maintenance monitor can be set out of use by setting all weighting factors to zero.
2.4.8 Frequent-operation counter
The frequent-operation counter is intended to block the auto-recloser in cases when

the fault causes repetitive auto-reclose sequences during a long period of time, e.g. if
a tree causes a short circuit and thus repeated auto-reclose shots with a few minutes
interval during a stormy night. This type of faults can easily damage the circuit
breaker if the auto-recloser is not locked out by the frequent-operation counter.
The frequent-operation counter can be described as a water tank with a small

adjustable leakage. Each trip adds a fixed amount of water into the tank. When the
selected water level is reached, the frequent-operation counter will cause the lockout
of the auto-reclose unit and prevent the shot from starting. The OPEN output is
activated (if configured to do so) along with the LOCKOUT output signal. The set
value of the leakage is in the range 1 to 50 trips per half an hour and the water level
limit ()UHTRSOLPLW, ch80/S18) can be set in the range of 1 to 100 trips.
When monitoring the water level i.e. the current value of the frequent-operation
counter parameter ()UHTXHQWRSFQW, ch80/S17), note that the parameter will be
decremented (by one) at intervals of 30 (minutes) divided by the leakage value ()UHT
RSOHDN, ch80/S19). No decrementing occurs when the zero value is reached. The
frequent-operation counter can be set out of use by setting the )UHTRSOLPLW to zero.
2.4.9 ACTIVE
This output signal indicates that the AR function is active. The signal goes up when a
shot (1...5) and its dead time is started. The signal is reset when the shot is completed
or aborted, i.e.:
the dead time of a shot has elapsed and the close signal is activated,
the logic is locked out,
a shot has been ready for two seconds without permission to activate the close
signal, or
either secured open or close control is selected (ch80/V6:1 or ch80/V7:1) and
executed (ch80/V11:1).
The ACTIVE output signal is produced by internally OR'ing the five AR shot Q in
progress output signals.
19
2.4.10 SHOT_ALARM
The shot alarm output is activated after the selected number of shots has been
performed. The signal is often used for selection of second settings of protection
function(s). If the programmed alarm limit (6KRWDODUPOHYHO, ch80/S6) matches with
the number of shots in sequence, the signal goes up when a shot (1...5) and its dead
time is started. The signal is reset
after elapse of the reclaim time,

after rising edge at the RESET input, or
after detected TRUE in any of the 5HVHWUHJLVWHUV or 5HVHWRXWSXWV parameters
(ch1/V12, ch1/V13 or ch80/V13).
2.4.11 CBFAIL alarm
The CBFAIL alarm is a 0.2 s pulse that is obtained when a CB operation fails or the
maintenance monitor reaches or falls below the set pre-alarm level, or when an auto-
reclose sequence in progress is interrupted by unsuccessful circuit breaker operation.
The CBFAIL alarm is permanently indicating that the value of the maintenance
monitor is zero.
2.4.12 Synchrocheck input ARSYNC
The ARSYNC input is used, for example, to delay or avoid the connection of
transmission lines fed from different directions when the phase angle difference of the
network sections is too large. Should there be no information about synchronism
within 2 seconds after the dead time has elapsed, the auto-reclose sequence will be
locked out and a CBFAIL alarm will be issued. When the ARSYNC input is activated,
the synchronism condition is assumed to be fulfilled and reclosing is allowed.
The setting parameters 6\QFKURFKHFN (e.g. ch81/S11) can be used to specify whether
information about synchronism is required for the individual AR shots. If the dead
time is short, the circuit breaker can be reclosed without synchronism being lost.
2.4.13 Inhibition of circuit breaker closing CINH
Activation of the CINH input prevents CB closing in situations where the CB spring
is not charged or the gas pressure is below the permitted level. When the CINH input
is activated, CB closing is inhibited. If the CINH input is not reset within two seconds
after the dead time has elapsed, the auto-reclose sequence will be locked out and a
CBFAIL alarm will be issued.
20
2.4.14 AR inhibition and interruption input ARINH
When the ARINH input is activated, any auto-reclose operation in progress will be
locked out. When the ARINH signal disappears, the reclaim time tr starts and an auto-
reclose sequence cannot be carried out until this time has elapsed.
2.4.15 Recording of auto-reclose operations
The auto-reclose function records all shots made as well as successful auto-reclosures.
Registers containing information about the number of successful auto-reclosures can
be accessed over the serial communication and over the event reporting system. The
auto-reclose function decides whether the auto-reclosure (the last AR shot) was
successful or not after the reclaim time tr has elapsed.
Registers containing information about the number of all shots made can be accessed
via the MMI or over the serial communication.
2.4.16 Resetting
The RESET input of the AR function is to be used for resetting the AR function
registers. The registers can also be reset over the serial bus or MMI.
2.4.17 Resetting the indications
Sometimes it may be useful to get all the indications on the MMI reset after an auto-
reclosure. This can be done with the INDRESET function block. Figure 13 shows an
example of the configuration for resetting the indications. The close pulse given by
the auto-reclose function will reset all indications on the MMI. The advantage is that
the MMI always shows the latest trip-indication.
)LJXUH 5HVHWWLQJWKHLQGLFDWLRQVDIWHUDFORVHSXOVHLVJLYHQE\WKH$5IXQFWLRQ
21
2.4.18 Sequence control
The SHOT_INC input is used to synchronize the shot pointer of the AR5Func with
the shot pointer of the downstream auto-recloser in the same network. An external
TON type timer circuit might be required for each AR input to reject e.g. inrush
currect peaks which do not cause auto-reclosing downstream. The timer circuit is
connected between the start signal of the protection function and the SHOT_INC
input. (Because the AR input can be connected either to the start or the trip signal of
the protection function, the timer circuit is not built-in in the AR5Func.) Figure 14
shows an example of the configuration for sequence control when the shots are
initiated by the tripping of the protection function. The delays must be set to a slightly
shorter operate time than the operate time of the downstream relay.
25
&%B23(1B6,* 1$/
12& /2:
,/ 67$57
$5)XQF
,/ 75,3 $5 2 3( 1
$5 &/2 6(
$5 6+27
$5 6+27
1( )/2:
,R 67$57 $5,1+ 6+27
%6 75,3 $56<1& 6+27
&%23(1 6+27
&%&/26( $575,3
&,1+ $575,3
721
,1 4 21 $575,3
37 (7 5(6(7 $575,3
/2&.2 87B5(6 &%)$,/
25
6+27B,1& '()75,3
721
,1 4 /2&.2 87
37 (7 75'8(
7''8(
$&7,9(
6+27B$/$50
)LJXUH &RQQHFWLQJWKHVHTXHQFHFRQWUROWLPHUVZKHQVKRWVDUHVWDUWHGE\WKH
WULSSLQJRIWKHSURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQ
When the relay downstream performs a trip, the start signal at the upstream relay
passes through the timer and the shot pointer is incremented at the falling edge if no
auto-reclose shot is started. The shot pointer is always incremented by one. If the
signal ACTIVE is activated, it means that the upstream relay has tripped and its own
auto-reclose shot has been started. Figure 15 is an example of the operation where the
shot pointer is incremented by sequence control twice before the start delay time is
exceeded and a shot is started.
Start of
protection
Start delay time Start delay time Start delay time
SHOT_INC
t t t
TRDUE
t =External TON
delay time
ACTIVE
Shot Pointer 1 2 3
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKHVHTXHQFHFRQWUROLQSXW6+27B,1&
22
2.4.19 Shot alarm
When the number of shots in sequence reach the preset limit (6KRWDODUPOHYHO,
ch80/S6), the SHOT_ALARM output is activated at the beginning of the dead time
along with the ACTIVE output. The SHOT_ALARM output is cleared at the end of
the reclaim time and also when outputs are reset by the RESET input or by one of the
reset parameters.
23
3.1 General
Usually each function block has a specific channel number for serial
communication parameters and events. However, the AR5Func function is divided
on channels 80 to 86 as follows:
Channel Parameters and events
80 General parameters and events;
input and output data
81 Shot 1
82 Shot 2
83 Shot 3
84 Shot 4
85 Shot 5
86 Final trip
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
24
3.2 Setting values
3.2.1.1 General settings

dir.
Reclaim time tr S1 0.20...300.00 s 10.00 R/W Reclaim time of AR-function
1)
AR operations S3 0...2 - 0 R/W Operation mode of AR-function
AR oper. status S4 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M AR-function currently in use or not

3)
Lock-out mode S5 0 or 1 - 0 R/W Lock-out reset mode; automatic, manual
Shot alarm level S6 0...4 - 0 R/W Number of shots required in AR

sequence to activate the SHOT_ALARM
output
Man. close inh. S7 0...2 4) - 0 R/W Function at manual CB closing
Shots enabled S9 0 or 1 5) - 0 R/W Enable all shots or only the next one
Frequent op. cnt S17 0...100 - 0 R/W Frequent Operation Counter: current
value in shots
Freq. op. limit S18 0...100 6) - 0 R/W Lock-out limit of the Frequent Operation
Counter in shots
Freq. op. leak S19 1...50 - 1 R/W Leakage of the Frequent Operation
Counter in shots per half an hour
At stress cnt 0 S20 0 or 1 7) - 0 R/W Operation of CB maintenance monitor

when 0
Manual stress S21 0...50 - 0 R/W Stress factor, when CB opened

manually
Stress pre-alarm S26 0...50 - 0 R/W Pre-alarm level of CB maintenance

monitor
Stress counter S27 0...999 - 999 R/W Value of CB maintenance monitor
Close pulse S28 0.10...7.00 s 0.20 R/W Width of closing pulse
Open pulse S29 0.10...7.00 s 0.20 R/W Width of opening pulse

1)
AR operations 0 = OFF; 1 = ON; 2 = Selected by the ON input
2)
AR oper. status 0 = OFF; 1 = ON
3)
Lock-out mode 0 = Automatic; 1 = Manual
4)
Man. close inh. 0 = Shots / Final Trip inhibited; 1 = Shots inhibited; 2 = Closing does not affect
5)
Shots enabled 0 = Enable all shots >= Shot Pointer; 1 = Enable the next shot (0Shot Pointer)
only
6)
Freq. op. limit 0 = Frequent Operation Counter disabled; 1...100 = Number of shots
7)
At stress cnt 0 0 = Alarm only; 1 = Inhibit closing / auto-reclosing
25
3.2.1.2 Settings for shots 15
Parameter Code Values Unit Default Data Explanation4)

direction
Initiation mode S1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/W Shot x initiation mode
2)
AR2 oper. mode S3 0...2 - 0 R/M AR2 operation mode for shot x
2)
AR4 oper. mode S5 0...2 - 0 R/W AR4 operation mode for shot x
Dead time S10 0.20...300.00 s 5.00 R/W Dead time for AR shot x
3)
Synchrocheck S11 0 or 1 - 0 R/W Use of synchrocheck for AR shot x
Discr. time td S12 0...30.00 s 0 R/W Discriminating time for AR shot x

1)
Initiation mode 0 = Trip; 1 = Start
2)
AR_ oper. mode 0 = No operation; 1 = AR shot initiated; 2 = Initiation of AR shot blocked
3)
Synchrocheck 0 = Not in use; 1 = ARSYNC in use
4)
Character x in the explanation refers to the shot number (1,2,3,4 or 5). The above parameters can
be set separately for each shot.
3.2.1.3 Final trip settings

direction
1)
AR3 init mode S4 0 or 1 - 0 R/M AR3 initiation mode for final trip
1)
AR_ init mode 0 = No operation; 1 = Final Trip initiated
26
3.2.2.1 General control settings

direction
AR in progress V1 0...5 1) - 0 R/M AR5Func status
Shot Pointer V2 1...7 - 1 R/M Current value of Shot Pointer
CB position V3 0...2 2) - 0 R/M Circuit Breaker status as seen

by AR5Func
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - 0 W Parameter for register reset

Note: Same effect as RESET
input signal of AR5Func
1)
AR in progress 0 = AR not in progress; 1 = AR shot 1 in progress; 2 = AR shot 2 in progress;
3 = AR shot 3 in progress; 4 = AR shot 4 in progress; 5 = AR shot 5 in
progress
2)
CB position 0 = Unknown; 1 = Closed; 2 = Open
27
3.2.2.2 Control settings for shots 15

direction



1)
The event mask parameters can be set separately for each shot (15)
3.2.2.3 Final trip control settings

direction



28
3.3.1 Input data

direction
1)

1)
In ARINH I5 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Input signal ARINH

1)
In ARSYNC I6 0 or 1 0 R/M Input signal ARSYNC
In CBOPEN I7 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Input signal CBOPEN

1)
In CBCLOSE I8 0 or 1 0 R/M Input signal CBCLOSE
In CINH I9 0 or 1 1) 1 R/M Input signal CINH

1)
In ON I10 0 or 1 0 R/M Input signal ON
In RESET I11 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Input signal RESET

1)
In LOCKOUT_RES I12 0 or 1 0 R/M Input signal LOCKOUT_RES
In SHOT_INC I13 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Input signal SHOT_INC

1)
Input 0 = Not active; 1 = active
29
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Out OPEN O1 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of OPEN signal
Out CLOSE O2 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of CLOSE signal

1)

1)

1)

AR1TRIP

AR2TRIP

AR3TRIP

AR4TRIP
Out CBFAIL O12 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of CBFAIL signal

1)
Out DEFTRIP O13 0 or 1 0 R/M Status of DEFTRIP signal
Out LOCKOUT O14 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of LOCKOUT signal

1)
Out TRDUE O15 0 or 1 0 R/M Status of TRDUE signal
Out TDDUE O16 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of TDDUE signal

1)
Out ACTIVE O17 0 or 1 0 R/M Status of ACTIVE signal
Out SHOT_ALARM O18 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of SHOT_ALARM signal

1)
Output 0 = Not active; 1 = active
30
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General recorded data

direction
initiated by AR1

initiated by AR2
Num DEF.TRIP AR3 V24 0...255 - 0 R/M Number of DEF.TRIP alarms

initiated by AR3

initiated by AR4
Num shots last V31 0...11 1) - 0 R/W Shots / last AR sequence

1)
Num shots 2nd V32 0...11 - 0 R/W Shots / second last AR seq.
Num shots 3rd V33 0...11 1) - 0 R/W Shots / third last AR seq.
1)
Num shots 4th V34 0...11 - 0 R/W Shots / fourth last AR seq.
Num shots 5th V35 0...11 1) - 0 R/W Shots / fifth last AR seq.
1)
Num shots 0 = Dummy data; 1...5 = Shot count; 6...11 = Shot count (+6) with Def Trip
3.3.3.2 Recorded data for shots 15

direction
Num shots AR3 V4 0...255 - 0 R/M Number of shots initiated by AR3

by AR1

by AR2

by AR3

by AR4
1)
The recorded data is available separately for each shot (15)
31
3.3.4 Events
3.3.4.1 General events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Auto-reclosing seq. Ended
E1 2 1 Auto-reclosing seq. Started
E6 64 1 DEF.TRIP alarm Reset
E7 128 1 DEF.TRIP alarm Activated
E12 4096 0 AR seq. successful -
E17 131072 0 Forced shot increment by the signal SHOT_INC -
E18 262144 1 Change in CB position: 1 -> 0 Open
E19 524288 1 Change in CB position: 0 -> 1 (closed) Close
E20 1048576 1 Manual/remote CB opening recognized Open
E21 2097152 1 Manual/remote CB closing recognized Close
E22 4194304 1 OPEN output Reset
E23 8388608 1 OPEN output Activated
E24 16777216 0 CLOSE output Reset
E25 33554432 0 CLOSE output activated Activated
E26 67108864 1 CB opening failed via auto-recloser -
E27 134217728 1 CB closing failed via auto-recloser -
E28 268435456 1 CB closing inhibited -
E29 536870912 1 Attempt to execute without open/close selection -
E30 1073741824 1 Maintenance monitor alarm reset Reset
32

coefficient mask
E31 2147483648 1 Alarm from maintenance monitor Activated
E32 1 1 Initiation signal AR1...4 activated >2 min Reset
E33 2 1 Initiation signal AR1...4 activated >2 min Activated
E34 4 1 AR not in use -
E35 8 1 AR in use -
E36 16 1 AR interrupted by the signal ARINH -
E37 32 1 AR interrupted by CB close during the seq. -
E38 64 1 AR interrupted by CB open during the seq. -
E39 128 0 AR interrupted by Frequent Operation Counter -
E40 256 0 Discriminating time td Elapsed
E41 512 0 Discriminating time td Started
E42 1024 0 Reclaim time tr Elapsed
E43 2048 0 Reclaim time tr Started or restarted
E44 4096 0 LOCKOUT Reset
E45 8192 0 LOCKOUT Activated
33
3.3.4.2 Events for shots 15
Code Weighting Default Event reason1) Event state

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 Auto-reclose shot x Concluded
E1 2 1 Auto-reclose shot x In progress
E6 64 0 AR shot x successful -
1)
Character x in the event reason refers to the shot number (1,2,3,4 or 5). The above events are
generated separately for each shot.
3.3.4.3 Final trip events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Final trip -
34
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies 1% of setting value or 30 ms


A -
B No changes affecting the functionality of AR5Func
35
1MRS752357-MUM CMBWEAR_
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C/1.2.2002
Circuit-Breaker Electric Wear
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Operation criteria................................................................................. 5
2.3 Alarm acknowledgement ..................................................................... 6
2.4 Resetting............................................................................................. 6
3. Parameters and Events ............................................................................ 7

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 7
3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 8
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 8
3.2.2 Control settings .......................................................................... 8
3.3 Measurement values ......................................................................... 10
3.3.1 Output data .............................................................................. 10
3.3.2 Events ...................................................................................... 10
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 11

CMBWEAR_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Calculation of the accumulated electric wear/breaker wear of the circuit breaker.

Alarm of the exceeding breaker wear.
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the circuit-breaker wear function blocks
CMBWEAR1 and CMBWEAR2 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The function blocks are identical in operation.
Calculating the electrical wear of the circuit breaker is based on the current in each
phase before opening. The breaker wear is calculated for each phase separately and
when the accumulated breaker wear has reached the setting value, the function block
will issue an alarm signal.
The function block uses a 16-point setting table for the current and the corresponding
breaker wear value. The calculation is based on linear interpolation using the table.
Typically, the breaker wear increases in proportion to the square of the current.
However, the interpolation table solution provides a close match and facilitates the
configuration.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI&0%:($5DQG&0%:($5
2
Substation Automation CMBWEAR_

OPEN Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) CB open command
BINOPEN Digital signal (BOOL, edge) CB open status signal
BINCLOSE Digital signal (BOOL, edge) CB close status signal
IL1 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring the phase
current IL1
current IL2
current IL3
ACK Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Alarm acknowledgement signal

ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Breaker wear alarm
3
2.1 Configuration
The breaker wear configuration table can be programmed via the Relay Configuration
Tool dialogue box (settings of the configured resource) presented in Figure 2 below.
)LJXUH %UHDNHUZHDUFRQILJXUDWLRQWDEOHLQWKHGLDORJXHER[RIWKH5HOD\
&RQILJXUDWLRQ7RRO
4
2.2 Operation criteria
When the circuit breaker is in closed state, the rising edge of the OPEN pulse will
trigger the analyzation stage which again will end when the circuit breaker enters
from the undefined state to the open state (BINOPEN==TRUE &
BINCLOSE==FALSE). If the breaker does not reach open state within a 100 second
timeout period, the analyzation stage will terminate without accumulating the breaker
wear.
The analyzation stage finds the maximum current peak value in each phase and uses
the obtained values as a reference while interpolating the breaker wear for each phase
by means of the 16-point setting table. Note that before the interpolation, the
maximum values are scaled to RMS by the factor 1/ 2 .
Example of the breaker wear table:
Current in Breaker wear

kA (RMS)
0 0.0
4 4.0
8 33.0
12 92.0
16 164.0
20 256.0
24 369.0
28 502.0
32 655.0
36 829.0
40 1024.0
44 1239.0
48 1475.0
52 1731.0
56 2007.0
60 2304.0
The breaker wear values of each phase are added to the accumulated breaker wear
variables, and when the accumulated breaker wear has reached the setting value in
one or several phases, the alarm is given. When the breaker breaks the rated currents,
the electrical counting (breaker wear value) will be approximately the same as the
mechanical counting, i.e. every breaking operation increases the wear value by 1.
Thus, the calculation stage always adds 1 to the actual breaker wear parameter
declared in the table.
5
The calculation stage uses extrapolation if needed. If the current values in the breaker
wear table do not start from zero, the function block assumes that the breaker wear
parameter of the current 0 kA is zero. If the current value exceeds the maximum
current specified in the table, the function block will extrapolate according to the
largest and second largest current values (the calculation expects the breaker wear
parameter to increase linearly).
Because of the variation of breakers on the market, the breaker wear vs. current values
can be programmed in the Relay Configuration Tool.
If an alarm condition is detected, the function block issues detailed alarm indications
both locally on the MMI and remotely via serial communication.
2.3 Alarm acknowledgement
The alarm signal acknowledgement deactivates the active alarm signal of the function
block. The alarm signal can be acknowledged by the rising edge of the ACK signal, or
with a local menu command or a remote command. Separate events are not generated
by the acknowledgement because it deactivates the ALARM signal and an event is
generated by the deactivation.
If the accumulated breaker wear has exceeded the setting and an alarm has been
generated, there are two ways to proceed. After the alarm acknowledgement, either
the setting limit can be raised to a higher value or the accumulated value can be
decreased to a smaller value or to zero. In any case, if the accumulated value is still
higher than the setting value and the previous alarm has been acknowledged, the next
breaker open command will issue a new alarm.
2.4 Resetting
The operation indications of the function block can be reset via the general parameter
F001V011 or the push-button C on the front panel of the MMI, which both affect all
function blocks.
6
3.1 General
Each function block has a specific channel number for serial communication
parameters and events. The channel for CMBWEAR1 is 187 and that for
CMBWEAR2 188.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
7
3.2 Setting values

direction
Alarm limit S1 1...10000.00 - 5000 R/W Breaker wear alarm limit for
accumulated breaker wear

direction
Wear L1 V1 0.00...10000.00 - 0 R/W Accumulated breaker wear at pole 1
Alarm ack V99 1=Acknowledge - 0 W Alarm acknowledgement
Event mask 1 V101 0...3 - 2 R/W Event mask 1 for event transmission
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
Current 1/16 V13 0...1000.00 kA 0 R/W Current value in breaker wear table
(1/16)
Wear 1/16 V14 0...10000.00 - 0 R/W Wear value in breaker wear table
(1/16)
(2/16)
Table continued on the next page
8

direction
(2/16)
(3/16)
(3/16)
(4/16)
(4/16)
(5/16)
(5/16)
(6/16)
(6/16)
Current 7/16 V25 0...1000.00 kA 24 R/W Current value in breakerwear table

(7/16)
(7/16)
(8/16)
(8/16)
(9/16)
(9/16)
(10/16)
(10/16)
(11/16)
(11/16)
(12/16)
Wear 12/16 V36 0...10000.00 1239 R/W Wear value in breaker wear table
(12/16)
9

direction
Current 13/16 V37 0...1000.00 48 R/W Current value in breaker wear table
(13/16)
(13/16)
(14/16)
(14/16)
(15/16)
(15/16)
(16/16)
(16/16)
3.3.1 Output data
Parameter Code Values Unit Default Datadirection Explanation

Alarm state O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Alarm state
1)
Alarm state 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active
3.3.2 Events
Code Weighting Default mask Event reason Event state

coefficient
E0 1 0 Breaker 1 or 2 electric wear alarm Reset
E1 2 1 Breaker 1 or 2 electric wear alarm Activated
10
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies Current measuring accuracy:
Current measurement momentary values 2.5 % of current *In
The user-defined breaker wear interpolation table has a great

effect on how accurately the function block actually describes the
breaker ageing.


A -
B Timeout added to the analyzation stage (see section Operation criteria)
11
1MRS100181 RE_5_ _
Issued: 10/1997
Version: D
Supervision Function of the
Energizing Current Input Circuit
(CMCU3)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 3
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 3
2.4 Test mode ........................................................................................... 4
2.5 Registers............................................................................................. 4
2.6 Resetting............................................................................................. 5
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 6

3.2 Control settings ................................................................................... 7
3.3 Measurement values ........................................................................... 7
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................... 7
3.3.2 Output data ................................................................................ 7
3.3.3 Recorded data 1......................................................................... 8
3.3.4 Recorded data 2......................................................................... 8
3.3.5 Recorded data 3......................................................................... 8
3.3.6 Events ........................................................................................ 8
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 9

RE_5_ _ CMCU3 ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Application
This document specifies the function of the phase current supervision function block
CMCU3 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI&0&8

IL1 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring phase current IL1

ALARM Digital signal Alarm signal output
(BOOL, active high)
ERR Digital signal Signal for indicating a configuration
(BOOL, active high) error
2
ABB Automation CMCU3 RE_5_ _
2.1 Configuration
The function block measures phase currents by means of conventional current

transformers or Rogowski coils. The measuring devices and signal types for analogue
channels are selected and configured in a special dialogue box of the Relay
Configuration Tool.
When the analogue channels have been selected and configured in the dialogue box,
the inputs and outputs of the function block can be configured on a graphical
worksheet of the configuration tool. The phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 are connected
to the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs of the function block and, in the same
way, the digital outputs of the function block are connected to the output signals.
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block operates on the numerically calculated fundamental frequency

component of the phase currents.
The supervision function block CMCU3 detects interruptions in energizing circuits.

The user can select three-phase or two-phase operation with the parameter Current
select. The function block can also be set out of use by means of the parameter
Operation mode.
The function block supervises the energizing circuits by comparing the measured
phase currents. If one or two phase currents exceed the setting High limit, while the
measured phase current in the remaining one or two phases is below the setting Low
limit, the output ALARM is activated after the settable alarm delay.
The function block is disabled if all input currents are below the setting Low limit.
The ALARM output will reset automatically when the fault disappears.
3
)LJXUH %DVLFEORFNGLDJUDPRIWKH&0&8IXQFWLRQEORFN
2.4 Test mode
The user can activate the ALARM output of the function block with the control
parameter Test ALARM either locally via the MMI or externally via the serial
communication.
2.5 Registers
The function block records the phase current values required for later fault analysis at
the moment of the supervision alarm, i.e. when the set operate time delay (parameter
Alarm delay) has elapsed.
4
2.6 Resetting
The user does not need to acknowledge the ALARM output signal but it resets
automatically when the fault disappears.
The operation indicators and recorded data can be reset as follows:
Operation Recorded
indicators data
1)
Parameter F181V013 X
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
1)
Resets the recorded data of the CMCU3 function block.
2)
5
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CMCU3 is 181.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
6
3.2 Control settings

direction
Operation mode V1 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Switching between the modes "In use"
and "Not in use"
Current select. V2 1...4 2) - 1 R/W Selection of phase currents to be

supervised
High limit V3 10...20 % In 12 R/W High limit for phase current supervision
Low limit V4 2...8 % In 6 R/W Low limit for phase current supervision
Alarm delay V5 3...60 s 15 R/W Operate time delay
Test ALARM V31 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/W Testing of alarm output
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
1)
Operation mode 0 = In use; 1 = Not in use
2)
Current selection 1 = L1 & L2 & L3; 2 = L1 & L2; 3 = L1 & L3; 4 = L2 & L3
3)
Test alarm 0 = Do not activate; 1 = Activate
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Current IL1 I1 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Phase current IL1
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output ALARM O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of alarm signal
1)
Alarm activation 0 = Not active; 1 = Active
7
3.3.3 Recorded data 1

direction
Date V201 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Recording date
Time V202 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Recording time
Current IL1 V203 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Value of current IL1

direction

direction
3.3.6 Events

coefficient
E0 1 1 Current input circuit alarm Off
E1 2 1 Current input circuit alarm On
8
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies Depends on the frequency of the current measured:
f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2.5 % of set value or 0.01 x In


B -
C Control settings: Operate mode Operation mode
9
1MRS752358-MUM CMCU3
Issued: 10/1997
Version: E/1.2.2002
Supervision Function of the
Energizing Current Input Circuit
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 3
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 3
2.4 Test mode ........................................................................................... 4
2.5 Registers............................................................................................. 4
2.6 Resetting............................................................................................. 5
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 6

3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................... 7
3.3.2 Output data ................................................................................ 7
3.3.3 Recorded data 1......................................................................... 8
3.3.4 Recorded data 2......................................................................... 8
3.3.5 Recorded data 3......................................................................... 8
3.3.6 Events ........................................................................................ 8
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 9

CMCU3 Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Application
This document specifies the function of the phase current supervision function block
CMCU3 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI&0&8


ALARM Digital signal Alarm signal output
(BOOL, active high)
ERR Digital signal Signal for indicating a configuration
(BOOL, active high) error
2
Substation Automation CMCU3
2.1 Configuration

transformers or Rogowski coils. The measuring devices and signal types for analogue
Configuration Tool.
worksheet of the configuration tool. The phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 are connected
to the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs of the function block and, in the same
2.2 Measuring mode

component of the phase currents.
The supervision function block CMCU3 detects interruptions in energizing circuits.

The user can select three-phase or two-phase operation with the parameter Current
Operation mode.
phase currents. If one or two phase currents exceed the setting High limit, while the
measured phase current in the remaining one or two phases is below the setting Low
limit, the output ALARM is activated after the settable alarm delay.
The function block is disabled if all input currents are below the setting Low limit.
The ALARM output will reset automatically when the fault disappears.
3
)LJXUH %DVLFEORFNGLDJUDPRIWKH&0&8IXQFWLRQEORFN
2.4 Test mode
communication.
2.5 Registers
The function block records the phase current values required for later fault analysis at
the moment of the supervision alarm, i.e. when the set operate time delay (parameter
4
2.6 Resetting
Operation Recorded
indicators data
1)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
1)
Resets the recorded data of the CMCU3 function block.
2)
5
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CMCU3 is 181.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
6

direction
Operation mode V1 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Switching between the modes "In use"
and "Not in use"
Current select. V2 1...4 2) - 1 R/W Selection of phase currents to be

supervised
High limit V3 10...20 % In 12 R/W High limit for phase current supervision
Low limit V4 2...8 % In 6 R/W Low limit for phase current supervision
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = In use
2)
Current selection 1 = L1 & L2 & L3; 2 = L1 & L2; 3 = L1 & L3; 4 = L2 & L3
3)
Test alarm 0 = Do not activate; 1 = Activate
3.3.1 Input data

direction
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
7

direction

direction

direction
3.3.6 Events

coefficient
E0 1 1 Current input circuit alarm Off
E1 2 1 Current input circuit alarm On
8
4. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2.5 % of set value or 0.01 x In


B -
C Control settings: Operate mode Operation mode
9
1MRS752359-MUM CMGAS1
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C/1.2.2002
Gas Pressure Monitoring
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.3 Resetting............................................................................................. 3

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 4
3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 5
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 5
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................... 5
3.3.2 Output data ................................................................................ 5
3.3.3 Events ........................................................................................ 6
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 7

CMGAS1 Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Monitors the gas pressure via a digital input

Issues an alarm signal if the gas pressure is invalid
The alarm signal cannot be acknowledged until the indication of gas pressure is
valid
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the gas pressure monitoring function block
CMGAS1 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
A digital input can be used for monitoring the gas pressure. When the gas pressure
drops below the acceptable limit, the digital signal becomes active (active low) and
triggers the alarm signal. The alarm signal cannot be acknowledged before the breaker
poles have been refilled to the correct pressure.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI&0*$6

GAS Digital signal (BOOL, active low) Gas pressure indication

ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Low gas pressure alarm
2
Substation Automation CMGAS1
The GAS signal indicates the gas pressure: an active signal (FALSE) indicates a fault
condition, whereas an inactive signal (TRUE) indicates the correct gas pressure. The
function block will activate the ALARM signal when the specific alarm delay has
elapsed after the falling edge of the GAS signal. In order to activate the ALARM
signal, the gas pressure should remain FALSE throughout the alarm delay.
The alarm cannot be acknowledged if the GAS input is FALSE. The alarm signal
acknowledgement deactivates the active alarm signal of the function block. The alarm
signal can be acknowledged by the rising edge of the ACK signal, or by the local
menu command or the remote command. Separate events are not generated by the
acknowledgement because it deactivates the ALARM signal and an event is generated
by the deactivation.
2.3 Resetting
function blocks.
3
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CMGAS1 is 186.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
4
3.2 Setting values

direction
Alarm delay S1 0...300.000 s 0.000 R/W Alarm delay

direction




3.3.1 Input data

direction
Gas pressure I1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Indication of valid gas pressure
1)
Gas pressure 0 = Invalid; 1 = Valid
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Alarm activity 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active
5
3.3.3 Events

coefficient
E0 1 0 Low gas pressure alarm Reset
E1 2 1 Low gas pressure alarm Activated
E2 4 0 Low gas pressure warning Inactive
E3 8 1 Low gas pressure warning Active
6
4. Technical Data


A -
B -
7
Issued: 10/1997
Version: D/12.3.2002
Gas Pressure Monitoring
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.3 Resetting............................................................................................. 3

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 4
3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 5
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 5
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................... 5
3.3.2 Output data ................................................................................ 5
3.3.3 Events ........................................................................................ 6
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 7

1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Monitors the gas pressure via a digital input

The alarm signal cannot be acknowledged until the indication of gas pressure is
valid
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the gas pressure monitoring function block
CMGAS1 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
A digital input can be used for monitoring the gas pressure. When the gas pressure
drops below the acceptable limit, the digital signal becomes active (active low) and
triggers the alarm signal. The alarm signal cannot be acknowledged before the breaker
poles have been refilled to the correct pressure.

GAS Digital signal (BOOL, active low) Gas pressure indication

ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Low gas pressure alarm
2
The GAS signal indicates the gas pressure: an active signal (FALSE) indicates a fault
condition, whereas an inactive signal (TRUE) indicates the correct gas pressure. The
function block will activate the ALARM signal when the specific alarm delay has
elapsed after the falling edge of the GAS signal. In order to activate the ALARM
signal, the gas pressure should remain FALSE throughout the alarm delay.
The alarm cannot be acknowledged if the GAS input is FALSE. The alarm signal
acknowledgement deactivates the active alarm signal of the function block. The alarm
signal can be acknowledged by the rising edge of the ACK signal, or by the local
menu command or the remote command. Separate events are not generated by the
acknowledgement because it deactivates the ALARM signal and an event is generated
by the deactivation.
2.3 Resetting
function blocks.
3
3.1 General
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
4
3.2 Setting values

direction
Alarm delay S1 0...300.000 s 0.000 R/W Alarm delay

direction




3.3.1 Input data

direction
Gas pressure I1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Indication of valid gas pressure
1)
Gas pressure 0 = Invalid; 1 = Valid
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Alarm activity 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active
5
3.3.3 Events

coefficient
E2 4 0 Low gas pressure warning Inactive
E3 8 1 Low gas pressure warning Active
6
4. Technical Data

Alarm delay accuracy 0.5% of set value or 150 ms


A -
B -
7
Issued: 3/2000
Version: A/1.2.2002
Three-Pole Gas Pressure Monitoring
Contents
1 Introduction ....................................................................................2
1.1 Features.......................................................................................... 2
1.2 Application ...................................................................................... 2
1.3 Input description.............................................................................. 2
1.4 Output description ........................................................................... 2
2 Description of Operation...............................................................3
2.1 Operation criteria............................................................................. 3

2.2 Resetting......................................................................................... 3
2.3 Alarm acknowledgement ................................................................. 3
3 Parameters and Events .................................................................4
3.1 General ........................................................................................... 4

3.2 Setting values ................................................................................. 5
3.2.1 Actual settings ..................................................................... 5
3.2.2 Control settings.................................................................... 5
3.3 Measurement values....................................................................... 5
3.3.1 Input data............................................................................. 5
3.3.2 Output data.......................................................................... 5
3.3.3 Events.................................................................................. 6
4 Technical Data................................................................................7
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
Monitors the gas pressure of the three circuit-breaker poles
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the three-pole gas pressure monitoring
function block CMGAS3 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
Three digital inputs are used for monitoring the SF6 gas pressure. When the gas
pressure drops below the acceptable limit, the falling edge of a digital signal triggers
and activates an alarm signal. The alarm signal cannot be acknowledged before the
breaker poles have been refilled to the correct pressure.

GAS_L1 Digital signal (BOOL, active low) Gas pressure indication, pole L1
ACK Digital signal (BOOL, pos edge) Alarm acknowledgement signal

ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Alarm for low gas pressure
2
2 Description of Operation
The digital signals GAS_L1, GAS_L2 and GAS_L3 indicate the gas pressure of each
pole: an active signal (FALSE) indicates a fault condition, whereas an inactive signal
(TRUE) indicates the correct gas pressure. The function block will activate the
ALARM signal when the specific alarm delay has elapsed after the falling edge of any
of the GAS_L1..3 signals. In order to activate the ALARM signal, the gas pressure
should remain FALSE throughout the alarm delay.
After an alarm is detected, an indication on the MMI is activated telling which pole of
the circuit breaker is damaged or needs to be refilled with gas, and the corresponding
event is sent.
2.2 Resetting
function blocks.
The alarm cannot be acknowledged if any of the GAS_L1..3 inputs is FALSE. The
alarm signal acknowledgement deactivates the active alarm signal of the function
by the local menu command or the remote command. Separate events are not
generated by the acknowledgement because it deactivates the ALARM signal and an
event is generated by the deactivation.
3
3 Parameters and Events
3.1 General
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
4
3.2 Setting values

direction
Alarm delay S1 0300.000 s 0 R/W Alarm delay

direction
Alarm ack V99 1= - 0 W Alarm acknowledgement
Acknowledge
Event mask 1 V101 0255 - 170 R/W Event mask 1 for event
transmission (E0E7)
transmission (E0E7)
transmission (E0E7)
transmission (E0E7)
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Gas pressure L1 I1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Indication of valid gas
pressure in pole L1
pressure in pole L2
pressure in pole L3
1)
Input 0 = Invalid; 1 = Valid
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Alarm state O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Low gas pressure alarm
1)
Output 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active
5
3.3.3 Events
coefficient
E2 4 0 Low gas pressure warning L1 Inactive
E3 8 1 Low gas pressure warning L1 Active
6
4 Technical Data
Configuration data Task execution interval (Relay Configuration Tool):
100 ms (recommended) at the rated frequency fn = 50 Hz

A -
7
Issued: 3/2000
Version: B/12.3.2002
Three-Pole Gas Pressure Monitoring
Contents
1 Introduction ....................................................................................2
1.1 Features.......................................................................................... 2
1.2 Application ...................................................................................... 2

2.2 Resetting......................................................................................... 3
2.3 Alarm acknowledgement ................................................................. 3
3 Parameters and Events .................................................................4
3.1 General ........................................................................................... 4

3.2 Setting values ................................................................................. 5
3.2.1 Actual settings ..................................................................... 5
3.2.2 Control settings.................................................................... 5
3.3 Measurement values....................................................................... 5
3.3.1 Input data............................................................................. 5
3.3.2 Output data.......................................................................... 5
3.3.3 Events.................................................................................. 6
4 Technical Data................................................................................7
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
Monitors the gas pressure of the three circuit-breaker poles
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the three-pole gas pressure monitoring
function block CMGAS3 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
Three digital inputs are used for monitoring the SF6 gas pressure. When the gas
pressure drops below the acceptable limit, the falling edge of a digital signal triggers
and activates an alarm signal. The alarm signal cannot be acknowledged before the
breaker poles have been refilled to the correct pressure.

ACK Digital signal (BOOL, pos edge) Alarm acknowledgement signal

ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Alarm for low gas pressure
2
The digital signals GAS_L1, GAS_L2 and GAS_L3 indicate the gas pressure of each
pole: an active signal (FALSE) indicates a fault condition, whereas an inactive signal
(TRUE) indicates the correct gas pressure. The function block will activate the
ALARM signal when the specific alarm delay has elapsed after the falling edge of any
of the GAS_L1..3 signals. In order to activate the ALARM signal, the gas pressure
should remain FALSE throughout the alarm delay.
After an alarm is detected, an indication on the MMI is activated telling which pole of
the circuit breaker is damaged or needs to be refilled with gas, and the corresponding
event is sent.
2.2 Resetting
function blocks.
The alarm cannot be acknowledged if any of the GAS_L1..3 inputs is FALSE. The
alarm signal acknowledgement deactivates the active alarm signal of the function
3
3.1 General
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
4
3.2 Setting values

direction
Alarm delay S1 0300.000 s 0 R/W Alarm delay

direction
Acknowledge
transmission (E0E7)
transmission (E0E7)
transmission (E0E7)
transmission (E0E7)
3.3.1 Input data

direction
pressure in pole L1
pressure in pole L2
pressure in pole L3
1)
Input 0 = Invalid; 1 = Valid
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Alarm state O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Low gas pressure alarm
1)
Output 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active
5
3.3.3 Events
coefficient
6
4 Technical Data
Alarm delay accuracy 0.5% of set value or 150 ms

100 ms (recommended) at the rated frequency fn = 50 Hz

A -
7
1MRS752361-MUM CMSCHED
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C/1.2.2002
Scheduled Maintenance
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.2 Registers............................................................................................. 3
2.4 Resetting............................................................................................. 4

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 5
3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 6
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 6
3.3.1 Output data ................................................................................ 6
3.3.2 Events ........................................................................................ 6
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 7

CMSCHED Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Provides scheduled time intervals for maintenance
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the scheduled maintenance CMSCHED used
in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The maintenance is mostly based on preventive maintenance at scheduled time

intervals. The function block generates an alarm at user-specified time intervals.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI&06&+('


ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Alarm signal
2
Substation Automation CMSCHED
The function block activates the ALARM output whenever the accumulated number
of days is greater than or equal to the setting value of the Alarm interval parameter
and when the time set for the Alarm time parameter is passed. The alarm time
specifies the moment of day when the alarm is generated.
The function block memorizes internally the real time clock (RTC) date at the
moment when the alarm is acknowledged and then compares the memorized value to
the current value of the RTC to calculate the number of days passed. This process is
susceptible to the real time clock synchronization that may be done through external
communication. Due to synchronization, for example while connecting the unit to the
communication network, the RTC may suddenly jump to a new, possibly very
different value and cause false alarms. The initial value of the memorized date will
also be the RTC time during the configuration downloading. Therefore, if the unit is
disconnected from the clock source and reset before the configuration process, the
initial value may be incorrect.
If an alarm condition is detected, the function block issues detailed alarm indications
both locally on the MMI and remotely via serial communication.
2.2 Registers
The Elapsed time parameter indicates the number of days passed since last
acknowledgement. If the alarm is active but it is not acknowledged, the day counter
will continue counting up until acknowledgement, which is when the counter is reset
to zero.
3
2.4 Resetting
function blocks.
4
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CMSCHED is 189.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
5
3.2 Setting values

direction
Alarm interval S1 1...3650 days 1825 R/W Interrupt interval at days
Alarm time S2 00.00...23.59 hh.mm 08.00 R/W Interrupt clock time in format
hh.mm

direction
Elapsed time V1 0...3650 days 0 R/M Elapsed time in days




Start time V2 - - 0 R Internal variable
3.3.1 Output data

direction
1)
Alarm state 0 = Inactive ; 1 = Active
3.3.2 Events

coefficient
E0 1 0 Scheduled maintenance alarm Reset
E1 2 1 Scheduled maintenance alarm Activated
6
4. Technical Data


A -
C -
7
1MRS752362-MUM CMSPRC1
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C/1.2.2002
Spring Charging Control 1
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.4 Resetting............................................................................................. 5

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 6
3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 7
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 7
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................... 8
3.3.2 Output data ................................................................................ 8
3.3.3 Events ........................................................................................ 8
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 9

CMSPRC1 Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Indicates the spring status

Provides spring charging control operations
Measures the spring charging time
Issues alarm signals of the maximum and minimum charging times
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the spring charging control CMSPRC1 used
in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The relay is itself able to control the spring charging. One digital input is needed to
ensure that the spring has been charged.
The time required for spring charging is normally 5...15s.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI&0635&
2
Substation Automation CMSPRC1

START Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Start signal of the spring
charging
BINCHARGE Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Charge status of the spring

MOTORON Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Spring charging motor control
AMAX Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Spring charging maximum time
alarm
AMIN Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Spring charging minimum time
alarm
3
2.1 Configuration
The system provides two modes for spring charging, both of which are triggered by
the START pin. The first mode always causes a fixed pulse width, while the second
mode cuts the pulse when the digital input indicates a charged spring or when the
maximum pulse width has been reached.
The rising edge of the START signal triggers the charging process and activates the
MOTORON output. The charging time can be either fixed or dynamic, depending on
the configuration mode. If the charging time is zero, the START signal is only used as
a reference for charging time measurements and the MOTORON output is not
activated.
The spring charging time is the period from the moment of energizing the motor until
the moment when the proximity switch (BINCHARGE) indicates a charged spring.
The spring charging time measurement will begin only after the START signal. The
time measurement accuracy is based on the cyclic execution interval of the function
block. The function block expects a constant output relay delay and compensates it
from the measured value (compensation parameter 10 ms).
The function block monitors the spring charging time regarding the specified
minimum and maximum alarm limits and gives an alarm if the time is not within the
specified limits. The alarm functions can be disabled by setting the specific alarm
limits to zero. However, the deactivation of alarms does not block the spring charging
measurements.
CMSPRC1 has a 100 second timeout for the charging time measurement. If the
BINCHARGE input does not indicate a charged spring within 100 seconds after the
START command, the measurement is terminated and the last charging time
parameter is set to 100s. In this case, a maximum time alarm is given, provided the
alarm is not disabled.
4
The alarm signal acknowledgement deactivates the active alarm signals of the
function block. The alarm signals can be simultaneously acknowledged by the rising
edge of the ACK signal, or by the local menu command or the remote command.
Separate events are not generated by the acknowledgement because it deactivates the
ALARM signal and an event is generated by the deactivation.
2.4 Resetting
function blocks.
5
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CMSPRC1 is 190.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
6
3.2 Setting values

direction
Fixed pulse S1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/W Selection of fixed pulse width or
variable pulse width
Charge time S2 0.00...100.00 s 20 R/W Spring charging time
Charge max S3 0.00...100.00 s 20 R/W Spring charging maximum alarm

limit
Charge min S4 0.00...100.00 s 5 R/W Spring charging minimum alarm limit

1)
Fixed pulse 0 = Fixed pulse; 1 = Variable pulse

direction
Last charge V1 0.00...100.00 s 0 R/M Last charging time
Regist clear V98 1=Clear - 0 W Clearing internal registrations
(E0 ... E9)
(E0 ... E9)
(E0 ... E9)
(E0 ... E9)
7
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Charge status I2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Spring charge status
1)
Charge status 0 = Uncharged; 1 = Charged
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Alarm max O2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Alarm status of maximum alarm pulse
1)
Alarm min O3 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Alarm status of minumum alarm pulse
1)
Alarm activation 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active
3.3.3 Events

coefficient
E0 1 0 Spring 1 charging motor Inactive
E1 2 1 Spring 1 charging motor Active
E2 4 0 Spring 1 max charging alarm Reset
E3 8 1 Spring 1 max charging alarm Activated
E4 16 0 Spring 1 min charging alarm Reset
E5 32 1 Spring 1 min charging alarm Activated
E6 - - - -
E7 128 1 Spring 1 charge command Activated
E8 256 0 Spring 1 charge status Uncharged
E9 512 1 Spring 1 charge status Charged
8
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies Pulse width accuracy and measuring accuracy:
The accuracies depend on the function block execution

interval (that can be selected) and the pulse width setting
value (whether the setting value is a multiple of the
execution interval or not). The symbol Tex denotes the
execution interval in ms.
MOTORON pulse width:
2 % of set value or 10 ms (if the pulse width is a

multiple of the execution interval)
2 % of set value or 0...Tex10 ms (if the pulse width is

not a multiple of the execution interval)
Spring charging time measurement accuracy:
2 % of process pulse width or 0...Tex20 ms


A -
B 100 s timeout added for charging time measurement
9
1MRS100191 (CMTCS1) RE_5_ _
1MRS100192 (CMTCS2) Trip Circuit Supervision
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C (CMTCS_)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 3
2.4 Resetting............................................................................................. 5

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 6
3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 7
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 7
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................... 8
3.3.2 Output data ................................................................................ 8
3.3.3 Events ........................................................................................ 8
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 9

RE_5_ _ CMTCS1 ABB Automation
CMTCS2
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
The trip coil control and measuring circuits are continuously supervised regarding
interruptions, and an alarm is issued in case of an interruption
In the RED 500 Platform, two trip output relays are provided with trip circuit
supervision
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the trip circuit supervision function blocks
CMTCS1 and CMTCS2 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The
function blocks are identical in operation.
The function block does not perform the supervision itself but it is used as an aid for
configuration. The functional part belongs mainly to the self-supervision tasks of the
PS_ card.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI&07&6DQG&07&6

TCSSTATE Digital signal (BOOL, active low) Trip circuit supervision state from
I/O-card
BS Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal of the trip circuit
supervision

ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Trip circuit supervision alarm
2
ABB Automation CMTCS1 RE_5_ _
CMTCS2
2.1 Configuration
The trip circuit supervision status signals from the PS1 card (TCS1 and TCS2) can be
connected by means of the Relay Configuration Tool. The blocking signals can also
be configured by the user with the configuration tool.
The trip circuit supervision is based on the constant current injection principle. If the
resistance of the trip circuit exceeds a certain limit, e.g. because of loose contacts or
oxidation, or if the OPEN contact has welded, the voltage over the OPEN contact falls
below 20 V dc and the supervision function of the trip circuit is activated.
The supervision state (TCS1 or TCS2) is logical TRUE when the trip circuit condition
is OK and FALSE when a trip circuit fault has occurred. The TCSSTATE input is
used for monitoring the supervision state. The function block includes a delay
parameter that can be defined by the user. If the fault time exceeds the delay
parameter time, the ALARM output of the function block is activated along with the
respective notification on the MMI.
The input/output circuits are galvanically isolated from each other. The constant-
current generator forces a 1.5 mA measuring current through the circuit-breaker trip
circuit. The constant current generator is connected over the trip contact of the circuit.
The current generator for the TCS1 is connected to the terminals X4.1/12-13 and the
current generator for the TCS2 to the terminals X4.1/17-18 of the RE_ 54_ terminal.
Under no-fault conditions, the voltage over the contact of the constant current
generator must be above 20 V ac/dc.
Mathematically, the operating condition can be expressed as:
Uc (Rhext + Rhint + Rs) x Ic 9DFGF
where
Uc operating voltage over the supervised trip circuit

Ic measuring current through the trip circuit, approximately 1.5 mA
(0.99 ... 1.72 mA)
Rhext external shunt resistor value
Rhint internal shunt resistor value, 1 kW
Rs trip coil resistance value
3
CMTCS2
The resistor Rhext must be so calculated that the trip circuit supervision current
through the resistor is low enough not to influence the trip coil of the circuit breaker.
On the other hand, the voltage drop over the resistor Rhext must be low enough not to
jeopardize the operating condition presented in the formula above.
The following values are recommended for the resistor Rhext in Figure 2 below:
Operating voltage Uc Shunt resistor Rhext

48 V dc 1.2 kW, 5 W
60 V dc 5.6 kW, 5 W
110 V dc 22 kW, 5 W
220 V dc 33 kW, 5 W
- Uc +
Ic TCS_
20 V CMTCS_
Rh int M
R
A
L
TCSSTATE ALARM
A
1 kW BS
Rh ext
Rs
TCSfunc
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLQJSULQFLSOHRIWKHWULSFLUFXLWVXSHUYLVLRQ7&6IXQFWLRQ

To avoid unnecessary alarms, the trip circuit supervision can be blocked by the BS
signal, which makes it possible to disable the supervision output when the circuit
breaker is withdrawn, i.e. when the four-pole status of both the circuit breaker and the
circuit breaker truck is undefined.
Moreover, to avoid unnecessary alarms, CMTCS_ should be blocked by the BS signal

when a trip signal initiated by a protection function block is activated.
The event E3 is not sent if the object is blocked in the initial condition (after reset).
4
CMTCS2
The ALARM output will reset automatically when the fault disappears or when the
BS signal is activated. The user cannot reset the output without disabling the function.
2.4 Resetting
function blocks.
5
CMTCS2
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CMTCS1 is 191 and that for CMTCS2
192.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
6
CMTCS2
3.2 Setting values

direction
Alarm delay S1 0...300.000 s 3 R/W Alarm delay
1)
Activation S2 0 or 1 - 1 R/W Activation of TCS function
1)
Activation 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active

direction
(E0 ... E3)
(E0 ... E3)
(E0 ... E3)
(E0 ... E3)
7
CMTCS2
3.3.1 Input data

direction
BS state I2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Blocking signal state
1)
Blocking signal 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
3.3.3 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 Trip circuit superv. 1 or 2 alarm Reset
E1 2 1 Trip circuit superv. 1 or 2 alarm Activated
E2 4 0 Trip circuit superv. 1 or 2 block Inactive
E3 8 1 Trip circuit superv. 1 or 2 block Active
8
CMTCS2
4. Technical Data

Alarm delay accuracy The accuracy depends on the function block execution interval
(that can be selected) and the setting value (whether the setting
value is a multiple of the execution interval or not). The symbol
Tex denotes the execution interval in ms.
Alarm pulse delay:
2 % of set value or 10 ms (if the delay is a multiple of

the execution interval)
2 % of set value or 0...Tex10 ms (if the delay is not a



A -
B -
9
1MRS752363-MUM CMTCS_
Issued: 10/1997
Trip Circuit Supervision
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 3
2.4 Resetting............................................................................................. 5

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 6
3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 7
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 7
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................... 8
3.3.2 Output data ................................................................................ 8
3.3.3 Events ........................................................................................ 8
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 9

CMTCS_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
The trip coil control and measuring circuits are continuously supervised regarding
interruptions, and an alarm is issued in case of an interruption
In the RED 500 Platform, two trip output relays are provided with trip circuit
supervision
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the trip circuit supervision function blocks
CMTCS1 and CMTCS2 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The
The function block does not perform the supervision itself but it is used as an aid for
configuration. The functional part belongs mainly to the self-supervision tasks of the
PS_ card.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI&07&6DQG&07&6

TCSSTATE Digital signal (BOOL, active low) Trip circuit supervision state from
I/O-card
BS Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal of the trip circuit
supervision

ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Trip circuit supervision alarm
2
Substation Automation CMTCS_
2.1 Configuration
The trip circuit supervision status signals from the PS1 card (TCS1 and TCS2) can be
connected by means of the Relay Configuration Tool. The blocking signals can also
be configured by the user with the configuration tool.
The trip circuit supervision is based on the constant current injection principle. If the
resistance of the trip circuit exceeds a certain limit, e.g. because of loose contacts or
oxidation, or if the OPEN contact has welded, the voltage over the OPEN contact falls
below 20 V dc and the supervision function of the trip circuit is activated.
The supervision state (TCS1 or TCS2) is logical TRUE when the trip circuit condition
is OK and FALSE when a trip circuit fault has occurred. The TCSSTATE input is
used for monitoring the supervision state. The function block includes a delay
parameter that can be defined by the user. If the fault time exceeds the delay
parameter time, the ALARM output of the function block is activated along with the
respective notification on the MMI.
The input/output circuits are galvanically isolated from each other. The constant-
current generator forces a 1.5 mA measuring current through the circuit-breaker trip
circuit. The constant current generator is connected over the trip contact of the circuit.
The current generator for the TCS1 is connected to the terminals X4.1/12-13 and the
current generator for the TCS2 to the terminals X4.1/17-18 of the RE_ 54_ terminal.
Under no-fault conditions, the voltage over the contact of the constant current
generator must be above 20 V ac/dc.
Mathematically, the operating condition can be expressed as:
Uc (Rhext + Rhint + Rs) x Ic 9DFGF
where
Uc operating voltage over the supervised trip circuit

Ic measuring current through the trip circuit, approximately 1.5 mA
(0.99 ... 1.72 mA)
Rhext external shunt resistor value
Rhint internal shunt resistor value, 1 kW
Rs trip coil resistance value
3
The resistor Rhext must be so calculated that the trip circuit supervision current
through the resistor is low enough not to influence the trip coil of the circuit breaker.
On the other hand, the voltage drop over the resistor Rhext must be low enough not to
jeopardize the operating condition presented in the formula above.
The following values are recommended for the resistor Rhext in Figure 2 below:
Operating voltage Uc Shunt resistor Rhext

48 V dc 1.2 k, 5 W
60 V dc 5.6 k, 5 W
110 V dc 22 k, 5 W
220 V dc 33 k, 5 W
- Uc +
Ic TCS_
20 V CMTCS_
Rh int M
R
A
L
TCSSTATE ALARM
A
1 kW BS
Rh ext
Rs
TCSfunc
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLQJSULQFLSOHRIWKHWULSFLUFXLWVXSHUYLVLRQ7&6IXQFWLRQ

To avoid unnecessary alarms, the trip circuit supervision can be blocked by the BS
signal, which makes it possible to disable the supervision output when the circuit
breaker is withdrawn, i.e. when the four-pole status of both the circuit breaker and the
circuit breaker truck is undefined.
Moreover, to avoid unnecessary alarms, CMTCS_ should be blocked by the BS signal

when a trip signal initiated by a protection function block is activated.
The event E3 is not sent if the object is blocked in the initial condition (after reset).
4
The ALARM output will reset automatically when the fault disappears or when the
BS signal is activated. The user cannot reset the output without disabling the function.
2.4 Resetting
function blocks.
5
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CMTCS1 is 191 and that for CMTCS2
192.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
6
3.2 Setting values

direction
Alarm delay S1 0...300.000 s 3 R/W Alarm delay
Activation S2 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Activation of TCS function

1)
Activation 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active

direction
(E0 ... E3)
(E0 ... E3)
(E0 ... E3)
(E0 ... E3)
7
3.3.1 Input data

direction
BS state I2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Blocking signal state
1)
Blocking signal 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
3.3.3 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 Trip circuit superv. 1 or 2 alarm Reset
E1 2 1 Trip circuit superv. 1 or 2 alarm Activated
E2 4 0 Trip circuit superv. 1 or 2 block Inactive
E3 8 1 Trip circuit superv. 1 or 2 block Active
8
4. Technical Data

Alarm delay accuracy The accuracy depends on the function block execution interval
(that can be selected) and the setting value (whether the setting
value is a multiple of the execution interval or not). The symbol
Tex denotes the execution interval in ms.
Alarm pulse delay:
2 % of set value or 10 ms (if the delay is a multiple of

the execution interval)
2 % of set value or 0...Tex10 ms (if the delay is not a



A -
B -
9
1MRS752364-MUM CMTIME_
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C/1.2.2002
Operate Time Counter for the Used
Operate Time (Motors)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.2 Registers............................................................................................. 3
2.4 Resetting............................................................................................. 3

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 4
3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 5
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 5
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................... 6
3.3.2 Output data ................................................................................ 6
3.3.3 Events ........................................................................................ 6
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 7

CMTIME_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Registers the operate time in hours and minutes

Alarm signals can be obtained from the accumulated operate time
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the operate-time counter function blocks
CMTIME1 and CMTIME2 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The
Operate-time counting (in hours) is necessary e.g. for some motors. The cumulative
counting value is registered. The data for the direct digital input used for time
measurement may also be generated from the analogue sensor by discrete compare
operations.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI&07,0(DQG&07,0(

BININP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Process state
ACK Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Alarm acknowledgement
signal

ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Accumulated time alarm
2
Substation Automation CMTIME_
The function block measures and accumulates the operate time when the BININP
input is active. The alarm signal is activated when the accumulated time value is equal
to or greater than the alarm limit. If the values of the alarm setting parameters are
zero, the function block will only measure the accumulated operate time.
2.2 Registers
The elapsed time indicates the accumulated hours and minutes. The time values can
be set if necessary.
block and resets the accumulated time values. The alarm signal can be acknowledged
by the rising edge of the ACK signal, or by the local menu command or the remote
command. Separate events are not generated by the acknowledgement because it
deactivates the ALARM signal and an event is generated by the deactivation.
The function block will internally keep track of the timing at 100 ms accuracy.
However, only the minute-level time will be available and memorized.
2.4 Resetting
function blocks.
3
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CMTIME1 is 184 and that for CMTIME2
185.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
4
3.2 Setting values

direction
Max hours S1 0...87600 hours 0 R/W Maximum accumulated time alarm limit
hours
Max mins S2 0...59 min 0 R/W Maximum accumulated time alarm limit
minutes

direction
Accum. hours V1 0...87600 hours 0 R/W Accumulated time hours
Accum. min V2 0...59 min 0 R/W Accumulated time minutes

Acknowledge




5
3.3.1 Input data

direction
BININP state I1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Digital input state
1)
Digital input state 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Digital input state 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active
3.3.3 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 Accumulated time 1 or 2 alarm Reset
E1 2 1 Accumulated time 1 or 2 alarm Activated
E2 4 0 Accumulated time 1 or 2 measurement Inactive
E3 8 1 Accumulated time 1 or 2 measurement Active
6
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies Time measuring accuracy: 1 %


A -
B -
7
1MRS752365-MUM CMTRAV1
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C/1.2.2002
Breaker Travel Time 1
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.3 Register clear ...................................................................................... 5
2.5 Resetting............................................................................................. 5
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 6

3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 7
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 7
3.3.1 Output data ................................................................................ 8
3.3.2 Events ........................................................................................ 8
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 9

CMTRAV1 Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Measures the circuit-breaker travel time

Issues an alarm of the exceeding travel time for open and close operations
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the circuit-breaker travel time function block
CMTRAV1 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The circuit-breaker travel time is based on measuring the time when the digital
indications of the breaker show an undefined state. The travel time tells the actual
propagation time of the pole / relative speed of the pole (speed = pole travel distance /
time). The actual opening time measurements performed inside the circuit breaker
(measures the opening time consisting of reaction time and travel time) describe both
the electrical and mechanical delays.
A typical opening travel time for a circuit breaker is about 5 ms. The function block
will issue an alarm signal if the travel time exceeds the opening time. Both the
opening and the closing have their own alarm limits.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORIWKHWUDYHOWLPHPHDVXUHPHQW
2
Substation Automation CMTRAV1

BINOPEN Digital signal (BOOL, edge) Open status of the CB
BINCLOSE Digital signal (BOOL, edge) Close status of the CB
TIMOPEN Time stamp value (UDINT) Time value of the open status input
TIMCLOSE Time stamp value (UDINT) Time value of the close status input
ACK Digital signal (BOOL, pos. Alarm acknowledgement signal
edge)

AOPEN Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Opening travel time alarm signal
ACLOSE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Closing travel time alarm signal
3
2.1 Configuration
The digital inputs BINOPEN and BINCLOSE should be connected to the circuit
breaker state signals. The time inputs TIMOPEN and TIMCLOSE should be
connected to the time stamps of the corresponding digital inputs. If the time stamp
reference is not connected, the time measurement accuracy depends on the execution
interval of the function block.
The BINOPEN and BINCLOSE signals are measured and, once a change occurs, the
opening travel time or closing travel time measurements are performed. If the
measured travel time is greater than or equal to the limit values, the corresponding
alarm is given. The alarm signals remain active until the fault condition is
acknowledged.
O pen command
BI NCLOSE
BINOPEN
Reaction t ime Travel time
TIMCLOSE TIMOPEN
)LJXUH 7UDYHOWLPHPHDVXUHPHQWIRURSHQRSHUDWLRQ
4
Close command
BINOPEN
BINCLOSE
Reaction time Travel time
TI MOPEN TI MCLO SE
)LJXUH 7UDYHOWLPHPHDVXUHPHQWIRUFORVHRSHUDWLRQ
Both the open and close travel time alarms can be disabled by setting the
corresponding alarm limit values to zero. However, the function block will still
continue measuring the travel time.
The function block has a 100 second timeout in travel time measurement. If the
timeout is exceeded, the registered travel time value is set to 100 s. The corresponding
alarm ia also generated, provided the alarm is not disabled.
2.3 Register clear
The last open and close travel times are registered. The registrations can be cleared
both remotely and locally.
The alarm signal acknowledgement deactivates the active alarm signals of the
function block. The alarm signals can be simultaneously acknowledged by the rising
edge of the ACK signal, or by the local menu command or the remote command.
Separate events are not generated by the acknowledgement because it deactivates the
ALARM signal and an event is generated by the deactivation.
2.5 Resetting
function blocks.
5
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CMTRAV1 is 193.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
6
3.2 Setting values

direction
Open alarm lim. S1 0...100.000 s 0.01 R/W Alarm limit for opening
Close alarm lim. S2 0...100.000 s 0.01 R/W Alarm limit for closing

direction
Last open V1 0...100.000 s 0 R/M Last open travel time
Last close V2 0...100.000 s 0 R/M Last close travel time
Regist clear V98 1 = Clear - 0 W Clearing internal registrations
Alarm ack V99 1 = Acknowledge - 0 W Alarm acknowledgement




7
3.3.1 Output data

direction
Open alarm O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Alarm signal status for open
1)
Close alarm O2 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Alarm signal status for close
1)
3.3.2 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 Breaker 1 open travel alarm Reset
E1 2 1 Breaker 1 open travel alarm Activated
E2 4 0 Breaker 1 close travel alarm Reset
E3 8 1 Breaker 1 close travel alarm Activated
8
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies The accuracies depend on the function block execution interval
(that can be selected). The symbol Tex denotes the execution
interval in ms.
Opening and closing travel time measurements:
2 % of process pulse width or 0...Tex10 ms
Opening and closing travel time measurements when the

TIMOPEN and TIMCLOSE inputs are used:
2 % of process pulse width or 2 ms
(Digital input time stamp tolerance is 1ms)


A -
B 100 s timeout added for travel time measurement
9
1MRS752366-MUM CMVO3
Issued: 10/1997
Version: D/1.2.2002
Supervision of the Energizing Voltage
Data subject to change without notice Input Circuit
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 3
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 3
2.4 Test mode ........................................................................................... 4
2.5 Registers............................................................................................. 4
2.6 Resetting............................................................................................. 5
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 6

3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................... 7
3.3.2 Output data ................................................................................ 7
3.3.3 Recorded data 1......................................................................... 8
3.3.4 Recorded data 2......................................................................... 8
3.3.5 Recorded data 3......................................................................... 8
3.3.6 Events ........................................................................................ 8
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 9

CMVO3 Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Application
This document specifies the function of the phase voltage supervision function block
CMVO3 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI&092

UL1_U12 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring voltage UL1 / U12

ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Alarm signal output
ERR Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for indicating a configuration
error
2
Substation Automation CMVO3
2.1 Configuration
The function block CMVO3 measures phase-to-phase voltages or phase-to-earth

voltages. The measuring devices and signal types for analogue channels are selected
and configured in a special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool.
worksheet of the configuration tool. The phase-to-phase voltages U12, U23 and U31 or
the phase-to-earth voltages UL1, UL2 and UL3 are connected to the corresponding
UL1_U12, UL2_U23 and UL3_U31 inputs of the function block and, in the same
2.2 Measuring mode

component of the voltages.
The supervision function block CMVO3 detects interruptions in energizing circuits.

The user can select three-phase or two-phase operation with the parameter Voltage
Operation mode.
voltages. If one or two voltages exceed the setting High limit, while the measured
values of the remaining one or two voltages are below the Low limit, the output
ALARM is activated after the set alarm delay.
The function block is disabled if all input voltages are below the setting Low limit.
The ALARM output resets automatically when the fault disappears.
3
)LJXUH %DVLFEORFNGLDJUDPRIWKH&092IXQFWLRQEORFN
2.4 Test mode
communication.
2.5 Registers
The function block records the voltage values required for later fault analysis at the
moment of the supervision alarm, i.e. when the set operate time delay (parameter
4
2.6 Resetting
Operation Recorded
indicators data
1)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
1)
Resets the recorded data of the CMVO3 function block.
2)
5
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CMVO3 is 182.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
6

direction
Operation mode V1 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Switching between the modes "In
use" and "Not in use"
Voltage select. V2 1...4 2) - 1 R/W Selection of voltages to be

supervised
High limit V3 10...110 % Un 12 R/W High limit for voltage supervision
Low limit V4 2...90 % Un 6 R/W Low limit for voltage supervision




1)
Operation mode 0 = In use; 1 = Not in use
2)
Voltage select. 1 = L1 & L2 & L3; 2 = L1 & L2; 3 = L1 & l3; 4 = l2 & l3
3)
Test ALARM 0 = Do not activate; 1 = Activate
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Voltage UL1_U12 I1 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Voltage UL1 / U12
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
7

direction
Voltage U1_12 V203 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Voltage U1

direction

direction
3.3.6 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Input voltage circuit alarm Off
E1 2 1 Input voltage circuit alarm On
8
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies Depends on the frequency of the voltage measured:
f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 1.0 % of set value or 0.01 x Un


B -
C Input names changed:

U1_12 UL1_U12
U2_23 UL2_U23
U3_31 UL3_U31
Control settings: Operate mode Operation mode
Input data parameter names changed:

Voltage U1_12 Voltage UL1_U12
9
1MRS752347-MUM CO3DC _
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C/31.1.2002
Three-State Disconnector
Data subject to change without notice (3 state inputs / 4 control outputs)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 6
2.1.1 General ...................................................................................... 6
2.2.1 Object control............................................................................. 7
2.2.2 Interlocking................................................................................. 7
2.2.3 Open operation .......................................................................... 7
2.2.4 Close operation .......................................................................... 8
2.2.5 Earth operation........................................................................... 8
2.2.6 Free operation............................................................................ 9
2.2.7 Logic command priority .............................................................. 9
2.2.8 Object state.............................................................................. 10
2.2.9 Object state validity .................................................................. 11
2.2.10 Opening, closing, earthing and freeing pulse widths................. 11
2.2.11 Opening, closing, earthing and freeing time monitoring............ 12
2.2.12 Cycle count monitoring............................................................. 12
2.2.13 Alarm signal acknowledgement................................................ 13
2.3 Interlocking bypass mode.................................................................. 13
2.4 Recordings clear ............................................................................... 13
2.5 Direct object control for remote operation.......................................... 13
2.6 Intermediate state suppression ......................................................... 14
2.7 Secured object control for remote operation...................................... 14
2.7.1 Secured object control (LON) ................................................... 14
2.7.2 Secured object control (SPA) ................................................... 17
2.8 Event logging on command handling................................................. 18
2.9 Secured object control for local operation ......................................... 18
CO3DC_ Substation Automation
3.1 General..............................................................................................19
3.2 Setting values ....................................................................................20
3.2.1 Actual settings ..........................................................................20
3.3.1 Output data...............................................................................23
3.3.2 Events ......................................................................................24
4. Technical Data.........................................................................................26
2
Substation Automation CO3DC_
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
General functions:
Remote control
Secured remote control
Secured local control
Interlocking
MMI indication
Remote indication
Alarm of the maximum opening, closing, earthing and freeing (isolating) time
Special features:
Opening time monitoring

Closing time monitoring
Earthing time monitoring
Freeing (isolating) time monitoring
Cycle counter
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the three-state disconnector function blocks
CO3DC1 and CO3DC2 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The
The function block CO3DC_ is designed to be used for the control of a three-state
(i.e. open, close, earth) disconnector. The function block also takes care of user-
defined interlocking logics and has guaranteed opening, closing, freeing and earthing
pulse widths. The open, close, earth and undefined states of an object can be indicated
both remotely and locally by the function block. The three-state disconnector has the
same function as a basic disconnector function block plus additional controls for the
function block state.
3
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI&2'&DQG&2'&

OPEN Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Logic open signal
OPENENA Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Enable signal for logic open
CLOSE Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Logic close signal
CLOSEENA Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Enable signal for logic close
EARTH Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Logic earth signal
EARTHENA Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Enable signal for logic earth
FREE Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Logic free signal
FREEENA Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Enable signal for logic free
BINOPEN Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Open status of the object
BINCLOSE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Close status of the object
BINEARTH Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Earth status of the object
IV Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Validity of object state
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Command handling block signal
4

OOPEN Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Open command pulse
OCLOSE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Close command pulse
OEARTH Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Earth command pulse
OFREE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Free command pulse
AOPEN Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Opening time alarm
ACLOSE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Closing time alarm
AEARTH Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Earthing time alarm
AFREE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Freeing time alarm
RESERVE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Command handling reserve signal
5
2.1 Configuration
2.1.1 General
The graphical presentation of the component in the MIMIC view is defined in the
Relay Mimic Editor while the logical connection to process data can be configured by
means of the Relay Configuration Tool.
The IV signal should be connected by means of the variable BixIV in the Relay
Configuration Tool. If BI1, BI2 and BI3, for example, are connected to BINOPEN,
BINCLOSE and BINEARTH, the connections shown in Figure 2 below could be used
for IV.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIFRQQHFWLRQVIRUWKH,9LQSXW
6
2.2.1 Object control
The three-state object control is achieved by four commands. Each command has its
own interlocking enable signal that permits the operation. The command state
diagram is presented below.
Close state
CLO SE OPEN
Open st ate
FREE EARTH
Earth state
)LJXUH &RQWUROOLQJWKHWKUHHVWDWHGLVFRQQHFWRUE\IRXUFRPPDQGV
2.2.2 Interlocking
The interlocking allows open, close, earth and free operations via the signals
OPENENA, CLOSEENA, EARTHENA and FREEENA. The control operations are
allowed if the interlocking signals for the concerned operations are TRUE. By default,
the corresponding operations are not permitted provided the inputs are unconnected.
In addition, the system provides a general interlocking bypass mode (parameter

Control/General/Interl bypass) that overrides all interlocking signals of the control
function blocks, which means that the control function blocks will internally ignore
the status of the interlocking signals and permit any control operation.
2.2.3 Open operation
An open command can be issued locally, remotely or by the logic OPEN signal and
the corresponding actions must be enabled by the interlocking signal (OPENENA).
The function block can be controlled both via the basic remote communication and
via the local MMI. The open pulse is issued via the OOPEN output and the pulse
width can be defined by adjusting the setting parameter Open pulse.
The open operation is possible provided the object is not blocked by the interlocking
logic and the closing pulse (OCLOSE), freeing pulse (OFREE) or earthing pulse
(OEARTH) is not active. The interlocking enable signal state is checked on the rising
edge of the open signal and thus, if the interlocking signal blocks the open signal after
the rising edge, the blocking will not cancel the open operation. The secured object
control is a special case (see sections Secured object control for remote operation
7
and Secured object control for local operation) and does not directly affect the logic
control and the direct control of the object.
The normal open operation is enabled if the OPENENA signal is active, whereas the
logic open control is enabled if the OPENENA signal is active and the OPEN signal
rises or if both the signals are activated at the same time. If the interlocking is not
used, the OPENENA signal should be active.
2.2.4 Close operation
A close command can be issued locally, remotely or by the logic CLOSE signal and
the corresponding actions must be enabled by the interlocking signal (CLOSEENA).
via the local MMI. The close pulse is issued via the OCLOSE output and the pulse
width can be defined by adjusting the setting parameter Close pulse.
The close operation is possible provided the object is not blocked by the interlocking
logic and the opening pulse (OOPEN), freeing pulse (OFREE) or earthing pulse
(OEARTH) is not active. The interlocking enable signal state is checked on the rising
edge of the close signal. The secured object control is a special case and does not
directly affect the logic control and direct control of the object.
The normal close operation is enabled if the CLOSEENA signal is active, whereas the
logic close control is enabled if the CLOSEENA signal is active and the CLOSE
signal rises or if both the signals are activated at the same time. If the interlocking is
not used, the CLOSEENA signal should be active.
2.2.5 Earth operation
An earth command can be issued locally, remotely and by the logic (EARTH signal)
and the corresponding actions must be enabled by the interlocking (EARTHENA).
via the local MMI. The earth pulse is issued via the OEARTH output and the pulse
width can be defined by adjusting the setting parameter Earth pulse.
The earth operation is possible provided the object is not blocked by the interlocking
logic and the closing pulse (OCLOSE), freeing pulse (OFREE) or opening pulse
(OOPEN) is not active. The interlocking enable signal state is checked on a rising
edge of the earth signal. The secured object control is a special case and does not
The normal earth operation is enabled if the EARTHENA signal is active, whereas
the logic earth control is enabled if the EARTHENA signal is active and the EARTH
not used, the EARTHENA signal should be active.
8
2.2.6 Free operation
A free command can be issued locally, remotely or by the logic FREE signal and the
corresponding actions must be enabled by the interlocking signal (FREEENA). The
function block can be controlled both via the basic remote communication and via the
local MMI. The free pulse is issued via the OFREE output and the pulse width can be
defined by adjusting the setting value.
The free operation is possible provided the object is not blocked by the interlocking
logic and the closing pulse (OCLOSE), opening pulse (OOPEN) or earthing pulse
(OEARTH) is not active. The interlocking enable signal state is checked on a rising
edge of the free signal. The secured object control is a special case and does not
The normal free operation is enabled if the FREEENA signal is active, whereas the
logic free control is enabled if the FREEENA signal is active and the FREE signal
used, the FREEENA signal should be active.
2.2.7 Logic command priority
Normally, the command priority is not a critical issue provided the interlocking
signals are strictly used. However, the design of internal control signals may cause
unexpected situations and therefore, the function block validates the logic commands
(OPEN, CLOSE, EARTH and FREE) on the rising edge and gives them a certain
priority. If the command is enabled and the output command pulse (OOPEN,
OCLOSE, OEARTH or OFREE) is not active, the command is valid and the
concerned output pulse will be started. Otherwise the command will be ignored as
shown in Figure 4 below.
OPEN
CLOSE
OOPEN
OCLOSE
)LJXUH &ORVHFRPPDQGLVQRWYDOLGDWHGEHFDXVHWKHULVLQJHGJHRFFXUVGXULQJWKH
RSHQFRPPDQGSXOVH
Cyclic state machine follows the command order described in Figure 3. For example, at
close state only the open command pulse causes state transfer. When the current state
is open, both close and earth commands are available, in which case the internal
command priority defines that earth command overruns close command.
However, the forced pulse mode (this mode is explained further on in section
Opening, closing, earthing and freeing pulse widths) means that the current object
state is not checked when the object is controlled. This means that the object can, for
9
example, issue an open command pulse even though the earth state is indicated. In this
case, the internal command priority will be as follows in descending order of
importance:
1. Open command (OOPEN)

2. Earth command (OEARTH)
3. Free command (OFREE)
4. Close command (OCLOSE)
2.2.8 Object state
The object state is defined by the three digital inputs BINOPEN, BINCLOSE and
BINEARTH. The debounces and short disturbances on an input are eliminated by
filtering. The digital input filtering time can be adjusted in the relay configuration
separately for each digital input used by the function block. For further information,
refer to Technical Reference Manual, General.
The following table illustrates how the valid object states are defined. Otherwise the
object is in an undefined state.
State BINOPEN BINCLOSE BINEARTH

Open ON OFF OFF
Close OFF ON OFF
Earth OFF OFF ON
The 3-bit state is divided into two separate 2-bit parameters OC and FE due to typical
SCADA system requirements. The OC parameter describes how the disconnector
state is related to the close position: If the disconnector is in close position, OC state
is 01. If the diconnector is in any other defined (non-travelling) position, the OC state
is 10. In a similar way, the FE parameter defines the object state in relation to the
earth state. Because of this two-fold structure, the events are also divided into two
separate groups. The following state transition diagram shows how the typical events
are sent. It should be noticed that the event transmissions of the state parameters OC
and FE are separately handled.
O C = 01 ( E1) C lose sta te F E= 10 ( E3 8**)
O C = 00 ( E3* ) F E= 00 ( E4 1*)
O C = 11 ( E2* ) F E= 11 ( E4 0*)
O C = 10 ( E0* **) O p en ( fre e) sta te F E= 10 (E 38 ***)
O C =0 0 ( E3 *) F E= 00 (E 41 *)
O C =1 1 ( E2 *) F E= 11 (E 40 *)
O C = 10 ( E0* *) Ear th s ta te F E= 01 (E 39 )
* = Event will be sent if not filtered by the setting parameter Event delay
** = Event will be sent if an event was sent about the undefined state
*** = Event will be sent if the two-bit state really changed
10
The following table illustrates the relation between the digital inputs and the
indication parameters.
BINEARTH/ OC state FE state Comments

BINOPEN/
BINCLOSE: EOC
000 00 00 Undefined state.
1)
001 01 10 Close state.
010 10 10 Open state.
011 11 10
2)
100 10 01 Earth state.
101 01 01
110 10 11
111 11 11
1)
Note the difference between EOC state and FE state
2)
Note the difference between EOC state and OC state
2.2.9 Object state validity
The validity of digital inputs that indicate the object state is used as additional
information in indications and event logging. The IV can be combined from the
validity of inputs BINOPEN, BINCLOSE and BINEARTH. The non-active (FALSE)
IV signal shows that the input state is valid, while an active (TRUE) signal indicates
the invalid state. The interlocking should be based on the signals OPENENA,
CLOSEENA, EARTHENA and FREEENA. Thus, if the validity information is
needed for blocking the control operations, additional user defined logic should be
used. Refer to section Opening, closing, earthing and freeing pulse widths to see
how the state affects the control command pulses.
2.2.10 Opening, closing, earthing and freeing pulse widths
The type of the pulse width can be defined with the setting parameter Fixed pulse.
The function block provides two modes for characterizing the opening, closing,
earthing and freeing pulse widths. The default mode (Variable pulse) causes a
variable pulse width, which means that the output pulse is deactivated when the object
state shows that the disconnector has entered the correct state. This object diagnostics
can also be registered (see next section). The fixed pulse width mode (Fixed pulse)
always uses the maximum pulse width, which is defined by a setting parameter (Open
pulse/Close pulse/Earth pulse/Free pulse) set by the user.
The state checking can be defined with the setting parameter Forced pulse. The
default mode is Forced pulse, which means that the function block will issue
enabled command pulses regardless of the present object state. Note the remark
concerning enabled state transitions in section Logic command priority. On the
other hand, if the single pulse mode is active, the object will check whether the object
state already indicates the correct position and then ignore the command and the
command pulse. If a command is given in the forced mode and the object is already in
the correct position, the maximum pulse width will be used for the operation.
11
Note that if the IV input indicates an invalid state of the forced pulse, the function
block will internally use the forced pulse mode regardless of the setting.
2.2.11 Opening, closing, earthing and freeing time monitoring
The function block measures the opening, closing, earthing and freeing time of the
object. The time measurement starts when the function block activates the specific
output pulse (OOPEN, OCLOSE, OEARTH or OFREE) and ends when the object
state indicates that the object has reached the correct state or when 100 s timeout has
elapsed. Thus, the measured time includes the reaction time plus the travel time. The
recorded time 100 s indicates an unsuccessful operation.
O OPE N
BI NCLOSE
B INOPE N
Reaction t ime Travel time
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIWLPHPHDVXUHPHQWIRUWKHRSHQFRPPDQG
The alarm signal AOPEN, ACLOSE, AEARTH or AFREE is activated if the opening,
closing, earthing or freeing time monitoring detects a time period greater than or equal
to the alarm limit value. The opening, closing, earthing and freeing time
measurements have their own alarm limits. When an alarm condition is detected, the
function block issues detailed indications of the alarms on the MMI and via the
remote system. However, if the alarm setting limits have been set to zero by the user,
the alarm signals will not be activated. The time measurements are still carried out
even if the alarm option is disabled.
The time measurement accuracy depends on the execution interval of the function
block. The function block compensates the output relay delay and the system delays
internally by deducting them from the measured time.
The latest opening, closing, earthing and freeing times are recorded. Additionally, the
function block records the maximum opening, closing, earthing and freeing times.
These recordings can be cleared all at a time by the command Regist clear.
2.2.12 Cycle count monitoring
A three-state object has two cycle counters, for open cycles and for earth cycles
(parameters Open cycles and Earth cycles). The first one indicates the transition
between the open and close states and the latter one between the open and earth states.
Cycle count values will be incremented by one when the digital input state changes
indicate a complete cycle. Generally, one cycle between the open and close states is:
close command -> closed -> open command -> opened. Correspondingly, one cycle
12
between the earth and open states is: free command -> opened -> earth command ->
earthed.
2.2.13 Alarm signal acknowledgement
The active alarm signals of the function block are deactivated by acknowledgement or
by the next successful operation. The alarm signals can be simultaneously
acknowledged by the rising edge of the ACK signal or by a local menu command or a
remote command. If the ACK signal is continuously active, new alarms are still
recognized and the corresponding alarm signals are activated. Acknowledged alarm
signals will be reactivated once the same error condition is encountered again.
The following table describes supported monitoring alarm outputs and how they are
acknowledged:
Monitoring alarm Active period

signal
AOPEN Opening signal remains active until a new successful opening
operation occurs or an acknowledgement is issued
ACLOSE Closing signal remains active until a new successful closing operation
occurs or an acknowledgement is issued
AEARTH Earthing signal remains active until a new successful earthing
AFREE Freeing signal remains active until a new successful freeing operation
2.3 Interlocking bypass mode
The system includes a general interlocking bypass mode (parameter

Control/General/Interl bypass) that overrides all interlocking signals. Activating the
interlocking bypass mode activates the interlocking enable signals of the objects
controlled. Thus, all control operations are possible and the enable signals of the
controllable objects are not checked during the control operations. As long as the
bypass mode is active, the red interlocking LED on the MMI is blinking and
additionally, the special condition is indicated in the assisting window of the MMI.
2.4 Recordings clear
The measured values recorded can be reset locally and remotely via object-related
clear commands.
2.5 Direct object control for remote operation
Via remote communication, the open, close, earth and free commands can be issued to
the object directly without pre-selection. A direct command is possible if the control
13
position and interlocking signals allow the operation. The event E24 or E25 is
generated by the command success.
2.6 Intermediate state suppression
If the state of an object is changed to undefined state, the state change event (E2 or
E3) can be delayed by a certain time value defined by the parameter Event delay.
The event is appropriate for alarm purposes because it can be sent to inform that the
circuit breaker has not reached the correct state within a reasonable time. If the
correct state is reached within the defined delay, the corresponding state change event
is not sent at all.
2.7 Secured object control for remote operation
2.7.1 Secured object control (LON)
The secured object control is an important feature of the communication protocols

that support horizontal communication (because the command reservation and
interlocking signals can be transferred by bus). All secured control operations require
two-step commands; a selection step and an execution step.
The secured object control is responsible for the following tasks:
Command authority - Ensures that the command source is authorized to operate the
object
Mutual exclusion - Ensures that only one command source at a time can control
the object
Interlocking - Allows only safe commands
Execution - Supervises command execution
The virtual LON input and output connections can be configured in the Relay
Configuration Tool while the actual LON network connections of the corresponding
signals are defined in the LNT tool.
During the selection step, the horizontal interlocking signals (virtual LON inputs) are
refreshed in order to guarantee the signal integrity. The refresh operation is executed
only provided the LON is selected as a communication protocol (parameter V18 at
channel 1) and the command timeout (parameter V19 at channel 1) is 1.5s or more.
The actual time for updating the virtual LON inputs is the command timeout minus
200ms. If the command timeout is less than 1.5s, the secured object control is
accomplished as described in paragraph Secured object control (SPA) below.
14
Select step (LON)
1. Select command
The command source is identified from the LON message
2. Command reservation (network broadcast)

The object activates the RESERVE output
The RESERVE output is automatically deactivated when the BLOCK signal is
activated
External RESERVE logic is configuration-dependent
Changes in virtual LON outputs are broadcasted to the network
3. Wait 200 ms
Activating the BLOCK input can inhibit the operation and cause a response
(stage 6)
4. Refresh input data (network poll)

(stage 6)
Virtual LON inputs are updated by polling the network
Timeout causes a response (stage 6)
5. Calculate interlocking
6. Response
The event ack (acknowledged, E25) or nack (not acknowledged, E24) as a
response to the select command
Message of the ack or nack to the remote system
7. The Command started event (E11) on successful selection
SYS COM
6 1
2
Feeder Feeder Feeder
terminal terminal terminal
)LJXUH 6HOHFWVWHS/21
15
Execute step (LON)
8. Execute command
The command source identified from the LON message
In case of a wrong command source, the object will respond with nack
If the interlocking state inhibits the operation, the execution will branch to stage 11
(stage 11)
10. Perform command

Start the output pulse
11. Response
response to the execute command
12. New state indication
13. Release command reservation (nv broadcast)

The RESERVE output will be deactivated
14. The Command completed event (E10)
SYS COM
11 8
14
13
)LJXUH ([HFXWHVWHS/21
16
2.7.2 Secured object control (SPA)
If the configuration does not support horizontal communication via LON, the
following command handling scheme is applied instead of the one described above:
Select step (SPA)
1. Select command
Message of the ack or nack to the remote system according to the present
interlocking state
2. Command reservation
The object will activate the RESERVE output
activated
3. Wait 200 ms
(stage 6)
5. Response
Execute step (SPA)
7. Execute command
interlocking state
Activating the BLOCK input can forbid the operation and cause an execution
branch to stage10
9. Perform command
17
10. Response
12. Release command reservation

2.8 Event logging on command handling
The following facts should be considered regarding the logging of command handling
events. The command nack (E24) or ack (E25) will always follow the given local or
remote command. They should be considered as user interface responses. An
unsuccessful event (E28) is generated as a result of commands issued by digital
inputs i.e. when a conflict occurs due to an interlocking enable signal or when the
forced mode is not selected and a command is given that requires the option.
2.9 Secured object control for local operation
Depending on the configuration of horizontal communication, the secured object

control can be based on SPA or LON solutions. Pressing the MMI control buttons 1
and 0 of a locally selected object starts the required command select step which is
immediately followed by the start of the execution step, provided the selection stage
was successful. The local visual selection of an object in the MIMIC view, i.e.
pressing the select push-button, does not immediately cause the select step.
18
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CO3DC1 is 139 and that for CO3DC2 140.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
19
3.2 Setting values

direction
Fixed pulse S1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/W Selection of fixed pulse width
Forced pulse S2 0 or 1 2) - 1 R/W Execution of control command

regardless of the recent state
(repeated command)
Event delay S3 0.000...60.000 s 0.100 R/W Event delay for undefined state
Open pulse S6 0.04...100.00 s 0.100 R/W Opening time pulse width
Open alarm S7 0.00...100.000 s 10.000 R/W Opening time alarm limit
Close pulse S8 0.04...100.000 s 0.100 R/W Closing time pulse width
Close alarm S9 0.00...100.000 s 10.000 R/W Closing time alarm limit
Earth pulse S20 0.04...100.000 s 0.100 R/W Earthing time pulse width
Earth alarm S21 0.00...100.000 s 10.000 R/W Earthing time alarm limit
Free pulse S22 0.04...100.000 s 0.100 R/W Freeing time pulse width
Free alarm S23 0.00...100.000 s 10.000 R/W Freeing time alarm limit
1)
Fixed pulse 0 = Variable pulse; 1 = Fixed pulse
2)
Forced pulse 0 = Single pulse; 1 = Forced pulse
20

direction
Object state OC V1 0...3 1) - 0 R/M Open/Close state of the
object
Object state FE V2 0...3 2) - 0 R/M Free/Earth state of the object

3)
Interlock close V30 0 or 1 - 1 R/M Close command interlocking
Interlock open V31 0 or 1 3) - 1 R/M Open command interlocking

3)
Interlock earth V32 0 or 1 - 1 R/M Earth command interloocking
Interlock free V33 0 or 1 3) - 1 R/M Free command interlocking
Direct open V4 1 - 0 W Direct open command
Direct close V5 1 - 0 W Direct close command
Direct earth V20 1 - 0 W Direct earth command
Direct free V21 1 - 0 W Direct free command
Open select V6 1 - 0 W Open operation selection of

the secured control
Close select V7 1 - 0 W Close operation selection of

the secured control
Earth select V22 1 - 0 W Earth operation selection of

the secured control
Free select V23 1 - 0 W Free operation selection of

the secured control
Cancel V10 1 - 0 W Deselection of the secured

control
Execute V11 1 - 0 W Execution of the secured

control
Open cycles V12 0...10000 - 0 R/W Cycle count process value

between opening and closing
Last open V14 0.000...100.000 s 0.000 R/M Last opening time
Max open V15 0.000...100.000 s 0.000 R/M Maximum opening time
Last close V17 0.000...100.000 s 0.000 R/M Last closing time
Max close V18 0.000...100.000 s 0.000 R/M Maximum closing time
Last earth V24 0.000...100.000 s 0.000 R/M Last earthing time
Max earth V25 0.000...100.000 s 0.000 R/M Maximum earthing time
Last free V26 0.000...100.000 s 0.000 R/M Last freeing time
Max free V27 0.000...100.000 s 0.000 R/M Maximum freeing time
Earth cycles V28 0...10000 - 0 R/W Cycle count process value

between earth and free state
IV state V34 0 or 1 4) - 0 R/M Object state validity from IV-

signal
21

direction
Block state V35 0 or 1 5) - 0 R/M Object block signal state
6)
Summarized stat V50 Vector value - 0 R/M 10-bit summarized status of
the object
Regist clear V98 1 = Clear - 0 W Clear internal registrations

(Last open, Last close,
Last earth, Last free,
Max open, Max close,
Max earth, Max free)
Alarm ack V99 1=Acknowledge - 0 W Acknowledge alarm
Event mask 1B V102 0...16383 - 16362 R/W Event mask 1 for event
1)
Open/Close state 0 = Undefined (00); 1 = Close (01); 2 = Open (10); 3 = Undefined (11)
2)
Free/Earth state 0 = Undefined (00); 1 = Earth (01); 2 = Free (10); 3 = Undefined (11)
3)
Interlocking 0 = Enabled; 1 = Interlocked
4)
IV state 0 = Valid; 1 = Invalid
5)
Block state 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active
6)
Summarized stat 10-bit vector consisting of the bit values of
[RESERVE BLOCK FREEENA EARTHENA OPENENA CLOSEENA IV
BINEARTH BINOPEN BINCLOSE]:
RESERVE = 512
BLOCK = 256
FREEENA = 128
EARTHENA = 64
OPENENA = 32
CLOSEENA = 16
IV = 8
BINEARTH = 4
BINOPEN = 2
BINCLOSE = 1
For example, if RESERVE = TRUE, BINOPEN = TRUE and the rest = FALSE,
the 10-bit vector is [1000000010] and the parameter gets the value 514
22
3.3.1 Output data

Direction
Open alarm O5 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Opening time alarm status
Close alarm O6 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Closing time alarm status

1)
Earth alarm O7 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Earthing time alarm status
Free alarm O8 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Freeing time alarm status

1)
23
3.3.2 Events
Events 0...31

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 position OC Open (10)
E1 2 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 position OC Close (01)
E2 4 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 position OC Faulty (11)
E3 8 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 position OC Middle (00)
E4 16 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 open command Enabled
E5 32 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 open command Disabled
E6 64 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 close command Enabled
E7 128 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 close command Disabled
E8 256 0 3-state sw. 1 or 2 invalid state Inactive
E9 512 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 invalid state Active
E10 1024 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 command seqence Completed
E11 2048 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 command seqence Started
E12 4096 0 3-state sw. 1 or 2 open output Deactivated
E13 8192 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 open output Activated
E14 16384 0 3-state sw. 1 or 2 close output Deactivated
E15 32768 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 close output Activated
E16 65536 0 3-state sw. 1 or 2 opening time Normal
E17 131072 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 opening time Alarm
E18 262144 0 3-state sw. 1 or 2 closing time Normal
E19 524288 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 closing time Alarm
E24 16777216 0 3-state sw. 1 or 2 command status Nack
E25 33554432 0 3-state sw. 1 or 2 command status Ack
E26 67108864 0 3-state sw. 1 or 2 command blocking Inactive
E27 134217728 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 command blocking Active
E28 268435456 0 3-state sw. 1 or 2 command status Unsuccessful
E30 1073741824 0 3-state sw. 1 or 2 earth output Deactivated
E31 2147483648 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 earth output Activated
24
Events 32...45

coefficient mask
E32 1 0 3-state sw. 1 or 2 free output Deactivated
E33 2 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 free output Activated
E34 4 0 3-state sw. 1 or 2 earthing time Normal
E35 8 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 earthing time Alarm
E36 16 0 3-state sw. 1 or 2 freeing time Normal
E37 32 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 freeing time Alarm
E38 64 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 position FE Free (10)
E39 128 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 position FE Earth (01)
E40 256 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 position FE Faulty (11)
E41 512 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 position FE Middle (00)
E42 1024 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 earth command Enabled
E43 2048 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 earth command Disabled
E44 4096 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 free command Enabled
E45 8192 1 3-state sw. 1 or 2 free command Disabled
25
4. Technical Data

Operation Pulse width accuracy and measuring accuracy:
accuracies
The accuracies depend on the FB execution interval (that can be selected)
and pulse width setting value (if the setting value is a multiple of the
execution interval). The symbol "Tex" denotes the execution interval in ms.
Open, close, earth and free pulse widths:
2% of set value or 10 ms (if the pulse width is a multiple of the execution
interval)
2% of set value or 0...Tex10 ms (if the pulse width is not a multiple of the
execution interval)
Opening, closing, earthing and freeing time measurements:
2% of process pulse width or 0...Tex10 ms
(The default compensation parameter for measurements is 10 ms)
20 ms at the rated frequency fn = 50 Hz

A -
26
1MRS100120 (COCB1) RE_5_ _
1MRS100121 (COCB2) Circuit Breaker
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C (2 state inputs/ 2 control inputs)
Data subject to change without notice (COCB1, COCB2)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 6
2.1.1 General ...................................................................................... 6
2.2.1 Interlocking................................................................................. 7
2.2.2 Protective open .......................................................................... 7
2.2.3 Open operation .......................................................................... 8
2.2.4 Close operation .......................................................................... 8
2.2.6 Object state................................................................................ 9
2.2.8 Opening and closing pulse width.............................................. 10
2.2.9 Opening and closing time monitoring ....................................... 10
2.2.10 Inactive time monitoring ........................................................... 12
2.7.3 Event logging on command handling........................................ 18
3. Parameters and Events .......................................................................... 19
RE_5_ _ COCB1 ABB Automation
COCB2
3.1 General..............................................................................................19
3.2 Setting values ....................................................................................20
3.2.1 Actual settings ..........................................................................20
3.3.1 Output data...............................................................................22
3.3.2 Events ......................................................................................23
4. Technical Data.........................................................................................24
2
ABB Automation COCB1 RE_5_ _
COCB2
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
General functions:
Remote control
Interlocking
MMI indication
Remote indication
Alarm of maximum opening and closing time
Alarm of cycle count exceeding and inactive time
Special features:
Inactive time calculation

Opening time diagnosis monitoring
Closing time diagnosis monitoring
Cycle counter
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the two circuit-breaker function blocks
COCB1 and COCB2 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The function
blocks are identical in operation.
The function block can be used for controlling the open and close states of a circuit
breaker, disconnector or an earthing switch. The function block also takes care of the
user-defined interlocking logics and has guaranteed opening and closing pulse widths
and forced open control operations for protection purposes. The open, close and
undefined states of an object can be indicated both remotely and locally by the
function block. Since the function block is mainly designed for circuit breakers, it will
issue specific alarm signals based on the condition monitoring features.
3
COCB2
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI&2&%DQG&2&%

OPENDIR Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Direct open for protection
4
COCB2

AINACT Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Inactive time alarm
ACYCLES Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Cycle counter alarm
5
COCB2
2.1 Configuration
2.1.1 General
The time stamp values TIMOPEN and TIMCLOSE of the input signals BINOPEN
and BINCLOSE and the IV signal should be connected by means of the variables
BixTime and BixIV in the Relay Configuration Tool. If, for example, BI1 and
BI2 are connected to BINOPEN and BINCLOSE, the connections shown in Figure 2
below could be used for TIMOPEN, TIMCLOSE and IV.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIFRQQHFWLRQVIRUWKH,97,023(1DQG7,0&/26(LQSXWV
6
COCB2
2.2.1 Interlocking
The interlocking allows open and close operations via the OPENENA and
CLOSEENA signals. The control operations are allowed if the interlocking signals for
the concerned operations are TRUE. By default, the corresponding operations are not
permitted provided the inputs are unconnected.

2.2.2 Protective open
The OPENDIR input (Direct open) can be used for protection purposes. This input
should not be confused with the direct open command (parameter V4 in control
settings) that can be given via serial communication. A rising edge (note that
command signals are edge triggered) on the active OPENDIR input causes an OOPEN
pulse that overrides the OCLOSE control pulse. The OPENENA signal does not
affect the protective open operation.
Usually the protection applications should be connected directly to relay output

signals. In this case, the open command pulse for the output relay lasts as long as the
controlling protective open signal is active. If the control block is bypassed in this
way, the closing operation during an active open command pulse should be prevented
by means of additional logic (for an example, see Figure 3 below).
)LJXUH 'LUHFW3527(&7,9(B23(1RXWSXWUHOD\FRQQHFWLRQ
However, this kind of configuration should be used with caution because the close
signal outputs from COCB are only blocked until the PROTECTIVE_OPEN signal
becomes non-active (for further clarification, see Figure 4). Thus, external logic
7
COCB2
cannot prevent the close outputs from being activated. The close pulse activation
during an active PROTECTIVE_OPEN signal can only be eliminated by connecting
PROTECTIVE_OPEN also to the OPENDIR input. For more information, see
sections Opening and closing pulse width and Opening and closing time
monitoring.
PROTECTIVE_OPEN
OCLOSE "Close pulse"
OUTPUT_RELAY_CLOSE
ACLOSE "Close alarm"
cocbprot.CNV
OUTPUT_RELAY_CLOSE_ALARM
)LJXUH ([DPSOHVLJQDOVUHODWHGWRWKHFRQILJXUDWLRQFRQQHFWLRQVLQ)LJXUH
width can be defined by adjusting the actual setting parameter Open pulse.
logic and the closing pulse OCLOSE is not active. In case that open operation is
attempted while OCLOSE is still active, object selection shows the message Open
enable in the MIMIC view. However, the opening operation causes interlocked state
until OCLOSE is deactivated. The interlocking enable signal state is checked on the
rising edge of the open signal and thus, if the interlocking signal blocks the open
signal after the rising edge, the blocking will not cancel the open operation. The
secured object control is a special case (see sections Secured object control for
remote operation and Secured object control for local operation) and does not
directly affect the logic control and the direct control of the object.
In contrast to protective open, the normal open operation is enabled if the OPENENA
signal is active, whereas the logic open control is enabled if the OPENENA signal is
active and the OPEN signal rises or if both the signals are activated at the same time.
If the interlocking is not used, the OPENENA signal should be active.
the corresponding action must be enabled by the interlocking signal (CLOSEENA).
8
COCB2
logic and the opening pulse OOPEN is not active (see also section Open operation).
The interlocking enable signal state is checked on the rising edge of the close signal.
The secured object control is a special case and does not directly affect the logic
control and direct control of the object.
(OPEN, CLOSE) on the rising edge and gives them a certain priority. If the command
is enabled and the output pulse (OOPEN, OCLOSE) is not active, the command is
valid and the concerned output pulse will be started. Otherwise the command will be
ignored as shown in Figure 5 below.
OPEN
CLOSE
OOPEN
OCLOSE
RSHQFRPPDQGSXOVH
The internal command priority determines that the open command takes priority over
the close command. However, the OPENDIR signal on rising edge has the highest
priority and the command pulse for opening is always started. (Note that if the forced
pulse mode is not selected (i.e., selection is single pulse mode) and the object is
already in open state, the opening pulse will not be completed).
2.2.6 Object state
The object state is defined by the two digital inputs BINOPEN and BINCLOSE. The
debounces and short disturbances on an input are eliminated by filtering. The digital
input filtering time can be adjusted in the relay configuration separately for each
digital input used by the function block. For further information, refer to Technical
Reference Manual, General.
9
COCB2
State BINOPEN BINCLOSE

Open ON OFF
Close OFF ON
Undefined 11 ON ON
Undefined 00 OFF OFF
information in indications and event logging. The IV signal is combined from the
validity of inputs BINOPEN and BINCLOSE. The non-active (FALSE) IV signal
shows that the input state is valid, while an active (TRUE) signal indicates the invalid
state. The interlocking is based on the signals OPENENA and CLOSEENA. Thus, if
the validity information is needed for blocking the control operations, additional user-
defined logic should be used. Refer to section Opening and closing pulse width to
see how the state affects the control command pulses.
2.2.8 Opening and closing pulse width
The function block provides two modes for characterizing the opening and closing
pulse widths. The default mode (Variable pulse) causes variable pulse width, which
means that the output pulse is deactivated when the object state shows that the
disconnector or circuit breaker has entered the correct state. This object diagnostics
always uses maximum pulse width, which is defined by a setting parameter (Open
pulse/Close pulse) set by the user.
enabled command pulses regardless of the present object state. However, if the
Single pulse mode is active, the object will check whether the object state already
indicates the correct position so that it can ignore the command and the command
pulse. However, the steady LED indicator for control interlocking is on for 30
seconds unless new select operation is done. If a command is given in the forced
mode and the object is already in the correct position, the maximum pulse width
(setting parameter Open pulse/Close pulse) will be used for the operation.
2.2.9 Opening and closing time monitoring
The function block measures the opening and closing time of the object. The time
measurement starts when the function block activates the specific output pulse
(OOPEN or OCLOSE) and ends when the object state indicates that the object has
reached the correct state or when 100 s timeout has elapsed. Thus, the measured time
10
COCB2
includes the reaction time plus the travel time. The recorded time 100 s indicates an
unsuccessful operation. See the description for the function block CMTRAV1 for
further information about the travelling time measurements. Note that the diagnostic
measurements start when the object itself issues the open command. Therefore, the
OPENDIR input is used for activating the time measurement for protective functions,
which is illustrated in Figure 6 below.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIFRQQHFWLRQIRUWKH23(1',5LQSXWZKHQWLPHPHDVXUHPHQWLV
XVHGIRUSURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQV
OOPEN
BINCLOSE
BINOPEN
TIMOPEN
OCLO SE
BINOPEN
BINCLOSE
TI MCLO SE
)LJXUH 7LPHPHDVXUHPHQWIRURSHQDQGFORVHFRPPDQGV
11
COCB2
The alarm signal AOPEN or ACLOSE is activated if the opening or closing time
monitoring detects a time period greater than or equal to the alarm limit value. Both
the opening and closing time measurements have their own alarm limits (Open
alarm/Close alarm). When an alarm condition is detected, the function block issues
detailed indications of the alarms on the MMI and via the remote system. However, if
the alarm setting limits have been set to zero by the user, the alarm signals will not be
activated. The time measurements are still carried out even if the alarm option is
disabled.
The inputs TIMOPEN and TIMCLOSE are used for the time measurements of the
function block. The process data tells the exact change times of the rising (and
falling) edge(s) of each input and guarantees thus the time measurement accuracy
regardless of the function block execution interval. However, if the time inputs are not
connected, the time measurement accuracy depends on the execution interval of the
function block. The function block compensates the output relay delay and the system
delays internally by deducting them from the measured time. The parameters Open
compens and Close compens are used for compensating the specific output relay
delays of the opening and closing relays.
The latest opening time and closing time are recorded. Additionally, the function
block records the maximum opening and closing times. The recordings can be cleared
all at a time by the command Regist clear.
2.2.10 Inactive time monitoring
The inactive time calculation is performed for the open and close states of the objects.
If the inactive time value (in days) is greater than or equal to the limit value (Inactive
alarm) and the specified alarm moment (Alarm time, exact time value that day) is
at hand, the alarm signal AINACT and the respective notifications (alarm text on
MMI and remote alarm indications) will be activated. However, if the alarm setting
limits have been set to zero by the user, the alarm signals will not be activated.
The cycle count value will be incremented when the digital input state changes
indicate a full cycle. Generally, one cycle is: close command -> closed -> open
command -> opened. If the cycle counter value is greater than or equal to the limit
value (parameter Cycle alarm), an alarm signal (ACYCLES) and the respective
notifications (alarm text on MMI and remote alarm indications) will be activated.
However, if the alarm setting limits have been set to zero by the user, the alarm
signals will not be activated.
The alarm signal acknowledgement deactivates all active alarm signals of the function
block. The alarm signals can be simultaneously acknowledged by the rising edge of
the ACK signal, by a local menu command or by a remote command. If the ACK
12
COCB2
signal is continuously active, new alarms are recognized and the corresponding alarm
signals are activated. Alarm signals remain active until the user acknowledges them
and resets the corresponding measured value (e.g. cycle count) by entering a new
value or until the next successful operation occurs.
Acknowledged alarm signals will be re-activated when the same error condition is
encountered again. The user should reset the appropriate alarm limit in order to get rid
of the particular alarm. The circuit breaker cycle counter, for example, will issue the
alarm signal continuously whenever a cycle count is increased over the cycle alarm
parameter value until the user resets the process cycle count value.
acknowledged:

signal
AOPEN Opening signal remains active until a new successful opening operation
AINACT Active until the circuit breaker has been controlled or an
acknowledgement is issued
ACYCLES Active until the cycle count is cleared or an acknowledgement is issued

clear commands.
Via remote communication, open and close commands can be issued to the object
directly without pre-selection. A direct command is possible if the control position
and interlocking signals allow the operation. The event E24 or E25 is generated
depending on the command success.
13
COCB2
is not sent at all.

object
the object
200 ms. If the command timeout is less than 1.5s, the secured object control is
14
COCB2
Select step (LON)
1. Select command

activated
3. Wait 200 ms
(stage 6)

(stage 6)
6. Response
SYS COM
6 1
2
15
COCB2
Execute step (LON)
8. Execute command
(stage 11)
10. Perform command

11. Response

SYS COM
11 8
14
13
16
COCB2
Select step (SPA)
1. Select command
interlocking state
activated
3. Wait 200 ms
(stage 6)
5. Response
Execute step (SPA)
7. Execute command
interlocking state
branch to stage 10
9. Perform command
17
COCB2
10. Response

2.7.3 Event logging on command handling

18
COCB2
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for COCB1 is 120 and that for COCB2 121.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
19
COCB2
3.2 Setting values

direction

(repeated command)
Inactive alarm S10 0...1825 days 1825 R/W Inactive time alarm limit
Cycle alarm S11 0...10000 - 5000 R/W Cycle count alarm limit
Open compens S12 0.000...0.020 s 0.007 R/W Output relay delay compensation
parameter for opening time
measurements
Close compens S13 0.000...0.020 s 0.007 R/W Output relay delay compensation
parameter for closing time
measurements
1)
2)
20
COCB2

direction
Object state V1 0...3 1) - 0 R/M 2-bit value of the object
state
Interlock close V30 0 or 1 2) - 1 R/M Close command interlocking

2)
Interlock open V31 0 or 1 - 1 R/M Open command interlocking

the secured control

the secured control
Cancel V10 1 - 0 W Cancel of the secured

command
Execute V11 1 - 0 W Execute of the secured

command
Cycle count V12 0...10000 - 0 R/W Cycle count process value
Inactive time V13 0...3650 days 0 R/W Inactive time
Alarm time V40 0.00...23.59 - 8.00 R/W Inactive time alarm time
setting

3)
IV state V34 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Object state validity from IV-
signal

5)
the object

Max open, Max close)
Alarm ack V99 1=Acknowledge - 0 W Acknowledge alarms
21
COCB2

direction
Last change V41 0...2000000000 - 2000000000 R/M Object state change time
(internally used)
1)
Object state 0 = Undefined (00); 1 = Close (01); 2 = Open (10); 3 = Undefined (11)
2)
Interlock close/open 1 = Interlocked; 0 = Enabled
3)
4)
5)
[RESERVE BLOCK 0 0 OPENENA CLOSEENA IV 0 BINOPEN BINCLOSE]:
RESERVE = 512
BLOCK = 256
OPENENA = 32
CLOSEENA = 16
IV = 8
BINOPEN = 2
BINCLOSE = 1
3.3.1 Output data

direction
1)
Close alarm O4 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Closing time alarm status
Inactive alarm O5 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Inactive time alarm status

1)
Cycle alarm O6 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Cycle count alarm status
1)
22
COCB2
3.3.2 Events

Coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Breaker 1 or 2 position Open (10)
E1 2 1 Breaker 1 or 2 position Close (01)
E2 4 1 Breaker 1 or 2 position Faulty (11)
E3 8 1 Breaker 1 or 2 position Middle (00)
E4 16 1 Breaker 1 or 2 open command Enabled
E5 32 1 Breaker 1 or 2 open command Disabled
E6 64 1 Breaker 1 or 2 close command Enabled
E7 128 1 Breaker 1 or 2 close command Disabled
E8 256 0 Breaker 1 or 2 invalid state Inactive
E9 512 1 Breaker 1 or 2 invalid state Active
E10 1024 1 Breaker 1 or 2 command sequence Completed
E11 2048 1 Breaker 1 or 2 command sequence Started
E12 4096 0 Breaker 1 or 2 open output Deactivated
E13 8192 1 Breaker 1 or 2 open output Activated
E14 16384 0 Breaker 1 or 2 close output Deactivated
E15 32768 1 Breaker 1 or 2 close output Activated
E16 65536 0 Breaker 1 or 2 opening time Normal
E17 131072 1 Breaker 1 or 2 opening time Alarm
E18 262144 0 Breaker 1 or 2 closing time Normal
E19 524288 1 Breaker 1 or 2 closing time Alarm
E20 1048576 0 Breaker 1 or 2 inactive time Normal
E21 2097152 1 Breaker 1 or 2 inactive time Alarm
E22 4194304 0 Breaker 1 or 2 cycle count Normal
E23 8388608 1 Breaker 1 or 2 cycle count Alarm
E24 16777216 0 Breaker 1 or 2 command status Nack
E25 33554432 0 Breaker 1 or 2 command status Ack
E26 67108864 0 Breaker 1 or 2 control blocking Inactive
E27 134217728 1 Breaker 1 or 2 control blocking Active
E28 268435456 0 Breaker 1 or 2 command status Unsuccessful
23
COCB2
4. Technical Data

accuracies
The accuracies depend on the function block execution interval (that can be
selected) and pulse width setting value (if the setting value is a multiple of
the execution interval). The symbol Tex denotes the execution interval in
ms.
Open and close pulse widths:
interval)
execution interval)
Opening and closing time measurements:
(Compensation parameters for measurements are 10 ms)
Opening and closing time measurements with high speed power output:
Opening and closing time measurements when the TIMOPEN and TIMCLOSE
inputs are used:
2% of process pulse width or 7.5 ms
(Compensation parameters for measurements are 10ms)
inputs are used with high speed power output:

A -
24
1MRS752348-MUM COCB_
Issued: 10/1997
Circuit Breaker
Data subject to change without notice (2 state inputs/ 2 control inputs)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 6
2.1.1 General ...................................................................................... 6
2.2.1 Interlocking................................................................................. 7
2.2.2 Protective open .......................................................................... 7
2.2.3 Open operation .......................................................................... 8
2.2.4 Close operation .......................................................................... 8
2.2.6 Object state................................................................................ 9
2.2.8 Opening and closing pulse width.............................................. 10
2.2.9 Opening and closing time monitoring ....................................... 10
2.2.10 Inactive time monitoring ........................................................... 12
COCB_ Substation Automation
3.1 General..............................................................................................19
3.2 Setting values ....................................................................................20
3.2.1 Actual settings ..........................................................................20
3.3.1 Output data...............................................................................22
3.3.2 Events ......................................................................................23
4. Technical Data.........................................................................................24
2
Substation Automation COCB_
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
General functions:
Remote control
Interlocking
MMI indication
Remote indication
Alarm of cycle count exceeding and inactive time
Special features:
Inactive time calculation

Opening time diagnosis monitoring
Closing time diagnosis monitoring
Cycle counter
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the two circuit-breaker function blocks
COCB1 and COCB2 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The function
The function block can be used for controlling the open and close states of a circuit
breaker, disconnector or an earthing switch. The function block also takes care of the
user-defined interlocking logics and has guaranteed opening and closing pulse widths
and forced open control operations for protection purposes. The open, close and
undefined states of an object can be indicated both remotely and locally by the
function block. Since the function block is mainly designed for circuit breakers, it will
issue specific alarm signals based on the condition monitoring features.
3
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI&2&%DQG&2&%

OPENDIR Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Direct open for protection
4

AINACT Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Inactive time alarm
ACYCLES Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Cycle counter alarm
5
2.1 Configuration
2.1.1 General
The time stamp values TIMOPEN and TIMCLOSE of the input signals BINOPEN
and BINCLOSE and the IV signal should be connected by means of the variables
BixTime and BixIV in the Relay Configuration Tool. If, for example, BI1 and
BI2 are connected to BINOPEN and BINCLOSE, the connections shown in Figure 2
below could be used for TIMOPEN, TIMCLOSE and IV.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIFRQQHFWLRQVIRUWKH,97,023(1DQG7,0&/26(LQSXWV
6
2.2.1 Interlocking
The interlocking allows open and close operations via the OPENENA and
CLOSEENA signals. The control operations are allowed if the interlocking signals for
the concerned operations are TRUE. By default, the corresponding operations are not

2.2.2 Protective open
The OPENDIR input (Direct open) can be used for protection purposes. This input
should not be confused with the direct open command (parameter V4 in control
settings) that can be given via serial communication. A rising edge (note that
command signals are edge triggered) on the active OPENDIR input causes an OOPEN
pulse that overrides the OCLOSE control pulse. The OPENENA signal does not
affect the protective open operation.
Usually the protection applications should be connected directly to relay output

signals. In this case, the open command pulse for the output relay lasts as long as the
controlling protective open signal is active. If the control block is bypassed in this
way, the closing operation during an active open command pulse should be prevented
by means of additional logic (for an example, see Figure 3 below).
)LJXUH 'LUHFW3527(&7,9(B23(1RXWSXWUHOD\FRQQHFWLRQ
However, this kind of configuration should be used with caution because the close
signal outputs from COCB are only blocked until the PROTECTIVE_OPEN signal
becomes non-active (for further clarification, see Figure 4). Thus, external logic
7
cannot prevent the close outputs from being activated. The close pulse activation
during an active PROTECTIVE_OPEN signal can only be eliminated by connecting
PROTECTIVE_OPEN also to the OPENDIR input. For more information, see
sections Opening and closing pulse width and Opening and closing time
monitoring.
PROTECTIVE_OPEN
OCLOSE "Close pulse"
OUTPUT_RELAY_CLOSE
ACLOSE "Close alarm"
cocbprot.CNV
OUTPUT_RELAY_CLOSE_ALARM
)LJXUH ([DPSOHVLJQDOVUHODWHGWRWKHFRQILJXUDWLRQFRQQHFWLRQVLQ)LJXUH
width can be defined by adjusting the actual setting parameter Open pulse.
attempted while OCLOSE is still active, object selection shows the message Open
enable in the MIMIC view. However, the opening operation causes interlocked state
secured object control is a special case (see sections Secured object control for
remote operation and Secured object control for local operation) and does not
directly affect the logic control and the direct control of the object.
In contrast to protective open, the normal open operation is enabled if the OPENENA
signal is active, whereas the logic open control is enabled if the OPENENA signal is
active and the OPEN signal rises or if both the signals are activated at the same time.
If the interlocking is not used, the OPENENA signal should be active.
the corresponding action must be enabled by the interlocking signal (CLOSEENA).
8
logic and the opening pulse OOPEN is not active (see also section Open operation).
The interlocking enable signal state is checked on the rising edge of the close signal.
The secured object control is a special case and does not directly affect the logic
control and direct control of the object.
OPEN
CLOSE
OOPEN
OCLOSE
RSHQFRPPDQGSXOVH
the close command. However, the OPENDIR signal on rising edge has the highest
priority and the command pulse for opening is always started. (Note that if the forced
pulse mode is not selected (i.e., selection is single pulse mode) and the object is
already in open state, the opening pulse will not be completed).
2.2.6 Object state
9

Open ON OFF
Close OFF ON
Undefined 11 ON ON
10
unsuccessful operation. See the description for the function block CMTRAV1 for
further information about the travelling time measurements. Note that the diagnostic
measurements start when the object itself issues the open command. Therefore, the
OPENDIR input is used for activating the time measurement for protective functions,
which is illustrated in Figure 6 below.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIFRQQHFWLRQIRUWKH23(1',5LQSXWZKHQWLPHPHDVXUHPHQWLV
XVHGIRUSURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQV
OOPEN
BINCLOSE
BINOPEN
TIMOPEN
OCLO SE
BINOPEN
BINCLOSE
TI MCLO SE
11
disabled.
The inputs TIMOPEN and TIMCLOSE are used for the time measurements of the
function block. The process data tells the exact change times of the rising (and
falling) edge(s) of each input and guarantees thus the time measurement accuracy
regardless of the function block execution interval. However, if the time inputs are not
connected, the time measurement accuracy depends on the execution interval of the
function block. The function block compensates the output relay delay and the system
delays internally by deducting them from the measured time. The parameters Open
compens and Close compens are used for compensating the specific output relay
delays of the opening and closing relays.
The latest opening time and closing time are recorded. Additionally, the function
block records the maximum opening and closing times. The recordings can be cleared
all at a time by the command Regist clear.
2.2.10 Inactive time monitoring
The inactive time calculation is performed for the open and close states of the objects.
If the inactive time value (in days) is greater than or equal to the limit value (Inactive
alarm) and the specified alarm moment (Alarm time, exact time value that day) is
at hand, the alarm signal AINACT and the respective notifications (alarm text on
MMI and remote alarm indications) will be activated. However, if the alarm setting
limit (Inactive alarm, S10) has been set to zero by the user, the alarm signal will not
be activated.
command -> opened. If the cycle counter value is greater than or equal to the limit
value (parameter Cycle alarm), an alarm signal (ACYCLES) and the respective
notifications (alarm text on MMI and remote alarm indications) will be activated.
However, if the alarm setting limits have been set to zero by the user, the alarm
signals will not be activated.
The alarm signal acknowledgement deactivates all active alarm signals of the function
block. The alarm signals can be simultaneously acknowledged by the rising edge of
12
the ACK signal, by a local menu command or by a remote command. If the ACK
signal is continuously active, new alarms are recognized and the corresponding alarm
signals are activated. Alarm signals remain active until the user acknowledges them
and resets the corresponding measured value (e.g. cycle count) by entering a new
value or until the next successful operation occurs.
Acknowledged alarm signals will be re-activated when the same error condition is
encountered again. The user should reset the appropriate alarm limit in order to get rid
of the particular alarm. The circuit breaker cycle counter, for example, will issue the
alarm signal continuously whenever a cycle count is increased over the cycle alarm
parameter value until the user resets the process cycle count value.
acknowledged:

signal
AOPEN Opening signal remains active until a new successful opening operation
AINACT Active until the circuit breaker has been controlled or an
acknowledgement is issued
ACYCLES Active until the cycle count is cleared or an acknowledgement is issued

clear commands.
and interlocking signals allow the operation. The event E24 or E25 is generated
depending on the command success.
13
is not sent at all.

object
the object
200 ms. If the command timeout is less than 1.5s, the secured object control is
14
Select step (LON)
1. Select command

activated
3. Wait 200 ms
(stage 6)

(stage 6)
6. Response
SYS COM
6 1
2
15
Execute step (LON)
8. Execute command
(stage 11)
10. Perform command

11. Response

SYS COM
11 8
14
13
16
Select step (SPA)
1. Select command
interlocking state
activated
3. Wait 200 ms
(stage 6)
5. Response
Execute step (SPA)
7. Execute command
interlocking state
branch to stage 10
9. Perform command
17
10. Response


18
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for COCB1 is 120 and that for COCB2 121.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
19
3.2 Setting values

direction

(repeated command)
Inactive alarm S10 0...1825 days 1825 R/W Inactive time alarm limit
Cycle alarm S11 0...10000 - 5000 R/W Cycle count alarm limit
Open compens S12 0.000...0.020 s 0.007 R/W Output relay delay compensation
parameter for opening time
measurements
Close compens S13 0.000...0.020 s 0.007 R/W Output relay delay compensation
parameter for closing time
measurements
1)
2)
20

direction
Object state V1 0...3 1) - 0 R/M 2-bit value of the object
state

2)

the secured control

the secured control
Cancel V10 1 - 0 W Cancel of the secured

command
Execute V11 1 - 0 W Execute of the secured

command
Inactive time V13 0...3650 days 0 R/W Inactive time
Alarm time V40 0.00...23.59 - 8.00 R/W Inactive time alarm time
setting

3)
signal

5)
the object

Alarm ack V99 1=Acknowledge - 0 W Acknowledge alarms
21

direction
Last change V41 0...2000000000 - 2000000000 R/M Object state change time
(internally used)
1)
2)
Interlock close/open 1 = Interlocked; 0 = Enabled
3)
4)
5)
RESERVE = 512
BLOCK = 256
OPENENA = 32
CLOSEENA = 16
IV = 8
BINOPEN = 2
BINCLOSE = 1
3.3.1 Output data

direction
1)
Close alarm O4 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Closing time alarm status
Inactive alarm O5 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Inactive time alarm status

1)
Cycle alarm O6 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Cycle count alarm status
1)
22
3.3.2 Events

Coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Breaker 1 or 2 position Open (10)
E1 2 1 Breaker 1 or 2 position Close (01)
E2 4 1 Breaker 1 or 2 position Faulty (11)
E3 8 1 Breaker 1 or 2 position Middle (00)
E4 16 1 Breaker 1 or 2 open command Enabled
E5 32 1 Breaker 1 or 2 open command Disabled
E6 64 1 Breaker 1 or 2 close command Enabled
E7 128 1 Breaker 1 or 2 close command Disabled
E8 256 0 Breaker 1 or 2 invalid state Inactive
E9 512 1 Breaker 1 or 2 invalid state Active
E10 1024 1 Breaker 1 or 2 command sequence Completed
E11 2048 1 Breaker 1 or 2 command sequence Started
E12 4096 0 Breaker 1 or 2 open output Deactivated
E13 8192 1 Breaker 1 or 2 open output Activated
E14 16384 0 Breaker 1 or 2 close output Deactivated
E15 32768 1 Breaker 1 or 2 close output Activated
E16 65536 0 Breaker 1 or 2 opening time Normal
E17 131072 1 Breaker 1 or 2 opening time Alarm
E18 262144 0 Breaker 1 or 2 closing time Normal
E19 524288 1 Breaker 1 or 2 closing time Alarm
E20 1048576 0 Breaker 1 or 2 inactive time Normal
E21 2097152 1 Breaker 1 or 2 inactive time Alarm
E22 4194304 0 Breaker 1 or 2 cycle count Normal
E23 8388608 1 Breaker 1 or 2 cycle count Alarm
E24 16777216 0 Breaker 1 or 2 command status Nack
E25 33554432 0 Breaker 1 or 2 command status Ack
E26 67108864 0 Breaker 1 or 2 control blocking Inactive
E27 134217728 1 Breaker 1 or 2 control blocking Active
E28 268435456 0 Breaker 1 or 2 command status Unsuccessful
23
4. Technical Data

accuracies
selected) and pulse width setting value (if the setting value is a multiple of
the execution interval). The symbol Tex denotes the execution interval in
ms.
interval)
execution interval)
Opening and closing time measurements with high speed power output:
inputs are used:
(Compensation parameters for measurements are 10ms)
inputs are used with high speed power output:

A -
24
1MRS752349-MUM COCBDIR
Issued: 10/1997
Direct Open for CBs via MMI
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 3
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 4

3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 5
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 5
3.3 Events ................................................................................................. 5
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 6
COCBDIR Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Provides a user-defined open pulse via the MMI push-button combination up-
arrow and 0
Can also be controlled remotely
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the COCBDIR function block used in
products based on the RED 500 Platform. The function block is mainly designed for
the direct open of the circuit breaker.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROIRUWKHGLUHFWRSHQRIWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU

OPEN Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Direct open pulse
2
Substation Automation COCBDIR
2.1 Configuration
The OPEN signal can be connected directly to the relay output signal or to the
OPENDIR input of the function block COCB1 or COCB2.
Pressing a certain button combination will cause an OPEN pulse, the duration of
which can be defined by the user.
3
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for COCBDIR is 141.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
4
Substation Automation COCBDIR
3.2 Setting values

direction
Pulse width S1 0.1...300.0 s 0.1 R/W Output pulse width

direction
Output pulse V1 1=Activate - 0 W Remote trigger for output pulse
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
3.3 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 Breaker open command Deactivated
E1 2 1 Breaker open command Activated
5
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies Pulse width accuracy:
The accuracies depend on the function block execution interval (that

can be selected) and the pulse width setting value, i.e. whether the
setting value is a multiple of the execution interval or not. The
symbol Tex denotes the execution interval in ms.
Open pulse width:
2% of set value or 10 ms (if the pulse width is a multiple of the

execution interval)
2% of set value or 0...Tex10 ms (if the pulse width is not a



A -
B Corrected: MMI indications could not be cleared with the C button in revision A
6
1MRS752350-MUM CODC_
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C/1.2.2002
Disconnector
Data subject to change without notice (2 state inputs/ 2 control inputs)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.1.1 General ...................................................................................... 5
2.2.1 Interlocking................................................................................. 6
2.2.2 Open operation .......................................................................... 6
2.2.3 Close operation .......................................................................... 7
2.2.5 Object state................................................................................ 7
2.2.6 Object state validity .................................................................... 8
2.2.7 Opening and closing pulse width................................................ 8
2.2.8 Opening and closing time monitoring ......................................... 9
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 16

3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 17
CODC_ Substation Automation
3.2.1 Actual settings ..........................................................................17

3.3.1 Output data...............................................................................19
3.3.2 Events ......................................................................................20
4. Technical Data.........................................................................................21
2
Substation Automation CODC_
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
General functions:
Remote control
Interlocking
MMI indication
Remote indication
Alarm of the maximum opening and closing time
Special features:
Opening time monitoring

Closing time monitoring
Cycle counter
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the five disconnector function blocks
CODC1...CODC5 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The function
The function block CODC_ can be used for controlling the open and close states of a
disconnector or an earthing switch. The function block also takes care of the user-
defined interlocking logics and has guaranteed opening and closing pulse widths. The
open, close and undefined states of an object can be indicated both remotely and
locally by the function block.
3
)LJXUH $VDQH[DPSOHWKHIXQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI&2'&


4
2.1 Configuration
2.1.1 General
Configuration Tool. If BI1 and BI2, for example, are connected to BINOPEN and
BINCLOSE, the connections shown in Figure 2 below could be used for IV.
5
2.2.1 Interlocking
The interlocking allows open and close operations via the signals OPENENA and
CLOSEENA. The control operations are allowed if the interlocking signals for the
concerned operations are TRUE. By default, the corresponding actions are not

function blocks, which means that the function blocks will internally ignore the status
of the interlocking signals and permit any control operation.
An open command can be issued locally, remotely or by the logic OPEN signal, and
width can be defined by adjusting the setting parameter Open pulse.
attempted while OCLOSE is still active, object selection shows message Open
enable in MIMIC view. However, the opening operation causes interlocked state
secured object control is a special case (see sections If the state of an object is
changed to undefined state, the state change event (E2 or E3) can be delayed by a
certain time value defined by the parameter Event delay. The event is appropriate
for alarm purposes because it can be sent to inform that the circuit breaker has not
reached the correct state within a reasonable time. If the correct state is reached
within the defined delay, the corresponding state change event is not sent at all.
Secured object control for remote operation and Secured object control for local
operation) and does not directly affect the logic control and the direct control of the
object.
The normal open operation is enabled if the OPENENA signal is active, whereas the
logic open control is enabled if the OPENENA signal is active and the OPEN signal
used, the OPENENA signal should be active.
6
the corresponding actions must be enabled by the interlocking signal (CLOSEENA).
logic and the opening pulse OOPEN is not active (see section Open operation). The
interlocking enable signal state is checked on the rising edge of the close signal. The
secured object control is a special case and does not directly affect the logic control
and direct control of the object.
OPEN
CLOSE
OOPEN
OCLOSE
RSHQFRPPDQGSXOVH
the close command.
2.2.5 Object state
7

Open ON OFF
Close OFF ON
Undefined 11 ON ON
8
unsuccessful operation.
O OPEN
BI NCLOSE
BINOPEN
OCLO SE
BINOPEN
BINCLOSE
disabled.
The time measurement accuracy depends on the execution interval of the function
block. The function block compensates the output relay delay and the system delays
internally by deducting them from the measured time.
The latest opening time and closing time are recorded (Last open/Last close).
Additionally, the function block records the maximum opening and closing times
(Max open/Max close). The recordings can be cleared all at a time by the command
Regist clear.
9
command -> opened.
The active alarm signals of the function block are deactivated by acknowledgement or
by the next successful operation. The alarm signals can be simultaneously
acknowledged by the rising edge of the ACK signal or by a local menu command or a
remote command. If the ACK signal is continuously active, new alarms are still
recognized and the corresponding alarm signals are activated. Acknowledged alarm
signals will be reactivated once the same error condition is encountered again.
acknowledged:
Monitoring alarm signal Active period

AOPEN Opening signal remains active until a new successful
opening operation occurs or an acknowledgement is issued
ACLOSE Closing signal remains active until a new successful closing

clear commands.
10
and interlocking signals allow the operation. The event E24 or E25 is generated by the
command success.
is not sent at all.

object
the object
200ms. If the command timeout is less than 1.5s, the secured object control is
11
Select step (LON)
1. Select command

activated
3. Wait 200 ms
(stage 6)

(stage 6)
6. Response
SYS COM
6 1
2
12
Execute step (LON)
8. Execute command
(stage 11)
10. Perform command

11. Response

SYS COM
11 8
14
13
13
Select step (SPA)
1. Select command
interlocking state
activated
3. Wait 200 ms
(stage 6)
5. Response
Execute step (SPA)
7. Execute command
interlocking state
branch to stage 10
9. Perform command
14
10. Response


15
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channels for CODC_ are the following:
Function block Channel
CODC1 122
CODC2 123
CODC3 124
CODC4 125
CODC5 126
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
16
3.2 Setting values

direction

(repeated command)
Event delay S3 0.000...60.000 S 0.100 R/W Event delay for undefined state
Open pulse S6 0.04...100.00 S 0.100 R/W Opening time pulse width
Open alarm S7 0.00...100.000 S 10.000 R/W Opening time alarm limit
Close pulse S8 0.04...100.00 S 0.100 R/W Closing time pulse width
Close alarm S9 0.00...100.000 S 10.000 R/W Closing time alarm limit

1)
2)
17

direction
Object state V1 0...3 1) - 0 R/M 2-bit state of the object

2)

the secured control

the secured control
Cancel V10 1 - 0 W Deselection of the secured

control
Execute V11 1 - 0 W Execution of the secured

control

3)
signal

5)
the object

Alarm ack V99 1 = Acknowledge - 0 W Acknowledge alarm
18

direction
Event mask 4 V107 0...521142271 134917887 R/W Event mask 4 for event
1)
2)
Interlocking type 1 = Interlocked; 0 = Enabled
3)
4)
5)
RESERVE = 512
BLOCK = 256
OPENENA = 32
CLOSEENA = 16
IV = 8
BINOPEN = 2
BINCLOSE = 1
3.3.1 Output data

direction
Close alarm O4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Closing time alarm status

1)
19
3.3.2 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Disconnector (1...5) position Open (10)
E1 2 1 Disconnector (1...5) position Close (01)
E2 4 1 Disconnector (1...5) position Faulty (11)
E3 8 1 Disconnector (1...5) position Middle (00)
E4 16 1 Disconnector (1...5) open command Enabled
E5 32 1 Disconnector (1...5) open command Disabled
E6 64 1 Disconnector (1...5) close command Enabled
E7 128 1 Disconnector (1...5) close command Disabled
E8 256 0 Disconnector (1...5) invalid state Inactive
E9 512 1 Disconnector (1...5) invalid state Active
E10 1024 1 Disconnector (1...5) command seq. Completed
E11 2048 1 Disconnector (1...5) command seq. Started
E12 4096 0 Disconnector (1...5) open output Deactivated
E13 8192 1 Disconnector (1...5) open output Activated
E14 16384 0 Disconnector (1...5) close output Deactivated
E15 32768 1 Disconnector (1...5) close output Activated
E16 65536 0 Disconnector (1...5) opening time Normal
E17 131072 1 Disconnector (1...5) opening time Alarm
E18 262144 0 Disconnector (1...5) closing time Normal
E19 524288 1 Disconnector (1...5) closing time Alarm
E24 16777216 0 Disconnector (1...5) command status Nack
E25 33554432 0 Disconnector (1...5) command status Ack
E26 67108864 0 Disconnector (1...5) control blocking Inactive
E27 134217728 1 Disconnector (1...5) control blocking Active
E28 268435456 0 Disconnector (1...5) command status Unsuccessful
20
4. Technical Data

accuracies
selected) and pulse width setting value (if the setting value is a multiple of the
execution interval). The symbol Tex denotes the execution interval in ms.
interval)
execution interval)
(Compensation parameter for measurements is 10 ms)

A -
21
1MRS752351-MUM COIND_
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C/1.2.2002
Object Indication
Data subject to change without notice (2 state inputs)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 General ............................................................................................... 3
2.2 Configuration....................................................................................... 3
2.3 Object state......................................................................................... 4
2.4 Object state validity ............................................................................. 4
2.5 Cycle count measuring........................................................................ 4
2.6 Intermediate state suppression ........................................................... 4
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 5

3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 6
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 6
3.3 Events ................................................................................................. 7
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 8
COIND_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
General functions:
- MMI indication
- Remote indication
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the eight object indication function blocks
COIND1...COIND8 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The function
The function block COIND_ indicates remotely and locally the open, close and
undefined states of a disconnector or an earthing switch.
)LJXUH $VDQH[DPSOHIXQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI&2,1'
2
Substation Automation COIND_
2.1 General
2.2 Configuration
Configuration Tool. If, for example, BI1 and BI2 are connected to BINOPEN and
BINCLOSE, the connections shown in figure 2 below could be used for IV.
3
2.3 Object state
digital input filtering time can be adjusted in the relay configuration separately for
each digital input used by the function block.

Open ON OFF
Close OFF ON
Undefined 11 ON ON
2.4 Object state validity
information in indications and event logging. The IV can be combined from the
validity of inputs BINOPEN and BINCLOSE. A non-active signal (FALSE) shows
that the input state is valid, while an active signal indicates the invalid state.
2.5 Cycle count measuring
The cycle count value is incremented by one when the digital input state changes
indicate a full cycle. Generally, one cycle is: close command closed open
command opened.
is not sent at all.
4
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channels for the object indication function blocks are
the following:
COIND1 127
COIND2 128
COIND3 129
COIND4 130
COIND5 131
COIND6 132
COIND7 133
COIND8 134
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
5
3.2 Setting values

direction

direction
Object state V1 0...3 1) - 0 R/M 2-bit state of the object

2)
signal
Summarized stat V50 0...3, - 0 R/M 4-bit summarized status of the

811 3) object
1)
Object state 0 = Undefined (00); 1 = Close (01) ; 2 = Open (10) ; 3 = Undefined (11)
2)
3)
Summarized stat 4-bit vector consisting of the bit values of [IV 0 BINOPEN BINCLOSE ]:
IV = 8, BINOPEN = 2, BINCLOSE = 1
0 = [0000], 1 = [0001], 2 = [0010], 3 = [0011], 8 = [1000], 9 = [1001],
10 = [1010], 11 = [1011]
6
3.3 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Indication (1...8) position Open (10)
E1 2 1 Indication (1...8) position Close(01)
E2 4 1 Indication (1...8) position Faulty(11)
E3 8 1 Indication (1...8) position Middle(00)
E8 256 0 Indication (1...8) invalid state Inactive
E9 512 1 Indication (1...8) invalid state Active
7
4. Technical Data


A -
8
1MRS752352-MUM COLOCAT
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C/1.2.2002
Logic Control Position Selector
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 General ............................................................................................... 4
2.2 Configuration....................................................................................... 4

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 6
3.3 Events ................................................................................................. 7
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 8
COLOCAT Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Facilitates flexible selection of the control position, offering four different control
position settings: remote, local, disabled and logic
The control position can be changed via the MMI panel with the R/L key and the
logic signals, provided the logic control position setting has been activated via the
MMI
The control position status information and interlocking bypass status for other
application programs
Password-protected control position setting
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the logic control position selector COLOCAT
Normally, the device control position setting can be changed via the MMI by
choosing the remote, local or disabled position. The COLOCAT function block
enables the logic control position as an additional feature. The control position setting
can only be changed via the MMI and it allows the control of all objects.
In remote position, the control objects can only be controlled via remote
communication and, accordingly, the local position only enables local operation via
the MMI. The disabled position inhibits the control of objects. The control position
setting is password-protected.
The logic position setting allows the logic control position via the inputs BINLOCAL
and BINREMOTE, which facilitates the flexible selection of control position. The
status outputs can be used for an application-specific logic.
Note:
The control position setting, which can be selected when the function block
COLOCAT is used, refers to selecting the disabled, local, remote or logic state
The logic setting facilitates the digital control position
The control position refers to the selected position, i.e. disabled, local or remote
2
Substation Automation COLOCAT
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI&2/2&$7

BINLOCAL Digital signal (BOOL) Local position control for logic setting
BINREMOTE Digital signal (BOOL) Remote position control for logic setting

LOCAL Digital signal (BOOL) Recent local position status
REMOTE Digital signal (BOOL) Recent remote position status
BYPASS Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Interlocking bypass status
LOGIC Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Logic position setting activation
flag
3
2.1 General
The control position state can be accessed via the parameter F002V005.
2.2 Configuration
As a default, the control position setting is in disabled state and can be changed via
the MMI. If the device does not include an MMI, the position is automatically remote,
provided the function block COLOCAT has not been instanced. In case the function
block has been instanced in the Relay Configuration Tool, the control position setting
is logic and can be changed by means of the digital inputs. In such a configuration, the
BINLOCAL input should be FALSE.
Digital output combinations:
Control position Output: LOCAL Output: REMOTE

LOCAL ON OFF
REMOTE OFF ON
DISABLED OFF OFF
If the control position setting is logic, the digital inputs have the following effect:
Input Output
BINLOCAL BINREMOTE LOCAL REMOTE
ON OFF ON OFF
OFF ON OFF ON
ON ON OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF
The output signal BYPASS reflects the present status of the control bypass mode. The
status of the global bypass mode can be activated via the parameter F002V004 for all
control objects. The LOGIC output reflects the activation of the logic position via the
parameter F002V007. The figure below describes the basic internal structure of the
function block.
4
R\L Control position setting (F002V007)

Disable
Local
Remote
Logic Disable Control position (F002V005)
Local Disable
Remote Local
Remote
instance
COLOCAT
BINLOCAL LOCAL
BINREMOTE REMOTE
BYPASS
LOGIC
Interlocking bypas mode (F002V004)
)LJXUH ,QWHUQDOVWUXFWXUHRIWKH&2/2&$7IXQFWLRQEORFN
5
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for COLOCAT is 142.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
6

direction
Logic setting V1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R Reset logic position setting
Binary position V2 0...2 2) - 0 R/M Recent digital input position (to be

validated by the system software)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
1)
Logic setting 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active
2)
Binary position 0 = Disable state; 1 = Local state (BINLOCAL active); 2 = Remote state
(BINREMOTE active)
3.3 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 Logic position setting Inactive
E1 2 1 Logic position setting Active
7
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies The validation delay of the digital setting of the control position is
typically 2 s.


A -
8
1MRS100143 RE_5_ _
Issued: 3/2000
Version: A
Power factor controller
Data subject to change without notice (COPFC)
Contents
1. Introduction.............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features .............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
1.3 Input description .................................................................................. 3
2. Description of Operation......................................................................... 5
2.1 Configuration ....................................................................................... 5
2.2 Operating principle of the power factor controller ................................ 5
2.2.1 Operating principle when the limit values are exceeded ............. 7
2.2.2 Control parameters of calculation ............................................... 8
2.2.3 Overvoltage inhibit...................................................................... 9
2.2.4 Undercurrent and overvoltage protection.................................... 9
2.3 Switching sequences........................................................................... 9
2.3.1 Linear mode ............................................................................. 10
2.3.2 Circular mode ........................................................................... 11
2.4 Control functions ............................................................................... 12
2.5 Alarms ............................................................................................... 13
2.6 Manual mode..................................................................................... 13
2.7 Day / night target cos switching ....................................................... 14
2.8 Testing mode..................................................................................... 14
2.8.1 General .................................................................................... 14
2.8.2 Test results............................................................................... 15
2.9 Resetting ........................................................................................... 16
3. Parameters and Events ......................................................................... 17
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 17
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 18
3.2.1 Setting group 1 ......................................................................... 18
3.2.2 Control settings ........................................................................ 19
3.2.3 Manual command..................................................................... 20
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 20
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 21
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 21
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 22
4. Technical Data ....................................................................................... 23
RE_5_ _ COPFC ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Load power control based on the target cos (target Power Factor)
Adjustable sensitivity of the operation
Settable limit values for determining a safe operating area
Eight possible switching sequences for selecting the capacitor combination
Detection and alarm of three possible fault conditions
Manual and automatic operation modes
Testing mode for facilitating the commissioning and for fine adjusting the settings
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the power factor controller function block
COPFC used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The function block is designed to be used as an intelligent control unit for controlling
the switching of capacitor banks based on the reactive power requirements of the
load.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORIWKHSRZHUIDFWRUFRQWUROOHU&23)&
2
ABB Automation COPFC RE_5_ _

BINOPEN_1 Digital signal (BOOL, Open status of the circuit breaker 1
active high)
BINCLOSE_1 Digital signal (BOOL, Close status of the circuit breaker 1

active high)
active high)
active high)
active high)
active high)

active high)
active high)
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, Input for blocking the automatic and
active high) manual operations of COPFC
DN_COSPHI Digital signal (BOOL, Control input for switching between the
active high) "Target day cos PF" and the "Target
night PF"
DISCONNECT Digital signal (BOOL, Control input for immediately
active high) disconnecting all capacitor banks
simultaneously
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, Signal for resetting the alarm signals and
pos.edge recorded data of COPFC
3

BANK1_OPEN Digital signal (BOOL, active Open command pulse for the
high) capacitor bank 1
BANK1_CLOSE Digital signal (BOOL, active Close command pulse for the
CONN_BANKS Unsigned integer Banks that are on, e.g 14 means
that the 1st and 4th banks are
connected
REQ_UP Digital signal (BOOL, active Duration demand time the timer
high) was started to add step(s)
REQ_DOWN Digital signal (BOOL, active Duration demand time the timer
high) was started to remove step(s)
CONT_FAIL Digital signal (BOOL, active A control operation failed or an
high) undefined state of a circuit
breaker was detected
ALAR_Q Digital signal (BOOL, active Overcompensation or
high) undercompensation alarm
ALAR_PUMP Digital signal (BOOL, active Pumping situation alarm

high)
TESTING Digital signal (BOOL, active Indicates whether the automatic
high) testing sequence is in progress or
not
4
2.1 Configuration
Phase currents can be measured by means of conventional current transformers or

Rogowski coils and voltages by means of conventional voltage transformers or
voltage dividers. The analogue inputs are configured in the Relay Configuration Tool.
A special dialogue box in the configuration tool is also used for selecting the analogue
channel combination used for power measurement.
Analogue channel selection for configuration
The following analogue channel combinations are available in the dialogue box of the
configuration tool. When all the phase currents and phase voltages are known, P and
Q are calculated from positive-sequence components. The correct channel
combination is selected via the configuration tool.
Channel combination Comments
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
U1, U2, U3 and IL1, IL2, IL3 Positive-sequence power

U12, U23 and IL1, IL3 Aron power; I0 is assumed to be 0
U1 and IL1 Phase currents and voltages are assumed to be symmetric
Note that when the COPFC function block is used, the power and energy
measurement must be selected for one of the above channel combinations via the
resource settings dialogue Measurements of the Relay Configuration Tool.
2.2 Operating principle of the power factor controller
The capacitor banks are switched in or out to adjust the load power as close as
possible to the targeted power factor value. One to four capacitor banks can be
controlled by the COPFC function block.
5
In short, the operating principle of COPFC is the following: The function block
measures the active power P, and the allowed reactive power Q can be calculated
using the set target cos . If the measured reactive power differs enough from the
allowed reactive power, the function block switches a capacitor on or off. The basic
variables used by the COPFC function block are described in Figure 2 below.
measured cos
measured Q
target cos allowed Q
measured P P
Q measured Q
inductive
=positive
allowed Q
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLQJSULQFLSOHRI&23)&EDVHGRQWKHWDUJHWFRVFDOFXODWLRQ
If the measured reactive power is greater than the allowed reactive power, the
differential power Q is positive, which means that the network is too inductive. On
the other hand, if the measured reactive power is smaller than the allowed reactive
power, the differential power Q is negative and the network is too capacitive. The
switching operations of a capacitor compared with the Q value are presented in
Figure 3 below.
Capacitor added
100 %
+Q 70 %
= "Sensitivity Ind"
Q=0
t
Q 60 %
= "Sensitivity Cap"
100 %
Capacitor removed
)LJXUH 3ULQFLSOHRIVZLWFKLQJRSHUDWLRQV
6
The sensitivity for switching operations can be adjusted by changing the sensitivity
percentages with the parameters Sensitivity Ind and Sensitivity Cap. In Figure 3,
the operation is illustrated with the default values of these parameters. If the
sensitivity is set to be 100 %, a capacitor will be added or removed when the
calculated differential power Q is equal to the step size of the capacitor to be
switched. The operation is more sensitive if a value below 100 % is set and vice
versa.
The parameters presented in Figure 3 make it possible to set the operation to be

unsymmetrical, which means that the sensitivity limits for the inductive side and the
capacitive side can be different.
It is recommended that the summarized value of the sensitivities (Sensitivity Ind +

Sensitivity Cap) should be greater than 130 %, because a smaller value may result in a
pumping situation where a capacitor bank is switched in or out multiple times
sequentially with approximately an interval equal to the discharge time of the
capacitor bank.
2.2.1 Operating principle when the limit values are exceeded
In addition to the target cos , the COPFC function block has the two limiting
parameters Maximum Q limit and Minimum Q limit for determining the proper
operation. These parameters are used to keep the reactive power within safe limits.
Figure 4 presents a situation where the load takes a lot of power but the power factor
cos of the network is equal to the target cos . In this case the basic target cos -
calculation presented in Figure 2 and Figure 3 does not cause any action because the
differential power Q is zero and, consequently, no switchings will take place.
Accordingly, additional limits have to be set to prevent the load from exceeding the
permissible absolute value limits for the reactive power.
Q
Calculated target replaced
by "Maximum Q limit"
"Maximum
Q limit"
calculated
target
target cos
"Minimum P
Q limit"
)LJXUH ([DPSOHZKHQWKHFDOFXODWHGWDUJHWIRUUHDFWLYHSRZHULVUHSODFHGE\
WKHOLPLWYDOXH
If COPFC has switched on all the capacitor banks but the measured reactive power
still exceeds the Maximum Q limit, the function block will give the alarm Q limit
exceeded. The same alarm is given if all the capacitor banks have been disconnected
but the measured reactive power still remains below the Minimum Q limit.
7
2.2.2 Control parameters of calculation
The parameter Calc. method can have two values: 1) Normal or 2) Integral. As
a default, the calculation is performed in the normal mode but when the integral
mode is used, the measured reactive power will be more strongly filtered. The
integral mode is useful for situations where the load is varying and the demand is
thus continuously cancelled before the end of the Duration demand delay.
The parameter Cont. principle defines whether the target is reached
progressively or directly. As a default, the control principle is set to be
progressive, which means that capacitors are switched in or out step by step to
reach the cos target. The other possibility, direct switching, means that
intermediary steps between two non-contiguous switching levels are cancelled.
The parameter Duration demand is a delay for which the need for switching
should be valid before switching in or out is done. If, for example, the calculated
need is to add or remove one capacitor step and the setting parameter Duration
demand is set to be 30 s, the need (+1 or -1) should be valid for 30 s before
COPFC sends the control signal (open or close).
If the need falls to zero for less than 1 second, the time counter is not started from
the beginning, whereas if the need remains zero for more than 1 second, the time
counter is set to zero. When the calculated need is greater than +1 or -1, the time
counter will get a value that is half of the duration demand, i.e.15 s in this
example.
The operation of the parameter Duration demand and the outputs REQ_UP and
REQ_DOWN is illustrated in Figure 5 below.
Capacitor added
Q = +1
Q = 0
t
"Duration demand"
Q = -1
Q = -2
Capacitor(s) removed
REQ_UP
REQ_DOWN
DuratDem
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKHSDUDPHWHU'XUDWLRQGHPDQGDQGWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ
RXWSXWV
8
2.2.3 Overvoltage inhibit
The overvoltage inhibit level can be set with the parameter Overvolt. limit. When
COPFC measures a voltage greater than this setting, it will not switch in additional
capacitor steps, because adding the steps in this situation could increase the voltage to
a harmful level.
The parameter Overvolt. limit can be given the same value regardless of whether
phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth voltages are measured. In other words, the setting
1.0 x Un always refers to a full phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth voltage.
2.2.4 Undercurrent and overvoltage protection
The undercurrent protection is provided by a different function block, OL3Cap.

Figure 10 describes the station-level layout for different functions. As shown in the
picture, every capacitor bank has its own protection relay and undercurrent protection
is one of the protection functions included in these relays. See the manual of OL3Cap
for further information.
The function block OL3Cap is specially designed for protection against overload
produced by harmonic currents and overvoltage. Accordingly, OL3Cap should be
used as the main overload protection. Moreover, the overvoltage protection function
block OV3Low can be used for back-up protection, when required. When the
measured voltage exceeds the setting limit of OV3Low, the trip output is activated
and an open signal is sent to the capacitor banks to switch them off.
Note! OV3Low should only be used as back-up protection because the actual
overload protection function OL3Cap provides more accurate calculation of the actual
voltage stress over the capacitor when e.g. the influence of the harmonics is taken into
account.
2.3 Switching sequences
The switching sequences allowed by COPFC are:
1:1:1:1......1 linear
1:1:1:1......1 circular
1:1:2:2......1,2 circular
1:2:2:2......2 linear
1:2:2:2......2 circular
1:2:4:4......4 linear
1:2:4:4......4 circular
1:2:4:8
In above switching sequence alternatives, the ratio indicates the relative sizes of the
second, third and fourth capacitor banks in relation to the first bank. For example,
9
1:2:4:4 means that the capacitance of the second bank is twice that of the first bank,
whereas both the third and the fourth banks are four times the size of the first
capacitor bank.
2.3.1 Linear mode
A control sequence with the linear mode is especially useful for controlling harmonic
filters. Figure 6 and Figure 7 present the operating principle of the linear mode.
Capacitor steps
Request 1 2 3 4
+ X
+ X X
+ X X X
X X
X
+ X X
+ X X X
+ X X X X
X X X
X X
X
)LJXUH ([DPSOHIRUDFRQWUROOLQJVHTXHQFHZKHQ7\SHRIVHTLVOLQHDU
Capacitor steps
Request 1 2 3 4 Target steps
+ X 1
+ X 2
+ X X 3
+ X X 4
X X 3
X 2
X 1
+ X 2
+ X X 3
+ X X 4
+ X X X 5
10
2.3.2 Circular mode
The objective of the circular mode is to switch the capacitors equally on and off, so
that in the long run, the capacitors are evenly worn out because the operation number
for each bank is approximately the same. The controlling sequence with the circular
mode is most suitable for capacitor banks that have equal step sizes. Some example
sequences for the circular mode are presented in Figure 8 and Figure 9.
Capacitor steps
Request 1 2 3 4
+ X
+ X X
+ X X X
X X
X
+ X X
+ X X X
+ X X X X
X X X
X X
X
)LJXUH ([DPSOHIRUDFRQWUROOLQJVHTXHQFHZKHQ7\SHRIVHTLV
FLUFXODU
Capacitor steps
Request Target steps
1 2 3 4
+ X 1
+ X 2
+ X X 3
+ X X 4
X X 3
+ X X 4
X X 3
+ X X 4
X X 3
X 2
X 1
FLUFXODU
11
2.4 Control functions
The function block COPFC sends a request signal of control commands, via LON
network or using the digital outputs, to a capacitor bank that is desired to be opened or
closed. If the control requests and/or state information from the circuit breakers are
transmitted via LON network, the network connection between COPFC and the
capacitor banks should be configured with the Lon Network Tool.
When COPFC detects that the desired state has been reached after the request signal,
it deactivates the particular output.
Each relay that protects a certain capacitor bank must have a control function block
COCB_ for a circuit breaker. The actual control pulses for the circuit breaker are
formed by this function block. COCB_ includes several useful functions that can be
set by the user, e.g.:
Adjustable pulse width for opening and closing

Possibility to build interlocking logic for special situations
Cycle count diagnostics, i.e. the operation number of a circuit breaker is counted
COPFC
REF 545
V open / close request signal
Loads
REF 543 REF 543 REF 543
Protection
- unbalance
- overload
- undercurrent
Control
- COCB
)LJXUH 6WDWLRQOHYHOOD\RXWIRUGLIIHUHQWIXQFWLRQV7KHFRQQHFWLRQVPDUNHGZLWK
GDVKHGOLQHLQDERYHILJXUHFDQEHLPSOHPHQWHGHLWKHUZLWKVHSDUDWHZLUHV
IRUHDFKRSHQDQGFORVHUHTXHVWRUZLWK/21FRPPXQLFDWLRQE\
FRQILJXULQJWKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQEHWZHHQIHHGHUWHUPLQDOVZLWKWKH/21
1HWZRUN7RRO
12
2.5 Alarms
The COPFC function block detects and gives alarms for the following fault
conditions:
Q limit exceeded: The alarm output ALAR_Q for over- or undercompensation is

activated if COPFC has switched on all the capacitor banks, but there is still too
much inductive power in the network and the alarm limit is exceeded. In other
words, the capacitor bank is not able to produce enough reactive power to the
network. On the other hand, the alarm is also activated when all the capacitor
banks have been switched off, but the network is still too capacitive and the
measured reactive power falls below the minimum limit. The alarm delay is 30
seconds.
Pumping situation alarm: The alarm output ALAR_PUMP is activated if COPFC
adds and removes capacitor steps several times sequentially with approximately
an interval equal to the Discharge time.
Control operation failed: When COPFC has sent a request signal (open or close)
but does not detect the right state information within five seconds from the
starting of the request signal, the function block will activate the CONT_FAIL
output to indicate that the control operation failed or the circuit breaker is in the
undefined state. If the CONT_FAIL alarm is detected, the function block will not
try to control the capacitor bank in question. In other words, the failed capacitor
bank is skipped until the right state information is detected by the function block
or the user resets the CONT_FAIL alarm.
The CONT_FAIL alarm is also activated if the capacitor protection of a bank
operates within one second from the moment COPFC has switched the capacitor
bank on.
When any of these conditions is detected, the alarm signal in question and the
respective notifications will be activated: an alarm text will appear on the MMI and
the event sending will activate the remote indications of the alarms.
An alarm signal is deactivated when the reason for the alarm vanishes or when the
user resets the alarm(s).
Note! When COPFC detects a pumping situation, the operation mode is changed from
Automatic mode to Manual mode and the automatic operation of the function
block is frozen, which means that the function block will not switch capacitors
automatically on or off. When the operation mode is changed from Manual mode
back to Automatic mode by setting, the automatic control of the reactive power is
continued and the pumping alarm is reset. If another pumping situation is then
detected, the COPFC will be frozen again.
2.6 Manual mode
The COPFC function block includes four possible operation modes: 1) Not in use
2) Automatic mode 3) Manual mode and 4) Testing mode. If the Manual mode is
selected, the automatic operation of COPFC is blocked and the user is able to add and
remove capacitor steps as desired via the MMI of the relay or via remote commands.
13
The actual manual command is given with the control parameter Manual command.
The parameter can have the following values: 1) Not activated 2) Remove one step 3)
Add one step 4) Disconnect all. The COPFC function block will obey the set control
sequence also in the manual mode (see section Switching sequences), which means
that the relay decides internally which bank should be added or removed when the
manual command is given by the user.
Note! The delays (e.g. Discharge time) are also taken into account in the manual
mode. Accordingly, if the manual command is given but the discharge time has not
yet elapsed, the manual command is ignored, the indication COPFC: Reconn.
inhibited is presented on the MMI of the relay and the corresponding event is sent.
2.7 Day / night target cos switching
The setting parameters S44 to S47 (Target day PF, Day unit, Target night PF
and Night unit) can be used to separately define the daytime and night-time cos
values to which COPFC aims to adjust the reactive power. The target factor is defined
with the parameters S44 and S46, whereas the parameters S45 and S47 determine
whether the target is on the inductive or capacitive side.
Switching between the day and night cos target can be done in three different ways.
The parameter Day&night switch defines which method is used. The possibilities
are:
By digital input: When the digital input DN_COSPHI (Figure 4) is active, the set
night value is used as a target value for cos . On the other hand, if the digital
input is unconnected or the connected input is not active, the COPFC function
block uses the set day value as a target value for cos .
By internal clock: Switching between the day and night targets is done
continuously according to the clock of the relay. The night target is valid when
the clock shows the time between the parameters Night starts and Night ends,
otherwise the day target is used.
By setting: When this switching method is used, the value of the parameter D&n
command defines which target is valid.
The default value of the control parameter Day&night switch for the cos
switching is Not in use, i.e. the set day target is used as a target value and the set
night value is ignored.
2.8 Testing mode
2.8.1 General
In the testing mode the COPFC function block will switch the first capacitor bank on
and off four times sequentially. The Ready LED on the front panel of the MMI of
14
the relay will blink until the test is over. The testing will last three to four times the
Reconn. inhibit setting delay.
Note! The following items should be noticed before starting the testing:
The Reconn. inhibit delay (=Discharge time of the capacitor bank) should be
properly set
The Size of 1.step parameter should have approximately the right value
The Operation mode parameter should be set to Testing mode
2.8.2 Test results
A successful testing will be indicated in the following ways:
The event Testing: OK will be sent and can be read in the EVENTS view of the
relay
The indication text TESTING OK will appear on the MMI of the relay
If the testing was completed successfully, the COPFC function block will
automatically replace the value set as the capacitor step size (parameter Size of
1.step) with the value measured during the testing. This corrected value is the
measured mean value of the reactive power changes during the period when the first
bank is switched on and off four times sequentially.
On the other hand, an unsuccessful testing will be indicated in the following ways:
The event Testing: Failed will be sent and can also be read in the EVENTS
view of the relay
The indication text TESTING: Failed will appear on the MMI of the relay
Possible reasons for a failed testing are the following:
If also the digital output CONT_FAIL is activated during the testing phase, the
reasons for the failed testing may be the following:
1. The control command pulses are not passed properly to a circuit breaker
2. The state information from a circuit breaker is not properly passed to COPFC
3. A circuit breaker is in the undefined state
COPFC has measured a capacitor step size over 25 % greater or smaller than
originally set by the user. In this case:
1. Check the setting of the capacitor step size
2. Check that COPFC measures correctly: P, Q and cos
3. Check that the capacitors are not defective
15
If all the items above are in order, the reason for the unsuccessful testing is that there
is over 25 % differential in the capacitor step size measurements between the
switchings. Try running the test once more.
If the test was completed successfully, the Operation mode may be changed from
the testing mode to the automatic mode to start the load power control.
2.9 Resetting
The alarm signals and recorded data can be reset either via the RESET input, or over
the serial bus or the local MMI.
The operation indicators, alarm signals and recorded data can be reset as follows:
Operation Alarm Recorded

indicators signals data
1)
1)
Parameter F143V011 for COPFC X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
Resets the active alarms and recorded data of this particular function block.
2)
16
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for COPFC is 143.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
For example, if only the events E3, E4 and E5 are to be seen seen on the MMI of
the relay terminal, the event mask value 56 (8 + 16 + 32) is written to the
Event mask 1 parameter (FxxxV101).
32...63.
17
3.2 Setting values
3.2.1 Setting group 1

direction
Number of banks S41 1...4 - 1 R/W The number of capacitor
banks to be controlled
Type of seq S42 0...7 1) - 0 R/W The relational step sizes and
the type of the switching
sequence
Size of 1.step S43 10.0...50000.0 kvar 100.0 R/W Size of the first capacitor bank
(should be the smallest)
Target day PF S44 0.701.00 - 0.95 R/W Target value for daytime cos
2)
Day unit S45 0...1 - 0 R/W Unit that indicates whether the
daytime target is in the
capacitive or inductive side
Target night PF S46 0.701.00 - 0.95 R/W Target value for night-time
cos
Night unit S47 0...1 2) - 0 R/W Unit that indicates whether the
night-time target is in the
Reconn. inhibit S48 0.5...6000.0 s 60 R/W Setting the reconnection

inhibit time (discharge time)
Sensitivity Ind S49 60.0...200.0 % 70.0 R/W Sensitivity in the inductive

side
Sensitivity Cap S50 0.0...100.0 % 60.0 R/W Sensitivity in the capacitive

side
Maximum Q limit S51 0.1...100.0 Mvar 100.0 R/W Alarm limit for the maximum
reactive power
Minimum Q limit S52 -100.0...0.0 Mvar -100.0 R/W Alarm limit for the minimum
reactive power
Overvolt. limit S53 0.80...1.60 x Un 1.05 R/W Overvoltage limit when the
switching in is inhibited
1)
Type of seq 0=1:1:1:1 linear; 1=1:1:1:1 circul.; 2=1:1:2:2 circul.; 3=1:2:2:2 linear;
4=1:2:2:2 circul.; 5=1:2:4:4 linear; 6=1:2:4:4 circul.; 7=1:2:4:8
2)
Day unit / night unit 0 = Inductive; 1 = Capacitive
18

direction
Operation mode V1 0...4 1) - 1 R/W Operation mode of the function
block
Automatic test V2 0...1 2) - 0 R/W Starting the automatic testing

sequence
Calc. method V3 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/W Calculation method (normal or

integral)
Cont. principle V4 0 or 1 4) - 0 R/W Defining how the target is

reached: step by step or directly
Duration demand V5 0.5...6000.0 s 30.0 R/W Time for which the demand
should be valid before switching
in or out is done
Day&night switch V7 0...3 5) - 0 R/W Different options for switching

between the day and night target
PF
D&n command V8 0...2 6) - 0 R/W Day and night target switching
Night starts V9 023 h 22 R/W If the day/night target switching

is by internal clock, the night
starts according to this
parameter
Night ends V10 023 h 6 R/W If the day/night target switching

ends according to this parameter
Reset registers V13 1 = Reset - 0 W Resetting active alarms and the

recorded data values




1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = Automatic mode; 2 = Manual mode; 3 = Testing mode
2)
Automatic test 0 = Not activated; 1 = Start
3)
Calc. method 0 = Normal; 1 = Integral
4)
Cont. principle 0 = Progressive; 1 = Direct
5)
Day&night switch 0 = Not in use; 1 = Digital input; 2 = Internal clock; 3 = By setting
6)
D&n command 0 = Not activated; 1 = Day target PF; 2 = Night target PF
19
3.2.3 Manual command

direction
Manual command V6 0...3 1) - 0 R/W Giving switching commands in
the manual mode
Commands V15 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Indicates whether the manual

commands are allowed or not
1)
Manual command 0 = Not activated; 1 = Remove one step; 2 = Add one step; 3 = Disconnect all
2)
Commands 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
3.3.1 Input data

direction
P3 (kW) I1 -999999... kW 0.0 R/M Three-phase active power
999999 (fundamental component, no
harmonics included)
Q3 (kvar) I2 -999999... kvar 0.0 R/M Three-phase reactive power

harmonics included)
Power factor DPF I3 0.00...1.00 - 0.0 R/M Displacement power factor

cos
Connected banks I4 0... 65535 - 0 R/M Banks that are on, e.g. 14
means that the 1. and 4.
banks are connected
Input BLOCK I5 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Input for blocking the

automatic and manual
operations of COPFC
Input DN_COSPHI I6 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Control input for switching

between the Target day cos
and the Target night cos
Input DISCONNECT I7 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Control input for immediately

disconnecting all the
capacitor banks
simultaneously
Input RESET I8 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for resetting the

alarm signals and recorded
data of COPFC
1)
Input 0 = Not active; 1 = Active
2)
Input DN_COSPHI 0 = Day target PF; 1 = Night target PF
20
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output REQ_UP O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Duration demand time the
counter has been started to
add step(s)
Output REQ_DOWN O2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Duration demand time the

remove step(s)
Output CONT_FAIL O3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M A control operation has

failed
Output ALAR_Q O4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M The maximum or minimum

reactive power limit has
been exceeded
Output ALAR_PUMP O5 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M A pumping situation has

been detected
Output TESTING O6 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Indicates whether the

automatic testing sequence
is in progress
1)
Output 0 = Not active; 1 = Active
2)
Output TESTING 0 = Not active; 1 = In progress
3.3.3 Recorded data
The parameters Switches / day and Switches / week show how many switching
operations have been carried out for the capacitor banks.
Both the opening and closing operations for each bank increment the counter. For
example, disconnecting all four banks and then switching the first bank on makes a
total of five operations.
The recorded data parameters can be reset with the parameter Reset registers or via
the RESET input. A new counting period is started at the moment of resetting and the
values are updated at the end of the period.

direction
Switches / day V11 0...65535 - 0 R/M Number of switching
operations per day
Switches / week V12 0...65535 - 0 R/M Number of switching

operations per week
21
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Control operation failed, COPFC Reset
E1 2 1 Control operation failed, COPFC Activated
E2 4 1 Q not within limits, COPFC Reset
E3 8 1 Q not within limits, COPFC Activated
E4 16 1 Pumping situation alarm, COPFC Reset
E5 32 1 Pumping situation alarm, COPFC Activated
E6 64 1 Not discharged yet, COPFC Reset
E7 128 1 Not discharged yet, COPFC Activated
E8 256 0 Automatic testing mode, COPFC Reset
E9 512 0 Automatic testing mode, COPFC Activated
E10 1024 1 Testing finished, COPFC OK
E11 2048 1 Testing finished, COPFC failed
E12 4096 1 Overvoltage inhibition, COPFC Reset
E13 8192 1 Overvoltage inhibition, COPFC Activated
E14 16384 0 BLOCK signal of COPFC Reset
E15 32768 0 BLOCK signal of COPFC Activated
E16 65536 0 DISCONNECT signal of COPFC Reset
E17 131072 0 DISCONNECT signal of COPFC Activated
22
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies 2.0% of set value or 0.02 x rated value
Accuracy class of the operation 2.0


D -
23
1MRS752353-MUM COPFC
Issued: 3/2000
Version: B/1.2.2002
Power factor controller
Contents
1. Introduction ............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2. Description of Operation......................................................................... 5
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.2 Operating principle of the power factor controller ................................ 5
2.2.1 Operating principle when the limit values are exceeded............. 7
2.2.2 Control parameters of calculation............................................... 8
2.2.3 Overvoltage inhibit ..................................................................... 9
2.2.4 Undercurrent and overvoltage protection ................................... 9
2.3 Switching sequences........................................................................... 9
2.3.1 Linear mode ............................................................................. 10
2.3.2 Circular mode........................................................................... 11
2.4 Control functions ............................................................................... 12
2.5 Alarms............................................................................................... 13
2.6 Manual mode .................................................................................... 13
2.7 Day / night target cos switching....................................................... 14
2.8 Testing mode .................................................................................... 14
2.8.1 General .................................................................................... 14
2.8.2 Test results .............................................................................. 15
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 16
3. Parameters and Events ......................................................................... 17
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 17
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 18
3.2.1 Setting group 1......................................................................... 18
3.2.3 Manual command..................................................................... 20
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 20
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 21
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 21
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 22
4. Technical Data ....................................................................................... 23
COPFC Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Load power control based on the target cos (target Power Factor)
Adjustable sensitivity of the operation
Settable limit values for determining a safe operating area
Eight possible switching sequences for selecting the capacitor combination
Detection and alarm of three possible fault conditions
Manual and automatic operation modes
Testing mode for facilitating the commissioning and for fine adjusting the settings
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the power factor controller function block
COPFC used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The function block is designed to be used as an intelligent control unit for controlling
the switching of capacitor banks based on the reactive power requirements of the
load.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORIWKHSRZHUIDFWRUFRQWUROOHU&23)&
2
Substation Automation COPFC

active high)

active high)
active high)
active high)
active high)
active high)

active high)
active high)
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, Input for blocking the automatic and
active high) manual operations of COPFC
DN_COSPHI Digital signal (BOOL, Control input for switching between the
active high) "Target day cos PF" and the "Target
night PF"
DISCONNECT Digital signal (BOOL, Control input for immediately
active high) disconnecting all capacitor banks
simultaneously
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, Signal for resetting the alarm signals and
pos.edge recorded data of COPFC
3

CONN_BANKS Unsigned integer Banks that are on, e.g 14 means
that the 1st and 4th banks are
connected
REQ_UP Digital signal (BOOL, active Duration demand time the timer
high) was started to add step(s)
REQ_DOWN Digital signal (BOOL, active Duration demand time the timer
high) was started to remove step(s)
CONT_FAIL Digital signal (BOOL, active A control operation failed or an
high) undefined state of a circuit
breaker was detected
ALAR_Q Digital signal (BOOL, active Overcompensation or
high) undercompensation alarm
ALAR_PUMP Digital signal (BOOL, active Pumping situation alarm

high)
TESTING Digital signal (BOOL, active Indicates whether the automatic
high) testing sequence is in progress or
not
4
2.1 Configuration

voltage dividers. The analogue inputs are configured in the Relay Configuration Tool.
A special dialogue box in the configuration tool is also used for selecting the analogue
channel combination used for power measurement.
Analogue channel selection for configuration
The following analogue channel combinations are available in the dialogue box of the
Q are calculated from positive-sequence components. The correct channel
combination is selected via the configuration tool.
Channel combination Comments
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note that when the COPFC function block is used, the power and energy
measurement must be selected for one of the above channel combinations via the
resource settings dialogue Measurements of the Relay Configuration Tool.
2.2 Operating principle of the power factor controller
The capacitor banks are switched in or out to adjust the load power as close as
possible to the targeted power factor value. One to four capacitor banks can be
controlled by the COPFC function block.
5
In short, the operating principle of COPFC is the following: The function block
measures the active power P, and the allowed reactive power Q can be calculated
using the set target cos . If the measured reactive power differs enough from the
allowed reactive power, the function block switches a capacitor on or off. The basic
variables used by the COPFC function block are described in Figure 2 below.
measured cos
measured Q
target cos allowed Q
measured P P
Q measured Q
inductive
=positive
allowed Q
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLQJSULQFLSOHRI&23)&EDVHGRQWKHWDUJHWFRVFDOFXODWLRQ
If the measured reactive power is greater than the allowed reactive power, the
differential power Q is positive, which means that the network is too inductive. On
the other hand, if the measured reactive power is smaller than the allowed reactive
power, the differential power Q is negative and the network is too capacitive. The
switching operations of a capacitor compared with the Q value are presented in
Figure 3 below.
Capacitor added
100 %
+Q 70 %
= "Sensitivity Ind"
Q=0
t
Q 60 %
= "Sensitivity Cap"
100 %
Capacitor removed
)LJXUH 3ULQFLSOHRIVZLWFKLQJRSHUDWLRQV
6
The sensitivity for switching operations can be adjusted by changing the sensitivity
percentages with the parameters Sensitivity Ind and Sensitivity Cap. In Figure 3,
the operation is illustrated with the default values of these parameters. If the
sensitivity is set to be 100 %, a capacitor will be added or removed when the
calculated differential power Q is equal to the step size of the capacitor to be
switched. The operation is more sensitive if a value below 100 % is set and vice
versa.
The parameters presented in Figure 3 make it possible to set the operation to be

unsymmetrical, which means that the sensitivity limits for the inductive side and the
capacitive side can be different.
It is recommended that the summarized value of the sensitivities (Sensitivity Ind +

Sensitivity Cap) should be greater than 130 %, because a smaller value may result in a
pumping situation where a capacitor bank is switched in or out multiple times
sequentially with approximately an interval equal to the discharge time of the
capacitor bank.
2.2.1 Operating principle when the limit values are exceeded
In addition to the target cos , the COPFC function block has the two limiting
parameters Maximum Q limit and Minimum Q limit for determining the proper
operation. These parameters are used to keep the reactive power within safe limits.
Figure 4 presents a situation where the load takes a lot of power but the power factor
cos of the network is equal to the target cos . In this case the basic target cos -
calculation presented in Figure 2 and Figure 3 does not cause any action because the
differential power Q is zero and, consequently, no switchings will take place.
Accordingly, additional limits have to be set to prevent the load from exceeding the
permissible absolute value limits for the reactive power.
Q
Calculated target replaced
by "Maximum Q limit"
"Maximum
Q limit"
calculated
target
target cos
"Minimum P
Q limit"
)LJXUH ([DPSOHZKHQWKHFDOFXODWHGWDUJHWIRUUHDFWLYHSRZHULVUHSODFHGE\
WKHOLPLWYDOXH
If COPFC has switched on all the capacitor banks but the measured reactive power
still exceeds the Maximum Q limit, the function block will give the alarm Q limit
exceeded. The same alarm is given if all the capacitor banks have been disconnected
but the measured reactive power still remains below the Minimum Q limit.
7
2.2.2 Control parameters of calculation
The parameter Calc. method can have two values: 1) Normal or 2) Integral. As
a default, the calculation is performed in the normal mode but when the integral
mode is used, the measured reactive power will be more strongly filtered. The
integral mode is useful for situations where the load is varying and the demand is
thus continuously cancelled before the end of the Duration demand delay.
The parameter Cont. principle defines whether the target is reached
progressively or directly. As a default, the control principle is set to be
progressive, which means that capacitors are switched in or out step by step to
reach the cos target. The other possibility, direct switching, means that
intermediary steps between two non-contiguous switching levels are cancelled.
The parameter Duration demand is a delay for which the need for switching
should be valid before switching in or out is done. If, for example, the calculated
need is to add or remove one capacitor step and the setting parameter Duration
demand is set to be 30 s, the need (+1 or -1) should be valid for 30 s before
COPFC sends the control signal (open or close).
If the need falls to zero for less than 1 second, the time counter is not started from
the beginning, whereas if the need remains zero for more than 1 second, the time
counter is set to zero. When the calculated need is greater than +1 or -1, the time
counter will get a value that is half of the duration demand, i.e.15 s in this
example.
The operation of the parameter Duration demand and the outputs REQ_UP and
REQ_DOWN is illustrated in Figure 5 below.
Capacitor added
Q = +1
Q = 0
t
"Duration demand"
Q = -1
Q = -2
Capacitor(s) removed
REQ_UP
REQ_DOWN
DuratDem
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKHSDUDPHWHU'XUDWLRQGHPDQGDQGWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ
RXWSXWV
8
2.2.3 Overvoltage inhibit
The overvoltage inhibit level can be set with the parameter Overvolt. limit. When
COPFC measures a voltage greater than this setting, it will not switch in additional
capacitor steps, because adding the steps in this situation could increase the voltage to
a harmful level.
The parameter Overvolt. limit can be given the same value regardless of whether
phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth voltages are measured. In other words, the setting
1.0 x Un always refers to a full phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth voltage.
2.2.4 Undercurrent and overvoltage protection
The undercurrent protection is provided by a different function block, OL3Cap.

Figure 10 describes the station-level layout for different functions. As shown in the
picture, every capacitor bank has its own protection relay and undercurrent protection
is one of the protection functions included in these relays. See the manual of OL3Cap
for further information.
The function block OL3Cap is specially designed for protection against overload
produced by harmonic currents and overvoltage. Accordingly, OL3Cap should be
used as the main overload protection. Moreover, the overvoltage protection function
block OV3Low can be used for back-up protection, when required. When the
measured voltage exceeds the setting limit of OV3Low, the trip output is activated
and an open signal is sent to the capacitor banks to switch them off.
Note! OV3Low should only be used as back-up protection because the actual
overload protection function OL3Cap provides more accurate calculation of the actual
voltage stress over the capacitor when e.g. the influence of the harmonics is taken into
account.
2.3 Switching sequences
The switching sequences allowed by COPFC are:
1:1:1:1......1 linear
1:1:1:1......1 circular
1:1:2:2......1,2 circular
1:2:2:2......2 linear
1:2:2:2......2 circular
1:2:4:4......4 linear
1:2:4:4......4 circular
1:2:4:8
In above switching sequence alternatives, the ratio indicates the relative sizes of the
second, third and fourth capacitor banks in relation to the first bank. For example,
9
1:2:4:4 means that the capacitance of the second bank is twice that of the first bank,
whereas both the third and the fourth banks are four times the size of the first
capacitor bank.
2.3.1 Linear mode
A control sequence with the linear mode is especially useful for controlling harmonic
filters. Figure 6 and Figure 7 present the operating principle of the linear mode.
Capacitor steps
Request 1 2 3 4
+ X
+ X X
+ X X X
X X
X
+ X X
+ X X X
+ X X X X
X X X
X X
X
Capacitor steps
Request 1 2 3 4 Target steps
+ X 1
+ X 2
+ X X 3
+ X X 4
X X 3
X 2
X 1
+ X 2
+ X X 3
+ X X 4
+ X X X 5
10
2.3.2 Circular mode
The objective of the circular mode is to switch the capacitors equally on and off, so
that in the long run, the capacitors are evenly worn out because the operation number
for each bank is approximately the same. The controlling sequence with the circular
mode is most suitable for capacitor banks that have equal step sizes. Some example
sequences for the circular mode are presented in Figure 8 and Figure 9.
Capacitor steps
Request 1 2 3 4
+ X
+ X X
+ X X X
X X
X
+ X X
+ X X X
+ X X X X
X X X
X X
X
FLUFXODU
Capacitor steps
Request Target steps
1 2 3 4
+ X 1
+ X 2
+ X X 3
+ X X 4
X X 3
+ X X 4
X X 3
+ X X 4
X X 3
X 2
X 1
FLUFXODU
11
The function block COPFC sends a request signal of control commands, via LON
network or using the digital outputs, to a capacitor bank that is desired to be opened or
closed. If the control requests and/or state information from the circuit breakers are
transmitted via LON network, the network connection between COPFC and the
capacitor banks should be configured with the Lon Network Tool.
When COPFC detects that the desired state has been reached after the request signal,
it deactivates the particular output.
Each relay that protects a certain capacitor bank must have a control function block
COCB_ for a circuit breaker. The actual control pulses for the circuit breaker are
formed by this function block. COCB_ includes several useful functions that can be
set by the user, e.g.:
Adjustable pulse width for opening and closing

Possibility to build interlocking logic for special situations
Cycle count diagnostics, i.e. the operation number of a circuit breaker is counted
COPFC
REF 545
V open / close request signal
Loads
REF 543 REF 543 REF 543
Protection
- unbalance
- overload
- undercurrent
Control
- COCB
)LJXUH 6WDWLRQOHYHOOD\RXWIRUGLIIHUHQWIXQFWLRQV7KHFRQQHFWLRQVPDUNHGZLWK
GDVKHGOLQHLQDERYHILJXUHFDQEHLPSOHPHQWHGHLWKHUZLWKVHSDUDWHZLUHV
IRUHDFKRSHQDQGFORVHUHTXHVWRUZLWK/21FRPPXQLFDWLRQE\
FRQILJXULQJWKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQEHWZHHQIHHGHUWHUPLQDOVZLWKWKH/21
1HWZRUN7RRO
12
2.5 Alarms
The COPFC function block detects and gives alarms for the following fault
conditions:
Q limit exceeded: The alarm output ALAR_Q for over- or undercompensation is

activated if COPFC has switched on all the capacitor banks, but there is still too
much inductive power in the network and the alarm limit is exceeded. In other
words, the capacitor bank is not able to produce enough reactive power to the
network. On the other hand, the alarm is also activated when all the capacitor
banks have been switched off, but the network is still too capacitive and the
measured reactive power falls below the minimum limit. The alarm delay is 30
seconds.
Pumping situation alarm: The alarm output ALAR_PUMP is activated if COPFC
adds and removes capacitor steps several times sequentially with approximately
an interval equal to the Discharge time.
Control operation failed: When COPFC has sent a request signal (open or close)
but does not detect the right state information within five seconds from the
starting of the request signal, the function block will activate the CONT_FAIL
output to indicate that the control operation failed or the circuit breaker is in the
undefined state. If the CONT_FAIL alarm is detected, the function block will not
try to control the capacitor bank in question. In other words, the failed capacitor
bank is skipped until the right state information is detected by the function block
or the user resets the CONT_FAIL alarm.
The CONT_FAIL alarm is also activated if the capacitor protection of a bank
operates within one second from the moment COPFC has switched the capacitor
bank on.
When any of these conditions is detected, the alarm signal in question and the
respective notifications will be activated: an alarm text will appear on the MMI and
the event sending will activate the remote indications of the alarms.
An alarm signal is deactivated when the reason for the alarm vanishes or when the
user resets the alarm(s).
Note! When COPFC detects a pumping situation, the operation mode is changed from
Automatic mode to Manual mode and the automatic operation of the function
block is frozen, which means that the function block will not switch capacitors
automatically on or off. When the operation mode is changed from Manual mode
back to Automatic mode by setting, the automatic control of the reactive power is
continued and the pumping alarm is reset. If another pumping situation is then
detected, the COPFC will be frozen again.
2.6 Manual mode
The COPFC function block includes four possible operation modes: 1) Not in use
2) Automatic mode 3) Manual mode and 4) Testing mode. If the Manual mode is
selected, the automatic operation of COPFC is blocked and the user is able to add and
remove capacitor steps as desired via the MMI of the relay or via remote commands.
13
The actual manual command is given with the control parameter Manual command.
The parameter can have the following values: 1) Not activated 2) Remove one step 3)
Add one step 4) Disconnect all. The COPFC function block will obey the set control
sequence also in the manual mode (see section Switching sequences), which means
that the relay decides internally which bank should be added or removed when the
manual command is given by the user.
Note! The delays (e.g. Discharge time) are also taken into account in the manual
mode. Accordingly, if the manual command is given but the discharge time has not
yet elapsed, the manual command is ignored, the indication COPFC: Reconn.
inhibited is presented on the MMI of the relay and the corresponding event is sent.
2.7 Day / night target cos switching
The setting parameters S44 to S47 (Target day PF, Day unit, Target night PF
and Night unit) can be used to separately define the daytime and night-time cos
values to which COPFC aims to adjust the reactive power. The target factor is defined
with the parameters S44 and S46, whereas the parameters S45 and S47 determine
whether the target is on the inductive or capacitive side.
Switching between the day and night cos target can be done in three different ways.
The parameter Day&night switch defines which method is used. The possibilities
are:
By digital input: When the digital input DN_COSPHI (Figure 4) is active, the set
night value is used as a target value for cos . On the other hand, if the digital
input is unconnected or the connected input is not active, the COPFC function
block uses the set day value as a target value for cos .
By internal clock: Switching between the day and night targets is done
continuously according to the clock of the relay. The night target is valid when
the clock shows the time between the parameters Night starts and Night ends,
otherwise the day target is used.
By setting: When this switching method is used, the value of the parameter D&n
command defines which target is valid.
The default value of the control parameter Day&night switch for the cos
switching is Not in use, i.e. the set day target is used as a target value and the set
night value is ignored.
2.8 Testing mode
2.8.1 General
In the testing mode the COPFC function block will switch the first capacitor bank on
and off four times sequentially. The Ready LED on the front panel of the MMI of
14
the relay will blink until the test is over. The testing will last three to four times the
Reconn. inhibit setting delay.
Note! The following items should be noticed before starting the testing:
The Reconn. inhibit delay (=Discharge time of the capacitor bank) should be
properly set
The Size of 1.step parameter should have approximately the right value
The Operation mode parameter should be set to Testing mode
2.8.2 Test results
A successful testing will be indicated in the following ways:
The event Testing: OK will be sent and can be read in the EVENTS view of the
relay
The indication text TESTING OK will appear on the MMI of the relay
If the testing was completed successfully, the COPFC function block will
automatically replace the value set as the capacitor step size (parameter Size of
1.step) with the value measured during the testing. This corrected value is the
measured mean value of the reactive power changes during the period when the first
bank is switched on and off four times sequentially.
On the other hand, an unsuccessful testing will be indicated in the following ways:
The event Testing: Failed will be sent and can also be read in the EVENTS
view of the relay
The indication text TESTING: Failed will appear on the MMI of the relay
Possible reasons for a failed testing are the following:
If also the digital output CONT_FAIL is activated during the testing phase, the
reasons for the failed testing may be the following:
1. The control command pulses are not passed properly to a circuit breaker
2. The state information from a circuit breaker is not properly passed to COPFC
3. A circuit breaker is in the undefined state
COPFC has measured a capacitor step size over 25 % greater or smaller than
originally set by the user. In this case:
1. Check the setting of the capacitor step size
2. Check that COPFC measures correctly: P, Q and cos
3. Check that the capacitors are not defective
15
If all the items above are in order, the reason for the unsuccessful testing is that there
is over 25 % differential in the capacitor step size measurements between the
switchings. Try running the test once more.
If the test was completed successfully, the Operation mode may be changed from
the testing mode to the automatic mode to start the load power control.
2.9 Resetting
The alarm signals and recorded data can be reset either via the RESET input, or over
the serial bus or the local MMI.
The operation indicators, alarm signals and recorded data can be reset as follows:
Operation Alarm Recorded

indicators signals data
1)
1)
Parameter F143V011 for COPFC X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
Resets the active alarms and recorded data of this particular function block.
2)
16
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for COPFC is 143.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
the relay terminal, the event mask value 56 (8 + 16 + 32) is written to the
32...63.
17
3.2 Setting values

direction
Number of banks S41 1...4 - 1 R/W The number of capacitor
banks to be controlled
Type of seq S42 0...7 1) - 0 R/W The relational step sizes and
the type of the switching
sequence
Size of 1.step S43 10.0...50000.0 kvar 100.0 R/W Size of the first capacitor bank
(should be the smallest)
Target day PF S44 0.701.00 - 0.95 R/W Target value for daytime cos
2)
Day unit S45 0...1 - 0 R/W Unit that indicates whether the
daytime target is in the
Target night PF S46 0.701.00 - 0.95 R/W Target value for night-time
cos
Night unit S47 0...1 2) - 0 R/W Unit that indicates whether the
night-time target is in the
Reconn. inhibit S48 0.5...6000.0 s 60 R/W Setting the reconnection

inhibit time (discharge time)
Sensitivity Ind S49 60.0...200.0 % 70.0 R/W Sensitivity in the inductive

side
Sensitivity Cap S50 0.0...100.0 % 60.0 R/W Sensitivity in the capacitive

side
Maximum Q limit S51 0.1...100.0 Mvar 100.0 R/W Alarm limit for the maximum
reactive power
Minimum Q limit S52 -100.0...0.0 Mvar -100.0 R/W Alarm limit for the minimum
reactive power
Overvolt. limit S53 0.80...1.60 x Un 1.05 R/W Overvoltage limit when the
switching in is inhibited
1)
Type of seq 0=1:1:1:1 linear; 1=1:1:1:1 circul.; 2=1:1:2:2 circul.; 3=1:2:2:2 linear;
4=1:2:2:2 circul.; 5=1:2:4:4 linear; 6=1:2:4:4 circul.; 7=1:2:4:8
2)
Day unit / night unit 0 = Inductive; 1 = Capacitive
18

direction
Operation mode V1 0...3 1) - 1 R/W Operation mode of the function
block
Automatic test V2 0...1 2) - 0 R/W Starting the automatic testing

sequence
Calc. method V3 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/W Calculation method (normal or

integral)
Cont. principle V4 0 or 1 4) - 0 R/W Defining how the target is

reached: step by step or directly
Duration demand V5 0.5...6000.0 s 30.0 R/W Time for which the demand
should be valid before switching
in or out is done
Day&night switch V7 0...3 5) - 0 R/W Different options for switching

between the day and night target
PF
D&n command V8 0...2 6) - 0 R/W Day and night target switching
Night starts V9 023 h 22 R/W If the day/night target switching

starts according to this
parameter
Night ends V10 023 h 6 R/W If the day/night target switching

ends according to this parameter
Reset registers V13 1 = Reset - 0 W Resetting active alarms and the

recorded data values




1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = Automatic mode; 2 = Manual mode; 3 = Testing mode
2)
Automatic test 0 = Not activated; 1 = Start
3)
Calc. method 0 = Normal; 1 = Integral
4)
Cont. principle 0 = Progressive; 1 = Direct
5)
Day&night switch 0 = Not in use; 1 = Digital input; 2 = Internal clock; 3 = By setting
6)
D&n command 0 = Not activated; 1 = Day target PF; 2 = Night target PF
19
3.2.3 Manual command

direction
Manual command V6 0...3 1) - 0 R/W Giving switching commands in
the manual mode
Commands V15 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Indicates whether the manual

commands are allowed or not
1)
Manual command 0 = Not activated; 1 = Remove one step; 2 = Add one step; 3 = Disconnect all
2)
Commands 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
3.3.1 Input data

direction
P3 (kW) I1 -999999... kW 0.0 R/M Three-phase active power
harmonics included)
Q3 (kvar) I2 -999999... kvar 0.0 R/M Three-phase reactive power

harmonics included)
Power factor DPF I3 0.00...1.00 - 0.0 R/M Displacement power factor

cos
Connected banks I4 0... 65535 - 0 R/M Banks that are on, e.g. 14
means that the 1. and 4.
banks are connected
Input BLOCK I5 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Input for blocking the

automatic and manual
operations of COPFC
Input DN_COSPHI I6 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Control input for switching

between the Target day cos
and the Target night cos
Input DISCONNECT I7 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Control input for immediately

disconnecting all the
capacitor banks
simultaneously

alarm signals and recorded
data of COPFC
1)
2)
Input DN_COSPHI 0 = Day target PF; 1 = Night target PF
20
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output REQ_UP O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Duration demand time the
add step(s)
Output REQ_DOWN O2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Duration demand time the

remove step(s)
Output CONT_FAIL O3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M A control operation has

failed
Output ALAR_Q O4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M The maximum or minimum

reactive power limit has
been exceeded
Output ALAR_PUMP O5 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M A pumping situation has

been detected
Output TESTING O6 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Indicates whether the

automatic testing sequence
is in progress
1)
2)
Output TESTING 0 = Not active; 1 = In progress
3.3.3 Recorded data
The parameters Switches / day and Switches / week show how many switching
operations have been carried out for the capacitor banks.
Both the opening and closing operations for each bank increment the counter. For
example, disconnecting all four banks and then switching the first bank on makes a
total of five operations.
The recorded data parameters can be reset with the parameter Reset registers or via
the RESET input. A new counting period is started at the moment of resetting and the
values are updated at the end of the period.

direction
Switches / day V11 0...65535 - 0 R/M Number of switching
operations per day
Switches / week V12 0...65535 - 0 R/M Number of switching

operations per week
21
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Control operation failed, COPFC Reset
E1 2 1 Control operation failed, COPFC Activated
E2 4 1 Q not within limits, COPFC Reset
E3 8 1 Q not within limits, COPFC Activated
E4 16 1 Pumping situation alarm, COPFC Reset
E5 32 1 Pumping situation alarm, COPFC Activated
E6 64 1 Not discharged yet, COPFC Reset
E7 128 1 Not discharged yet, COPFC Activated
E8 256 0 Automatic testing mode, COPFC Reset
E9 512 0 Automatic testing mode, COPFC Activated
E10 1024 1 Testing finished, COPFC OK
E11 2048 1 Testing finished, COPFC failed
E12 4096 1 Overvoltage inhibition, COPFC Reset
E13 8192 1 Overvoltage inhibition, COPFC Activated
E14 16384 0 BLOCK signal of COPFC Reset
E15 32768 0 BLOCK signal of COPFC Activated
E16 65536 0 DISCONNECT signal of COPFC Reset
E17 131072 0 DISCONNECT signal of COPFC Activated
22
4. Technical Data



D -
23
1MRS752354-MUM COSW_
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C/1.2.2002
On/Off Switch
Data subject to change without notice (1 output)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 General ............................................................................................... 3
2.2 Configuration....................................................................................... 3

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 4
3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 5
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 5
3.3 Events ................................................................................................. 5
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 6
COSW_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
General functions:
Remote control
Local control
Optional non-volatile parameter or setting value with a default value
(zero after cold boot)
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the four on/off switches COSW1...COSW4
used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The switches are identical in
operation.
The on/off switch is a MIMIC object that represents a boolean setting parameter that
can be controlled like any controllable object.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI&26:&26:&26:DQG&26:

ON Digital signal (active high) Switch state (on/off)
2
Substation Automation COSW_
2.1 General
As a default, the output value is stored in a non-volatile memory. However, the user
can configure the object so that the value is volatile, in which case the device booting
or configuration change resets the output value to FALSE.
2.2 Configuration
Relay Mimic Editor, while the logical connection to process data can be configured
by means of the Relay Configuration Tool.
The ON signal reflects the latest locally or remotely adjusted boolean value.
3
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channels for the on/off switches are the following:
COSW1 135
COSW2 136
COSW3 137
COSW4 138
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
4
Substation Automation COSW_
3.2 Setting values

direction
Nonvolatile S1 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Setting will be stored in a non-volatile
memory
1)
Nonvolatile 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active

direction
ON state V1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/W Object output state
Memorized ON V2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R Object output state (retain)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
(E0 ... E1)
1)
Object output state 0 = Inactive; 1 = Active
3.3 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 On/off object (1...4) position Off
E1 2 1 On/off object (1...4) position On
5
4. Technical Data


A -
B To change the value of the control parameter ON state (V1), opening the SPA
password is no longer required
6
1MRS752299-MUM CUB1Cap
Issued: 3/2000
Version: A/17.1.2002
Current Unbalance Protection
Data subject to change without notice for Shunt Capacitor Banks
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.2 Setting the rated values of the protected unit ...................................... 6
2.3 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6
2.5 IDMT type operation of CUB1Cap ....................................................... 9
2.6 Standard curve groups ...................................................................... 10
2.6.1 RI curve groups........................................................................ 11
2.6.2 RD curve groups ...................................................................... 11
2.7 Compensation for natural unbalance................................................. 12
2.7.1 Step-by-step instructions for compensation.............................. 12
2.8 Setting groups ................................................................................... 13
2.9 Test mode ......................................................................................... 13
2.10 START, ALARM, TRIP and CBFP outputs ........................................ 13
2.11 Resetting........................................................................................... 14
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 15
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 16
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 16
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 16
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 17
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 19
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 19
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 20
3.3.4 Faulty elements counter ........................................................... 23
3.3.5 Events ...................................................................................... 23
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 24
CUB1Cap Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Protection against internal faults in double < connected banks

- Suitable for internally fused, externally fused and fuseless applications
Phase unbalance protection stage with a definite-time characteristic and six
inverse-time (IDMT) characteristics
Phase unbalance protection stage based on a faulty elements counter
Compensation for natural unbalance current
Current measurement with conventional current transformers or Rogowski coils
Operation based on the numerically calculated fundamental frequency component
of the unbalance current
Delayed trip output for the circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) function
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the unbalance protection function block
CUB1Cap used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The function block is designed for the protection of power capacitor banks intended
for reactive power compensation and filtering of the harmonics. The function block is
specially designed for the protection of internal faults in double < connected banks.
Thus, none of the remaining elements is exposed to more than 10% overvoltage.
Normally, CUB1Cap is used with the OL3Cap function block to increase the
sensitivity of protection for capacitor banks.
Due to the two-stage unbalance protection and the compensation facility for natural
unbalance, the protection of capacitor elements with internal fuses can be
implemented with a very high degree of sensitivity. The natural unbalance is primarily
due to the capacitor manufacturing tolerance. Furthermore, CUB1Cap provides a
sophisticated method of detecting the amount of faulty elements in each phase by
calculating the differential unbalance current.
2
Substation Automation CUB1Cap
3I>
3I< OL3Cap
CBFP
Cap
3I>>
NOC3High
CBFP
Io>
CBFP
DEF2Low
I>
CBFP
Cap CUB1Cap
application.CNV
)LJXUH $SSOLFDWLRQH[DPSOHRIFDSDFLWRUEDQNSURWHFWLRQ
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI&8%&DS)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOH

OLQHGLDJUDPVUHIHUWRWKHPDQXDO7HFKQLFDO'HVFULSWLRQVRI)XQFWLRQV
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORIWKHFXUUHQWXQEDODQFHSURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQEORFN
&8%&DS
3

dI Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring unbalance current I
BS1 Digital signal (BOOL, active External blocking signal for freezing the
high) timers
BS2 Digital signal (BOOL, active External blocking signal for blocking the
high) ALARM and TRIP signals
TRIGG Digital signal (BOOL, active Control signal for triggering the registers
high)
GROUP Digital signal (BOOL, active Control input for switching between the
high) setting groups 1 and 2. When GROUP is
FALSE, group 1 is active. When GROUP
is TRUE, group 2 is active.
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, Input signal for resetting the trip and
pos.edge) alarm signals and registers of CUB1Cap

START Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Start signal of the stage I1
TRIP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Trip signal of the stage I1
CBFP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Delayed trip signal for circuit-
breaker failure protection (CBFP)
ST_ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Start signal of the stage I2
ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Alarm signal of the stage I2
ERR Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for indicating a
configuration error
4
2.1 Configuration
The phase current IL1 and the unbalance current I can be measured via conventional
current transformers or Rogowski coils. The direction of the phase current is
determined to be from the busbar to the bank and that of the unbalance current from
the starpoint 1(branch 1) to the starpoint 2(branch 2). The measuring devices and
signal types for analogue channels are selected and configured in a special dialogue
box of the Relay Configuration Tool. Digital inputs are configured in the same
programming environment (the number of selectable analogue inputs, digital inputs
and digital outputs depends on the hardware used).
)LJXUH %DQNXQLWDQGHOHPHQW
L1, branch 1 L1, branch 2

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Starpoint 1 Branch.fh8
Starpoint 2
)LJXUH %UDQFKHVDQG
When the analogue channels and digital inputs have been selected and configured in
the dialogue box, the inputs and outputs of the function block can be configured on a
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The phase current IL1 is connected to the
corresponding IL1 input of the function block. The input is used for synchronising
purposes only. The measured unbalance current I is connected to the dI input of the
function block. The possible signal types for the dI input are Io and Iob. Any other
signal type will generate a configuration error. Digital inputs are connected to the
Boolean inputs of the function block and, in the same way, the outputs of the function
5
block are connected to the output signals. Please note that both analogue inputs have
to be connected and the signal types have to be correct. If a configuration is not
correct, the output ERR is activated. The output should be connected to an indication,
i.e. an MMIALARM_ function block. A configuration error will force the function
block to the Not in use mode.
2.2 Setting the rated values of the protected unit
A separate scaling factor can be set for each analogue channel. The factors enable
differences between the ratings of the protected unit and those of the measuring
device (CTs, VTs, etc.). A setting of 1.00 means that the rated value of the protected
unit is exactly the same as that of the measuring device. For more information refer to
Technical Reference Manual for REF54_.
2.3 Measuring mode
The operation of both stages, I1 and I2, is based on the numerically calculated
fundamental frequency component of the unbalance current. The operation is
insensitive to the DC component and the operation accuracy is defined in the
frequency range f/fn=0.95...1.05. In fundamental frequency measurement the
harmonics suppression is at least -50 dB at f = k x fn, where k = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
The unbalance protection is provided with two stages. The tripping stage I1 is based
on an inverse-time characteristic. If the unbalance current exceeds the setting value of
the tripping stage, the stage starts and an IDMT timer is started. The operate time
depends on three factors: the degree of unbalance, the inverse-time multiplier k and
the selected inverse-time characteristic. If the unbalance situation lasts long enough to
exceed the operate time, the stage trips. Furthermore, the stage I1 can also be
configured to operate based on a definite-time characteristic.
The alarm stage I2 is based on a definite-time characteristic. The stage can be

configured to operate based on two protection criteria. The following modes can be
selected via the parameter Alarm mode:
Normal mode
If the unbalance current exceeds the setting value of the alarm stage, the stage starts
and a DT timer is started. If the unbalance period exceeds the set operate time, the
stage provides an alarm signal.
Element counter
This mode enables the detection of blown fuses and faulty elements of a capacitor
bank based on the change of the unbalance current. The method has two significant
advantages. Firstly, unbalance protection is capable of detecting symmetrically
6
faulted elements in different phases. Secondly, the faulty elements counter indicates
the phase and the branch of a faulty element.
If a fuse of an element blows or an element is short-circuited, the unbalance current

changes. If this change of the unbalance current exceeds the setting value of the alarm
stage, the value of the faulty elements counter is increased, provided the set operate
time is exceeded, based on the value of the unbalance current. The parameter Start
dI2 is used to determine the amount of the unbalance current caused by one faulty
element. The parameter should be given an exact value, or in most cases a value
slightly (0.1%) below the actual unbalance current caused by one faulty element. An
inexact setting may lead to a situation where the counters show three faulty elements
while the correct amount is two. On the other hand, too high a setting will lead to a
situation when a fault is not detected. If the unbalance current exceeds but is less than
one and a half times the setting value, the counter is increased by one. Furthermore, if
the unbalance current is between 1.5 and 2.5 times the setting value, the counter is
increased by two, etc. If the value of the faulty elements counter reaches the set value
of the disallowed element failures, the stage provides an alarm signal. After each
incrementation of the counter, the amplitude and the angle of the unbalance current
are compensated to zero level provided the alarm signal is not active. However, the
input data always shows the real unbalance current, from which the natural unbalance
has been compensated.
The phase angle of the changed unbalance current is also known and based on the
angle, the phase and the branch of the faulty element can be known. However, the
change of the branch impedance depends on whether internal or external fuses are
used. Therefore, a parameter Fuse location is set to specify the location of the fuses.
There are six individual faulty element counters that can specify the location of a
faulty element in a double-star connected bank. For instance, if the external fuses are
used and the phase angle of the changed unbalance current is -60, the location of the
faulty element is in phase IL3, branch 2. Therefore, the faulty elements counter for the
phase IL3, branch 2 is increased. The phase and the branch of a faulty element can be
determined according to the following table if external fuses are used. The direction
of phase currents is from the busbar to the bank and the direction of the unbalance
current from the starpoint 1 to the starpoint 2.
Please note that if the capacitor bank application is fuseless, the parameter Fuse
location should be set to external. In this case, the following table also applies to
fuseless applications.
7
Phase angle of the The phase and the branch of The incrementation
differential unbalance the faulty element(s) of the counter(s)
current related to the
phase current IL1
-15+15 L1, branch 1 1
-15-45 L1, branch 1 & L3, branch 2 1+1
-45-75 L3, branch 2 1
-75-105 L2, branch 1 & L3, branch 2 1+1
-105-135 L2, branch 1 1
-135-165 L2, branch 1 & L1, branch 2 1+1
-165-180, L1, branch 2 1
+165+180
+135+165 L3, branch 1 & L1, branch 2 1+1
+105+135 L3, branch 1 1
+75+105 L3, branch 1 & L2, branch 2 1+1
+45+75 L2, branch 2 1
+15+45 L1, branch 1 & L2, branch 2 1+1
If internal fuses are used, the following table is applied. Furthermore, if the change of
the unbalance current is greater than 3 times the setting value of dI2, the situation is
determined to be a blown external fuse, in which case the following table is applied as
well.
Phase angle of the The phase and the branch of The incrementation
differential unbalance the faulty element(s) of the counter(s)
current related to the
phase current IL1
-15+15 L1, branch 2 1
-15-45 L1, branch 2 & L3, branch 1 1+1
-45-75 L3, branch 1 1
-75-105 L2, branch 2 & L3, branch 1 1+1
-105-135 L2, branch 2 1
-135-165 L2, branch 2 & L1, branch 1 1+1
-165-180, L1, branch 1 1
+165+180
+135+165 L3, branch 2 & L1, branch 1 1+1
+105+135 L3, branch 2 1
+75+105 L3, branch 2 & L2, branch 1 1+1
+45+75 L2, branch 1 1
+15+45 L1, branch 2 & L2, branch 1 1+1
Please note that if two simultaneous faults occur in the same phase but in different
branches, there is no change in the unbalance current and therefore the function block
will QRW detect the faults. Furthermore, there are some rare situations where two
simultaneous faults occur in the same branch but in different phases. In these cases
8
the faults will cause a phase angle equal to a situation where there is only one fault in
the other branch. Therefore, the counters will show only one fault.
The setting parameter Operation mode is used to select the operation mode of the
function as follows:
Operation mode
If the operation mode is Not in use, the CUB1Cap is switched off. In any other
mode, the alarm stage I2 functions based on a definite-time characteristic. The
characteristic used by the tripping stage I1 is determined by the operation mode.
Operate time
When the tripping (I1) or the alarm (I2) stage starts, the corresponding start signal is
set to TRUE. Should the situation exceed the set inverse (tripping stage) or definite
(tripping and alarm stages) operate time, the corresponding stage operates. However,
if the alarm stage is configured to function as a faulty elements counter, the operate
time dI2 specifies when the counter is increased. Furthermore, the alarm stage
provides an alarm signal only if the faulty element counter exceeds the set amount of
faulty elements. The alarm signal is indicated by a blinking start LED (yellow).
The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in the total operate time. When
the stage operates, the corresponding trip or alarm signal is set to TRUE.
The DT or IDMT timer is allowed to run only if the BS1 signal is inactive, i.e. its
value is FALSE. When the blocking signal BS1 becomes active, i.e. its value turns
TRUE, the timer will be stopped (frozen). When the blocking signal BS2 is active, no
trip signal can be activated. The trip signals can be blocked by activating the signal
BS2 until the time operate time total retardation time has elapsed. The total
retardation time includes a short internal retardation time (SW delay, less than 1 ms)
plus the delay of a heavy-duty output relay.
2.5 IDMT type operation of CUB1Cap
In the inverse-time mode of CUB1Cap, the operate time is a function of the current:
the higher the current, the shorter is the operate time. Six time/current curve groups
are available. Four of the groups comply with the BS 142 and IEC 60255 standards,
whereas the two curve groups RI and RD (RXIDG) are special type of curve groups
corresponding to the ABB praxis. The setting Operation mode is used for selecting
the desired operate-time characteristic. (For a graphical presentation of the curves,
refer to the manual Technical Descriptions of Functions, Introduction.)
The shortest operate time at the inverse-time operation is limited by a special

adjustable minimum time. The definite minimum time will not allow operate times
shorter than the set minimum time, which is why the inverse-time mode is called the
IDMT mode (Inverse Definite Minimum Time).
9
2.6 Standard curve groups
The four internationally standardised inverse-time characteristics incorporated in the

inverse-time operation of the function are:
normal inverse (NI)

very inverse (VI)
extremely inverse (EI)
long-time inverse (LI)
The relationship between time and current is in accordance with the IEC 60255-4
standard and can be expressed as follows
kx
t[s] =
I
( ) 1
I>
where
t = operate time in seconds

k = adjustable time multiplier
I = phase current
I> = adjustable start current
The values of the constants a and b determine the slope as follows
Inverse-time
characteristic
Normal inverse 0.02 0.14
Very inverse 1.0 13.5
Extremely inverse 2.0 80.0
Long-time inverse 1.0 120
According to the standard BS 142: 1966, the effective current range is defined as
2...20 times the set start current. If the time/current characteristic is normal inverse,
very inverse or extremely inverse, the function has to start at the latest when the
current exceeds the set start current by 1.3 times. For the long-time inverse
characteristic, the effective current range is specified to be 2...7 times the set start
current and the relay is to start at the latest when the current exceeds the setting value
by 1.1 times. The current unbalance tripping stage will start and the IDMT integration
will begin once the current exceeds the set start value.
The operate time tolerances specified by the standard BS 142 : 1966 are the following
(E denotes the accuracy in per cent):
10
I/I > Normal Very Extremely Long time

2 2.22E 2.34E 2.44E 2.34E
5 1.13E 1.26E 1.48E 1.26E
7 - - - 1.00E
10 1.01E 1.01E 1.02E -
20 1.00E 1.00E 1.00E -
The tolerance factors have to be smaller than those defined by the standard BS 142:
1966 for currents 2 and 5 times the setting. The function block CUB1Cap complies
with the tolerances of class 5 (E = 5.0%) for all inverse-time curves.
For example:
I/I>= 10, characteristic = Normal

Operate time tolerance = 1.01 x 5.0% = 5.05%
2.6.1 RI curve groups
The RI-type inverse-time characteristic is a special characteristic mainly used to

obtain time grading with mechanical relays. The characteristic can be expressed as
follows:
k
t s =
I>
0. 339 0. 236 x
I
2.6.2 RD curve groups
The RD-type characteristic is a special characteristic mainly used in earth-fault

protection where a high degree of selectivity is required also at high-resistance faults.
Mathematically, the characteristic can be expressed as follows:
I
t[s] = 5. 8 -1. 35 x ln
k x I>
The accuracy of the RI- and RD-type characteristics is 5%. Also with the RI- and RD-
type characteristics, the stage will start and the IDMT integration will begin once the
current exceeds the set start current.
11
2.7 Compensation for natural unbalance
Usually there is some natural unbalance in a three-phase reactive compensation

capacitor bank. An unbalance compensation facility has therefore been implemented
in CUB1Cap. A compensation setting is used for compensating the natural unbalance
to zero level. The phase current IL1 is used as a synchronising input for the
compensation, which means that the natural unbalance current can be compensated
for both amplitude and phase angle. The natural unbalance phasor is recorded by
switching the Rec natural dI parameter from Do not activate to Activate, after
which the parameter will automatically return to the Do not activate mode. Then the
uncompensated unbalance current will be subtracted by the recorded phasor. The
compensation level is set via the parameter Comp natural dI. If the parameter is set
to zero, the unbalance current is not compensated.
a) b)
IL1 IL1
dI dI
natural natural
dIcompensated
dImeasured
)LJXUH 3ULQFLSDORIWKHFRPSHQVDWLRQRIQDWXUDOXQEDODQFHDWKHKHDOWK\

FRQGLWLRQZKHQWKHQDWXUDOXQEDODQFHFXUUHQWLVUHFRUGHGE7KHIDXOW\
FDSDFLWRUHOHPHQWSURGXFHVXQEDODQFHFXUUHQWG,FRPSHQVDWHG G,PHDVXUHG
G,QDWXUDO
2.7.1 Step-by-step instructions for compensation
1. Set the parameters. The start currents dI1 and dI2 may have to be set higher to
enable the uncompensated current flow.
2. Close the capacitor bank breaker.
3. Set the control parameter Comp natural dI to zero. View the input data: the
current dI is now the uncompensated unbalance current.
4. Record the phasors of the unbalance current I and phase current IL1 by setting the
control parameter Rec natural dI from Do not activate to Activate. Note that the
parameter returns automatically to the Do not activate mode. Furthermore, it should
be noted that the recording should be made only during the steady state condition and
when all the capacitor bank elements are assumed to be in service.
12
5. Set the control parameter Comp natural dI according to the per cent value seen in
the input data view. However, you may use a smaller value if only some of the natural
unbalance current needs to be compensated. Check also the control parameter Fuse
location.
6. If you set the compensation level according to the previous input data, the current
dI should be zero.
7. Set the start currents dI1 and dI2 according to the calculations.
8. Store the settings.
2.8 Setting groups
Two different groups of setting values, group 1 and group 2, are available for
CUB1Cap. Switching between the two groups can be done in the following three
ways:
1 Locally via the control parameter Group selection1) of the MMI

2 Over the communication bus by writing the parameter V11)
3 By means of the input signal GROUP when allowed via the parameter Group
selection (i.e. when V1 = 21)).
1)
Group selection (V1): 0 = Group 1; 1 = Group 2; 2 = GROUP input
The control parameter Active group indicates the setting group valid at a given
time.
2.9 Test mode
The digital outputs of the function block can be activated with separate control
parameters for each output either locally via the MMI or externally via the serial
communication. When an output is activated with the test parameter, an event
indicating the test is generated.
The protection functions operate normally while the outputs are tested.
2.10 START, ALARM, TRIP and CBFP outputs
The start output signals START and ST_ALARM are always pulse-shaped. The
minimum pulse width of the corresponding output signal is set via a separate
parameter on the MMI or the serial communication. If the start situation is longer than
the set pulse width, the specific start signal remains active until the start situation is
over. The output signals TRIP and ALARM may have a non-latching or latching
feature. When the latching mode has been selected, the specific trip or alarm signal
remains active until the output is reset even if the operation criterion has reset.
13
The tripping stage provides a delayed trip signal CBFP after the TRIP signal unless
the unbalance condition has disappeared during the set CBFP time delay. In circuit-
breaker failure protection, the CBFP output can be used to operate a circuit breaker in
front of the circuit breaker of the capacitor bank. The control parameter Trip pulse
also sets the width of the CBFP output signal.
2.11 Resetting
The TRIP and ALARM output signals and the registers can be reset either via the
RESET input, or over the serial bus or the local MMI.
The operation indicators, latched trip signal and recorded data can be reset as follows:
Operation Latched trip Recorded

indicators signal data
1)
1)
Parameter F117V013 for CUB1Cap X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
Resets the latched trip signal and recorded data of this particular function block.
2)
14
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CUB1Cap is 117.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
15
3.2 Setting values

direction
Operation mode S1 0...7 1) - 4 R Actual operation mode
Alarm mode S2 0 or1 2) . 0 R Actual alarm mode
Start dI1 S3 1.0100.0 %dIn 10.0 R Start current of the tripping

stage
Operate time dI1 S4 1.0300 s 5 R Operate time of the tripping

stage in DT mode
Time multiplier S5 0.052.0 - 1.00 R Time multiplier k for the

tripping stage in IDMT mode
Start dI2 S6 1.0100.0 %dIn 5.0 R Start current of the alarm

stage
Operate time dI2 S7 1.0...300 s 300 R Operate time of the alarm

stage
Faulty elements S8 1...100 - 3 R Disallowed number of faulty

elements
1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = Definite time; 2 = Extremely inv.; 3 = Very inv.;
4 = Normal inv.; 5 = Long-time inv.; 6 = RI-type inv.; 7 = RD-type inv
2)
Alarm mode 0 = Normal mode; 1 = Element counter

direction
Operation mode S41 0...7 1) - 4 R/W Selection of operation mode
2)
Alarm mode S42 0 or1 . 0 R/w Selection of alarm mode
Start dI1 S43 1.0100.0 %dIn 10.0 R/W Start current of the tripping
stage
Operate time dI1 S44 1.0300 s 5 R/W Operate time of the tripping
stage in DT mode
Time multiplier S45 0.052.0 - 1.00 R/W Time multiplier k for the
Start dI2 S46 1.0100.0 %dIn 5.0 R/W Start current of the alarm
stage
Operate time dI2 S47 1.0...300 s 300 R/W Operate time of the alarm
stage
Faulty elements S48 1...100 - 3 R/w Disallowed number of faulty

elements
1)
2)
16

direction
Operation mode S71 0...7 1) - 4 R/w Selection of operation mode
Alarm mode S72 0 or1 2) . 0 R/w Selection of alarm mode
Start dI1 S73 1.0100.0 %dIn 10.0 R/w Start current of the tripping
stage
Operate time dI1 S74 1.0300 s 5 R/w Operate time of the tripping
stage in DT mode
Time multiplier S75 0.052.0 - 1.00 R/w Time multiplier k for the
Start dI2 S76 1.0100.0 %dIn 5.0 R/w Start current of the alarm
stage
Operate time dI2 S77 1.0...300 s 300 R/w Operate time of the alarm
stage
Faulty elements S78 1...100 - 3 R/w Disallowed number of faulty

elements
1)
2)
17

direction
Group selection V1 0 ... 2 1) - 0 R/W Selection of the active setting
group
Active group V2 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Active setting group
Start pulse V3 0...1000 ms 0 R/W Minimum pulse width of

START and ST_ALARM
signals
Trip signal V4 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/W Selection of latching feature for

TRIP and ALARM
Trip pulse V5 40...1000 ms 40 R/W Minimum pulse width of TRIP,

ALARM and CBFP
CBFP time V6 100...1000 ms 200 R/W Operate time of the delayed

trip CBFP
Comp natural dI V7 0.020.0 % dIn 0.0 R/W Level of natural unbalance

compensation
Rec natural dI V8 0 or 1 4) - - R/W Recording of the natural

unbalance phasor
Fuse location V9 0 or 1 5) - 0 R/W Location of capacitor fuses
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - 0 W Resetting of latched trip signals

and registers
Test START V31 0 or 1 6) - - R/W Testing of START
Test TRIP V32 0 or 1 6) - - R/W Testing of TRIP

6)
Test CBFP V33 0 or 1 - - R/W Testing of CBFP
Test ST_ALARM V34 0 or 1 6) - - R/W Testing of ST_ALARM

6)
Test ALARM V35 0 or 1 - - R/W Testing of ALARM
Event mask 1 V101 0... 65536 - 831 R/W Event mask 1 for event
1)
Group selection 0 = Group 1; 1 = Group 2; 2 = GROUP input
2)
Active group 0 = Group 1; 1 = Group 2
3)
Trip/alarm signal 0 = Non-latching; 1 = Latching
4)
Rec natural dl 0 = Do not activate; 1 = Activate
5)
Fuse location 0 = External; 1 = Internal
6)
Test 0 = Do not activate; 1 = Activate
18
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Current dI I2 0.0...2000.0 % dIn 0.00 R/M Unbalance current I
Phase angle dI I3 -180+180 0 R/M Phase angle of unbalance

current I
Input BS1 I4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Blocking signal 1

1)
Input BS2 I5 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Blocking signal 2
Input TRIGG I6 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for triggering the registers

1)
Input GROUP I7 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Signal for switching between the
groups 1 and 2
Input RESET I8 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for resetting the output

signals and registers of
CUB1Cap
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output START O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of START signal
1)
Output TRIP O2 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of TRIP signal
Output CBFP O3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of CBFP signal

1)
Output ST_ALARM O4 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of ST_ALARM signal
Output ALARM O5 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of ALARM signal

1)
19
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
The information required for later fault analysis is recorded when the stage starts,
alarms or trips, or when the recording function is triggered via an external triggering
input.
The data of the last three operations (operation 1...3) are recorded and the values of
the most recent operation always replace the data of the oldest operation. The
registers are updated in the following order: Operation 1, Operation 2, Operation 3,
Operation 1, Operation 2,...
3.3.3.2 Date and time
The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the START, ST_ALARM or TRIGG
signal. If the ALARM or TRIP signal follows the specific START signal, the time
stamp will be updated.
3.3.3.3 Duration
In the DT mode of operation, the duration of the start situation is recorded as a

percentage of the set operate time, and in the inverse-time mode as a percentage of the
calculated operate time.
3.3.3.4 Currents
If the function block alarms or trips, the current values are updated at the moment of
alarming or tripping, i.e. on the rising edge of the ALARM or TRIP signal. For
external triggering, the current values are updated at the moment of triggering, i.e. on
the rising edge of the input signal TRIGG. If the function block starts but does not
alarm or trip, the current values captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated
frequency 50 Hz) after the beginning of the start situation are recorded. So the values
of the phase current IL1 and the unbalance current I always originate from the same
moment and IL1 is recorded as a multiple of the rated current In, whereas I is
recorded as a percentage of the rated unbalance current In. Furthermore, the phase
angle of the unbalance current is recorded.
Note! If the alarm stage I2 alarms and the tripping stage I1 starts but does not trip,
the current values are captured at the moment of starting of the stage I1.
20
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the inputs BS1 and BS2 and the parameter Active group are
recorded at the moment of triggering. The parameter Active group indicates the
setting group valid for the recorded data.
3.3.3.6 Priority
The priority of the recording function is the following:
1 Tripping of I1
2 Starting of I1
3 Alarming of I2
4 Starting of I2
5 External triggering,
which means that if the function block has started, an external triggering request will
be neglected.
3.3.3.7 Recorded data 1

direction
Time V202 hh:mm:ss.mss - - R/M Recording time
Duration dI1 V203 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Duration of start situation of I1
Current IL1 V205 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Filtered value of IL1
Current dI V206 0.0...2000.0 % dIn 0.00 R/M Compensated value of dI
Phase angle dI V207 -180+180 0 R/M Phase angle of unbalance

current
BS1 V208 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of BS1 input

2)
Active group V210 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Active setting group
1)
Status 0 = Not active; 1 = Active
2)
21

direction

current

1)
BS2 V309 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of BS2 input

1)
2)

direction

current

2)
1)
2)
22
3.3.4 Faulty elements counter

direction
Counters V501 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of faulty element counters
IL1, branch 1 V502 0100 - 0 R/M Amount of faulty elements in

branch 1 of phase IL1





1)
Counters 0 = Not in use; 1 = In use
3.3.5 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from CUB1Cap dI1stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from CUB1Cap dI1 stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from CUB1Cap dI1 stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from CUB1Cap dI1 stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from CUB1Cap Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from CUB1Cap Activated
E6 64 0 ST_ALARM signal from CUB1Cap dI2 stage Reset
E7 128 0 ST_ALARM signal from CUB1Cap dI2 stage Activated
E8 256 1 ALARM signal from CUB1Cap dI2 stage Reset
E9 512 1 ALARM signal from CUB1Cap dI2 stage Activated
E10 1024 0 BS1 signal of CUB1Cap Reset
E11 2048 0 BS1 signal of CUB1Cap Activated
E12 4096 0 BS2 signal of CUB1Cap Reset
E13 8192 0 BS2 signal of CUB1Cap Activated
E14 16384 0 Test mode of CUB1Cap Off
E15 32768 0 Test mode of CUB1Cap On
23
4. Technical Data

f/fn= 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value + 0.001 x dIn
Phase angle measurement: 2
Start time Injected currents = 2.0 x start current:
f/fn = 0.95...1.05 internal time < 32 ms

1)
total time < 40 ms
Reset time 40...1000 ms (depends on the minimum pulse width set for the
TRIP output)
Reset ratio Typ. 0.95 (range 0.95...0.98)
Retardation time Total retardation time when the current

exceeds the start value2) < 45 ms
Operate time accuracy Depends on the frequency of the current measured:

in definite-time mode
f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2% of set value or 20 ms 2)

in inverse-time mode
f/fn = 0.95...1.05: Class index E = 5.0 or 20 ms 2)

1)
Includes the delay of the signal relay
2)
Includes the delay of the heavy-duty output relay

B -
24
1MRS100051 RE_5_ _
Phase Discontinuity
Issued: 10/1997
Version: E Protection Function DI>
Data subject to change without notice (CUB3Low)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.4 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 5
2.5 Test mode ........................................................................................... 5
2.6 START, TRIP and CBFP outputs ........................................................ 5
2.7 Resetting............................................................................................. 6

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 7
3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 8
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 8
3.2.2 Setting group 1........................................................................... 8
3.2.3 Setting group 2........................................................................... 8
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 10
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 10
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 10
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 13
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 14

RE_5_ _ CUB3Low ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Phase discontinuity protection for three phases

Definite-time (DT) operation
Operation of the function block is based on fundamental frequency phase currents
Internal blocking when all the three phase currents fall below 10% of the rated
current
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the phase discontinuity protection function
block CUB3Low used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The phase discontinuity protection function CUB3Low is designed to be used for

protection against broken phase conductors in distribution networks. Definite-time
(DT) characteristic is always used.
3I>
CBFP
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
2
ABB Automation CUB3Low RE_5_ _
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI&8%/RZ

BS1 Digital signal (BOOL, active Blocking signal 1
high)
high)
TRIGG Digital signal (BOOL, pos. Control signal for triggering the
edge) registers
high) setting groups 1 and 2. When GROUP
is FALSE, group 1 is active. When
GROUP is TRUE, group 2 is active.
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. Input signal for resetting the trip signal
edge) and registers of CUB3Low

START Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Start signal
TRIP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Trip signal
configuration error
3
2.1 Configuration
Phase currents can be measured via conventional current transformers or Rogowski

coils. The measuring devices and signal types for analogue channels are selected and
configured in a special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool included in the
CAP 505 Tool Box. Digital inputs are configured in the same programming
environment (the number of selectable analogue inputs, digital inputs and digital
outputs depends on the hardware variant).
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 are
connected to the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs of the function block. Digital
inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of the function block and in the same way,
the outputs of the function block are connected to the output signals.
2.2 Measuring mode
The operation of the function block is based on fundamental frequency phase

currents, which means the following:
operation is insensitive to the DC component

harmonics suppression is about -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
operation accuracy is defined in the frequency range f/fn = 0.95...1.05.
The unbalance of the network is detected by monitoring the highest (ILmax) and the
lowest (ILmin) phase currents. The unbalance is thus calculated according to the
formula
I = 100% x (ILmax - ILmin) / ILmax
At full unbalance, i.e. when a phase conductor is broken before the first load on that
phase, the display of the relay or the feeder terminal will show an unbalance of 100%.
If the current unbalance I exceeds the set start unbalance value during three
successive executions, the function block starts, i.e. the signal START is set to TRUE,
and the DT timer begins counting.
Should the duration of the unbalance situation exceed the set definite operate time,
the function block operates. The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in
4
the total operate time. When the function block operates, the TRIP signal is set to
TRUE.
The DT timer is allowed to run only if the blocking signal BS1 is not active, i.e. its
value is FALSE. When the signal BS1 is active, i.e. its value is TRUE, the timer will
be stopped (frozen).
When the blocking signal BS2 is active, the TRIP signal cannot be activated. The
TRIP signal can be blocked by activating the signal BS2 until the function block
drops off.
The phase discontinuity protection is not in use when all the measured currents fall
below 10% of the rated current In. The execution task cycle of the function block is
one fundamental cycle (20 ms at 50 Hz).
2.4 Setting groups
Two different groups of setting values, group 1 and group 2, are available for the
function block. Switching between the two groups can be done in the following three
ways:

2 Over the serial bus with the command V21)
1)
The the control parameter Active groupindicates the setting group valid at a given
time.
2.5 Test mode
2.6 START, TRIP and CBFP outputs
The output signal START is always pulse-shaped. The minimum pulse width of the
corresponding output signal is set via a separate parameter on MMI or serial
communication. If the start situation is longer than the set pulse width, the START
signal remains active until the start situation is over. The output signal TRIP may
5
have a non-latching or latching feature. When the latching mode has been selected,
the TRIP signal remains active until the output is reset even if the operation criteria
have reset (the unbalance has disappeared).
The function block provides a delayed trip signal CBFP after the trip signal TRIP
unless the fault has disappeared during the adjustable CBFP time delay. The CBFP
output can be used in circuit breaker failure protection to operate a circuit breaker in
front of the circuit breaker of the feeder. The control parameter Trip pulse also sets
the width of the CBFP output signal.
2.7 Resetting
The TRIP output signal and the registers can be reset either with the RESET input, or
over the serial bus or the local MMI.

1)
1)
Parameter F051V013 X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
Push-buttons C + E (2 s X X
2)
1)
Resets the latched trip signal and recorded data of the particular function block.
2)
6
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CUB3Low is 51.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
7
3.2 Setting values

direction
Operation mode S1 0 or 1 1) - 1 R Selection of operation mode
Start unbalance S2 10.0...95.0 % 60.0 R Start unbalance
Operate time S3 1.0...300.0 s 1.0 R Operate time at DT mode

1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = Definite time

direction
Operation mode S41 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Selection of operation mode
Start unbalance S42 10.0...95.0 % 60.0 R/W Start unbalance
Operate time S43 1.0...300.0 s 1.0 R/W Operate time at DT mode

1)

direction

1)
8

direction
CBFP time V1 100...1000 ms 100 R/W Operate time of the delayed trip
CBFP
Group selection V2 0 ... 2 1) - 0 R/W Selection of the active setting group

2)
Start pulse V4 0...1000 ms 0 R/W Minimum pulse width of START

signal

TRIP output
Trip pulse V6 40...1000 ms 40 R/W Minimum pulse width of TRIP and

CBFP
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - 0 W Resetting of latched trip signal and

registers

4)
Test TRIP V32 0 or 1 - - R/W Testing of TRIP
Test CBFP V33 0 or 1 4) - - R/W Testing of CBFP
(E0 ... E11)
(E0 ... E11)
(E0 ... E11)
(E0 ... E11)
1)
2)
3)
Trip signal 0 = Non-latching; 1 = Latching
4)
9
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Current unbalance I4 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Current unbalance

1)
Input BS1 I5 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Block signal BS1
Input BS2 I6 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Block signal BS2

1)
Input TRIGG I7 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Signal for triggering the
registers
Input GROUP I8 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for switching between

the groups 1 and 2

CUB3Low
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output START O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of start signal
Output TRIP O2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of trip signal

1)
Output CBFP O3 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of CBFP signal
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
The information required for later fault analysis is recorded when the function block
starts or trips, or when the recording function is triggered via the external TRIGG
input. The recording function cannot be blocked or prevented.
The data of three last operations (operation 1...3) are recorded and the values of the
most recent operation always replace the data of the oldest operation. The registers
are updated in the following order: Operation 1, Operation 2, Operation 3, Operation
1, Operation 2,...
10
The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the START, TRIP or TRIGG signal.
3.3.3.2 Duration
The duration of the start situation is recorded as a percentage of the set definite
operate time.
3.3.3.3 Current unbalance and amplitudes
If the function block trips, the current unbalance and amplitudes will be updated at the
moment of tripping i.e. on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. At external triggering,
the values are updated at the moment of triggering i.e. on the rising edge of the input
signal TRIGG. If the function block starts but does not trip, the values captured one
fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz) after the beginning of the start
situation will be recorded. So, the current unbalance and amplitudes always originate
from the same moment.
3.3.3.4 Status data
The status data of the input signals BS1 and BS2 (Active or Not active) and the
Active group parameter are recorded at the moment of triggering. The Active
group parameter indicates the setting group valid for the recorded data.
3.3.3.5 Priorities
1 Tripping
2 Starting
which means that if the function has started, an external triggering request will be
neglected.
11

direction
Duration V203 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Duration of start situation
Curr. unbalance V207 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Current unbalance

1)

1)
BS_ 0: = Not active; 1 = Active
2)

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
12

direction

1)

1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from DI> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from DI> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from DI> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from DI> stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from DI> stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from DI> stage Activated
E6 64 0 BS1 signal of DI> stage Reset
E7 128 0 BS1 signal of DI> stage Activated
E10 1024 0 Test mode of DI> stage Off
E11 2048 0 Test mode of DI> stage On
13
4. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value or 1% unit
Start time f/fn = 0.95...1.05 internal time < 95 ms

1)
total time < 100 ms
TRIP output)
Retardation time Total retardation time for blocking2) < 25 ms
Total retardation time when the current drops

below the start value2) < 50 ms
Operate time accuracy 2% of set value or 50 ms
Frequency dependence of the The suppression of harmonics is about

settings and operate times (see
-50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
above)
1)
2)

B -
C Parameter Current unbalance Curr. unbalance
14
1MRS752298-MUM CUB3Low
Issued: 10/1997
Version: F/17.01.2002
Phase Discontinuity
Data subject to change without notice Protection Function DI>
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.4 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 5
2.5 Test mode ........................................................................................... 5
2.7 Resetting............................................................................................. 6

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 7
3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 8
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 8
3.2.2 Setting group 1........................................................................... 8
3.2.3 Setting group 2........................................................................... 8
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 10
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 10
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 10
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 13
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 14
CUB3Low Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Phase discontinuity protection for three phases

Operation of the function block is based on fundamental frequency phase currents
Internal blocking when all the three phase currents fall below 10% of the rated
current
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the phase discontinuity protection function
block CUB3Low used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The phase discontinuity protection function CUB3Low is designed to be used for

protection against broken phase conductors in distribution networks. Definite-time
(DT) characteristic is always used.

,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
2
Substation Automation CUB3Low
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI&8%/RZ

high)
high)
edge) registers
edge) and registers of CUB3Low

configuration error
3
2.1 Configuration

2.2 Measuring mode
The operation of the function block is based on fundamental frequency phase

currents, which means the following:

harmonics suppression is about -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
operation accuracy is defined in the frequency range f/fn = 0.95...1.05.
The unbalance of the network is detected by monitoring the highest (ILmax) and the
lowest (ILmin) phase currents. The unbalance is thus calculated according to the
formula
I = 100% x (ILmax - ILmin) / ILmax
At full unbalance, i.e. when a phase conductor is broken before the first load on that
phase, the display of the relay or the feeder terminal will show an unbalance of 100%.
If the current unbalance I exceeds the set start unbalance value during three
successive executions, the function block starts, i.e. the signal START is set to TRUE,
and the DT timer begins counting.
Should the duration of the unbalance situation exceed the set definite operate time,
the function block operates. The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in
4
the total operate time. When the function block operates, the TRIP signal is set to
TRUE.
The DT timer is allowed to run only if the blocking signal BS1 is not active, i.e. its
value is FALSE. When the signal BS1 is active, i.e. its value is TRUE, the timer will
be stopped (frozen).
drops off.
The phase discontinuity protection is not in use when all the measured currents fall
below 10% of the rated current In. The execution task cycle of the function block is
one fundamental cycle (20 ms at 50 Hz).
2.4 Setting groups
ways:

1)
The the control parameter Active groupindicates the setting group valid at a given
time.
2.5 Test mode
corresponding output signal is set via a separate parameter on MMI or serial
5
have reset (the unbalance has disappeared).
The function block provides a delayed trip signal CBFP after the trip signal TRIP
unless the fault has disappeared during the adjustable CBFP time delay. The CBFP
output can be used in circuit breaker failure protection to operate a circuit breaker in
front of the circuit breaker of the feeder. The control parameter Trip pulse also sets
2.7 Resetting
The TRIP output signal and the registers can be reset either with the RESET input, or

1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
Push-buttons C + E (2 s X X
2)
1)
2)
6
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for CUB3Low is 51.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
7
3.2 Setting values

direction
Start unbalance S2 10.0...95.0 % 60.0 R Start unbalance
Operate time S3 1.0...300.0 s 1.0 R Operate time in DT mode

1)

direction
Operate time S43 1.0...300.0 s 1.0 R/W Operate time in DT mode

1)

direction

1)
8

direction
CBFP
Group selection V2 0 ... 2 1) - 0 R/W Selection of the active setting group

2)

signal

TRIP output

CBFP

registers

4)
(E0 ... E11)
(E0 ... E11)
(E0 ... E11)
(E0 ... E11)
1)
2)
3)
4)
9
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Current unbalance I4 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Current unbalance

1)

1)
registers

the groups 1 and 2

CUB3Low
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction

1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
input. The recording function cannot be blocked or prevented.
1, Operation 2,...
10
3.3.3.2 Duration
The duration of the start situation is recorded as a percentage of the set definite
operate time.
3.3.3.3 Current unbalance and amplitudes
If the function block trips, the current unbalance and amplitudes will be updated at the
the values are updated at the moment of triggering i.e. on the rising edge of the input
signal TRIGG. If the function block starts but does not trip, the values captured one
situation will be recorded. So, the current unbalance and amplitudes always originate
from the same moment.
3.3.3.4 Status data
The status data of the input signals BS1 and BS2 (Active or Not active) and the
Active group parameter are recorded at the moment of triggering. The Active
3.3.3.5 Priorities
1 Tripping
2 Starting
which means that if the function has started, an external triggering request will be
neglected.
11

direction

1)

1)
2)

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
12

direction

1)

1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from DI> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from DI> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from DI> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from DI> stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from DI> stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from DI> stage Activated
E10 1024 0 Test mode of DI> stage Off
E11 2048 0 Test mode of DI> stage On
13
4. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value or 1% unit

1)
total time < 100 ms
TRIP output)
Total retardation time when the current drops

Frequency dependence of the The suppression of harmonics is about

settings and operate times (see
above)
1)
2)

B -
C Parameter Current unbalance Curr. unbalance
14
1MRS752300-MUM DEF2_
Issued: 10/1997
Version: F/22.04.2002
Directional Earth-Fault Protection
Low-Set Stage (DEF2Low)
High-Set Stage (DEF2High)
Data subject to change without notice Instantaneous Stage (DEF2Inst)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2. Description of operation .......................................................................... 5
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.3.1 Basic angle criterion ................................................................... 8
2.3.2 I0cos() and I0sin() characteristics ........................................ 11
2.3.3 Intermittent operation using EFSIGN........................................ 13
2.4 Delayed reset facility and drop-off time in DT mode .......................... 14
2.5 IDMT type operation of DEF2Low ..................................................... 15
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 17
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 17
2.8 START, TRIP and CBFP outputs ...................................................... 17
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 17
3. Parameters and events .......................................................................... 19
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 19
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 20
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 20
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 22
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 23
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 26
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 27
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 27
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 31
4. Technical data ........................................................................................ 32
DEF2_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Directional earth-fault protection based on the neutral current Io and the residual
voltage Uo
Four selectable criteria for directional operation
Non-directional earth-fault protection based on the criterion for neutral current or
residual voltage
DEF2Low: four internationally standardized inverse-time (IDMT) characteristics
Neutral current measurement with a core-balance current transformer, residual
connection or by digital addition of phase current signals
Residual voltage measurement with open-delta connected voltage transformers or
by digital addition of phase voltage signals
Two alternative measuring principles: the average value of consecutive
instantaneous peak-to-peak values or the numerically calculated fundamental
frequency component of the earth-fault current and the residual voltage
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the directional earth-fault protection

function blocks DEF2Low, DEF2High and DEF2Inst used products based on the RED
500 Platform. The inverse-time operation is only included in the low-set stage
(DEF2Low).
The directional earth-fault protection function blocks are designed to be used for
directional or non-directional earth-fault protection whenever the DT characteristic or,
as concerns DEF2Low, the IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum Time) characteristic is
appropriate. Suppression of harmonics is possible.
Io> Io>> Io>>>
CBFP CBFP CBFP
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI'()/RZ'()+LJKDQG'(),QVW
)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOHOLQHGLDJUDPVUHIHUWRWKHPDQXDO
7HFKQLFDO'HVFULSWLRQVRI)XQFWLRQV,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
2
Substation Automation DEF2_
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI'()/RZ'()+LJKDQG'(),QVW
3

Io Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring neutral current Io
Uo Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring residual voltage Uo
high)
high)
BACTRL Digital signal (BOOL, active Input for changing the basic angle or
high) switching between the cos and sin
characteristics (Basic Angle Control)
edge) registers
BSREG Digital signal (BOOL, active Input for blocking the recording function
high)
edge) and registers of DEF2Low, DEF2High
or DEF2Inst

configuration error
4
2. Description of operation
2.1 Configuration
Neutral current Io can be measured with a core balance current transformer, residual
connection or by digital addition of phase current signals. If the neutral of the network
is either isolated or earthed by a high impedance, a core balance current transformer is
recommended to be used in earth fault protection. To ensure sufficient accuracy of
zero sequence current measurements and consequently the selectivity of the scheme,
core balance current transformers should have a transformation ratio of at least 70:1.
Lower transformation ratios like 50:1 or 50:5 are not recommended.
The measuring devices and signal types for analogue channels are specified and
outputs depends on the type of the hardware used).
Note! When the function block DEF2_ is used, the intermittent earth-fault protection
must be selected for the channel connected to the Io input of the function block from
the special measurements dialogue box of the configuration tool, regardless of
whether the intermittent operation itself is used or not. For more information about
the intermittent earth-fault protection, refer to section Intermittent operation using
EFSIGN.
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The neutral current Io is connected to the
Io input of the function block and in the same way, the residual voltage Uo is
connected to the Uo input. Furthermore, the digital inputs are connected to the
Boolean inputs of the function block and the outputs of the function block are
connected to the output signals.
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block operates on two alternative measuring principles: the average
value of consecutive instantaneous peak-to-peak values or the numerically calculated
fundamental frequency component of the earth-fault current and the residual voltage.
The measuring mode is selected by means of an HMI parameter or a serial
communication parameter.
With both the measuring principles, the operation is insensitive to the DC component
and the operation accuracy is defined in the frequency range f/fn=0.95...1.05. In peak-
to-peak measurement, the harmonics of the neutral current and the residual voltage are
not suppressed, whereas in fundamental frequency measurement the harmonics
suppression is at least -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
5
When the function block starts, the START signal is set to TRUE. Should the
duration of the earth-fault exceed the set definite operate time or, at the inverse-time
operation, the time determined by the level of the measured neutral current, the
function block operates. The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in the
total operate time. When the function block operates, the TRIP signal is set to TRUE.
The DT or IDMT timer is allowed to run only if the blocking signal BS1 is inactive,
i.e. its value is FALSE. When the signal becomes active, i.e. its value turns to TRUE,
the timer will be stopped (frozen).
drops off. Whenever the TRIP signal has been activated, the minimum pulse width is
defined via the paramerer Trip pulse.
The following table presents the functions available in DEF2Low:
Oper. criteria DT IDMT b I0sin() I0cos() I0 U0 EFSIGN*)

BasicAng & Uo (1) x x x x x
BasicAng & Uo (2) x x x x
BasicAng (1) x x x x
BasicAng (2) x x x
BasicAng (3) x x x
IoCos & Uo (1) x x x x x
IoCos & Uo (2) x x x
IoSin & Uo (1) x x x
IoSin & Uo (2) x x x
IoCos (1) x x x x
IoCos (2) x x
IoCos (3) x x
IoSin (1) x x
IoSin (2) x x
Non-dir. Io (1) x x
Non-dir. Io (2) x x
Non-dir. Uo x x
*) Intermittent earth-fault protection is only available for a compensated network.
6
The following table presents the functions available in DEF2High and DEF2Inst:
Oper. criteria DT b I0sin() I0cos() I0 U0 EFSIGN*)

BasicAng & Uo (1) x x x x x
BasicAng (1) x x x x
BasicAng (2) x x x
IoCos & Uo (1) x x x x x
IoSin & Uo x x x
IoCos (1) x x x x
IoCos (2) x x
IoSin x x
Non-dir. Io x x
Non-dir. Uo x x
*) Intermittent earth-fault protection is only available for a compensated network.
At the directional operation the calculation of the angle , i.e. the phase angle
between residual voltage and neutral current, will start when the neutral current
exceeds the value 0.5% In and the residual voltage the value 0.5% Un.
Case 1: Oper. criteria = BasicAng & U0

The directional function based on the basic angle and the residual voltage criterion
starts if the following three criteria are fulfilled at the same time:
- neutral current I0 exceeds the set start current
- residual voltage U0 exceeds the set start voltage
- phase angle between the residual voltage and the neutral current is within the
operating range b , where b denotes the adjustable basic angle and the
adjustable operation sector or, if the intermittent earth-fault protection is used (1),
a sufficient amount of current peaks is detected during a specified time.
Case 2: Oper. criteria = BasicAng
The directional function based on the basic angle starts if the following two
criteria are fulfilled at the same time:
- neutral current I0 exceeds the set start current
- phase angle between the residual voltage and the neutral current is within the
operating range b or, if the intermittent earth-fault protection is used (1), a
sufficient amount of current peaks is detected during a specified time.
7
Case 3: Oper. criteria = IoSin/Cos & Uo

The directional function based on the I0sin() or I0cos() characteristic and the
residual voltage criterion starts if the following two criteria are fulfilled at the
same time:
- the neutral current I0sin() or I0cos() exceeds the set start current or, if the
intermittent earth-fault protection is used (IoCos(1)), a sufficient amount of current
peaks is detected during a specified time and the neutral current exceeds the set
start current
- residual voltage U0 exceeds the set start voltage
Case 4: Oper. criteria = IoSin/Cos
The directional function based on the I0sin() or I0cos() characteristic starts if the
neutral current I0sin() or I0cos() exceeds the set start current or, if the
intermittent earth-fault protection is used (IoCos(1)), a sufficient amount of current
peaks is detected during a specified time and the neutral current exceeds the set
start current.
Case 5: Oper. criteria = Non-dir. Io
The non-directional function based on neutral current starts if the neutral current
exceeds the set start current.
Case 6: Oper. criteria = Non-dir. Uo
The non-directional function based on residual voltage starts if the residual voltage
exceeds the set start voltage.
2.3.1 Basic angle criterion
The basic angle of the directional operation depends on the earthing principle of the
network so that in an isolated network b = -90 and in a compensated network b =
0. The basic angle b can be set to be -90, -60, -30 or 0.
In addition, the basic angle can be changed via the control signal BACTRL, in which
case the alternatives are -90 and 0. The operation of BACTRL depends on the
parameter Basic angle as shown in the following table:
Basic angle = BACTRL = 0 BACTRL = 1

-90 b = -90 b = 0
0 b = 0 b = -90
BACTRL = 0 means that the input BACTRL is inactive (FALSE) and BACTRL = 1
means that the input BACTRL is active (TRUE).
The operating sector can be set to 80 or 88. The operating characteristic

depends on the values selected for the operate sector and the basic angle b. The
"corners" of the operating characteristics are "rounded" to provide better tolerance of
CT errors.
8
Operation criteria for directional operation when = 80:
Criterion for phase angle: -80 < -b < 80

Criterion for residual voltage if selected: U0 > start voltage
Criterion for neutral current (operating characteristic, see Fig. 5):
- when -70 -b 70, I0 > max (start current, 1.0%)
- when -80 -b < -70 or 70 < -b 80, I0 > max (start current, 3.0%)
Operation criteria for directional operation when = 88:
Criterion for phase angle: -88 < -b < 88

Criterion for residual voltage if selected: U0 > start voltage
Criterion for neutral current (operating characteristic, see Fig. 5):
- when -73 -b 73, I0 > max (start current, 1.0%)
- when -85 -b < -73, I0 > max (start current, I01),
where I01 = (-1.58333%/) x (-b) - 114.58333%
- when -88 < -b < -85, I0 > max (start current, I02),
where I02 = (-26.66667%/) x (-b) - 2246.66667%
- when 73 < -b 85, I0 > max (start current, I03),
where I03 = (1.58333%/) x (-b) - 114.58333%
- when 85 < -b < 88, I0 > max (start current, I04),
where I04 = (26.66667%/) x (-b) - 2246.66667%
The operating direction Forward or Reverse can be selected via the parameter
Oper. direction. The default configuration direction is forward, i.e. the power
flow direction is away from the busbar, when the voltage and current transformer
connections are as drawn in the figure below. The function block will operate on fault
currents flowing in the set direction only.
9
L1 L3
Q1 A
Q0 N
n
Q9 a
da dn
X1.1
27 100V Ch 10, VT4
25
L1 L3 24
P1 S1 100V Ch 9, VT3
22
21
100V Ch 8, VT2
S2 19
P2 18
100V Ch 7, VT1
16
S1 15 0,2A
14 1A Ch 6, CT5
13
12 1A
S2 11 5A Ch 5, CT4
*) 10
9 1A
8 5A Ch 4, CT3
7
6 1A
5 5A Ch 3, CT2
4
3 1A
2 5A Ch 2, CT1
1
X2.1 Ch 10, sensor

DIFF
X2.2 Ch 9, sensor
DIFF
X2.3 Ch 8, sensor
*) Power flow direction: forward DIFF
X2.4 Ch 7, sensor
DIFF
X2.5 Ch 4, sensor
DIFF
X2.6 Ch 3, sensor
DIFF
X2.7 Ch 2, sensor
DIFF
X2.8 Ch 1, sensor
DIFF
currdir
REF 541
(1MRS 090115-AAB/CAB)
)LJXUH9ROWDJHDQGWUDQVIRUPHUFRQQHFWLRQVRI5()
When the reverse direction has been selected, the basic angle b = Basic angle + 180
(calculated internally) and the operating characteristics are the same as those
illustrated in Figures 2.3.1.-1 and 2.3.1.-2 but rotated by 180. The operation
equations for DSP processing are exactly the same as above.
U0
b= -90
= 70
= 80
Operation area Non-operation area
)LJXUH2SHUDWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLFZKHQWKHEDVLFDQJOHE

DQGVWDUWFXUUHQW ,Q
10
b = 0 U0
I0

= 80
= 70 Operation area
3% 1% Non-operation area
)LJXUH2SHUDWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLFZKHQWKHEDVLFDQJOHE DQG

VWDUWFXUUHQW ,Q
I 0 / % x In
= 88 120
= 80 110
100
88, 100%
90
80
70
Operation area 60
50 85, 20%
40
-80, 3%
30 73, 1%
20
-70, 3%
10 Start current
-70, 1%
-90 -60 -30 0 30 60 90
)LJXUH2SHUDWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLFLOOXVWUDWHGLQDQ,GLDJUDPZKHQWKH
EDVLFDQJOHE DQGVWDUWFXUUHQW [,Q
2.3.2 I0cos() and I0sin() characteristics
The operating characteristic of the directional operation depends on the earthing

principle of the network so that the sin() characteristic should be used in an isolated
network, whereas the cos() characteristic should be used in a compensated network.
The operating characteristic is selected via the parameter Oper. charact..
In addition, the operating characteristic can be changed via the control signal
BACTRL. The operation of BACTRL depends on the parameter Oper. charact. as
follows:
11
Oper. charact. = BACTRL = 0 BACTRL = 1

IoSin() sin() char. cos() char.
IoCos() cos() char. sin() char.
The setting range of the correction factor AngleCorr is 0...5 (see Figures 2.3.2.-1
and 2.3.2.-2). The operating direction Forward or Reverse can be selected via the
parameter Oper. direction. When the reverse direction has been selected, the
operating characteristics are the same as those illustrated in Figures 2.3.2.-1 and
2.3.2.-2 but rotated by 180.
U0

I0
I0 sin( )
Operation area Non-operation

area
StartCurr
AngleCorr
)LJXUH2SHUDWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLF,VLQ
U0

I0 cos( ) I0
AngleCorr Operation area
StartCurr Non-operation
area
)LJXUH2SHUDWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLF,FRV
12
2.3.3 Intermittent operation using EFSIGN
The direction of an intermittent earth-fault can in most cases be detected by means of

the EFSIGN function. EFSIGN, which is the result of the multiplication Uo(k) x Io(k)
(see Figure 2.3.3.-1), is calculated when the momentary peak value of the neutral
current exceeds the fundamental amplitude of the neutral current by at least 3 times.
The intermittent earth-fault can start the protection, if the amplitudes of both voltage
and current exceed their respective settings, even if the phase angle between the
neutral current and the residual voltage is not within the operation area of the
characteristic used. The intermittent earth-fault protection can only be used in a
compensated network and with the definite-time (DT) operation. If the EFSIGN
function is selected, neutral current measurement must be based on the peak-to-peak
principle. The EFSIGN function is selected via the parameter Intermittent E/F.
Momentary peak
value of neutral
current Io (k)
Momentary value
of neutral voltage
Uo (k)
3 x fundamental
amplitude of Io Fundamental
amplitude of Io
)LJXUH,QWHUPLWWHQWHDUWKIDXOWLQWKHSURWHFWHGDUHD
The operating direction Forward or Reverse can be selected via the parameter
Oper. direction. When the reverse direction has been selected, the EFSIGN value is
changed accordingly.
When the feeder terminal is used in intermittent earth-fault protection applications the
following should be considered:
degree of compensation
neutral point resistor
accuracy class and saturation point of window-type I0 current transformers
possible parallel feeder applications
rated value of the matching transformer input for I0 channel
U0 relay operate time in relation to feeder protection operate time
network earth capacitance
13
When balance has been established between the application and the settings, relevant
intermittent earth-fault protection is obtained. In most cases the feeder or machine
terminal detects intermittent earth-faults. Because of the complexity of the
phenomenon, situations may however occur, where the operation of the protection
function might be affected. This may cause non-selective tripping.
2.4 Delayed reset facility and drop-off time in DT mode
The purpose of the delayed reset function is to enable fast clearance of intermittent
faults, e.g. self-sealing insulation faults, and severe faults which may produce high
asymmetrical fault currents that partially saturate the current transformers. It is typical
for an intermittent fault that the fault current contains so- called drop-off periods
during which the fault current is below the set start current. Without the delayed reset
function the DT timer would reset once the current drops off. In the same way, an
apparent drop-off period of the secondary current of the saturated current transformer
might reset the DT timer. The adjustable delayed reset function also enables closer
co-ordination with electromechanical induction disc relays.
When the DT timer has started, it goes on running as normally even if the current
drops off, provided the drop-off period is shorter than the set drop-off time. If the
drop-off period is longer than the set drop-off time, the DT timer will reset when the
drop-off time elapses (Figure 2.4.-1). In Figures 2.4.-1 and 2.4.-2 the input signal IN
of the DT timer is TRUE when the neutral current is above the set start value and the
directional criterion is fulfilled when in use. The input signal is FALSE when the
current is below the set start value or the directional criterion is not fulfilled.
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
)LJXUH7KHGURSRIISHULRGLVORQJHUWKDQWKHVHWGURSRIIWLPH
If the drop-off period is shorter than the set drop-off time and the DT timer time has
elapsed during the drop-off period, the function block will trip once the current
exceeds the set start current again (Figure 2.4.-2).
14
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
)LJXUH7KHGURSRIISHULRGLVVKRUWHUWKDQWKHVHWGURSRIIWLPH
2.5 IDMT type operation of DEF2Low
At the inverse-time mode of DEF2Low the operate time is a function of the current;
the higher the current, the shorter is the operate time. Four time/current curve groups
are available. The curves comply with the BS 142 and IEC 60255 standards. The
desired operate time characteristic is selected with the parameter Operation mode.
(For a graphical presentation of the curves, refer to the manual Technical Descriptions
of Functions, Introduction.)

The function incorporates four internationally standardized inverse-time

characteristics:
normal inverse (NI)

very inverse (VI)
The relationship between time and current is in accordance with the standard IEC
60255-4 and can be expressed as follows
kx
t s =
I
( ) 1
I>
where
15

I = neutral current (RMS value)
Inverse-time
characteristic
According to the standard BS 142: 1966 the effective current range is defined to be
characteristic the effective current range is specified to be 2...7 times the set start
by 1.1 times. The function block DEF2Low will start and the IDMT integration will
begin once the current exceeds the set start current.
(E denotes the accuracy in percent):

2 2.22E 2.34E 2.44E 2.34E
5 1.13E 1.26E 1.48E 1.26E
7 - - - 1.00E
10 1.01E 1.01E 1.02E -
20 1.00E 1.00E 1.00E -
1966 for currents 2 and 5 times the setting. The DEF2Low complies with the
tolerances of class 5 (E = 5.0%) for all inverse-time curves.
For example:

16
2.6 Setting groups
ways:
1 Locally via the control parameter Group selection1) of the HMI

1)
time.
2.7 Test mode
parameters for each output either locally via the HMI or externally via the serial
indicating the test is generated. The protection functions operate normally while the
outputs are tested.
corresponding output signal is set via a separate parameter on the HMI or on serial
signal remains active until the start situation is over. The output signal TRIP may be
non-latching or latching. When the latching mode has been selected, the TRIP signal
remains active until the output is reset even if the operation criteria have reset.
The function block provides a delayed trip signal CBFP after the TRIP signal unless
the fault has disappeared during the set CBFP time delay. The CBFP output can be
used in circuit-breaker failure protection to operate a circuit breaker in front of the
circuit breaker of the feeder. The control parameter Trip pulsealso sets the pulse
width of the CBFP output signal.
2.9 Resetting
The TRIP output signal and the registers can be reset either via the RESET input, or
over the serial bus or the local HMI.
17

1)
1)
Parameter F040V013 for DEF1Low X X
1)
Parameter F041V013 for DEF1High X X
1)
Parameter F042V013 for DEF1Inst X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
Affects all function blocks
18
3. Parameters and events
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for DEF2Low is 40, that for DEF2High 41 and
that for DEF2Inst 42.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
visibility of events on the HMI or on serial communication (LON or SPA) as
follows:
Event mask 1 (FxxxV101/102) SPA / HMI (LON)
For example, if only the events E3, E4 and E5 are to be seen on the HMI of the
32...63.
19
3.2 Setting values
DEF2Low

direction
Operation mode S1 0 ... 5 1) - 1 R Selection of operation mode and
IDMT characteristic
Oper. criteria S2 0 ... 5 2) - 0 R Selection of operation criteria
Oper. direction S3 0 or 1 3) - 0 R Operation direction
Basic angle b S4 0 ... 3 4)

- 0 R Basic angle
Oper. charact. S5 0 or 1 5) - 0 R Operating characteristic
Start current S6 1.0...25.0 % In 1.0 R Start current
Start voltage S7 2.0...100.0 % Un 2.0 R Start voltage
Time multiplier S9 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R Time multiplier at IDMT mode

6
Intermittent E/F S10 0 or 1 - 0 R Selection of intermittent earth-
fault protection
1)
4 = Normal inv.; 5 = Long time inv.
2)
Oper. criteria 0 = BasicAng & Uo; 1 = BasicAng; 2 = IoSin/Cos & Uo; 3 = IoSin/Cos;
4 = Non-dir. Io; 5 = Non-dir. Uo
3)
Oper. direction 0 = Forward; 1 = Reverse
4)
Basic angle b: 0 = -90; 1 = -60; 2 = -30; 3 = 0
5)
Oper. charact. 0 = IoSin(); 1 = IoCos()
6)
Intermittent E/F 0 = Not active; 1 = Active
20
DEF2High and DEF2Inst

direction
Operation mode S1 0 ... 2 1) - 1 R Selection of operation mode
2)
Oper. criteria S2 0 ... 5 - 0 R Selection of operation criteria
Oper. direction S3 0 or 1 3) - 0 R Operation direction

- 0 R Basic angle
Oper. charact. S5 0 or 1 5) - 0 R Operating characteristic
Intermittent E/F S9 0 or 1 6 - 0 R Selection of intermittent earth-

fault protection
1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = Definite time; 2 = Instantaneous
2)
3)
4)
Basic angle b: 0 = -90; 1 = -60; 2 = -30; 3 = 0
5)
6)
21
DEF2Low

direction
Operation mode S41 0 ... 5 1) - 1 R/W Selection of operation mode
and IDMT characteristic
Oper. criteria S42 0 ... 5 2) - 0 R/W Selection of operation criteria

3)
Oper. direction S43 0 or 1 - 0 R/W Operation direction
Basic angle b S44 0 ... 3 4) - 0 R/W Basic angle

5)
Oper. charact. S45 0 or 1 - 0 R/W Operating characteristic
Start current S46 1.0...25.0 % In 1.0 R/W Start current
Start voltage S47 2.0...100.0 % Un 2.0 R/W Start voltage
Time multiplier S49 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R/W Time multiplier at IDMT mode
Intermittent E/F S50 0 or 1 6 - 0 R/W Selection of intermittent earth-

fault protection
1)
2)
3)
4)
Basic angle b 0 = -90; 1 = -60; 2 = -30; 3 = 0
5)
6)

direction
2)
Oper. criteria S42 0 ... 5 - 0 R/W Selection of operation criteria
Oper. direction S43 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/W Operation direction

- 0 R/W Basic angle
Oper. charact. S45 0 or 1 5) - 0 R/W Operating characteristic

fault protection
1)
2)
3)
4)
Basic angle b: 0 = -90; 1 = -60; 2 = -30; 3 = 0
5)
6)
22
DEF2Low

direction
and IDMT characteristic
Oper. criteria S72 0 ... 5 2) - 0 R/W Selection of operation criteria

3)
Oper. direction S73 0 or 1 - 0 R/W Operation direction
Basic angle b S74 0 ... 3 4) - 0 R/W Basic angle

5)
Oper. charact. S75 0 or 1 - 0 R/W Operating characteristic

fault protection
1)
2)
3)
4)
Basic angle b 0 = -90; 1 = -60; 2 = -30; 3 = 0
5)
6)

direction
2)
Oper. criteria S72 0 ... 5 - 0 R/W Selection of operation criteria
Oper. direction S73 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/W Operation direction

- 0 R/W Basic angle
Oper. charact. S75 0 or 1 5) - 0 R/W Operating characteristic

fault protection
1)
2)
3)
4)
Basic angle b: 0 = -90; 1 = -60; 2 = -30; 3 = 0
5)
6)
23
DEF2Low

direction
Measuring mode V1 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Selection of measuring mode
Drop-off time V2 0...1000 ms 0 R/W Resetting time of the operate

time counter

group

signal

TRIP output
Trip pulse V7 40...1000 ms 40 R/W Minimum pulse width of TRIP

and CBFP
Minimum time V8 0.03...10.00 s 0.03 R/W Minimum operate time at IDMT

mode
CBFP
Angle correction V10 0.0...5.0 2.0 R/W Angle correction factor for
Iosin() / Iocos()
Oper. sector V11 0 or 15) - 0 R/W Operation sector
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - 0 W Resetting of latched trip signal

and registers

6)




1)
Measuring mode 0 = Peak-to-peak; 1 = Fundam.freq.
2)
3)
4)
5)
Oper. sector 0 = 80; 1 = 88
6)
24

direction

time counter at DT mode

group

signal

TRIP output

and CBFP
CBFP
Angle correction V9 0.0...5.0 2.0 R/W Angle correction factor for

Iosin() / Iocos()
Oper. sector V10 0 or 15) - 0 R/W Operation sector

and registers

5)




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Oper. sector 0 = 80; 1 = 88
6)
25
3.3.1 Input data
DEF2Low

direction
Current Io I1 0.0...2000.0 % In 0.0 R/M Neutral current Io
Voltage Uo I2 0.0...120.0 % Un 0.0 R/M Residual voltage Uo
Phase angle I3 -180...+180 0.0 R/M Phase angle
Angle b - I4 -180...+180 0.0 R/M Phase angle b -

1)

1)
Input BACTRL I7 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Input BACTRL

1)
groups 1 and 2
Input BSREG I10 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for blocking the recording

function

signals and registers of DEF2Low
1)
26

direction
Current Io I1 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Neutral current Io
Phase angle I3 -180...+180 0.0 R/M Phase angle
Angle b - I4 -180...+180 0 R/M Phase angle b -

1)
Input BACTRL I7 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Input BACTRL

1)
Input TRIGG I8 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Signal for triggering the registers
Input GROUP I9 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for switching between the

groups 1 and 2

function

signals and registers of DEF2High
or DEF2Inst
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Output TRIP O2 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of trip signal

1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips, or when the recording function is triggered via an external triggering
input.
1, Operation 2,...
27
The recording function can be blocked by means of the BSREG input. For example, if
an auto-reclose sequence is initiated by the trip signal of the function block, the values
recorded just before Shot 1 are most reliable for later fault analysis. When the auto-
reclose sequence has started, no recordings are needed at the moment of tripping. The
output signal ACTIVE in AR5Func indicating AR in progress is connected to the
BSREG input to prevent useless recording.
3.3.3.3 Duration
At the DT mode of operation the duration of the start situation is recorded as a

percentage of the set operate time and, as concerns DEF2Low, at the IDMT mode of
operation as a percentage of the calculated operate time.
3.3.3.4 Neutral current and residual voltage
If the function block trips, the current and voltage values are updated at the moment
of tripping i.e. on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. For external triggering, the
current and voltage values are updated at the moment of triggering i.e. on the rising
edge of the input signal TRIGG. If the function block starts but does not trip, the
neutral current and residual voltage values captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at
rated frequency 50 Hz) after the beginning of the start situation are recorded. The
values of the neutral current Io and residual voltage Uo are recorded as multiples of
the rated value.
3.3.3.5 Angle values and Intermittent E/F
The values of Angle(), Angle(b- ) and Intermittent E/F are recorded at the
moment of triggering.
3.3.3.6 Status data
The status data of the input signals BS1, BS2 and BACTRL as well as the Active
group parameter are recorded at the moment of triggering. The Active
groupparameter indicates the setting group valid for the recorded data.
28
3.3.3.7 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
which means that if the function block has started, it will neglect an external
triggering request.

direction
Io mean V204 0.0...2000.0 % In 0.0 R/M Io mean value
Io peak V205 0.0...2000.0 % In 0.0 R/M Io peak value
Voltage Uo V206 0.0...120.0 % Un 0.0 R/M Residual voltage Uo
Angle V207 -180...+180 0 R/M Angle between Uo & Io
Angle b - V208 -180...+180 0 R/M Angle between b &
Intermittent E/F V209 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/M Status of Intermittent E/F

1)

1)
BACTRL V212 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of BACTRL input

1)
2)
3)
Intermittent E/F 0 = Not detected; 1 = Detected
29

direction

3)
Intermittent E/F V309 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of Intermittent E/F

1)
BACTRL V312 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of BACTRL input

2)
1)
2)
3)

direction
Intermittent E/F V409 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/M Status of Intermittent E/F

1)

1)
BACTRL V412 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of BACTRL input

1)
2)
3)
30
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from Io> , Io>> or Io>>> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from Io> , Io>> or Io>>> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from Io> , Io>> or Io>>> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from Io> , Io>> or Io>>> stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from Io> , Io>> or Io>>> stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from Io> , Io>> or Io>>> stage Activated
E6 64 0 BS1 signal of Io> , Io>> or Io>>> stage Reset
E7 128 0 BS1 signal of Io> , Io>> or Io>>> stage Activated
E8 256 0 BS2 signal of Io> , Io>> or Io>>> stage Reset
E9 512 0 BS2 signal of Io> , Io>> or Io>>> stage Activated
E10 1024 0 Test mode of Io> , Io>> or Io>>> stage Off
E11 2048 0 Test mode of Io> , Io>> or Io>>> stage On
31
4. Technical data

Operation accuracies At the frequency f/fn= 0.95...1.05:
current 2.5% of set value +0.0005 x In.
voltage 2.5% of set value or +0.01 x Un.
phase angle 2
Start time Injected neutral current > 2.0 x start current and residual voltage >
2.0 x start voltage:
total time1) < 80 ms
Reset time 40...1000 ms (depends on the minimum output pulse width set for
the TRIP output)
Retardation time Total retardation time when the current drops

Operate time accuracy Depends on the frequency of the current and voltage measured:
at definite-time mode
f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2% of set value or 20 ms2)
Accuracy class index E Depends on the frequency of the current and voltage measured:
at inverse-time mode
(DEF2Low) f/fn = 0.95...1.05: Class index E = 5.0 or 20 ms2)
Frequency dependence of the Measuring mode Suppression of harmonics

settings and operate times
(see above) 0 No suppression
1 -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...

1)
2)

B -
32
1MRS100100 RE_5_ _
Issued: 3/2000
Version: A
High-Impedance or Flux-Balance
Based Differential Protection for
Generators and Motors
(Diff3)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 The measuring configuration based on high-impedance principle ....... 4
2.3 The measuring configuration based on flux-balancing principle........... 5
2.5 Recommendations for current transformers ........................................ 7
2.5.1 High-impedance principle ........................................................... 7
2.5.2 Flux-balancing principle............................................................ 10
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 11
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 11
2.8 TRIP and CBFP outputs.................................................................... 11
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 12
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 13

3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 14
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 14
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 14
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 14
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 16
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 16
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 16
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 18
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 19

RE_5_ _ Diff3 ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Three-phase current differential protection based on high-impedance or flux-

balancing principle providing winding short-circuit protection for generators and
motors
Adjustable operate value
High stability at external faults, also with partially saturated current transformers
Short operate times at faults occuring in the zone to be protected (internal faults),
also with partially saturated current transformers
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of Diff3, the three-phase differential protection
for generators and motors based on high-impedance or flux-balancing principle. The
function block is used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
3I>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI'LII)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOHOLQH
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI'LII
2
ABB Automation Diff3 RE_5_ _

Id1 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring the differential
current of phase L1
current of phase L2
current of phase L3
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal of Diff3
GROUP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Control input for switching between
the settings groups 1 and 2. When
GROUP is FALSE, group 1 is
active. When GROUP is TRUE,
group 2 is active.
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Input signal for resetting the trip
signal and registers of Diff3

error
3
2.1 Configuration
If the relay is not yet configured, the measuring devices and signal types for the
analogue channels are selected and configured in a special dialogue box of the Relay
Configuration Tool included in the CAP 505 Tool Box. Digital inputs are configured
in the same programming environment (the number of the selectable analogue inputs,
digital inputs and digital outputs depends on the hardware used).
graphic worksheet of the Relay Configuration Tool. The differential phase currents
(e.g. IL1, IL2 and IL3 or IL1b, IL2b and IL3b) are connected to the corresponding Id1, Id2
and Id3 inputs of the function block. Digital inputs are connected to the boolean
inputs of the function block and in the same way, the outputs of the function block are
2.2 The measuring configuration based on high-impedance principle
If the relay is already configured, the phase differential currents can be measured via
the measuring configuration presented in Figure 3 below and connected to the chosen
analogue inputs of the relay.
P1 P2 P2 P1
IL1
S1 S2 S2 S1
IL2
IL3
Variable resistor
Stabilizing
resistor
87 87 87
Id1 Id2 Id3
Zdifconn
Three-phase high-impedance relay
)LJXUH 7KUHHSKDVHGLIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQIRUJHQHUDWRUVDQGPRWRUVEDVHGRQ
KLJKLPSHGDQFHSULQFLSOH
4
The external measuring configuration for every phase is composed of a stabilizing

resistor and two current transformers measuring the compared phase currents (Figure
3). A variable resistor is needed if high overvoltages are expected. The value of the
stabilizing resistor can be calculated using the formula
Us
Rs =
Ir
(1)
where
Rs the resistance of the stabilizing resistor

Us the stabilizing voltage of the relay
Ir the current value representing the function block setting
The stabilizing voltage can be calculated by the formula
I kmax
Us = ( R in + R m )
n (2)
where
Ikmax the highest through-fault current

n the turns ratio of the current transformer
Rin the secondary internal resistance of the current transformer
Rm the resistance of the secondary circuit loop
Additionally it is required that the knee-point voltages (Uk) of the current transformers
are at least twice the value of the stabilizing voltage (U s).
1RWH The current transformers should be of the same type and the burdens of the
current transformers in every phase should be the same. This makes it possible to use
the same value for the stabilizing resistor and the same value for the Basic setting
parameter in every phase.
For more information about calculating the value of the stabilizing resistor and
choosing the current transformers refer to section Recommendations for current
transformers.
1RWH If the differential protection is wanted to be established without stabilizing

resistors, the flux-balancing principle described in the next section can be utilized.
Alternatively, if six currents are to be measured, the Stabilized Three-Phase
Differential Protection for Generators (Diff6G) can be used.
2.3 The measuring configuration based on flux-balancing principle
A measuring configuration according to the flux-balancing principle is also possible.

In this arrangement, no stabilizing resistors are needed. This configuration, however,
requires the use of core-balance transformers. The compared currents, the one at the
5
line end and the other at the neutral end, are both measured by the same core-balance
transformer.
In this scheme, the currents flowing through one core-balance transformer cancel each
other out when there is no fault within the protected area. When a fault occurs within
the protected zone, the currents flowing through the core-balance transformer amplify
each other and the differential protection operates.
Rogowski coils can also be used to measure the currents when using this scheme.
The configuration is presented in Figure 4 below.
IL1
IL2
IL3
87
Koyhadif
)LJXUH )OX[EDODQFLQJGLIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQIRUJHQHUDWRUVDQGPRWRUV
1RWH If six current transformers are to be used, it is strongly recommended that the
high-impedance principle described in the previous section or the Stabilized Three-
Phase Differential Protection for Generators (Diff6G) is utilized instead of a summing
configuration where two current transformers are connected in series to constitute a
differential current.
When the high-impedance principle is applied, the operating characteristic of the

function block is determined by the Basic setting parameterand the stabilizing
resistor. In the flux-balancing configuration, there is no stabilizing resistor and the
operating characteristic is determined purely by the Basic setting parameter. The
setting is the same for each phase. When the differential current exceeds the Basic
setting value, the differential function block trips unless it is blocked by an external
blocking signal BLOCK.
1RWH When the flux-balancing configuration is applied, a value of 5% or greater is

recommended to be used for the Basic setting parameter, especially when Rogowski
sensors are used. A more sensitive value may lead to false tripping during motor start-
up.
In the high-impedance configuration, the value of the stabilizing resistor, which has to
be calculated before installation and commissioning, mainly determines the stability
6
of the relay. The Basic setting allows for fine tuning the sensitivity of the
protection.
2.5 Recommendations for current transformers
2.5.1 High-impedance principle
The sensitivity and reliability of differential current protection stabilized through a

resistor are strongly related to the current transformers used. The number of turns of
the current transformers that are part of the same differential current circuit should be
the same. Moreover, the current transformers should have the same transformation
ratio.
To make the operation of the relay fast and reliable for in-zone faults, the knee-point
voltage has to be twice the stabilizing voltage. The stabilizing voltage Us of the
function block is given by equation (2) in section The measuring configuration based
on high-impedance principle. The required knee-point voltage Uk of the current
transformer is calculated as follows:
Uk = 2 x Us (3)
The factor 2 is used when no operate delay is permitted for the protection.
The sensitivity requirements for the protection are jeopardized if the magnetizing
current of the current transformers at the knee-point voltage is too high. The Iprim value
of the primary current at which the function block operates at certain settings can be
calculated as follows:
Iprim = n x (Ir + Iu + m x Ie) (4)
where
n the transformation ratio of the current transformer

Iu the current flowing through the protection varistor
m the number of current transformers included in the protection
Ie the magnetizing current of one current transformer
The value I0 given in many catalogues is the excitation current at knee-point voltage.
Writing Ie = 0.5 x I0 gives a realistic value for Iprim in equation (4).
The choosing of current transformers can be divided into following procedures:
1. The nominal current In of the protected winding has to be known, since it also
affects how high Ikmax is. Normally, the Ikmax value for small transformers is
Ikmax 16 x In.
7
2. The nominal primary current I1n of the CT (current transformer) must be higher
than the nominal current of the protected winding. The choice of the CT also
specifies Rin.
3. The required Uk is calculated using the formula (3). If the Uk of the CT is not high
enough, another CT has to be chosen. The value of Uk is given by the manufacturer
or in some cases it can be estimated (see equation (5) below).
4. The sensitivity Iprim is calculated with the formula (4). If the achieved sensitivity is
sufficient, the present CT is chosen. If better sensitivity is needed, a CT with a
bigger core is chosen.
If other than class X current transformers are used, an estimate for Uk can be
Uk = 0.8 x Fa x I2n x ( Rin + Rm ) (5)
where
Fa the actual accuracy limit factor

I2n the rated secondary current of the current transformer
If the rated accuracy limit factor Fn is used in equation (5) instead of Fa, also Rm has to
be replaced with the rated burden of the current transformer.
Example of the required knee-point voltage and achieved sensitivity is given below
where the value 6 x In is used as Ikmax. When calculating Iprim, the value Ir = m x Ie has
been given for the setting of the relay and the value Iu = 0 A for the current of the
varistor. Ir depends on the application. However, it is recommended that Ir m x Ie.
The number of CTs connected in parallel is here m = 2.
1RWH: The formulas are based on worst-case analysis, i.e. choosing the CTs
according to the criteria above (equation 3) results in an absolutely stable scheme. In
some cases it is possible to achieve stability by knee-point voltages lower than stated
by the formulae. The conditions of the network, however, have to be known well
enough to ensure the stability. The following rule could be used.
1 If Uk is higher than required by the criterion, the stability is ensured.

2 If Uk is higher than 50 % of the value recommended by the criterion, the
stability of the scheme is highly case-dependent.
3 If Uk is lower than 50 % of the value recommended by the criterion, stability is
not achieved. Another current transformer has to be found.
1RWH: The stability analysis is based on the assumption that the ampere turns are the
same for individual CTs. If that is not the case, the selectivity may be endangered. It is
thus recommended that all the CTs used in the scheme are of the same type and
preferably from the same batch. It is also required that the CTs in each phase are of
the same type and the burdens of the CTs are also the same for each phase because the
parameter Basic setting is the same for all the phases.
8
IL1
IL2
IL3
Sn = 8 MVA
Un = 6 kV
Rm
Ru
I d1
Rs
3Id>
Example
Dif3esim
)LJXUH 'LIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQRIWKHJHQHUDWRURQO\RQHSKDVHLVSUHVHQWHGLQ
GHWDLO
The protected generator has the following values:
Sn = 8 MVA
Un = 6 kV
In = 770 A
Ikmax = 6 x In = 6 x 770 A = 4620 A
Let us choose the current transformer type KOFD 12 A 21 with the following values
given by the manufacturer:
I1n = 1000 A
I2n = 1 A
Uk = 323 V
Rin = 15.3
I0 = 0.012 A
If the length of the secondary circuit is 100 m (the whole loop being thus 200 m) and
the area of the cross-section is 2.5 mm2, then
Rm = 7.28 /km x 2 x 0.1 km = 1.46
The required knee-point voltage can be calculated using the formula (3):
Uk = 2 x ( 4620 A / 1000 ) x ( 15.3 + 1.46 ) = 155 V
9
The required value 155 V is lower than the value 323 V, which means that Uk of this
current transformer is high enough.
As mentioned earlier, writing Ie = 0.5 x I0 gives a realistic value for Iprim in equation
(4). By writing Iu = 0 and Ir = m x 0.5 x I0, the following value for the sensitivity can
be calculated:
Iprim = n x m x I0 = 1000 x 2 x 0.012 A = 24 A ( = 3 % x In )

Ir = 2 x 0.5 x 0.012 A = 0.012 A
Because the parameter Basic setting is set in per cent of the generator nominal
current, the value for Basic setting will then be set to:
Basic setting = Ir / (In / n) = Ir x n / In = 0.012 A x 1000 / 770 A = 0.0156 = 1.6%
The resistance of the stabilizing resistor can now be calculated as follows:
Rs = Us / Ir = 78 V / I0 = 78 V / 0.012 A = 6500
Let us choose Ir = 2 x 12 mA = 24 mA as the relay setting and assume Iu = 30 mA.

The following sensitivity is achieved as a result:
Iprim = n x ( Ir + Iu + m x Ie ) = 1000 x (24 + 30 + 12) mA = 66 A (= 9 % x In)
The value for Basic setting will then be set to:
The resistance of the stabilizing resistor is now
Rs = Us / Ir = 78 V / 24 mA = 3250
2.5.2 Flux-balancing principle
When the function block is used with the flux-balancing principle, there are no extra
requirements for the measuring devices but the core-balance transformers and
Rogowski coils used in an ordinary overcurrent protection are adequate here as well.
10
2.6 Setting groups
ways:
1) Locally via the control parameter Group selection1) of the MMI

2) Over the communication bus by writing the parameter V21)
3) By means of the input signal GROUP when allowed via the parameter Group
1)
time.
2.7 Test mode
The TRIP and CBFP digital outputs of the function block can be activated with
separate control parameters for each output either locally via the MMI or externally
via the serial communication. When an output is activated with the test parameter, an
event indicating the test is generated.
2.8 TRIP and CBFP outputs
The output signal TRIP may have a non-latching or latching feature. When the
latching mode has been selected, the TRIP signal remains active until the output is
reset even if the operation criteria have reset. When the non-latching mode has been
selected, the TRIP signal remains active until the operation criteria have reset and the
time determined by the control parameter Trip pulse has elapsed.
the fault has disappeared during the set CBFP time delay. In circuit-breaker failure
protection the CBFP output can be used to operate a circuit breaker in front of the
circuit breaker of the machine. The control parameter Trip pulse also sets the width
of the CBFP output signal. The CBFP signal is always non-latching.
11
2.9 Resetting
The TRIP output signal and the registers can be reset via the RESET input, or over the
serial bus or the local MMI.

1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
12
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for Diff3 is 100.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
13
3.2 Setting values

direction
Basic setting S1 0.550 % 0.5 R Lowest ratio of differential and
nominal current to cause a trip

direction
Basic setting S41 0.550 % 0.5 R/W Lowest ratio of differential and

direction
14

direction
Diff3 V1 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Function block in use or not in
use
Group selection V2 02 2) - 0 R/W Selection of the active setting

group

the TRIP output
Trip pulse V5 401000 ms 40 R/W Minimum pulse width of TRIP

and CBFP
CBFP time V6 1001000 ms 100 R/W Operate time of the delayed trip
CBFP

and registers

5)




1)
Diff3 0 = Not in use; 1 = In use
2)
3)
4)
5)
15
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Current Id1 I1 0.00060.000 x In 0.000 R/M Differential current of phase L1

1)
Input BLOCK I4 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of the BLOCK signal
Input GROUP I5 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the signal for switching

between the setting groups 1 and 2
Input RESET I6 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the signal for resetting the

output signals of Diff3
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output TRIP O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the trip signal
1)
Output ERR O2 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of the configuration error
signal
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
The data of three last operations (operation 1...3) are recorded, and the values of the
1, Operation 2,...
The time stamp indicates the moment of the highest fault current during 50 ms after
the tripping.
16
3.3.3.3 Currents
If the function block trips, all the recorded phase differential current values will
originate from the same moment determined by the highest differential current. The
values of the differential phase currents Id1, Id2 and Id3 are recorded as multiples of the
rated current In.
3.3.3.4 Status data
The status of the Active group parameter, which indicates the setting group valid
for the recorded data, is recorded at the moment of tripping.

direction
Current Id1 V203 0.00060.000 x In 0.000 R/M Differential current of phase L1

1)

direction

1)
17

direction

1)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 TRIP signal of Diff3 Reset
E1 2 1 TRIP signal of Diff3 Activated
E2 4 1 CBFP signal of Diff3 Reset
E3 8 1 CBFP signal of Diff3 Activated
E4 16 0 BLOCK signal of Diff3 Reset
E5 32 0 BLOCK signal of Diff3 Activated
E6 64 0 Test mode of Diff3 Off
E7 128 0 Test mode of Diff3 On
18
4. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value or 0.004 x In.
Trip time Injected currents > 2.0 x operating current:

1)
total time < 30 ms
TRIP output)
Reset ratio Typ. 0.95 (range 0.800.98)
Retardation time This function block cannot retard but trips once the current
exceeds the operate value.

1)

A -
19
1MRS752301-MUM Diff3
Issued: 3/2000
Version: B/25.04.2002
High-Impedance or Flux-Balance
Based Differential Protection for
Data subject to change without notice Generators and Motors
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2

2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 The measuring configuration based on high-impedance principle ....... 4
2.3 The measuring configuration based on flux-balancing principle........... 5
2.5.1 High-impedance principle ........................................................... 7
2.5.2 Flux-balancing principle............................................................ 10
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 11
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 11
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 12
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 13
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 14
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 14
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 14
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 14
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 16
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 16
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 16
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 19
4. Technical data ........................................................................................ 20

Diff3 Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Three-phase current differential protection based on high-impedance or flux-

balancing principle providing winding short-circuit protection for generators and
motors
Adjustable operate value
Instantaneous or definite time (DT) operation
Short operate times at faults occuring in the zone to be protected (internal faults),
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of Diff3, the three-phase differential protection
for generators and motors based on high-impedance or flux-balancing principle. The
function block is used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
3I>
)LJXUH3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI'LII)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOH
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI'LII
2
Substation Automation Diff3

current of phase L1
current of phase L2
current of phase L3
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal of Diff3
the settings groups 1 and 2. When
group 2 is active.
signal and registers of Diff3

error
3
2.1 Configuration
graphic worksheet of the Relay Configuration Tool. The differential phase currents
(e.g. IL1, IL2 and IL3 or IL1b, IL2b and IL3b) are connected to the corresponding Id1, Id2
and Id3 inputs of the function block. Digital inputs are connected to the boolean
inputs of the function block and in the same way, the outputs of the function block are
2.2 The measuring configuration based on high-impedance principle
The phase differential currents can be measured via the measuring configuration
presented in Figure 2.2.-1 below and connected to the chosen analogue inputs of the
relay.
P1 P2 P2 P1
IL1
S1 S2 S2 S1
IL2
IL3
Variable resistor
Stabilizing
resistor
87 87 87
Id1 Id2 Id3
Zdifconn
Three-phase high-impedance relay
)LJXUH 7KUHHSKDVHGLIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQIRUJHQHUDWRUVDQGPRWRUVEDVHG
RQKLJKLPSHGDQFHSULQFLSOH
4
The external measuring configuration for every phase is composed of a stabilizing

resistor and two current transformers measuring the compared phase currents
(Figure 2.2.-1). A variable resistor is needed if high overvoltages are expected. The
value of the stabilizing resistor can be calculated using the formula
Us
Rs =
Ir
(1)
where

I kmax
Us = ( R in + R m )
n (2)
where

n the turns ratio of the current transformer
1RWH The current transformers should be of the same type and the burdens of the
current transformers in every phase should be the same. This makes it possible to use
the same value for the stabilizing resistor and the same value for the Basic setting
parameter in every phase.
transformers.
1RWH If the differential protection is wanted to be established without stabilizing

resistors, the flux-balancing principle described in the next section can be utilized.
Alternatively, if six currents are to be measured, the Stabilized Three-Phase
Differential Protection for Generators (Diff6G) can be used.
2.3 The measuring configuration based on flux-balancing principle
A measuring configuration according to the flux-balancing principle is also possible.

In this arrangement, no stabilizing resistors are needed. This configuration, however,
requires the use of core-balance transformers. The compared currents, the one at the
5
line end and the other at the neutral end, are both measured by the same core-balance
transformer.
In this scheme, the currents flowing through one core-balance transformer cancel each
other out when there is no fault within the protected area. When a fault occurs within
the protected zone, the currents flowing through the core-balance transformer amplify
each other and the differential protection operates.
Rogowski coils can also be used to measure the currents when using this scheme.
The configuration is presented in Figure 2.3.-1 below.
IL1
IL2
IL3
87
Koyhadif
)LJXUH )OX[EDODQFLQJGLIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQIRUJHQHUDWRUVDQGPRWRUV
1RWH If six current transformers are to be used, it is strongly recommended that the
high-impedance principle described in the previous section or the Stabilized Three-
Phase Differential Protection for Generators (Diff6G) is utilized instead of a summing
configuration where two current transformers are connected in series to constitute a
differential current.
When the high-impedance principle is applied, the operating characteristic of the

function block is determined by the Basic setting parameterand the stabilizing
resistor. In the flux-balancing configuration, there is no stabilizing resistor and the
operating characteristic is determined purely by the Basic setting parameter. The
setting is the same for each phase. When the differential current exceeds the Basic
setting value, the differential function block trips unless it is blocked by an external
1RWH When the flux-balancing configuration is applied, a value of 5% or greater is

recommended to be used for the Basic setting parameter, especially when Rogowski
sensors are used. A more sensitive value may lead to false tripping during motor start-
up.
In the high-impedance configuration, the value of the stabilizing resistor, which has to
be calculated before installation and commissioning, mainly determines the stability
6
of the relay. The Basic setting allows for fine tuning the sensitivity of the
protection.
2.5.1 High-impedance principle

ratio.
function block is given by equation (2) in section The measuring configuration based
on high-impedance principle. The required knee-point voltage Uk of the current
transformer is calculated as follows:
Uk = 2 x Us (3)
Iprim = n x (Ir + Iu + m x Ie) (4)
where

The value I0 given in many catalogues is the excitation current at knee-point voltage.
Writing Ie = 0.5 x I0 gives a realistic value for Iprim in equation (4).
The choosing of current transformers can be divided into following procedures:
1. The nominal current In of the protected winding has to be known, since it also
affects how high Ikmax is. Normally, the Ikmax value for generators is
Ikmax 6 x In.
7
2. The nominal primary current I1n of the CT (current transformer) must be higher
than the nominal current of the protected winding. The choice of the CT also
specifies Rin.
3. The required Uk is calculated using the formula (3). If the Uk of the CT is not high
enough, another CT has to be chosen. The value of Uk is given by the manufacturer
or in some cases it can be estimated (see equation (5) below).
4. The sensitivity Iprim is calculated with the formula (4). If the achieved sensitivity is
sufficient, the present CT is chosen. If better sensitivity is needed, a CT with a
bigger core is chosen.
Uk = 0.8 x Fa x I2n x ( Rin + Rm ) (5)
where

Example of the required knee-point voltage and achieved sensitivity is given below
where the value 6 x In is used as Ikmax. When calculating Iprim, the value Ir = m x Ie has
been given for the setting of the relay and the value Iu = 0 A for the current of the
varistor. Ir depends on the application. However, it is recommended that Ir m x Ie.
The number of CTs connected in parallel is here m = 2.
1RWH: The formulas are based on worst-case analysis, i.e. choosing the CTs
1 If Uk is higher than required by the criterion, the stability is ensured.

2 If Uk is higher than 50 % of the value recommended by the criterion, the
stability of the scheme is highly case-dependent.
3 If Uk is lower than 50 % of the value recommended by the criterion, stability is
not achieved. Another current transformer has to be found.
1RWH: The stability analysis is based on the assumption that the ampere turns are the
same for individual CTs. If that is not the case, the selectivity may be endangered. It is
thus recommended that all the CTs used in the scheme are of the same type and
preferably from the same batch. It is also required that the CTs in each phase are of
the same type and the burdens of the CTs are also the same for each phase because the
parameter Basic setting is the same for all the phases.
8
IL1
IL2
IL3
Sn = 8 MVA
Un = 6 kV
Rm
Ru
I d1
Rs
3Id>
Example
Dif3esim
)LJXUH'LIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQRIWKHJHQHUDWRURQO\RQHSKDVHLVSUHVHQWHG
LQGHWDLO
Sn = 8 MVA
Un = 6 kV
In = 770 A
Ikmax = 6 x In = 6 x 770 A = 4620 A
Let us choose the current transformer type KOFD 12 A 21 with the following values
given by the manufacturer:
I1n = 1000 A
I2n = 1 A
Uk = 323 V
Rin = 15.3
I0 = 0.012 A
the area of the cross-section is 2.5 mm2, then
Rm = 7.28 /km x 2 x 0.1 km = 1.46
Uk = 2 x ( 4620 A / 1000 ) x ( 15.3 + 1.46 ) = 155 V
9
The required value 155 V is lower than the value 323 V, which means that Uk of this
current transformer is high enough.
As mentioned earlier, writing Ie = 0.5 x I0 gives a realistic value for Iprim in equation
(4). By writing Iu = 0 and Ir = m x 0.5 x I0, the following value for the sensitivity can
be calculated:
Iprim = n x m x I0 = 1000 x 2 x 0.012 A = 24 A ( = 3 % x In )

Ir = 2 x 0.5 x 0.012 A = 0.012 A
Because the parameter Basic setting is set in percent of the generator nominal
current, the value for Basic setting will then be set to:
The resistance of the stabilizing resistor can now be calculated as follows:
Rs = Us / Ir = 78 V / I0 = 78 V / 0.012 A = 6500
Let us choose Ir = 2 x 12 mA = 24 mA as the relay setting and assume Iu = 30 mA.

Iprim = n x ( Ir + Iu + m x Ie ) = 1000 x (24 + 30 + 12) mA = 66 A (= 9 % x In)
The value for Basic setting will then be set to:
Rs = Us / Ir = 78 V / 24 mA = 3250
2.5.2 Flux-balancing principle
When the function block is used with the flux-balancing principle, there are no extra
requirements for the measuring devices but the core-balance transformers and
Rogowski coils used in an ordinary overcurrent protection are adequate here as well.
10
2.6 Setting groups
ways:
1) Locally via the control parameter Group selection1) of the HMI

1)
The selected setting group is valid immediately after switching. The control parameter
"Active group" indicates the setting group which is valid at a given time.
2.7 Test mode
The START, TRIP and CBFP digital outputs of the function block can be activated
with separate control parameters for each output either locally via the HMI or
externally via the serial communication. When an output is activated with the test
parameter, an event indicating the test is generated.
START and TRIP output signals is set via a separate parameter in the HMI or in serial
have a non-latching or a latching feature. When the latching mode has been selected,
have been reset.
of the CBFP output signal. The CBFP signal is always non-latching.
11
2.9 Resetting
serial bus or the local HMI.

1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
12
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for Diff3 is 100.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
13
3.2 Setting values

direction
Basic setting S1 0.550 % 0.5 R Lowest ratio of differential and

direction

direction
14

direction
Operation mode V1 0...2 1) - 2 R/W Selection of operation mode

group

the TRIP output

and CBFP
CBFP
Start pulse V7 01000 ms 0 R/W Minimum pulse length of

START signal

and registers
Test START V31 0 or 15) - 0 R/W Testing of START
Test TRIP V32 0 or 1 5) - 0 R/W Testing of TRIP

5)
Test CBFP V33 0 or 1 - 0 R/W Testing of CBFP
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
15
3.3.1 Input data

direction

1)
Input BLOCK I4 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of the BLOCK signal
Input GROUP I5 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the signal for switching

between the setting groups 1 and 2
Input RESET I6 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the signal for resetting the

output signals of Diff3
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Output ERR O2 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of the configuration error
signal
Output START 03 0 or 11) - 0 R/M Status of start signal

1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
1, Operation 2,...
16
DT mode
The time stamp indicates the moment of the highest fault current during a period
between the start situation and 50 ms after the tripping.
Instantaneous mode
the tripping.
3.3.3.3 Currents
If the function block trips, all the recorded phase differential current values will
originate from the same moment determined by the highest differential current. The
values of the differential phase currents Id1, Id2 and Id3 are recorded as multiples of the
rated current In.
If the function block starts but does not trip, the highest fault current during start
situation is recorded.
3.3.3.4 Status data
3.3.3.5 Duration

percentage of the set operate time.
17

direction

1)

direction
Time V302 hh:mm:ss. mss - - R/M Recording time

1)

direction
Time V402 hh:mm:ss. mss - - R/M Recording time

1)

1)
18
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 TRIP signal of Diff3 Reset
E1 2 1 TRIP signal of Diff3 Activated
E2 4 1 CBFP signal of Diff3 Reset
E3 8 1 CBFP signal of Diff3 Activated
E4 16 0 BLOCK signal of Diff3 Reset
E5 32 0 BLOCK signal of Diff3 Activated
E6 64 0 Test mode of Diff3 Off
E7 128 0 Test mode of Diff3 On
E8 256 1 START signal of Diff3 Reset
E9 512 1 START signal of Diff3 Activated
19
4. Technical data

Trip time in instantaneous mode Injected currents > 2.0 x operating current:

2)
total time < 30 ms
Start time in definite-time mode Injected currents > 2.0 x operating current:
total time 1) < 30 ms
TRIP output)
Reset ratio Typ. 0.95 (range 0.800.98)
Retardation time in instantaneous This function block cannot retard but trips once the current
mode exceeds the operate value.
Retardation time in definite-time Total retardation time when the current drops
mode
below the start value 2) < 40 ms

1)
1)

B Support for definite time operation has been added
20
1MRS752302-MUM Diff6G
Issued: 10/1998
Stabilized Three-Phase
Differential Protection
Data subject to change without notice for Generators
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuring the inputs and the outputs ................................................ 5
2.2 Configuration error checking ............................................................... 5
2.4.1 Stabilized stage 3I>.................................................................. 6
2.4.2 Saturation detection ................................................................... 8
2.4.3 Instantaneous stage 3I>>......................................................... 8
2.6 Connection of current transformers ................................................... 10
2.7 Setting groups ................................................................................... 12
2.8 Test mode ......................................................................................... 12
2.10 Resetting........................................................................................... 13
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 14
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 15
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 16
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 16
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 18
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 19
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 19
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 24
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 25
Diff6G Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Three-phase current differential protection with stabilized and instantaneous stages

providing winding short-circuit protection for generators
The stabilized stage is provided with saturation detection that blocks the stage
internally in case of current transformer saturation at external faults
The differential and stabilizing currents are calculated for every phase on the basis
of the fundamental frequency components of currents
A separately adjustable instantaneous differential current stage for severe internal
faults. Instantaneous stage is not affected by saturation detection.
The MMI monitoring of the phase current and phase difference values facilitates
the commissioning of differential protection and the checking of connections and
CT polarities
Short operate times at faults occurring in the zone to be protected (internal faults),
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the three-phase differential protection

function block Diff6G used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
3I>
3I>>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI'LII*)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOHOLQH
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
2
Substation Automation Diff6G
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI'LII*
3

IL1b Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring phase current IL1b
BS1 Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal of the stabilized stage
BS2 Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal of the instantaneous
stage
TRIGG Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Control signal for triggering the
registers
the setting groups 1 and 2. When
GROUP is FALSE, group 1 is active.
When GROUP is TRUE, group 2 is
active.
signal and registers of Diff6G

configuration error
4
2.1 Configuring the inputs and the outputs
Phase currents can be measured either via conventional current transformers or via
Rogowski coils but no combination of these two is possible.The measuring devices
and signal types for analogue channels are selected and configured in a special
dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool included in the CAP 505 Tool Box.
Digital inputs are configured in the same programming environment (the number of
selectable analogue inputs, digital inputs and digital outputs depends on the hardware
used).
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IL1b, IL2b
and IL3b are connected to the corresponding IL1, IL2, IL3, IL1b, IL2b and IL3b inputs
of the function block. The currents IL1-IL3 are assumed to be measured at the neutral
end and the currents IL1b-IL3b at the line end of the generator (see Figure 3 below).
Digital inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of the function block and in the
same way, the outputs of the function block are connected to the output signals.
IL1 IL1b
IL2 IL2b
IL3 IL3b
)LJXUH &XUUHQWVDWWKHQHXWUDOHQGDQGDWWKHOLQHHQGRIWKHJHQHUDWRU
2.2 Configuration error checking
When the relay is started, the function block checks the signal types and the
measuring device types of the connected analogue inputs. If the signal types are not
phase currents (IL1, IL2 IL3, IL1b, IL2b or IL3b) or if all the measuring device types are not
current transformers or Rogowski coils, the ERR output is activated. Also an event
E13 is sent.
The program that the function block is instantiated within should be associated with a
task the interval of which is not greater than one fourth of the fundamental cycle. The
ERR output of the function block will be activated if an association with a slower task
is made. Also an event E13 is sent.
5
Technical Reference Manual for REM 54_.
The differential protection function block includes two stages for generator
differential protection.
2.4.1 Stabilized stage 3I>
The operating characteristic of the stabilized stage 3I> is determined by the

parameters Basic setting and Starting ratio as well as by the parameters Turn-
point 1 and Turn-point 2for the turning points of the characteristic. The settings
are the same for each phase. When the differential current exceeds the operating
characteristic, the function block trips unless it internally blocks the trip function or is
blocked by the external blocking signal BS1.
The phasors , 1 and , 2 denote the fundamental frequency components of the CT

secondary currents on the input side and output side of the protected object. The
amplitude of the differential current ,G is obtained as follows:
, G = ,1 , 2 (1)
In a normal situation there is no fault in the area protected by the function block. Then
the currents , 1 and , 2 are equal and the differential current ,G = 0. In practise,
however, the differential current sligthly deviates from zero in normal situations. In
generator protection the deviation is caused by CT inaccuracies.
In a stabilized differential relay the differential current required for tripping is the
higher the higher the load current is. The stabilizing current ,E of the relay is obtained
as follows:
,1 + , 2
,E =
2 (2)
The operation of the relay is affected by stabilization as shown by the operating

characteristic illustrated in Figure 4 below.
6
Id
In Default settings
Maximum settings
3
I b3
2 I b2 OPERATION I d3
Minimum settings
1 I d1
NO OPERATION
In Turn-point 1 Turn-point 2
I d2 Ib
In
1 2 3 4 5
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLFIRUWKHVWDELOL]HGVWDJHRIWKHJHQHUDWRU
GLIIHUHQWLDOSURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQEORFN'LII*
The basic setting for the stabilized stage of the function block is determined according
to Figure 4:
Basic setting = Id1/I n

The starting ratio is determined correspondingly:
Starting ratio = Id2/Ib2

The first turning pointTurn-point 1 can be set at a desired point within the range
0.0...1.0. Accordingly, the second turning point Turn-point 2 can be set within the
range 1.0...3.0.
The slope of the operating characteristic for the function block varies in different
parts of the range. In part 1 (0.0 < Ib/I n < Turn-point 1), the differential current
required for tripping is constant. The value of the differential current is the same as
the basic setting selected for the function block. The basic setting basicly allows for
small inaccuracies of current transformers but it can also be used to influence the
overall level of the operating characteristic.
The part 2, i.e. when Turn-point 1 < I b /I n < Turn-point 2, is called the influence area
of the settingStarting ratio. In this part, variations in the starting ratio affect the
slope of the characteristic i.e. how big the change in the differential current required
for tripping is in comparison with the change in the load current. The starting ratio
allows for CT errors.
At high stabilizing currents, i.e. when I b /I n > Turn-point 2, the slope of the
characteristic is constant (part 3). The slope is 100%, which means that the increase in
the differential current is equal to the corresponding increase in the stabilizing
current.
7
The required differential current for tripping at a sertain stabilizing current level can
be calculated using the following formulas:
If the stabilizing current is lower than Turn-point 1,
Id,operate = Basic Setting.
If the stabilizing current is greater than Turn-point 1 but lower than Turn-point 2,
Id,operate = Basic Setting + (Ib - Turn-point 1) Starting ratio.
For greater stabilizing current values, that is beyond Turn-point 2,
Id,operate = Basic Setting + (Turn-point 2 Turn-point 1) Starting ratio +

(Ib Turn-point 2).
2.4.2 Saturation detection
The stabilized stage is provided with a current transformer saturation detection based
on the waveforms of the currents. The saturation detection blocks Diff6G internally in
case of current transformer saturation during an external fault.
2.4.3 Instantaneous stage 3I>>
In addition to the stabilized stage, the differential function block includes an

instantaneous stage which does not allow for stabilization. This stage trips when the
amplitude of the fundamental frequency component of the differential current exceeds
the set operate value Inst. setting or when the instantaneous value of the differential
current exceeds 2.5 x Inst. setting. The factor 2.5 (1.8 x 2) is due to the maximum
asymmetric short-circuit current. The internal blocking signals of the function block
do not prevent the operate signal of the instantaneous stage. When required, the
operate signal of the stage can be blocked by the external control signal BS2.
The more important the object to be protected, the more attention should be paid to
the current transformers. Normally, it is not possible to dimension the current
transformers so that they repeat currents with high DC components without saturating
when the residual flux of the current transformer is high. The differential protection
function block Diff6G operates reliably even though the current transformers are
partially saturated. The purpose of the following current transformer
recommendations is to secure the stability of the relay at high through currents and
the quick and sensitive operation of the relay at faults occurring in the protected area,
where the fault currents may be high.
8
The accuracy class recommended for current transformers to be used with the
differential function block Diff6G is 5P, in which the limit of the current error at the
rated primary current is 1% and the limit of the phase displacement is 60 minutes. The
limit of the composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current is 5%.
The approximate value of the accuracy limit factor Fa corresponding to the actual CT
burden can be calculated on the basis of the rated accuracy limit factor Fn (ALF) at
the rated burden, the rated burden Sn, the internal burden Sin and the actual burden Sa
of the current transformer as follows:
S in + S n
Fa = Fn (3)
S in + S a
EXAMPLE 1
In the example the rated burden Sn of the line end CTs 5P20 is 10 VA, the
secondary rated current 5A, the internal resistance Rin = 0.07 and the accuracy
limit factor Fn (ALF) corresponding to the rated burden is 20 (5P20). Thus the
internal burden of the current transformer is Sin = (5A)2 0.07 = 1.75 VA. The
input impedance of the relay at a rated current of 5A is < 20 m. If the
measurement conductors have a resistance of 0.113 , the actual burden of the
current transformer is Sa =(5A)2 (0.113 + 0.020) = 3.33 VA. Thus the
accuracy limit factor Fa corresponding to the actual burden will be about 46.
The CT burden may grow considerably at the rated current of 5A. At the rated current
of 1A the actual burden of the current transformer decreases, while the repeatability
simultaneously improves.
At faults occurring in the protected area, the fault currents from the line end may be
very high compared to the rated currents of the current transformers. Thanks to the
instantaneous stage of the differential function block, it is enough that the current
transformers are capable of repeating, during the first cycle, the current required for
instantaneous tripping.
Thus the current transformers should be able to reproduce the asymmetric fault
current without saturating within the next 10 ms after the occurrence of the fault, to
secure that the operate times of the relay comply with the times stated in section
Technical Data.
The accuracy limit factors corresponding to the actual burden of the phase current
transformer to be used in differential protection shall fulfill the following
requirement:
Fa > ( Ikmax / I1n ) 3/(1-r) (4)

where Ikmax is the maximum through-going fault current at which the protection is not
allowed to operate and I1n is the nominal primary current of the CT.
9
The parameter r gives the maximum remanence flux density in the CT core. The value
of the parameter r depends on the magnetic material used and on the construction of
the CT. For example the value r = 0.4 means that the remanence flux density may be
40 % of the saturation flux density. The manufacturer of the CT should be contacted
when an accurate value of the parameter r is needed. The value r = 0.4 is
recommended to be used in practice. The requirement can then be rewritten as
follows:
Fa > ( Ikmax / I1n ) 5 (5)

If the actual burden of the current transformer (Sa) in equation (3) cannot be reduced
low enough to provide a sufficient value for Fa, there are two alternatives to deal with
the situation.
1 A current transformer with a higher rated burden Sn can be chosen (which also
means a higher rated accuracy limit Fn) or
2 a current transformer with a higher nominal primary current I1n (but the same rated
burden) can be chosen
The alternative 2. is more cost effective and therefore often better although the
sensitivity of the scheme is slightly reduced.
EXAMPLE 2
If we assume the maximum through-going fault current Ikmax to be 6000 A and the
nominal primary current of the CT is 1500 A, we get for Fa:
Fa = ( 6000 / 1500 ) 5 = 20
In generator protection it is important that the accuracy limit factors (Fa ) of the phase
current transformers at the neutral end and at the line end of the generator correspond
to each other, i.e. the burdens of the current transformers on both sides are as equal as
possible. Should high inrush or start currents with high DC components pass through
the protected generator when it is connected to the network, special attention should
be paid to the performance and the burdens of the current transformers and to the
settings of the function block.
2.6 Connection of current transformers
The connections of the main current transformers are designated as Type I and Type
II. In case the earthings of the current transformers are either inside or outside the area
to be protected, the setting parameterCT connection is of Type I (Figure 5). In case
the earthings of the current transformers are both inside and outside the area to be
protected, the setting parameter CT connection is of Type II (Figure 6). The default
setting is Type I.
10
P2 P1 P1 P2
IL1 IL1b
IL2 IL2b
IL3 IL3b
S2 S1 S1 S2
P1 P2 P2 P1
IL1 IL1b
IL2 IL2b
IL3 IL3b
S1 S2 S2 S1
)LJXUH &RQQHFWLRQRIFXUUHQWWUDQVIRUPHUVRI7\SH,
P1 P2 P1 P2
IL1 IL1b
IL2 IL2b
IL3 IL3b
S1 S2 S1 S2
P2 P1 P2 P1
IL1 IL1b
IL2 IL2b
IL3 IL3b
S2 S1 S2 S1
)LJXUH &RQQHFWLRQRIFXUUHQWWUDQVIRUPHUVRI7\SH,,
11
2.7 Setting groups
ways:

3 By means of the input signal GROUP when allowed via the parameterGroup
selection (i.e. when V2 = 21))
1)
time.
2.8 Test mode
reset even if the operation criteria have reset. When the non-latching mode has been
selected, the TRIP signal remains active until the operation criteria have reset and the
time determined by the the control parameter Trip pulse has elapsed.
of the CBFP output signal.
12
2.10 Resetting
Operation Latched Recorded

indicators trip signal data
1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1) Resets the latched trip signal and recorded data of this particular function block.
2) Affects all function blocks.
13
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for Diff6G is 99.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
14
3.2 Setting values

direction
Basic setting S1 5...50 % 5 R The lowest ratio of differential and
Starting ratio S2 10...50 % 10 R Slope of the second line of the operating

characteristics
Turn-point 1 S3 0.0...1.0 x In 0.5 R Turn-point between the first and the

second line of the operating
characteristics
Turn-point 2 S4 1.0...3.0 x In 1.5 R Turn-point between the second and the

third line of the operating characteristics
Inst. setting S5 5...30 x In 5 R Tripping value of the instantaneous stage
15

direction
Basic setting S41 5...50 % 5 R/W The lowest ratio of differential and
Starting ratio S42 10...50 % 10 R/W Slope of the second line of the operating
characteristics
Turn-point 1 S43 0.0...1.0 x In 0.5 R/W Turn-point between the first and the
characteristics
Turn-point 2 S44 1.0...3.0 x In 1.5 R/W Turn-point between the second and the
Inst. setting S45 5...30 x In 5 R/W Tripping value of the instantaneous stage

direction
Basic setting S71 5...50 % 5 R/W The lowest ratio of differential and
Starting ratio S72 10...50 % 10 R/W Slope of the second line of the operating
characteristics
Turn-point 1 S73 0.0...1.0 x In 0.5 R/W Turn-point between the first and the
characteristics
Turn-point 2 S74 1.0...3.0 x In 1.5 R/W Turn-point between the second and the
Inst. setting S75 5...30 x In 5 R/W Tripping value of the instantaneous stage
16

direction
Diff6G V1 0 or 11) - 1 R/W Protection block in use or not in use
Group selection V2 0...2 2) - 0 R/W Selection of the active setting group

3)
Trip signal V4 0 or 14) - 0 R/W Selection of latching feature for TRIP

output

CBFP
CBFP time V6 100...1000 ms 100 R/W Operate time of the delayed trip CBFP
5)
CT connection V7 0 or 1 - 0 R/W Determined by the directions of the
connected currents transformers

registers
Test TRIP V32 0 or 16) - - R/W Testing of TRIP
Test CBFP V33 0 or 16) - - R/W Testing of CBFP
(E0 ... E13)
(E0 ... E13)
(E0 ... E13)
(E0 ... E13)
1)
Status 0 = Not in use; 1 = In use
2)
3)
4)
5)
CT connection 0 = Type I; 1 = Type II
6)
17
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Current IL1b I4 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Phase current IL1b
Current Id1 I7 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Differential current of phase 1
Current Ib1 I10 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Bias current of phase 1
Angle IL1-IL2 I13 -180...180 0 R/M Phase difference of the currents L1

and L2
Angle IL2-IL3 I14 -180...180 0 R/M Phase diff. of the currents L2 & L3
Angle IL3-IL1 I15 -180...180 0 R/M Phase diff. of the currents L3 & L1
Angle IL1b-IL2b I16 -180...180 0 R/M Phase diff. of the currents L1b & L2b
Angle IL1-IL1b I19 -180...180 0 R/M Phase diff. of the currents L1 & L1b
Input BS1 I22 0 or 1 1) 0 R/M Status of BS1 signal

1)
Input BS2 I23 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of BS2 signal
Input GROUP I24 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of signal for switching between

the groups 1 and 2
Input RESET I25 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of signal for resetting the

output signals of Diff6G
1)
18
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output ERR O2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of configuration error signal

1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
trips or when the recording function is triggered via an external triggering input.
1, Operation 2,...
The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the TRIGG signal or the moment of the
highest fault current during the period of 50 ms after the rising edge of the TRIP
signal.
3.3.3.3 Currents and phase differences
If the function block trips, all the recorded current and phase difference values will
originate from the same moment determined by the highest differential current. For
external triggering, the current values are recorded at the moment of triggering i.e. on
the rising edge of the input signal TRIGG. Consequently, the values of the phase
currents I L1, I L2, I L3, I L1b, I L2b, I L3b, the values of the differential currents I d1, I d2 ,I d3,
the values of the stabilizing currents Ib1, Ib2, Ib3 and the phase difference values always
originate from the same moment. The current values are recorded as multiples of the
rated current In and the phase difference values are recorded in degrees.
19
3.3.3.4 Status data
The status data of the input signals BS1 and BS2 (Active or Not active) as well as the
parameters Active group and Reg. reason are recorded at the moment of tripping
and triggering. The Active group parameter indicates the setting group valid for the
recorded data and the Reg. Reason parameter the reason for the particular
registration (i.e. trip of the stabilized stage, trip of the instantaneous stage or
activation of the TRIGG input).
20

direction
Current IL1 V203 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Phase current IL1
Current IL1b V206 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Phase current IL1b
Current Id1 V209 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Differential current of phase 1
Current Ib1 V212 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Bias current of phase 1
Angle IL1-IL2 V215 -180...180 0 R/M Phase difference of the

currents L1 and L2

currents L2 and L3

currents L3 and L1
Angle IL1b-IL2b V218 -180...180 0 R/M Phase difference of the

currents L1b and L2b


Angle IL1-IL1b V221 -180...180 0 R/M Phase difference of the

currents L1 and L1b

currents L2 and L2b

currents L3 and L3b

1)

3)
Reg. reason V227 0...2 - 0 R/M Reason for registration
1)
2)
3)
Reg reason 0 = TRIP >; 1 = TRIP >>; 2 = TRIGG
21

direction

currents L1 and L2

currents L2 and L3

currents L3 and L1




currents L1 and L1b

currents L2 and L2b

currents L3 and L3b

1)

3)
1)
2)
3)
Reg. reason 0 = TRIP >; 1 = TRIP >>; 2 = TRIGG
22

direction

currents L1 and L2

currents L2 and L3

currents L3 and L1




currents L1 and L1b

currents L2 and L2b

currents L3 and L3b

1)

3)
1)
2)
3)
Reg reason 0 = TRIP >; 1 = TRIP >>; 2 = TRIGG
23
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 TRIP signal of 3d I> stage Reset
E1 2 1 TRIP signal of 3d I> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal of 3d I>> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal of 3d I>> stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFB signal 3d I> or 3d I>> Reset
E5 32 1 CBFB signal 3d I> or 3d I>> Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK signal of 3d I> stage Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK signal of 3d I> stage Activated
E8 256 0 BLOCK signal of 3d I>> stage Reset
E9 512 0 BLOCK signal of 3d I>> stage Activated
E10 1024 0 Test mode of 3d I> and 3d I>> Off
E11 2048 0 Test mode of 3d I> and 3d I>> On
E12 0 0 - -
E13 8192 1 ERR: task / measuring device / signal type Activated
24
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies At the frequency range f/fn = 0.95...1.05
Phase difference measurement: 4
Operation of stabilized stage:
4% of set value or 2% x In
Operation of instantaneous stage:
4% of set value or 2% x In

1)
total time < 45 ms
Reset time 60...1020 ms

(depends on the minimum pulse width set for the TRIP output)
Retardation time Total retardation time when the current or voltage

drops below the operate value1) < 40 ms

1)

C -
25
1MRS100035 (Low) RE_5_ _
1MRS100036 (High) Three-Phase Directional
1MRS100037 (Inst)
Issued: 10/1998 Overcurrent Protection
Version: C
Low-Set Stage (DOC6Low)
High-Set Stage (DOC6High)
Instantaneous Stage (DOC6Inst)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 7
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 7
2.3.1 Current direction......................................................................... 8
2.3.2 Memory function....................................................................... 12
2.3.3 Non-directional operation of DOC6High and DOC6Inst............ 12
2.3.4 DIRECTION output .................................................................. 13
2.5 IDMT type operation of DOC6Low .................................................... 14
2.5.1 Standard curve groups ............................................................. 14
2.5.2 RI curve groups........................................................................ 16
2.5.3 RD curve groups ...................................................................... 16
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 17
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 17
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 18
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 19

3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 20
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 20
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 21
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 22
RE_5_ _ DOC6Low, DOC6High, DOC6Inst ABB Automation

3.3.1 Input data .................................................................................25
3.3.2 Output data...............................................................................26
3.3.3 Recorded data ..........................................................................26
3.3.4 Events ......................................................................................32
4. Technical Data.........................................................................................34
2
ABB Automation DOC6Low, DOC6High, DOC6Inst RE_5_ _
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Directional single-phase, two-phase or three-phase overcurrent protection

DOC6Low: Six inverse-time (IDMT) characteristics
Possibility to use either phase-to-phase voltages or phase-to-earth voltages
Voltage measurement with conventional voltage transformers or voltage dividers
DOC6High and DOC6Inst: Non-directional operation in an inrush situation where
a circuit breaker is closed against a close fault and the voltage does not rise to a
measurable level
Memory function for maintaining the stability and reliability of the directional
operation at close faults characterized by an extremely low voltage
Operation on short circuits only or on both earth faults and short circuits
frequency component of the short-circuit current
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the directional overcurrent function blocks
DOC6Low, DOC6High and DOC6Inst used in products based on the RED 500
Platform. The operation of the low-set stage differs from that of the high-set and
instantaneous stages regarding the following two features:
the non-directional operation is only included in the high-set and instantaneous

stages
the IDMT type of operation is only inluded in the low-set stage
The directional overcurrent function blocks are designed for directional single-phase,
two-phase and three-phase overcurrent and short-circuit protection whenever the DT
characteristic or, as concerns DOC6Low, the IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum
Time) characteristic is appropriate. Suppression of harmonics is possible.
3
3I> 3I>> 3I>>>
CBFP CBFP CBFP

)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI'2&/RZ'2&+LJKDQG'2&,QVW
080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI'2&/RZ'2&+LJKDQG'2&,QVW
4

U12 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring phase-to-phase
voltage U12 or phase-to-earth voltage U1
BS1 Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal 1
TRIGG Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Control signal for triggering the
registers
active.
DOUBLE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal used for doubling the set
start current value temporarily at
magnetizing inrush or start-up
BSREG Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input for blocking the recording function
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Input signal for resetting the trip signal
and registers of DOC6Low, DOC6High
or DOC6Inst
5
DOC6Low

DIRECTION Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Current direction information
STATUS_IL1 Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Status of IL1
configuration error
DOC6High and DOC6Inst

BSOUT Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal for blocking-
based busbar protection
configuration error
6
2.1 Configuration
Phase currents can be measured with conventional current transformers or Rogowski

outputs depends on the hardware variant used).
connected to the IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs and the phase-to-phase voltages U12, U23 and
U31 correspondingly to the U12, U23 and U31 inputs of the function block. If phase-
to-earth voltages are used, they are connected to the inputs as follows: U1 to input
U12, U2 to input U23 and U3 to input U31. Furthermore, digital inputs are connected
to the boolean inputs of the function block, and in the same way, the outputs of the
function block are connected to the output signals.
2.2 Measuring mode
fundamental frequency component of the short-circuit current. The measuring mode is
selected via either an MMI parameter or a serial communication parameter as follows:
Measuring mode Voltage types connected Current measuring principle

= Mode 1 Phase-to-phase voltages Peak-to-peak
= Mode 2 Phase-to-phase voltages Fundamental frequency
= Mode 3 Phase-to-earth voltages Peak-to-peak
= Mode 4 Phase-to-earth voltages Fundamental frequency
Voltages are always measured using the numerically calculated fundamental

frequency component. When phase-to-earth voltages are connected, the phase-to-
phase voltages are numerically derived from phase-to-earth voltages within the
function block.
to-peak measurement, the harmonics of the phase currents are not suppressed,
whereas in fundamental frequency measurement the harmonics suppression is about
7
The function block starts if the current flows in the set operating direction and
exceeds the set start current in two or more phases or, if earth-fault protection is
enabled, in one or more phases. The set start current is automatically doubled when
the signal connected to the DOUBLE input becomes active. The automatic doubling
function can be used e.g. during a magnetizing inrush or at start-up.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQRIWKH'28%/(LQSXW
directional overcurrent situation exceed the set definite operate time or, at the inverse-
time operation, the time determined by the level of the measured current, the function
block operates. The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in the total
operate time. When the function block operates, the TRIP signal is set to TRUE.
The DT or IDMT timer is allowed to run only if the blocking signal BS1 is not active,
drops off.
2.3.1 Current direction
The operating direction can be set to either forward or reverse via the setting
parameter Oper. Direction. The default configuration direction is forward, i.e. the
power flow direction is away from the busbar, when the voltage and current
transformer connections are as drawn in the figure below. The function block will
operate on fault currents flowing in the set direction only.
8
L1 L3
Q1 A
Q0 N
n
Q9 a
da dn
X1.1
27 100V Ch 10, VT4
25
L1 L3 24
P1 S1 100V Ch 9, VT3
22
21
100V Ch 8, VT2
S2 19
P2 18
100V Ch 7, VT1
16
S1 15 0,2A
14 1A Ch 6, CT5
13
12 1A
S2 11 5A Ch 5, CT4
*) 10
9 1A
8 5A Ch 4, CT3
7
6 1A
5 5A Ch 3, CT2
4
3 1A
2 5A Ch 2, CT1
1
X2.1 Ch 10, sensor

DIFF
X2.2 Ch 9, sensor
DIFF
X2.3 Ch 8, sensor
X2.4 Ch 7, sensor
DIFF
X2.5 Ch 4, sensor
DIFF
X2.6 Ch 3, sensor
DIFF
X2.7 Ch 2, sensor
DIFF
X2.8 Ch 1, sensor
DIFF
currdir
REF 541
)LJXUH 9ROWDJHDQGWUDQVIRUPHUFRQQHFWLRQVRI5()
In case of a two-phase short circuit, the direction of the current is determined using
the phase-to-phase voltage and the phase-to-phase current of the two faulty phases.
Phase-to-phase currents are numerically derived from the measured phase currents. If
phase-to-earth voltages are connected, phase-to-phase voltages are numerically
derived from the measured phase-to-earth voltages. Which currents and voltages are
used depends on between which phases the short circuit is, as shown below:
Overcurrent detected in phases: Current and voltage used to

determine the direction:
L1 L2 L3
x x U12 and ( IL1-IL2 )
Current is flowing in the set operating direction when the phase difference is within
the defined operating sector. The phase difference is the difference between the
phase-to-phase current and the set basic angle b which is given in relation to the
phase-to-phase voltage and set via the parameter Basic angle b. How the phase
difference is calculated depends on between which phases the short circuit is, as
shown below:
9
Overcurrent detected in phases: Phase difference used to determine

the direction:
L1 L2 L3
x x 12 = (U12) + b - (IL1-IL2)
x x 23 = (U23) + b - (IL2-IL3)
x x 31 = (U31) + b - (IL3-IL1)
x x x 12, 23 and 31
In case of a three-phase short circuit i.e. when an overcurrent is detected in all three
phases, the function block will operate if at least one of the phase differences 12, 23
and 31 is within the operating sector.
The operating sector for forward operation is within +/ -80 from the basic angle b
and the one for reverse operation correspondingly the sector outside +/ -100 from b,
as shown in Figure 5. The operating sector includes a hysteresis of 10, which means
that when the operating direction is set to forward and the phase difference is within
the operating sector of +/-80, the sector will be enlarged to +/-90. When is outside
the operating sector, the size of the sector will remain as +/-80. Correspondingly, the
operating sector for reverse operation is enlarged to the sector outside +/-90 when
the phase difference is within the operating sector.
)LJXUH 'HWHUPLQDWLRQRIFXUUHQWGLUHFWLRQLQDWZRSKDVHVKRUWFLUFXLWVLWXDWLRQ
Figure 5 shows an example of a short circuit between the phases L1 and L2. Here the
fault current is flowing in forward direction since the phase difference 12 is +30,
which is within the forward direction operating sector.
The use of earth-fault protection is optional, which means that when the setting
parameter Earth fault pr. is given the value Disabled, the function block operates
on short circuits only, and when the parameter is set to Enabled, the function block
operates on both short circuits and earth faults.
10
The principle for determining the current direction in case of an earth fault depends
on whether phase-to-phase voltages or phase-to-earth voltages are connected to the
function block. When phase-to-earth voltages are connected, the direction of the
current is determined using the phase-to-earth voltage and the phase current of the
faulty phase. Which phase difference is used depends on in which phase the earth
fault is, as shown below:
Overcurrent detected in phase: Phase difference used to determine

the direction:
L1 L2 L3
x 1 = (U1) + b - (IL1)
x 2 = (U2) + b - (IL2)
x 3 = (U3) + b - (IL3)
The operating sector is defined in relation to the basic angle b, which is given in
relation to the phase-to-earth voltage. As for the short circuit case the operating sector
for forward operation is within +/-80 from the basic angle b and the one for reverse
operation the sector outside +/-100 from b, both with the hysteresis of 10.
)LJXUH 'HWHUPLQDWLRQRIFXUUHQWGLUHFWLRQLQFDVHRIDQHDUWKIDXOWZKHQSKDVH
WRHDUWKYROWDJHVDUHPHDVXUHG
Figure 6 shows an example of an earth fault in phase L1. Here the phase difference 1
is +30, which means that the current is flowing in forward direction.
When phase-to-phase voltages are connected to the function block, the current
direction in an earth-fault situation is determined using the same phase differences as
in a short circuit situation. Which phase difference is used depends on in which phase
the earth fault is, as shown below:
11

the direction:
L1 L2 L3
x 12 = (U12) + b - (IL1-IL2)
x 23 = (U23) + b - (IL2-IL3)
x 31 = (U31) + b - (IL3-IL1)
The operation sectors in this case are the same as in the short circuit case.
2.3.2 Memory function
The function block is provided with a memory function to secure a reliable and
correct directional relay operation in case of a close short circuit or an earth fault
characterized by an extremely low voltage. At sudden loss of voltage, the phase angle
of the voltage is calculated on the basis of a fictive voltage. The fictive voltage is
calculated using the voltage measured before the fault occured, assuming that the
voltage is not affected by the fault. The memory function enables the function block
to operate up to 2 seconds after a total loss of voltage.
When the voltage falls below 0.07 x Un at a close fault, the fictive voltage will be
used to determine the phase angle. The measured voltage is applied again as soon as
the voltage rises above 0.08 x Un. The fictive voltage is also discarded if the measured
voltage stays below 0.08 x Un for more than 2 seconds or if the fault current
disappears while the fictive voltage is in use.
When the voltage is below 0.08 x Un and the fictive voltage either cannot be used
because the phase angle could not be reliably measured before the fault situation or
has already been used for 2 seconds, the current direction cannot be determined and
the function block will not operate.
2.3.3 Non-directional operation of DOC6High and DOC6Inst
The high-set or instantaneous stage can be set to operate non-directionally in

situations where the current direction cannot be determined, i.e. when the voltage is
below 0.08 x Un and the fictive voltage cannot be used. This feature is enabled when
the setting parameter Nondir. operat. is set to Enabled. When the parameter is
given the value Disabled, the function block will operate non-directionally only in
an inrush situation as described below.
The function block will always operate non-directionally in an inrush situation where
a circuit breaker is closed against a close fault and the current direction cannot be
reliably measured, i.e. voltage does not rise above 0.08 x Un. The state of the setting
parameter Nondir. operat. does not affect this feature.
12
2.3.4 DIRECTION output
The DIRECTION output is set to TRUE when any current is flowing in the set
operating direction, which means that any of the used phase differences is inside the
operating sector. In all other situations the output is set to FALSE.
faults, e.g. self-sealing insulation faults, and severe faults that may produce high
for an intermittent fault that the fault current contains so-called drop-off periods
might cause the DT timer to reset. The adjustable delayed reset function also enables
closer co-ordination with electromechanical induction disc relays.
When the DT timer has started, it goes on running normally even if the current drops
off, provided the drop-off period is shorter than the set drop-off time. If the drop-off
period is longer than the set drop-off time, the DT timer will reset when the drop-off
time elapses (Figure 7).
In Figures 7 and 8 the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the current is
above the set start value and FALSE when the current is below the set start value.
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
)LJXUH 7KHGURSRIISHULRGLVORQJHUWKDQWKHVHWGURSRIIWLPH
13
exceeds the set start value again (Figure 8).
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
)LJXUH 7KHGURSRIISHULRGLVVKRUWHUWKDQWKHVHWGURSRIIWLPH
2.5 IDMT type operation of DOC6Low
At the inverse-time mode of the low-set stage the operate time of the function block is
a function of the current; the higher the current, the shorter is the operate time. Six
time/current curve groups are available. Four of the groups comply with the BS 142
and IEC 60255 standards, whereas the two curve groups RI and RD (RXIDG) are
special type of curve groups corresponding to the ABB praxis. The desired operate
time characteristic is selected via the parameter Operation mode.

2.5.1 Standard curve groups
The four internationally standardized inverse-time characteristics incorporated in the

normal inverse (NI)

very inverse (VI)
(For a graphical presentation of the curves, refer to the manual Technical
Descriptions of Functions, Introduction.)
14
60255 and can be expressed as follows
kx
t[s] =
I
( ) 1
I>
where

I = phase current
Inverse-time
characteristic
According to the standard BS 142: 1966 the effective current range is defined as
very inverse, or extremely inverse, the function has to start at the latest when the
current exceeds the set start current 1.3 times. For the long-time inverse characteristic
the effective current range is specified to be 2...7 times the set start current and the
relay is to start at the latest when the current exceeds the setting value 1.1 times. The
three-phase directional overcurrent function block DOC6Low will start and the IDMT
integration will begin once the current exceeds the set start value and the phase angle
criteria is fulfilled.

2 2.22E 2.34E 2.44E 2.34E
5 1.13E 1.26E 1.48E 1.26E
7 - - - 1.00E
10 1.01E 1.01E 1.02E -
20 1.00E 1.00E 1.00E -
15
1966 for currents of 2 and 5 times the setting. The function block DOC6Low
complies with the tolerances of class 5 (E = 5.0%) for all inverse-time curves.
For example:


follows:
k
t s =
I>
0. 339 0. 236 x
I

I
t[s] = 5. 8 -1. 35 x ln
k x I>
type characteristics, the function block will start and the IDMT integration will begin
once the current exceeds the set start current.
16
2.6 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.7 Test mode
corresponding output signal is set via a separate parameter on the MMI or via serial
have reset.
The outputs STATUS_IL1, STATUS_IL2 and STATUS_IL3 indicate the present

status of each phase. The outputs remain active as long as the start situation of the
corresponding phase is on. Latching feature is not available.
protection, the CBFP output can be used to operate a circuit breaker in front of the
circuit breaker of the feeder. The control parameter Trip pulse also sets the width of
the CBFP output signal.
17
2.9 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F035V013 for DOC6Low X X
1)
Parameter F036V013 for DOC6High X X
1)
Parameter F037V013 for DOC6Inst X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
Resets the latched trip signal and recorded data of the particular function block
2)
18
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for DOC6Low is 35, that for DOC6High 36
and that for DOC6Inst 37.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
19
3.2 Setting values
DOC6Low

direction
inverse-time characteristic at
IDMT mode
Start current S2 0.05...40.00 x In 0.05 R Start current
Basic angle b S5 0...90 60 R Basic angle b for directional

operation
Oper. direction S6 0 or 1 2) - 0 R Selection of forward/ reverse

operation
Earth fault pr. S7 0 or 1 3) - 0 R Earth fault protection

1)
4 = Normal inv.; 5 = Long-time inv.; 6 = RI-type inv.; 7 = RD-type inv.
2)
3)
Earth fault pr. 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled

direction
Basic angle b S4 0...90 60 R Basic angle b for

directional operation
Oper. direction S5 0 or 1 2) - 0 R Selection of forward/ reverse

operation
Earth fault pr. S6 0 or 1 3) - 0 R Earth-fault protection

3)
Nondir. operat. S7 0 or 1 - 0 R Non-directional operation
when the direction cannot
be determined
1)
2)
3)
Earth fault pr./ Nondir. operat. 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
20
DOC6Low

direction
and inverse-time
characteristic at IDMT mode
Start current S42 0.05...40.00 x In 0.05 R/W Start current
Time multiplier S44 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R/W Time multiplier at IDMT

mode
Basic angle b S45 0...90 60 R/W Basic angle b for

Oper. direction S46 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/W Selection of forward/ reverse

operation
Earth fault pr. S47 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/W Earth fault protection

1)
2)
3)

direction


operation
Earth fault pr. S46 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/W Earth-fault protection

3)
Nondir. operat. S47 0 or 1 - 0 R/W Non-directional operation
be determined
1)
2)
3)
21
DOC6Low

direction
and inverse-time characteristic
at IDMT mode
Basic angle b S75 0...90 60 R/W Basic angle b for directional

operation

operation

1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = Definite time; 2 = Extremely inv.; 3 = Very inv.; 4 = Normal
inv.; 5 = Long-time inv.; 6 = RI-type inv.; 7 = RD-type inv.
2)
3)

direction

operation

operation

3)
when the direction cannot be
determined
1)
2)
3)
22
DOC6Low

direction
Measuring mode V1 0...3 1) - 0 R/W Selection of measuring mode


group

signal

TRIP output

and CBFP

mode
CBFP

and registers

5)


transmission (E0 ...E13)


1)
Measuring mode 0 = Mode 1; 1 = Mode 2; 2 = Mode 3; 3 = Mode 4
2)
3)
4)
5)
23

direction


group

signal

TRIP output

and CBFP
CBFP

and registers

5)




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
24
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Voltage U12 I4 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Phase-to-phase voltage U12
Voltage U1 I7 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Phase-to-earth voltage U1
Phase angle 12 I10 -180...+180 0 R/M Phase difference b - (phase-to-

phase current)

phase current)

phase current)
Phase angle 1 I13 -180...+180 0 R/M Phase difference b - (phase

current)

current)

current)

1)

2)
groups 1 and 2
Input DOUBLE I20 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for doubling the set start
current

function

DOC6Low, DOC6High or
DOC6Inst
1)
Input_ 0 = Not active; 1 = Active
2)
Input GROUP 0 = Group 1; 1 = Group 2
25
3.3.2 Output data
DOC6Low

direction
Output DIRECTION O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Current direction information

1)

1)

direction
Output BSOUT O2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of BSOUT signal

1)
Output START O3 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of start signal

1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
The recording function can be blocked via the BSREG input. For example, if an auto-
reclose sequence is initiated by the trip signal of the function block, the values most
reliable for later fault analysis are those recorded just before Shot 1. When the auto-
26
3.3.3.3 Duration

percentage of the set operate time and at the IDMT mode of operation as a percentage
of the calculated operate time.
3.3.3.4 Currents, voltages and phase angles
If the function block trips, the measured current, voltage and phase difference values
are updated at the moment of tripping i.e. on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. For
external triggering, the measured values are updated at the moment of triggering i.e.
on the rising edge of the input signal TRIGG. If the function block starts but does not
trip, the values captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz) after
the beginning of the start situation are recorded. Thus the values of the currents,
voltages and phase differences always originate from the same moment.
The currents are recorded as multiples of the rated current In and the voltages as
multiples of the rated voltage Un. The phase differences are recorded in degrees.
3.3.3.5 Current direction for DOC6Low
The state of the DIRECTION signal of DOC6Low is recorded at the same moment as
currents and voltages are recorded.
3.3.3.6 Non-directional operation of DOC6High and DOC6Inst
If the function block DOC6High or DOC6Inst is operating non-directionally at the

moment of recording, the recorded parameter "Nondir. operat." has the value
"Active".
3.3.3.7 Status data
The status data of the input signals BS1, BS2 and DOUBLE (Active or Not active) as
well as the Active group parameter are recorded at the moment of triggering.
27
3.3.3.8 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
28

direction
IL1 mean V204 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Filtered value of IL1
IL1 peak V207 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Momentary peak of IL1
Voltage U12 V210 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Filtered value of U12
Phase angle 12 V216 -180...+180 0.00 R/M Phase difference b -

(phase-to-phase current)


Phase angle 1 V219 -180...+180 0.00 R/M Phase difference b - (phase

current)

current)

current)
DIRECTION V222 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of DIRECTION output

(DOC6Low)
Nondir. operat. V222 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of non-directional

operation (DOC6High & -Inst)

1)
DOUBLE V225 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of DOUBLE input

2)
1)
Status 0: = Not active; 1 = Active
2)
29

direction




current)

current)

current)

(DOC6Low)


1)

2)
1)
2)
30

direction
Phase angle 12 V416 -180...+180 0.00 R/M Phase difference b - (phase-

to-phase current)

to-phase current)

to-phase current)

current)

current)

current)

(DOC6Low)


1)

2)
1)
2)
31
3.3.4 Events
DOC6Low

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from 3I> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from 3I> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from 3I> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from 3I> stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from 3I> stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from 3I> stage Activated
E6 64 0 DIRECTION signal of 3I> stage Reset
E7 128 0 DIRECTION signal of 3I> stage Activated
E8 256 0 BS1 signal of 3I> stage Reset
E9 512 0 BS1 signal of 3I> stage Activated
E12 4096 0 Test mode of 3I> stage Off
E13 8192 0 Test mode of 3I> stage On
32

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Activated
E6 64 0 BSOUT signal from 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Reset
E7 128 0 BSOUT signal from 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Activated
E8 256 0 DIRECTION signal of 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Reset
E9 512 0 DIRECTION signal of 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Activated
E10 1024 0 BS1 signal of 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Reset
E11 2048 0 BS1 signal of 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Activated
E14 16384 0 Test mode of 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Off
E15 32768 0 Test mode of 3I>> or 3I>>> stage On
33
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies At the frequency range f/fn = 0.95...1.05:
Current measurement:
at currents in the range 0.1...10 x In
2.5% of set value or 0.01 x In
at currents in the range 10...40 x In
5.0% of set value
Voltage measurement:
2.5% of measured value or 0.01 x Un
Start time Injected currents > 2.0 x start current:

1)
total time < 50 ms
TRIP output)

drops below the start value2) < 45 ms

Accuracy class index E Depends on the frequency of the current measured:

(DOC6Low) f/fn = 0.951.05: Class index E = 5.0 or 20 ms2)

(see above) 0 or 2 No suppression
1 or 3 -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,

1)
2)

D -
34
1MRS752303-MUM DOC6_
Issued: 10/1998
Version: D/02.05.2002 Three-Phase Directional
Overcurrent Protection
Low-Set Stage (DOC6Low)
High-Set Stage (DOC6High)
Instantaneous Stage (DOC6Inst)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3

2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 7
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 7
2.3.1 Current direction......................................................................... 9
2.3.2 Memory function....................................................................... 12
2.3.3 Non-directional operation of DOC6High and DOC6Inst............ 13
2.3.4 DIRECTION output .................................................................. 13
2.4 Delayed reset facility and drop-off time in DT and IDMT modes........ 13
2.5 IDMT type operation of DOC6Low .................................................... 15
2.5.2 RI curve groups........................................................................ 17
2.5.3 RD curve groups ...................................................................... 17
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 18
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 18
2.8 START, TRIP, CBFP and STATUS_Lx outputs................................. 18
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 19

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 20
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 21
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 21
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 22
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 23
DOC6_ Substation Automation

3.3.1 Input data .................................................................................26
3.3.2 Output data...............................................................................27
3.3.3 Recorded data ..........................................................................27
3.3.4 Events ......................................................................................33
4. Technical data .........................................................................................35
2
Substation Automation DOC6_
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Directional single-phase, two-phase or three-phase overcurrent protection

DOC6Low: Six inverse-time (IDMT) characteristics
Possibility to use either phase-to-phase voltages or phase-to-earth voltages
DOC6High and DOC6Inst: Non-directional operation in an inrush situation where
a circuit breaker is closed against a close fault and the voltage does not rise to a
measurable level
Voltage memory function for maintaining the stability and reliability of the
directional operation at close faults characterized by an extremely low voltage
Operation on short circuits only or on both earth faults and short circuits
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the directional overcurrent function blocks
DOC6Low, DOC6High and DOC6Inst used in products based on the RED 500
Platform. The operation of the low-set stage differs from that of the high-set and
instantaneous stages regarding the following two features:
the non-directional operation is only included in the high-set and instantaneous

stages
the IDMT type of operation is only included in the low-set stage
The directional overcurrent function blocks are designed for directional single-phase,
two-phase and three-phase overcurrent and short-circuit protection whenever the DT
characteristic or, as concerns DOC6Low, the IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum
Time) characteristic is appropriate. Suppression of harmonics is possible.
3
3I> 3I>> 3I>>>
CBFP CBFP CBFP

)LJXUH3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI'2&/RZ'2&+LJKDQG'2&,QVW
7HFKQLFDO'HVFULSWLRQVRI)XQFWLRQV,QWURGXFWLRQ
056080
)LJXUH)XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI'2&/RZ'2&+LJKDQG'2&,QVW
4

TRIGG Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Control signal for triggering the
registers
active.
DOUBLE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal used for doubling the set
start current value temporarily at
BSREG Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input for blocking the recording function
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Input signal for resetting the trip signal
and registers of DOC6Low, DOC6High
or DOC6Inst
5
DOC6Low

STATUS_IL1 Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Start status of IL1
configuration error

BSOUT Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal for blocking-
based busbar protection
configuration error
6
2.1 Configuration
Phase currents can be measured with conventional current transformers or Rogowski

connected to the IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs and the phase-to-phase voltages U12, U23 and
U31 correspondingly to the U12, U23 and U31 inputs of the function block. If phase-
to-earth voltages are used, they are connected to the inputs as follows: U1 to input
U12, U2 to input U23 and U3 to input U31. In both cases, all six analog inputs have to
be connected. Otherwise the configuration error output will be activated and the
protection function will be blocked. Furthermore, digital inputs are connected to the
Boolean inputs of the function block, and in the same way, the outputs of the function
block are connected to the output signals.
2.2 Measuring mode
selected via either an HMI parameter or a serial communication parameter as follows:
Measuring mode Voltage types connected Current measuring principle

= Mode 1 Phase-to-phase voltages Peak-to-peak
= Mode 2 Phase-to-phase voltages Fundamental frequency
= Mode 3 Phase-to-earth voltages Peak-to-peak
= Mode 4 Phase-to-earth voltages Fundamental frequency
Voltages are always measured using the numerically calculated fundamental

frequency component. When phase-to-earth voltages are connected, the phase-to-
phase voltages are numerically derived from phase-to-earth voltages within the
function block.
7
whereas in fundamental frequency measurement the harmonics suppression is at least

The function block starts if the current flows in the set operating direction and
exceeds the set start current in two or more phases or, if earth-fault protection is
enabled, in one or more phases. The set start current is automatically doubled when
the signal connected to the DOUBLE input becomes active. The automatic doubling
function can be used e.g. during a magnetizing inrush or at start-up.
)LJXUH)XQFWLRQRIWKH'28%/(LQSXW
directional overcurrent situation exceed the set definite operate time or, at the inverse-
time operation, the time determined by the level of the measured current, the function
block operates. The internal delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in the
The DT or IDMT timer is allowed to run only if the blocking signal BS1 is not active,
drops off.
8
2.3.1 Current direction
The operating direction can be set to either forward or reverse via the setting
parameter Oper. Direction. The default configuration direction is forward, i.e. the
power flow direction is away from the busbar, when the voltage and current
transformer connections are as drawn in the figure below. The function block will
operate on fault currents flowing in the set direction only.
L1 L3
Q1 A
Q0 N
n
Q9 a
da dn
X1.1
27 100V Ch 10, VT4
25
L1 L3 24
P1 S1 100V Ch 9, VT3
22
21
100V Ch 8, VT2
S2 19
P2 18
100V Ch 7, VT1
16
S1 15 0,2A
14 1A Ch 6, CT5
13
12 1A
S2 11 5A Ch 5, CT4
*) 10
9 1A
8 5A Ch 4, CT3
7
6 1A
5 5A Ch 3, CT2
4
3 1A
2 5A Ch 2, CT1
1
X2.1 Ch 10, sensor

DIFF
X2.2 Ch 9, sensor
DIFF
X2.3 Ch 8, sensor
X2.4 Ch 7, sensor
DIFF
X2.5 Ch 5, sensor
DIFF
X2.6 Ch 4, sensor
DIFF
X2.7 Ch 3, sensor
DIFF
X2.8 Ch 2, sensor
DIFF
X2.9 Ch 1, sensor
DIFF
currdir
REF 541
)LJXUH9ROWDJHDQGFXUUHQWWUDQVIRUPHUFRQQHFWLRQVRI5()
In case of a two-phase short circuit, the direction of the current is determined using
the phase-to-phase voltage and the phase-to-phase current phasors of the two faulty
phases. Phase-to-phase currents are numerically derived from the measured phase
currents. If phase-to-earth voltages are connected, phase-to-phase voltages are
numerically derived from the measured phase-to-earth voltages. Which currents and
voltages are used depends on between which phases the short circuit is, as shown
below:
9
Overcurrent detected in phases: Current and voltage used to

determine the direction:
L1 L2 L3
Current is flowing in the set operating direction when the phase difference is within
the defined operating sector. The phase difference is the difference between the
phase-to-phase current and the set basic angle b which is given in relation to the
phase-to-phase voltage and set via the parameter Basic angle b. How the phase
difference is calculated depends on between which phases the short circuit is, as
shown below:
Overcurrent detected in phases: Phase difference used to determine

the direction:
L1 L2 L3
x x 12 = (U12) - b - (IL1-IL2)
x x 23 = (U23) - b - (IL2-IL3)
x x 31 = (U31) - b - (IL3-IL1)
x x x 12, 23 and 31
In case of a three-phase short circuit i.e. when an overcurrent is detected in all three
phases, the function block will operate if at least one of the phase differences 12, 23
and 31 is within the operating sector.
The operating sector for forward operation is within 80 from the basic angle b and
the one for reverse operation correspondingly the sector outside 100 from b, as
shown in Figure 2.3.1-2. The operating sector includes a hysteresis of 10, which
means that when the operating direction is set to forward and the phase difference is
within the operating sector of 80, the sector will be enlarged to 90. When is
outside the operating sector, the size of the sector will remain as 80.
Correspondingly, the operating sector for reverse operation is enlarged to the sector
outside 90 when the phase difference is within the operating sector.
10
)LJXUH'HWHUPLQDWLRQRIFXUUHQWGLUHFWLRQLQDWZRSKDVHVKRUWFLUFXLW
VLWXDWLRQ
Figure 2.3.1-2 shows an example of a short circuit between the phases L1 and L2. Here
the fault current is flowing in forward direction since the phase difference 12 is +30,
which is within the forward direction operating sector.
The use of earth-fault protection is optional, which means that when the setting
parameter Earth fault pr. is given the value Disabled, the function block operates
on short circuits only, and when the parameter is set to Enabled, the function block
operates on both short circuits and earth faults.
The principle for determining the current direction in case of an earth fault depends
on whether phase-to-phase voltages or phase-to-earth voltages are connected to the
function block. When phase-to-earth voltages are connected, the direction of the
current is determined using the phase-to-earth voltage and the phase current of the
faulty phase. Which phase difference is used depends on in which phase the earth
fault is, as shown below:

the direction:
L1 L2 L3
x 1 = (U1) - b - (IL1)
x 2 = (U2) - b - (IL2)
x 3 = (U3) - b - (IL3)
The operating sector is defined in relation to the basic angle b, which is given in
relation to the phase-to-earth voltage. As for the short circuit case the operating sector
for forward operation is within 80 from the basic angle b and the one for reverse
operation the sector outside 100 from b, both with the hysteresis of 10.
11
)LJXUH'HWHUPLQDWLRQRIFXUUHQWGLUHFWLRQLQFDVHRIDQHDUWKIDXOWZKHQ
SKDVHWRHDUWKYROWDJHVDUHPHDVXUHG
Figure 2.3.1-3 shows an example of an earth fault in phase L1. Here the phase
difference 1 is +30, which means that the current is flowing in forward direction.
When phase-to-phase voltages are connected to the function block, the current
direction in an earth-fault situation is determined using the same phase differences as
in a short circuit situation. Which phase difference is used depends on in which phase
the earth fault is, as shown below:

the direction:
L1 L2 L3
x 12 = (U12) - b - (IL1-IL2)
x 23 = (U23) - b - (I L2-IL3)
x 31 = (U31) - b - (I L3-I L1)
The operation sectors in this case are the same as in the short circuit case.
2.3.2 Memory function
The function block is provided with a memory function to secure a reliable and
correct directional relay operation in case of a close short circuit or an earth fault
characterized by an extremely low voltage. At sudden loss of voltage, the phase angle
of the voltage is calculated on the basis of a fictive voltage. The fictive voltage is
calculated using the voltage measured before the fault occurred, assuming that the
voltage is not affected by the fault. The memory function enables the function block
to operate up to 2 seconds after a total loss of voltage.
12
When the voltage falls below 0.07 x Un at a close fault, the fictive voltage will be
used to determine the phase angle. The measured voltage is applied again as soon as
the voltage rises above 0.08 x Un. The fictive voltage is also discarded if the measured
voltage stays below 0.08 x Un for more than 2 seconds or if the fault current
disappears while the fictive voltage is in use.
When the voltage is below 0.08 x Un and the fictive voltage is unusable, the fault
direction cannot be determined. In this case the low-set stage will not operate at all.
The high-set or instantaneous stage will not operate directionally but they can operate
non-directionally as described in the next paragraph. Fictive voltage can be unusable
for two reasons:
fictive voltage was discarded after 2 seconds
the phase angle could not be reliably measured before the fault situation
2.3.3 Non-directional operation of DOC6High and DOC6Inst
The high-set or instantaneous stage can be set to operate non-directionally in

situations where the current direction cannot be determined, i.e. when the voltage is
below 0.08 x Un and the fictive voltage cannot be used. This feature is enabled when
the setting parameter Nondir. operat. is set to Enabled. When the parameter is
given the value Disabled, the function block will operate non-directionally only in
an inrush situation as described below.
The function block will operate non-directionally in a situation where a circuit

breaker is closed against a close fault and the fault direction cannot be reliably
measured. This situation is detected from voltages that do not rise above 0.08 x Un
after cold line state. The state of the setting parameter "Nondir. operat." does not
affect this feature. Voltages are assumed to be measured from the line side.
2.3.4 DIRECTION output
The DIRECTION output is set to TRUE when any current is flowing in the set
operating direction, which means that any of the used phase differences is inside the
operating sector. In all other situations the output is set to FALSE.
2.4 Delayed reset facility and drop-off time in DT and IDMT modes
faults, e.g. self-sealing insulation faults, and severe faults that may produce high
function the DT or the IDMT timer would reset once the current drops off. In the
same way, an apparent drop-off period of the secondary current of the saturated
13
current transformer might cause the DT or the IDMT timer to reset. The adjustable
delayed reset function also enables closer co-ordination with electromechanical
induction disc relays.
off, provided the drop-off period is shorter than the set drop-off time. In the same
situation the IDMT timer is frozen. If the drop-off period is longer than the set drop-
off time, the DT or the IDMT timer will reset when the drop-off time elapses. The
situation in the case of the DT timer is described in Figure 2.4.-1.
In Figures 2.4.-1 and 2.4.-2 the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the
current is above the set start value and FALSE when the current is below the set start
value.
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
)LJXUH7KHGURSRIISHULRGLVORQJHUWKDQWKHVHWGURSRIIWLPH
14
exceeds the set value again (Figure 2.4.-2).
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
)LJXUH7KHGURSRIISHULRGLVVKRUWHUWKDQWKHVHWGURSRIIWLPH
2.5 IDMT type operation of DOC6Low
In the inverse-time mode of the low-set stage the operate time of the function block is
a function of the current; the higher the current, the shorter is the operate time. Six
time/current curve groups are available. Four of the groups comply with the BS 142
and IEC 60255 standards, whereas the two curve groups RI and RD (RXIDG) are
special type of curve groups corresponding to the ABB praxis. The desired operate
time characteristic is selected via the parameter Operation mode.

adjustable minimum time located in control settings. The definite minimum time will
not allow operate times shorter than the set minimum time, which is why the inverse-
time mode is called the IDMT mode (Inverse Definite Minimum Time).
For a graphical presentation of the IDMT curves, refer to the manual Technical
Descriptions of Functions, Introduction.

normal inverse (NI)

very inverse (VI)
15

60255 and can be expressed as follows
kx
t[s] =
I
( ) 1
I>
where
t operate time in seconds
k adjustable time multiplier, parameters S4, S44 and S74
I phase current
I> adjustable start current, parameters S2, S42 and S72
, constants to provide selected curve characteristics
Inverse-time
characteristic
very inverse, or extremely inverse, the function has to start at the latest when the
current exceeds the set start current 1.3 times. For the long-time inverse characteristic
the effective current range is specified to be 2...7 times the set start current and the
relay is to start at the latest when the current exceeds the setting value 1.1 times. The
three-phase directional overcurrent function block DOC6Low will start and the IDMT
integration will begin once the current exceeds the set start value and the phase angle
criteria is fulfilled.
16

2 2.22E 2.34E 2.44E 2.34E
5 1.13E 1.26E 1.48E 1.26E
7 - - - 1.00E
10 1.01E 1.01E 1.02E -
20 1.00E 1.00E 1.00E -
The tolerance factors are in accordance to those defined by the standard BS 142: 1966
for currents of 2 and 5 times the setting. The function block DOC6Low complies with
the tolerances of class 5 (E = 5.0%) for all inverse-time curves.
For example:


follows:
k
t s =
I>
0. 339 0. 236 x
I

I
t[s] = 5. 8 -1. 35 x ln
k x I>
17
2.6 Setting groups
ways:

1)
The group settings come into effect immediately after selection. The control
parameter "Active group" indicates that the setting group is valid at a given time.
2.7 Test mode
settings for each output either locally via the HMI or externally via the serial
2.8 START, TRIP, CBFP and STATUS_Lx outputs
corresponding output signal is set via a separate parameter on the HMI or via serial
have reset.

status of each phase. The outputs remain active as long as the start situation of the
corresponding phase is on. Latching feature is not available.
18
2.9 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F035V013 for DOC6Low X X
1)
Parameter F036V013 for DOC6High X X
1)
Parameter F037V013 for DOC6Inst X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
Resets the latched trip signal and recorded data of the particular function block
2)
19
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for DOC6Low is 35, that for DOC6High 36
and that for DOC6Inst 37.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
20
3.2 Setting values
DOC6Low

direction
Operation mode S1 0 ... 7 1) - 1 R/M Selection of operation mode and
inverse-time characteristic in
IDMT mode
Start current S2 0.05...40.00 x In 0.05 R/M Start current
Operate time S3 0.05...300.00 s 0.05 R/M Operate time in DT mode
Time multiplier S4 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R/M Time multiplier in k IDMT mode
Basic angle b S5 0...90 60 R/M Basic angle b for directional

operation
Oper. direction S6 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Selection of forward/ reverse

operation
Earth fault pr. S7 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/M Earth fault protection

1)
2)
3)

direction
Operation mode S1 0 ... 2 1) - 1 R/M Selection of operation mode
Start current S2 0.05...40.00 x In 0.05 R/M Start current
Basic angle b S4 0...90 60 R/M Basic angle b for

Oper. direction S5 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Selection of forward/ reverse

operation
Earth fault pr. S6 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/M Earth-fault protection

3)
Nondir. operat. S7 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Non-directional operation
be determined
1)
2)
3)
21
DOC6Low

direction
and inverse-time
characteristic in IDMT mode
Time multiplier S44 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R/W Time multiplier in k IDMT

mode


operation

1)
2)
3)

direction


operation

3)
be determined
1)
2)
3)
22
DOC6Low

direction
in IDMT mode
Time multiplier S74 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R/W Time multiplier in k IDMT

mode

operation

operation

1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = Definite time; 2 = Extremely inv.; 3 = Very inv.; 4 = Normal
inv.; 5 = Long-time inv.; 6 = RI-type inv.; 7 = RD-type inv.
2)
3)

direction

operation

operation

3)
when the direction cannot be
determined
1)
2)
3)
23
DOC6Low

direction

time counter

group

signal

TRIP output

and CBFP
Minimum time V8 0.03...10.00 s 0.03 R/W Minimum operate time in IDMT

mode
CBFP

and registers
Test START V31 0 or 1 5) - 0 R/W Testing of START

5)




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
24

direction

time counter

group

signal

TRIP output

and CBFP
CBFP

and registers

5)




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
25
3.3.1 Input data

direction

phase current)

phase current)

phase current)

current)

current)

current)

1)

2)
groups 1 and 2
current

function

DOC6Low, DOC6High or
DOC6Inst
1)
Input_ 0 = Not active; 1 = Active
2)
Input GROUP 0 = Group 1; 1 = Group 2
26
3.3.2 Output data
DOC6Low

direction

1)

1)

direction

1)

1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
27
3.3.3.3 Duration
In the DT mode of operation the duration of the start situation is recorded as a

percentage of the set operate time and in the IDMT mode of operation as a percentage
3.3.3.4 Currents, voltages and phase angles
If the function block trips, the measured current, voltage and phase difference values
are updated at the moment of tripping i.e. on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. For
external triggering, the measured values are updated at the moment of triggering i.e.
on the rising edge of the input signal TRIGG. If the function block starts but does not
trip, the values captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz) after
the beginning of the start situation are recorded. Thus the values of the currents,
voltages and phase differences always originate from the same moment.
The currents are recorded as multiples of the rated current In and the voltages as
multiples of the rated voltage Un. The phase differences are recorded in degrees.
3.3.3.5 Current direction of DOC6Low
The state of the DIRECTION signal of DOC6Low is recorded at the same moment as
currents and voltages are recorded.
3.3.3.6 Non-directional operation of DOC6High and DOC6Inst
If the function block DOC6High or DOC6Inst is operating non-directionally at the

moment of recording, the recorded parameter "Nondir. operat." has the value
"Active".
3.3.3.7 Status data
The status data of the input signals BS1, BS2 and DOUBLE (Active or Not active) as
well as the Active group parameter are recorded at the moment of triggering.
28
3.3.3.8 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
29

direction
IL1 peak V207 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Momentary peak of I L1




current)

current)

current)

(DOC6Low)


1)

2)
1)
2)
30

direction
IL2 mean V305 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Filtered value of I L2




current)

current)

current)

(DOC6Low)


1)

2)
1)
2)
31

direction
Voltage U12 V410 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Filtered value of U 12

to-phase current)

to-phase current)

to-phase current)

current)

current)

current)

(DOC6Low)


1)

2)
1)
2)
32
3.3.4 Events
DOC6Low

coefficient mask
E6 64 0 DIRECTION signal of 3I> stage Reset
E7 128 0 DIRECTION signal of 3I> stage Activated
33

coefficient mask
E8 256 0 DIRECTION signal of 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Reset
E9 512 0 DIRECTION signal of 3I>> or 3I>>> stage Activated
34
4. Technical data

Current measurement:
5.0% of set value
Voltage measurement:
2.5% of measured value or 0.01 x Un

1)
total time < 50 ms
TRIP output)

drops below the start value2) < 45 ms


(DOC6Low) f/fn = 0.951.05: Class index E = 5.0 or 20 ms2)
Suppression of harmonics Measuring mode
0 or 2 No suppression
1 or 3 -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,

1)
2)

D -
E -
35
1MRS752370-MUM EVENT230
Issued: 10/1997
Version: D/7.2.2002
Customer-Defined Event
Contents
1. Description................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 General ............................................................................................... 3
2.2 How to use .......................................................................................... 3
3. Setting Values........................................................................................... 5

4. Measurement Values................................................................................ 6
4.1 Events ................................................................................................. 6

5. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 8
EVENT230 Substation Automation
1. Description
1.1 Features
Customer-configurable event for the maximum of 64 event codes on the channel

number 230.
1.2 Application
EVENT230 can be used in customer configuration in order to generate events on the

channel number 230. The function is application independent, which means that any
boolean type of signal can be connected in EVENT230.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI(9(17

IN BOOL Input signal used for event generation
DATA REAL Optional data value to be sent with the event
IEC_ADDR UINT IEC address for reported event (range 031)
2
Substation Automation EVENT230
2.1 General
The FALSE -> TRUE input (IN) signal transition signifies an activating event
occurrence (odd event codes), whereas the TRUE -> FALSE input (IN) signal
transition signifies a deactivating event occurrence (even event codes).
Each edge occurrence causes an event generation with an event code and a time
stamp. The event code is internally selected based on the IEC_ADDR input. For
selecting the IEC address, see the events table below. Optionally, one data value may
be passed with the event.
Events to be generated with these functions are found in the local MMI event list.
Note that if the event is masked, it will not be shown in the MMI event list.
2.2 How to use
This function can be instantiated 32 times per single relay configuration at the
maximum. Each instance should have a unique IEC address. The software does not
check the amount of instances or uniqueness of the IEC addresses.
Assign the desired IEC address as a constant (integer in range 031) into the input
IEC_ADDR. If this input is left unconnected, no events are sent. Do not add any
selection logic to change the value of this input during run-time operation.
This function can be freely assigned to any task cycle desired. Still, be careful not to
generate excessive amounts of events since this may cause event buffer overflow
situations. If the event buffer overflows, no events will be sent until the overflow
situation repeals. Note that EVENT230 will not try to re-send any events it failed to
send due to buffer overflow.
If the input IN is active during the relay start-up (or restart due to configuration
download), EVENT230 will not send the activating event. It will only memorize the
initial state of IN. Only real signal edges generate events.
For example, the following function block diagram can be used to send status of one
relay binary input to the IEC address 12:
3
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIXVLQJWKH(9(17IXQFWLRQEORFN
Timers TON, TOF and RS-latch are used here to limit the amount of generated
events. Digital input must be high or low at least 100 milliseconds before its new
status is reported as an event. Thus 100 milliseconds after the rising edge of the
digital input, an activating event with the event code E25 will be sent. After this, the
digital input must stay low 100 milliseconds before the deactivating event E24 will be
sent. Note that the time stamps of the events will indicate the moment of event
sending, not the rising or falling edge of the digital input signal.
One floating point data may be sent to SCADA with the EVENT230. This is useful
for example in reporting the power factor calculated by the MEPE7 function block. In
the example below, standard timers TON and TP are used to trigger the EVENT230
every 10 seconds. The local feedback variable should have an initial value FALSE.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIXVLQJWKH(9(17IXQFWLRQEORFN
4
3. Setting Values

direction
Event mask 1A V101 0...4294967295 0 R/W Event mask 1 for event
Event mask 1B V102 0...4294967295 0 R/W Event mask 1 for event
5
4. Measurement Values
4.1 Events
Note that in the tables below, the data in columns Default and Event reason is the
same for all events.
Events 0...31:

coefficient
E0 1 0 Customer event E0
E1 2 E1
E2 4 E2
E3 8 E3
E4 16 E4
E5 32 E5
E6 64 E6
E7 128 E7
E8 256 E8
E9 512 E9
E10 1024 E10
E11 2048 E11
E12 4096 E12
E13 8192 E13
E14 16384 E14
E15 32768 E15
E16 65536 E16
E17 131072 E17
E18 262144 E18
E19 524288 E19
E20 1048576 E20
E21 2097152 E21
E22 4194304 E22
E23 8388608 E23
E24 16777216 E24
E25 33554432 E25
E26 67108864 E26
E27 134217728 E27
E28 268435456 E28
E29 536870912 E29
E30 1073741824 E30
E31 2147483648 E31
6
Events 3263:

coefficient
E32 1 0 Customer event E32
E33 2 E33
E34 4 E34
E35 8 E35
E36 16 E36
E37 32 E37
E38 64 E38
E39 128 E39
E40 256 E40
E41 512 E41
E42 1024 E42
E43 2048 E43
E44 4096 E44
E45 8192 E45
E46 16384 E46
E47 32768 E47
E48 65536 E48
E49 131072 E49
E50 262144 E50
E51 524288 E51
E52 1048576 E52
E53 2097152 E53
E54 4194304 E54
E55 8388608 E55
E56 16777216 E56
E57 33554432 E57
E58 67108864 E58
E59 134217728 E59
E60 268435456 E60
E61 536870912 E61
E62 1073741824 E62
E63 2147483648 E63
7
5. Technical Data

A
B Inputs DATA and IEC_ADDR added; ECODE removed
8
1MRS750528-MUM Technical Descriptions of Functions,
Issued: 10/97
Version: H/16.05.2002
Introduction
Introduction Substation Automation
Contents
1. Introduction ...............................................................................................3
1.1 About this document ............................................................................3

1.2 Technical descriptions of functions ......................................................3
1.3 Function blocks....................................................................................4
2. Functions...................................................................................................6
2.1 Protection functions .............................................................................6
2.2 Measurement functions......................................................................11
2.3 Power quality functions ......................................................................11
2.4 Control functions................................................................................12
2.5 Condition monitoring functions...........................................................14
2.6 Communication functions...................................................................14
2.7 General functions...............................................................................15
2.8 Standard functions.............................................................................15
2.8.1 Arithmetic..................................................................................15
2.8.2 Bistable.....................................................................................15
2.8.3 Bit-shift .....................................................................................16
2.8.4 Bitwise operation ......................................................................16
2.8.5 Comparison ..............................................................................16
2.8.6 Counter.....................................................................................16
2.8.7 Edge detection..........................................................................17
2.8.8 Numeric ....................................................................................17
2.8.9 Selection...................................................................................17
2.8.10 Timer ........................................................................................17
2.8.11 Type conversion .......................................................................18
2.8.12 Truncation toward zero .............................................................19
3. Inverse-time characteristics...................................................................20
4. Function block names and categories in alphabetical order...............29
2
Substation Automation Introduction
1. Introduction
1.1 About this document
This document is a guide to the actual technical descriptions of functions that can be
found as separate documents divided into the following categories:
protection
measurement
power quality
control
condition monitoring
communication
general
standard
In this document, the functions available are listed both divided under the above
mentioned categories in chapters 2.1 to 2.8 and in alphabetical order in the end of the
document. Some information on the function blocks belonging to each category is
given in this document, whereas the detailed descriptions of functions can be found as
separate documents.
1.2 Technical descriptions of functions
Each description of a function, i.e. a function block manual, covers either one specific
function block or several function blocks representing the stages of a protection,
measurement or other function. For example, the non-directional overcurrent function
blocks NOC3Low, NOC3High and NOC3Inst are described in one manual (NOC3_).
The manuals provide information on the operation and features of function blocks as
well as on their inputs and outputs, a list of HMI parameters (if existing) and technical
data.
The version letter, e.g. A, on the cover of a function block manual indicates the
document version, i.e. corrections to language, layout etc., whereas the technical
revision of the function block in question is given in section Technical Data in the
end of each manual.
3
1.3 Function blocks
The functionality of RED 500 based products is tied to the hardware configuration
and also depends on the selected functionality level (refer to the technical reference
manual of the product). The desired functions can be activated from a wide range of
protection, measurement, power quality, control, condition monitoring, general and
communication functions within the scope of the I/O connections and analogue
channels available and considering the total CPU load.
The functionality is programmed by means of function blocks (FBs) and other

programmable logic controller (PLC) elements. Interconnections between FBs and
other elements accomplish the relay configuration according to the requirements of
the customer application. The relay configuration is carried out with the Relay
Configuration Tool and downloaded into the target device.
The function blocks and elements are seen as graphical symbols on the worksheets of
the Relay Configuration Tool. The name of the element is written under the upper
edge of the block, see Figure 1.3.-1 below. The name of the instance is written above
the upper edge. The direction of processing through the block is from left to right,
input parameters are on the left and output parameters on the right.
)LJXUH *UDSKLFDOV\PEROIRUWKHQRQGLUHFWLRQDORYHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQVWDJH
,!12&/RZ
4
Typically, a function block or an element contains inputs and outputs that can be
interconnected with other elements or signals, see Figure 1.3.-2 below. Only the
inputs, outputs and signals with the same data type can be interconnected. For
example, if an output with the data type Boolean (BOOL) is to be connected to an
input of the type Real (REAL), the data type conversion element has to be used.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIWKH%RROHDQORJLF
5
2. Functions
All the function blocks supported in the RED 500 series are divided into groups
according to the application area and listed in the following tables. Each product of
the RED 500 series supports a subset of the complete function block list. Product-
specific function block lists can be found in the technical reference manual of the
product in question.
Each function block is given a processing load (in percent) from the processing
capacity reserved for the function blocks. The processing loads are directive and they
can vary from product to product. The relay calculates and checks the actual
processing load in connection to the downloading of the configuration. For more
details, please refer to Configuration Guideline (1MRS750745-MUM) chapter 3.4.
Also, information about the task intervals of the function blocks is given in the tables
below. This information can contain a minimum, a maximum and a recommended
task interval of a function block. Some function blocks allow only one option to a task
interval. Because a task interval is always a multiple of a one-fourth of the network
frequency period, it depends on the network frequency. In the lists, task intervals are
given in milliseconds when the frequency of the network is 50 Hz. Intervals are
transformed for the 60 Hz network by multiplying them by 50/60,
e.g. (50/60) * 10 ms = 8.33 ms.
2.1 Protection functions
Descriptions of the protection function blocks listed below can be found as separate
documents, except for protection functions consisting of two or three stages. For
example, the descriptions of the function blocks NOC3Low, NOC3High and
NOC3Inst have been compiled into one document.
The maximum number of instances for protection functions is 1.
6
IEEE IEC symbol Task Load Description Function 1MRS

Device No. interval/ms1) % 2)
Short circuits
51 3I> 5, 10 3 Three-phase non-directional NOC3Low 100031

overcurrent function, low-set stage
50/51/51B 3I>> 5, 10 2 Three-phase non-directional NOC3High 100032

overcurrent function, high-set
stage
50/51B 3I>>> 5, 10 2 Three-phase non-directional NOC3Inst 100033

overcurrent protection function,
instantaneous stage
67 3I> 10 7 Three-phase directional DOC6Low 100035

overcurrent protection, low-set
stage
67 3I>> 10 7 Three-phase directional DOC6High 100036

overcurrent protection, high-set
stage
67 3I>>> 10 7 Three-phase directional DOC6Inst 100037

overcurrent protection,
instantaneous stage
51V I(U)> 5, 10 3 Voltage-dependent overcurrent VOC6Low 100091

protection, low-set stage
51V I(U)>> 5, 10 3 Voltage-dependent overcurrent VOC6High 100107

protection, high-set stage
21G Z< 5, 10 2 Three-phase underimpedance UI6Low 100110

21G Z<< 5, 10 2 Three-phase underimpedance UI6High 100111

1)
Apply when the nominal network frequency is 50 Hz. The underlined task interval is recommended.
2)
a) Loads are subject to change.
b) Apply when the POU is executed at its recommended task interval (underlined) and the nominal
frequency is 50 Hz.
7

Short circuits contd
87G 3 I> 5 10 Stabilized three-phase differential Diff6G 100099

3 I>> protection for generators
87G/87M 3 I> 5 2 High-impedance or flux-balance Diff3 100100

based differential protection for
generators and motors
Earth faults
51N I0>/SEF 5, 10 2 Non-directional earth-fault NEF1Low 100038

protection function, low-set stage
(or SEF=sensitive earth-fault
protection)
50N/51N I0>> 5, 10 2 Non-directional earth-fault NEF1High 100039

protection function, high-set stage
50N I0>>> 5, 10 2 Non-directional earth-fault NEF1Inst 100090

protection function, instantaneous
stage
67N/51N I0>/SEF 5, 10 3 Directional earth-fault protection DEF2Low 100040

function, low-set stage ( or SEF
=sensitive earth-fault protection)
67N I0>> 5, 10 3 Directional earth-fault protection DEF2High 100041

function, high-set stage
67N I0>>> 5, 10 3 Directional earth-fault protection DEF2Inst 100042

function, instantaneous stage
87N I >, REF

o
5 2 High-impedance based restricted REF1A 100102
earth-fault protection
59N U0> 5, 10 2 Residual overvoltage protection, ROV1Low 100044

low-set stage
59N U0>> 5, 10 2 Residual overvoltage protection, ROV1High 100045

high-set stage
59N U0>>> 5, 10 2 Residual overvoltage protection, ROV1Inst 100046

instantaneous stage
Overload/ unbalanced load
49F 3 20100 1 Three-phase thermal protection for TOL3Cab 100047

cables
49M/49G/ 3 2060 3 Three-phase thermal protection for TOL3Dev 100048

49T devices (motors, generators and
transformers)
46 I2> 5, 10 2 Negative-phase-sequence (NPS) NPS3Low 100077

46 I2>> 5, 10 2 Negative-phase-sequence (NPS) NPS3High 100078

1)
2)
frequency is 50 Hz.
8

Overvoltage/ undervoltage
59 3U> 5, 10 2 Three-phase overvoltage OV3Low 100062

59 3U>> 5, 10 2 Three-phase overvoltage OV3High 100063

27 3U< 5, 10 3 Three-phase undervoltage UV3Low 100064

27 3U<< 5, 10 2 Three-phase undervoltage UV3High 100065

27, 47, 59 U1< 5, 10 3 Phase-sequence voltage PSV3St1 100112

U2> protection, stage 1
U1>
27, 47, 59 U1< 5, 10 3 Phase-sequence voltage PSV3St2 100113

U2> protection, stage 2
U1>
Overfrequency/ underfrequency
81U/81O f</f>, df/dt 5 6 Underfrequency or overfrequency Freq1St1 100072

protection, stage 1 (incl. rate of
change)

change)

change)

change)

change)
Underexcitation/ overexcitation
40 X< 520 2 Three-phase underexcitation UE6Low 100066

40 X<< 520 2 Three-phase underexcitation UE6High 100067

24 U/f> 10 3 Overexcitation protection, OE1Low 100068

low-set stage
24 U/f>> 10 3 Overexcitation protection, OE1High 100069

high-set stage
1)
2)
frequency is 50 Hz.
9

Overpower/ underpower
32P/32Q P> 5, 10 2 Three-phase directional OPOW6St1 100092

Q> overpower protection, stage 1


32 P< 5, 10 2 Three-phase underpower or UPOW6St1 100095

P> reverse power protection, stage 1


Motor protection
48, 14, 66 IS2t, n< 5, 10 2 Three-phase start-up supervision MotStart 100054

for motors (incl. I2t and speed
device modes, and start-up
counter)
37 3I< 5, 10 2 Three-phase non-directional NUC3St1 100088

undercurrent protection, stage 1
37 3I< 5, 10 2 Three-phase non-directional NUC3St2 100089

undercurrent protection, stage 2
46R 3I 5, 10 2 Phase reversal protection PREV3 100055

3I
Capacitor bank protection
51C, 37C, 3I> 5 13 Three-phase overload protection OL3Cap 100116

68C 3I< for shunt capacitor banks
51NC I> 5, 10 4 Current unbalance protection for CUB1Cap 100117

shunt capacitor banks
Additional functions
79 OI 5, 10 3 Auto-reclosure function AR5Func 100080
25 SYNC 5, 10 3 Synchro-check / voltage-check SCVCSt1 100070

function, stage 1
25 SYNC 5, 10 3 Synchro-check / voltage-check SCVCSt2 100071

function, stage 2
68 3I2f> 5, 10 1 Three-phase transformer inrush Inrush3 100034

and motor start-up current
detector
46 I> 520...40 1 Phase discontinuity protection CUB3Low 100051
60 FUSEF 510...20 2 Fuse failure supervision FuseFail 100118

1)
2)
frequency is 50 Hz.
10
2.2 Measurement functions
Descriptions of the measurement function blocks listed below can be found as

separate documents.
The maximum number of instances for measurement functions is 1.
IEC symbol Task Load Description Function 1MRS

interval/ms 1) % 2)
mA/V/C/ 20...40 1 General measurement / Analogue input on MEAI18 100213
RTD/analogue module 100220
mA 20...40 1 Analogue output on RTD/analogue module MEAO14 100456

100459
Io 20...40100 1 Neutral current measurement, stage A MECU1A 100201
Io 20...40100 1 Neutral current measurement, stage B MECU1B 100203
3I 20...40100 2 Three-phase current measurement, stage A MECU3A 100200
3I 20...40100 2 Three-phase current measurement, stage B MECU3B 100202
10 7 Transient disturbance recorder MEDREC16 100225
f 20...40 1 System frequency measurement MEFR1 100208
E, P, Q, pf 20...40 1 Three-phase power and energy meas. MEPE7 100207
Uo 20...40100 1 Residual voltage measurement, stage A MEVO1A 100205
Uo 20...40100 1 Residual voltage measurement, stage B MEVO1B 100226
3U 20...40100 2 Three-phase voltage measurement, stage A MEVO3A 100204
3U 20...40100 2 Three-phase voltage measurement, stage B MEVO3B 100206

1)
2)
frequency is 50 Hz.
2.3 Power quality functions
Descriptions of the power quality function blocks listed below can be found as
separate documents.
The maximum number of instances for power quality functions is 1.
Symbol Task Load Description Function 1MRS

interval/ms1) % 2)
3I~harm 10 5 Current waveform distortion measurement PQCU3H 100512
3U~harm 10 5 Voltage waveform distortion measurement PQVO3H 100513

1)
2)
frequency is 50 Hz.
11
Descriptions of the control function blocks listed below can be found as separate
documents.
The maximum number of instances for control functions is 1.
Description Task Load % 2) Function 1MRS

interval/ms 1)
Circuit breaker 1 (2 state inputs / 2 control outputs) 20...40 2 COCB1 100120
Circuit breaker 2 (2 state inputs / 2 control outputs) 20...40 2 COCB2 100121
Direct open for CBs via HMI 20...100 1 COCBDIR 100141
Disconnector 1 (2 state inputs / 2 control outputs) 20...40 2 CODC1 100122
Three state disconnector 1 (3 state inputs / 4 control 20...40 2 CO3DC1 100139

outputs)
Three state disconnector 2 (3 state inputs / 4 control 20...40 2 CO3DC2 100140

outputs)
Object indication 1 (2 state inputs) 20...100 1 COIND1 100127
Logic control position selector 20...100 1 COLOCAT 100142

1)
2)
frequency is 50 Hz.
12
Description Task interval/ms 1) Load % 2) Function 1MRS

On/off switch 1 (1 output) 20...100 1 COSW1 100135
Power factor controller 40 3 COPFC 100143
Alarm 1 (HMI, remote) - 1 MMIALAR1 100162
MIMIC dynamic data point 1 - 1 MMIDATA1 100157

1)
2)
frequency is 50 Hz.
c) Load of the MMIDATA and MMIALAR function blocks is <1% at any task.
13
2.5 Condition monitoring functions
Descriptions of the condition monitoring function blocks listed below can be found as
separate documents.
The maximum number of instances for condition monitoring functions is 1.
Description Task Load % 2) Function 1MRS

1)
interval/ms
CB electric wear 1 5, 10 1 CMBWEAR1 100187
CB electric wear 2 5, 10 1 CMBWEAR2 100188
Supervision function of the energizing current input 20...100 1 CMCU3 100181

circuit
Gas pressure monitoring 20...100 1 CMGAS1 100186
Three-pole gas pressure monitoring 20...100 1 CMGAS3 100194
Scheduled maintenance 20...100 1 CMSCHED 100189
Spring charging control 1 20...100 1 CMSPRC1 100190
Trip Circuit Supervision 1 20...100 1 CMTCS1 100191
Trip Circuit Supervision 2 20...100 1 CMTCS2 100192
Operate time counter 1 for used operate time (motors) 20...100 1 CMTIME1 100184
Operate time counter 2 for used operate time (motors) 20...100 1 CMTIME2 100185
Breaker travel time 1 5, 10 1 CMTRAV1 100193
Supervision function of the energizing voltage input 20...100 1 CMVO3 100182

circuit
1)
2)
frequency is 50 Hz.
2.6 Communication functions
Description of the function block below can be found as a separate document.
The maximum number of instances for communication functions is 32.
Description Load % 1) Function 1MRS

Event to be defined by the customer, E0...E63 2 EVENT230 100230
1)
b) Load corresponds to a situation where all 32 instances are associated to a 5 ms task interval.
14
2.7 General functions
Descriptions of the function blocks listed below can be found as separate documents
except for the 20 switchgroups, SWGRP1 to SWGRP 20, that have been compiled
into one document.
The maximum number of instances for system functions is 1.
Description Function 1MRS

Activation of HMI backlight MMIWAKE 100028
Resetting of operation indicators, latched output signals, INDRESET 100029

registers and waveforms i.e. the disturbance recorder
Switchgroups SWGRP1...SWGRP20 SWGRP1....20 100030
2.8 Standard functions
Descriptions of the standard function blocks below can be found compiled into one
document with the name Generic.
The number of instances in generic functions is unlimited.
The symbol X in the Extensible inputs column means that the function supports
adding the number of inputs. For example, in figure 1.3.-2 an AND port is used with
both two and three inputs.
2.8.1 Arithmetic
Function Description Extensible inputs

ADD Adder X
DIV Divider -
EXPT Exponentiation -
MOD Modulo -
MOVE Move, out := in -
MUL Multiplier X
SUB Subtractor -
2.8.2 Bistable
Function Description
RS Reset dominant bistable function block
RS_D Reset dominant bistable function block with data input
SR Set dominant bistable function block
15
2.8.3 Bit-shift
ROL Rotate to left
ROR Rotate to right
SHL Bit-shift to left
SHR Bit-shift to right
2.8.4 Bitwise operation

AND Bitwise Boolean AND connection X
BITGET Get one bit -
BITSET Set one bit -
NOT Bitwise Boolean NOT connection -
OR Bitwise Boolean OR connection X
XOR Bitwise Boolean exclusive OR connection X
2.8.5 Comparison

COMH Hysteresis comparator -
EQ Equal X
GE Greater than or equal X
GT Greater than X
LE Less than or equal X
LT Less than X
NE Not equal -
2.8.6 Counter
CTD Down-counter
CTU Up-counter
CTUD Up-down counter
16
2.8.7 Edge detection
F_TRIG Falling edge detector
R_TRIG Rising edge detector
2.8.8 Numeric
ABS Absolute value
ACOS Principal arc cosine
ASIN Principal arc sine
ATAN Principal arc tangent
COS Cosine in radians
EXP Natural exponential
LN Natural logarithm
LOG Logarithm base 10
SIN Sine in radians
SQRT Square root
TAN Tangent in radians
2.8.9 Selection

LIMIT Limiter -
MAX Maximum X
MIN Minimum X
MUX Multiplexer X
SEL Binary selection -
2.8.10 Timer
TOF Time delay OFF
TON Time delay ON
TP Pulse
17
2.8.11 Type conversion
BOOL2INT BOOL inputs to INT output
BOOL_TO_BYTE Type conversion BOOL to BYTE
BOOL_TO_DINT Type conversion BOOL to DINT
BOOL_TO_DWORD Type conversion BOOL to DWORD
BOOL_TO_INT Type conversion BOOL to INT
BOOL_TO_REAL Type conversion BOOL to REAL
BOOL_TO_SINT Type conversion BOOL to SINT
BOOL_TO_UDINT Type conversion BOOL to UDINT
BOOL_TO_UINT Type conversion BOOL to UINT
BOOL_TO_USINT Type conversion BOOL to USINT
BOOL_TO_WORD Type conversion BOOL to WORD
BYTE_TO_DWORD Type conversion BYTE to DWORD
BYTE_TO_WORD Type conversion BYTE to WORD
DATE_TO_UDINT Type conversion DATE to UDINT
DINT_TO_INT Type conversion DINT to INT
DINT_TO_REAL Type conversion DINT to REAL
DINT_TO_SINT Type conversion DINT to SINT
DWORD_TO_BYTE Type conversion DWORD to BYTE
DWORD_TO_WORD Type conversion DWORD to WORD
INT2BOOL INT input to BOOL outputs
INT_TO_DINT Type conversion INT to DINT
INT_TO_REAL Type conversion INT to REAL
REAL_TO_DINT Type conversion REAL to DINT
REAL_TO_INT Type conversion REAL to INT
REAL_TO_SINT Type conversion REAL to SINT
REAL_TO_UDINT Type conversion REAL to UDINT
REAL_TO_UINT Type conversion REAL to UINT
REAL_TO_USINT Type conversion REAL to USINT
SINT_TO_DINT Type conversion SINT to DINT
SINT_TO_INT Type conversion SINT to INT
SINT_TO_REAL Type conversion SINT to REAL
18
TIME_TO_REAL Type conversion TIME to REAL
TIME_TO_TOD Type conversion TIME to TOD
TIME_TO_UDINT Type conversion TIME to UDINT
TOD_TO_REAL Type conversion TOD to REAL
TOD_TO_TIME Type conversion TOD to TIME
TOD_TO_UDINT Type conversion TOD to UDINT
UDINT_TO_REAL Type conversion UDINT to REAL
UDINT_TO_UINT Type conversion UDINT to UINT
UDINT_TO_USINT Type conversion UDINT to USINT
UINT_TO_BOOL Type conversion UINT to BOOL
UINT_TO_REAL Type conversion UINT to REAL
UINT_TO_UDINT Type conversion UINT to UDINT
UINT_TO_USINT Type conversion UINT to USINT
USINT_TO_REAL Type conversion USINT to REAL
USINT_TO_UDINT Type conversion USINT to UDINT
USINT_TO_UINT Type conversion USINT to UINT
WORD_TO_BYTE Type conversion WORD to BYTE
WORD_TO_DWORD Type conversion WORD to DWORD
2.8.12 Truncation toward zero
TRUNC_REAL_TO_DINT Truncation toward zero
TRUNC_REAL_TO_INT Truncation toward zero
TRUNC_REAL_TO_SINT Truncation toward zero
TRUNC_REAL_TO_UDINT Truncation toward zero
TRUNC_REAL_TO_UINT Truncation toward zero
TRUNC_REAL_TO_USINT Truncation toward zero
19
3. Inverse-time characteristics

The inverse-time characteristics available in the current and voltage protection
function blocks of RE_ 5_ _ are illustrated below. For more information about the
inverse-time operation of a specific function block, refer to the corresponding
function block manual.
t/s
t/s
70
70
60
60
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
9 10
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3 k 3
1.0
2 0.9
2
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
1 1
0.9 0.4
0.9
0.8 0.8 k
0.7 0.3 0.7 1.0
0.6 0.9
0.6
0.8
0.5 0.5 0.7
0.2
0.4 0.6
0.4
0.5
0.3 0.3 0.4
0.1
0.3
0.2 0.2
0.2
0.05
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09 0.1
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
NORMINV
VERYINV
0.02 0.02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I> . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I>
)LJXUH ,(&LQYHUVHWLPHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYHVHWV1RUPDOLQYHUVHOHIWDQG

9HU\LQYHUVHULJKWIRUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQ
20
t/s t/s
70 700
60 600
50 500
40 400
30 300
20 200
10 100
9 90
8 80
7 70
6 60
5 50
4 40
3 30
2 20
1 10
0.9 9
0.8 8
k
0.7 7
1.0
0.6 6 0.9
0.5 5 0.8
0.7
0.4 4
0.6
0.5
0.3 3
k 0.4
0.2 1.0 2
0.3
0.8
0.6 0.2
0.1 0.4 1
0.09 0.9
0.08 0.3 0.8
0.07 0.7
0.2 0.1
0.06 0.6
0.05 0.5
0.1
0.04 0.4
0.05 0.05
0.03 0.3
0.2
LTIMEINV
0.02
EXTRINV
1 2 3 I/I>
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
)LJXUH ,(&LQYHUVHWLPHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYHVHWV([WUHPHO\LQYHUVHOHIWDQG

/RQJWLPHLQYHUVHULJKWIRUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQ
21
t/s t/s
70
60 70
60
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
9 10
8 9
7 8
6 7
5 6
5
4 k
4
3 1.0
0.9
3
0.8
2 0.7
0.6 2
0.5
0.4
1 k
0.9 0.3 1
0.8 0.9
0.7 0.8 1.0
0.6 0.2 0.7
0.9
0.6
0.5
0.5 0.8
0.4
0.4
0.3 0.1 0.7
0.3
0.2
0.05 0.2
0.6
0.1
0.09 0.1
0.08 0.09
0.07 0.08
0.06 0.07
0.05 0.06
0.05
0.04
0.04
0.03 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
0.03
RI_INV
0.02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I> 0.02
RD_INV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 I/I>
)LJXUH 6SHFLDOLQYHUVHWLPHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYHVHWV5,W\SHLQYHUVHOHIWDQG

5'W\SHLQYHUVHULJKWIRUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQ
22
100 200
90
80
70
60
50 100
90
40 80
70
30 60
50
20
40
30
10
9 20
8
7
6
5
10
4 9
8
3 7
6
2 5
4
t/s t/s
n=15.0 3
1 n=13.0
0.9 n=11.0
0.8 2
0.7 n=9.0
0.6
n=7.0
0.5
0.4 n=5.0 1
0.9
0.3 0.8
0.7
n=3.0 0.6 n=15.0
0.2 0.5 n=13.0
n=2.0 n=11.0
0.4
n=9.0
0.3
0.1 n=7.0
0.09
0.08 n=1.0
0.07 0.2 n=5.0
0.06
0.05
n=3.0
0.04 n=0.5
0.1
0.09
0.03 0.08 n=2.0
0.07
0.02 0.06
n=0.5 n=1.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 0.05
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
I/I>
I/I>
)LJXUH ,(((LQYHUVHWLPHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYHVHWV([WUHPHO\LQYHUVHOHIW

DQG9HU\LQYHUVHULJKWIRUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQ
23
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
n=15.0
2 n=13.02
n=11.0
t/s t/s
n=9.0
n=7.0
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 n=5.00.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 n=3.00.5 n=15.0
0.4 0.4 n=13.0
n=11.0
n=2.0
0.3 0.3
n=9.0
n=7.0
0.2 0.2
n=1.0 n=5.0
0.1 0.1
n=3.0
0.09 0.09
0.08 n=0.5
0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06 n=2.0
n=0.5 n=1.0
0.05 0.05
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
I/I> I/I>
)LJXUH ,(((LQYHUVHWLPHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYHVHWV,QYHUVHOHIWDQG6KRUW

WLPHLQYHUVHULJKWIRUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQ
24
40 2000
30
1000
900
800
20 700
600
500
400
300
10
9
200
8
7
6
100
5 90
80
4 70
60
50
3
40
30
2
20
t/s t/s
10
1 9
8
0.9 7
0.8 6 n=15.0
0.7 5 n=13.0
n=11.0
0.6 4
n=9.0
0.5 3 n=7.0
0.4
2 n=5.0
0.3
n=3.0
1
0.9
0.2 0.8 n=2.0
0.7
0.6
0.5
n=15.0 0.4 n=1.0
n=13.0 0.3
0.1
0.09 n=11.0
0.08 0.2 n=0.5
0.07 n=9.0
0.06
n=0.5 n=1.0 n=2.0n=3.0 n=5.0 n=7.0
0.05 0.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
I/I> I/I>
)LJXUH,(((LQYHUVHWLPHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYHVHWV6KRUW7LPH([WUHPHO\
,QYHUVHOHIWDQG/RQJ7LPH([WUHPHO\,QYHUVHULJKWIRUFXUUHQW
SURWHFWLRQ
25
2000 600
500
400
1000
900 300
800
700
600 200
500
400
300
100
90
200 80
70
60
50
100
90 40
80
70 30
60
50 n=15.0
40 20 n=13.0
n=11.0
30 n=9.0
n=7.0
20 10
9
t/s t/s 8 n=5.0
n=15.0 7
10 n=13.0 6
9 n=11.0 5
8 n=3.0
7 n=9.0 4
6 n=7.0
5 3 n=2.0
4 n=5.0
3 2
n=3.0 n=1.0
2
n=2.0
1
0.9
0.8 n=0.5
1 0.7
0.9
0.8 n=1.0 0.6
0.7
0.6 0.5
0.5 0.4
0.4 n=0.5
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1 0.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
I/I> I/I>
)LJXUH,(((LQYHUVHWLPHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYHVHWV/RQJ7LPH9HU\,QYHUVH
OHIWDQG/RQJ7LPH,QYHUVHULJKWIRUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQ
26
t/s
1000
100
10
k>
1,0
0,7
1
0,4
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,01
1,0 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 ovolt_A 1,5 U/U>
)LJXUH,QYHUVHWLPHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYHVHW$IRURYHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQ
t/s
1000
100
10
k>
1,0
0,7
0,1
0,4
0,2
0,05
0,01
1,0 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 ovolt_B 1,5 U/U>
)LJXUH ,QYHUVHWLPHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYHVHW%IRURYHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQ
27
1000
100
10
k<
1,0
0,7
1
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,1
0,01
U/U< 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 uvolt_C 1,0
)LJXUH ,QYHUVHWLPHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYHVHW&IRUXQGHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQ
28
4. Function block names and categories in

alphabetical order
ABS Standard; numeric
ADD Standard; arithmetic
AND Standard; bitwise operation
AR5Func Protection
BITGET Standard; bitwise operation
BITSET Standard; bitwise operation
BOOL_TO_BYTE Standard; type conversion
BOOL_TO_DINT Standard; type conversion
BOOL_TO_DWORD Standard; type conversion
BOOL_TO_INT Standard; type conversion
BOOL_TO_REAL Standard; type conversion
BOOL_TO_SINT Standard; type conversion
BOOL_TO_UDINT Standard; type conversion
BOOL_TO_UINT Standard; type conversion
BOOL_TO_USINT Standard; type conversion
BOOL_TO_WORD Standard; type conversion
BOOL2INT Standard; type conversion
BYTE_TO_DWORD Standard; type conversion
BYTE_TO_WORD Standard; type conversion
CMBWEAR1 Condition monitoring
CMBWEAR2 Condition monitoring
CMCU3 Condition monitoring
CMGAS1 Condition monitoring
CMGAS3 Condition monitoring
CMSCHED Condition monitoring
CMSPRC1 Condition monitoring
CMTCS1 Condition monitoring
CMTCS2 Condition monitoring
CMTIME1 Condition monitoring
CMTIME2 Condition monitoring
CMTRAV1 Condition monitoring
CMVO3 Condition monitoring
CO3DC1 Control
CO3DC2 Control
29
COCB1 Control
COCB2 Control
COCBDIR Control
CODC1 Control
CODC2 Control
CODC3 Control
CODC4 Control
CODC5 Control
COIND1 Control
COIND2 Control
COIND3 Control
COIND4 Control
COIND5 Control
COIND6 Control
COIND7 Control
COIND8 Control
COLOCAT Control
COMH Standard; comparison
COPFC Control
COSW1 Control
COSW2 Control
COSW3 Control
COSW4 Control
CTD Standard; counter
CTU Standard; counter
CTUD Standard; counter
CUB1Cap Protection
CUB3Low Protection
DATE_TO_UDINT Standard; type conversion
DEF2High Protection
DEF2Inst Protection
DEF2Low Protection
Diff3 Protection
Diff6G Protection
DINT_TO_INT Standard; type conversion
DINT_TO_REAL Standard; type conversion
DINT_TO_SINT Standard; type conversion
DIV Standard; arithmetic
30
DOC6High Protection
DOC6Inst Protection
DOC6Low Protection
DWORD_TO_BYTE Standard; type conversion
DWORD_TO_WORD Standard; type conversion
EQ Standard; comparison
F_TRIG Standard; edge detection
Freq1St_ Protection
FuseFail Protection
GE Standard; comparison
GT Standard; comparison
INDRESET General
Inrush3 Protection
INT_TO_DINT Standard; type conversion
INT_TO_REAL Standard; type conversion
INT2BOOL Standard; type conversion
LE Standard; comparison
LIMIT Standard; selection
LT Standard; comparison
MAX Standard; selection
MEAI18 Measurement
MEAO14 Measurement
MECU1A Measurement
MECU1B Measurement
MECU3A Measurement
MECU3B Measurement
MEDREC16 Measurement
MEFR1 Measurement
MEPE7 Measurement
MEVO1A Measurement
MEVO1B Measurement
MEVO3A Measurement
MEVO3B Measurement
MIN Standard; selection
MMIALAR1 Control
MMIALAR2 Control
MMIALAR3 Control
MMIALAR4 Control
31
MMIALAR5 Control
MMIALAR6 Control
MMIALAR7 Control
MMIALAR8 Control
MMIDATA1 Control
MMIDATA2 Control
MMIDATA3 Control
MMIDATA4 Control
MMIDATA5 Control
MMIWAKE General
MotStart Protection
MOVE Standard; arithmetic
MUL Standard; arithmetic
MUX Standard; selection
NE Standard; comparison
NEF1High Protection
NEF1Inst Protection
NEF1Low Protection
NOC3High Protection
NOC3Inst Protection
NOC3Low Protection
NOT Standard; bitwise operation
NPS3High Protection
NPS3Low Protection
NUC3St1 Protection
NUC3St2 Protection
OE1Low Protection
OE1High Protection
OL3Cap Protection
OPOW6St1 Protection
OPOW6St2 Protection
OPOW6St3 Protection
OR Standard; bitwise operation
OV3High Protection
OV3Low Protection
PQCU3H Power quality
PQVO3H Power quality
PREV3 Protection
32
PSV3St1 Protection
PSV3St2 Protection
R_TRIG Standard; edge detection
REAL_TO_DINT Standard; type conversion
REAL_TO_INT Standard; type conversion
REAL_TO_SINT Standard; type conversion
REAL_TO_UDINT Standard; type conversion
REAL_TO_UINT Standard; type conversion
REAL_TO_USINT Standard; type conversion
REF1A Protection
ROV1High Protection
ROV1Inst Protection
ROV1Low Protection
RS Standard; bistable
RS_D Standard; bistable
SCVCSt1 Protection
SCVCSt2 Protection
SEL Standard; selection
SINT_TO_DINT Standard; type conversion
SINT_TO_INT Standard; type conversion
SINT_TO_REAL Standard; type conversion
SR Standard; bistable
SUB Standard; arithmetic
SWGRP120 General
TIME_TO_REAL Standard; type conversion
TIME_TO_TOD Standard; type conversion
TIME_TO_UDINT Standard; type conversion
TOD_TO_REAL Standard; type conversion
TOD_TO_TIME Standard; type conversion
TOD_TO_UDINT Standard; type conversion
TOF Standard; timer
TOL3Cab Protection
TOL3Dev Protection
TON Standard; timer
TP Standard; timer
TRUNC_REAL_TO_DINT Standard; type conversion
TRUNC_REAL_TO_INT Standard; type conversion
TRUNC_REAL_TO_SINT Standard; type conversion
33
TRUNC_REAL_TO_UDINT Standard; type conversion
TRUNC_REAL_TO_UINT Standard; type conversion
TRUNC_REAL_TO_USINT Standard; type conversion
UDINT_TO_REAL Standard; type conversion
UDINT_TO_UINT Standard; type conversion
UDINT_TO_USINT Standard; type conversion
UE6High Protection
UE6Low Protection
UI6Low Protection
UI6High Protection
UINT_TO_BOOL Standard; type conversion
UINT_TO_REAL Standard; type conversion
UINT_TO_UDINT Standard; type conversion
UINT_TO_USINT Standard; type conversion
UPOW6St1 Protection
UPOW6St2 Protection
UPOW6St3 Protection
USINT_TO_REAL Standard; type conversion
USINT_TO_UDINT Standard; type conversion
USINT_TO_UINT Standard; type conversion
UV3High Protection
UV3Low Protection
VOC6High Protection
VOC6Low Protection
WORD_TO_BYTE Standard; type conversion
WORD_TO_DWORD Standard; type conversion
XOR Standard; bitwise operation
34
1MRS100072 RE_5_ _
1MRS100076 Underfrequency or Overfrequency
Issued: 10/1998
Version: C Protection
Data subject to change without notice Stages 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
(Freq1St_)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.4 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 7
2.5 Test mode ........................................................................................... 7
2.6 START and TRIP outputs.................................................................... 8
2.7 Resetting............................................................................................. 8

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 9
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 10
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 10
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 10
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 11
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 13
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 13
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 13
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 17
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 18

RE_5_ _ Freq1St1Freq1St5 ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Selectable underfrequency or overfrequency protection

Selectable frequency rate of change function
Start and trip indication in terms of output signals
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the five underfrequency or overfrequency

function blocks Freq1St1, Freq1St2, Freq1St3, Freq1St4 and Freq1St5 used in
products based on the RED 500 Platform. All the five stages are identical in
operation.
The frequency function blocks are specially designed for applications such as
generator protection, load shedding, load restoration and disconnection for island
operation.
f<
f>
df/dt<
df/dt>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI)UHT6WB)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOH

,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI)UHT6WBVWDJHDVDQH[DPSOH
2
ABB Automation Freq1St1Freq1St5 RE_5_ _

U Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring phase-to-
phase or phase-to-earth voltage
BS1 Digital signal (BOOL, active HIGH) Blocking signal 1 (blocks TRIP1)
registers
GROUP Digital signal (BOOL, active HIGH) Control input for switching
between the setting groups 1 and
2. When GROUP is FALSE, group
1 is active. When GROUP is
TRUE, group 2 is active.
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Signal for resetting the registers

START1 Digital signal (BOOL, active HIGH) Signal that indicates starting of
f>/f< function
TRIP1 Digital signal (BOOL, active HIGH) Signal that indicates tripping of
f>/f< function
1)
f>/f< or df/dt function
1)
ERR Digital signal (BOOL, active HIGH) Signal for indicating a
configuration error
1)
depends on the operation mode selected
3
2.1 Configuration
The input and output signals of the frequency protection function block Freq1St_ is
configured with the Relay Configuration Tool included in the CAP 505 Tool Box.
Frequency protection must be selected for the voltage input via the special
measurements dialogue box in the configuration tool. If the frequency protection is
not selected, the ERR output is activated.
Traditionally, frequency measurement is highly recommended to be based on a phase-

to-phase voltage which is less dependent on the asymmetry of separate phase voltages
and less sensitive to harmonics. The third harmonic, for instance, will not be present
in phase-to-phase voltages. However, the function block is also able to measure the
frequency reliably and accurately using a single phase-to earth voltage. The function
block will check that the signal type of the U input is valid, i.e. a phase-to-phase or
phase-to-earth voltage. A wrong signal type will cause a configuration error.
Note! The undervoltage limit value always refers to the pu value of the analogue
channel in use. Therefore, if a single phase-to-earth voltage is used, the limit has to be
scaled unless a voltage divider is used.
For example, when the blocking level is 9 kV (0,8 UN; UN = 11,547 kV), and a
single phase voltage is used as an input:
0,8
SDUDPHWHU = 8 1 0,5 8 1 (8 1 = 20N9 )
3
The output signals TRIP1 and TRIP2 of the function block can be used for frequency-
based load shedding in an underfrequency situation. Some portions of the load can be
reduced by disconnecting the corresponding outgoing lines from the busbar. When the
remaining load is in balance with the power generation available, the power system
frequency will return to its normal value.
The outputs can also be used in frequency-based load restoration. The Relay
Configuration Tool is used for configuring the logic needed for load restoration after
load shedding.
Please note that the task execution interval of the funtion block must be configured to
the fastest task, i.e. 5ms (fn = 50 Hz). A slower task execution interval will cause a
configuration error which will force the function block to the Not in use mode.
4
2.2 Measuring mode
The actual power system frequency is measured via a sophisticated numerical method.
The operation is insensitive to harmonics and the DC component.
The function block Freq1St_ can be used for underfrequency (f<) or overfrequency
(f>) protection. The function block operates as either underfrequency or
overfrequency relays depending on whether the set operate value is above or below
the rated frequency of the relay or feeder terminal.
The function block also includes a starting element that measures the rate of change
of the power system frequency, so that the need for protection can be anticipated even
before a major frequency change occurs. The parameter Operation Mode is used for
setting the operation direction of the df/dt function. When the set value is indicated as
df/dt<, the negative rate of change of frequency is measured (the function block
operates as a negative derivative function), and when the set value is indicated as
df/dt>, the positive rate of change of frequency is measured (the function block
operates as a positive derivative function). The frequency rate of change function can
also be set out of use.
The output START1 is activated when the f</f> function starts. Correspondingly,
START2 is activated when the f</f> or df/dt function starts, depending on the
operation mode used. The trip signals of both the f</f> function and the df/dt function
(TRIP1 and TRIP2) can be used for load shedding. The operate time of the f</f>
function can be set via the parameter Operate time 1 and the operate time of both
the f</f> function and the df/dt function via the parameter Operate time 2. Active
START1 and START2 signals are both indicated by steady start LEDs (yellow) and
active TRIP1 and TRIP2 signals by steady trip LEDs (red) on the MMI.
5
Operation mode Description of operation

=Not in use The f</f> function and the df/dt function are not in use.
=f</f> 1 timer TRIP1 is activated by the f</f> function when the set
operate time 1 has elapsed. The df/dt function is not in
use.
=f</f> 2 timers TRIP1 is activated by the f</f> function when the set
operate time 1 has elapsed, and TRIP2 is activated by the
f</f> function when the set operate time 2 has elapsed.
The df/dt function is not in use.
=f</f> OR df/dt> TRIP1 is activated by the f</f> function when the set
f</f> function or the positive df/dt function when the set
operate time 2 has elapsed.
=f</f> AND df/dt> TRIP1 is activated by the f</f> function when the set
operate time 1 has elapsed. TRIP2 is activated by both the
f</f> function and the positive df/dt function when the set
=f</f> OR df/dt< TRIP1 is activated by the f</f> function when the set
f</f> function or the negative df/dt function when the set
=f</f> AND df/dt< TRIP1 is activated by the f</f> function when the set
f</f> function and the negative df/dt function when the set
The calculation window for frequency measurement always has a length of two
fundamental cycles, i.e. 40 ms at the rated system frequency 50 Hz and 33.3 ms at the
rated system frequency 60 Hz. The total operate time is the sum of the start time, the
additional operate delay and the operate delay of the heavy-duty output relay. The
timers are cleared when the abnormal frequency situation has disappeared.
The blocking signal BS1 can be used for blocking the operation of the underfrequency
and overfrequency function f</f>. When the blocking signal BS1 is active, the DT
timer 1 is frozen. In the same way, the blocking signal BS2 can be used for blocking
the operation of the df/dt or f</f> function, depending on the operation mode used.
When the blocking signal BS2 is active, the DT timer 2 is frozen. Active BS1 and
BS2 signals are indicated by blinking start LEDs (yellow) on the MMI.
In an undervoltage situation the function block is internally blocked. The

undervoltage limit value is set according to the application.
6
)LJXUH 6LPSOLILHGIXQFWLRQDOEORFNGLDJUDPRIDQXQGHUIUHTXHQF\DQG
RYHUIUHTXHQF\SURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQEORFN
Note!The operate times and start times are specified for the set rated frequencies 50
Hz and 60 Hz.
2.4 Setting groups
function block Freq1St_. Switching between the two groups can be done in the
following three ways:

1)
time.
2.5 Test mode
The digital outputs of the function block Freq1St_ can be activated with separate
control parameters for each output either locally via the MMI or externally via the
serial communication. When an output is activated with the test parameter, an event
7
2.6 START and TRIP outputs
The output signals START1 and START2 are always pulse-shaped. The minimum
pulse width of the corresponding output signal is set via a separate parameter on the
MMI or on serial communication. If the start situation is longer than the set pulse
width, the START1 and START2 signals remain active until the start situation is
over. The output signals TRIP1 and TRIP2 may be non-latching or latching. When the
latching mode has been selected, the TRIP1 and TRIP2 signals remain active until the
output is reset even if the operation criteria have reset.
Active START1 and START2 signals are indicated by steady start LEDs (yellow) and
2.7 Resetting
The TRIP output signals and the registers can be reset either via the RESET input or

1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
Resets the latched trip signal and recorded data of the function block Freq1St1. The corresponding
parameters for other Freq1St_ function blocks are the following:
Freq1St2 F073V013
Freq1St3 F074V013
Freq1St4 F075V013
Freq1St5 F076V013
2)
8
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channels for the frequency function blocks are the
following:
Freq1St1 72
Freq1St2 73
Freq1St3 74
Freq1St4 75
Freq1St5 76
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
9
3.2 Setting values

direction
Operation mode S1 0...6 1) - 1 R Operation mode for frequency
protection
Voltage limit S2 0.30...0.90 x Un 0.30 R Undervoltage limit for blocking
Start frequency S3 25.00...75.00 Hz 48.70 R Start value for U/O frequency

protection
Operate time 1 S4 0.10...120.00 s 20.00 R Operate time for U/O frequency

protection
Start df/dt S5 0.2...10.0 Hz/s 10.0 R Start value for frequency rate
of change prot.
Operate time 2 S6 0.12...120.00 s 20.00 R Timer for df/dt prot. or U/O

frequency prot.
1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use
1 = f</f> 1 timer
2 = f</f> 2 timers
3 = f</f> OR df/dt>
4 = f</f> AND df/dt>
5 = f</f> OR df/dt<
6 = f</f> AND df/dt<

direction
Operation mode S41 0...6 1) - 1 R/W Operation mode for frequency
protection
Voltage limit S42 0.30...0.90 x Un 0.30 R/W Undervoltage limit for blocking
Start frequency S43 25.00...75.00 Hz 48.70 R/W Start value for U/O frequency
protection
Operate time 1 S44 0.10...120.00 s 20.00 R/W Operate time for U/O frequency
protection
Start df/dt S45 0.2...10.0 Hz/s 10.0 R/W Start value for frequency rate of
change prot.
Operate time 2 S46 0.12...120.00 s 20.00 R/W Timer for df/dt prot. or U/O
frequency prot.
1)
1 = f</f> 1 timer
2 = f</f> 2 timers
3 = f</f> OR df/dt>
5 = f</f> OR df/dt<
10

direction
protection
protection
protection
change prot.
frequency prot.
1)
1 = f</f> 1 timer
2 = f</f> 2 timers
3 = f</f> OR df/dt>
5 = f</f> OR df/dt<
11

direction
Group selection V1 0 ... 21) - 0 R/W Selection of the active setting group

signals

TRIP outputs

CBFP

registers
Test START1 V31 0 or 1 4) - - R/W Testing of START1
Test TRIP1 V32 0 or 1 4) - - R/W Testing of TRIP1

4)
Test START2 V33 0 or 1 - - R/W Testing of START2
(E0 ... E13)
(E0 ... E13)
(E0 ... E13)
(E0 ... E13)
1)
2)
3)
4)
12
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Frequency I1 20.00...80.00 Hz 0.0 R/M System frequency
Rate of change I2 -15.0...+15.0 Hz/s 0.0 R/M Freq. rate of change
Voltage U I3 0.0...2.0 x Un 0.0 R/M Voltage U

1)
Input TRIGG I6 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for triggering the

registers

the groups 1 and 2

output signals and registers
of Freq1St_
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output START1 O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of start signal 1
1)
Output TRIP1 O2 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of trip signal 1

1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
13
Registers containing information about the voltage, frequency, etc. can be accessed
over the serial communication or the local MMI of the RED 500 unit.
The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the START1, TRIP1, START2, TRIP2 or
TRIGG signals.
3.3.3.3 Duration
The duration of the start situation is recorded as a percentage of the set operate time.
3.3.3.4 Frequency and voltage values
If the function block trips, the frequency and voltage values are updated at the
the frequency and voltage values are updated at the moment of triggering i.e. on the
rising edge of the input signal TRIGG. If the function block starts but does not trip,
the values captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz) after the
beginning of the start situation are recorded.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the input signals BS1, BS2 and TRIGG and the output signals
START1, START2, TRIP1 and TRIP2 as well as the parameter Active group are
recorded at the moment of tripping and triggering. The Active group parameter
indicates the setting group valid for the recorded data.
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
which means that if the function has started, it will neglect an external triggering
request.
14

direction

1)
Start1 V203 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of START1
Start2 V204 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of START2
Duration1 V205 0...100 % 0.0 R/M Duration of start situation

1)
Trip1 V207 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of TRIP1
Trip2 V208 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of TRIP2
Frequency V209 20.00...80.00 Hz 0.0 R/M Meas. system frequency
Rate of change V210 -15.0...+15.0 Hz/s 0.0 R/M Freq. rate of change
Voltage U V211 0.0...2.0 x Un 0.0 R/M Meas. voltage
BS1 V212 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of BS1

1)
BS2 V213 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of BS2
TRIGG V214 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of TRIGG

2)
1)
2)
15

direction

1)

1)

1)

2)
1)
2)
16

direction

1)

1)

1)

2)
1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START1 signal from f>,f< St_ Reset
E1 2 1 START1 signal from f>,f< St_ Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP1 signal from f>,f< St_ Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP1 signal from f>,f< St_ Activated
E8 256 0 BS1 signal of f>,f< St_ Reset
E9 512 0 BS1 signal of f>,f< St_ Activated
E12 4096 0 Test mode of f>,f< St_ Off
E13 8192 0 Test mode of f>,f< St_ On
17
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies Underfrequency or overfrequency function (f</f>): 10 mHz
Frequency rate of change function (df/dt):
real df/dt < 5 Hz/s: accuracy 100 mHz/s
real df/dt < 15 Hz/s: accuracy 2.0% of the real df/dt
Undervoltage blocking: 1.0% of set value
Start time Total start times at rated freq. fn = 50 Hz:
Frequency measurement: < 100 ms 1)
Df/dt measurement: < 120 ms 1)
Note! The operate times and start times are specified for the set
rated frequencies 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
TRIP output
Frequency dependence of the Accuracy for the f</f> function is defined in the setting range
settings and operate times 25...75 Hz.

1) Includes the delay of the output relay

E -
18
1MRS752304-MUM Freq1St_
Issued: 10/1998
Underfrequency or Overfrequency
Protection
Data subject to change without notice Stages 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.4 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 7
2.5 Test mode ........................................................................................... 7
2.7 Resetting............................................................................................. 8

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 9
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 10
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 10
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 10
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 11
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 13
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 13
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 13
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 17
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 18
Freq1St_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Selectable underfrequency or overfrequency protection

Selectable frequency rate of change function
Start and trip indication in terms of output signals
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the five underfrequency or overfrequency

function blocks Freq1St1, Freq1St2, Freq1St3, Freq1St4 and Freq1St5 used in
products based on the RED 500 Platform. All the five stages are identical in
operation.
The frequency function blocks are specially designed for applications such as
generator protection, load shedding, load restoration and disconnection for island
operation.
f<
f>
df/dt<
df/dt>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI)UHT6WB)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOH

,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI)UHT6WBVWDJHDVDQH[DPSOH
2
Substation Automation Freq1St_

U Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring phase-to-
phase or phase-to-earth voltage
registers
GROUP Digital signal (BOOL, active HIGH) Control input for switching
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Signal for resetting the registers

f>/f< function
f>/f< function
1)
1)
ERR Digital signal (BOOL, active HIGH) Signal for indicating a
configuration error
1)
depends on the operation mode selected
3
2.1 Configuration
The input and output signals of the frequency protection function block Freq1St_ is
configured with the Relay Configuration Tool included in the CAP 505 Tool Box.
Frequency protection must be selected for the voltage input via the special
measurements dialogue box in the configuration tool. If the frequency protection is
not selected, the ERR output is activated.
Traditionally, frequency measurement is highly recommended to be based on a phase-

to-phase voltage which is less dependent on the asymmetry of separate phase voltages
and less sensitive to harmonics. The third harmonic, for instance, will not be present
in phase-to-phase voltages. However, the function block is also able to measure the
frequency reliably and accurately using a single phase-to earth voltage. The function
block will check that the signal type of the U input is valid, i.e. a phase-to-phase or
phase-to-earth voltage. A wrong signal type will cause a configuration error.
Note! The undervoltage limit value always refers to the pu value of the analogue
channel in use. Therefore, if a single phase-to-earth voltage is used, the limit has to be
scaled unless a voltage divider is used.
For example, when the blocking level is 9 kV (0,8 UN; UN = 11,547 kV), and a
single phase voltage is used as an input:
0,8
SDUDPHWHU = 8 1 0,5 8 1 (8 1 = 20N9 )
3
The output signals TRIP1 and TRIP2 of the function block can be used for frequency-
based load shedding in an underfrequency situation. Some portions of the load can be
reduced by disconnecting the corresponding outgoing lines from the busbar. When the
remaining load is in balance with the power generation available, the power system
frequency will return to its normal value.
The outputs can also be used in frequency-based load restoration. The Relay
Configuration Tool is used for configuring the logic needed for load restoration after
load shedding.
configuration error which will force the function block to the Not in use mode.
4
2.2 Measuring mode
The actual power system frequency is measured via a sophisticated numerical method.
The operation is insensitive to harmonics and the DC component.
The function block Freq1St_ can be used for underfrequency (f<) or overfrequency
(f>) protection. The function block operates as either underfrequency or
overfrequency relays depending on whether the set operate value is above or below
the rated frequency of the relay or feeder terminal.
The function block also includes a starting element that measures the rate of change
of the power system frequency, so that the need for protection can be anticipated even
before a major frequency change occurs. The parameter Operation Mode is used for
setting the operation direction of the df/dt function. When the set value is indicated as
df/dt<, the negative rate of change of frequency is measured (the function block
operates as a negative derivative function), and when the set value is indicated as
df/dt>, the positive rate of change of frequency is measured (the function block
operates as a positive derivative function). The frequency rate of change function can
also be set out of use.
The output START1 is activated when the f</f> function starts. Correspondingly,
START2 is activated when the f</f> or df/dt function starts, depending on the
operation mode used. The trip signals of both the f</f> function and the df/dt function
(TRIP1 and TRIP2) can be used for load shedding. The operate time of the f</f>
function can be set via the parameter Operate time 1 and the operate time of both
the f</f> function and the df/dt function via the parameter Operate time 2. Active
START1 and START2 signals are both indicated by steady start LEDs (yellow) and
5
Operation mode Description of operation

=Not in use The f</f> function and the df/dt function are not in use.
=f</f> 1 timer TRIP1 is activated by the f</f> function when the set
operate time 1 has elapsed. The df/dt function is not in
use.
=f</f> 2 timers TRIP1 is activated by the f</f> function when the set
f</f> function when the set operate time 2 has elapsed.
The df/dt function is not in use.
=f</f> OR df/dt> TRIP1 is activated by the f</f> function when the set
f</f> function or the positive df/dt function when the set
=f</f> AND df/dt> TRIP1 is activated by the f</f> function when the set
f</f> function and the positive df/dt function when the set
=f</f> OR df/dt< TRIP1 is activated by the f</f> function when the set
f</f> function or the negative df/dt function when the set
=f</f> AND df/dt< TRIP1 is activated by the f</f> function when the set
f</f> function and the negative df/dt function when the set
The calculation window for frequency measurement always has a length of two
fundamental cycles, i.e. 40 ms at the rated system frequency 50 Hz and 33.3 ms at the
rated system frequency 60 Hz. The total operate time is the sum of the start time, the
additional operate delay and the operate delay of the heavy-duty output relay. The
timers are cleared when the abnormal frequency situation has disappeared.
The blocking signal BS1 can be used for blocking the operation of the underfrequency
and overfrequency function f</f>. When the blocking signal BS1 is active, the DT
timer 1 is frozen. In the same way, the blocking signal BS2 can be used for blocking
the operation of the df/dt or f</f> function, depending on the operation mode used.
When the blocking signal BS2 is active, the DT timer 2 is frozen. Active BS1 and
BS2 signals are indicated by blinking start LEDs (yellow) on the MMI.
In an undervoltage situation the function block is internally blocked. The

undervoltage limit value is set according to the application.
6
)LJXUH 6LPSOLILHGIXQFWLRQDOEORFNGLDJUDPRIDQXQGHUIUHTXHQF\DQG
RYHUIUHTXHQF\SURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQEORFN
Note!The operate times and start times are specified for the set rated frequencies 50
Hz and 60 Hz.
2.4 Setting groups
function block Freq1St_. Switching between the two groups can be done in the

1)
time.
2.5 Test mode
The digital outputs of the function block Freq1St_ can be activated with separate
control parameters for each output either locally via the MMI or externally via the
serial communication. When an output is activated with the test parameter, an event
7
The output signals START1 and START2 are always pulse-shaped. The minimum
pulse width of the corresponding output signal is set via a separate parameter on the
MMI or on serial communication. If the start situation is longer than the set pulse
width, the START1 and START2 signals remain active until the start situation is
over. The output signals TRIP1 and TRIP2 may be non-latching or latching. When the
latching mode has been selected, the TRIP1 and TRIP2 signals remain active until the
output is reset even if the operation criteria have reset.
Active START1 and START2 signals are indicated by steady start LEDs (yellow) and
2.7 Resetting
The TRIP output signals and the registers can be reset either via the RESET input or

1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
Resets the latched trip signal and recorded data of the function block Freq1St1. The corresponding
parameters for other Freq1St_ function blocks are the following:
Freq1St2 F073V013
Freq1St3 F074V013
Freq1St4 F075V013
Freq1St5 F076V013
2)
8
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channels for the frequency function blocks are the
following:
Freq1St1 72
Freq1St2 73
Freq1St3 74
Freq1St4 75
Freq1St5 76
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
9
3.2 Setting values

direction
Operation mode S1 0...6 1) - 1 R Operation mode for frequency
protection
Voltage limit S2 0.30...0.90 x Un 0.30 R Undervoltage limit for blocking
Start frequency S3 25.00...75.00 Hz 48.70 R Start value for U/O frequency

protection
Operate time 1 S4 0.10...120.00 s 20.00 R Operate time for U/O frequency

protection
Start df/dt S5 0.2...10.0 Hz/s 10.0 R Start value for frequency rate
of change prot.
Operate time 2 S6 0.12...120.00 s 20.00 R Timer for df/dt prot. or U/O

frequency prot.
1)
1 = f</f> 1 timer
2 = f</f> 2 timers
3 = f</f> OR df/dt>
5 = f</f> OR df/dt<

direction
protection
protection
protection
change prot.
frequency prot.
1)
1 = f</f> 1 timer
2 = f</f> 2 timers
3 = f</f> OR df/dt>
5 = f</f> OR df/dt<
10

direction
protection
protection
protection
change prot.
frequency prot.
1)
1 = f</f> 1 timer
2 = f</f> 2 timers
3 = f</f> OR df/dt>
5 = f</f> OR df/dt<
11

direction
Group selection V1 0 ... 21) - 0 R/W Selection of the active setting group

signals

TRIP outputs

CBFP

registers
Test START1 V31 0 or 1 4) - - R/W Testing of START1

4)
Test START2 V33 0 or 1 - - R/W Testing of START2
(E0 ... E13)
(E0 ... E13)
(E0 ... E13)
(E0 ... E13)
1)
2)
3)
4)
12
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Frequency I1 20.00...80.00 Hz 0.0 R/M System frequency
Rate of change I2 -15.0...+15.0 Hz/s 0.0 R/M Freq. rate of change

1)

registers

the groups 1 and 2

of Freq1St_
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)

1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
13
Registers containing information about the voltage, frequency, etc. can be accessed
over the serial communication or the local MMI of the RED 500 unit.
The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the START1, TRIP1, START2, TRIP2 or
TRIGG signals.
3.3.3.3 Duration
3.3.3.4 Frequency and voltage values
If the function block trips, the frequency and voltage values are updated at the
the frequency and voltage values are updated at the moment of triggering i.e. on the
rising edge of the input signal TRIGG. If the function block starts but does not trip,
the values captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz) after the
beginning of the start situation are recorded.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the input signals BS1, BS2 and TRIGG and the output signals
START1, START2, TRIP1 and TRIP2 as well as the parameter Active group are
recorded at the moment of tripping and triggering. The Active group parameter
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
which means that if the function has started, it will neglect an external triggering
request.
14

direction

1)

1)

1)

2)
1)
2)
15

direction

1)

1)

1)

2)
1)
2)
16

direction

1)

1)

1)

2)
1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E12 4096 0 Test mode of f>,f< St_ Off
E13 8192 0 Test mode of f>,f< St_ On
17
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies Underfrequency or overfrequency function (f</f>): 10 mHz
Frequency rate of change function (df/dt):
real df/dt < 5 Hz/s: accuracy 100 mHz/s
real df/dt < 15 Hz/s: accuracy 2.0% of the real df/dt
Undervoltage blocking: 1.0% of set value
Start time Total start times at rated freq. fn = 50 Hz:
Frequency measurement: < 100 ms 1)
Df/dt measurement: < 120 ms 1)
Note! The operate times and start times are specified for the set
rated frequencies 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
TRIP output
Frequency dependence of the Accuracy for the f</f> function is defined in the setting range
settings and operate times 25...75 Hz.

1) Includes the delay of the output relay

E -
F -
18
1MRS752305-MUM FuseFail
Issued: 3/2000
Fuse Failure Supervision
Contents
1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2 Description of Operation.......................................................................... 4
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.4 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 7
2.5.1 Measuring mode 1 ..................................................................... 7
2.5.2 Measuring mode 2 ..................................................................... 7
2.5.3 Additional criteria to the measuring modes................................. 7
2.5.4 Input MCB .................................................................................. 8
2.6 Test mode ........................................................................................... 8
3 Parameters and Events ............................................................................ 9

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 9
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 10
3.2.1 Settings .................................................................................... 10
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 10
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 11
3.3.3 Events ...................................................................................... 11
4 Technical Data ........................................................................................ 12
FuseFail Substation Automation
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
Detection of failures in a voltage measurement circuitry
A failure is detected in a voltage measurement circuitry when the negative-
sequence voltage rises to a significant level while the negative-sequence current
does not rise correspondingly
If only one phase-to-phase voltage is measured, detection is based on the
amplitude of the measured voltage and the absence of high negative-sequence
current
If all the measured voltages are lost while the currents remain at a normal level, a
failure is recognised in the voltage measurement circuit
The output BSOUT indicating a failure in the voltage measurement circuitry is
disabled if a high current value is detected in any phase (=> fault current). This is
particularly important in the case of three-phase short-circuit close to the
measuring point.
The output BSOUT indicating a failure in the voltage measurement circuitry is
disabled also if the current ceases to zero
The function block includes an input for position information of a miniature circuit
breaker (MCB). The opening of the MCB generates an event even if the function
block is in the Not in use mode.
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the fuse failure supervision function block
FuseFail used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
Some voltage based protection functions may maloperate if a voltage measurement

circuitry is damaged or if the miniature circuit breaker (MCB) of the measurement
circuitry has opened for example due to an operation of the short circuit protection.
Such protection functions, e.g. UI6Low, are therefore blocked by FuseFail to avoid a
wrong operation of the protection during the absence of the correct voltage
measurement.
A failure in the voltage measurement circuitry should, however, be repaired as soon

as possible to restore the blocked protection functions into use.
2
Substation Automation FuseFail
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI)XVH)DLO

ULx_Uxy Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring phase-to-earth
voltage or phase-to-phase voltage
ULy_Uyz Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring phase-to-earth
ULz_Uzx Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring phase-to-earth
ILx Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring phase current
ILy Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring phase current
ILz Analogue signal (SINT)) Input for measuring phase current
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for blocking the function block
MCB Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Position indication of a miniature circuit
breaker (TRUE = closed)

BSOUT Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal for protection functions
error
3
2.1 Configuration
graphic worksheet of the Relay Configuration Tool. The phase-to-earth voltages or
phase-to-phase voltages (e.g. UL1, UL2 and UL3 or U12, U23 and U31) are connected to
the corresponding inputs, ULx_Uxy, ULy_Uyz and ULz_Uzx, of the function block.
The phase currents (e.g. IL1, IL2 and IL3 or IL1b, IL2b and IL3b) are connected to the
corresponding inputs ILx, ILy and ILz of the function block. Note that all the currents
and voltages need not be available when using the function block.
The function block will automatically adapt itself to the connected analogue inputs.
Note that if only two voltages are to be connected to the function block, they are
connected to the first and second voltage inputs (ULx_Uxy and ULy_Uyz) of the
function block. If only one (phase-to-phase) voltage is to be connected, it is connected
to the first voltage input. Similarly, if only two currents are to be connected they are
connected to the first and second current inputs of the function block. It is important
that the phase order is always 1-2-3, 2-3-1 or 3-1-2 (refer to section 2.2
Configuration error checking), regardless of the number of the connected voltages
or currents. Refer to examples 1, 2 and 3 below.
([DPSOH&RQQHFWLRQVRIWKHFXUUHQWV
In this example, all phase-to-earth voltages are to be connected but only two phase
currents are available. The possible connections for analogue inputs in this case are
presented in Figure 2. Note that the connected voltages could also be as in example 2
or as in example 3. They are not dependent on the connected currents.
)LJXUH $QDORJXHLQSXWFRQQHFWLRQVZKHQDEFRQO\WZRFXUUHQWVDQGGDOOFXUUHQWVDUHXVHG
4
([DPSOH&RQQHFWLRQVRIWKHYROWDJHV
In this example, two or three phase-to-phase voltages are measured. The possible
connections for analogue inputs in this case are presented in Figure 3. Note that the
connected currents could also be as in example 1. They are not dependent on the
connected voltages.
)LJXUH $QDORJXHLQSXWFRQQHFWLRQVZKHQSKDVHWRSKDVHYROWDJHVDUHXVHG
([DPSOH&RQQHFWLRQVRIWKHYROWDJHV
In this example, only one phase-to-phase voltage is to be connected to the function
block. The possible connections for analogue inputs in this case are presented in
Figure 4. Note that the connected currents could also be as in example 1. They are not
dependent on the connected voltages.
)LJXUH $QDORJXHLQSXWFRQQHFWLRQVZKHQRQO\RQHSKDVHWRSKDVHYROWDJHLVXVHG
Digital inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of the function block and the ERR
output of the function block is connected to the output signal. The BSOUT output
should be connected to the BLOCK input of the function block (or blocks) which is to
be blocked in the case of a failure in the voltage measurement circuitry. If a digital
signal indicating the state of the miniature circuit breaker (MCB) is available, it
should be connected to the MCB input of the function block. Deactivation of the
MCB input will activate BSOUT output and generate an event indicating an opened
miniature circuit breaker.
5
If a digital signal indicating the state of the circuit breaker is available, it should be
connected to a logical OR together with the BSOUT output of FuseFail and the output
of the logical OR should then be connected to the BLOCK input of the function block
to be blocked.
The function block should be instantiated within the same program as the fastest
function block to be blocked with it. Thus, if there are for example three function
blocks to be blocked, one is executed at 5-millisecond intervals, the other at 10-
millisecond intervals and the third at 20-millisecond intervals, then the FuseFail
function block has to be executed at 5-millisecond intervals. A global variable has to
be used to transfer the status of the BSOUT output to the programs in other tasks. The
fundamental frequency of 50 Hz is assumed in the previous example.
However, the execution interval of the FuseFail function block should not be greater
than 20 milliseconds to ensure the right operation during three-phase short circuits in
networks with a weak infeed.
When BSOUT output is used for blocking function blocks that are executed in a
slower task interval than FuseFail, an additional delay has to be included in the block
activation time and in the reset time. The delay is as long as the interval of the slower
task. The following examples clarify the BSOUT activation time and the reset time. In
these examples, a global variable v_BSOUT is used to deliver the BSOUT signal to
other tasks.
([DPSOH
FuseFail task interval 10 ms BSOUT activation time <35 ms
Function block to task interval 20 ms activation time of the BLOCK input (via global
be blocked variable v_BSOUT) < (35 ms + 20 ms) = 55
ms
([DPSOH
FuseFail task interval 10 ms BSOUT reset time 20 ms
Function block to task interval 20 ms reset time of the BLOCK input (via global
be blocked variable v_BSOUT) 20 ms + 20 ms = 40 ms
If the connected analogue inputs are not sufficient or not in the right order, the ERR
output is activated and an event is generated. Activation of the ERR output also
automatically sets the function block to the Not in use mode, which means that it
cannot operate.
unit is exactly the same as that of the measuring device. For more information, refer
to Technical Reference Manual for REM 54_.
6
2.4 Measuring mode
The function block has two different measuring modes.
1. If at least two voltages are connected, the operation is based on positive- and
negative-sequence components of voltage and current.
2. In the case of only one connected phase-to-phase voltage the operation is based on
the amplitude of the measured voltage and on positive- and negative-sequence
currents.
The function block automatically selects the right measuring mode depending on the
connected analogue signals.
1RWH
When negative-sequence and positive-sequence components of voltage or current are

calculated from only two phase variables, U0 and correspondingly I0 are assumed to
be zero (i.e. UL1+UL2+UL3 = 0, IL1+IL2+IL3 = 0). When two phase-to-phase voltages are
used, negative- and positive-sequence voltages can be calculated without additional
assumptions.
The operation criteria depend to some extent on the measuring mode. Operation on
both measuring modes is described below.
2.5.1 Measuring mode 1
The BSOUT output is activated in the following situations:

If the ratio of negative-sequence voltage to positive-sequence voltage exceeds the
user-settable limit Ratio U2/U1> while the ratio of negative-sequence current to
positive-sequence current does not exceed the user-settable limit Ratio I2/I1<.
If all the voltage signals are lost and, at the same time, the ratio of negative-
sequence current to positive-sequence current does not exceed the user-settable
limit Ratio I2/I1<.
2.5.2 Measuring mode 2
The BSOUT output is activated in the following situation:

If the only measured phase-to-phase voltage is lost and, at the same time, the ratio
of negative-sequence current to positive-sequence current does not exceed the
user-settable limit Ratio I2/I1<.
2.5.3 Additional criteria to the measuring modes
1. The activation of the BSOUT output is inhibited or BSOUT is reset (if already
active) if the amplitude of any of the measured currents even temporarily exceeds
1.5 x In. The nominal current (In) is determined by the nominal current of the
measuring device and the scaling factor of the analogue channel (see Setting the
7
rated values of the protected unit). This criterion affects also blocking based on
the input MCB.
The inhibition described above is latched to ensure that the decrease of the fault
current does not change the conditions so that the blocking signals would be
activated falsely.
The inhibition is unlatched
when the positive-sequence current has decreased to zero, that is, when the
fault is cleared by opening the circuit breaker
OR
one second after its activation if the activation criteria for BSOUT are not met
anymore
2. The activation of the BSOUT output is inhibited or BSOUT is reset (if already
active) also during an undercurrent situation (positive-sequence current is very
low).
2.5.4 Input MCB
The deactivation of the MCB input (position information of the miniature circuit
breaker, closed when active) will activate the BSOUT output. It will also generate an
additional event indicating the position of the miniature circuit breaker. The event is
generated even if the function block is set to Not in use (control parameter
FuseFail) and BSOUT output will not be activated.
If the first criterion described in the section Additional criteria to the measuring
modes is fulfilled, the BSOUT output will not be activated when the input MCB is
deactivated. The second criterion in that section does not affect blocking based on the
input MCB.
1RWH
The activation of the BSOUT output can take place only if the function block is set to
In use (control parameter FuseFail) and is not blocked by an external blocking
signal connected to the BLOCK input. The default setting for the parameter
FuseFail is Not in use.
2.6 Test mode
The BSOUT output of the function block can be activated with a separate control
parameter either locally via the MMI or externally via the serial communication.
When an output is activated with the test parameter, an event indicating the test is
generated.
The supervising functions operate normally while the BSOUT output is tested.
8
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for FuseFail is 118.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
For example, if only the events E3, E4 and E5 are to be seen on the MMI of the relay
terminal, the event mask value 56 (8 + 16 + 32) is written to the Event mask 1
parameter (FxxxV101).
32...63.
9
3.2 Setting values
3.2.1 Settings
direction
Ratio U2/U1> S41 10...50 % 25 R/W Minimum ratio of negative-sequence
voltage to positive-sequence voltage
to allow blocking
Ratio I2/I1< S42 10...50 % 20 R/W Maximum ratio of negative-
sequence current to positive-
sequence current to allow blocking

direction
FuseFail V1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/W Function block in use or not in use
2)
Test BSOUT V2 0 or 1 - - R/W Testing BSOUT
transmission (E0...E7 and E9)
1)
Status 0=Not in use; 1=In use
2)
Test 0=Do not activate; 1=Activate
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Input BLOCK I1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of signal for blocking the
function block
Input MCB I2 0 or 1 2) - 1 R/M Position of the miniature circuit
breaker contacts
1)
Status 0=Not active; 1=Active
2)
Position 0=Open; 1=Closed
10
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output BSOUT O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of blocking signal for
protection functions
Output ERR O2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of configuration error signal
1)
Status 0=Not active; 1=Active
3.3.3 Events
coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Fuse failure Reset
E1 2 1 Fuse failure Activated
E2 4 1 MCB position Open
E3 8 1 MCB position Closed
E4 16 0 FuseFail blocked Reset
E5 32 0 FuseFail blocked Activated
E6 64 0 Test mode of FuseFail Off
E7 128 0 Test mode of FuseFail On
E8 0 0 - -
E9 512 1 Configuration error Activated
11
4 Technical Data
Operation accuracies Depends on the frequency of the current and voltage measured:
f/fn=0.98...1.02: 2.0 percentage units (of settings Ratio U2/U1>
and Ratio I2/I1<)
f/fn=0.95...1.05: 4.0 percentage units (of settings Ratio U2/U1>
and Ratio I2/I1<)
BSOUT activation time (when Injected negative-sequence voltage = 2.00 x Ratio U2/U1>:
the task interval is 10 ms) 1) f/fn=0.98...1.02 < 35 ms (within the same task)
Reset time (when the task 20 ms (within the same task)
interval is 10 ms) 2)
Reset ratio 0.8...0.96 (for Ratio U2/U1>)
1.04...1.2 (for Ratio I2/I1<)
5...20 ms, at the rated frequency fn = 50 Hz
1)
slower task interval than FuseFail, an additional delay has to be included in the block
activation time (refer to section 2.1 Configuration).
2)
slower task interval than FuseFail, an additional delay has to be included in the reset
time (refer to section 2.1 Configuration).

C -
12
1MRS752371-MUM Generic Base Elements
Issued: 11/1997
Contents
1. Arithmetic.................................................................................................. 4
1.1 Extensible adder (ADD)....................................................................... 4

1.2 Divider (DIV)........................................................................................ 5
1.3 Exponentiation (EXPT) ........................................................................ 6
1.4 Modulo (MOD)..................................................................................... 7
1.5 Move (MOVE) ..................................................................................... 8
1.6 Extensible multiplier (MUL).................................................................. 9
1.7 Subtract (SUB) .................................................................................. 10
2. Bistable ................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Reset dominant bistable function block (RS) ..................................... 11
2.2 Reset dominant bistable function block (RS_D) with data input......... 12
2.3 Set dominant bistable function block (SR) ......................................... 13
3. Bit-Shift ................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Rotate to left (ROL) ........................................................................... 14
3.2 Rotate to right (ROR) ........................................................................ 15
3.3 Bit-shift to left (SHL) .......................................................................... 16
3.4 Bit-shift to right (SHR) ....................................................................... 17
4. Bitwise Operation ................................................................................... 18
4.1 Extensible bitwise Boolean AND (AND)............................................. 18

4.2 Get one bit (BITGET) ........................................................................ 19
4.3 Set one bit (BITSET) ......................................................................... 20
4.4 Bitwise Boolean NOT (NOT) ............................................................. 22
4.5 Extensible bitwise Boolean OR (OR)................................................. 23
4.6 Extensible bitwise Boolean XOR (XOR) ............................................ 24
5. Comparison ............................................................................................ 25
5.1 Hysteresis comparator (COMH) ........................................................ 25

5.2 Extensible equality (EQ) .................................................................... 26
5.3 Extensible greater than or equal (GE) ............................................... 27
5.4 Extensible greater than (GT) ............................................................. 28
5.5 Extensible less than or equal (LE) ..................................................... 29
5.6 Extensible less than (LT) ................................................................... 30
Generic Base Elements Substation Automation
5.7 Not equal (NE) ...................................................................................31
6. Counter ....................................................................................................32
6.1 Down-counter (CTD)..........................................................................32
6.2 Up-down counter (CTUD) ..................................................................34
6.3 Up-counter (CTU) ..............................................................................37
7. Edge Detection........................................................................................39
7.1 Falling edge detector (F_TRIG) .........................................................39

7.2 Rising edge detector (R_TRIG)..........................................................40
8. Numeric ...................................................................................................41
8.1 Absolute value (ABS).........................................................................41
8.2 Principal arc cosine (ACOS) ..............................................................42
8.3 Principal arc sine (ASIN)....................................................................43
8.4 Principal arc tangent (ATAN) .............................................................44
8.5 Cosine in radians (COS) ....................................................................45
8.6 Natural exponential (EXP) .................................................................46
8.7 Natural logarithm (LN)........................................................................47
8.8 Logarithm base 10 (LOG) ..................................................................48
8.9 Sine in radians (SIN)..........................................................................49
8.10 Square root (SQRT)...........................................................................50
8.11 Tangent in radians (TAN)...................................................................51
9. Selection..................................................................................................52
9.1 Limiter (LIMIT) ...................................................................................52
9.2 Extensible maximum (MAX)...............................................................53
9.3 Extensible minimum (MIN).................................................................54
9.4 Multiplexer (MUX) ..............................................................................55
9.5 Binary selection (SEL) .......................................................................56
10. Timer ......................................................................................................57
10.1 Time delay OFF (TOF).......................................................................57

10.2 Time delay ON (TON) ........................................................................58
10.3 Pulse (TP)..........................................................................................59
10.4 Pulse width for TOF, TON and TP .....................................................60
11. Type Conversion ...................................................................................61
11.1 BOOL inputs to INT output (BOOL2INT)............................................61

11.2 BOOL to ** (BOOL_TO_**) ................................................................63
2
Substation Automation Generic Base Elements
11.3 BYTE to ** (BYTE_TO_**)................................................................. 64

11.4 DATE to UDINT (DATE_TO_UDINT) ................................................ 65
11.5 DINT to ** (DINT_TO_**)................................................................... 66
11.6 DWORD to ** (DWORD_TO_**)........................................................ 67
11.7 INT input to BOOL outputs (INT2BOOL) ........................................... 68
11.8 INT to ** (INT_TO_**)........................................................................ 70
11.9 REAL to ** (REAL_TO_**)................................................................. 71
11.10SINT to ** (SINT_TO_**) ................................................................... 73
11.11TIME to ** (TIME_TO_**) .................................................................. 74
11.12TOD to ** (TOD_TO_**) .................................................................... 75
11.13UDINT to ** (UDINT_TO_**).............................................................. 76
11.14UINT to ** (UINT_TO_**)................................................................... 77
11.15USINT to ** (USINT_TO_**) .............................................................. 78
11.16WORD to ** (WORD_TO_**)............................................................. 79
12. Truncation toward Zero........................................................................ 80
12.1 TRUNC_REAL_TO_**....................................................................... 80
3
1. Arithmetic
1.1 Extensible adder (ADD)
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERO
1.1.1 Input description

IN1 ANY_NUM Input 1
IN2 ANY_NUM Input 2
INn ANY_NUM Input n
1.1.2 Output description

OUT ANY_NUM Output
1.1.3 Description of operation
OUT := IN1 + IN2 + ... + INn
For example:
ADD(2,3) = 5
ADD(2,-3) = -1
4
1.2 Divider (DIV)

IN1 ANY_NUM Input 1
IN2 ANY_NUM Input 2

OUT ANY_NUM Output
OUT := IN1 / IN2
For example:
DIV(7,3) = 2
5
1.3 Exponentiation (EXPT)

IN1 ANY_REAL Input 1
IN2 ANY_NUM Input 2

OUT ANY_REAL Output
OUT := IN1IN2
For example:
EXPT(2, 3) = 8
6
1.4 Modulo (MOD)

IN1 ANY_INT Input 1
IN2 ANY_INT Input 2

OUT ANY_INT Output
Returns the remainder after division IN1/IN2.
OUT := IN1 modulo IN2
Example:
MOD(7,3) = 1
7
1.5 Move (MOVE)

IN ANY Input

OUT ANY Output
OUT := IN
8
1.6 Extensible multiplier (MUL)

IN1 ANY_NUM Input 1
IN2 ANY_NUM Input 2
INn ANY_NUM Input n

OUT ANY_NUM Output
OUT:= IN1 * IN2 * ... * INn
For example:
MUL(2,3) = 6
9
1.7 Subtract (SUB)

IN1 ANY_NUM Input 1
IN2 ANY_NUM Input 2

OUT ANY_NUM Output
OUT := IN1 - IN2
For example:
SUB(3,2) = 1
10
2. Bistable
2.1 Reset dominant bistable function block (RS)

SET BOOL Set input
RESET1 BOOL Reset input

Q1 BOOL Output
The output Q1 is reset if the RESET1 input is set, regardless of the state of the SET
input. If the SET input is set and RESET1 is low, the output pin Q1 is set. If both the
inputs are FALSE, the output Q1 will preserve its previous value.
11
2.2 Reset dominant bistable function block (RS_D) with data input

SET BOOL Set input
D BOOL Data input
LOAD BOOL Loads the RS_D with the value at input D
RESET BOOL Reset input

Q BOOL Output
If only SET and RESET are used, RS_D operates as an ordinary RS element. When
the RESET input is reset and LOAD goes to 1, the value at D is stored at the output
Q. When the RESET input is set, the output Q is unconditionally reset, i.e. the RESET
input overrides the other inputs.
12
2.3 Set dominant bistable function block (SR)

SET1 BOOL Dominant set input
RESET BOOL Reset input

Q1 BOOL Output
The output Q1 is set if the SET1 input is set, regardless of the state of the RESET
input. If the RESET input is set and SET1 is low, the output pin Q1 is cleared. If both
the inputs are FALSE, the output will preserve its previous value.
13
3. Bit-Shift
3.1 Rotate to left (ROL)

IN ANY_BIT Input value to be rotated
N ANY_BIT Number of bit positions to
rotate

OUT ANY_BIT Output
OUT := IN rotated to the left by N bits, circular.
14
3.2 Rotate to right (ROR)

IN ANY_BIT Input value to be rotated
rotate

OUT ANY_BIT Output
OUT := IN rotated to the right by N bits, circular.
15
3.3 Bit-shift to left (SHL)

IN ANY_BIT Input value to be shifted
shift

OUT ANY_BIT Output
OUT := IN left-shifted by N bits, zero filled on right.
16
3.4 Bit-shift to right (SHR)

IN ANY_BIT Input 1
N ANY_BIT Input 2

OUT ANY_BIT Output
OUT := IN right-shifted by N bits, zero-filled on left.
17
4. Bitwise Operation
4.1 Extensible bitwise Boolean AND (AND)

IN1 ANY_BIT Input 1
IN2 ANY_BIT Input 2
INn ANY_BIT Input n

OUT ANY_BIT Output
OUT := IN1 & IN2 & ... & INn
For example:
AND(TRUE,FALSE) = FALSE
AND(0x0F,0x08) = 0x08
18
4.2 Get one bit (BITGET)
4.2.1 Application
BITGET is used to read a selected bit of an integer value and is thus useful in reading
the status information of a relay.

BITNR INT Input for selecting the bit number to be read
IN WORD Data input

Q BOOL Status of the bit read
If the BITNR is not within the range from 0 to 15, the output Q is FALSE. Otherwise
the bit value of IN, specified by BITNR, is loaded to the output Q.
LSB = Least significant bit

MSB = Most significant bit
For example:
BITGET(BITNR=2, IN=WORD#2#0000_1111_0000_0100) = TRUE

BITGET(BITNR=3, IN=WORD#2#0000_1111_0000_0100) = FALSE
19
4.3 Set one bit (BITSET)
4.3.1 Application
BITSET is used to set a selected bit of an integer value and is thus useful in writing
the status information of a relay.

EN BOOL Enable input
BITNR INT Input for selecting the bit number to be set
BIT BOOL Value of the bit (input)
IN WORD Data input

Q WORD Output of the set data
When the input EN is FALSEthe data input IN is loaded unchanged to the output Q.
When the input EN is TRUE, the value of the bit number BITNR of the input data IN
is replaced by the value of the input BIT and the result is loaded to the output Q. If the
BITNR input is not within the range from 0 to 15, the output Q remains unchanged.
LSB = Least significant bit

MSB = Most significant bit
20
For example:
BITSET(EN=TRUE, BITNR=2, BIT=TRUE,

IN=WORD#2#0000_1111_0000_0000) = WORD#2#0000_1111_0000_0100
BITSET(EN=TRUE, BITNR=2, BIT=FALSE,
IN=WORD#2#0000_1111_0000_0100) = WORD#2#0000_1111_0000_0000
BITSET(EN=FALSE, BITNR=2, BIT=FALSE,
IN=WORD#2#0000_1111_0000_0100) = WORD#2#0000_1111_0000_0100
21
4.4 Bitwise Boolean NOT (NOT)

IN ANY_BIT Input

OUT ANY_BIT Output
OUT := NOT IN
For example:
NOT(TRUE) = FALSE
NOT(FALSE) = TRUE
NOT(0x80) = 0x7F
22
4.5 Extensible bitwise Boolean OR (OR)

IN1 ANY_BIT Input 1
IN2 ANY_BIT Input 2
INn ANY_BIT Input n

OUT ANY_BIT Output
OUT := IN1 OR IN2 OR ... INn
For example:
OR(TRUE, FALSE) = TRUE

OR(0x01, 0x0F) = 0x0F
23
4.6 Extensible bitwise Boolean XOR (XOR)

IN1 ANY_BIT Input 1
IN2 ANY_BIT Input 2
INn ANY_BIT Input n

OUT ANY_BIT Output
OUT := IN1 XOR IN2 XOR ... XOR INn
For example:
XOR(FALSE,FALSE) = FALSE
XOR(TRUE,TRUE) = FALSE
XOR(FALSE,TRUE) = TRUE
XOR(TRUE, FALSE) = TRUE
XOR(0x08, 0x0F) = 0x07
24
5. Comparison
5.1 Hysteresis comparator (COMH)
5.1.1 Application
COMH is used for monitoring a value with limits.

IN INT Input value
HHYS INT Higher limit value
LHYS INT Lower limit value

Q BOOL Output
The output Q is set to TRUE if IN HHYS and reset to FALSE if IN LHYS.

Otherwise the output Q remains unchanged.
25
5.2 Extensible equality (EQ)

IN1 ANY_BIT, ANY_NUM, ANY_DATE, TIME Input 1
INn ANY_BIT, ANY_NUM, ANY_DATE, TIME Input n

OUT BOOL Output
OUT := (IN1 = IN2) & (IN2 = IN3) & ... & (INn-1 = INn)
For example:
EQ(1,0) = FALSE
26
5.3 Extensible greater than or equal (GE)


OUT BOOL Output
OUT := (IN1 IN2) & (IN2 IN3) & ... & (INn-1 INn)
For example:
GE(10,9) = TRUE
GE(10,10) = TRUE
GE(9, 10) = FALSE
27
5.4 Extensible greater than (GT)


OUT BOOL Output
OUT := (IN1 > IN2) & (IN2 > IN3) & ... & (INn-1 > INn)
For example:
GT(10,9) = TRUE
GT(10,10) = FALSE
GT(9, 10) = FALSE
28
5.5 Extensible less than or equal (LE)


OUT BOOL Output
OUT := (IN1 IN2) & ( IN2 IN3) & ... & (INn-1 INn)
For example:
LE(10,9) = FALSE
LE(10,10) = TRUE
LE(9, 10) = TRUE
29
5.6 Extensible less than (LT)


OUT BOOL Output
OUT := (IN1 < IN2) & (IN2 < IN3) & ... & (INn-1 < INn)
For example:
LT(10,9) = FALSE
LT(10,10) = FALSE
LT(9, 10) = TRUE
30
5.7 Not equal (NE)


OUT BOOL Output
OUT := (IN1 <> IN2)
For example:
NE(10,9) = TRUE
NE(10,10) = FALSE
NE(9, 10) = TRUE
31
6. Counter
6.1 Down-counter (CTD)

CD BOOL Count down
LOAD BOOL Load preset value
PV INT Preset value

Q BOOL Supervision output
CV INT Counter value output
6.1.3.1 Counting
When the LOAD input is FALSE, each rising edge at the CD input decrements the
counter value CV by one.
6.1.3.2 Presetting
The LOAD input is used to load the new preset value of the counter from PV. The
counter is held as long as the LOAD input is TRUE.
32
6.1.3.3 Supervision
The status output Q specifies the relation of the counter value to zero.Q is set when
CV 0.
6.1.3.4 Limits
When the counter reaches its lowest or highest value for the data type INT, all
counting ceases.
33
6.2 Up-down counter (CTUD)
Note! The CTUD function complies with the corrected version of the IEC 61131-3
standard (see the correction below).
2.5.2.3.3 Table 36, No.3: DELETE the extraneous BOOL

output of the CTUD block and change its definition
(corrected 97-05-13)
to the following to provide proper operation when
both CU and CD inputs are TRUE:
IF R THEN CV := 0 ;
ELSIF LD THEN CV := PV ;
ELSE
IF NOT (CU AND CD) THEN
IF CU AND (CV < PVmax)
THEN CV := CV+1;
ELSIF CD AND (CV > PVmin)
THEN CV := CV-1;
END_IF;
END_IF;
END_IF ;
QU := (CV PV) ;
QD := (CV 0) ;
34

CU BOOL Count up
CD BOOL Count down
RESET BOOL Reset counter
LOAD BOOL Load preset value
PV INT Preset value

QU BOOL Supervision output 1
QD BOOL Supervision output 2
CV INT Counter value output
6.2.3.1 Up-count
Each rising edge at the CU input increments the counter value by one. If there is a
rising edge at both CU and CD, nothing is done.
6.2.3.2 Down-count
Each rising edge at the CD input decrements the counter value by one. If there is a
rising edge at both CU and CD, nothing is done.
6.2.3.3 Clearing
The RESET input clears the counter and prevents all further counting or loading.
When set, RESET overrides the other inputs of the counter and prevents them from
affecting the state of the counter.
6.2.3.4 Supervision
The status outputs specify the relation of the counter value to zero and to a loaded
preset value. QD is set when CV 0 and QU is set when CV PV.
35
6.2.3.5 Limits
counting ceases.
36
6.3 Up-counter (CTU)

CU BOOL Count-up input
RESET BOOL Reset counter
PV INT Preset value input

Q BOOL Supervision output
CV INT Counter value
6.3.3.1 Counting
When the RESET input is FALSE, each rising edge at the CU input increments the
counter value CV by one.
6.3.3.2 Clearing
The input RESET clears the counter (CV := 0) and prevents all further counting.
37
6.3.3.3 Supervision
The status output Q specifies the relation of the counter value to a supervision high
limit value. The Q is set, when CV PV.
6.3.3.4 Limits
counting ceases.
38
7. Edge Detection
7.1 Falling edge detector (F_TRIG)

CLK BOOL Input

Q BOOL Output
The Q output of the F_TRIG element stands at the TRUE value from one execution of
the element to the next, following the TRUE to FALSE transition of the CLK input,
and returns to FALSE at the next execution.
39
7.2 Rising edge detector (R_TRIG)

CLK BOOL Input

Q BOOL Output
The Q output of the R_TRIG element stands at the TRUE value from one execution of
the element to the next, following the FALSE to TRUE transition of the CLK input,
and returns to FALSE at the next execution.
40
8. Numeric
8.1 Absolute value (ABS)

IN ANY_NUM Input

OUT ANY_NUM Output
For example:
ABS(10) = 10
ABS(-10) = 10
ABS(-10.11) =10.11
41
8.2 Principal arc cosine (ACOS)

IN ANY_REAL Input

OUT ANY_REAL Output
The ACOS function returns the arc cosine of a floating-point argument IN. IN must be
in the range [-1, 1]. The return value is an angle in the range [0, ] radians.
42
8.3 Principal arc sine (ASIN)

IN ANY_REAL Input

OUT ANY_REAL Output
The ASIN function returns the arc sine of a floating-point argument IN. IN must be in
the range [-1, 1]. The return value is an angle in the range

[ , ]
2 2 radians.
43
8.4 Principal arc tangent (ATAN)

IN ANY_REAL Input

OUT ANY_REAL Output
The ATAN function returns the arc tangent of a floating-point argument IN. The
return value is an angle in the range

[ , ]
2 2 radians.
44
8.5 Cosine in radians (COS)

IN ANY_REAL Input

OUT ANY_REAL Output
The COS function returns the cosine of a floating-point number IN. IN is an angle
expressed in radians. An argument with large magnitude may produce a result with
little or no significance.
45
8.6 Natural exponential (EXP)

IN ANY_REAL Input

OUT ANY_REAL Output
OUT := eIN
46
8.7 Natural logarithm (LN)

IN ANY_REAL Input

OUT ANY_REAL Output
OUT := ln IN
47
8.8 Logarithm base 10 (LOG)

IN ANY_REAL Input

OUT ANY_REAL Output
OUT := log IN
48
8.9 Sine in radians (SIN)

IN ANY_REAL Input

OUT ANY_REAL Output
The SIN function returns the sine of a floating-point number IN. IN is an angle
49
8.10 Square root (SQRT)

IN ANY_REAL Input

OUT ANY_REAL Output
287:= ,1
An argument with large magnitude may produce a result with little or no significance.
Negative input values yield to a zero result.
50
8.11 Tangent in radians (TAN)

IN ANY_REAL Input

OUT ANY_REAL Output
The TAN function returns the tangent of a floating-point number IN. IN is an angle
51
9. Selection
9.1 Limiter (LIMIT)

MN ANY_BIT, ANY_NUM, ANY_DATE, TIME Input 1
IN ANY_BIT, ANY_NUM, ANY_DATE, TIME Input 2
MX ANY_BIT, ANY_NUM, ANY_DATE, TIME Input 3

OUT ANY Output
OUT := MIN(MAX(IN,MN),MX)
52
9.2 Extensible maximum (MAX)


OUT ANY_BIT, ANY_NUM, ANY_DATE, TIME Output
OUT := MAX(IN1, IN2, ..., INn)
53
9.3 Extensible minimum (MIN)


OUT ANY_BIT, ANY_NUM, ANY_DATE, TIME Output
Returns the minimun of input values, OUT := MIN(IN1, IN2, ..., INn)
This POU has extensible inputs.
54
9.4 Multiplexer (MUX)

K ANY_INT Multiplexer index
IN0 ANY Input 1
IN1 ANY Input 2
INn ANY Input N-1

OUT ANY Output
Select one of the N inputs depending on the input K. Note that index zero selects
the first input IN1. If index K is greater than N-1, funtion returns zero.
For example:
MUX(0, IN0, IN1, IN2) = IN0

MUX(3, IN0, IN1, IN2) = 0
55
9.5 Binary selection (SEL)

G BOOL Selection input
IN0 ANY Input 1
IN1 ANY Input 2

OUT ANY Output
OUT := IN0, if G=FALSE
OUT:= IN1, if G=TRUE
56
10. Timer
10.1 Time delay OFF (TOF)

IN BOOL Input
PT TIME Preset time

Q BOOL Output
ET TIME Elapsed time
IN
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5
Q
t0 t1+PT t2 t5+PT
(PT)
ET
t1 t3 t5 0
)LJXUH 2IIGHOD\WLPLQJ
57
10.2 Time delay ON (TON)

IN BOOL Input
PT TIME Preset time

Q BOOL Output
IN
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5
Q
t0+PT t1 t4+PT t5
(PT)
ET
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5
)LJXUH 2QGHOD\WLPLQJ
58
10.3 Pulse (TP)

IN BOOL Input
PT TIME Preset time

Q BOOL Output
IN
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7
Q
t0 t0+PT t2 t2+PT t6 t6+PT
(PT)
ET
t0 t1 t2 t6 t7 0
)LJXUH 3XOVHWLPLQJ
59
10.4 Pulse width for TOF, TON and TP
The time duration for TOF, TON and TP is configured in the Relay Configuration
Tool. The time duration can be defined in the range 0...49.7 days, in steps of one
millisecond. The desired time duration can be given in milliseconds (ms), seconds (s),
minutes (m) , hours (h) or days (d).
Examples of time duration literals:
These are all equivalent:
"TIME#1000ms"
"time#1s"
"T#1000ms"
"t#1s"
These are all equivalent:
"T#1d 2h 3m 4s 5ms"
"T#1d_2h_3m_4s_5ms"
The most significant unit is allowed to overflow:
"T#25h_15m"
is equivalent to
"T#1d_1h_15m"
For example, the pulse width of 50 ms is configured in the configuration tool as

shown below.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRISXOVHZLGWKFRQILJXUDWLRQ
60
11. Type Conversion
11.1 BOOL inputs to INT output (BOOL2INT)
11.1.1 Application
BOOL2INT is used to pack boolean information in an integer variable. Typically,

apparatus statuses are packed in the integer variable in order to connect it to LON by
means of the snvt_state.
61

B0 BOOL Input bit B0

Q UINT Integer value of the boolean inputs
BOOL2INT returns the integer output Q, the value of which is equal to the 16 input
bits.
62
11.2 BOOL to ** (BOOL_TO_**)

IN BOOL Input

OUT ** Output
(**) Possible output data types:
BYTE
DINT
DWORD
INT
REAL
SINT
UDINT
UINT
USINT
WORD
The BOOL type of data is converted e.g. to the BYTE type.
63
11.3 BYTE to ** (BYTE_TO_**)

IN BYTE Input

OUT ** Output
DWORD
WORD
The BYTE type of data is converted e.g. to the DWORD type.
64
11.4 DATE to UDINT (DATE_TO_UDINT)

IN DATE Input

OUT UDINT Output
The DATE type of data is converted to the UDINT type.
65
11.5 DINT to ** (DINT_TO_**)

IN DINT Input

OUT ** Output
INT
REAL
SINT
When the DINT type of data is converted e.g. to the INT type:
Data type DINT: -2 147 483 648 ... 2 147 483 647
Data type INT: -32 768 ... 32 767
For example:
DINT_TO_INT(10) = 10
DINT_TO_INT(-10) = -10
DINT_TO_INT(32768) = -32 768
DINT_TO_INT(-32769) = 32 767
When the DINT type of data is converted to the SINT type:
Data type DINT: -2 147 483 648 ... 2 147 483 647
Data type SINT: -128 ... 127
For example:
DINT_TO_SINT(10) = 10
DINT_TO_SINT(-10) = -10
DINT_TO_SINT(128) = -128
DINT_TO_SINT(-129) = 127
66
11.6 DWORD to ** (DWORD_TO_**)

IN DWORD Input

OUT ** Output
BYTE
WORD
The DWORD type of data is converted to the BYTE or WORD type.
For example:
DWORD_TO_BYTE(0xFFFFFFFF) = 0xFF
DWORD_TO_WORD(0xFFFFFFFF) = 0xFFFF
67
11.7 INT input to BOOL outputs (INT2BOOL)
11.7.1 Application
INT2BOOL is used to unpack an integer variable to 16 Boolean signals. Typically,

the apparatus statuses of one relay unit are transferred over the LON network in
snvt_state and unpacked in the receiver unit by the INT2BOOL function to be used
for interlocking, for example.

IN UINT Integer input
68

B0 BOOL Status of bit 0
The input value IN is separated to a bit format and the status of each of the 16 bits is
returned as an output.
For example: the output B0 is equal to the status of the first bit of input IN.
69
11.8 INT to ** (INT_TO_**)

IN INT Input

OUT ** Output
DINT
REAL
The INT type of data is converted e.g. to the DINT type.
70
11.9 REAL to ** (REAL_TO_**)

IN REAL Input

OUT ** Output
DINT
INT
SINT
UDINT
UINT
USINT
The REAL type of data is converted e.g. to the DINT type.
DINT values are -2147483648 ... 2147483647, for example:
REAL_TO_DINT(2147483647.1) = 2147483647
REAL_TO_DINT(-2147483648.1) = -2147483648
REAL_TO_DINT(10.4) = 10
REAL_TO_DINT(10.5) = 11
REAL_TO_DINT(-10.4) = -10
REAL_TO_DINT(-10.5) = -11
71
INT values are -32768 ... 32767, for example:
REAL_TO_INT(32767.1) = 32767
REAL_TO_INT(-32768.1) = -32768
REAL_TO_INT(10.4) = 10
REAL_TO_INT(10.5) = 11
REAL_TO_INT(-10.4) = -10
REAL_TO_INT(-10.5) = -11
SINT values are -128...127, for example:
REAL_TO_SINT(127.1) = 127
REAL_TO_SINT(-128.1) = -128
REAL_TO_SINT(-10.4) = -10
REAL_TO_SINT(-10.5) = -11
UDINT values are 0...4294967295, for example:
REAL_TO_UDINT(4294967295.1) = 4294967295
REAL_TO_UDINT(-0.1) = 0
REAL_TO_UDINT(10.4) = 10
REAL_TO_UDINT(10.5) = 11
UINT values are 0...65535, for example:
REAL_TO_UINT(65535.1) = 65535
REAL_TO_UINT(-0.1) = 0
REAL_TO_UINT(10.4) = 10
REAL_TO_UINT(10.5) = 11
USINT values are 0 ... 255, for example:
REAL_TO_USINT(255.1) = 255
REAL_TO_USINT(-0.1) = 0
72
11.10 SINT to ** (SINT_TO_**)

IN SINT Input

OUT ** Output
DINT
INT
REAL
The SINT type of data is converted e.g. to the DINT type.
73
11.11 TIME to ** (TIME_TO_**)

IN TIME Input

OUT ** Output
REAL
TOD
UDINT
The TIME type of data is converted e.g. to the REAL type.
74
11.12 TOD to ** (TOD_TO_**)

IN TOD Input

OUT ** Output
The TOD type of data is converted e.g. to the REAL type.
(**) Possible output data types are:
REAL
TIME
UDINT
The TOD type of data is converted e.g. to the TIME type.
75
11.13 UDINT to ** (UDINT_TO_**)

IN UDINT Input

OUT ** Output
REAL
UINT
USINT
The UDINT type of data is converted e.g. to the REAL type.
76
11.14 UINT to ** (UINT_TO_**)

IN UINT Input

OUT ** Output
BOOL
REAL
UDINT
USINT
The UINT type of data is converted e.g. to the BOOL type.
77
11.15 USINT to ** (USINT_TO_**)

IN USINT Input

OUT ** Output
REAL
UDINT
UINT
The USINT type of data is converted to the REAL type.
78
11.16 WORD to ** (WORD_TO_**)

IN WORD Input

OUT ** Output
BYTE
DWORD
The WORD type of data is converted e.g. to the BYTE type.
For example:
WORD_TO_BYTE(0xFFFF) = 0xFF
79
12. Truncation toward Zero
12.1 TRUNC_REAL_TO_**

IN REAL Input

OUT ** Output
The input data is truncated.
DINT
INT
SINT
UDINT
UINT
USINT
DINT values are in the range -2147483648...2147483647, for example:
TRUNC_REAL_TO_DINT(2147483647.1) = 2147483647
TRUNC_REAL_TO_DINT(-2147483648.1) = -2147483648
TRUNC_REAL_TO_DINT(-10.4) = -10
80
INT values are in the range -32768...32767, for example:
TRUNC_REAL_TO_INT(32767.1) = 32767
TRUNC_REAL_TO_INT(-32768.1) = -32768
TRUNC_REAL_TO_INT(-10.4) = -10
TRUNC_REAL_TO_INT(-10.5) = -10
SINT values are in the range -128...127, for example:
TRUNC_REAL_TO_SINT(127.1) = 127
TRUNC_REAL_TO_SINT(-128.1) = -128
UDINT values are in the range 0...4294967295, for example:
TRUNC_REAL_TO_UDINT(4294967295.1) = 4294967295
TRUNC_REAL_TO_UDINT(-0.1) = 0
UINT values are in the range 0...65535, for example:
TRUNC_REAL_TO_UINT(65535.1) = 65535
TRUNC_REAL_TO_UINT(-0.1) = 0
USINT values are in the range 0...255, for example:
TRUNC_REAL_TO_USINT(255.1) = 255
TRUNC_REAL_TO_USINT(-0.1) = 0
81
1MRS752372-MUM INDRESET
Issued: 10/1997
Version: D/7.2.2002
Operation Indication, Relay
and Register Reset
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 General ............................................................................................... 3

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 4
3.3 Events ................................................................................................. 5
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 6
INDRESET Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Resetting of operation indicators

Resetting of operation indicators and latched output signals
Resetting of operation indicators, latched output signals, registers and the
disturbance recorder
1.2 Application
This manual specifies the function of the reset function block INDRESET used in
products based on the RED 500 Platform.
Digital inputs can be used for resetting the operation indicators, latched output
signals, registers and waveforms i.e. the recordings of the disturbance recorder.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI,1'5(6(7

IND Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Resetting, F001V011
IND_REL Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Resetting, F001V012
IND_REL_REG Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Resetting, F001V013
2
Substation Automation INDRESET
2.1 General
The rising edges of IND, IND_REL and IND_REL_REG have the following effects:
Input Action Parameter

IND Resetting of operation indicators F001V011
IND_REL Resetting of operation indicators and latched F001V012
output signals
IND_REL_REG Resetting of operation indicators, latched output F001V013
signals, registers and the disturbance recorder
The reaction is prioritized so that the IND input has the lowest priority while the
IND_REL_REG input has the highest priority. Thus, if different inputs are activated
at the same time, the effect with the highest priority will be executed.
3
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for INDRESET is 29.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
4
Substation Automation INDRESET

direction
Event mask 1 V101 0...42 42 R/W Event mask 1 for event transmission (E0...E5)
3.3 Events
Channel Code Weighting Default Event reason Event state

coefficient mask
29 E0 1 0 - -
29 E1 2 1 Indications Reset
29 E2 4 0 - -
29 E3 8 1 Indications, latched Reset
29 E4 16 0 - -
29 E5 32 1 Indicat., latched, registered Reset
5
4. Technical Data

A -
6
1MRS100034 RE_5_ _
Issued: 10/1997
Version: E
Three-Phase Transformer Inrush and
Data subject to change without notice Motor Start-Up Current Detector
(Inrush3)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.2.1 Transformer inrush mode ........................................................... 4
2.2.2 Motor start-up mode................................................................... 5
2.4 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 7
2.5 Test mode ........................................................................................... 7
2.7 Resetting............................................................................................. 8
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 9

3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 9
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 9
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 10
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 10
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 11
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 11
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 11
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 13
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 14

RE_5_ _ Inrush3 ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Fast output signal for stabilizing the protection stages in a transformer inrush or at
motor start-up
Transformer inrush detection
Motor start-up detection
Single-phase (e.g. neutral current), two-phase or three-phase operation
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the three-phase transformer inrush and motor
start-up detection function block Inrush3 used in products based on the RED 500
Platform.
The function block Inrush3 can be used for doubling the set start current of
overcurrent protection in a transformer magnetizing inrush situation or at motor start-
up, or for blocking (stabilization) overcurrent protection in a transformer magnetizing
inrush situation.
3 I2f/I1f>
3 dI/dt>

,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI,QUXVK
2
ABB Automation Inrush3 RE_5_ _

GROUP Digital signal (BOOL, Control input for switching between the
active high) setting groups 1and 2. When GROUP is
FALSE, group 1 is active. When GROUP is
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. Input signal for resetting the registers of
edge) Inrush3

START Digital signal (BOOL, active Output signal for stabilization
high)
ERR Digital signal (BOOL, active Signal for indicating a configuration errot
high)
3
2.1 Configuration
Phase currents can be measured using conventional current transformers or Rogowski

coils. A special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool included in the Cap 505
Tool Box, is used for selecting and configuring the measuring devices and signal
types for analogue channels. Digital inputs are configured in the same programming
The blocking function in transformer inrush situations can also be based on measuring
the neutral current I0 or the residual current Ios (= I L1+I L2+I L3). Then the neutral
current I0 (or the residual current Ios) is connected to one of the inputs IL1, IL2 or IL3
of the function block.
2.2 Measuring mode
There are two operation modes available. The measuring mode depends on the
operation mode selected.
2.2.1 Transformer inrush mode
At transformer inrush mode, the operation is based on the ratio between the digitally
filtered second harmonic phase current and the fundamental frequency phase current:

the suppression of harmonics for the fundamental frequency calculation is about -
50 dB at f = k x fn, where k = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
the suppression of harmonics for the second harmonic calculation is about -50 dB
at f = k x fn, where k = 1 or 3, 4, 5,...
4
2.2.2 Motor start-up mode
At motor start-up mode, the operation is based on momentary values and consecutive
peak-to-peak values of phase currents. Harmonics are not suppressed.
The setting parameter Operation mode is used for selecting the operation mode.
There are two modes available: the transformer inrush mode and the motor start-up
mode.
)LJXUH 7KHIXQFWLRQEORFN,QUXVKFDQEHXVHGIRUEORFNLQJRYHUFXUUHQW
SURWHFWLRQDWWUDQVIRUPHUPDJQHWL]LQJLQUXVK
Transformer inrush detection is based on the traditional principle: the output signal
START is activated once the numerically derived ratio I2f/I1f between the amplitudes
of the second harmonic and the fundamental frequency current in one phase exceeds
the value set for the Ratio I2f/I1f> parameter.
The blocking function in inrush situations can also be based on the ratio between the
second harmonic and the fundamental component of the neutral current I0.
The signal START can be activated only if the amplitude of the fundamental
frequency current of the corresponding phase is above 2.0% In. A control parameter is
used for setting the minimum pulse width of the output signal START. However, the
signal START remains active until the ratio I2f/I1f drops below the value set for the
Ratio I2f/I1f> parameter in all phases, i.e. until the inrush situation is over, even if
the pulse counter has elapsed earlier.
5
I1f
I2f
2% In
I2f/I1f
Ratio
I2f/I1f
1
0 START signal
Inrush1
Min. pulse width
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQDOLW\RIWKHWUDQVIRUPHULQUXVKPRGH
SURWHFWLRQDWPRWRUVWDUWXS
The motor start-up is defined as a situation in which the initial three phase currents
stay below 5.0% In for about 60 ms, i.e. the motor is at standstill, and in which the
value of at least one phase current rises from 5.0 % In above the set start current
within the set rising time. If a phase current exceeds the set current level within the
set time, the START signal is immediately set to 1, i.e. the START output can be
activated before the set rising time has elapsed.
6
A control parameter is used for setting the minimum pulse width of the output signal
START. However, the START signal remains active until all the three phase currents
fall below 0.9 x Start current and remain below that level for about 150 ms, i.e. until
the start-up situation is over, even if the pulse counter has elapsed earlier.
Rising time
Set 'Rising time'
Start current
0.9 x Start current
5% In
1
0 START signal
Inrush2
Min. pulse width
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQDOLW\RIWKHPRWRUVWDUWXSPRGH
2.4 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.5 Test mode
7

A separate parameter on the MMI or via the serial communication is used for setting
the minimum pulse width of the output signal START.
2.7 Resetting

1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
8
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for Inrush3 is 34.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
3.2 Setting values

direction
Ratio I2f/I1f> S2 5 ... 50 % 15 R Blocking limit I2f/I1f
Start current S3 0.10 ...5.00 x In 0.10 R Motor start current

1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = Inrush mode; 2 = Start-up mode
9

direction
Ratio I2f/I1f> S42 5 ... 50 % 15 R/W Blocking limit I2f/I1f
Start current S43 0.10 ...5.00 x In 0.10 R/W Motor start current
1)

direction
Ratio I2f/I1f> S72 5 ... 50 % 15 R/W Blocking limit I2f/I1f
1)

direction
Rising time V1 20...60 ms 20 R/W Rising time for phase
currents
Group selection V2 0...2 1) - 0 R/W Selection of the active

setting group

signal START
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - 0 W Resetting of registers




1)
2)
3)
Test START 0 = Do not activate; 1 = Activate
10
3.3.1 Input data

direction

the groups 1 and 2

registers
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
The registers are triggered when an inrush or start-up situation is detected. The time
stamp indicates the moment of detection, i.e. the moment when the second harmonic
content of the current in one phase exceeds the value set for the Ratio I2f/I1f>
parameter or when a phase current exceeds the set start current when a motor start-up
situation is detected.
When the set Ratio I2f/I1f> is exceeded in one phase or when the value of at least
one of the phase currents rises from 5.0 % In above the set start current in less time
than the set Rising time, the function block starts calculating the average of each
phase current IL1, I L2 and I L3, and the minimum value of the ratio I2f/I1f in each phase.
The average currents and the minimum values of I2f/I1f will be updated when the
START signal resets. The values of the phase currents IL1, I L2 and I L3 are recorded as
multiples of the rated current In. The recorded I2f/I1f ratios are percentage values.
The duration of the transformer inrush situation is defined as the time during which
the set I2f/I1f value is exceeded. The duration of a motor start-up situation is defined
as the time from the moment when the first phase current exceeds 5.0% In until all
three currents fall below 0.9 x Start current and remain below that value for about 50
ms. The duration is updated when the START signal resets.
most recent operation always replace the data of the oldest operation.
11
Parameter Code Values Unit Default Data direction Explanation

Duration V203 0.0...60.0 s 0.0 R/M Duration of start situation
Average IL1 V204 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Average value of IL1
Min. I2f/I1f L1 V207 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Minimum I2f/I1f of IL1

1)


1)
12


1)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from Inrush3 stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from Inrush3 stage Activated
E2 4 0 Test mode of Inrush3 stage Off
E3 8 0 Test mode of Inrush3 stage On
13
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies At the frequency f/fn = 0.95...1.05:
current measurement:
2.5% of set value or 0.01 x In.
ratio I2f/I1f measurement:
5.0% of set value

1)

B -
14
1MRS752306-MUM Inrush3
Issued: 10/1997
Version: F/27.3.2002
Three-Phase Transformer Inrush and
Data subject to change without notice Motor Start-Up Current Detector
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.4 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 7
2.5 Test mode ........................................................................................... 7
2.6 START output ..................................................................................... 8
2.7 Resetting............................................................................................. 8
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 9
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 10
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 10
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 10
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 10
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 11
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 12
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 12
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 14
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 15

Inrush3 Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Fast output signal for stabilizing the protection stages in a transformer inrush or at
motor start-up
Transformer inrush detection
Motor start-up detection
Single-phase, two-phase or three-phase operation
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the three-phase transformer inrush and motor
start-up detection function block Inrush3 used in products based on the RED 500
Platform.
The function block Inrush3 can be used for doubling the set start current of
overcurrent protection in a transformer magnetizing inrush situation or at motor start-
up, or for blocking (stabilization) overcurrent protection in a transformer magnetizing
inrush situation.
3 I2f/I1f>
3 dI/dt>

,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI,QUXVK
2
Substation Automation Inrush3

active high) setting groups 1and 2. When GROUP is
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. Input signal for resetting the registers of
edge) Inrush3

START Digital signal (BOOL, active Output signal for stabilization
high)
ERR Digital signal (BOOL, active Signal for indicating a configuration error
high)
3
2.1 Configuration
Phase currents can be measured using conventional current transformers or Rogowski

coils. A special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool included in the Cap 505
Tool Box, is used for selecting and configuring the measuring devices and signal
types for analogue channels. Digital inputs are configured in the same programming
Note! When the function block Inrush3 is used, the 2nd harmonic restraint must be
selected for the channels connected to the IL_ inputs of the function block from the
special measurements dialogue box of the configuration tool, regardless of whether
the transformer inrush mode or the motor startup mode is used.
2.2 Measuring mode
There are two operation modes available. The measuring mode depends on the
operation mode selected.
In transformer inrush mode, the operation is based on the ratio between the digitally
filtered second harmonic phase current and the fundamental frequency phase current:

the suppression of harmonics for the fundamental frequency calculation is at least -
50 dB at f = k x fn, where k = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
the suppression of harmonics for the second harmonic calculation is at least -50 dB
at f = k x fn, where k = 1 or 3, 4, 5,...
4
In motor start-up mode, the operation is based on momentary values and consecutive
peak-to-peak values of phase currents. Harmonics are not suppressed.
The setting parameter Operation mode is used for selecting the operation mode.
There are two modes available: the transformer inrush mode and the motor start-up
mode.
SURWHFWLRQDWWUDQVIRUPHUPDJQHWL]LQJLQUXVK
Transformer inrush detection is based on the traditional principle: the output signal
START is activated once the numerically derived ratio I2f/I1f between the amplitudes
of the second harmonic and the fundamental frequency current in one phase exceeds
the value set for the Ratio I2f/I1f> parameter.
The signal START can be activated only if the amplitude of the fundamental
frequency current of the corresponding phase is above 3% In. A control parameter1 is
used for setting the minimum pulse width of the output signal START. However, the
signal START remains active until the ratio I2f/I1f drops below the value set for the
Ratio I2f/I1f> parameter in all phases, i.e. until the inrush situation is over, even if
the start pulse timer has elapsed earlier.
1
Start pulse
5
I1f
I2f
2% In
I2f/I1f
Ratio
I2f/I1f
1
0 START signal
Inrush1
Min. pulse width
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQDOLW\RIWKHWUDQVIRUPHULQUXVKPRGH
SURWHFWLRQDWPRWRUVWDUWXS
The motor start-up is defined as a situation in which the initial three phase currents
stay below 5.0% In for about 60 ms, i.e. the motor is at standstill, and in which the
value of at least one phase current rises from 5.0 % In above the set start current
within the set rising time. If a phase current exceeds the set current level within the
set time, the START signal is immediately set to TRUE, i.e. the START output can be
activated before the set rising time has elapsed.
6
A control parameter Start pulse is used for setting the minimum pulse width of the
output signal START. However, the START signal remains active until all the three
phase currents fall below 0.9 x Start current and remain below that level for about 150
ms, i.e. until the start-up situation is over, even if the START pulse timer has elapsed
earlier.
Rising time
Set 'Rising time'
Start current
0.9 x Start current
5% In
1
0 START signal
Inrush2
Min. pulse width
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQDOLW\RIWKHPRWRUVWDUWXSPRGH
2.4 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time. The settings that are active can be read from the Actual settings view.
2.5 Test mode
7

2.6 START output
A separate parameter on the MMI or via the serial communication is used for setting
the minimum pulse width of the output signal START.
2.7 Resetting

1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
8
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for Inrush3 is 34.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
9
3.2 Setting values

direction
Operation mode S1 0 ... 2 1) - 1 R/M Selection of operation mode
2)
Ratio I2f/I1f> S2 5 ... 50 % 15 R/M Blocking limit I2f/I1f
Start current S33) 0.10 ...5.00 x In 0.10 R/M Motor start current
1)
2)
Active only in transformer inrush mode
3)
Active only in motor start-up mode

direction
Ratio I2f/I1f> S422) 5 ... 50 % 15 R/W Blocking limit I2f/I1f

3)
1)
2)
3)

direction
Ratio I2f/I1f> S722) 5 ... 50 % 15 R/W Blocking limit I2f/I1f

3)
1)
2)
3)
10

direction
Rising time V14) 20...60 ms 20 R/W Rising time for phase
currents
Group selection V2 0...2 1) - 0 R/W Selection of the active

setting group

signal START




1)
2)
3)
4)
3.3.1 Input data

direction

the groups 1 and 2

registers
1)
11
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
The registers are triggered when an inrush or start-up situation is detected. The time
stamp indicates the moment of detection, i.e. the moment when the second harmonic
content of the current in one phase exceeds the value set for the Ratio I2f/I1f>
parameter or when a phase current exceeds the set start current when a motor start-up
situation is detected.
When the set Ratio I2f/I1f> is exceeded in one phase or when the value of at least
one of the phase currents rises from 5.0 % In above the set start current in less time
than the set Rising time, the function block starts calculating the average of each
phase current IL1, I L2 and I L3, and the minimum value of the ratio I2f/I1f in each phase.
The average currents and the minimum values of I2f/I1f will be updated when the
START signal resets. The values of the phase currents IL1, I L2 and I L3 are recorded as
multiples of the rated current In. The recorded I2f/I1f ratios are percentage values.
The duration of the transformer inrush situation is defined as the time during which
the set I2f/I1f value is exceeded. The duration of a motor start-up situation is defined
as the time from the moment when the first phase current exceeds 5.0% In until all
three currents fall below 0.9 x Start current and remain below that value for about 50
ms. The duration is updated when the START signal resets.
most recent operation always replace the data of the oldest operation.
12


1)


1)
13


1)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from Inrush3 stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from Inrush3 stage Activated
E2 4 0 Test mode of Inrush3 stage Off
E3 8 0 Test mode of Inrush3 stage On
14
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies At the frequency f/fn = 0.95...1.05:
current measurement:
2.5% of set value or 0.01 x In.
ratio I2f/I1f measurement:
5.0% of set value

1)

B -
C - default value of V31 = 0
D - data type of events E0 and E1 changed to single indication
15
1MRS752337-MUM MEAI _
General Measurement /
Issued: 03/1999
Version: B/30.1.2002 Analogue Input on
Data subject to change without notice RTD/Analogue Module
Contents
1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.3 Registers............................................................................................. 5
2.4 IV input................................................................................................ 5
2.5 Zero value supervision and zero value detection ................................. 6
2.6 Limit value supervision ........................................................................ 6
2.7 Threshold supervision with absolute threshold .................................... 7
2.8 Threshold supervision with integrator algorithm................................... 8
2.9 Scaling of SysAI input ......................................................................... 9
3 Parameters and Events .......................................................................... 10
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 10
3.2 Control settings ................................................................................. 11
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 12
3.3.2 Recorded data.......................................................................... 12
3.3.3 Events ...................................................................................... 12
4 Technical Data ........................................................................................ 13
MEAI_ Substation Automation
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
General measurement by means of sensor inputs or an input of the RTD/analogue
module
Measured signal can be DC (average measurement) or AC (true RMS
measurement) when sensor inputs are used
Measured value displayed as absolute value
User-defined scaling of input signals
Limit value monitoring with up to four adjustable limits
Separate user-settable starting and resetting delay for the warning and alarm signals
The outputs MeasOut, HighAlarm, HighWarning, LowAlarm and LowWarning
can be used in freely programmable logic in the Relay Configuration Tool
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the eight general measurement function
blocks MEAI1MEAI8 that are identical in operation.
The general measurement function blocks can be used in such products based on the
RED 500 Platform that are equipped with a sensor input module or an RTD/analogue
module. The function blocks can be applied to various applications, for instance to
measure temperature as well as level of the transformers oil and level of overflow
reservoir.
)LJXUH $VDQH[DPSOHWKHIXQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI0($,
2
Substation Automation MEAI_

SysAI Analogue signal (SINT) Generic measurement signal GE1...GE3
RawAI Analogue signal (REAL) Measures any REAL type variable
IV Invalid signal (BOOL, active high) Indicates that the input value of the RawAI
input is invalid
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Input signal for resetting the registers of the
function block

MeasOut Analogue signal (REAL) Measured value of general analogue input
HighWarning Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Indication of an exceeded high warning limit
HighAlarm Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Indication of an exceeded high alarm limit
LowWarning Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Indication of an exceeded low warning limit
LowAlarm Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Indication of an exceeded low alarm limit
ERR Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Indication of a configuration error
3
2.1 Configuration
If a sensor input is used as the signal source, the SysAI input is to be used. The
analogue channel number is selected for one of the generic inputs, GE1...GE3, via a
dialogue box in the Relay Configuration Tool. The corresponding global variable
GE1...GE3 is then connected to the SysAI input by using the Relay Configuration
Tool.
If the RTD/analogue module is used as the signal source, the global variable
corresponding to the input of the module is connected to the RawAI input by using the
Relay Configuration Tool. The global variable corresponding to the invalidity signal
of the RTD/analogue input is connected to the IV input.
As an example, to monitor a temperature using a PT100 sensor, an RTD/analogue

input is connected to the RawAI input of the function block. The output HighAlarm is
used to activate a relay contact when the temperature exceeds a preset limit. The
measured temperature is displayed on the MIMIC view of the MMI by the connected
MMIDATA1 function block. To avoid unnecessary activation of the relay contact in
case of a fault, the corresponding invalid signal of the RTD/analogue input is
connected to the IV input of the function block.
)LJXUH 7HPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJXVLQJDQLQSXWRIWKH57'DQDORJXHPRGXOH
If no RTD/analogue inputs are available, a sensor input can be used to monitor the
temperature if a temperature sensor with a voltage transducer output is used. One of
the general inputs, e.g. GE1, is configured for the sensor input to be used, and the
general input is connected to the SysAI input of the function block. The invalid input
IV is still functional, but as no validity information is available, the input is left
floating.
4
)LJXUH 7HPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJXVLQJDVHQVRULQSXW
2.2 Measuring mode
Using SysAI input:

The function block measures the true RMS value of the AC signal or the DC
component of the signal, depending on the selected measuring mode.
The values are updated once a fundamental frequency cycle, i.e. the integration time
for true RMS calculation is one fundamental cycle (e.g. 20 ms at 50 Hz).
The input is filtered with a 10 sample average filter, where a new sample is added to
the filter every execution task cycle.
Using RawAI input:

The value of the connected variable is used as such.
2.3 Registers
The following values are recorded:

maximum measured value with date and time stamps
minimum measured value with date and time stamps
The registers can be reset via the RESET input, or over the serial bus or the local
MMI.
2.4 IV input
The IV input is used to signal to the function block that the input value is not valid. On
the rising edge of the IV input the measured value is locked to the value reported at
the previous task cycle. This means that the MeasOut output will show the locked
value as long as the IV input is high, and that the state of the alarm and warning
outputs, as well as the threshold event generation, are based on the locked value. The
IV input can be left unconnected and the measured value is then considered always
valid.
5
2.5 Zero value supervision and zero value detection
An input value below the absolute threshold value, which can be set with the
parameter Zero force limit, is forced to zero. This allows noise in the measured
value to be ignored. The zero value supervision is deactivated when the threshold
value is zero.
2.6 Limit value supervision
Four different limits can be monitored: high alarm, high warning, low alarm and low
warning limits. The parameters LowAlarm, LowWarning, HighAlarm and
HighWarning are used to specify the limits to be supervised and monitored. Which
limits are in use can be specified with the parameter Limit selection. Each limit is
checked independently. If the value exceeds several limits within an execution task
cycle, each exceeding of limit is reported to the master device independently. The
hysteresis of the limits is programmable by setting an absolute threshold value. Limits
can be changed on-line. Separate starting and resetting times can be given to the
limits. The meaning of the start and reset delay parameters (e.g. HW start delay) is
that the output will not be activated until the condition has been TRUE for the time
specified in the start delay parameter, and the output will not be deactivated until the
condition has been FALSE for the time specified in the reset delay parameter.
Measured value
(2)
(3)
Hysteresis
High alarm limit
(1)
(4)
High warn. limit
Normal zone
Execution task cycle
(5)
(8)
Low warn. limit

(7)
(6)
Low alarm limit
(1) High warning

(2) High alarm
(3) High alarm OK
(4) High warning OK
(5) Low warning
Gelimit
(6) Low alarm

(7) Low alarm OK
(8) Low warning OK
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIOLPLWYDOXHPRQLWRULQJ
6
2.7 Threshold supervision with absolute threshold
Two different methods can be used for the threshold supervision and the method to be
used is selected with the parameter Threshold select.
The function block compares the actual input value with the last reported value. If the
actual value exceeds the last reported value plus the set Threshold value, or is below
the last reported value minus the set Threshold value, the actual value is
spontaneously reported to the master device and will replace the last reported value.
Measured value
Value update Value update
Reported value
+ Threshold value
- Threshold value Reported value
Thsabso5
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKUHVKROGVXSHUYLVLRQZLWKDEVROXWHWKUHVKROG
7
2.8 Threshold supervision with integrator algorithm
When threshold supervision with integrator algorithm is used, the function block
calculates the difference between the last reported value and the actual value for each
task cycle. The difference is added to the internal accumulated (integrated) value
register. If the accumulated delta exceeds the set Threshold value, the actual value is
spontaneously reported to the master device. The actual value then replaces the last
reported value, and the internal accumulated value register is set to zero.
Measured value
40
Reported value
30
20 Reported value
10 Deviation from last reported value
0
Threshold cycle
(execution cycle)
+ Threshold value
Reference level
- Threshold value
Thsinte5
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKUHVKROGVXSHUYLVLRQZLWKLQWHJUDWRUDOJRULWKP
8
2.9 Scaling of SysAI input
The generic inputs GEx are factory scaled in the following way:
Sensor input:
Input voltage 0 mV; reading 0.0
Input voltage 150 mV; reading 1.0
4 - 20 mA input:
Input current 4 mA; reading 4.0
Input current 20 mA; reading 20.0
The generic inputs cannot be used with conventional transformers.
Each generic input can be scaled to any range by means of two parameters:
GE_x correction factor (F003V5x1) (-10000.00000...10000.00000)
GE_x offset correction (F003V5x2) (-10000.00000...10000.00000)
Note that offset correction only is possible when measuring the DC component of the
signal, i.e. the GE_x offset correction parameter has no meaning when the measuring
mode is set to AC. Moreover, the GE_x correction factor parameter is limited to a
positive range when the measuring mode is set to AC.
The scaling and offset correction of a DC signal can be done for instance in the
following way:
The parameters are scaled with default values, GE_x Corr. factor = 1.0 and GE_x
Offset corr. = 0.0.
A signal is connected to the relay with such a value that the measured value
should be 0.0.
The value reported as measured value is written to the GE_x offset correction
parameter Offset corr..
The parameters are stored, after which the relay is reset.
A signal is connected to the relay with such a value that the measured value
should be 1.0.
The inverse (1/measured value) of the value reported as measured value is
written to the GE_x correction factor parameter Corr. factor.
The parameters are stored , after which the relay is reset.
9
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel numbers are listed in the following table.
Function MEAI1 MEAI2 MEAI3 MEAI4 MEAI5 MEAI6 MEAI8 MEAI8
block
Channel 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
visibility of events on the MMI or in serial communication (LON or SPA) as
follows:
32...63.
10

direction
Threshold V001 0...2 1) - 0 R/W Selection of threshold
select supervision algorithm
Threshold V002 0...10.0000 - 1.0 R/W Threshold value for
value threshold supervision
Limit V003 0...9 2) - 0 R/W Selection of
selection monitored limits
High V004 -10000.00000 - 0 R/W High warning limit
warning ...10000.00000 value
High alarm V005 -10000.00000 - 0 R/W High alarm limit value
...10000.00000
Low warning V006 -10000.00000 - 0 R/W Low warning limit
...10000.00000 value
Low alarm V007 -10000.00000 - 0 R/W Low alarm limit value
...10000.00000
HW start V008 1.0...300.0 s 1 R/W Starting delay of the
delay high warning signal
HW reset V009 1.0...300.0 s 1 R/W Resetting delay of the
delay high warning signal
HA start V010 1.0...300.0 s 1 R/W Starting delay of the
delay high alarm signal
HA reset V011 1.0...300.0 s 1 R/W Resetting delay of the
delay high alarm signal
LW start V012 1.0...300.0 s 1 R/W Starting delay of the
delay low warning signal
LW reset V013 1.0...300.0 s 1 R/W Resetting delay of the
delay low warning signal
LA start V014 1.0...300.0 s 1 R/W Starting delay of the
delay low alarm signal
LA reset V015 1.0...300.0 s 1 R/W Resetting delay of the
delay low alarm signal
Limit V016 0...10.0000 - 0 R/W Hysteresis for limit
hysteresis supervision
Measuring V017 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/W Measuring mode
mode
Zero force V018 0...10.0000 - 0 R/W Zero value
limit supervision threshold
Event V101 0...4095 - 0 R/W Event mask 1 for
mask 1 event transmission
(E0...E11)
(E0...E11)
(E0...E11)
(E0...E11)
1)
Threshold select 0 = Not in use; 1 = Absolute alg.; 2 = Integrat. alg.
2)
Limit selection 0 = Not in use; 1 = HW, HA, LW, LA; 2 = HW, HA; 3 = LW, LA; 4 = HW, LW;
5 = HA, LA; 6 = HW; 7 = HA; 8 = LW; 9 = LA
3)
Measuring mode 0 = DC; 1 = AC
11
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Input value I1 -10000.00000 - 0 R/M Measurement value
...10000.00000
Input invalid I2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Input validity signal
Input I3 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Signal for resetting
RESET registers of the
function block
1)
Input invalid 0 = Not active; 1 = Active
2)
Input RESET 0 = Not active; 1 = Active
3.3.2 Recorded data

direction
Max value V201 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Maximum value date
date
Max value V202 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Maximum value time
time
Maximum V203 -10000.00000 - 0 R/M Maximum value
value ...10000.00000
Min value V204 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Minimum value date
date
Min value V205 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Minimum value time
time
Minimum V206 -10000.00000 ... - 0 R/M Minimum value
value 10000.00000
3.3.3 Events
coefficient mask
E0 1 0 Value High warning reset
E1 2 0 Value High warning activated
E2 4 0 Value High alarm reset
E3 8 0 Value High alarm activated
E4 16 0 Value Low warning reset
E5 32 0 Value Low warning activated
E6 64 0 Value Low alarm reset
E7 128 0 Value Low alarm activated
E8 256 0 Value Value is valid
E9 512 0 Value Value is invalid
E10 1024 0 - -
E11 2048 0 Value Delta
12
4 Technical Data
Operation accuracy (SysAI input) The accuracy depends on the frequency of the measured
quantity
AC measurement, sensor input f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 1.0% of set value or 1.5mV
DC measurement, sensor input 3.0% of set value or 7mV
AC measurement, 4 - 20 mA input f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 3.0% of set value
DC measurement, 4 - 20 mA input 3.0% of set value


A -
13
1MRS752338-MUM MEAO _
Issued: 3/2000
Analogue Output on
RTD/Analogue Module
Contents
1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 3
2.2 General ............................................................................................... 3
2.3 Threshold supervision with integrator algorithm .................................. 4
3 Parameters................................................................................................ 5
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 5
3.3.1 Output data ................................................................................ 5
4 Technical Data .......................................................................................... 6

MEAO _ Substation Automation
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
User-defined scaling of the input data
Threshold detection with integrator algorithm for updating the value on the
RTD/analogue module
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the analogue output function blocks
MEAO1...MEAO4 that are identical in operation.
The analogue output function blocks can be used to generate a 4...20 mA or 0...20 mA
signal to an external device in such products based on the RED 500 Platform that are
equipped with an RTD/analogue module.
)LJXUH $VDQH[DPSOHWKHIXQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI0($2

IN REAL Input signal

OUT REAL Output signal
2
Substation Automation MEAO _
2.1 Configuration
The input signal IN can be connected to any REAL type variable using the Relay
Configuration Tool.
The output signal OUT must be connected to the corresponding output variable of the
RTD/analogue module on the global variable sheet of the configuration tool.
2.2 General
The preferred output range, 0...20 mA or 4...20 mA, is selected via the parameter
Output range. The input is scaled to the selected output range with the parameters
Input high limit and Input low limit so that when the input value equals Input
low limit, the output value is 0 or 4 mA depending on which range is selected, and
when the input value equals Input high limit, the output value is 20 mA. The value
of the parameter Input low limit is allowed to be greater than the value of the
parameter Input high limit, which will cause the output to be inverted.
The output is, however, not limited to the selected output range, i.e. if the input value
is outside the range defined by the limit parameters, the output value will also be
outside the specified output range.
The maximum and minimum value of the physical output is defined by a separate
Output range parameter, found in the menu of the MMI or the Relay Setting Tool
under Configuration\RTD1\Output N\. The default value of the parameter is 0...20
mA, but it can also be set to 4...20 mA. The range of the physical output is limited to
this range so that whenever the value connected to the physical output is outside the
defined range, the physical output will be set to 0 or 20 mA, depending on which is
closer to the connected value (see the table below). The corresponding invalid signal
will be set to TRUE to indicate the situation. Note that the physical output is also
forced to zero when the connected output is below 4 mA and the 4...20 mA range is
selected, which can be used to indicate a fault to the receiver.
The output behaviour when the value attribute is outside the defined limits:
Output range Value of AO# Output current Invalidity
attribute AO#IV
020 mA >20 20 mA TRUE
0..20 0..20 mA FALSE
<0 0 mA TRUE
420 mA >20 20 mA TRUE
4..20 4..20 mA FALSE
<4 0 mA TRUE
3
The function block calculates the difference between the last output value and the
scaled input value for each task cycle. The difference is added to the internal
accumulated (integrated) value register. If the accumulated delta exceeds the set
Threshold value, the output is set to the current scaled input value and the internal
accumulated value register is set to zero. Further output changes are then blocked for
a period of 400 ms.
Scaled input value (mA)

20
Output value
15
10 Output value
Threshold cycle
(execution cycle)
+ Threshold value
Reference level
- Threshold value
Thsinte6
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKHWKUHVKROGVXSHUYLVLRQZLWKLQWHJUDWRUDOJRULWKP
4
Substation Automation MEAO _
3 Parameters
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel numbers are listed in the following table.
Function MEAO1 MEAO2 MEAO3 MEAO4
block
Channel 456 457 458 459
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write

direction
Output V001 0 or 1 1) mA 0 R/W Output range
range
Threshold V002 0.01...1.00 - 1 R/W Threshold value for
value threshold
supervision
Input low V003 -10000.00000 - 0 R/W Input low limit
limit ...10000.00000
Input high V004 -10000.00000 - 1 R/W Input high limit
limit ...10000.00000
1)
Output 0 = 0...20; 1 = 4...20
3.3.1 Output data

direction
Output O001 0.00...20.00 mA 0 R/M Output value
value
5
4 Technical Data
Configuration data The task execution interval (Relay Configuration Tool):

A -
6
1MRS752339-MUM MECU1_
Issued: 10/1997
Version: E/30.1.2002
Neutral Current Measurement
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.3 Registers............................................................................................. 4
2.4 Actual neutral current measurement ................................................... 4
2.5 Maximum neutral current..................................................................... 4
2.6 Zero value supervision and zero value detection................................. 5
3. Parameters and events ............................................................................ 8
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 8
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................... 9
3.3.2 Recorded data.......................................................................... 10
3.3.3 Events ...................................................................................... 10
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 11

MECU1_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
True RMS measurement of neutral current

Actual neutral current values displayed in amperes and as p.u. values
Peak current supervision
Threshold supervision using the integration method or the absolute threshold
method
Limit value monitoring with up to two adjustable limits
Neutral current measurement by means of a conventional current transformer or a
Rogowski coil
Neutral current output to be used in the freely programmable logic of the Relay
Configuration Tool included in the CAP 505 Tool Box
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the neutral current measurement function
blocks MECU1A and MECU1B used in products based on the RED 500 Platform,
e.g. feeder terminals, in-feeder terminals, motor protection terminals and transformer
protection terminals. The function blocks are identical in operation.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI0(&8$DQG0(&8%
2
Substation Automation MECU1_

Io Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring neutral current I0
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Input signal for resetting the registers
of MECU1A or MECU1B

IoMEAS Analogue signal (REAL) Measured value of neutral current I0
HighWarning Digital signal (BOOL, active Indication of an exceeded high
high) warning limit
HighAlarm Digital signal (BOOL, active Indication of an exceeded high alarm
high) limit
ERR Digital signal (BOOL, active Indication of a configuration error
high)
3
2.1 Configuration
The analogue channel number for the I0 input is selected by means of the Relay
Configuration Tool.
Neutral current can be measured by means of conventional current transformers or

Rogowski coils. The function block automatically adapts its operation to the channel
and measuring device selected in the configuration tool.
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block measures the true RMS neutral current, i.e. harmonics are not
suppressed. Note that RMS measurement must be selected for the current inputs via
the Special Measurements dialogue of the configuration tool.
The current values are updated once a fundamental frequency cycle, i.e. the
integration time for the true RMS calculation is one fundamental cycle.
2.3 Registers
The maximum peak value of neutral current is recorded with date and time stamps.
MMI.
2.4 Actual neutral current measurement
Actual neutral current values are displayed in amperes and as p.u. values.
2.5 Maximum neutral current
The maximum peak value of neutral current is recorded after the last reset of registers.
The maximum peak value is calculated by means of slightly filtered values of neutral
current. The maximum current value is cleared by resetting the register.
4
A neutral current below 0.5% In is forced to 0% In. This allows the noise in the input
current to be ignored. The zero value supervision is fixed to 0.5% In and is always
active.
The zero value detection function is used to force a neutral current value update if the
neutral current deviates slightly from zero or is zero. Zero value detection operates so
that once a neutral current passes (upwards or downwards) the limit 0.5% In, the new
neutral current value is spontaneously reported to the master device (MicroSCADA)
provided the threshold supervision with the absolute threshold method or the
integration method is in use (see the control parameter Threshold select).
Two different methods can be used for threshold supervision and the method to be
If the absolute threshold supervision is used, the function block compares the actual
neutral current value with the last reported value. If the actual value exceeds the last
reported value plus the set Threshold value or is below the last reported value
minus the set Threshold value, the actual value is spontaneously reported to the
master device and will replace the last reported value.
Current % In
Current value update Current value update
40
30
Reported value
+ Threshold value
20
10
Minimum
threshold
0.2 % In 0
calculates the difference between the last reported neutral current value and the actual
value for each task cycle. The difference is added to the internal accumulated
(integrated) value register. If the accumulated delta exceeds the parameterized
Threshold value, the actual value is spontaneously reported to the master device.
5
The actual value replaces the last reported value. The internal threshold difference
register is set to zero.
Current % In
40
Reported value
30
20 Reported value

Minimum
threshold
0.2 % In
0
Threshold cycle
(execution cycle)
+ Threshold value
Reference level
- Threshold value
The threshold difference register is cleared if the accumulated current value exceeds
the set Threshold value.
6
For neutral current up to two different limits can be monitored. The parameter Limit
selection is used to specify the limits to be supervised and monitored. Each limit is
checked independently. If the current exceeds several limits within an execution task
cycle, each exceeding of limit is reported to the master device independently. The
hysteresis of each limit is fixed to 1% of the nominal value and taken into account as
shown below. Each exceeding of limit with a time stamp is stored with the FIFO
method. The warning and alarm limits can be changed on-line.
Current % In
(2)
(3)
Hysteresis
20
High alarm limit
(1)
(4)
18
High warn. limit
16
Normal zone (1) High warning

14 (2) High alarm
(3) High alarm OK
(4) High warning OK
12
10
0
Outputs
High warning
High alarm
Curlimi3
7
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for MECU1A is 201 and that for MECU1B
203.
Data Description
direction
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
8

direction
Threshold select V1 0...2 1) - 0 R/W Selection of threshold
supervision algorithm
Threshold value V2 0.1...25.0 % In 1.0 R/W Threshold value for

threshold supervision
Limit selection V3 0...3 2) - 0 R/W Selection of monitored limits
High warning V4 0.0...80.0 % In 0.0 R/W High warning limit value
High alarm V5 0.0...80.0 % In 0.0 R/W High alarm limit value




1)
2)
Limit selection 0 = Not in use; 1 = HW, HA; 2 = HW; 3 = HA
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Io (A) I1 0.0...20000.0 A 0.0 R/M Current I0 in amperes
Io (%) I2 0.0...80.0 % In 0.0 R/M Current I0 in per cent

demand values and registers
of MECU1A or MECU1B
1)
9
3.3.2 Recorded data

direction
Io peak date V201 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Date of I0 peak
Io peak time V202 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Time of I0 peak
Io peak amps V203 0.0...20000.0 A 0.0 R/M I0 peak in amperes
Io peak % V204 0.0...80.0 % In 0.0 R/M I0 peak in per cent
3.3.3 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 I0 High warning reset
E1 2 0 I0 High warning activated
E2 4 0 I0 High alarm reset
E3 8 0 I0 High alarm activated
E4 0 0 - -
E5 32 0 I0 Delta
10
4. Technical Data

Accuracy class of the operation Accuracy class of the operation is 1.0.


Technical Change
revision
B -
C Outputs HighWarning and HighAlarm added
Input data parameters changed:

Io (A) Io
Io (%) Io
Event reason and event state in the event table changed as follows (an example):
Event reason: I0 high warning I0
Event state: Reset High warning reset
11
1MRS752340-MUM MECU3_
Issued: 10/1997
Three-Phase Current Measurement
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.3 Registers............................................................................................. 4
2.4 Actual phase current measurement..................................................... 4
2.5 Maximum current demand................................................................... 5
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 9
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 11
3.3.2 Recorded data.......................................................................... 12
3.3.3 Events ...................................................................................... 13
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 14

1. Introduction
1.1 Features
True RMS measurement of phase currents

Actual phase current values displayed in amperes and as p.u. values
Maximum and minimum current demand supervision with adjustable time
intervals
Threshold supervision for currents using the integration method with zero value
detection or the absolute threshold method
Limit value monitoring for each phase current with up to four adjustable limits
Current measurement by means of conventional current transformers or Rogowski
coils
Current outputs to be used in the freely programmable logic of the Relay
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase current measurement

function blocks MECU3A and MECU3B used in products based on the RED 500
Platform, e.g. feeder terminals, in-feeder terminals, motor protection terminals and
transformer protection terminals. The function blocks are identical in operation.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI0(&8$DQG0(&8%
2

of MECU3A or MECU3B

IL1MEAS Analogue signal (REAL) Measured value of phase current IL1
HighWarning Digital signal (BOOL, active Indication of an exceeded high
high) warning limit
HighAlarm Digital signal (BOOL, active Indication of an exceeded high
high) alarm limit
LowWarning Digital signal (BOOL, active Indication of an exceeded low
high) warning limit
LowAlarm Digital signal (BOOL, active Indication of an exceeded low alarm
high) limit
high)
3
2.1 Configuration
The analogue channel numbers for the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs are
selected by means of the Relay Configuration Tool. Two current inputs can also be
left unconnected. However, if all three current inputs are unconnected, the output
signal ERR is set to TRUE.
Conventional current transformers or Rogowski coils can be used for measuring the
phase currents. The function block automatically adapts its operation to the channels
and measuring devices selected in the configuration tool.
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block measures the true RMS phase currents, i.e. harmonics are not
suppressed. Note that RMS measurement must be selected for the current inputs via
the Special Measurements dialogue of the configuration tool.
The current values are updated once a fundamental frequency cycle, i.e. the
integration time for the true RMS calculation is one fundamental cycle.
2.3 Registers
The maximum phase current demand for each phase with date and time stamps is
recorded.
MMI.
2.4 Actual phase current measurement
Actual phase current values are displayed in amperes and as p.u. values. The
parameter Phase selection is used for selecting the phase currents to be measured. If
a phase current has not been selected, the actual current value will be zero and the
supervision functions are not executed on that particular phase.
4
2.5 Maximum current demand
Maximum demand function is implemented by means of a function that calculates the

linear average of the phase current measured over a settable demand time interval
(parameter Demand interval). A new demand value is obtained once a minute,
indicating the phase current demand over the demand time interval preceding the
update time. The actual rolling demand values are stored in the memory until the
value is updated at the end of the following time interval.
If the new current demand value exceeds the maximum current demand value
recorded for that phase, the actual demand value will replace the maximum demand
value recorded. Maximum values are provided with date and time stamps.
Maximum values are cleared when the registers are reset.
A phase current below 1.0% In is forced to 0% In. This allows the noise in the input
current to be ignored. The zero value supervision is fixed to 1.0% In and is always
active.
The zero value detection function is used to force a phase current value update if the
phase current deviates slightly from zero or is zero. Zero value detection operates so
that once a phase current passes (upwards or downwards) the limit 1.0% In, the new
phase current value is spontaneously reported to the master device (MicroSCADA)
provided the threshold supervision with the absolute threshold method or the
integration method is in use (see the control parameter Threshold select).
5
phase current value with the last reported value. If the actual value exceeds the last
Current % In
40
30
Reported value
+ Threshold value
20
10
Minimum
threshold
0.2 % In 0
6
calculates the difference between the last reported phase current value and the actual
value for each task cycle. The difference is added to the internal accumulated
(integrated) value register. If the accumulated delta exceeds the parameterized
Current % In
40
Reported value
30
20 Reported value

Minimum
threshold
0.2 % In
0
Threshold cycle
(execution cycle)
+ Threshold value
Reference level
- Threshold value
The threshold difference register is cleared if:
the accumulated current value exceeds the set Threshold value or

the zero value detection supervision was triggered
7
For all three phase currents, up to four different limits can be monitored. The
parameter Limit selection is used to specify the limits to be supervised and
monitored. Each phase and limit is checked independently, which means that if a
phase current exceeds several limits during an execution task cycle, each exceeding of
limit will be reported to the master device independently. The hysteresis of each limit
is fixed to 1% of the nominal value and taken into account as shown below. Each
exceeding of limit with a time stamp is stored with the FIFO method. The outputs
HighWarning, HighAlarm, LowWarning and LowAlarm are activated as shown
below. The warning and alarm limits can be changed on-line.
Current % In
(2)
(3)
120 Hysteresis
High alarm limit
(1)
110 (4)
High warn. limit
100
(1) High warning

90 (2) High alarm
(3) High alarm OK
(4) High warning OK
80 (5) Low warning
(6) Low alarm
(7) Low alarm OK
Normal zone (8) Low warning OK
70
60
50
(5)
(8)
40
Low warn. limit
(7)
(6)
30
Low alarm limit
20
10
High warning
Outputs
High alarm
Low warning
Low alarm
Curlim02
8
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for MECU3A is 200 and that for MECU3B
202.
Data Description
direction
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
9

direction
Phase selection V1 0...6 1) - 0 R/W Selection of phase currents to be
measured
Demand interval V2 0...5 2) - 1 R/W Time interval for demand

supervision
Threshold select V3 0...2 3) - 0 R/W Selection of threshold supervision

algorithm
Threshold value V4 0.1...25.0 % In 1.0 R/W Threshold value for threshold

supervision
High warning V6 80.0...500.0 % In 100.0 R/W High warning limit value
High alarm V7 80.0...500.0 % In 120.0 R/W High alarm limit value
Low warning V8 0.0...80.0 % In 0.0 R/W Low warning limit value
Low alarm V9 0.0...80.0 % In 0.0 R/W Low alarm limit value




1)
Phase selection 0 = L1, L2, L3; 1 = L1, L2; 2 = L2, L3; 3 = L1, L3; 4 = L1; 5 = L2; 6 = L3
2)
Demand interval 0 = 1 min; 1 = 5 min; 2 = 10 min; 3 = 15 min; 4 = 30 min; 5 = 60 min
3)
4)
Limit selection 0 = Not in use; 1 = HW, HA, LW, LA; 2 = HW, HA; 3= LW, LA; 4 = HW, LW;
5 = HA, LA; 6 = HW; 7 = HA; 8 = LW; 9 = LA
10
3.3.1 Input data

direction
IL1 I1 0.0...20000.0 A 0.0 R/M Current IL1 in amperes
IL1 I4 0.0...1000.0 % In 0.0 R/M Current IL1 in percent
IL1 demand I7 0.0...20000.0 A 0.0 R/M IL1 demand in amperes
IL1 demand I10 0.0...1000.0 % In 0.0 R/M IL1 demand in percent
Input RESET I13 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for resetting the demand

values and registers of MECU3A or
MECU3B
1)
11
3.3.2 Recorded data

direction
IL1 maximum date V201 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Date of IL1 max demand
IL1 maximum time V202 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Time of IL1 max demand
IL1 maximum (A) V203 0.0...20000.0 A 0.0 R/M Maximum demand for IL1
in amperes
IL1 maximum (%) V204 0.0...1000.0 % In 0.0 R/M Maximum demand for IL1
in percent
in amperes
in percent
in amperes
in percent
12
3.3.3 Events

coefficient
E0 1 0 IL1 High warning reset
E1 2 0 IL1 High warning activated
E6 64 0 IL1 High alarm reset
E7 128 0 IL1 High alarm activated
E12 4096 0 IL1 Low warning reset
E13 8192 0 IL1 Low warning activated
E18 262144 0 IL1 Low alarm reset
E19 524288 0 IL1 Low alarm activated
E24 0 0 - -
E25 33554432 0 IL1 Delta
E26 0 0 - -
E27 134217728 0 IL2 Delta
E28 0 0 - -
E29 536870912 0 IL3 Delta
13
4. Technical Data

Accuracy class of the operation Accuracy class of the operation is 1.0.


Function Technical Change
block revision
MECU3A B -
C Outputs HighWarning, HighAlarm, LowWarning and LowAlarm

added
Input data parameters changed as shown in the examples below:

IL1 (A) IL1
IL2 (%) IL2
IL3 demand (A) IL3 demand
Event reason and event state in the event table changed as follows (an
example):
Event reason: IL1 high warning IL1
MECU3B A -
B See above: MECU3A C,

except for the new outputs
14
1MRS100225 RE_5_ _
Issued: 10/1998
Version: C
Transient Disturbance Recorder
(MEDREC16)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3
2.1 General ............................................................................................... 7
2.2 Configuration....................................................................................... 7
2.3 Setting the recorder identification ...................................................... 10
2.4 Selection of recorded analogue inputs .............................................. 10
2.5 Triggering alternatives....................................................................... 11
2.5.1 Triggering by digital inputs ....................................................... 11
2.5.2 Triggering by analogue inputs .................................................. 12
2.5.3 Manual triggering ..................................................................... 13
2.5.4 Periodic triggering .................................................................... 14
2.6 Length of recordings.......................................................................... 14
2.7 Sampling frequencies........................................................................ 15
2.8 Pre- and post-trigger data ................................................................. 15
2.9 Operation modes............................................................................... 15
2.9.1 Saturation mode....................................................................... 15
2.9.2 Overwrite mode........................................................................ 16
2.9.3 Extension mode ....................................................................... 16
2.10 Exclusion mode................................................................................. 17
2.11 Uploading .......................................................................................... 17
2.12 Resetting of recordings ..................................................................... 18

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 19
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 20
3.2.2 Trigger settings ........................................................................ 20
3.2.3 Trigger limits ............................................................................ 21
3.2.4 Event masks ............................................................................ 21
RE_5_ _ MEDREC16 ABB Automation
3.2.5 General info ..............................................................................21

3.2.6 BI texts .....................................................................................22
3.2.7 AI texts .....................................................................................22
3.3.1 Output data...............................................................................23
3.3.2 Events ......................................................................................23
4. Technical Data.........................................................................................24
2
ABB Automation MEDREC16 RE_5_ _
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Recording capability of up to 16 current or voltage waveforms and 16 logic digital

signals
The length of a recording is set by the user in a range determined by the amount of
memory available and the number of analogue inputs used
The number of recordings depends on the sampling frequency, length of
recordings and number of analogue inputs
The recording can be triggered by one or several of the alternatives listed below:
- triggering on the rising or falling edge of any (or several) of the digital inputs
- triggering on an adjustable level of overcurrent, overvoltage or undervoltage
- manual triggering via MMI
- triggering via serial communication or via a parameter
- periodic triggering
Adjustable pre-triggering time for pre-fault analysis
The recorder has three operation modes: saturation, overwrite and extension
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the transient disturbance recorder

MEDREC16 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
MEDREC16 is used for recording the current and voltage waveforms as well as the
status data of internal IEC 61131-3 -based logic signals and digital inputs connected
to the relay terminals. The maximum number of analogue inputs as well as that of
logic signals is 16.
3
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI0('5(&
4

IL1 SINT Analogue input
Io SINT Analogue input
Iob SINT Analogue input
Uo SINT Analogue input
U1 SINT Analogue input
U12b SINT Analogue input
IL1b SINT Analogue input
BI1 BOOL Digital input for logic signal
BI_USED WORD Bit mask of used digital inputs
EXT_TRG BOOL (pos. edge) External triggering
RESET BOOL (active high) Reset memory input
5

TRG BOOL (active high) Indication of a triggering taken
NUM_RECS UINT Count of recordings in the recording
memory
ERR BOOL (active high) Indication of a configuration error
6
2.1 General
The transient disturbance recorder MEDREC16 can record 16 signal types of the
analogue channels of the relay and the status values of digital input signals connected
to the inputs BI1...BI16. The analogue inputs are recorded as instantaneous values and
converted to primary peak value units1. The recordings can be uploaded with a
DR_Collector tool, which converts the data to a COMTRADE format (refer to section
Uploading).
1RWHThe signals of derivative sensors such as the Rogowski coil are sampled as
derivative signals as sampled originally by the relay.
The digital inputs are sampled once per task execution of the recorder. In the upload
program the latest digital values are repeated so that the analogue and digital samples
correspond to each other. The external digital signals are first sampled by the digital
I/O cards and the synchronisation with the analogue inputs depends on the filter time
of the digital inputs. If the filter time is approximately as long as the task interval, the
analogue values and external digital values will correspond to each other.
2.2 Configuration
The transient disturbance recorder is configured with the Relay Configuration Tool.
At the rated frequency of 50 Hz, the recorder can only be configured to the task
interval of 10 ms (at 60 Hz 8.33 ms), otherwise an error event E5 is sent.
Each of the 16 analogue inputs of the recorder has its own signal type that can be
connected to it. For example, only the signal IL1 can be connected to the IL1 input of
the recorder. If certain signal types are not present, the corresponding inputs are left
unconnected and these inputs are not recorded. Also a connected input can be left out
of the recording via the parameter AI chs used (see Selection of recorded analogue
inputs). The names of the analogue intputs are fixed, but they can be viewed via the
AI texts menu.
Any external or internal digital signals (type BOOL), such as the start and trip signals
from protection function blocks or the external digital inputs of the relay, can be
connected to the digital inputs. The digital outputs of the function blocks in the same
program can be connected directly to the inputs of the recorder, whereas the digital
outputs of the function blocks from other tasks are connected to the recorder by global
variables. It should be noted, however, that in some cases the use of global variables
will cause a delay to the signal. The delay will not be more than the task execution
1
In products with the revisions D and E of MEDREC16, signals from derivative sensors such
as Rogowski coil are recorded as derivative signals
7
interval of the slower one of the two tasks. Moreover, if a digital signal from a 5 ms
task is connected to the recorder, it should be ensured that the signal will stay active
for at least 10 ms. For example the protection function blocks provide pulse width
settings that can be used to set the minimum pulse widths of the start and trip outputs.
The standard logic functions (AND, OR, etc. ports) can be used to form any kind of
boolean functions from the digital signals. If a digital input is only used to trigger the
recorder, several digital inputs can be combined to one digital input, provided the
digital inputs are first connected via the R_TRIG function block and then combined
by the OR function (see Figure 2 below). This kind of connection preserves the rising
edges of the signals, so that the digital input configured to rising edge active can be
used to trigger the recorder.
)LJXUH &RPELQLQJVHYHUDOWULJJHULQJVRXUFHVWRRQHGLJLWDOLQSXW
The status values of all digital inputs are recorded, including those of the inputs not
connected. The information which inputs are actually connected is forwarded to the
upload program by writing a constant to the BI_USED input, the bits of which
indicate the digital inputs used. This value is seen directly in the parameter BI chs
used. The BI_USED input is 65535 by default, which indicates that all the digital
inputs are connected. The names of the digital inputs can be set in the BI texts menu
of the Relay Setting Tool.
1RWH Complicated calculations can be avoided by writing the constant to the

BI_USED input in digital format. For example, if the inputs BI1, BI2 and BI4 are
connected, the constant is WORD#2#1011 (see Figure 3 below).
8
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIWKHXVDJHRIWKH%,B86('LQSXW
EXT_TRG is a rising edge active external trigger input. The only difference between
a digital input which is set to rising edge active and EXT_TRG is that the EXT_TRG
input is not recorded. The push-button F on the front panel of the relay controls the
parameter F001V021, which is activated for a short time when the button is pressed
and can thus be used to trigger the recorder, provided the parameter is connected to
the EXT_TRG input.
The outputs of the recorder can be used to control the alarm indication LEDs of the
relay. For example, if the NUM_RECS output of the recorder is connected to the EQ
function, which is a standard function block that compares whether the inputs are
equal, and zero to another input of the EQ function, and the inverted output of EQ is
connected to a non-latched alarm indication LED control, the LED indicates whether
there are any recordings left in the recorder (see Figure 4 below).
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIFRQILJXULQJWKHRXWSXWVRIWKHUHFRUGHUWRFRQWUROWKH
LQGLFDWLRQ/('VLQGLFDWLRQRIWKHH[LVWHQFHRIDUHFRUGLQJ
The function block sends a configuration error event E5 if the connected analogue
input is not correct or if the task interval is other than 10 ms. The operation of the
recorder is halted and the ERR ouput is activated in those cases.
9
2.3 Setting the recorder identification
The identification number and the textual name of the recorder can be set via the
parameters Identification and Main header (for example the station name) in the
General input menu. The main header can be 15 characters long. The header and the
identification number are included in the recording file produced by the upload
program (refer to section Uploading).
2.4 Selection of recorded analogue inputs
Each analogue input has its own signal type that can be connected to it. The recorded
inputs are selected by the bits of the parameter Al chs used (see table below). If the
input is not connected but the corresponding bit is set in the parameter, the bit is reset
immediately. By default, all the connected signals are recorded and the bits of the
parameter Al chs used indicate which inputs are connected. If the parameter is
changed, all the recordings in the memory are reset.
Selected input Weight factors for the

parameter "AI chs used"
IL1 1
IL2 2
IL3 4
Io 8
Iob 16
Uo 32
U1 64
U2 128
U3 256
U12 512
U23 1024
U31 2048
U12b 4096
IL1b 8192
IL2b 16384
IL3b 32768
10
2.5 Triggering alternatives
The recording can be triggered by any (or several) of the alternatives listed below:
triggering on the rising or falling edge of any (or several) of the digital inputs
BI1...BI16
triggering on overcurrent, overvoltage or undervoltage
manual triggering via the menu or with the push-button F on the front panel (if
configured)
triggering via serial communication or via a parameter
periodic triggering
Regardless of the triggering type, each recording generates the event E31 and the
triggering time and reason are included in the recording.
2.5.1 Triggering by digital inputs
The digital signals can be formed from the start, trip and block signals of the function
blocks with the relay configuration tool. A change in the status of a monitored signal
triggers the recorder according to the configuration and settings. Triggering on the
rising edge of a digital input signal means that the recording sequence starts when the
input signal is activated. Correspondingly, triggering on the falling edge means that
the recording sequence starts when the active input signal resets.
A digital input is used as a triggering source if the corresponding bit is set in the
parameter BI enable. An input is taken into use by adding the corresponding weight
factor to the parameter value. The bits of the parameter BI mode control the edge
activity of the triggering. If the bit is set, the input is rising edge active and if the bit is
zero, the input is falling edge active. The weight factors of the inputs for the
parameters BI enable and BI mode are given in the following table.
11
Digital inputs Weight factors for

BI enabled & BI mode
BI1 1
BI2 2
BI3 4
BI4 8
BI5 16
BI6 32
BI7 64
BI8 128
BI9 256
BI10 512
BI11 1024
BI12 2048
BI13 4096
BI14 8192
BI15 16384
BI16 32768
2.5.2 Triggering by analogue inputs
The trigger level can be set for triggering in an overcurrent, overvoltage or

undervoltage situation. The inputs for overcurrent or overvoltage triggering are
selected by the bits of the parameter Over lim. Enab and the inputs for undervoltage
triggering by the bits of the parameter Under lim. Enab (see table below). The limit
values are set via the corresponding parameters. Both the overvoltage and the
undervoltage triggering can be active simultaneously for the same input. Should the
duration of the overcurrent or overvoltage condition exceed the set filter time, the
recorder triggers. In case of undervoltage, the situation is considered to be a circuit-
breaker operation, and thus the recorder will not trigger even if the measured voltage
falls below 5 % of the rated voltage of the relay during the filter time. The set filter
time is common to all the analogue inputs. The value used for triggering is the
calculated peak-to-peak value divided by two.
Note: Even though the signals of derivative sensors are recorded as derivatives, the
triggering limits are set as for actual signals.
12
Inputs for which triggering Weight factors for the Setting parameter for
on overcurrent or parameter "Over lim. overcurrent or
overvoltage is active enab." overvoltage limit
IL1 1 Over limit ILx
Io 8 Over limit Io
Iob 16 Over limit Iob
Uo 32 Over limit Uo
U1 64 Over limit Ux
U2 128 Over limit Ux
U12 512 Over limit Uxy
U12b 4096 Over limit U12b
IL1b 8192 Over limit ILxb
1)
on undervoltage is active parameter "Under lim. undervoltage limit
enab."
U1 64 Under limit Ux
U12 512 Under limit Uxy
1)
Other weight factors are ignored
2.5.3 Manual triggering
The recorder can be triggered manually via the MMI or via serial communication by
setting the parameter Remote trigger to Trigger. The recorder may also be
triggered manually by pressing the push-button F on the front panel, provided the
parameter F001V021 has been connected to the EXT_TRG input of MEDREC16 with
the relay configuration tool (refer to section Configuration).
13
2.5.4 Periodic triggering
Periodic triggering means that the recorder automatically makes a recording at certain
time intervals. The interval can be adjusted with the parameter Periodic time. If the
value of the parameter is changed, the new setting takes effect when the next periodic
triggering occurs. Setting the parameter to zero disables the triggering alternative and
the setting becomes valid immediately. If a new non-zero setting is wanted to be valid
immediately, the parameter Periodic time should first be set to zero and then to the
new value. The time remaining to the next triggering can be monitored via the
parameter Time to trigger that counts downwards.
2.6 Length of recordings
The length of a recording is defined with the parameter Record length. According to
the memory available and the number of inputs used, the function block determines
the possible number of recordings and reduces the defined length of a recording if
needed. The number of recordings is written to the parameter Max # records and the
validated length is updated to the parameter Record length. The fixed memory size
allocated for the recorder is 50 000 samples.
The number of recordings can be approximated as follows:
Nr = M / (L * Ns * Nc).
where
Nr Number of recordings
L Length of one recording in cycles (setting parameter)
Ns Number of samples in a cycle (= 40)
Nc Number of recorded analogue inputs (defined by the parameter AI chs
used)
M Amount of memory allocated for the recorder (= 50 000 samples)
For example the following combinations of length - number of recordings - number of
inputs are available (the given times are valid provided the rated frequency is 50 Hz):
# recordings \ # inputs 1 3 10
1 1066 cyc. 399 cyc. 125 cyc.
21.3 s 7.9 s 2.5 s
5 212 cyc. 79 cyc. 25 cyc.
4.2 s 1.5 s 0.5 s
10 106 cyc. 39 cyc. 12 cyc.
2.1 s 0.7 s 0.24 s
14
2.7 Sampling frequencies
The sampling frequency fs of the analogue inputs depends on the set rated frequency
fn so that one fundamental cycle always contains 40 samples. This means that the
sampling frequency is 2 kHz at the rated frequency of 50 Hz and 2.4 kHz at the rated
frequency of 60 Hz. Since the internal digital values are sampled once per task
execution and the task interval is fixed to 10 ms, the sampling frequency of digital
signals is 100 Hz.
The rated frequency fn of the relay or the feeder terminal is set via a dialogue box in
the relay configuration tool. Both the rated frequency and the sampling frequency can
be monitored via the General info menu.
2.8 Pre- and post-trigger data
The waveforms of analogue inputs are constantly recorded into the history memory of
the recorder. The duration of the data preceding the triggering, i.e. the so-called pre-
trigger time, is adjustable in percent via the parameter Pre-trg time. The duration of
the data following the triggering, i.e. the so-called post-trigger time, is the difference
between the recording length and the pre-trigger time. Changing the pre-trigger time
resets the history data and the current recording under collection.
2.9 Operation modes
2.9.1 Saturation mode
In saturation mode, the captured waveform(s) cannot be overwritten by new

recordings and the waveform capturing is stopped when the recording memory
becomes full i.e. when the maximum number of recordings is reached (see Figure 5
below). In this case the event E1 is sent and when there is memory available again,
the event E0 is generated.
)LJXUH 5HFRUGLQJPHPRU\XVDJHLQVDWXUDWLRQPRGH
15
2.9.2 Overwrite mode
When the operation mode is Overwrite and the recording memory is full, the oldest
recording will be overwritten by the pre-trigger data collected for the next recording
(see Figure 6 below). Thus the recorder can store one recording less in overwrite
mode than the Max # records parameter indicates. Each time a recording is
overwritten, the event E3 is generated. The overwrite mode is recommended if it is
more important to have the latest (newest) recordings in the memory. On the other
hand, the saturation mode is preferred when the oldest recordings are more important.
)LJXUH 5HFRUGLQJPHPRU\XVDJHLQRYHUZULWHPRGH
2.9.3 Extension mode
In the extension mode a new triggering during an on-going recording interrupts the
current recording and starts a new one. Accordingly, the former recording only
contains the pre-trigger samples of the first triggering and the post-trigger samples up
to the new triggering, whereas the new recording, which is called an extension to the
first one, includes the post-trigger samples after the new triggering. Consequently,
both the recordings will be shorter than the defined length, but all the samples
between the pre-trigger time before the first triggering and the post-trigger time after
the second triggering are covered by the two recordings. An extension recording is
made only provided there is room for a new recording. If the memory becomes full,
the last recording is always a full recording, i.e. it will not be interrupted by a new
triggering during the post-trigger data collection.
In other cases, i.e. when new triggerings do not occur during an on-going recording,
the operation in extension mode is similar to that in saturation mode (see Figure 7
below).
Unlike in extension mode, new triggerings are not allowed in the saturation or
overwrite mode before the previous recording is completed. However, if a new
triggering follows the previous recording before all the pre-trigger samples are
collected for the new recording, the triggering is accepted and the recording will be as
much shorter as there were pre-trigger samples lacking.
16
The extension recordings are combined to the previous recordings by the upload
program.
)LJXUH 5HFRUGLQJPHPRU\XVDJHLQH[WHQVLRQPRGH
2.10 Exclusion mode
In the exclusion mode, which is on when the value of the control parameter
Exclusion time is >0, new triggerings are ignored if the triggering reason is the
same as in the previous recording. The parameter Exclusion time controls how long
the exclusion of the same type of triggerings is active after a triggering. The exclusion
mode only applies to the analogue and digital channel triggerings, not to periodic and
manual triggerings.
When the control parameter Exclusion time is zero, the exclusion mode is off and
there are no restrictions on the triggering types of successive recordings.
The remaining exclusion time can be monitored via the output parameter Exclusion
time in the Output data menu.
2.11 Uploading
The data of the disturbance recorder are uploaded with the DR-Collector Tool. The
program only sees the oldest data in the recorder and the data can be either uploaded
or deleted depending on the information included in the recording (see Figure 8
below). Accordingly, the older recording must be uploaded or deleted before the
newest recording can be read. The uploaded recording is valid even if the recorder is
reset during the upload process.
The upload program converts the recording to a COMTRADE-file (IEEE Standard

Common Format for Transient Data Exchange for Power Systems) that includes the
used analogue and digital signals, channel names, recorder name and identification,
sampling frequency and trigger information. The analogue signals are scaled to
primary units. COMTRADE-files can be viewed by commercial evaluation programs
able to process the COMTRADE-file format.
17
)LJXUH 5HFRUGLQJPHPRU\XVDJHGXULQJWKHXSORDGSURFHVV
2.12 Resetting of recordings
The recorder can be reset by any (or several) of the methods listed below:
by the RESET input of the function block

by setting the parameter F225M002
by setting the general parameter F001V013
by changing the recorded input setting via the parameter AI chs used
by changing the length of recordings
by pushing the push-buttons C + E simultaneously for over 5 s
by switching off the auxiliary voltage of the relay
Resetting clears all the recordings from the memory, including a pre-trigger recording
in progress. A recording that is being uploaded is not affected by the resetting except
when the auxiliary voltage is switched off; this stops the upload process and resets the
recording.
18
3.1 General
Each function block has a specific channel number. The channel for MEDREC16
is 225.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
The different event mask parameters (see section Event masks) affect the
follows:
32...63.
19
3.2 Setting values

Remote trigger M1 0 or 1 2) - 0 W Remote triggering
Reset memory M2 0 or 1 3) - 0 W Resetting of recording memory
Record length M11 10...65535 cyc. 50 R/W Size of the recording memory in
cycles
Max # records M3 0...65535 - 0 R Maximum number of recordings
# records M16 0...65535 - 0 R Number of recordings in memory
Pre-trg time V5 0...100 % 50 R/W Length of recording preceding

the triggering
Operation mode V3 0...2 1) - 0 R/W Operation mode of the recorder
Exclusion time V2 0...86 400 s 0 R/W Time how long triggerings for the
same reason are ignored
1)
Operation mode 0 = Saturation; 1 = Owerwrite; 2 = Extension
2)
Remote trigger 0 = No trigger; 1 = Trigger
3)
Reset memory 0 = No reset; 1 = Reset
3.2.2 Trigger settings

Over lim. enab. V8 0...65535 - 0 R/W Bit mask for analogue input
over limit triggering
Under lim. enab V9 0...65535 - 0 R/W Bit mask for analogue input
under limit triggering
AI filter time V20 0.000...60.000 s 0.050 R/W Filtering time for analogue
input limit triggerings
BI enable V6 0...65535 - 0 R/W Bit mask for digital input

triggering enable
BI mode V7 0...65535 - 0 R/W Bit mask for digital input

triggering mode
Periodic time V1 0...604 800 s 0 R/W Time between periodic

triggerings
20
3.2.3 Trigger limits

Over limit ILx V10 0.00...40.00 x In 10.00 R/W Over limit for IL1, IL2 and IL3
Over limit Io V11 0.00...40.00 x In 10.00 R/W Over limit for Io
Over limit Iob V12 0.00...40.00 x In 10.00 R/W Over limit for Iob
Over limit Uo V13 0.00...2.00 x Un 2.00 R/W Over limit for Uo
Over limit Ux V14 0.00...2.00 x Un 2.00 R/W Over limit for U1, U2 and U3
Over limit Uxy V15 0.00...2.00 x Un 2.00 R/W Over limit for U12, U23 and
U31
Over limit U12b V16 0.00...2.00 x Un 2.00 R/W Over limit for U12b
Over limit ILxb V17 0.00...40.00 x In 10.00 R/W Over limit for IL1b, IL2b and
IL3b
Under limit Ux V18 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/W Under limit for U1, U2 and U3
Under limit Uxy V19 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/W Under limit for U12, U23 and
U31
3.2.4 Event masks

Event mask 1 V101 0...4294967295 - 2147483691 R/W Event mask 1 for
event transmission

event transmission

event transmission

event transmission
3.2.5 General info

direction
AI chs used M13 0...65535 - 65535 R/W Bit mask of recorded
analogue inputs
BI chs used M14 0...65535 - 65535 R Bit mask of recorded digital

inputs
Sampling rate M15 400...2400 Hz 2000 R Sampling frequency (Hz)
Line frequency M19 10...60 Hz 50 R Nominal system frequency
Identification M18 0...10000 - 0 R/W Station identification or unit

number
Main header M20 a 15-character - Default header R/W Main header for recordings
string
21
3.2.6 BI texts

Text of BI1 M40 a 15-character string - BI1 R/W Text of digital input BI1
3.2.7 AI texts

Text of AI1 M60 IL1 - IL1 R Text of analogue input 1 (IL1)
Text of AI4 M63 Io - Io R Text of analogue input 4 (Io)
Text of AI5 M64 Iob - Iob R Text of analogue input 5 (Iob)
Text of AI6 M65 Uo - Uo R Text of analogue input 6 (Uo)
Text of AI7 M66 U1 - U1 R Text of analogue input 7 (U1)
Text of AI13 M72 U12b - U12b R Text of analogue input 13 (U12b)
Text of AI14 M73 IL1b - IL1b R Text of analogue input 14 (IL1b)
22
3.3.1 Output data

Time to trigger O1 0...604 800 s 0 R/M Time remaining to the next
periodic triggering
Exclusion time O2 0...86 400 s 0 R/M Remaining exclusion time
3.3.2 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Recorder memory is full Off
E1 2 1 Recorder memory is full On
E3 8 1 Overwrite of recording On
E5 32 1 Configuration error On
E31 2147483648 1 Recorder triggered On
23
4. Technical Data

Exception handling Exception Handled
wrong signal type is event E5 at channel 225 is sent

connected to input
task time is other than event E5 at channel 225 is sent

allowed
Operation accuracies Analogue channel triggering level: 2.5% of set value or 0.01 x In
Analogue channel triggering time: 10 ms
Digital signal 1) synchronisation to:
analogue signals 10 ms
digital signals from other tasks + task time (min 10 ms) 2)
digital signals from external inputs 20 ms 3)
Configuration data Task execution interval: 10 ms

at the rated frequency f/fn = 50 Hz
1)
from the same 10 ms task in which MEDREC16 is executed
2)
the signal is delayed
3)
with 5 ms filter time in the external digital input

Technical Change
revision
D -
E The Identification and Main header parameters in the menu General info and the
digital input names in the menu BI texts can be set via both the MMI and the Relay
Setting Tool, whereas in earlier revisions they could only be set via the Relay Setting Tool.
The conversion factor values, which were provided as background information in earlier
revisions, are no longer visible for the user.
F Signals from derivative sensors such as Rogowski coil are recorded as original signals
(not as derivatives as in earlier revisions of MEDREC16)
24
1MRS752341-MUM MEDREC16
Issued: 10/1998
Transient Disturbance Recorder
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3
2.1 General ............................................................................................... 7
2.2 Configuration....................................................................................... 7
2.3 Setting the recorder identification ...................................................... 10
2.4 Selection of recorded analogue inputs .............................................. 10
2.5 Triggering alternatives....................................................................... 11
2.5.1 Triggering by digital inputs ....................................................... 11
2.5.2 Triggering by analogue inputs .................................................. 12
2.5.3 Manual triggering ..................................................................... 13
2.5.4 Periodic triggering .................................................................... 14
2.6 Length of recordings.......................................................................... 14
2.7 Sampling frequencies........................................................................ 15
2.8 Pre- and post-trigger data ................................................................. 15
2.9 Operation modes............................................................................... 15
2.9.1 Saturation mode....................................................................... 15
2.9.2 Overwrite mode........................................................................ 16
2.9.3 Extension mode ....................................................................... 16
2.10 Exclusion mode................................................................................. 17
2.11 Uploading .......................................................................................... 17
2.12 Resetting of recordings ..................................................................... 18

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 19
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 20
3.2.2 Trigger settings ........................................................................ 20
3.2.3 Trigger limits ............................................................................ 21
3.2.4 Event masks ............................................................................ 21
MEDREC16 Substation Automation
3.2.5 General info ..............................................................................21

3.2.6 BI texts .....................................................................................22
3.2.7 AI texts .....................................................................................22
3.3.1 Output data...............................................................................23
3.3.2 Events ......................................................................................23
4. Technical Data.........................................................................................24
2
Substation Automation MEDREC16
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Recording capability of up to 16 current or voltage waveforms and 16 logic digital

signals
The length of a recording is set by the user in a range determined by the amount of
memory available and the number of analogue inputs used
The number of recordings depends on the sampling frequency, length of
recordings and number of analogue inputs
The recording can be triggered by one or several of the alternatives listed below:
- triggering on the rising or falling edge of any (or several) of the digital inputs
- triggering on an adjustable level of overcurrent, overvoltage or undervoltage
- manual triggering via MMI
- triggering via serial communication or via a parameter
- periodic triggering
Adjustable pre-triggering time for pre-fault analysis
The recorder has three operation modes: saturation, overwrite and extension
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the transient disturbance recorder

MEDREC16 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
MEDREC16 is used for recording the current and voltage waveforms as well as the
status data of internal IEC 61131-3 -based logic signals and digital inputs connected
to the relay terminals. The maximum number of analogue inputs as well as that of
logic signals is 16.
3
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI0('5(&
4

Io SINT Analogue input
Iob SINT Analogue input
Uo SINT Analogue input
U12b SINT Analogue input
BI_USED WORD Bit mask of used digital inputs
EXT_TRG BOOL (pos. edge) External triggering
RESET BOOL (active high) Reset memory input
5

TRG BOOL (active high) Indication of a triggering taken
NUM_RECS UINT Count of recordings in the recording
memory
ERR BOOL (active high) Indication of a configuration error
6
2.1 General
The transient disturbance recorder MEDREC16 can record 16 signal types of the
analogue channels of the relay and the status values of digital input signals connected
to the inputs BI1...BI16. The analogue inputs are recorded as instantaneous values and
converted to primary peak value units1. The recordings can be uploaded with
a DR-Collector tool, which converts the data to a COMTRADE format (refer to
section Uploading).
The digital inputs are sampled once per task execution of the recorder. In the upload
program the latest digital values are repeated so that the analogue and digital samples
correspond to each other. The external digital signals are first sampled by the digital
I/O cards and the synchronisation with the analogue inputs depends on the filter time
of the digital inputs. If the filter time is approximately as long as the task interval, the
analogue values and external digital values will correspond to each other.
2.2 Configuration
The transient disturbance recorder is configured with the Relay Configuration Tool.
At the rated frequency of 50 Hz, the recorder can only be configured to the task
interval of 10 ms (at 60 Hz 8.33 ms), otherwise an error event E5 is sent.
Each of the 16 analogue inputs of the recorder has its own signal type that can be
connected to it. For example, only the signal IL1 can be connected to the IL1 input of
the recorder. If certain signal types are not present, the corresponding inputs are left
unconnected and these inputs are not recorded. Also a connected input can be left out
of the recording via the parameter AI chs used (see Selection of recorded analogue
inputs). The names of the analogue intputs are fixed, but they can be viewed via the
AI texts menu.
Any external or internal digital signals (type BOOL), such as the start and trip signals
from protection function blocks or the external digital inputs of the relay, can be
connected to the digital inputs. The digital outputs of the function blocks in the same
program can be connected directly to the inputs of the recorder, whereas the digital
outputs of the function blocks from other tasks are connected to the recorder by global
variables. It should be noted, however, that in some cases the use of global variables
will cause a delay to the signal. The delay will not be more than the task execution
interval of the slower one of the two tasks. Moreover, if a digital signal from a 5 ms
task is connected to the recorder, it should be ensured that the signal will stay active
1
In products with the revisions D and E of MEDREC16, signals from derivative sensors such
as Rogowski coil are recorded as derivative signals as sampled originally by the relay
7
for at least 10 ms. For example the protection function blocks provide pulse width
settings that can be used to set the minimum pulse widths of the start and trip outputs.
The standard logic functions (AND, OR, etc. ports) can be used to form any kind of
boolean functions from the digital signals. If a digital input is only used to trigger the
recorder, several digital inputs can be combined to one digital input, provided the
digital inputs are first connected via the R_TRIG function block and then combined
by the OR function (see Figure 2 below). This kind of connection preserves the rising
edges of the signals, so that the digital input configured to rising edge active can be
used to trigger the recorder.
)LJXUH &RPELQLQJVHYHUDOWULJJHULQJVRXUFHVWRRQHGLJLWDOLQSXW
The status values of all digital inputs are recorded, including those of the inputs not
connected. The information which inputs are actually connected is forwarded to the
upload program by writing a constant to the BI_USED input, the bits of which
indicate the digital inputs used. This value is seen directly in the parameter BI chs
used. The BI_USED input is 65535 by default, which indicates that all the digital
inputs are connected. The names of the digital inputs can be set in the BI texts menu
of the Relay Setting Tool.
1RWH Complicated calculations can be avoided by writing the constant to the

BI_USED input in binary format. For example, if the inputs BI1, BI2 and BI4 are
connected, the constant is WORD#2#1011 (see Figure 3 below).
8
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIWKHXVDJHRIWKH%,B86('LQSXW
EXT_TRG is a rising edge sensitive external trigger input. The only difference
between a digital input which is set to rising edge sensitive and EXT_TRG, is that the
EXT_TRG input is not recorded. The push-button F on the front panel of the relay
controls the parameter F001V021, which is activated for a short time when the button
is pressed and can thus be used to trigger the recorder, provided the parameter is
connected to the EXT_TRG input.
The outputs of the recorder can be used to control the alarm indication LEDs of the
relay. For example, if the NUM_RECS output of the recorder is connected to the EQ
function, which is a standard function block that compares whether the inputs are
equal, and zero to another input of the EQ function, and the inverted output of EQ is
connected to a non-latched alarm indication LED control, the LED indicates whether
there are any recordings left in the recorder (see Figure 4 below).
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIFRQILJXULQJWKHRXWSXWVRIWKHUHFRUGHUWRFRQWUROWKH
LQGLFDWLRQ/('VLQGLFDWLRQRIWKHH[LVWHQFHRIDUHFRUGLQJ
The function block sends a configuration error event E5 if the connected analogue
input is not correct or if the task interval is other than 10 ms. The operation of the
recorder is halted and the ERR ouput is activated in those cases.
9
2.3 Setting the recorder identification
The identification number and the textual name of the recorder can be set via the
parameters Identification and Main header (for example the station name) in the
General input menu. The main header can be 15 characters long. The header and the
identification number are included in the recording file produced by the upload
program (refer to section Uploading).
2.4 Selection of recorded analogue inputs
Each analogue input has its own signal type that can be connected to it. The recorded
inputs are selected by the bits of the parameter Al chs used (see table below). If the
input is not connected but the corresponding bit is set in the parameter, the bit is reset
immediately. By default, all the connected signals are recorded and the bits of the
parameter Al chs used indicate which inputs are connected. If the parameter is
changed, all the recordings in the memory are reset.
Selected input Weight factors for the

parameter "AI chs used"
IL1 1
IL2 2
IL3 4
Io 8
Iob 16
Uo 32
U1 64
U2 128
U3 256
U12 512
U23 1024
U31 2048
U12b 4096
IL1b 8192
IL2b 16384
IL3b 32768
10
2.5 Triggering alternatives
The recording can be triggered by any (or several) of the alternatives listed below:
triggering on the rising or falling edge of any (or several) of the digital inputs
BI1...BI16
triggering on overcurrent, overvoltage or undervoltage
manual triggering via the menu or with the push-button F on the front panel (if
configured)
triggering via serial communication or via a parameter
periodic triggering
Regardless of the triggering type, each recording generates the event E31 and the
triggering time and reason are included in the recording.
2.5.1 Triggering by digital inputs
The digital signals can be formed from the start, trip and block signals of the function
blocks with the relay configuration tool. A change in the status of a monitored signal
triggers the recorder according to the configuration and settings. Triggering on the
rising edge of a digital input signal means that the recording sequence starts when the
input signal is activated. Correspondingly, triggering on the falling edge means that
the recording sequence starts when the active input signal resets.
A digital input is used as a triggering source if the corresponding bit is set in the
parameter BI enable. An input is taken into use by adding the corresponding weight
factor to the parameter value. The bits of the parameter BI mode control the edge
activity of the triggering. If the bit is set, the input is rising edge active and if the bit is
zero, the input is falling edge active. The weight factors of the inputs for the
parameters BI enable and BI mode are given in the following table.
11
Digital inputs Weight factors for

BI enabled & BI mode
BI1 1
BI2 2
BI3 4
BI4 8
BI5 16
BI6 32
BI7 64
BI8 128
BI9 256
BI10 512
BI11 1024
BI12 2048
BI13 4096
BI14 8192
BI15 16384
BI16 32768
2.5.2 Triggering by analogue inputs
The trigger level can be set for triggering in an overcurrent, overvoltage or

undervoltage situation. The inputs for overcurrent or overvoltage triggering are
selected by the bits of the parameter Over lim. Enab and the inputs for undervoltage
triggering by the bits of the parameter Under lim. Enab (see table below). The limit
values are set via the corresponding parameters. Both the overvoltage and the
undervoltage triggering can be active simultaneously for the same input. Should the
duration of the overcurrent or overvoltage condition exceed the set filter time, the
recorder triggers. In case of undervoltage, the situation is considered to be a circuit-
breaker operation, and thus the recorder will not trigger even if the measured voltage
falls below 5 % of the rated voltage of the relay during the filter time. The set filter
time is common to all the analogue inputs. The value used for triggering is the
calculated peak-to-peak value divided by two.
12
on overcurrent or parameter "Over lim. overcurrent or
overvoltage is active enab." overvoltage limit
Io 8 Over limit Io
Iob 16 Over limit Iob
Uo 32 Over limit Uo
U1 64 Over limit Ux
U12b 4096 Over limit U12b
1)
on undervoltage is active parameter "Under lim. undervoltage limit
enab."
1)
Other weight factors are ignored
2.5.3 Manual triggering
The recorder can be triggered manually via the MMI or via serial communication by
setting the parameter Remote trigger to Trigger. The recorder may also be
triggered manually by pressing the push-button F on the front panel, provided the
parameter F001V021 has been connected to the EXT_TRG input of MEDREC16 with
the relay configuration tool (refer to section Configuration).
13
2.5.4 Periodic triggering
Periodic triggering means that the recorder automatically makes a recording at certain
time intervals. The interval can be adjusted with the parameter Periodic time. If the
value of the parameter is changed, the new setting takes effect when the next periodic
triggering occurs. Setting the parameter to zero disables the triggering alternative and
the setting becomes valid immediately. If a new non-zero setting is wanted to be valid
immediately, the parameter Periodic time should first be set to zero and then to the
new value. The time remaining to the next triggering can be monitored via the
parameter Time to trigger that counts downwards.
2.6 Length of recordings
The length of a recording is defined with the parameter Record length. According to
the memory available and the number of inputs used, the function block determines
the possible number of recordings and reduces the defined length of a recording if
needed. The number of recordings is written to the parameter Max # records and the
validated length is updated to the parameter Record length. The fixed memory size
allocated for the recorder is 100 kB, matching about 50 000 samples.
The number of recordings can be calculated as follows:
Nr = M / (L * (Nc * Ns + NB) + NH) .
where
Nr Number of recordings
L Length of one recording in cycles (setting parameter)
NC Number of recorded analogue inputs (defined by the parameter AI chs
used)
Ns Number of bytes in a cycle (= 80)
NB Number of bytes for binary signals in a cycle (= 8)
NH Size of header information per recording in bytes (= 56)
M Amount of memory allocated for the recorder (= 100 kB)
For example the following combinations of length - number of recordings - number of
inputs are available (the given times are valid provided the rated frequency is 50 Hz):
# recordings \ # inputs 1 3 10
1 1163 cyc. 412 cyc. 126 cyc.
23.2 s 8.2 s 2.5 s
5 232 cyc. 82 cyc. 25 cyc.
4.6 s 1.6 s 0.5 s
10 115 cyc. 41 cyc. 12 cyc.
2.3 s 0.8 s 0.24 s
14
2.7 Sampling frequencies
The sampling frequency fs of the analogue inputs depends on the set rated frequency
fn so that one fundamental cycle always contains 40 samples. This means that the
sampling frequency is 2 kHz at the rated frequency of 50 Hz and 2.4 kHz at the rated
frequency of 60 Hz. Since the internal digital values are sampled once per task
execution and the task interval is fixed to 10 ms, the sampling frequency of digital
signals is 100 Hz.
The rated frequency fn of the relay or the feeder terminal is set via a dialogue box in
the relay configuration tool. Both the rated frequency and the sampling frequency can
be monitored via the General info menu.
2.8 Pre- and post-trigger data
The waveforms of analogue inputs are constantly recorded into the history memory of
the recorder. The duration of the data preceding the triggering, i.e. the so-called pre-
trigger time, is adjustable in percent via the parameter Pre-trg time. The duration of
the data following the triggering, i.e. the so-called post-trigger time, is the difference
between the recording length and the pre-trigger time. Changing the pre-trigger time
resets the history data and the current recording under collection.
2.9 Operation modes
2.9.1 Saturation mode
In saturation mode, the captured waveform(s) cannot be overwritten by new

recordings and the waveform capturing is stopped when the recording memory
becomes full i.e. when the maximum number of recordings is reached (see Figure 5
below). In this case the event E1 is sent and when there is memory available again,
the event E0 is generated.
)LJXUH 5HFRUGLQJPHPRU\XVDJHLQVDWXUDWLRQPRGH
15
2.9.2 Overwrite mode
When the operation mode is Overwrite and the recording memory is full, the oldest
recording will be overwritten by the pre-trigger data collected for the next recording
(see Figure 6 below). Thus the recorder can store one recording less in overwrite
mode than the Max # records parameter indicates. Each time a recording is
overwritten, the event E3 is generated. The overwrite mode is recommended if it is
more important to have the latest (newest) recordings in the memory. On the other
hand, the saturation mode is preferred when the oldest recordings are more important.
)LJXUH 5HFRUGLQJPHPRU\XVDJHLQRYHUZULWHPRGH
2.9.3 Extension mode
In the extension mode a new triggering during an on-going recording interrupts the
current recording and starts a new one. Accordingly, the former recording only
contains the pre-trigger samples of the first triggering and the post-trigger samples up
to the new triggering, whereas the new recording, which is called an extension to the
first one, includes the post-trigger samples after the new triggering. Consequently,
both the recordings will be shorter than the defined length, but all the samples
between the pre-trigger time before the first triggering and the post-trigger time after
the second triggering are covered by the two recordings. An extension recording is
made only provided there is room for a new recording. If the memory becomes full,
the last recording is always a full recording, i.e. it will not be interrupted by a new
triggering during the post-trigger data collection.
In other cases, i.e. when new triggerings do not occur during an on-going recording,
the operation in extension mode is similar to that in saturation mode (see Figure 7
below).
Unlike in extension mode, new triggerings are not allowed in the saturation or
overwrite mode before the previous recording is completed. However, if a new
triggering follows the previous recording before all the pre-trigger samples are
collected for the new recording, the triggering is accepted and the recording will be as
much shorter as there were pre-trigger samples lacking.
16
The extension recordings are combined to the previous recordings by the upload
program.
)LJXUH 5HFRUGLQJPHPRU\XVDJHLQH[WHQVLRQPRGH
2.10 Exclusion mode
In the exclusion mode, which is on when the value of the control parameter
Exclusion time is >0, new triggerings are ignored if the triggering reason is the
same as in the previous recording. The parameter Exclusion time controls how long
the exclusion of the same type of triggerings is active after a triggering. The exclusion
mode only applies to the analogue and digital channel triggerings, not to periodic and
manual triggerings.
When the control parameter Exclusion time is zero, the exclusion mode is off and
there are no restrictions on the triggering types of successive recordings.
The remaining exclusion time can be monitored via the output parameter Exclusion
time in the Output data menu.
2.11 Uploading
The data of the disturbance recorder are uploaded with the DR-Collector Tool. The
program only sees the oldest data in the recorder and the data can be either uploaded
or deleted depending on the information included in the recording (see Figure 8
below). Accordingly, the older recording must be uploaded or deleted before the
newest recording can be read. The uploaded recording is valid even if the recorder is
reset during the upload process. Please refer to DR-Collector Tool, Operators
Manual (1MRS751869-MUM) for more information about the tool.
The upload program converts the recording to a COMTRADE-file (IEEE Standard

Common Format for Transient Data Exchange for Power Systems) that includes the
used analogue and digital signals, channel names, recorder name and identification,
sampling frequency and trigger information. The analogue signals are scaled to
primary units. COMTRADE-files can be viewed by commercial evaluation programs
able to process the COMTRADE-file format.
17
)LJXUH 5HFRUGLQJPHPRU\XVDJHGXULQJWKHXSORDGSURFHVV
2.12 Resetting of recordings
The recorder can be reset by any (or several) of the methods listed below:
by the RESET input of the function block

by setting the parameter F225M002
by setting the general parameter F001V013
by changing the recorded input setting via the parameter AI chs used
by changing the length of recordings
by pushing the push-buttons C + E simultaneously for over 5 s
by switching off the auxiliary voltage of the relay
Resetting clears all the recordings from the memory, including a pre-trigger recording
in progress. A recording that is being uploaded is not affected by the resetting except
when the auxiliary voltage is switched off; this stops the upload process and resets the
recording.
18
3.1 General
Each function block has a specific channel number. The channel for MEDREC16
is 225.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
The different event mask parameters (see section Event masks) affect the
follows:
32...63.
19
3.2 Setting values

Remote trigger M1 0 or 1 2) - 0 W Remote triggering
Reset memory M2 0 or 1 3) - 0 W Resetting of recording memory
Record length M11 10...65535 cyc. 50 R/W Size of the recording memory in
cycles
Max # records M3 0...65535 - 0 R Maximum number of recordings
# records M16 0...65535 - 0 R Number of recordings in memory
Pre-trg time V5 0...100 % 50 R/W Length of recording preceding

the triggering
Operation mode V3 0...2 1) - 0 R/W Operation mode of the recorder
Exclusion time V2 0...86 400 s 0 R/W Time how long triggerings for the
same reason are ignored
1)
Operation mode 0 = Saturation; 1 = Overwrite; 2 = Extension
2)
Remote trigger 0 = No trigger; 1 = Trigger
3)
Reset memory 0 = No reset; 1 = Reset
3.2.2 Trigger settings

Over lim. enab. V8 0...65535 - 0 R/W Bit mask for analogue input
over limit triggering
Under lim. enab V9 0...65535 - 0 R/W Bit mask for analogue input
under limit triggering
AI filter time V20 0.000...60.000 s 0.050 R/W Filtering time for analogue
input limit triggerings
BI enable V6 0...65535 - 0 R/W Bit mask for digital input

triggering enable
BI mode V7 0...65535 - 0 R/W Bit mask for digital input

triggering mode
Periodic time V1 0...604 800 s 0 R/W Time between periodic

triggerings
20
3.2.3 Trigger limits

Over limit ILx V10 0.00...40.00 x In 10.00 R/W Over limit for IL1, IL2 and IL3
Over limit Io V11 0.00...40.00 x In 10.00 R/W Over limit for Io
Over limit Iob V12 0.00...40.00 x In 10.00 R/W Over limit for Iob
Over limit Uo V13 0.00...2.00 x Un 2.00 R/W Over limit for Uo
Over limit Ux V14 0.00...2.00 x Un 2.00 R/W Over limit for U1, U2 and U3
Over limit Uxy V15 0.00...2.00 x Un 2.00 R/W Over limit for U12, U23 and
U31
Over limit U12b V16 0.00...2.00 x Un 2.00 R/W Over limit for U12b
Over limit ILxb V17 0.00...40.00 x In 10.00 R/W Over limit for IL1b, IL2b and
IL3b
Under limit Ux V18 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/W Under limit for U1, U2 and U3
Under limit Uxy V19 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/W Under limit for U12, U23 and
U31
3.2.4 Event masks

Event mask 1 V101 0... 2147483691 - 2147483691 R/W Event mask 1 for
event transmission
event transmission
event transmission
event transmission
3.2.5 General info

direction
AI chs used M13 0...65535 - 65535 R/W Bit mask of recorded
analogue inputs
BI chs used M14 0...65535 - 65535 R Bit mask of recorded digital

inputs
Sampling rate M15 400...2400 Hz 2000 R Sampling frequency (Hz)
Line frequency M19 10...60 Hz 50 R Nominal system frequency
Identification M18 0...10000 - 0 R/W Station identification or unit

number
Main header M20 a 15-character - Default header R/W Main header for recordings
string
21
3.2.6 BI texts

3.2.7 AI texts

Text of AI4 M63 Io - Io R Text of analogue input 4 (Io)
Text of AI5 M64 Iob - Iob R Text of analogue input 5 (Iob)
Text of AI6 M65 Uo - Uo R Text of analogue input 6 (Uo)
Text of AI13 M72 U12b - U12b R Text of analogue input 13 (U12b)
22
3.3.1 Output data

Time to trigger O1 0...604 800 s 0 R/M Time remaining to the next
periodic triggering
Exclusion time O2 0...86 400 s 0 R/M Remaining exclusion time
3.3.2 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Recorder memory is full Off
E1 2 1 Recorder memory is full On
E3 8 1 Overwrite of recording On
E5 32 1 Configuration error On
E31 2147483648 1 Recorder triggered On
23
4. Technical Data

Exception handling Exception Handled
wrong signal type is event E5 at channel 225 is sent

connected to input
task time is other than event E5 at channel 225 is sent

allowed
Operation accuracies Analogue channel triggering level: 2.5% of set value or 0.01 x In
Analogue channel triggering time: 10 ms
Digital signal 1) synchronisation to:
analogue signals 10 ms
digital signals from other tasks + task time (min 10 ms) 2)
digital signals from external inputs 20 ms 3)
Configuration data Task execution interval: 10 ms

at the rated frequency f/fn = 50 Hz
1)
from the same 10 ms task in which MEDREC16 is executed
2)
the signal is delayed
3)
with 5 ms filter time in the external digital input

Technical Change
revision
D -
E The Identification and Main header parameters in the menu General info and the
digital input names in the menu BI texts can be set via both the MMI and the Relay
Setting Tool, whereas in earlier revisions they could only be set via the Relay Setting Tool.
The conversion factor values, which were provided as background information in earlier
revisions, are no longer visible for the user.
F Signals from derivative sensors such as Rogowski coil are recorded as original signals
(not as derivatives as in earlier revisions of MEDREC16)
G -
24
1MRS752342-MUM MEFR1
Issued: 10/1997
System Frequency Measurement
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.3 Registers............................................................................................. 4
2.4 Actual frequency measurement........................................................... 4
2.5 Maximum and minimum average frequency ........................................ 5
2.6 Zero value supervision, zero value detection and undervoltage
blocking............................................................................................... 5

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 9
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 10
3.3.2 Recorded data.......................................................................... 11
3.3.3 Events ...................................................................................... 11
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 12

MEFR1 Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
System frequency measurement

Actual frequency values are displayed in Hz
Maximum and minimum average supervision with adjustable time intervals
Threshold supervision for frequency using the integration method with switching
detection or the absolute threshold method
Limit value monitoring for frequency with up to four adjustable limits
Frequency output that can be used in the freely programmable logic of the Relay
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the system frequency measurement function
block MEFR1 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform, e.g. feeder terminals,
in-feeder terminals, motor protection terminals and transformer protection terminals.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI0()5
2
Substation Automation MEFR1

U Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring phase-to-phase
voltage
of MEFR1

FREQ Analogue signal (REAL) Measured value of frequency
HighWarning Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Indication of an exceeded high
warning limit
HighAlarm Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Indication of an exceeded high
alarm limit
LowWarning Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Indication of an exceeded low
warning limit
LowAlarm Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Indication of an exceeded low
alarm limit
ERR Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Indication of a configuration
error
3
2.1 Configuration
Frequency measurement is traditionally recommended to be based on phase-to-phase

voltage (i.e. when the primary voltage transformers are delta-connected). The phase-
to-phase voltage is less dependent on the asymmetry of separate phase voltages and
less sensitive to harmonics.
The analogue channel number for the corresponding U input is selected by means of
the Relay Configuration Tool.
2.2 Measuring mode
The frequency measurement for the voltage input is selected via a special dialogue
box in the Relay Configuration Tool.
Frequency measurement is traditionally recommended to be based on phase-to-phase

voltage (i.e. when the primary voltage transformers are delta-connected). The phase-
to-phase voltage is less dependent on the asymmetry of separate phase voltages and
less sensitive to harmonics. The third harmonic, for example, will not be present in
phase-to-phase voltages. However, the frequency measurement function block
MEFR1 can also measure the frequency reliably and accurately by means of single
phase voltage (i.e. when the primary voltage transformers are wye-connected).
The frequency values are updated once a fundamental frequency cycle.
2.3 Registers
maximum average frequency with date and time stamps

minimum average frequency with date and time stamps
The recorded values can be reset via the RESET input, or over the serial bus or the
local MMI.
2.4 Actual frequency measurement
Actual frequency values are displayed in Hz.
4
2.5 Maximum and minimum average frequency
Maximum and minimum average functions are implemented by means of a function

that calculates the linear average of the frequency measured over a settable average
time interval (parameter Average interval). A new average value is obtained once a
minute, indicating the average frequency over the average time interval preceding the
update time. The actual rolling average values are stored in the memory until the
value is updated at the end of the following time interval.
If the new average frequency value exceeds the maximum average frequency, the
actual average value will replace the maximum average value recorded. Should the
new frequency average be smaller than the minimum average recorded, the actual
average value will replace the recorded minimum average. Maximum and minimum
values are provided with date and time stamps.
Maximum and minimum values are cleared when the registers are reset.
2.6 Zero value supervision, zero value detection and undervoltage

blocking
A frequency below 10 Hz is forced to 0 Hz. This allows the noise in the input voltage
to be ignored and is needed because the lowest frequency of the measuring range is 10
Hz. The zero value supervision is fixed to 10 Hz and it is always active. The
frequency measurement is also forced to 0 Hz in an undervoltage situation. The
undervoltage limit value is set according to the requirements of the application
(parameter Voltage limit).
The zero value detection function is used to force a frequency value update if it
deviates less than 10 Hz from zero or is zero. Zero value detection operates so that
once a frequency passes (upwards or downwards) the limit 10 Hz, the new frequency
value is spontaneously reported to the master device (MicroSCADA) if the threshold
supervision with the absolute threshold method or the integration method is in use
(see the control parameter Threshold select).
5
phase current value with the last reported value. If the actual value exceeds the last
Frequency / Hz
Frequency value update Frequency value update
51
50
Reported value
+ T hreshold value
49
48
0
6
calculates the difference between the last reported system frequency value and the
actual value for each task cycle. The difference is added to the internal accumulated
(integrated) value register. If the accumulated deltas exceed the parameterized
Frequency / Hz
Frequency value update Frequency value update
52
Reported value
51
50 Reported value
0
+ Threshold value
Reference level
- Threshold value
the accumulated current value exceeds the set Threshold value, or

the zero value detection supervision was triggered.
7
For the system frequency, up to four different limits can be monitored. The parameter
Limit selection is used to specify the limits to be supervised and monitored. Each
limit is checked independently, which means that if a frequency exceeds several limits
during an execution task cycle, each exceeding of limit is reported to the master
device independently. The hysteresis of each limit is fixed to 0,01 Hz and taken into
account as shown below. Each exceeding of limit is stored with a time stamp with the
FIFO method. The warning and alarm limits can be changed on-line.
Frequency
(2)
(3)
Hysteresis
High alarm limit
(1)
(4)
High warn. limit
(1) High warning

(2) High alarm
(3) High alarm OK
(4) High warning OK
(5) Low warning
(6) Low alarm
(7) Low alarm OK
(5)
(8)
Low warn. limit

(7)
(6)
Low alarm limit
High warning
Outputs
High alarm
Low warning
Low alarm
Frelim02
8
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for MEFR1 is 208.
Data Description
direction
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
9

direction
Average interval V1 0...5 1) - 1 R/W Time interval for average
supervision
2)
Threshold select V2 0...2 - 0 R/W Selection of threshold
Threshold value V3 0.01...5.00 Hz 0.10 R/W Threshold value for threshold

supervision
3)
Limit selection V4 0...9 - 0 R/W Selection of monitored limits
High warning V5 15.00...75.00 Hz 55.00 R/W High warning limit value
High alarm V6 15.00...75.00 Hz 60.00 R/W High alarm limit value
Low warning V7 10.00...60.00 Hz 45.00 R/W Low warning limit value
Low alarm V8 10.00...60.00 Hz 40.00 R/W Low alarm limit value
Voltage limit V9 0.30...0.90 x Un 0.30 R/W Undervoltage limit for blocking




1)
Average interval 0 = 1 min; 1 = 5 min; 2 = 10 min; 3 = 15 min; 4 = 30 min; 5 = 60 min
2)
3)
5 = HA, LA; 6 = HW; 7 = HA; 8 = LW; 9 = LA
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Frequency I1 10.00...75.00 Hz 0.00 R/M System frequency in Hertz
Average freq. I2 10.00...75.00 Hz 0.00 R/M Average system frequency in

Hertz

1)
Input RESET I4 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Signal for resetting the demand
values and registers of MEFR1
1)
10
3.3.2 Recorded data

direction
Freq max date V201 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Date of maximum average
frequency
Freq max time V202 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Time of maximum average

frequency
Frequency max V203 10.00...75.00 Hz 50.00 R/M Maximum average frequency
Freq min date V204 yyyy-mm-dd - - R/M Date of minimum average

frequency
Freq min time V205 hh:mm:ss.mss - - R/M Time of minimum average

frequency
Frequency min V206 10.00...75.00 Hz 50.00 R/M Minimum average frequency
3.3.3 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 Frequency High warning reset
E1 2 0 Frequency High warning activated
E2 4 0 Frequency High alarm reset
E3 8 0 Frequency High alarm activated
E4 16 0 Frequency Low warning reset
E5 32 0 Frequency Low warning activated
E6 64 0 Frequency Low alarm reset
E7 128 0 Frequency Low alarm activated
E8 0 0 - -
E9 512 0 Frequency Delta
11
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies 0.1 Hz


Technical Change
revision
B -
C Outputs HighWarning, HighAlarm, LowWarning and LowAlarm added
Event reason and event state in the event table changed as follows (an example):
Event reason: Frequency high warning Frequency
Task execution interval changed: 20 ms 40 ms
12
1MRS100207 RE_5_ _
Issued: 10/1997
Version: E
Three-Phase Power and Energy
Measurement
(MEPE7)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 Analogue input selection for configuration.................................. 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.3 Registers............................................................................................. 5
2.4 Actual load measurements .................................................................. 6
2.5 Maximum active and reactive power demand...................................... 7
2.6 Active and reactive energy .................................................................. 7
2.8 Threshold supervision ......................................................................... 7
2.8.1 Threshold supervision with absolute threshold ........................... 8
2.8.2 Threshold supervision with integrator algorithm ......................... 8
2.8.3 Threshold supervision with time-based function ......................... 9
2.9 Limit value supervision ...................................................................... 10
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 11

3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 13
3.3.2 Recorded data.......................................................................... 14
3.3.3 Events ...................................................................................... 16
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 17

RE_5_ _ MEPE7 ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Measures the following distribution network parameters:

- fundamental frequency active power [kW]
- fundamental frequency reactive power [kvar]
- fundamental frequency displacement power factor cos()
- power factor PF including the harmonics
- fundamental frequency active energy [kWh]
- fundamental frequency reactive energy [kvarh]
Three-phase measurement for wye-connected VTs and VDs, and for delta-
connected VTs
Demand supervision with adjustable time intervals for three-phase active and
reactive power
Maximum and minimum demand supervision with adjustable time intervals for
three-phase active and reactive power
Threshold supervision for three-phase active and reactive power using the
integration method with zero value detection or the absolute threshold method
Limit value monitoring for three-phase active and reactive power with up to four
adjustable limits
Three-phase active and reactive energy measurement, including measurement of
reversed energy
Outputs to be used in the freely programmable logic of the Relay Configuration
Tool included in the CAP 505 Tool Box
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the three-phase power and energy
measurement function block MEPE7 used in products based on the RED 500
Platform, e.g. feeder terminals, in-feeder terminals, motor protection terminals and
transformer protection terminals.
2
ABB Automation MEPE7 RE_5_ _
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI0(3(

RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. Input signal for resetting the registers
edge) of MEPE7

P3 Analogue signal (REAL) Three-phase active power
Q3 Analogue signal (REAL) Three-phase reactive power
DPF Analogue signal (REAL) Three-phase displacement
power factor
warning limit
alarm limit
warning limit
alarm limit
error
3
2.1 Configuration
The analogue inputs are configured in the Relay Configuration Tool. A special
dialogue box in the configuration tool is also used for selecting the analogue input
combination for power and energy measurement.

transformers or Rogowski coils. It automatically adapts its operation to the channels
Note that RMS measurement must be selected for MEPE7 via the Special
Measurements dialogue of the configuration tool.
2.1.1 Analogue input selection for configuration
The following analogue input combinations are available in the dialogue box of the
configuration tool. It is important to notice that three-phase power is accurately
measured in situations of asymmetry only when all the phase currents and phase
voltages are known. The correct input combination is selected via the configuration
tool.
Input combination Comments

U1, U2, U3 and IL1, IL2, IL3 Three-phase power in situations of symmetry and asymmetry
U12, U23 and IL1, IL2, IL3 Aron power; phase currents are assumed to be symmetric (i.e. I0 = 0)
4
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block measures the true RMS and fundamental frequency currents and
voltages.
The available analogue channel combinations are shown in the dialogue box of the
Relay Configuration Tool (Figure 2).
)LJXUH $YDLODEOHDQDORJXHFKDQQHOFRPELQDWLRQVLQWKH5HOD\&RQILJXUDWLRQ7RRO
The suppression of harmonics for the fundamental frequency measurement is at least
-50 dB at the frequencies f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,... and fn is the rated
frequency.
2.3 Registers
maximum three-phase active and reactive power demand with date and time
stamps
accumulated three-phase active and reactive energy, forward and reversed
the 50 last three-phase energy values, forward and reversed; each value is
integrated over a settable time interval
The user can reset the registers via the RESET input, or over the serial bus or the local
MMI. When the measurement view is selected and there are no active indications, the
accumulated energy measurements can be reset by pressing the C button for 5 s.
5
2.4 Actual load measurements
The function block measures the following distribution network parameters:
fundamental frequency active power [MW]

fundamental frequency reactive power [Mvar]
fundamental frequency displacement power factor cos()
power factor PF including harmonics
fundamental frequency active energy [kWh]
fundamental frequency reactive energy [kvarh]
The power and power factor measurements are derived for wye-connected VTs and
VDs, and delta-connected VTs.
D
S
S1
)LJXUH 7KUHHGLPHQVLRQDOSRZHUWULDQJOH
Explanations to Figure 3:
P Fundamental frequency active power

Q Fundamental frequency reactive power (displacement reactive power)
Fundamental frequency phase displacement
S1 Fundamental frequency apparent power (not displayed)
D Reactive power due to harmonics (not displayed)
S Total apparent power including harmonics (not displayed)
S is calculated on the basis of true RMS values of voltage and current:
S = P 2 + Q 2 +D 2 = URMSIRMS
The phase displacement power factor (DPF) is calculated as follows:
P P
cos() = =
S1 P +Q 2
2
The power factor (PF) is calculated on the basis of total apparent power:
P
PF =
S
6
2.5 Maximum active and reactive power demand

linear average of the active and reactive power measured over a settable demand time
interval, which the user can define with the parameter Demand interval. A new
demand value is obtained once a minute, indicating the actual demand power over the
demand time interval preceding the update time. The actual rolling demand values are
stored in the memory until the value is updated at the end of the following time
interval. Maximum demands are three-phase values.
If the new demand power value exceeds the maximum demand value recorded for
three-phase power, the actual demand value will replace the maximum demand value
recorded. Maximum values are provided with date and time stamps.
2.6 Active and reactive energy
The function block calculates active and reactive energy by integrating the measured
active and reactive power values over a settable time interval, starting daily at 00.00.
The user defines the interval, i.e. how the 1440 minutes per day are divided, with the
parameter Energy interval. Each new demand value is obtained at the end of the
corresponding time interval. The latest 50 values of active and reactive energy are
available. Accumulated energy values are derived for wye-connected VTs and VDs,
and delta-connected VTs.
The zero value supervision function forces an active or reactive power value below
3 x 0.2% x Un x In to 0. This allows the noise in the input voltage to be ignored. The
function is fixed to 3 x 0.2% x Un x In and it is always active.
The zero value detection function forces a value update if the three-phase active or
reactive power deviates slightly from zero or is zero. Once the active or reactive
power passes (upwards or downwards) the limit 3 x 0.2% x Un x In, the new phase
current value is spontaneously reported to the master device (MicroSCADA). The
function is active when threshold supervision with the absolute threshold method or
the integration method is in use (see the control parameter Threshold select).
2.8 Threshold supervision
Three different methods can be used for the threshold supervision (also known as
delta supervision) and the parameter Threshold select is used for selecting the
method to be used. The methods are absolute, integrated and time based.
7
The following values can be supervised:
Three-phase active power

Three-phase reactive power
Three-phase apparent power
Three-phase displacement power factor
2.8.1 Threshold supervision with absolute threshold
In absolute threshold supervision, the function block compares the actual values of
three-phase active and reactive power with the last reported values. If the actual value
exceeds the last reported value plus the set Threshold value, or is below the last
reported value minus the set Threshold value, the actual value is spontaneously
reported to the master device and will replace the last reported value.
Three-phase power
Power value update Power value update
Reported value
+ Threshold value
Minimum
threshold
0
2.8.2 Threshold supervision with integrator algorithm
In threshold supervision with integrator algorithm, the function block calculates the
difference between the last reported voltage value and the actual value for each task
cycle. The difference is added to the internal accumulated (integrated) value register.
If the accumulated deltas exceed the set Threshold value, the actual value is
The internal threshold difference register is set to zero.
8
Three-phase power
Reported value
Reported value
Deviation from last reported value
Minimum
threshold
0
+ Threshold value x
Time interval
Reference level
- Threshold value x
Time interval
Thsinte5
the accumulated current value exceeds the set Threshold value, or

Example 1:
Measurement value has changed 1% after the last sent measurement value
Threshold value = 1% and Time interval = 1s new measurement value is sent after
1 second
Example 2:
2 seconds
Example 3:
Threshold value = 10% and Time interval = 2s new measurement value is sent
after 10 seconds
2.8.3 Threshold supervision with time-based function
If the time-based threshold supervision is used, the function block sends the values to
the master device at intervals selected with the control parameter Time interval.
9
The limit value supervision function monitors up to four different limits for both
three-phase active power and three-phase reactive power. The user specifies the
warning and alarm limits to be supervised and monitored with the parameter Limit
selection. The limits can also be changed on-line.
The function checks each limit independently, which means that if the active or
reactive power exceeds several limits during a task execution cycle, each exceeding of
limit is reported to the master device independently. The hysteresis of each limit is
fixed to 1% of the nominal value (Un In) and taken into account as shown below. Each
exceeding of limit with a time stamp is stored with the FIFO method.
Three-phase power
(2)
(3)
Hysteresis
High alarm limit
(1)
(4)
High warn. limit
(1) High warning

(2) High alarm
(3) High alarm OK
(4) High warning OK
(5) Low warning
Normal zone (6) Low alarm
(7) Low alarm OK
(8) Low warning OK
(5)
(8)
Low warn. limit

(7)
(6)
Low alarm limit
High warning
Outputs
High alarm
Low warning
Low alarm Powlimi2
10
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for MEPE7 is 207.
Data Description
direction
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
11

direction
Power direction V1 0 or 11) - 0 R/W Direction of power flow

supervision
Energy interval V3 0...6 3) - 3 R/W Time interval for energy

calculation

P3 threshold V5 1...999999 kW 999999 R/W Threshold value for active

power
Q3 threshold V6 1...999999 kvar 999999 R/W Threshold value for reactive

power
P3 limit select. V7 0...9 5) - 0 R/W Selection of active power limits

to be monitored
Q3 limit select. V8 0...9 5) - 0 R/W Selection of reactive power

limits to be monitored
P3 high warning V9 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/W High warning limit value for

active power
P3 high alarm V10 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/W High alarm limit value for active
power
P3 low warning V11 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/W Low warning limit value for
active power
P3 low alarm V12 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/W Low alarm limit value for active
power
Q3 high warning V13 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/W High warning limit value for
reactive power
Q3 high alarm V14 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/W High alarm limit value for
reactive power
Q3 low warning V15 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/W Low warning limit value for
reactive power
Q3 low alarm V16 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/W Low alarm limit value for
reactive power
Energy meas. V17 0 or 1 6) - 0 R/W Parameter for enabling energy

measurement and registration
MEPEmode V18 0...13 7) - 0 R Power measurement mode
Time interval V19 1600 s 1 R/W Interval for threshold

supervision
PF Threshold V20 0.010.5 - 0.5 R/W Threshold value for power

factor
12

direction



1)
Power detection 0 = Forward; 1 = Reverse
2)
3)
Energy interval 0 = 1 min; 1 = 5 min; 2 = 10 min; 3 = 15 min; 4 = 30 min; 5 = 60 min;
6 = 120 min
4)
Threshold select 0 = Not in use; 1 = Absolute alg.; 2 = Integrat. alg.; 3 = Time interval
5)
Power limits 0 = Not in use; 1 = HW,HA, LW, LA; 2 = HW, HA; 3 = LW, LA; 4 = HW, LW;
5 = HA, LA; 6 = HW; 7 = HA; 8 = LW; 9 = LA
6)
Energy meas. 0 = No energy reg.; 1 = Energy reg. on
7)
MEPEmode 0 = Not in use; 1 = U1, U2, U3 & I1, I2, I3; 2 = U12, U23, U0 & I1, I2, I3;
3=U23, U31, U0 & I1, I2, I3; 4 = U12, U31, U0 & I1, I2, I3; 5 = U12, U23 & I1,
I2, I3; 6 = U23, U31 & I1, I2, I3; 7 = U12, U31 & I1, I2, I3; 8 = U1 & I1; 9 = U2
& I2; 10 = U3 & I3; 11 = U12 & I3; 12 = U23 & I1; 13 = U31 & I2
3.3.1 Input data

direction
P3 (kW) I1 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/M 3-phase active power
Q3 (kvar) I2 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/M 3-phase reactive power
Power factor DPF I3 -1.00...1.00 - 0.00 R/M Displacement power

factor cos(j)
Power factor PF I4 -1.00...1.00 - 0.00 R/M Power factor
P3 demand (kW) I5 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/M Active power demand
Q3 demand (kvar) I6 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/M Reactive power demand

1)
Input RESET I7 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Signal for resetting the
demand values and
registers of MEPE7
1)
13
3.3.2 Recorded data

direction
P3 maximum date V201 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Date of P3 max demand
P3 maximum time V202 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Time of P3 max demand
P3 maximum V203 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/M Maximum demand for P3
Q3 maximum date V204 yyyy-mm-dd - - R/M Date of Q3 max demand
Q3 maximum time V205 hh:mm:ss.mss - - R/M Time of Q3 max demand
Q3 maximum V206 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/M Maximum demand for Q3
Energy kWh V207 0...999999999 kWh 0 R/M Active energy in kWh

(Accumulated)
Reverse kWh V208 0...999999999 kWh 0 R/M Reversed active energy in

kWh (Accumulated)
Energy kvarh V209 0...999999999 kvarh 0 R/M Reactive energy in kvarh

(Accumulated)
Reverse kvarh V210 0...999999999 kvarh 0 R/M Reversed reactive energy

in kvarh (Accumulated)
Last save date V411 yyyy-mm-dd - - R/M Date of last registered

energy values
Last save time V412 hh:mm:ss.mss - - R/M Time of last registered

energy values
Last save pos. V413 0...50 1) - 0 R Position of last registered

energy values (1... 50)
Last ener. kWh V414 0...999999 - 0 R/M Last registered active

energy
Last rev. kWh V415 0...999999 - 0 R/M Last registered reversed

active energy
Last ener. kvarh V416 0...999999 - 0 R/M Last registered reactive

energy
Last rev. kvarh V417 0...999999 - 0 R/M Last registered reversed

reactive energy
Reset flag V418 0 or 1 2) - 1 R Indication of valid energy

history
1)
Last save pos. 0 = No registered values
2)
Reset flag 0 = All values valid, 1 = "Last save Pos." values valid
14

direction
Ener. kWh (1...50) V211...V260 0...999999 kWh 0 R Active energy in kWh
(50 latest)

direction
Rev. kWh (1...50) V261...V310 0...999999 kWh 0 R Reversed active
energy in kWh (50
latest)

direction
Ener. kvarh (1...50) V311...V360 0...999999 kvarh 0 R Rective energy in
kvarh (50 latest)

direction
Rev. kvarh (1...50) V361...V410 0...999999 kvarh 0 R Reversed reactive
energy in kvarh (50
latest)
15
3.3.3 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 P3 High warning reset
E1 2 0 P3 High warning activated
E2 4 0 P3 High alarm reset
E3 8 0 P3 High alarm activated
E4 16 0 Q3 High warning reset
E5 32 0 Q3 High warning activated
E6 64 0 Q3 High alarm reset
E7 128 0 Q3 High alarm activated
E8 256 0 P3 Low warning reset
E9 512 0 P3 Low warning activated
E10 1024 0 P3 Low alarm reset
E11 2048 0 P3 Low alarm activated
E12 4096 0 Q3 Low warning reset
E13 8192 0 Q3 Low warning activated
E14 16384 0 Q3 Low alarm reset
E15 32768 0 Q3 Low alarm activated
E16 0 0 - -
E17 131072 0 P3 Delta
E18 0 0 - -
E19 524288 0 Q3 Delta
E20 0 0 - -
E21 2097152 0 S3 Delta
E22 0 0 - -
E23 8388608 0 DPF Delta
E24 0 0 - -
E25 33554432 0 Active energy Delta
E26 0 0 - -
E27 134217728 0 Active reverse energy Delta
E28 0 0 - -
E29 536870912 0 Reactive energy Delta
E30 0 0 - -
E31 2147483648 0 Reactive reverse energy Delta
16
4. Technical Data



Technical Change
revision
B -
C Event reason and event state in the event table changed as follows (an example):
- Event reason: P3 high warning P3
- Event state: Reset High warning reset
D Outputs HighWarning, HighAlarm, LowWarning and LowAlarm added
Control setting parameters:

- EnerOn Energy meas.
- Parameters Time interval and PF Threshold added
- A new value for Threshold select: Time interval
- Event mask parameter range changed:
0720895 04294967295
Recorded data, Data direction of V207V210: R/W R/M
Events E20E31 added: total power S, power factor DPF and energy measurement
17
1MRS752343-MUM MEPE7
Issued: 10/1997
Three-Phase Power and Energy
Measurement
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.3 Registers............................................................................................. 5
2.4 Actual load measurements .................................................................. 6
2.5 Maximum active and reactive power demand...................................... 7
2.6 Active and reactive energy .................................................................. 7
2.8 Threshold supervision ......................................................................... 7
2.8.1 Threshold supervision with absolute threshold ........................... 8
2.8.2 Threshold supervision with integrator algorithm ......................... 8
2.8.3 Threshold supervision with time-based function ......................... 9
2.9 Limit value supervision ...................................................................... 10
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 11

3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 13
3.3.2 Recorded data.......................................................................... 14
3.3.3 Events ...................................................................................... 16
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 17

MEPE7 Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Measures the following distribution network parameters:

- fundamental frequency active power [kW]
- fundamental frequency reactive power [kvar]
- fundamental frequency displacement power factor cos()
- power factor PF including the harmonics
- fundamental frequency active energy [kWh]
- fundamental frequency reactive energy [kvarh]
Three-phase measurement for wye-connected VTs and VDs, and for delta-
connected VTs
Demand supervision with adjustable time intervals for three-phase active and
reactive power
Threshold supervision for three-phase active and reactive power using the
integration method with zero value detection or the absolute threshold method
Limit value monitoring for three-phase active and reactive power with up to four
adjustable limits
Three-phase active and reactive energy measurement, including measurement of
reversed energy
Outputs to be used in the freely programmable logic of the Relay Configuration
Tool included in the CAP 505 Tool Box
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the three-phase power and energy
measurement function block MEPE7 used in products based on the RED 500
Platform, e.g. feeder terminals, in-feeder terminals and motor protection terminals.
2
Substation Automation MEPE7
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI0(3(

RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. Input signal for resetting the registers
edge) of MEPE7

P3 Analogue signal (REAL) Three-phase active power [kW]
Q3 Analogue signal (REAL) Three-phase reactive power
[kvar]
DPF Analogue signal (REAL) Three-phase displacement
power factor
warning limit
alarm limit
warning limit
alarm limit
error
3
2.1 Configuration
The analogue inputs are configured in the Relay Configuration Tool. A special
dialogue box in the configuration tool is also used for selecting the analogue input
combination for power and energy measurement.

transformers or Rogowski coils. It automatically adapts its operation to the channels
Note that RMS measurement must be selected for MEPE7 via the Special
The following analogue input combinations are available in the dialogue box of the
configuration tool. It is important to notice that three-phase power is accurately
measured in situations of asymmetry only when all the phase currents and phase
voltages are known. The correct input combination is selected via the configuration
tool.

4
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block measures the true RMS and fundamental frequency currents and
voltages.
The available analogue channel combinations are shown in the dialogue box of the
Relay Configuration Tool (Figure 2).
)LJXUH $YDLODEOHDQDORJXHFKDQQHOFRPELQDWLRQVLQWKH5HOD\&RQILJXUDWLRQ7RRO
The suppression of harmonics for the fundamental frequency measurement is at least
-50 dB at the frequencies f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,... and fn is the rated
frequency.
2.3 Registers
maximum three-phase active and reactive power demand with date and time
stamps
accumulated three-phase active and reactive energy, forward and reversed
the 50 last three-phase energy values, forward and reverse; each value is integrated
over a settable time interval
The user can reset the registers via the RESET input, or over the serial bus or the local
MMI. When the measurement view is selected and there are no active indications, the
accumulated energy measurements can be reset by pressing the C button for 5 s.
5
2.4 Actual load measurements
The function block measures the following distribution network parameters:
fundamental frequency active power [kW]

fundamental frequency reactive power [kvar]
fundamental frequency displacement power factor cos()
power factor PF including harmonics
fundamental frequency active energy [kWh]
fundamental frequency reactive energy [kvarh]
The power and power factor measurements are derived for wye-connected VTs and
VDs, and delta-connected VTs.
D
S
S1
)LJXUH 7KUHHGLPHQVLRQDOSRZHUWULDQJOH
Explanations to Figure 3:
P Fundamental frequency active power

Q Fundamental frequency reactive power (displacement reactive power)
Fundamental frequency phase displacement
S1 Fundamental frequency apparent power (not displayed)
D Reactive power due to harmonics (not displayed)
S Total apparent power including harmonics (not displayed)
S is calculated on the basis of true RMS values of voltage and current:
S = P 2 + Q 2 +D 2 = URMSIRMS
The phase displacement power factor (DPF) is calculated as follows:
P P
cos() = =
S1 P +Q 2
2
The power factor (PF) is calculated on the basis of total apparent power:
P
PF =
S
6
2.5 Maximum active and reactive power demand

linear average of the active and reactive power measured over a settable demand time
interval, which the user can define with the parameter Demand interval. A new
demand value is obtained once a minute, indicating the actual demand power over the
demand time interval preceding the update time. The actual rolling demand values are
stored in the memory until the value is updated at the end of the following time
interval. Maximum demands are three-phase values.
If the new demand power value exceeds the maximum demand value recorded for
three-phase power, the actual demand value will replace the maximum demand value
recorded. Maximum values are provided with date and time stamps.
2.6 Active and reactive energy
The function block calculates active and reactive energy by integrating the measured
active and reactive power values over a settable time interval, starting daily at 00.00.
The user defines the interval, i.e. how the 1440 minutes per day are divided, with the
parameter Energy interval. Each new demand value is obtained at the end of the
corresponding time interval. The energy values can be spontaneously reported to the
master device (MicroSCADA). The latest 50 values of active and reactive energy are
stored in a cyclical buffer. Accumulated energy values are derived for wye-connected
VTs and VDs, and delta-connected VTs.
The zero value supervision function forces an active or reactive power value below
3 x 0.2% x Un x In to 0. This allows the noise in the input voltage to be ignored. The
function is fixed to 3 x 0.2% x Un x In and it is always active.
The zero value detection function forces a value update if the three-phase active or
reactive power deviates slightly from zero or is zero. Once the active or reactive
power passes (upwards or downwards) the limit 3 x 0.2% x Un x In, the new active or
reactive power values is spontaneously reported to the master device (MicroSCADA).
The function is active when threshold supervision with the absolute threshold method
or the integration method is in use (see the control parameter Threshold select).
2.8 Threshold supervision
Three different methods can be used for the threshold supervision (also known as
delta supervision) and the parameter Threshold select is used for selecting the
method to be used. The methods are absolute, integrated and time based.
7
The following values can be supervised:
Three-phase active power

Three-phase reactive power
Three-phase apparent power
Three-phase displacement power factor
2.8.1 Threshold supervision with absolute threshold
In absolute threshold supervision, the function block compares the actual values of
three-phase active and reactive power with the last reported values. If the actual value
exceeds the last reported value plus the set Threshold value, or is below the last
reported value minus the set Threshold value, the actual value is spontaneously
reported to the master device and will replace the last reported value.
Three-phase power
Reported value
+ Threshold value
Minimum
threshold
0
2.8.2 Threshold supervision with integrator algorithm
In threshold supervision with integrator algorithm, the function block calculates the
difference between the last reported power value and the actual value for each task
cycle. The difference is added to the internal accumulated (integrated) value register.
If the accumulated deltas exceed the set Threshold value, the actual value is
The internal threshold difference register is set to zero.
8
Three-phase power
Reported value
Reported value
Minimum
threshold
0
+ Threshold value x
Time interval
Reference level
- Threshold value x
Time interval
Thsinte5
the accumulated power value exceeds the set Threshold value, or

Example 1:
1 second
Example 2:
2 seconds
Example 3:
Threshold value = 10% and Time interval = 2s new measurement value is sent
after 10 seconds
2.8.3 Threshold supervision with time-based function
If the time-based threshold supervision is used, the function block sends the values to
the master device at intervals selected with the control parameter Time interval.
9
The limit value supervision function monitors up to four different limits for both
three-phase active power and three-phase reactive power. The user specifies the
warning and alarm limits to be supervised and monitored with the parameter Limit
selection. The limits can also be changed on-line.
The function checks each limit independently, which means that if the active or
reactive power exceeds several limits during a task execution cycle, each exceeding of
fixed to 1% of the nominal value (Un In) and taken into account as shown below. Each
exceeding of limit with a time stamp is stored with the FIFO method.
Three-phase power
(2)
(3)
Hysteresis
High alarm limit
(1)
(4)
High warn. limit
(1) High warning

(2) High alarm
(3) High alarm OK
(4) High warning OK
(5) Low warning
Normal zone (6) Low alarm
(7) Low alarm OK
(8) Low warning OK
(5)
(8)
Low warn. limit

(7)
(6)
Low alarm limit
High warning
Outputs
High alarm
Low warning
Low alarm Powlimi2
10
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for MEPE7 is 207.
Data Description
direction
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
11

direction
Power direction V1 0 or 11) - 0 R/W Direction of power flow

supervision
Energy interval V3 0...6 3) - 3 R/W Time interval for energy

calculation

P3 threshold V5 1...999999 kW 999999 R/W Threshold value for active

power
Q3 threshold V6 1...999999 kvar 999999 R/W Threshold value for reactive

power
P3 limit select. V7 0...9 5) - 0 R/W Selection of active power limits

to be monitored
Q3 limit select. V8 0...9 5) - 0 R/W Selection of reactive power

limits to be monitored
P3 high warning V9 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/W High warning limit value for

active power
P3 high alarm V10 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/W High alarm limit value for active
power
P3 low warning V11 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/W Low warning limit value for
active power
P3 low alarm V12 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/W Low alarm limit value for active
power
Q3 high warning V13 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/W High warning limit value for
reactive power
Q3 high alarm V14 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/W High alarm limit value for
reactive power
Q3 low warning V15 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/W Low warning limit value for
reactive power
Q3 low alarm V16 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/W Low alarm limit value for
reactive power
Energy meas. V17 0 or 1 6) - 0 R/W Parameter for enabling energy

measurement and registration
MEPEmode V18 0...13 7) - 0 R Power measurement mode
Time interval V19 1600 s 1 R/W Interval for threshold

supervision
PF Threshold V20 0.010.5 - 0.5 R/W Threshold value for power

factor
12

direction
1)
Power detection 0 = Forward; 1 = Reverse
2)
3)
Energy interval 0 = 1 min; 1 = 5 min; 2 = 10 min; 3 = 15 min; 4 = 30 min; 5 = 60 min;
6 = 120 min
4)
Threshold select 0 = Not in use; 1 = Absolute alg.; 2 = Integrat. alg.; 3 = Time interval
5)
Power limits 0 = Not in use; 1 = HW,HA, LW, LA; 2 = HW, HA; 3 = LW, LA; 4 = HW, LW;
5 = HA, LA; 6 = HW; 7 = HA; 8 = LW; 9 = LA
6)
Energy meas. 0 = No energy reg.; 1 = Energy reg. on
7)
MEPEmode 0 = Not in use; 1 = U1, U2, U3 & I1, I2, I3; 2 = U12, U23, U0 & I1, I2, I3;
3=U23, U31, U0 & I1, I2, I3; 4 = U12, U31, U0 & I1, I2, I3; 5 = U12, U23 & I1,
I2, I3; 6 = U23, U31 & I1, I2, I3; 7 = U12, U31 & I1, I2, I3; 8 = U1 & I1; 9 = U2
& I2; 10 = U3 & I3; 11 = U12 & I3; 12 = U23 & I1; 13 = U31 & I2
3.3.1 Input data

direction
P3 (kW) I1 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/M 3-phase active power
Q3 (kvar) I2 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/M 3-phase reactive power
Power factor DPF I3 -1.00...1.00 - 0.00 R/M Displacement power

factor cos(j)
Power factor PF I4 -1.00...1.00 - 0.00 R/M Power factor
P3 demand (kW) I5 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/M Active power demand
Q3 demand (kvar) I6 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/M Reactive power demand

1)
Input RESET I7 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Signal for resetting the
demand values and
registers of MEPE7
1)
13
3.3.2 Recorded data

direction
P3 maximum date V201 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Date of P3 max demand
P3 maximum time V202 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Time of P3 max demand
P3 maximum V203 -999999...999999 kW 0 R/M Maximum demand for P3
Q3 maximum date V204 yyyy-mm-dd - - R/M Date of Q3 max demand
Q3 maximum time V205 hh:mm:ss.mss - - R/M Time of Q3 max demand
Q3 maximum V206 -999999...999999 kvar 0 R/M Maximum demand for Q3
Energy kWh V207 0...999999999 kWh 0 R/M Active energy in kWh

(Accumulated)
Reverse kWh V208 0...999999999 kWh 0 R/M Reversed active energy in

kWh (Accumulated)
Energy kvarh V209 0...999999999 kvarh 0 R/M Reactive energy in kvarh

(Accumulated)
Reverse kvarh V210 0...999999999 kvarh 0 R/M Reversed reactive energy

in kvarh (Accumulated)
Last save date V411 yyyy-mm-dd - - R/M Date of last registered

energy values
Last save time V412 hh:mm:ss.mss - - R/M Time of last registered

energy values
Last save pos. V413 0...50 1) - 0 R Position of last registered

energy values (1... 50)
Last ener. kWh V414 0...999999 - 0 R/M Last registered active

energy
Last rev. kWh V415 0...999999 - 0 R/M Last registered reversed

active energy
Last ener. kvarh V416 0...999999 - 0 R/M Last registered reactive

energy
Last rev. kvarh V417 0...999999 - 0 R/M Last registered reversed

reactive energy
Reset flag V418 0 or 1 2) - 1 R Indication of valid energy

history
1)
Last save pos. 0 = No registered values
2)
Reset flag 0 = All values valid, 1 = "Last save Pos." values valid
14

direction
Ener. kWh (1...50) V211...V260 0...999999 kWh 0 R Active energy in kWh
(50 latest)

direction
Rev. kWh (1...50) V261...V310 0...999999 kWh 0 R Reversed active
energy in kWh (50
latest)

direction
Ener. kvarh (1...50) V311...V360 0...999999 kvarh 0 R Rective energy in
kvarh (50 latest)

direction
Rev. kvarh (1...50) V361...V410 0...999999 kvarh 0 R Reversed reactive
energy in kvarh (50
latest)
15
3.3.3 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 P3 High warning reset
E1 2 0 P3 High warning activated
E2 4 0 P3 High alarm reset
E3 8 0 P3 High alarm activated
E4 16 0 Q3 High warning reset
E5 32 0 Q3 High warning activated
E6 64 0 Q3 High alarm reset
E7 128 0 Q3 High alarm activated
E8 256 0 P3 Low warning reset
E9 512 0 P3 Low warning activated
E10 1024 0 P3 Low alarm reset
E11 2048 0 P3 Low alarm activated
E12 4096 0 Q3 Low warning reset
E13 8192 0 Q3 Low warning activated
E14 16384 0 Q3 Low alarm reset
E15 32768 0 Q3 Low alarm activated
E17 131072 0 P3 Delta
E19 524288 0 Q3 Delta
E21 2097152 0 S3 Delta
E23 8388608 0 DPF Delta
E25 33554432 0 Active energy Delta
E27 134217728 0 Active reverse energy Delta
E29 536870912 0 Reactive energy Delta
E31 2147483648 0 Reactive reverse energy Delta
16
4. Technical Data



Technical Change
revision
B -
C Event reason and event state in the event table changed as follows (an example):
- Event reason: P3 high warning P3
- Event state: Reset High warning reset
D Outputs HighWarning, HighAlarm, LowWarning and LowAlarm added

- EnerOn Energy meas.
- Parameters Time interval and PF Threshold added
- A new value for Threshold select: Time interval
- Event mask parameter range changed:
0720895 04294967295
Recorded data, Data direction of V207V210: R/W R/M
Events E20E31 added: total power S, power factor DPF and energy measurement
E - Event mask parameter range changed: 0...4294967295 -> 0...2863333375
- DPF event E23 has been added to LON general interrogation (GI)
17
1MRS752344-MUM MEVO1_
Issued: 10/1997 Residual Voltage Measurement
Contents
1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.3 Registers............................................................................................. 4
2.4 Actual residual voltage measurement.................................................. 4
2.5 Maximum residual voltage................................................................... 4
2.6 Zero value supervision and zero value detection ................................. 4
2.8 Threshold supervision with integrator algorithm................................... 6
3 Parameters and Events ............................................................................ 8
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 8
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................... 9
3.3.2 Recorded data............................................................................ 9
3.3.3 Events ........................................................................................ 9
4 Technical Data ........................................................................................ 10
MEVO1_ Substation Automation
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
True RMS measurement of residual voltage
Actual residual voltage values displayed in voltages and as p.u. values
Threshold supervision using the integration method or the absolute threshold
method
Limit value monitoring with up to two adjustable limits
Residual voltage to be measured by means of a conventional voltage transformer or
a voltage divider
Residual voltage output to be used in the freely programmable logic of the Relay
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the residual voltage measurement function
blocks MEVO1A and MEVO1B that are identical in operation.
MEVO1A and MEVO1B can be used in various applications and products based on
the RED 500 Platform, e.g. feeder terminals, in-feeder terminals, motor protection
terminals and transformer protection terminals.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI0(92$DQG0(92%
2
Substation Automation MEVO1_

Uo Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring residual voltage U0
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Input signal for resetting the registers of the
function block

UoMEAS Analogue signal (REAL) Measured value of residual voltage U0 (V)
HighWarning Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Indication of an exceeded high warning limit
HighAlarm Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Indication of an exceeded high alarm limit
ERR Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Indication of a configuration error
3
2.1 Configuration
The analogue channel number for the U0 input is selected by means of the Relay
Configuration Tool.
Conventional voltage transformers or voltage dividers can be used for measuring the
residual voltages. The function block automatically adapts its operation to the
channels and measuring devices selected in the configuration tool.
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block measures the true RMS residual voltage. Note that RMS
measurement must be selected for the voltage inputs via the Special Measurements
dialogue of the configuration tool.
The voltage value is updated once a fundamental frequency cycle, i.e. the integration
time for the true RMS calculation is one fundamental cycle.
2.3 Registers
The maximum peak value of the residual voltage is recorded with date and time
stamps.
MMI.
2.4 Actual residual voltage measurement
The actual residual voltage value is displayed in voltages and as a p.u. value.
2.5 Maximum residual voltage
The maximum peak value of the residual voltage is recorded after the last reset of
registers. The maximum peak value is calculated by means of slightly filtered values
of residual voltage. The maximum residual voltage is cleared by resetting the register.
A residual voltage below 0.5% Un is forced to 0% Un. This allows the noise in the
input voltage to be ignored. The zero value supervision is fixed to 0.5% Un, and is
always active.
The zero value detection function is used to force a voltage value update if it deviates
slightly from zero or is zero. Zero value detection operates so that once a residual
voltage passes (upwards or downwards) the limit 0.5% Un, the new residual voltage
value is spontaneously reported to the master device (MicroSCADA) provided the
threshold supervision with the absolute threshold method or the integration method is
in use (see the control parameter Threshold select).
4
residual voltage value with the last reported value. If the actual value exceeds the last
reported value plus the set Threshold value or is below the last reported value minus
the set Threshold value, the actual value is spontaneously reported to the master
device and will replace the last reported value.
Voltage
Voltage value update Voltage value update
Reported value
+ Threshold value
Minimum
threshold
0
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKUHVKROGVXSHUYLVLRQZLWKDEVROXWHDOJRULWKP
5
calculates the difference between the last reported voltage value and the actual value
for each task cycle. The difference is added to the internal accumulated (integrated)
value register. If the accumulated delta exceeds the set Threshold value, the actual
value is spontaneously reported to the master device. The actual value replaces the last
reported value. The internal threshold difference register is set to zero.
Voltage
Reported value
Reported value
Minimum
threshold
0
+ Threshold value
Reference level
- Threshold value
The threshold difference register is cleared if the accumulated voltage value exceeds
the set Threshold value.
6
For residual voltage, up to two different limits can be monitored. The parameter
Limit selection is used to specify the limits to be supervised and monitored. Each
limit is checked independently. If the residual voltage exceeds several limits during an
execution task cycle, each exceeding of limit is reported to the master device
independently. The hysteresis of each limit is fixed to 1% of the nominal value and
taken into account as shown below. Each exceeding of limit with a time stamp is
stored with the FIFO method. The outputs HighWarning and HighAlarm are activated
as shown below. Warning and alarm limits can be changed on-line.
Voltage % Un
(2)
(3)
Hysteresis
20
High alarm limit
(1)
(4)
18
High warn. limit
16
Normal zone (1) High warning

14 (2) High alarm
(3) High alarm OK
(4) High warning OK
12
10
0
Outputs
High warning
High alarm
Vollimi3
7
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for MEVO1A is 205 and that for MEVO1B
226.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
8

direction
Threshold value V2 0.1...25.0 % Un 1.0 R/W Threshold value for
threshold supervision
High warning V4 2.0...100.0 % Un 2.0 R/W High warning limit value
High alarm V5 2.0...100.0 % Un 10.0 R/W High alarm limit value
Event mask 4 V107 0...47 - 0 R/W
Event mask 4 for event
1)
2)
Limit selection 0 = Not in use; 1 = HW, HA; 2 = HW; 3 = HA
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Uo I1 0...150000 V 0 R/M Voltage U0 in voltages
Uo I2 0.0...120.0 % Un 0.0 R/M Voltage U0 in percent
Input RESET I3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for resetting the demand
values and registers of the
function block
1)
3.3.2 Recorded data

direction
Uo Peak Date V201 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Date of U0 peak
Uo Peak Time V202 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Time of U0 peak
Uo Peak Volts V203 0...150000 V 0 R/M U0 peak in volts
Uo Peak % V204 0.0...120.0 % Un 0.0 R/M U0 peak in percent
3.3.3 Events
coefficient mask
E0 1 0 U0 High warning reset
E1 2 0 U0 High warning activated
E2 4 0 U0 High alarm reset
E3 8 0 U0 High alarm activated
E4 0 0 - -
E5 32 0 U0 Delta
9
4 Technical Data
f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 1.0% of set value or 0.01 x Un
Accuracy class of the operation Accuracy class of the operation is 1.0


block revision
MEVO1A B -
C Event reason and event state in the event table changed as follows (an
example):
Event reason: U0 high warning U0

D Outputs HighWarning and HighAlarm added
Input data: Units removed from parameter names:
Uo (V) Uo
Uo (%) Uo
MEVO1B A -
B Input data: Units removed from parameter names:
Uo (V) Uo
Uo (%) Uo
10
1MRS752345-MUM MEVO3_
Issued: 10/1997
Three-Phase Voltage Measurement
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.3 Registers............................................................................................. 4
2.4 Actual voltage measurement ............................................................... 5
2.5 Maximum and minimum average voltages .......................................... 5
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 9
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 11
3.3.2 Recorded data.......................................................................... 12
3.3.3 Events ...................................................................................... 13
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 16

1. Introduction
1.1 Features
True RMS measurement of phase or phase-to-phase voltages

Actual voltage values displayed in voltages and as p.u. values
Average voltage supervision with adjustable time intervals
Threshold supervision for voltages by the integration method or the absolute
algorithm
Limit value monitoring for each voltage with up to four adjustable limits
Voltages to be measured by means of conventional voltage transformers or voltage
dividers
Voltage outputs to be used in the freely programmable logic of the Relay
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase voltage measurement

function blocks MEVO3A and MEVO3B that are identical in operation.
The three-phase voltage measurement function blocks can be used in various

applications and products based on the RED 500 Platform, e.g. feeder terminals, in-
feeder terminals, motor protection terminals and transformer protection terminals.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROV0(92$DQG0(92%
2

of the function block

UL1_U12MEAS Analogue signal (REAL) Measured value of voltage UL1 / U12 (kV)
HighWarning Digital signal (BOOL, active Indication of an exceeded high warning
high) limit
HighAlarm Digital signal (BOOL, active Indication of an exceeded high alarm
high) limit
LowWarning Digital signal (BOOL, active Indication of an exceeded low warning
high) limit
LowAlarm Digital signal (BOOL, active Indication of an exceeded low alarm
high) limit
high)
3
2.1 Configuration
The analogue channel numbers for the corresponding UL1_U12, UL2_U23 and
UL3_U31 inputs are selected by means of the Relay Configuration Tool.
Conventional voltage transformers or voltage dividers can be used for measuring the
voltages. The function block automatically adapts its operation to the channels and
measuring devices selected in the configuration tool.
Two voltages can be connected to each Uchx input:
Input name Measured voltage

UL1_U12 UL1 or U12
UL2_U23 UL2 or U23
UL3_U31 UL3 or U31
Both phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth voltages can be connected to the function
block at the same time. Two voltage inputs can also be left without a connection.
When all three voltage inputs are unconnected, the output signal ERR is set to TRUE.
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block measures true RMS phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltages. If

voltage dividers are used, only phase-to-earth voltages can be measured. Note that
RMS measurement must be selected for the voltage inputs via the Special
The voltage values are updated once per fundamental frequency cycle, i.e. the
integration time for true RMS calculation is one fundamental cycle.
2.3 Registers
maximum average voltage for each channel with date and time stamps
minimum average voltage for each channel with date and time stamps
MMI.
4
2.4 Actual voltage measurement
Actual voltage values are displayed in voltages and as p.u. values. The parameter
Phase selection is used for selecting the voltages to be measured. If a voltage has
not been selected, the actual voltage value will be zero and the supervision functions
are not executed on that particular voltage.
2.5 Maximum and minimum average voltages
Maximum and minimum average functions are implemented by means of a function

that calculates the linear average of the voltages measured over a settable average
time interval (parameter Average interval). A new average value is obtained once a
minute, indicating the actual average voltage over the average time interval preceding
the update time. The actual rolling average values are stored in the memory until the
value is updated at the end of the following time interval. Actual average voltages are
measured separately in each channel.
If the new average voltage value exceeds the maximum average value recorded, the
actual average value will replace the maximum average value recorded. Should the
new actual average be smaller than the minimum average recorded, the actual average
value will replace the recorded minimum average. Maximum and minimum values are
provided with date and time stamps.
Maximum and minimum values are cleared when the registers are reset.
A voltage below 1.0% Un is forced to 0% Un. This allows the noise in the input
voltage to be ignored. The zero value supervision is fixed to 1.0% Un and is always
active.
The zero value detection function is used to force a voltage value update if it deviates
slightly from zero or is zero. Zero value detection operates so that once a voltage
passes (upwards or downwards) the limit 1.0% Un, the new voltage value is
spontaneously reported to the master device (MicroSCADA), provided the threshold
supervision with an absolute threshold or the integration method is in use (see the
control parameter Threshold select).
5
Two different methods can be used for threshold supervision (also known as delta
supervision) and the method to be used is selected with the parameter Threshold
select.
voltage value with the last reported value. If the actual value exceeds the last reported
value plus the set Threshold value or is below the last reported value minus the set
Threshold value, the actual value is spontaneously reported to the master device and
will replace the last reported value.
Voltage
Reported value
+ T hreshold value
Minimum
threshold
0
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKUHVKROGVXSHUYLVLRQZLWKDEVROXWHDOJRULWKP
6
calculates the difference between the last reported voltage value and the actual value
for each task cycle. The difference is added to the internal accumulated (integrated)
value register. If the accumulated delta exceeds the set Threshold value, the actual
value is spontaneously reported to the master device. The actual value replaces the
last reported value. The internal threshold difference register is set to zero.
Voltage
Reported value
Reported value
Minimum
threshold
0
+ Threshold value
Reference level
- Threshold value
the accumulated voltage value exceeds the set Threshold value, or

7
For all three phase voltages, up to four different limits can be monitored. The
parameter Limit selection is used to specify the limit to be supervised and
monitored. Each phase and limit is checked independently, which means that if a
phase voltage exceeds several limits during an execution task cycle, each exceeding of
fixed to 1% of the nominal value and taken into account as shown below. Each
exceeding of limit with a time stamp is stored with the FIFO method. The outputs
HighWarning, HighAlarm, LowWarning and LowAlarm are activated as shown
below. The warning and alarm limits can be changed on-line.
Voltage x Un
(2)
(3)
1.20 Hysteresis
High alarm limit
(1)
1.10 (4)
High warn. limit
1.00
(1) High warning

0.90 (2) High alarm
(3) High alarm OK
(4) High warning OK
0.80 (5) Low warning
(6) Low alarm
(7) Low alarm OK
0.70
0.60
0.50
(5)
(8)
0.40
Low warn. limit
(7)
(6)
0.30
Low alarm limit
0.20
0.10
0.00
High warning
Outputs
High alarm
Low warning
Low alarm
Vollim03
8
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for MEVO3A is 204 and that for MEVO3B
206.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
9

direction
Phase selection V1 0...6 1) - 0 R/W Selection of channels to be
measured
Average interval V2 0...5 2) - 1 R/W Time interval for average

value

Threshold value V4 0.01...1.00 x Un 0.01 R/W Threshold value for threshold

supervision
High warning V6 0.80...1.50 x Un 1.00 R/W High warning limit value
High alarm V7 0.80...1.50 x Un 1.10 R/W High alarm limit value
Low warning V8 0.00...0.99 x Un 0.00 R/W Low warning limit value
Low alarm V9 0.00...0.99 x Un 0.00 R/W Low alarm limit value








1)
Phase selection 0 = Uch1, Uch2, Uch3; 1 = Uch1, Uch2; 2 = Uch2, Uch3; 3 = Uch1, Uch3;
4 = Uch1; 5 = Uch2; 6 = Uch3
2)
Average interval 0 = 1 min; 1 = 5 min; 2 = 10 min; 3 = 15 min; 4 = 30 min; 5 = 60 min
3)
4)
5 = HA, LA; 6 = HW; 7 = HA; 8 = LW; 9 = LA
10
3.3.1 Input data

direction
UL1_U12 I1 0.00...999.99 kV 0.00 R/M Voltage UL1_U12 in voltages
UL1_U12 I4 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Voltage UL1_U12 in percent
UL1_U12 average I7 0.00...999.99 kV 0.00 R/M Average value of UL1_U12 in

voltages

voltages

voltages
UL1_U12 average I10 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Average value of UL1_U12 in

percent

percent

percent

demand values and registers
of the function block
1)
11
3.3.2 Recorded data

direction
U1_12 Max Date V201 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Date of UL1_U12 maximum
average voltage
U1_12 Max Time V202 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Time of UL1_U12 maximum

average voltage
U1_12 Max (kV) V203 0.00...999.99 kV 0.00 R/M Maximum average of UL1_U12
in voltages
U1_12 Max (pu) V204 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Maximum average of UL1_U12
in percent

average voltage

average voltage
in voltages
in percent

average voltage

average voltage
in voltages
in percent
U1_12 Min Date V213 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Date of UL1_U12 minimum

average voltage
U1_12 Min Time V214 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Time of UL1_U12 minimum

average voltage
U1_12 Min (kV) V215 0.00...999.99 kV 0.00 R/M Minimum average of UL1_U12 in
voltages
U1_12 Min (pu) V216 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Minimum average of UL1_U12 in
percent
U2_23 Min Date V217 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Date of UL2_U23 minimum

average voltage

average voltage
voltages
Table continues on the next page.
12

direction
percent
U3_31 Min Date V221 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Date of UL3_U31 minimum average
voltage

average voltage
voltages
percent
3.3.3 Events
Events 0...31:

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 UL1 High warning reset
E1 2 0 UL1 High warning activated
E6 64 0 UL1 High alarm reset
E7 128 0 UL1 High alarm activated
E12 4096 0 UL1 Low warning reset
E13 8192 0 UL1 Low warning activated
E18 262144 0 UL1 Low alarm reset
E19 524288 0 UL1 Low alarm activated
Table continues on the next page.
13

coefficient mask
E24 0 0 - -
E25 33554432 0 UL1 Delta
E26 0 0 - -
E27 134217728 0 UL2 Delta
E28 0 0 - -
E29 536870912 0 UL3 Delta
E30 0 0 - -
E31 0 0 - -
14
Events 32...61:

coefficient mask
E44 4096 0 U12 Low warning reset
E45 8192 0 U12 Low warning activated
E50 262144 0 U12 Low alarm reset
E51 524288 0 U12 Low alarm activated
E56 0 0 - -
E57 33554432 0 U12 Delta
E58 0 0 - -
E59 134217728 0 U23 Delta
E60 0 0 - -
E61 536870912 0 U31 Delta
15
4. Technical Data

Accuracy class of the operation Accuracy class of the operation is 1.0


block revision
MEVO3A B -
C Event reason and event state in the event table changed as follows (an
example):
Event reason: U1 high warning U1

D Input data: Units removed from parameter names
Warning and alarm outputs added
Names of the voltage inputs changed:
U1_12 UL1_U12, etc.

MEVO3B A -
B Input data: Units removed from parameter names
Names of the voltage inputs changed:
U1_12 UL1_U12, etc.
16
1MRS100162 RE_5_ _
1MRS100169 Alarm
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C (MMI, remote)
Data subject to change without notice (MMIALAR1MMIALAR8)
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................... 2
1.1 Features .............................................................................................. 2

1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration ....................................................................................... 3
2.2 Non-latched alarm ............................................................................... 3
2.3 Latched alarm, steady LEDs................................................................ 4
2.4 Latched alarm, blinking LEDs .............................................................. 5

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 6
3.3 Input data ............................................................................................ 7
3.4 Events ................................................................................................. 7
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 8
RE_5_ _ MMIALAR1MMIALAR8 ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Controls the alarm LED and sends the indications to the MMI alarm view
Latched or non-latched alarm
Different colours and blink modes to be defined in the Relay Mimic Editor
Alarm to be acknowledged remotely, locally or by logic
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the eight alarm function blocks
MMIALAR1...MMIALAR8 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The
The function block MMIALAR_ handles the MMI alarm LED and sends the
indications to the MMI alarm view. The activation and acknowledgement of the
function block is controlled by logic signals. Different LED indicators can be selected
according to the requirements.
)LJXUH $VDQH[DPSOHWKHIXQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI00,$/$5

ON Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Process alarm data
ACK Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Logic alarm acknowledgement

AALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Audible alarm
2
ABB Automation MMIALAR1MMIALAR8 RE_5_ _
2.1 Configuration
The visible alarm indication on the alarm view and the alarm LED configurations can
be defined in the alarm dialogue box of the Relay Mimic Editor. The logical behavior
is configured in the Relay Configuration Tool.
The ON signal defines the alarm status. Each alarm can be acknowledged separately
via the logic ACK signal or the remote acknowledgement command. Locally, all
alarms can be acknowledged with the C button in the alarm view. Each alarm can be
configured in the alarm view of the Relay Mimic Editor. Three basic modes for
alarms are supported regarding latching: non-latched, latched with steady LED and
latched with blinking LED. The audible alarm signal (AALARM) is activated when
an alarm is activated (non-latched alarm is a special case) and deactivated when the
alarm is acknowledged remotely, locally or via the logic ACK signal.
2.2 Non-latched alarm
In the non-latched mode, the ON-signal state toggles the ON and OFF state texts and
the corresponding LED colours. Alarm acknowledgement clears the last time stamp
line from the alarm view but leaves the corresponding alarm LED state unchanged.
An event is generated by the rising and falling edge of the ON signal and the
acknowledgement.
3
Nonlatched, steady (example 1)
On text
09-24 12:40:00
On color f or steady led
ACK
ON
AALARM
Off text O n t ext Off text On text

09-24 12:30:00 09-24 12:32:00
Off color f or steady led On color for steady led Off color for st eady led On color for steady led
Nonlatched, steady (example 1 cont inues)
ACK
ON
AALARM
On t ext Of f text Off text

09-24 12:50:00
On color for s teady led Of f color for steady led Off color for steady led
)LJXUH 1RQODWFKHGDODUP
2.3 Latched alarm, steady LEDs
Latched, steady alarms can be acknowledged only when the ON signal is not active.
The time stamp of the first alarm is registered. A successfull acknowledgement clears
the time stamp line from the alarm view and the corresponding alarm LED. An event
is generated by the rising and falling edge of the ON signal and the acknowledgement.
(The alarm mode is compatible with the SPTO 1D6 relay module).
Latched, steady
ACK
ON
AALARM
O ff text O n t ext Off text

09-24 12:30:00
O ff color for st eady led O n color for steady led Off color for steady led
)LJXUH /DWFKHGDODUPZLWKVWHDG\/('
4
2.4 Latched alarm, blinking LEDs
Latched, blinking alarms can be acknowledged after the rising edge of the ON signal.
The time stamp of the first alarm is registered. If the ON signal is not active, the
acknowledgement clears the time stamp line from the alarm view and the
corresponding alarm LED. However, if the ON signal is active during the
acknowledgement, the alarm LED mode changes to stable and the time stamp is
cleared. Later, when the ON signal is inactive, the alarm LED colour will
automatically change to OFF colour. An event is generated by the rising and falling
edge of the ON signal and the acknowledgement. (The visual indication, visual
indication resetting and audible alarm of this alarm mode are compatible with the
ISA-A standard).
Latched, blinking (example 1)
A CK
ON
AA LA RM
O ff text On text Off t ext

09-24 12:30:00
O ff color for st eady led On color for blinking led Off color for st eady led
ACK
ON
AA LARM
O ff text On text O n text Off text

09-24 12:30:00
O ff color for st eady led On color for blinking led O n color for st eady led Off color f or steady led
)LJXUH /DWFKHGDODUPZLWKEOLQNLQJ/('V
5
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channels for the alarm function blocks are the
following:
MMIALAR1 162
MMIALAR2 163
MMIALAR3 164
MMIALAR4 165
MMIALAR5 166
MMIALAR6 167
MMIALAR7 168
MMIALAR8 169
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
the relay terminal, the event mask value 56 (8 + 16 + 32) is written to the Event
mask 1 parameter (FxxxV101).
32...63.
6

direction
Object mode V1 0...4 1) - 4 R Object mode from mimic file
Object status V2 Bit 0...Bit 2 2) - 0 R/M Object status




1)
Object mode 0 = Nonlatched steady; 1 = Latched steady; 2 = Latched blinking;
4 = Uninitialized
2)
Object status Bit 0 = ON-signal state; Bit 1 = Alarm latched
Bit 2 = Alarm or state (non-latched) acknowledged
3.3 Input data

ON-state I1 1 or 0 1) - 0 R/M ON-signals state
1)
ON-state 1 = ON; 0 = OFF
3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 Alarm (1...8) status Inactive
E1 2 1 Alarm (1...8) status Active
E2 4 0 - -
E3 8 0 Alarm (1...8) acknowledgement -
7
4. Technical Data


A -
B Setting range of event mask parameters changed:

015 011
8
1MRS752355-MUM MMIALAR_
Issued: 10/1997
Alarm
Data subject to change without notice (MMI, remote)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 3
2.2 Non-latched alarm ............................................................................... 3
2.3 Latched alarm, steady LEDs ............................................................... 4
2.4 Latched alarm, blinking LEDs.............................................................. 5

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 6
3.3 Input data ............................................................................................ 7
3.4 Events ................................................................................................. 7
4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 8
MMIALAR_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Controls the alarm LED and sends the indications to the MMI alarm view
Latched or non-latched alarm
Different colours and blink modes to be defined in the Relay Mimic Editor
Alarm to be acknowledged remotely, locally or by logic
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the eight alarm function blocks
MMIALAR1...MMIALAR8 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The
The function block MMIALAR_ handles the MMI alarm LED and sends the
indications to the MMI alarm view. The activation and acknowledgement of the
function block is controlled by logic signals. Different LED indicators can be selected
according to the requirements.
)LJXUH $VDQH[DPSOHWKHIXQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI00,$/$5

ON Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Process alarm data
ACK Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Logic alarm acknowledgement

AALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Audible alarm
2
Substation Automation MMIALAR_
2.1 Configuration
The visible alarm indication on the alarm view and the alarm LED configurations can
be defined in the alarm dialogue box of the Relay Mimic Editor. The logical behavior
is configured in the Relay Configuration Tool.
The ON signal defines the alarm status. Each alarm can be acknowledged separately
via the logic ACK signal or the remote acknowledgement command. Locally, all
alarms can be acknowledged with the C button in the alarm view. Each alarm can be
configured in the alarm view of the Relay Mimic Editor. Three basic modes for
alarms are supported regarding latching: non-latched, latched with steady LED and
latched with blinking LED. The audible alarm signal (AALARM) is activated when
an alarm is activated (non-latched alarm is a special case) and deactivated when the
alarm is acknowledged remotely, locally or via the logic ACK signal.
2.2 Non-latched alarm
In the non-latched mode, the ON-signal state toggles the ON and OFF state texts and
the corresponding LED colours. Alarm acknowledgement clears the last time stamp
line from the alarm view but leaves the corresponding alarm LED state unchanged.
An event is generated by the rising and falling edge of the ON signal and the
acknowledgement.
3
Nonlatched, steady (example 1)
On text
09-24 12:40:00
On color f or steady led
ACK
ON
AALARM
Off text O n t ext Off text On text

09-24 12:30:00 09-24 12:32:00
Off color f or steady led On color for steady led Off color for st eady led On color for steady led
Nonlatched, steady (example 1 cont inues)
ACK
ON
AALARM
On t ext Of f text Off text

09-24 12:50:00
On color for s teady led Of f color for steady led Off color for steady led
)LJXUH 1RQODWFKHGDODUP
2.3 Latched alarm, steady LEDs
Latched, steady alarms can be acknowledged only when the ON signal is not active.
The time stamp of the first alarm is registered. A successfull acknowledgement clears
the time stamp line from the alarm view and the corresponding alarm LED. An event
is generated by the rising and falling edge of the ON signal and the acknowledgement.
(The alarm mode is compatible with the SPTO 1D6 relay module).
Latched, steady
ACK
ON
AALARM
O ff text O n t ext Off text

09-24 12:30:00
O ff color for st eady led O n color for steady led Off color for steady led
)LJXUH /DWFKHGDODUPZLWKVWHDG\/('
4
2.4 Latched alarm, blinking LEDs
Latched, blinking alarms can be acknowledged after the rising edge of the ON signal.
The time stamp of the first alarm is registered. If the ON signal is not active, the
acknowledgement clears the time stamp line from the alarm view and the
corresponding alarm LED. However, if the ON signal is active during the
acknowledgement, the alarm LED mode changes to stable and the time stamp is
cleared. Later, when the ON signal is inactive, the alarm LED colour will
automatically change to OFF colour. An event is generated by the rising and falling
edge of the ON signal and the acknowledgement. (The visual indication, visual
indication resetting and audible alarm of this alarm mode are compatible with the
ISA-A standard).
A CK
ON
AA LA RM
O ff text On text Off t ext

09-24 12:30:00
O ff color for st eady led On color for blinking led Off color for st eady led
ACK
ON
AA LARM
O ff text On text O n text Off text

09-24 12:30:00
O ff color for st eady led On color for blinking led O n color for st eady led Off color f or steady led
)LJXUH /DWFKHGDODUPZLWKEOLQNLQJ/('V
5
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channels for the alarm function blocks are the
following:
MMIALAR1 162
MMIALAR2 163
MMIALAR3 164
MMIALAR4 165
MMIALAR5 166
MMIALAR6 167
MMIALAR7 168
MMIALAR8 169
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
the relay terminal, the event mask value 56 (8 + 16 + 32) is written to the Event
mask 1 parameter (FxxxV101).
32...63.
6

direction
Object mode V1 0...3 1) - 3 R Object mode from mimic file
Object status V2 Bit 0...Bit 2 2) - 0 R/M Object status




1)
Object mode 0 = Nonlatched; 1 = Latched; 2 = Latched blink;
3 = Uninitialized
2)
Object status Bit 0 = ON-signal state; Bit 1 = Alarm latched
Bit 2 = Alarm or state (non-latched) acknowledged
3.3 Input data

ON-state I1 1 or 0 1) - 0 R/M ON-signals state
1)
ON-state 1 = ON; 0 = OFF
3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 Alarm (1...8) status Inactive
E1 2 1 Alarm (1...8) status Active
E2 4 0 - -
E3 8 0 Alarm (1...8) acknowledgement -
7
4. Technical Data


A -
B Setting range of event mask parameters changed:

015 011
8
1MRS752356-MUM MMIDATA_
Issued: 10/1997
Version: C/1.2.2002
MIMIC Dynamic Datapoint
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
3. Parameters................................................................................................ 3
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 3

4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 4
MMIDATA_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Dynamic data point displayed in the MIMIC view

Configuration to be defined in the Relay Mimic Editor
Data visibility to be defined by the process
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the five dynamic data point function blocks
MMIDATA1...MMIDATA5 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI00,'$7$00,'$7$00,'$7$
00,'$7$DQG00,'$7$

ON Digital signal (active high) Visibility of the datapoint
DATA REAL Value to be displayed

Relay Mimic Editor, while the logical connection to process data can be configured in
the Relay Configuration Tool.
2
Substation Automation MMIDATA_
3. Parameters
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channels for the dynamic data point function blocks
are the following:
MMIDATA1 157
MMIDATA 2 158
MMIDATA 3 159
MMIDATA 4 160
MMIDATA 5 161
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write

direction
Data value V1 -999.9...9999.9 - 0 R/M Dynamic data point value
Data visibility V2 1 or 0 1) - 0 R/M Dynamic data point visibility

1)
Data visibility 1 = Visible; 0 = Invisible
3
MMIDATA_ Substation Automation
4. Technical Data


A -
4
1MRS752373-MUM MMIWAKE
Issued: 10/1997
Version: D/7.2.2002
Activation of MMI Backlight
Contents
1. Description................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
2.1 General ............................................................................................... 3
3. Setting Values........................................................................................... 4

4. Measurement Values................................................................................ 5
4.1 Events ................................................................................................. 5

5. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 6
MMIWAKE Substation Automation
1. Description
1.1 Features
Digital input activation for MMI backlight.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNLPDJHRI00,:$.(

WAKE Digital signal (BOOL, pos.edge) Activation signal of MMI backlight
2
Substation Automation MMIWAKE
2.1 General
The rising edge of the input signal WAKE activates the MMI backlight. The MMI
display timeout defines how long the display backlight stays active.
3
3. Setting Values

direction
4
Substation Automation MMIWAKE
4. Measurement Values
4.1 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 0 - -
E1 2 0 MMI backlight Activated
5
5. Technical Data

A -
6
1MRS100054 RE_5_ _
Issued: 10/1998
Version: C
Three-phase
Data subject to change without notice Start-Up Supervision for Motors
(MotStart)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.3 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.4 Operation mode .................................................................................. 4
2.4.1 I2 * t mode.................................................................................. 5
2.4.2 I2 * t & stall mode ....................................................................... 6
2.5 Start-up counter .................................................................................. 6
2.6 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 7
2.7 Test mode ........................................................................................... 7
2.8 START, TRIP and STALL outputs ....................................................... 8
2.9 Resetting............................................................................................. 8
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 9
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 10
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 10
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 10
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 10
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 12
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 12
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 12
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 15
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 16

RE_5_ _ MotStart ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Three-phase start-up protection for motors

Thermal stress calculation (I2 x t)
Stall protection with a digital input for stall indication
Cumulative start-up time counter protection
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the three-phase start-up supervision function
block MotStart used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI0RW6WDUW
2
ABB Automation MotStart RE_5_ _

IL1 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring phase
current IL1
current IL2
current IL3
GROUP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Control input for switching
between the setting groups 1
and 2
STALL_IND Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for motor stalling
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos.edge) Input signal for resetting the
registers of MotStart

STALL Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Stall signal
RESTART Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Restart enable signal
configuration error
3
2.1 Configuration

coils. The measuring devices and signal types for the analogue channels are selected
and configured in a special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool. Digital
inputs are configured in the same programming environment (the number of
used).
inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of the function block, and the outputs of
the function block are connected to the output signals in the same way.
2.3 Measuring mode
The calculation of the thermal stress (I2 x t) for the motor is based on the TRUE RMS
measuring principle. The start-up situation for the motor is detected by the PEAK
measuring principle. Harmonics are not suppressed.
2.4 Operation mode
The setting parameter Operation mode is used for selecting one of the three
operation modes available. Mode 0 (Not in use) sets the function out of use, whereas
in mode 1 (IIt) MotStart calculates the thermal stress for the motor and in mode 2 (IIt
& Stall) protects the motor against stalling during a motor start-up.
4
2.4.1 I2 * t mode
The thermal stress during any single start-up is monitored by the start-up supervision
MotStart, which calculates the product I2 x t, i.e. the thermal stress, during a normal
start-up of a motor.
The motor start-up situation is a sequence, where each of the initial three phase
currents is less than 0.05 x In for 60 ms, i.e. the motor is at standstill, and where at
least one phase current within the rising time (60 ms) rises from a value below 0.05 x
In to a value higher than the start value (1.5 x In). If a phase current sample exceeds
the current level within the rising time, the START signal is immediately set to
TRUE, i.e. the START output can be activated before the rising time has elapsed.
The START signal remains active until all the three phase currents fall below 0.9 x
Start current (0.9 x 1.5 x In = 1.35 x In) and remain below that level for 150 ms, i.e.
until the start-up situation is over.
During the motor start-up MotStart measures the start current, raises the value to a
power of 2 and multiplies it by the running time, i.e. calculates the product I2 x t. If
the calculated value exceeds the set value, the function block trips immediately.
Note! The set I2 x t comes from the value set for the Start current parameter raised
to a power of two and multiplied by the value set for the Start time parameter.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQDOLW\RIVWDUWXSVXSHUYLVLRQEDVHGRQ,[W
5
2.4.2 I2 * t & stall mode
In this mode, stall protection operates in parallel to the I2 x t function. The function
stalls during the motor start-up (STALL active) if the stall indication input signal
(STALL_IND) remains active longer than set stall time. An active STALL signal is
indicated by a steady trip LED (red) on the MMI.
Note! The trip and stall functions will both continue protecting the motor even though
the other function has operated.
2.5 Start-up counter
Every time the motor is started, the start-up time is added to a register. If the contents
of the register exceed the preset level, i.e. the value set for the Time limit
parameter, the signal Output RESTART is deactivated. When the start-up situation
is over, the value of the register decreases at a certain speed, which is set via the
parameter Countdown rate. When the value of the register falls below the set time
limit, the signal Output RESTART is activated again. Note that the RESTART
output is normally activated, i.e. a new start is possible, even though its default value
is zero.
For example, the motor manufacturer may state that three starts at the maximum are
allowed within 8 hours and the start-up situation time is 20 s. By initiating three
successive starts we reach the situation illustrated below. As a result, the value of the
register adds up to a total of 60 seconds. Right after the third start has been initiated,
the RESTART output is deactivated and the fourth start will not be allowed, provided
the time limit has been set to 41 seconds.
Furthermore, the maximum of three starts in 8 hours means that the value of the
register should reach the set time limit within 8 hours to allow a new start.
Accordingly, the countdown rate should be 20 seconds in 8 hours and should thus be
set to 20 s / 8 h = 2.5 s / h.
6
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKHVWDUWXSWLPHFRXQWHU
The parameter Time to restart estimates in minutes the time remaining to the
moment when the next start is possible. The parameter is updated when the motor is
not running, i.e. all the phase currents are below 0.05 x In. The parameter Start
counter calculates the number of motor start-ups and is updated at the rising edge of
the START signal.
2.6 Setting groups
The two different groups of setting values, group 1 and 2, are available for the
ways:

1)
time.
2.7 Test mode
7
2.8 START, TRIP and STALL outputs
The minimum pulse width of the corresponding output signal is set via a separate
parameter on MMI (control setting) or serial communication. If the start situation is
longer than the set pulse width, the START signal stays active until the start situation
is over. The output signal TRIP may have a non-latching or latching feature. When the
latching mode has been selected, the TRIP signal remains continuously active though
the operation criteria have reset, until the output is reset.
Note! The values set for the control parameters Trip signal (non-latching or
latching) and Trip pulse (minimum pulse width) apply to both the TRIP output and
the STALL output.
An active STALL signal is indicated by a steady trip LED (red) on the MMI. Active
TRIP and START signals are indicated as normally, i.e. TRIP with a steady trip LED
(red) and START with a steady start LED (yellow).
2.9 Resetting
The TRIP output signal and the registers can be reset either via the RESET input, over
the serial bus or via the local MMI.

1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
8
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for MotStart is 54.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
9
3.2 Setting values

direction
Operation mode S1 0...2 1) - 1 R Selection of operation mode
Start current S2 1.0...10.0 x In 2.0 R Starting current for motor
Start time S3 0.3...250.0 s 5.0 R Starting time for motor
Time limit S4 1.0...500.0 s 10.0 R Time-based restart inhibit limit
Countdown rate S5 2.0...250.0 s/h 60.0 R Countdown rate for the time counter
Stall time S6 2.0...120.0 s 10.0 R Permitted stalling time for rotor

1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = IIt; 2 = IIt & Stall

direction
Start current S42 1.0...10.0 x In 2.0 R/W Starting current for motor
Start time S43 0.3...250.0 s 5.0 R/W Starting time for motor
Time limit S44 1.0...500.0 s 10.0 R/W Time-based restart inhibit limit
Countdown rate S45 2.0...250.0 s/h 60.0 R/W Countdown rate for the time counter
Stall time S46 2.0...120.0 s 10.0 R/W Permitted stalling time for rotor
1)

direction
1)
10

direction

signal

TRIP and STALL outputs

STALL
Start counter V6 0...99999 - 0 R/M Start counter
Time to restart V7 0...99999 min 0 R/M Time to restart enable

registers

4)
Test STALL V33 0 or 1 - - R/W Testing of STALL
(E0 ... E7)
(E0 ... E7)
(E0 ... E7)
(E0 ... E7)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Testing 0 = Do not activate; 1 = Activate
11
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Input GROUP I4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for switching between groups

1 and 2
Input STALL I5 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for motor stalling indication

signals and registers of MotStart
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Output STALL O3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of stall signal

2)
Output RESTART O4 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Restart enable signal
1)
2)
Output RESTART 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
The information required for later fault analysis is recorded at the rising and falling
edge of start or when the function block trips. Tripping can be caused by either the I2
x t function or the stalling function. In case both the I2 x t function and the stalling
function operate, only the first one is recorded.
latest operation always replace the data of the oldest operation. The registers are
updated in the following order: Operation 1, Operation 2, Operation 3, Operation 1,
Operation 2,...
12
The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the START signal and will be updated in
case the function block trips or stalls.
3.3.3.3 Duration and Start time
The duration of the start-up situation is recorded both in seconds and as a percentage
of the set operate time. The duration is updated for both IIT and STALL either at the
falling edge of the START signal i.e. when the motor start-up situation is over, or
when the TRIP or STALL output becomes active.
3.3.3.4 Currents
An average for each of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 is calculated during the start
situation i.e. the time from the rising edge of the START signal until its falling edge
or until the function block trips or stalls. The values of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and
Iy are recorded as multiples of the rated current In.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the Active group parameter, which indicates the setting group
valid for the recorded data, is recorded at the moment of triggering.

direction
Start time V203 0.0...120.0 s 0.0 R/M Duration of start-up

situation in seconds
Duration(IIT) V204 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Duration of start-up

situation (IIT)
Duration(STALL) V205 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Duration of start-up

situation (STALL)
Average IL1 V206 0.0...60.0 x In 0.0 R/M Filtered value of IL1

1)
1)
13

direction


situation (IIT)

situation (STALL)

1)
1)

direction


situation (IIT)

situation (STALL)

1)
14
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from MotStart Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from MotStart Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from MotStart Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from MotStart Activated
E4 16 1 STALL signal from MotStart Reset
E5 32 1 STALL signal from MotStart Activated
E6 64 0 Test mode of MotStart Off
E7 128 0 Test mode of MotStart On
15
4. Technical Data

Current meas.: 2.5% of set value or 0.01 x In

(1
total time < 30 ms

(1
total time < 40 ms

below the start value (2 < 50 ms
Frequency dependence of the The frequency dependence is described above.

(1
(2

D -
E Setting range of the parameter Start time changed:

0.380.0 s 0.3250.0 s
16
1MRS752307-MUM MotStart
Issued: 10/1998
Three-phase
Data subject to change without notice Start-Up Supervision for Motors
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.3 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.4 Operation mode .................................................................................. 4
2.4.1 I2 * t mode.................................................................................. 5
2.4.2 I2 * t & stall mode ....................................................................... 6
2.5 Start-up counter .................................................................................. 6
2.6 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 7
2.7 Test mode ........................................................................................... 7
2.8 START, TRIP and STALL outputs ....................................................... 8
2.9 Resetting............................................................................................. 8
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 9

3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 10
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 10
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 10
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 10
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 12
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 12
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 12
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 15
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 16

MotStart Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Three-phase start-up protection for motors

Thermal stress calculation (I2 x t)
Stall protection with a digital input for stall indication
Cumulative start-up time counter protection
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the three-phase start-up supervision function
block MotStart used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI0RW6WDUW
2
Substation Automation MotStart

current IL1
current IL2
current IL3
and 2
STALL_IND Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for motor stalling
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos.edge) Input signal for resetting the
registers of MotStart

STALL Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Stall signal
RESTART Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Restart enable signal
configuration error
3
2.1 Configuration

and configured in a special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool. Digital
used).
inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of the function block, and the outputs of
the function block are connected to the output signals in the same way.
2.3 Measuring mode
The calculation of the thermal stress (I2 x t) for the motor is based on the TRUE RMS
measuring principle. The start-up situation for the motor is detected by the PEAK
measuring principle. Harmonics are not suppressed.
2.4 Operation mode
The setting parameter Operation mode is used for selecting one of the three
operation modes available. Mode 0 (Not in use) sets the function out of use, whereas
in mode 1 (IIt) MotStart calculates the thermal stress for the motor and in mode 2 (IIt
& Stall) protects the motor against stalling during a motor start-up.
4
2.4.1 I2 * t mode
The thermal stress during any single start-up is monitored by the start-up supervision
MotStart, which calculates the product I2 x t, i.e. the thermal stress, during a normal
start-up of a motor.
The motor start-up situation is a sequence, where each of the initial three phase
currents is less than 0.05 x In for 60 ms, i.e. the motor is at standstill, and where at
least one phase current within the rising time (60 ms) rises from a value below 0.05 x
In to a value higher than the start value (1.5 x In). If a phase current sample exceeds
the current level within the rising time, the START signal is immediately set to
TRUE, i.e. the START output can be activated before the rising time has elapsed.
The START signal remains active until all the three phase currents fall below 0.9 x
Start current (0.9 x 1.5 x In = 1.35 x In) and remain below that level for 150 ms, i.e.
until the start-up situation is over.
During the motor start-up MotStart measures the start current, raises the value to a
power of 2 and multiplies it by the running time, i.e. calculates the product I2 x t. If
the calculated value exceeds the set value, the function block trips immediately.
Note! The set I2 x t comes from the value set for the Start current parameter raised
to a power of two and multiplied by the value set for the Start time parameter.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQDOLW\RIVWDUWXSVXSHUYLVLRQEDVHGRQ,[W
5
2.4.2 I2 * t & stall mode
In this mode, stall protection operates in parallel to the I2 x t function. The function
stalls during the motor start-up (STALL active) if the stall indication input signal
(STALL_IND) remains active longer than set stall time. An active STALL signal is
indicated by a steady trip LED (red) on the MMI.
Note! The trip and stall functions will both continue protecting the motor even though
the other function has operated.
2.5 Start-up counter
Every time the motor is started, the start-up time is added to a register. If the contents
of the register exceed the preset level, i.e. the value set for the Time limit
parameter, the signal Output RESTART is deactivated. When the start-up situation
is over, the value of the register decreases at a certain speed, which is set via the
parameter Countdown rate. When the value of the register falls below the set time
limit, the signal Output RESTART is activated again. Note that the RESTART
output is normally activated, i.e. a new start is possible, even though its default value
is zero.
For example, the motor manufacturer may state that three starts at the maximum are
allowed within 8 hours and the start-up situation time is 20 s. By initiating three
successive starts we reach the situation illustrated below. As a result, the value of the
register adds up to a total of 60 seconds. Right after the third start has been initiated,
the RESTART output is deactivated and the fourth start will not be allowed, provided
the time limit has been set to 41 seconds.
Furthermore, the maximum of three starts in 8 hours means that the value of the
register should reach the set time limit within 8 hours to allow a new start.
Accordingly, the countdown rate should be 20 seconds in 8 hours and should thus be
set to 20 s / 8 h = 2.5 s / h.
6
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKHVWDUWXSWLPHFRXQWHU
The parameter Time to restart estimates in minutes the time remaining to the
moment when the next start is possible. The parameter is updated when the motor is
not running, i.e. all the phase currents are below 0.05 x In. The parameter Start
counter calculates the number of motor start-ups and is updated at the rising edge of
the START signal.
2.6 Setting groups
The two different groups of setting values, group 1 and 2, are available for the
ways:

1)
time.
2.7 Test mode
7
2.8 START, TRIP and STALL outputs
The minimum pulse width of the corresponding output signal is set via a separate
parameter on MMI (control setting) or serial communication. If the start situation is
longer than the set pulse width, the START signal stays active until the start situation
is over. The output signal TRIP may have a non-latching or latching feature. When the
latching mode has been selected, the TRIP signal remains continuously active though
the operation criteria have reset, until the output is reset.
Note! The values set for the control parameters Trip signal (non-latching or
latching) and Trip pulse (minimum pulse width) apply to both the TRIP output and
the STALL output.
An active STALL signal is indicated by a steady trip LED (red) on the MMI. Active
TRIP and START signals are indicated as normally, i.e. TRIP with a steady trip LED
(red) and START with a steady start LED (yellow).
2.9 Resetting
The TRIP output signal and the registers can be reset either via the RESET input, over
the serial bus or via the local MMI.

1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
8
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for MotStart is 54.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
9
3.2 Setting values

direction
Start current S2 1.0...10.0 x In 2.0 R Starting current for motor
Start time S3 0.3...250.0 s 5.0 R Starting time for motor
Time limit S4 1.0...500.0 s 10.0 R Time-based restart inhibit limit
Countdown rate S5 2.0...250.0 s/h 60.0 R Countdown rate for the time counter
Stall time S6 2.0...120.0 s 10.0 R Permitted stalling time for rotor

1)

direction
1)

direction
1)
10

direction

signal

TRIP and STALL outputs

STALL
Start counter V6 0...99999 - 0 R/M Start counter
Time to restart V7 0...99999 min 0 R/M Time to restart enable

registers

4)
Test STALL V33 0 or 1 - - R/W Testing of STALL
(E0 ... E7)
(E0 ... E7)
(E0 ... E7)
(E0 ... E7)
1)
2)
3)
4)
11
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Input GROUP I4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for switching between groups

1 and 2
Input STALL I5 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for motor stalling indication

signals and registers of MotStart
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Output STALL O3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of stall signal

2)
Output RESTART O4 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Restart enable signal
1)
2)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
The information required for later fault analysis is recorded at the rising and falling
edge of start or when the function block trips. Tripping can be caused by either the I2
x t function or the stalling function. In case both the I2 x t function and the stalling
function operate, only the first one is recorded.
latest operation always replace the data of the oldest operation. The registers are
updated in the following order: Operation 1, Operation 2, Operation 3, Operation 1,
Operation 2,...
12
The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the START signal and will be updated in
case the function block trips or stalls.
3.3.3.3 Duration and Start time
The duration of the start-up situation is recorded both in seconds and as a percentage
of the set operate time. The duration is updated for both IIT and STALL either at the
falling edge of the START signal i.e. when the motor start-up situation is over, or
when the TRIP or STALL output becomes active.
3.3.3.4 Currents
An average for each of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 is calculated during the start
situation i.e. the time from the rising edge of the START signal until its falling edge
or until the function block trips or stalls. The values of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and
Iy are recorded as multiples of the rated current In.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the Active group parameter, which indicates the setting group
valid for the recorded data, is recorded at the moment of triggering.

direction


situation (IIT)

situation (STALL)

1)
1)
13

direction


situation (IIT)

situation (STALL)

1)
1)

direction


situation (IIT)

situation (STALL)

1)
14
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from MotStart Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from MotStart Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from MotStart Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from MotStart Activated
E4 16 1 STALL signal from MotStart Reset
E5 32 1 STALL signal from MotStart Activated
E6 64 0 Test mode of MotStart Off
E7 128 0 Test mode of MotStart On
15
4. Technical Data

Current meas.: 2.5% of set value or 0.01 x In
Stall time accuracy 2% of set value or 20 ms
total time (1 < 30 ms
total time (1 < 40 ms

below the start value (2 < 50 ms
Frequency dependence of the The frequency dependence is described above.

(1
(2

D -
E Setting range of the parameter Start time changed:

0.380.0 s 0.3250.0 s
F -
16
1MRS100038 (NEF1Low) RE_5_ _
1MRS100039 (NEF1High) Non-Directional
1MRS100090 (NEF1Inst)
Issued: 10/1997 Earth-Fault Protection
Version: E
Low-Set Stage (NEF1Low)
High-Set Stage (NEF1High)
Instantaneous Stage (NEF1Inst)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.4 Delayed reset facility and drop-off time in DT mode ............................ 5
2.5 IDMT type operation of NEF1Low ....................................................... 6
2.5.1 Standard curve groups ............................................................... 6
2.5.2 RI curve groups.......................................................................... 8
2.5.3 RD curve groups ........................................................................ 8
2.6 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 8
2.7 Test mode ........................................................................................... 9
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 10
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 11
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 12
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 12
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 13
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 14
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 17
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 18
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 18
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 23
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 24
RE_5_ _ NEF1Low, NEF1High, NEF1Inst ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Non-directional earth-fault protection

NEF1Low: six inverse-time (IDMT) characteristics
Neutral current measurement with a conventional current transformer
frequency component of the earth-fault current
Integrated circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) function
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the non-directional earth-fault protection

function blocks NEF1Low, NEF1High and NEF1Inst used in products based on the
RED 500 Platform. The inverse-time operation is only included in the low-set stage
(NEF1Low).
The non-directional earth-fault protection function blocks are designed for non-
directional earth-fault protection whenever the DT characteristic or, as concerns
NEF1Low, the IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum Time) characteristic is appropriate.
Suppression of harmonics is possible.
Io> Io>> Io>>>
CBFP CBFP CBFP

)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI1()/RZ1()+LJKDQG1(),QVW)RU
,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOHOLQHGLDJUDPVUHIHUWRWKHPDQXDO7HFKQLFDO
'HVFULSWLRQVRI)XQFWLRQV,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
2
ABB Automation NEF1Low, NEF1High, NEF1Inst RE_5_ _
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI1()/RZ1()+LJKDQG1(),QVW

high)
high)
edge) registers
high)
edge) and registers of NEF1Low, NEF1High
or NEF1Inst

configuration error
3
2.1 Configuration
Neutral current I0 can be measured with a conventional current transformer. If the

neutral of the network is either isolated or earthed by a high impedance, a core
balance current transformer is recommended to be used in earth fault protection. To
ensure sufficient accuracy of neutral current measurements and consequently the
selectivity of the scheme, core balance current transformers should have a
transformation ratio of at least 70:1. Lower transformation ratios like 50:1 or 50:5 are
not recommended.
The measuring devices and signal types for analogue channels are selected and
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The neutral current I0 can be connected to
the Io input of the function block. Furthermore, digital inputs are connected to the
boolean inputs of the function block and in the same way, the outputs of the function
2.2 Measuring mode
The operation of the function block is based on two alternative measuring principles:
the average value of consecutive instantaneous peak-to-peak values or the numerically
calculated fundamental frequency component of the neutral current. The measuring
mode is selected by means of an MMI parameter or a serial communication
parameter.
to-peak measurement, the harmonics of the neutral current are not suppressed,
The function block starts if the neutral current exceeds the set start current. When the
function block starts, the START signal is set to TRUE. Should the duration of the
earth fault exceed the set definite operate time or, at the inverse-time operation, the
4
time determined by the level of the measured current, the function block operates. The
delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in the total operate time. When the
function block operates, the TRIP signal is set to TRUE.
drops off.
drop-off time elapses (Figure 3).
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
5
exceeds the set value again (Figure 4).
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
2.5 IDMT type operation of NEF1Low
At the inverse-time mode of NEF1Low, the operate time is a function of the current;
are available. Four of the groups comply with the standards BS 142 and IEC 60255,
the desired operate time characteristic.


normal inverse (NI)

very inverse (VI)
6
kx
t[s] =
I
( ) 1
I>
where

I = neutral current (RMS value)
Inverse-time
characteristic
by 1.1 times. The function block NEF1Low will start and the IDMT integration will

2 2.22E 2.34E 2.44E 2.34E
5 1.13E 1.26E 1.48E 1.26E
7 - - - 1.00E
10 1.01E 1.01E 1.02E -
20 1.00E 1.00E 1.00E -
7
1966 for currents 2 and 5 times the setting. The NEF1Low complies with the
For example:


follows:
k
t s =
I>
0. 339 0. 236 x
I

I
t[s] = 5. 8 -1. 35 x ln
k x I>
2.6 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
8
2.7 Test mode
corresponding output signal is set via a separate parameter on the MMI or on serial
have reset.
The circuit-breaker failure protection function provides a delayed trip signal CBFP
after the TRIP signal unless the fault has disappeared during the set CBFP time delay.
The CBFP output can be used to operate a circuit breaker in front of the circuit
breaker of the feeder. The control parameter Trip pulse also sets the pulse width of
9
2.9 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F038V013 for NEF1Low X X
1)
Parameter F039V013 for NEF1High X X
1)
Parameter F090V013 for NEF1Inst X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
10
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for NEF1Low is 38, that for NEF1High 39 and
that for NEF1Inst 90.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
11
3.2 Setting values
NEF1Low

direction
and inverse-time
Time multiplier S4 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R Time multiplier at IDMT

mode
1)
NEF1High and NEF1Inst

direction

1)
12
NEF1Low

direction
and inverse-time

mode
1)
4 = Normal inv.; 5 = Long time inv.; 6 = RI-type inv.; 7 = RD-type inv.

direction

1)
13
NEF1Low

direction
and inverse-time

mode
1)

direction

1)
14
NEF1Low

direction


group

START signal
Trip signal V6 0 or 1 4) - 0 R/W Selection of latching feature

for TRIP output

and CBFP
Minimum time V8 0.03...10.0 s 0.03 R/W Minimum operate time at

0 IDMT mode

trip CBFP
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - - W Resetting of latched trip signal

and registers

5)




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
15

direction

time counter

group

START signal

for TRIP output

and CBFP

trip CBFP

and registers

5)




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
16
3.3.1 Input data
NEF1Low

direction
Current Io I1 0.0...2000.0 % In 0.0 R/M Neutral current I0

1)

1)
groups 1 and 2

function

NEF1Low
1)

direction
Current Io I1 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Neutral current I0

1)

1)
groups 1 and 2

function

NEF1High or NEF1Inst
1)
17
3.3.2 Output data

direction

1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
3.3.3.3 Duration

percentage of the set operate time and, as concerns NEF1Low, at the IDMT mode of
3.3.3.4 Neutral current
If the function block trips, the current values are updated at the moment of tripping
i.e. on the rising edge of the signal TRIP. For external triggering the current values are
18
updated at the moment of triggering i.e. on the rising edge of the input signal TRIGG.
If the function block starts but does not trip, the neutral current value captured one
situation is recorded. The value of the neutral current I0 is recorded as a multiple of
the rated current In.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the input signals BS1 and BS2 as well as the Active group
parameter are recorded at the moment of triggering. The Active group parameter
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
19
NEF1Low

direction
Io mean V204 0.0...2000.0 % In 0.0 R/M Filtered value of I0
Io peak V205 0.0...2000.0 % In 0.0 R/M Momentary peak of I0

1)

1)
BS_ 0 = Not active; 1 = Active
2)

direction
Io mean V204 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Filtered value of I0
Io peak V205 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Momentary peak of I0

1)

2)
1)
2)
20
NEF1Low

direction

1)

1)
2)

direction

1)

1)
2)
21
NEF1Low

direction

1)

1)
2)

direction

1)

1)
2)
22
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Activated
E6 64 0 BS1 signal of Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Reset
E7 128 0 BS1 signal of Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Activated
E10 1024 0 Test mode of Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Off
E11 2048 0 Test mode of Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage On
23
4. Technical Data

NEF1Low:
f/fn= 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value + 0.0005 x In.
NEF1High and NEF1Inst:
f/fn= 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value or +0.01 x In.

1)
total time < 40 ms
Reset time 40...1000 ms (depends on the set minimum output pulse width)



(NEF1Low) f/fn = 0.95...1.05: Class index E = 5.0 or 20 ms2)

Configuration data Task execution interval (Relay Configuration Tool): 10 ms,

1)
2)

Function block Technical Change
revision
NEF1Low B -
NEF1High B -
NEF1Inst B -
C - (No change in the manual)
24
1MRS752308-MUM NEF1_
Issued: 10/1997
Version: F/03.05.2002
Non-Directional
Earth-Fault Protection
Low-Set Stage (NEF1Low)
High-Set Stage (NEF1High)
Data subject to change without notice Instantaneous Stage (NEF1Inst)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.4 Delayed reset facility and drop-off time in DT and IDMT modes.......... 5
2.5 IDMT type operation of NEF1Low ....................................................... 6
2.5.2 RI curve groups.......................................................................... 8
2.5.3 RD curve groups ........................................................................ 8
2.5.4 IEEE curve groups ..................................................................... 9
2.6 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 9
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 10
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 11
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 12
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 13
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 13
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 14
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 15
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 18
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 19
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 19
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 24
4. Technical data ........................................................................................ 25
NEF1_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Non-directional earth-fault protection

NEF1Low: fourteen inverse-time (IDMT) characteristics
Neutral current measurement with a conventional current transformer
frequency component of the earth-fault current
Integrated circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) function
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the non-directional earth-fault protection

function blocks NEF1Low, NEF1High and NEF1Inst used in products based on the
RED 500 Platform. The inverse-time operation is only included in the low-set stage
(NEF1Low).
The non-directional earth-fault protection function blocks are designed for non-
directional earth-fault protection whenever the DT characteristic or, as concerns
NEF1Low, the IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum Time) characteristic is appropriate.
Suppression of harmonics is possible.
Io> Io>> Io>>>
CBFP CBFP CBFP

)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI1()/RZ1()+LJKDQG1(),QVW
056080
2
Substation Automation NEF1_
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI1()/RZ1()+LJKDQG1(),QVW

high)
high)
edge) registers
high)
edge) and registers of NEF1Low, NEF1High
or NEF1Inst

configuration error
3
2.1 Configuration
Neutral current I0 can be measured with a conventional current transformer. If the

neutral of the network is either isolated or earthed by a high impedance, a core
balance current transformer is recommended to be used in earth fault protection. To
ensure sufficient accuracy of neutral current measurements and consequently the
selectivity of the scheme, core balance current transformers should have a
transformation ratio of at least 70:1. Lower transformation ratios like 50:1 or 50:5 are
not recommended.
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The neutral current I0 can be connected to
the Io input of the function block. Furthermore, digital inputs are connected to the
Boolean inputs of the function block and in the same way, the outputs of the function
2.2 Measuring mode
The operation of the function block is based on two alternative measuring principles:
the average value of consecutive instantaneous peak-to-peak values or the numerically
calculated fundamental frequency component of the neutral current. The measuring
mode is selected by means of an HMI parameter or a serial communication parameter.
to-peak measurement, the harmonics of the neutral current are not suppressed,
The function block starts if the neutral current exceeds the set start current. When the
function block starts, the START signal is set to TRUE. Should the duration of the
earth fault exceed the set definite operate time or, at the inverse-time operation, the
time determined by the level of the measured current, the function block operates. The
4
internal delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in the total operate time.
When the function block operates, the TRIP signal is set to TRUE. Operation mode
instantaneous is selectable in the function blocks NEF1High and NEF1Inst. In
instantaneous mode the TRIP signal is immediately activated.
drops off.
current transformer might reset the DT or the IDMT timer. The adjustable delayed
reset function also enables closer co-ordination with electromechanical induction disc
relays.
off, provided the drop-off period is shorter than the set drop-off time. In the same
situation, the IDMT timer is frozen. If the drop-off period is longer than the set drop-
off time, the DT or the IDMT timer will be reset when the drop-off time elapses. The
situation in the case of the DT timer is described in Figure 2.4.-1.
In Figures 2.4.-1 and 2.4.-2 the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the
current is above the set start value and FALSE when the current is below the set start
value.
5
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
2.5 IDMT type operation of NEF1Low
In the inverse-time mode, the operate time of the stage is a function of the current.
The higher the current, the shorter the operate time is. Fourteen time/current curve
groups are available. Four of the groups comply with the BS 142 and IEC 60255
standards, whereas the two curve groups RI and RD (RXIDG) are special type of
curve groups corresponding to the ABB praxis. Eight IEEE curves comply with the
IEEE C37.112 standard. The setting "Operation mode" is used for selecting the
desired operate time characteristic.
6


normal inverse (NI)

very inverse (VI)
(For a graphical presentation of the curves, refer to the manual Technical Descriptions
of Functions, Introduction.)
kx
t[s] =
I
( ) 1
I>
where
I phase current
Inverse-time
characteristic
7
by 1.1 times. The function block NEF1Low will start and the IDMT integration will

2 2.22E 2.34E 2.44E 2.34E
5 1.13E 1.26E 1.48E 1.26E
7 - - - 1.00E
10 1.01E 1.01E 1.02E -
20 1.00E 1.00E 1.00E -
for currents 2 and 5 times the setting. The NEF1Low complies with the tolerances of
class 5 (E = 5.0%) for all inverse-time curves.
For example:


follows:
k
t s =
I>
0. 339 0. 236 x
I

8
I
t[s] = 5. 8 -1. 35 x ln
k x I>
2.5.4 IEEE curve groups
IEEE time overcurrent curve equation according to the standard IEEE C37.112:

$
t[s] = 3
+ % Q
, 1
,>

where
n adjustable IEEE time dial setting, parameters S5, S45 and S75
A, B, p constants to provide selected curve characteristics
Curve A B p
IEEE Extremely Inverse 6.407 0.025 2.0
IEEE Very Inverse 2.855 0.0712 2.0
IEEE Inverse 0.0086 0.0185 0.02
IEEE Short Time Inverse 0.00172 0.0037 0.02
IEEE Short Time Ext. Inverse 1.281 0.005 2.0
IEEE Long Time Ext. Inv. 64.07 0.250 2.0
IEEE Long Time Very Inv. 28.55 0.712 2.0
IEEE Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.185 0.02
2.6 Setting groups
ways:

9
1)
The group settings come into effect immediately after selection. The control
parameter "Active group" indicates that the setting group is valid at a given time.
2.7 Test mode
corresponding output signal is set via a separate parameter on the HMI or on serial
have reset.
The circuit-breaker failure protection function provides a delayed trip signal CBFP
after the TRIP signal unless the fault has disappeared during the set CBFP time delay.
The CBFP output can be used to operate a circuit breaker in front of the circuit
breaker of the feeder. The control parameter Trip pulse also sets the pulse width of
10
2.9 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F038V013 for NEF1Low X X
1)
Parameter F039V013 for NEF1High X X
1)
Parameter F090V013 for NEF1Inst X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
11
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for NEF1Low is 38, that for NEF1High 39 and
that for NEF1Inst 90.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
12
3.2 Setting values
NEF1Low

direction
and inverse-time
characteristic
Time multiplier S4 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R Time multiplier k in IDMT

mode
IEEE time dial S5 0.5...15.0 - 0.5 R IEEE time dial n in IDMT

mode
1)
4 = Normal inv.; 5 = Long-time inv.; 6 = RI-type inv.; 7 = RD-type inv.; 8 =
IEEE Ext.; 9 = IEEE Very inv.; 10 = IEEE Inverse; 11 = IEEE S.T. inv.; 12 =
IEEE S.T.E. inv; 13 = IEEE L.T.E. inv.; 14 = IEEE L.T.V. inv.; 15 = IEEE L.T.
inv.

direction

1)
13
NEF1Low

direction
and inverse-time
characteristic
Time multiplier S44 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R/W Time multiplier k in IDMT

mode
IEEE time dial S45 0.5...15.0 - 0.5 R/W IEEE time dial n in IDMT
mode
1)
4 = Normal inv.; 5 = Long time inv.; 6 = RI-type inv.; 7 = RD-type inv.; 8 =
inv.

direction

1)
14
NEF1Low

direction
and inverse-time
characteristic

mode
mode
1)
4 = Normal inv.; 5 = Long time inv.; 6 = RI-type inv.; 7 = RD-type inv.; 8 =
inv.

direction

1)
15
NEF1Low

direction

time counter

group

START signal

for TRIP output

and CBFP
Minimum time V8 0.03...10.0 s 0.03 R/W Minimum operate time in

0 IDMT mode

trip CBFP
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - - W Resetting of latched trip signal

and registers

5)




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
16

direction

time counter

group

START signal

for TRIP output

and CBFP

trip CBFP

and registers

5)




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
17
3.3.1 Input data
NEF1Low

direction
Current Io I1 0.0...2000.0 % In 0.0 R/M Neutral current I0

1)

1)
groups 1 and 2

function

NEF1Low
1)

direction
Current Io I1 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Neutral current I0

1)

1)
groups 1 and 2

function

NEF1High or NEF1Inst
1)
18
3.3.2 Output data

direction

1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
3.3.3.3 Duration

percentage of the set operate time and, as concerns NEF1Low, in the IDMT mode of
3.3.3.4 Neutral current
i.e. on the rising edge of the signal TRIP. For external triggering the current values are
19
If the function block starts but does not trip, the neutral current value captured one
situation is recorded. The value of the neutral current I0 is recorded as a multiple of
the rated current In.
3.3.3.5 Status data
parameter are recorded at the moment of recording. The Active group parameter
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
20
NEF1Low

direction

1)

1)
2)

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
21
NEF1Low

direction

1)

1)
2)

direction

1)

1)
2)
22
NEF1Low

direction

1)

1)
2)

direction

1)

1)
2)
23
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Activated
E10 1024 0 Test mode of Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage Off
E11 2048 0 Test mode of Io>, Io>> or Io>>> stage On
24
4. Technical data

NEF1Low:
f/fn= 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value + 0.0005 x In.
NEF1High and NEF1Inst:
f/fn= 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value or +0.01 x In.

1)
total time < 40 ms
Reset time 40...1000 ms (depends on the set minimum output pulse width)



(NEF1Low) f/fn = 0.95...1.05: Class index E = 5.0 or 20 ms2)
0 No suppression
Configuration data Task execution interval (Relay Configuration Tool): 10 ms,

1)
2)

revision
NEF1Low B -
C -
D - added IEEE IDMT curves
NEF1High B -
C -
NEF1Inst B -
D -
25
1MRS100031 (NOC3Low) RE_5_ _
1MRS100032 (NOC3High) Three-Phase Non-Directional
1MRS100033 (NOC3Inst)
Issued: 10/1997 Overcurrent Protection
Version: E
Low-Set Stage (NOC3Low)
High-Set Stage (NOC3High)
Instantaneous Stage (NOC3Inst)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 6
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6
2.5 IDMT type operation of NOC3Low ...................................................... 9
2.5.2 RI curve groups........................................................................ 10
2.5.3 RD curve groups ...................................................................... 11
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 11
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 11
2.8 START, TRIP, BSOUT and CBFP outputs ........................................ 12
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 12
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 13
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 14
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 14
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 15
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 16
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 19
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 19
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 20
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 24
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 25
RE_5_ _ NOC3Low, NOC3High, NOC3Inst ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Non-directional two-phase and three-phase overcurrent protection

NOC3Low: six inverse-time (IDMT) characteristics
NOC3High and NOC3Inst: Fast blocking output to be used in interlocking-based
busbar protection
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase non-directional overcurrent

function blocks NOC3Low, NOC3High and NOC3Inst used in products based on the
RED 500 Platform. The inverse-time operation is only included in the NOC3Low
function block.
The three-phase non-directional overcurrent function blocks are designed for non-
directional two-phase and three-phase overcurrent and short-circuit protection
whenever the DT characteristic or, as concerns NOC3Low, the IDMT (Inverse
Definite Minimum Time) characteristic is appropriate. Suppression of harmonics is
possible.
3I> 3I>> 3I>>>
CBFP CBFP CBFP

)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI12&/RZ12&+LJKDQG12&,QVW
080
2
ABB Automation NOC3Low, NOC3High, NOC3Inst RE_5_ _
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI12&/RZ12&+LJKDQG12&,QVW
3

high)
high)
edge) registers
DOUBLE Digital signal (BOOL, active Input signal for doubling the set start
high) current value temporarily at
high)
edge) and registers of NOC3Low, NOC3High
and NOC3Inst
4
NOC3Low

configuration error
NOC3High and NOC3Inst

BSOUT Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal for blocking-based
busbar protection
configuration error
5
2.1 Configuration

outputs depends on the hardware used).
connected to the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs of the function block.
Furthermore, digital inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of the function block
and in the same way, the outputs of the function block are connected to the output
signals.
2.2 Measuring mode
selected by means of either an MMI parameter or a serial communication parameter.
The function starts if the current in one or more phases exceeds the set start current.
The set start current is automatically doubled when the signal connected to the input
DOUBLE is active. The automatic doubling function can be used, e.g. during a
magnetizing inrush or at start-up.
6
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQRIWKH'28%/(LQSXW
overcurrent situation exceed the set definite operate time or, at the inverse-time
operation, the time determined by the level of the measured current, the function
Additionally, the function blocks NOC3High and NOC3Inst have a fast blocking
output to be used in interlocking-based busbar protection. Once a phase current
exceeds the set start current, the BSOUT signal is set to TRUE. The BSOUT signal
remains active for at least 20 ms. The START output is set to TRUE if at least one
digitally filtered phase current exceeds the start current. If the START signal is not
activated within the 20 ms, the signal BSOUT will reset.
The DT ot IDMT timer is allowed to run only if the blocking signal BS1 is inactive,
drops off.
for an intermittent fault that the fault current contains so- called drop-off periods
7
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
8
2.5 IDMT type operation of NOC3Low
At the inverse-time mode of NOC3Low the operate time is a function of the current;
the desired operate time characteristic. (For a graphical presentation of the curves,
refer to the manual Technical Descriptions of Functions, Introduction.)


normal inverse (NI)

very inverse (VI)
kx
t[s] =
I
( ) 1
I>
where

I = phase current
9
Inverse-time
characteristic
by 1.1 times. The three-phase non-directional overcurrent function block NOC3Low
will start and the IDMT integration will begin once the current exceeds the set start
value.

2 2.22E 2.34E 2.44E 2.34E
5 1.13E 1.26E 1.48E 1.26E
7 - - - 1.00E
10 1.01E 1.01E 1.02E -
20 1.00E 1.00E 1.00E -
1966 for currents 2 and 5 times the setting. The function block NOC3Low complies
with the tolerances of class 5 (E = 5.0%) for all inverse-time curves.
For example:


follows:
10
k
t s =
I>
0. 339 0. 236 x
I

I
t[s] = 5. 8 -1. 35 x ln
k x I>
2.6 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.7 Test mode
11
2.8 START, TRIP, BSOUT and CBFP outputs
START and TRIP output signals is set via a separate parameter on the MMI or on
serial communication. If the start situation is longer than the set pulse width, the
START signal remains active until the start situation is over. The output signal TRIP
may have a non-latching or latching feature. When the latching mode has been
selected, the TRIP signal remains active until the output is reset even if the operation
criteria have reset.
The output signal BSOUT of NOC3High and NOC3Inst is always pulse-shaped with
the minimum width of 20 ms.
2.9 Resetting

1)
1)
1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
12
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for NOC3Low is 31, that for NOC3High 32
and that for NOC3Inst 33.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
13
3.2 Setting values
NOC3Low

direction
and inverse-time
characteristic
Time multiplier S4 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R Time multiplier at IDMT

mode
1)

direction

1)
14
NOC3Low

direction
and inverse-time

mode
1)

direction

1)
15
NOC3Low

direction
and inverse-time

mode
1)

direction

1)
16
NOC3Low

direction
Measuring mode V1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/W Selection of measuring
mode
Drop-off time V2 0...1000 ms 0 R/W Resetting time of the

operate time counter at DT
mode
Group selection V3 0 ... 2 2) - 0 R/W Selection of the active

setting group

START signal

for TRIP output
Trip pulse V7 40...1000 ms 40 R/W Minimum pulse width of

TRIP and CBFP
Minimum time V8 0.03...10.00 s 0.03 R/W Minimum operate time at

IDMT mode

trip CBFP
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - 0 W Resetting of latched trip

signal and registers

5)




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
17

direction
mode

operate time counter at DT
mode

setting group

START signal

for TRIP output

TRIP and CBFP

trip CBFP


5)




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
18
3.3.1 Input data

direction

1)

registers

the groups 1 and 2
Input DOUBLE I8 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for doubling the set

start current
Input BSREG I9 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for blocking the

recording function

NOC3Low, NOC3High or
NOC3Inst
1)
3.3.2 Output data
NOC3Low

direction
1)

1)
19

direction
1)

1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
3.3.3.3 Duration

percentage of the set operate time and, as concerns NOC3Low, at the IDMT mode of
20
3.3.3.4 Currents
i.e. on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. For external triggering, the current values
are updated at the moment of triggering i.e. on the rising edge of the input signal
TRIGG. If the function block starts but does not trip, the current values captured one
situation are recorded. So the values of the phase currents IL1, I L2 and I L3 always
originate from the same moment and are recorded as multiples of the rated current In.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the input signals BS1, BS2 and DOUBLE as well as the Active
group parameter are recorded at the moment of triggering. The Active group
parameter indicates the setting group valid for the recorded data.
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
21

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
22

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
23
3.3.4 Events
NOC3Low

coefficient mask

coefficient mask
24
4. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05
NOC3Low: 2.5% of set value or 0.01 x In
NOC3High and NOC3Inst:
5.0% of set value
TRIP output)

Operate time accuracy at Depends on the frequency of the current measured:

definite-time mode
Accuracy class index E at Depends on the frequency of the current measured:

inverse-time mode
(NOC3Low) f/fn = 0.95...1.05: Class index E = 5.0 or 20 ms2)


1)
2)

B -
25
1MRS752309-MUM NOC3_
Issued: 10/1997
Version: F/03.05.2002
Three-Phase Non-Directional
Low-Set Stage (NOC3Low)
High-Set Stage (NOC3High)
Data subject to change without notice Instantaneous Stage (NOC3Inst)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.4 Delayed reset facility and drop-off time in DT and IDMT modes.......... 6
2.5 IDMT type operation of NOC3Low ...................................................... 8
2.5.2 RI curve groups........................................................................ 10
2.5.3 RD curve groups ...................................................................... 10
2.5.4 IEEE curve groups ................................................................... 10
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 11
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 11
2.8 START, TRIP, BSOUT and CBFP outputs ........................................ 12
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 12
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 13
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 14
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 14
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 15
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 16
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 19
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 19
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 20
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 24
4. Technical data ........................................................................................ 25
NOC3_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Non-directional overcurrent protection

NOC3Low: fourteen inverse-time (IDMT) characteristics
NOC3High and NOC3Inst: Fast blocking output to be used in blocking-based
busbar protection
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase non-directional overcurrent

function blocks NOC3Low, NOC3High and NOC3Inst used in products based on the
RED 500 Platform. The inverse-time operation is only included in the NOC3Low
function block.
The three-phase non-directional overcurrent function blocks are designed for non-
directional two-phase and three-phase overcurrent and short-circuit protection
whenever the DT characteristic or, as concerns NOC3Low, the IDMT (Inverse
Definite Minimum Time) characteristic is appropriate. Suppression of harmonics is
possible.
3I> 3I>> 3I>>>
CBFP CBFP CBFP

)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI12&/RZ12&+LJKDQG12&,QVW
056080
2
Substation Automation NOC3_
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI12&/RZ12&+LJKDQG12&,QVW

high)
high)
edge) registers
DOUBLE Digital signal (BOOL, active Input signal for doubling the set start
high) current value temporarily at
high)
edge) and registers of NOC3Low, NOC3High
and NOC3Inst
3
NOC3Low

configuration error

BSOUT Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal for blocking-based
busbar protection
configuration error
4
2.1 Configuration

connected to the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs of the function block. At least
one phase current is required to be connected. Furthermore, digital inputs are
connected to the Boolean inputs of the function block and in the same way, the
outputs of the function block are connected to the output signals.
2.2 Measuring mode
selected by means of either an HMI parameter or a serial communication parameter.
The function starts if the current in one or more phases exceeds the set start current.
The set start current is automatically doubled when the signal connected to the input
DOUBLE is active. The function block Inrush3 can be used for doubling, e.g. during a
5
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQRI12&/RZ12&+LJKDQG12&,QVWZKHQWKH'28%/(
LQSXWLVDFWLYDWHGE\WKH,QUXVKIXQFWLRQEORFN
block operates. The internal delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in the
Operation mode instantaneous is selectable in the function blocks NOC3High and
NOC3Inst. In instantaneous mode the TRIP signal is set active immediately.
Additionally, the function blocks NOC3High and NOC3Inst have a fast blocking
output to be used in interlocking-based busbar protection. Once a phase current
exceeds the set start current, the BSOUT signal is set to TRUE. The BSOUT signal
remains active for at least 20 ms. The START output is set to TRUE if at least one
digitally filtered phase current exceeds the start current. If the START signal is not
activated within the 20 ms, the signal BSOUT will reset.
drops off.
for an intermittent fault that the fault current contains so called drop-off periods
6
current transformer might reset the DT or the IDMT timer. The adjustable delayed
reset function also enables closer co-ordination with electromechanical induction disc
relays.
drops off, provided the drop-off period is shorter than the set drop-off time. In the
same situation, the IDMT timer is frozen. If the drop-off period is longer than the set
drop-off time, the DT or the IDMT timer will be reset when the drop-off time elapses.
The situation in the case of the DT timer is described in Figure 2.4.-1.
In Figures 2.4.-1 and 2.4.-2 the input signal IN of the DT or the IDMT timer is TRUE
when the current is above the set start value and FALSE when the current is below the
set start value.
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Operate time Dropoff1.fh7

Operate
timer
7
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
2.5 IDMT type operation of NOC3Low
In the inverse-time mode the operate time of the stage is a function of the current; the
higher the current, the shorter is the operate time. Fourteen time/current curve groups
corresponding to the ABB praxis. Eight IEEE curves comply with the IEEE C37.112
standard. The setting "Operation mode" is used for selecting the desired operate time
characteristic.


normal inverse (NI)

very inverse (VI)
8
kx
t[s] =
I
( ) 1
I>
where
I phase current
Inverse-time
characteristic
by 1.1 times. The three-phase non-directional overcurrent function block NOC3Low
will start and the IDMT integration will begin once the current exceeds the set start
value.

2 2.22E 2.34E 2.44E 2.34E
5 1.13E 1.26E 1.48E 1.26E
7 - - - 1.00E
10 1.01E 1.01E 1.02E -
20 1.00E 1.00E 1.00E -
for currents 2 and 5 times the setting. The function block NOC3Low complies with
the tolerances of class 5 (E = 5.0%) for all inverse-time curves.
9
For example:


follows:
k
t s =
I>
0. 339 0. 236 x
I

I
t[s] = 5. 8 -1. 35 x ln
k x I>
2.5.4 IEEE curve groups
IEEE time overcurrent curve equation according to the standard IEEE C37.112:

$
t[s] = S
+ % Q
, 1
,>

10
where I> adjustable start current, parameters S2, S42 and S72
n adjustable IEEE time dial setting, parameters S5, S45

and S75
A, B, p constants to provide selected curve characteristics
Curve A B p
IEEE Extremely Inverse 6.407 0.025 2.0
IEEE Very Inverse 2.855 0.0712 2.0
IEEE Inverse 0.0086 0.0185 0.02
IEEE Short Time Inverse 0.00172 0.0037 0.02
IEEE Short Time Ext. Inverse 1.281 0.005 2.0
IEEE Long Time Ext. Inv. 64.07 0.250 2.0
IEEE Long Time Very Inv. 28.55 0.712 2.0
IEEE Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.185 0.02
2.6 Setting groups
ways:

1)
The group settings come into effect immediately after the selection. The control
parameter "Active group" indicates the setting group, which is valid at a given time.
2.7 Test mode
11
2.8 START, TRIP, BSOUT and CBFP outputs
START and TRIP output signals is set via a separate parameter on the HMI or on
serial communication. If the start situation is longer than the set pulse width, the
START signal remains active until the start situation is over. The output signal TRIP
may have a non-latching or latching feature. When the latching mode has been
The output signal BSOUT of NOC3High and NOC3Inst is always pulse-shaped with
the minimum width of 20 ms.
2.9 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F031V013 for NOC3Low X X
1)
Parameter F032V013 for NOC3High X X
1)
Parameter F033V013 for NOC3Inst X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
12
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for NOC3Low is 31, that for NOC3High 32
and that for NOC3Inst 33.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
13
3.2 Setting values
NOC3Low

direction
and inverse-time
characteristic
Time multiplier S4 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R Time multiplier k in IDMT

mode
IEEE time dial S5 0.5...15.0 - 0.5 R IEEE time dial n in IDTM

mode
1)
4 = Normal inv.; 5 = Long-time inv.; 6 = RI-type inv.; 7 = RD-type inv. .; 8 =
inv.

direction

1)
14
NOC3Low

direction
and inverse-time
characteristic

mode
IEEE time dial S45 0.5...15.0 - 0.5 R/W IEEE time dial n in IDTM
mode
1)
4 = Normal inv.; 5 = Long time inv.; 6 = RI-type inv.; 7 = RD-type inv. .; 8 =
inv.

direction

1)
15
NOC3Low

direction
and inverse-time
characteristic

mode
mode
1)
4 = Normal inv.; 5 = Long time inv.; 6 = RI-type inv.; 7 = RD-type inv. .; 8 =
inv.

direction

1)
16
NOC3Low

direction
mode

operate time counter

setting group

START signal

for TRIP output

TRIP and CBFP
Minimum time V8 0.03...10.00 s 0.03 R/W Minimum operate time in

IDMT mode

trip CBFP


5)




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
17

direction
mode

operate time counter

setting group

START signal

for TRIP output

TRIP and CBFP

trip CBFP


5)




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
18
3.3.1 Input data

direction

1)

registers

the groups 1 and 2
Input DOUBLE I8 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for doubling the set

start current

recording function

NOC3Low, NOC3High or
NOC3Inst
1)
3.3.2 Output data
NOC3Low

direction
1)

1)
19

direction
1)

1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
3.3.3.3 Duration

percentage of the set operate time and, as concerns NOC3Low, in the IDMT mode of
20
3.3.3.4 Currents
i.e. on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. For external triggering, the current values
are updated at the moment of triggering i.e. on the rising edge of the input signal
TRIGG. If the function block starts but does not trip, the current values captured one
situation are recorded. So the values of the phase currents IL1, I L2 and I L3 always
originate from the same moment and are recorded as multiples of the rated current In.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the input signals BS1, BS2 and DOUBLE as well as the Active
group parameter are recorded at the moment of recording. The Active group
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
21

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
22

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
23
3.3.4 Events
NOC3Low

coefficient mask

coefficient mask
24
4. Technical data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05
NOC3Low: 2.5% of set value or 0.01 x In
NOC3High and NOC3Inst:
5.0% of set value
TRIP output)

Operate time accuracy in Depends on the frequency of the current measured:

definite-time mode
Accuracy class index E in Depends on the frequency of the current measured:

inverse-time mode
(NOC3Low) f/fn = 0.95...1.05: Class index E = 5.0 or 20 ms2)
0 No suppression

1)
2)

block revision
NOC3Low D - IEEE IDMT curves added
NOC3High C
NOC3Inst C
25
1MRS100077 (NPS3Low) RE_5_ _
1MRS100078 (NPS3High) Negative-Phase-Sequence Protection
Issued: 10/1998
Version: C Low-Set Stage (NPS3Low)
Data subject to change without notice High-Set Stage (NPS3High)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.3 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6
2.4.1 Definite-time operation ............................................................... 7
2.4.2 Inverse-time operation ............................................................... 9
2.5 Setting groups ................................................................................... 11
2.6 Test mode ......................................................................................... 11
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 12

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 13
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 14
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 14
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 14
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 15
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 17
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 17
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 17
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 20
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 21

RE_5_ _ NPS3Low ABB Automation
NPS3High
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Negative-phase-sequence protection
Definite-time (DT) or inverse-time (IDMT) operation
Definite minimum time for high-level negative-sequence currents in inverse-time
operation
Limited maximum operate time for long-time low-level negative-sequence currents
in inverse-time operation
Adjustable start delay in inverse-time operation
Backwards counting when overload disappears in inverse-time mode
Two- or three-phase negative-sequence current measurement
Input signal for selecting the direction of rotation
Output for blocking the reconnection of an overheated machine
Wide setting ranges
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the negative-phase-sequence function blocks

NPS3Low and NPS3High used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The low-
set stage and the high-set stage are identical in operation.
The function blocks NPS3Low and NPS3High are designed for negative-phase-
sequence protection whenever the operating characteristic is appropriate. They are
applied for the protection of power generators or synchronous motors against thermal
stress and damage.
(See Figure 5).
I2>
I2>>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI136/RZDQG136+LJK)RU,(&
V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOHOLQHGLDJUDPVUHIHUWRWKHPDQXDO7HFKQLFDO
2
ABB Automation NPS3Low RE_5_ _
NPS3High
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI136/RZDQG136+LJK
3
NPS3High

ROT_DIR Digital signal (BOOL, active Input signal for selecting rotation
high) direction of the machine
high) setting groups 1 and 2
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active Input for blocking the function
high)
edge) and registers of NPS3Low or NPS3High

breaker failure protection
(CBFP)
BLOCK_OUT Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for blocking the
reconnection of an overheated
machine
configuration error
4
NPS3High
2.1 Configuration

and configured in a special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool included in
the CAP 505 Tool Box. Digital inputs are configured in the same programming
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool.
In case of three phase currents (Figure 3), the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 are
connected to the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs of the function block, whereas
in case of two phase currents (Figure 4), the phase currents are connected to the first
two phase current inputs and the third analogue input is left unconnected.
)LJXUH &RQILJXUDWLRQH[DPSOHLQFDVHRIWKUHHSKDVHFXUUHQWV
)LJXUH $QDORJXHFKDQQHOFRQQHFWLRQVLQFDVHRIWZRSKDVHFXUUHQWV
5
NPS3High
In the input data and recorded data fields, the monitored phase currents are those
actually connected to the corresponding inputs. For example, if the analogue channel
IL3 is connected to the input IL1, the value of the Current IL1 parameter is actually
the value of phase current IL3.
The ROT_DIR input is used for motor protection. If status information about the
motor rotation direction is available, it can be connected to the ROT_DIR input of the
function block. In this case the control setting parameter Dir. selection must be set
to value Input rot.dir., which means the measured negative-sequence current and the
operation of the function block are independent of the motor rotation direction.
When the relay is started, the function block checks that at least two phase currents
are connected to the first two analogue inputs. If two currents are not connected, the
ERR output is activated and the error event E13 is sent.
If the phase currents are connected in a different order compared to the configuration
examples, the error event is not sent and the ERR output is not activated. In these
cases, however, the control setting parameter Dir. selection must be set to
Reverse value to achieve correct operation.
2.3 Measuring mode
Negative phase-sequence current can be calculated from two- or three-phase currents.

The number of phase currents is set via the control setting parameter Num. of
phases. If only two phase currents are connected, the value of Num. of phases
parameter is always two and cannot be changed. The negative-sequence current
calculation is based on fundamental-frequency phase currents.
When three phase currents are used, the negative-sequence current is calculated as
follows:
, 2 = , 5 + , 6 240 + , 7 120
where IR, IS and IT are phase currents.
In case of two phase currents, value of the neutral current is assumed to be 0 ie.
IR+IS+IT=0. Thus the negative-sequence current is calculated as follows:
,2 =
3
(, 5 + , 7 30 )
3
where is the phase angle between ,5 and ,7.
6
NPS3High
The function block has the two operation modes Definite time and Inverse time.
The type of operation is selected via the setting parameter Operation mode.
In both operation modes the function block starts if the calculated negative phase-
sequence exceeds the set start current, which is set via the Start value parameter.
The parameter is common to the two operation modes.
Note! The default value of the Start value parameter is 20% of nominal, which is
usual for motor protection. Generators are more sensitive to current unbalance and the
negative sequence current value that a generator can stand continuously is usually
between 5% and 10%. Therefore in case of generator protection a safer value for the
Start value parameter is 5%.
2.4.1 Definite-time operation
The function block trips when the measured negative phase-sequence has remained
over the set limit for the time set via the Operate time parameter. The Operate
time parameter is used only in the definite-time operation.
When the function block trips, the BLOCK_OUT output is activated and will remain
active for the set time. The cooling time is set via the Cooling time parameter. The
same parameter is also used in the inverse-time operation. The BLOCK_OUT signal
is used to prevent the auto-reclosing of an overheated generator.
TRIP
Cooling time
BLOCK_OUT
)LJXUH 8VHRIWKH&RROLQJWLPHSDUDPHWHU
For intermittent faults, the definite-time operation includes the delayed reset function.
Without the delayed reset function the DT timer would reset once the negative-
sequence current drops off.
7
NPS3High
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
8
NPS3High
2.4.2 Inverse-time operation
The operate time of the function block in the inverse-time mode is expressed
mathematically as follows :
.
W= 2
,2
6WDUW9DOXH 2
,1
where
t relay operate time in seconds
I2 negative-sequence current
IN rated current of the machine
Start value Setting parameter that corresponds to the continuous negative-
sequence current withstand of the machine, the I2 current
expressed in xIN (rated current of the machine)
K Setting parameter that corresponds to the machine constant,
equal to the I22t constant of the machine, as stated by the
machine manufacturer
1.5 K=5 K=20 K=40 K=100
0.5
I2 (xIn)
Start value=0.2
0.1
Start value=0.05
1 10 100 1000 10000

Operate time (s)
)LJXUH 7KHWLPHQHJDWLYHVHTXHQFHFXUUHQWFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRI136/RZDQG
136+LJK
When the measured negative-sequence current exceeds the set start current I2, the
function block starts accumulating a sum, the accumulate rate being proportional to
the subtraction of the squared value of the actual negative-sequence current and the
9
NPS3High
squared value of the Start value parameter. When the sum exceeds the level
corresponding to the setting parameter K, the function block operates. The higher the
degree of current unbalance, the faster the sum increases, and as the operate level of
the sum is defined only by the constant K, the negative-sequence relay will have an
inverse-time operating characteristic which conforms to the thermal load
characteristic of a rotating machine. When the overload disappears, the subtraction
(I22 - StartValue2) becomes negative and the sum decreases. Thus, decrease of the sum
indicates cooling of the machine, and the cooling speed depends on the value of the I2
current. When the sum reaches 0, the accumulation is stopped.
The accumulation is also stopped and the sum is set to 0 if the negative-sequence
current remains below the set limit for the set cooling time. Another purpose of the
Cooling time parameter is to keep the BLOCK_OUT signal active after tripping for
the set time. The BLOCK_OUT signal is used to prevent the auto-reclosing of the
overheated generator.
In inverse-time operation, the delay of the START output can be set via the parameter
Start delay. The start delay can be used for definite-time alarming when the START
output is used as an alarm output. The set start delay does not affect the operate time
The maximum operate time is limited for long-time low-level negative-sequence

currents. The maximum operate time can be set via the Maximum time parameter
and the minimum operate time via the Minimum time parameter. The meaning of
the minimum and maximum time settings is illustrated in the figure below.
I2 /IN
Operating curve
t= K
(I2/IN)2- Start value 2
Start value
t
Minimum time Maximum time
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLF
The setting parameters K, Start delay, Minimum time and Maximum time do
not affect the definite-time mode.
10
NPS3High
2.5 Setting groups
Two different groups of setting values, group 1 and group 2, are available for each
ways:

1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
signal remains active until the start situation is over.
reset even if the operation criteria have reset.
Each function block provides a delayed trip signal CBFP after the TRIP signal unless
11
NPS3High
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F077V013 for NPS3Low X X
1)
Parameter F078V013 for NPS3High X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
12
NPS3High
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for NPS3Low is 77 and that for NPS3High 78.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
13
NPS3High
3.2 Setting values

direction
(definite- or inverse-time mode)
Start value S2 0.01...0.50 x In 0.20 R Start value of negative-sequence

current I2
Operate time S3 0.1...120.0 s 1.0 R Operate time in definite-time mode
K S4 5.0...100.0 - 5.0 R Operating characteristic constant
Start delay S5 0.1...60.0 s 1.0 R Definite start time in inverse-time

mode
Minimum time S6 0.1...120.0 s 0.1 R Definite minimum operate time
Maximum time S7 500...10000 s 1000 R Maximum operate time regardless of

the inverse characteristic
Cooling time S8 5...10000 s 50 R Time required to cool the machine

1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = Definite time; 2 = Inverse time

direction
Start value S42 0.01...0.50 x In 0.20 R/W Start value of negative-sequence

current I2
Operate time S43 0.1...120.0 s 1.0 R/W Operate time in definite-time mode
K S44 5.0...100.0 - 5.0 R/W Operating characteristic constant
Start delay S45 0.1...60.0 s 1.0 R/W Definite start time in inverse-time
mode
Minimum time S46 0.1...120.0 s 0.1 R/W Definite minimum operate time
Maximum time S47 500...10000 s 1000 R/W Maximum operate time regardless
of the inverse characteristic
Cooling time S48 5...10000 s 50 R/W Time required to cool the machine
1)
14
NPS3High

direction

current I2
mode
1)
15
NPS3High

direction
Num. of phases V1 2...3 - 3 R/W Selection of two-phase or three-
phase measurement
Group selection V2 0...2 1) - 0 R/W Selection of the active setting

group
Dir. selection V4 0...2 3) - 0 R/W Selection of rotation direction

4)
Rotation dir. V5 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Rotation direction
Drop-off time V6 0...1000 ms 0 R/W Resetting time of the operate time

counter at DT mode

signal

TRIP output

CBFP
CBFP

and registers

6)
transmission (E0... E13)
1)
2)
3)
Dir. selection 0 = Forward; 1 = Reverse; 2 = Input rot.dir.
4)
Rotation dir. 0 = Forward; 1 = Reverse
5)
6)
16
NPS3High
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Neg. seq. cur. I1 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Negative-sequence current I2

1)
Input Rot. dir. I5 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Input signal for selecting rotation
direction for the generator
Input BLOCK I6 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Input signal for blocking the

function block

groups 1 and 2

NPS3Low or NPS3High
1)
Rot. dir. 0 = forward; 1 = reverse
2)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Output BLOCK O3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of BLOCK_OUT signal

(signal for keeping the machine
separated from the power system)
Output ERR O4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of error signal

1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips.
17
NPS3High

1, Operation 2,...
The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the START or TRIP signal.
3.3.3.3 Duration
The duration of the start situation is recorded as a percentage of the calculated operate
time.
3.3.3.4 Currents
If the function block trips or starts, the negative-sequence current is updated at the
moment of tripping or starting i.e. on the rising edge of the TRIP or START signal.
The negative-sequence current is recorded as a multiple of the rated current In.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the input signal BLOCK (Active or Not active) and the parameters
Rotation dir. and Active group are recorded at the moment of triggering.The
Rotation dir. parameter indicates the rotation direction of the machine and the
Active group parameter the setting group valid for the recorded data.
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
18
NPS3High

direction
Neg. seq. cur. V204 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Negative-sequence current
Rotation dir. V208 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of rotation direction

2)
BLOCK V209 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of BLOCK input

1)
2)
BLOCK 0 = Not active; 1 = Active
3)

direction

2)

1)
2)
3)
19
NPS3High

direction

2)

1)
2)
3)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from I2> or I2>> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from I2> or I2>> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from I2> or I2>> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from I2> or I2>> stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from I2> or I2>> stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from I2> or I2>> stage Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK_OUT signal from I2> or I2>> stage Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK_OUT signal from I2> or I2>> stage Activated
E8 256 0 BLOCK signal of I2> or I2>> stage Reset
E9 512 0 BLOCK signal of I2> or I2>> stage Activated
E10 1024 0 Test mode of I2> or I2>> stage Off
E11 2048 0 Test mode of I2> or I2>> stage On
E12 0 0 - -
E13 8192 1 Config. error of I2> stage Activated
20
NPS3High
4. Technical Data

Start time Injected negative-seq. current = 2.00 x start value:

Reset ratio Typ. 0.96 (range 0.95...0.98) in definite-time mode
Retardation time Total retardation time when the negative-

sequence current drops below the start value2) < 45 ms


f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2% of the calculated ideal operate time or 20 ms2)
Configuration data Task execution interval (Relay Configuration Tool):10 ms

1)
2)

E -
21
1MRS752310-MUM NPS3_
Issued: 10/1998
Negative-Phase-Sequence Protection
Low-Set Stage (NPS3Low)
Data subject to change without notice High-Set Stage (NPS3High)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.3 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6
2.4.1 Definite-time operation ............................................................... 7
2.4.2 Inverse-time operation ............................................................... 9
2.5 Setting groups ................................................................................... 11
2.6 Test mode ......................................................................................... 11
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 12

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 13
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 14
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 14
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 14
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 15
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 17
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 17
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 17
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 20
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 21

NPS3 _ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Negative-phase-sequence protection
Definite-time (DT) or inverse-time (IDMT) operation
Definite minimum time for high-level negative-sequence currents in inverse-time
operation
Limited maximum operate time for long-time low-level negative-sequence currents
in inverse-time operation
Adjustable start delay in inverse-time operation
Backwards counting when overload disappears in inverse-time mode
Two- or three-phase negative-sequence current measurement
Input signal for selecting the direction of rotation
Output for blocking the reconnection of an overheated machine
Wide setting ranges
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the negative-phase-sequence function blocks

NPS3Low and NPS3High used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The low-
set stage and the high-set stage are identical in operation.
The function blocks NPS3Low and NPS3High are designed for negative-phase-
sequence protection whenever the operating characteristic is appropriate. They are
applied for the protection of power generators or synchronous motors against thermal
stress and damage.
(See Figure 5).
I2>
I2>>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI136/RZDQG136+LJK)RU,(&
2
Substation Automation NPS3 _
3

ROT_DIR Digital signal (BOOL, active Input signal for selecting rotation
high)
edge) and registers of NPS3Low or NPS3High

breaker failure protection
(CBFP)
BLOCK_OUT Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for blocking the
reconnection of an overheated
machine
configuration error
4
2.1 Configuration

graphic worksheet of the configuration tool.
In case of three phase currents (Figure 3), the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 are
connected to the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs of the function block, whereas
in case of two phase currents (Figure 4), the phase currents are connected to the first
two phase current inputs and the third analogue input is left unconnected.
)LJXUH &RQILJXUDWLRQH[DPSOHLQFDVHRIWKUHHSKDVHFXUUHQWV
)LJXUH $QDORJXHFKDQQHOFRQQHFWLRQVLQFDVHRIWZRSKDVHFXUUHQWV
5
In the input data and recorded data fields, the monitored phase currents are those
actually connected to the corresponding inputs. For example, if the analogue channel
IL3 is connected to the input IL1, the value of the Current IL1 parameter is actually
the value of phase current IL3.
The ROT_DIR input is used for motor protection. If status information about the
motor rotation direction is available, it can be connected to the ROT_DIR input of the
function block. In this case the control setting parameter Dir. selection must be set
to value Input rot.dir., which means the measured negative-sequence current and the
operation of the function block are independent of the motor rotation direction.
When the relay is started, the function block checks that at least two phase currents
are connected to the first two analogue inputs. If two currents are not connected, the
ERR output is activated and the error event E13 is sent.
If the phase currents are connected in a different order compared to the configuration
examples, the error event is not sent and the ERR output is not activated. In these
cases, however, the control setting parameter Dir. selection must be set to
Reverse value to achieve correct operation.
2.3 Measuring mode
Negative phase-sequence current can be calculated from two- or three-phase currents.

The number of phase currents is set via the control setting parameter Num. of
phases. If only two phase currents are connected, the value of Num. of phases
parameter is always two and cannot be changed. The negative-sequence current
calculation is based on fundamental-frequency phase currents.
When three phase currents are used, the negative-sequence current is calculated as
follows:
,2 = 1
3 , 5 + , 6 240 + , 7 120
where IR, IS and IT are phase currents.
In case of two phase currents, value of the neutral current is assumed to be 0 ie.
IR+IS+IT=0. Thus the negative-sequence current is calculated as follows:
,2 =
3
(, 5 + , 7 30 )
3
where is the phase angle between ,5 and ,7.
6
The function block has the two operation modes Definite time and Inverse time.
The type of operation is selected via the setting parameter Operation mode.
In both operation modes the function block starts if the calculated negative phase-
sequence exceeds the set start current, which is set via the Start value parameter.
The parameter is common to the two operation modes.
Note! The default value of the Start value parameter is 20% of nominal, which is
usual for motor protection. Generators are more sensitive to current unbalance and the
negative sequence current value that a generator can stand continuously is usually
between 5% and 10%. Therefore in case of generator protection a safer value for the
Start value parameter is 5%.
2.4.1 Definite-time operation
The function block trips when the measured negative phase-sequence has remained
over the set limit for the time set via the Operate time parameter. The Operate
time parameter is used only in the definite-time operation.
When the function block trips, the BLOCK_OUT output is activated and will remain
active for the set time. The cooling time is set via the Cooling time parameter. The
same parameter is also used in the inverse-time operation. The BLOCK_OUT signal
is used to prevent the auto-reclosing of an overheated generator.
TRIP
Cooling time
BLOCK_OUT
)LJXUH 8VHRIWKH&RROLQJWLPHSDUDPHWHU
For intermittent faults, the definite-time operation includes the delayed reset function.
Without the delayed reset function the DT timer would reset once the negative-
sequence current drops off.
7
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
8
2.4.2 Inverse-time operation
The operate time of the function block in the inverse-time mode is expressed
mathematically as follows :
.
W= 2
,2
6WDUW9DOXH 2
,1
where
t relay operate time in seconds
I2 negative-sequence current
IN rated current of the machine
Start value Setting parameter that corresponds to the continuous negative-
sequence current withstand of the machine, the I2 current
expressed in xIN (rated current of the machine)
K Setting parameter that corresponds to the machine constant,
equal to the I22t constant of the machine, as stated by the
machine manufacturer
1.5 K=5 K=20 K=40 K=100
0.5
I2 (xIn)
Start value=0.2
0.1
Start value=0.05
1 10 100 1000 10000

Operate time (s)
)LJXUH 7KHWLPHQHJDWLYHVHTXHQFHFXUUHQWFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRI136/RZDQG
136+LJK
When the measured negative-sequence current exceeds the set start current I2, the
function block starts accumulating a sum, the accumulate rate being proportional to
the subtraction of the squared value of the actual negative-sequence current and the
9
squared value of the Start value parameter. When the sum exceeds the level
corresponding to the setting parameter K, the function block operates. The higher the
degree of current unbalance, the faster the sum increases, and as the operate level of
the sum is defined only by the constant K, the negative-sequence relay will have an
inverse-time operating characteristic which conforms to the thermal load
characteristic of a rotating machine. When the overload disappears, the subtraction
(I22 - StartValue2) becomes negative and the sum decreases. Thus, decrease of the sum
indicates cooling of the machine, and the cooling speed depends on the value of the I2
current. When the sum reaches 0, the accumulation is stopped.
The accumulation is also stopped and the sum is set to 0 if the negative-sequence
current remains below the set limit for the set cooling time. Another purpose of the
Cooling time parameter is to keep the BLOCK_OUT signal active after tripping for
the set time. The BLOCK_OUT signal is used to prevent the auto-reclosing of the
overheated generator.
In inverse-time operation, the delay of the START output can be set via the parameter
Start delay. The start delay can be used for definite-time alarming when the START
output is used as an alarm output. The set start delay does not affect the operate time
The maximum operate time is limited for long-time low-level negative-sequence

currents. The maximum operate time can be set via the Maximum time parameter
and the minimum operate time via the Minimum time parameter. The meaning of
the minimum and maximum time settings is illustrated in the figure below.
I2 /IN
Operating curve
t= K
(I2/IN)2- Start value 2
Start value
t
Minimum time Maximum time
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLF
The setting parameters K, Start delay, Minimum time and Maximum time do
not affect the definite-time mode.
10
2.5 Setting groups
Two different groups of setting values, group 1 and group 2, are available for each
ways:

1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
signal remains active until the start situation is over.
Each function block provides a delayed trip signal CBFP after the TRIP signal unless
11
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F077V013 for NPS3Low X X
1)
Parameter F078V013 for NPS3High X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
12
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for NPS3Low is 77 and that for NPS3High 78.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
13
3.2 Setting values

direction
Start value S2 0.01...0.50 x In 0.20 R Start value of negative-sequence

current I2
Operate time S3 0.1...120.0 s 1.0 R Operate time in definite-time mode
K S4 5.0...100.0 - 5.0 R Operating characteristic constant
Start delay S5 0.1...60.0 s 1.0 R Definite start time in inverse-time

mode
Minimum time S6 0.1...120.0 s 0.1 R Definite minimum operate time
Maximum time S7 500...10000 s 1000 R Maximum operate time regardless of

the inverse characteristic
Cooling time S8 5...10000 s 50 R Time required to cool the machine

1)

direction

current I2
mode
1)
14

direction

current I2
mode
1)
15

direction
Num. of phases V1 2...3 - 3 R/W Selection of two-phase or three-
phase measurement

group
Dir. selection V4 0...2 3) - 0 R/W Selection of rotation direction

4)
Rotation dir. V5 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Rotation direction
Drop-off time V6 0...1000 ms 0 R/W Resetting time of the operate time

counter in DT mode

signal

TRIP output

CBFP
CBFP

and registers

6)
1)
2)
3)
Dir. selection 0 = Forward; 1 = Reverse; 2 = Input rot.dir.
4)
5)
6)
16
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Neg. seq. cur. I1 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Negative-sequence current I2

1)
Input Rot. dir. I5 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Input signal for selecting rotation
direction for the generator
Input BLOCK I6 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Input signal for blocking the

function block

groups 1 and 2

NPS3Low or NPS3High
1)
Rot. dir. 0 = forward; 1 = reverse
2)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Output BLOCK O3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of BLOCK_OUT signal

(signal for keeping the machine
separated from the power system)
Output ERR O4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of error signal

1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips.
17

1, Operation 2,...
3.3.3.3 Duration
The duration of the start situation is recorded as a percentage of the calculated operate
time.
3.3.3.4 Currents
If the function block trips or starts, the negative-sequence current is updated at the
moment of tripping or starting i.e. on the rising edge of the TRIP or START signal.
The negative-sequence current is recorded as a multiple of the rated current In.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the input signal BLOCK (Active or Not active) and the parameters
Rotation dir. and Active group are recorded at the moment of triggering.The
Rotation dir. parameter indicates the rotation direction of the machine and the
Active group parameter the setting group valid for the recorded data.
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
18

direction

2)

1)
2)
3)

direction

2)

1)
2)
3)
19

direction

2)

1)
2)
3)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from I2> or I2>> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from I2> or I2>> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from I2> or I2>> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from I2> or I2>> stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from I2> or I2>> stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from I2> or I2>> stage Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK_OUT signal from I2> or I2>> stage Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK_OUT signal from I2> or I2>> stage Activated
E8 256 0 BLOCK signal of I2> or I2>> stage Reset
E9 512 0 BLOCK signal of I2> or I2>> stage Activated
E10 1024 0 Test mode of I2> or I2>> stage Off
E11 2048 0 Test mode of I2> or I2>> stage On
E12 0 0 - -
E13 8192 1 Config. error of I2> stage Activated
20
4. Technical Data

Start time Injected negative-seq. current = 2.00 x start value:

Reset ratio Typ. 0.96 (range 0.95...0.98) in definite-time mode
Retardation time Total retardation time when the negative-

sequence current drops below the start value2) < 45 ms


f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2% of the calculated ideal operate time or 20 ms2)
Configuration data Task execution interval (Relay Configuration Tool):10 ms

1)
2)

E -
F -
21
1MRS100088 (Stage 1) RE_5_ _
1MRS100089 (Stage 2) Three-Phase Non-Directional
Issued: 10/1998
Version: C Undercurrent Protection
Data subject to change without notice Stage 1 (NUC3St1)
Stage 2 (NUC3St2)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.3 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 11
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 12
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 13
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 14
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 15
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 15
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 16
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 18
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 18
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 18
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 21
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 22
RE_5_ _ NUC3St1 ABB Automation
NUC3St2
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Non-directional single-phase, two-phase and three-phase undercurrent protection

Two operation modes (ALARM and TRIP) based on definite-time (DT) operation
Two alternative operation criteria: 1,2,3-phase and 3-phase
frequency component of the current
Delayed trip output for the circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFB) function
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase non-directional undercurrent

function blocks NUC3St1 and NUC3St2 used in products based on the RED 500
Platform. The two stages are identical in operation.
The function block NUC3St_ is designed to be used for non-directional three-phase

undercurrent protection. Usually the undercurrent indicates loss of load for pumps,
fans and conveyors. Protection is important if the pump is cooled by the liquid it
pumps or a broken belt of the conveyor may cause damage for the process. Also a
broken main circuit, problems with measuring devices and loss of supply can be
indicated.
3I<
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI18&6WB)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOH
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
2
ABB Automation NUC3St1 RE_5_ _
NUC3St2
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI18&6WDQG18&6W

BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active External BLOCK signal for blocking the
high) ALARM and TRIP signals.
TRIGG Digital signal (BOOL, active Control signal for triggering the
high) registers
high)
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, Input signal for resetting the trip signal
pos.edge and registers of NUC3St_
3
NUC3St2

STATUS_IL1 Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Status of I L1
configuration error
4
NUC3St2
2.1 Configuration

configured in a special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool. Digital inputs
are configured in the same programming environment (the number of selectable
analogue inputs, digital inputs and digital outputs depends on the hardware used).
2.3 Measuring mode
value of consecutive intantaneous peak-to-peak values or the numerically calculated
fundamental frequency component of the current. The measuring mode can be
selected via either an MMI parameter or a serial communication parameter.
5
NUC3St2
The function block includes two different operation criteria for undercurrent
protection. The setting parameters with their features are described below.
Operation mode
Not in use: The NUC3St_ is switched off.
Alarm: The alarm mode is based on the DT timer. An alarm causes specific text
indications and events as well as an output signal. If the alarm is selected to be non-
latching, the yellow start indicator LED keeps blinking as long as the fault is active,
whereas in the latching mode the indication has to be reset (see section Resetting).
Trip: The trip mode is also based on the DT timer. A trip causes common indications,
events and an output signal.
Operation criteria
1,2,3-phase: The function starts after a short delay*) if the current enters the operating
range in one or more phases (Figures 4 and 5).
3-phase: Similar to 1,2,3-phase criterion, but the function starts only if the current
enters the operating range in all three phases.
*) The short delay (approximately 40 ms) is set to avoid unnecessary starts when the
motor current is switched off (stop) or switched on (start-up) normally and internal
blocking is enabled.
Start current
Start current defines the upper limit for the operating range. The Start current
parameter is usually given a value slightly under the normal current range.
Operate time
undercurrent situation exceed the set definite operate time, the function block
operates. The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in the total operate
time. When the function block operates, the selected signal, TRIP or ALARM, is set
to TRUE. In Figure 3, the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the selected
operation criterion is true and FALSE when the criterion is false.
The DT timer is allowed to run only if the Ext. BLOCK and Int. BLOCK signals are
inactive, i.e their values are FALSE. When the blocking signals Ext. BLOCK and Int.
BLOCK are active, i.e. their values are TRUE, the timer will be stopped (frozen).
6
NUC3St2
1
IN 0
START
BLOCK (Int.) (Ext.)
Block timer Blocking time
ALARM/TRIP
DT timer Operate time

motor startup
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKH'7WLPHUZKHQWKHVLJQDOV,QW%/2&.DQG([W%/2&.
DUHXVHG
Intern. blocking
Enabled: If internal blocking is enabled, the operating range is between the set start
current and the internal blocking current (8% of the In), which makes it possible to
stop the motor or switch off other protected units without making the function block
operate (see figure below).
The input parameter Intern. BLOCK is activated when all currents are below the
blocking current, but the indication BLOCK will not appear because the currents are
outside the operating range.
1.0 x In
0.5 x In (set start current)
Operation
0.08 x In (blocking current)
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLQJUDQJHLILQWHUQDOEORFNLQJLVHQDEOHG
Disabled: If internal blocking is disabled, the operating range is between the set start
current and zero (0% of the In), which allows the external blocking signal to be used
instead of internal blocking. The external blocking signal may come e.g. from a
circuit breaker, a control function block or the process (see figure below).
Note! Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) is not available if internal blocking is

disabled.
7
NUC3St2
1.0 x In
Operation
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLQJUDQJHLILQWHUQDOEORFNLQJLVGLVDEOHG
Blocking time
The blocking time from motor start-up can be set provided internal blocking is
enabled. The motor is assumed to be stopped if all phase currents are less than 8.0%
of the nominal current for about 60 ms. A motor start-up is assumed to begin when the
current exceeds the internal blocking current at least in one phase and the signal Inter.
BLOCK remains active until the set blocking time has elapsed (Figure 3). If the
operation criterion becomes true during the blocking time, the indication, event and
registration features are similar to those of the Extern. BLOCK signal.
The Intern. BLOCK signal can be deactivated before the set time has elapsed by
resetting the blocking time to value 0 s or by setting the Intern. Blocking parameter
to disabled. Note: if the parameter is set to disabled, the operating range changes.
This feature may be used to allow the motor start without load in various processes or
to allow for the pump to build up liquid pressure. (Figure 6)
I
normal motor stopped start-up without load load is switched on
situation
Phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3

( symmetrical situation )
motor is assumed to be blocking time from motor start-up t

stopped if t > 60 ms (input ,QWHUQEORFN remains active)
(input ,QWHUQEORFN = active)
)LJXUH 0RWRUVWDUWXSDQGEORFNLQJWLPH
8
NUC3St2
Setting examples
Example1:
A pump is cooled by the liquid it pumps and a current under 0.6 x In means that there
is not enough load for cooling.
NUC3St1 NUC3St2
Operation mode: Alarm Trip
Oper. criteria: 1-,2-,3-phase 1-,2-,3-phase
Start current: 0.65 0.60
Operate time: 5.0 s 5.0 s
Intern. blocking: Enabled Enabled
Blocking time: 0s 0s
Example 2:
In the beginning of the process start, the motor is started up and the load is expected
to come on after 15 minutes. Loss of load means that the current falls below 0.5 x In,
which is to be indicated.
NUC3St_
Operation mode: Alarm
Oper. criteria: 1-,2-,3-phase
Start current: 0.50
Operate time: 5.0 s
Intern. blocking: Enabled
Blocking time: 1000 s ( 15min= 900s )
9
NUC3St2
Example 3:
If the internal blocking current is not suitable and the internal blocking needs to be
disabled, the blocking can be done externally in two different ways:
1 The Extern. BLOCK signal is usually used for external blocking. Status of the
circuit breaker can be brought from the circuit breaker itself or from the circuit-
breaker function block (CBFB) to the BLOCK input of NUC3St_.
2 If BLOCK indications need to be avoided, NUC3St_ can be set to Not in use via
the GROUP input. In this case the setting group is selected according to the status
of the circuit breaker (see also section Setting groups).
(GROUP input = FALSE <=> setting group 1 is active)
(GROUP input = TRUE <=> setting group 2 is active)
NUC3St_, setting group 1 NUC3St_, setting group 2
Operation mode: Trip Not in use
Oper. criteria: 3-phase 3-phase
Intern. blocking: Disabled Disabled
Without the delayed reset function the DT timer would reset once the negative
sequence current drops off. This feature may be useful for example when the liquid of
the pump application is drying up.
In Figures 7 and 8, the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the current is
10
NUC3St2
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
If the drop-off period is shorter than the set drop-off time and the DT timer has
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
2.6 Setting groups
NUC3St_. Switching between the two groups can be done in the following three
ways:

1)
time.
11
NUC3St2
2.7 Test mode
corresponding output signal is set via a separate parameter on the MMI or the serial
the TRIP signal remains active until the output is reset even if the operation criterion
has reset.
The ALARM output signal is an alternative for the TRIP signal. If it is used instead of
the TRIP signal, the CBFP is also ignored. The ALARM signal may have a non-
latching or latching feature. When the non-latching mode has been selected, the
ALARM signal remains active until the START situation is over and the active signal
is indicated by a blinking start LED (yellow). The latching mode of the ALARM
signal is similar to that of the TRIP signal.

status of each phase and they can be used if logic needs to be build outside the
function block. A single output remains active as long as the start situation of the
phase is on.
circuit breaker of the motor. The control parameter Trip pulse also sets the width of
the CBFP output signal. Please note that circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) is
not available if internal blocking is disabled.
12
NUC3St2
2.9 Resetting
The TRIP output signal, the ALARM output signal and the registers can be reset
either via the RESET input, or over the serial bus or the local MMI.

1)
1)
Parameter F088V013 for NUC3St1 X X
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
13
NUC3St2
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for NUC3St1 is 88 and that for NUC3St2 89.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
14
NUC3St2
3.2 Setting values

direction
Oper. criteria S2 0 or 1 2) - 0 R Selection of operation criteria
Operate time S4 0.1...600.0 s 2.0 R Operate time at ALARM and

TRIP modes
Intern. blocking S5 0 or 1 3) - 1 R Enabling of internal

undercurrent blocking
Blocking time S6 0...7200 s 0 R Blocking time from motor

start-up
1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = Alarm; 2 = Trip
2)
Oper. criteria 0 = 1,2,3-phase; 1 = 3-phase
3)
Intern. blocking 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled

direction
Oper. criteria S42 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/W Selection of operation criteria
Operate time S44 0.1...600.0 s 2.0 R/W Operate time at ALARM and
TRIP modes
Intern. blocking S45 0 or 1 3) - 1 R/W Enabling of internal

Blocking time S46 0...7200 s 0 R/W Blocking time from motor

start-up
1)
2)
3)
15
NUC3St2

direction
Oper. criteria S72 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/W Selection of operation

criteria
Operate time S74 0.1...600.0 s 2.0 R/W Operate time at ALARM and
TRIP modes


start-up
1)
2)
3)
16
NUC3St2

direction
Drop-off time V2 0.0060.00 - 0 R/W Resetting time of the DT timer

2)
Group selection V3 0 ... 2 - 0 R/W Selection of the active setting
group

signal

TRIP output

and CBFP
CBFP
Alarm signal V9 0 or 1 5) - 0 R/W Selection of latching feature for

ALARM output
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - 0 W Resetting of latched alarm or

trip signal and registers

6)
Test ALARM V34 0 or 1 6) - - R/W Testing of ALARM
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Alarm signal 0 = Non-latching; 1 = Latching
6)
17
NUC3St2
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Extern. BLOCK I4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M External BLOCK signal

1)
Intern. BLOCK I5 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Internal BLOCK signal

registers

the groups 1 and 2

recording function

of NUC3St_
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output TRIP O2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of TRIP signal

1)

1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts, alarms or trips, or when the recording function is triggered via an external
triggering input. The recording function can be blocked via the BSREG input.
18
NUC3St2

1, Operation 2,...
The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the START or TRIGG signal. If the
START signal is followed by the ALARM or TRIP signal, the time stamp will be
updated.
3.3.3.3 Duration
At the DT mode of operation, the duration of the start situation is recorded as a

3.3.3.4 Currents
of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 always originate from the same moment and are
recorded as multiples of the rated current In.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the inputs Extern. BLOCK and Intern. BLOCK and the Active
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Alarming or tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
19
NUC3St2

direction

1)
Extern. BLOCK V207 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of Extern. BLOCK input
Intern. BLOCK V208 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of Intern. BLOCK input

2)
1)
2)

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
20
NUC3St2

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Activated
E6 64 1 ALARM signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Reset
E7 128 1 ALARM signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Activated
E8 256 0 External BLOCK signal of 3I< stage 1 or 2 Reset
E9 512 0 External BLOCK signal of 3I< stage 1 or 2 Activated
E10 1024 0 Internal BLOCK signal of 3I< stage 1 or 2 Reset
E11 2048 0 Internal BLOCK signal of 3I< stage 1 or 2 Activated
E12 4096 0 Test mode of 3I< stage 1 or 2 Off
E13 8192 0 Test mode of 3I< stage 1 or 2 On
21
NUC3St2
4. Technical Data

TRIP output)



1)
2)

D -
E Section Delayed reset facility and drop-off time in DT mode added
Control parameter Drop-off time added
Task execution interval 20 ms 10 ms
22
1MRS752311-MUM NUC3St _
Three-Phase Non-Directional
Issued: 10/1998
Version: D/22.1.2002 Undercurrent Protection
Stage 1 (NUC3St1)
Data subject to change without notice Stage 2 (NUC3St2)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.3 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 11
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 12
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 13
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 14
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 15
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 15
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 16
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 18
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 18
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 18
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 21
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 22
NUC3St _ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Non-directional single-phase, two-phase and three-phase undercurrent protection

Two operation modes (ALARM and TRIP) based on definite-time (DT) operation
Two alternative operation criteria: 1,2,3-phase and 3-phase
frequency component of the current
Delayed trip output for the circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFB) function
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase non-directional undercurrent

function blocks NUC3St1 and NUC3St2 used in products based on the RED 500
Platform. The two stages are identical in operation.
The function block NUC3St_ is designed to be used for non-directional three-phase

undercurrent protection. Usually the undercurrent indicates loss of load for pumps,
fans and conveyors. Protection is important if the pump is cooled by the liquid it
pumps or a broken belt of the conveyor may cause damage for the process. Also a
broken main circuit, problems with measuring devices and loss of supply can be
indicated.
3I<
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI18&6WB)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOH
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
2
Substation Automation NUC3St _
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI18&6WDQG18&6W

BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active External BLOCK signal for blocking the
high) ALARM and TRIP signals.
TRIGG Digital signal (BOOL, active Control signal for triggering the
high) registers
high)
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, Input signal for resetting the trip signal
pos.edge and registers of NUC3St_
3

STATUS_IL1 Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Status of I L1
configuration error
4
2.1 Configuration

2.3 Measuring mode
value of consecutive intantaneous peak-to-peak values or the numerically calculated
fundamental frequency component of the current. The measuring mode can be
selected via either an MMI parameter or a serial communication parameter.
5
The function block includes two different operation criteria for undercurrent
protection. The setting parameters with their features are described below.
Operation mode
Not in use: The NUC3St_ is switched off.
Alarm: The alarm mode is based on the DT timer. An alarm causes specific text
indications and events as well as an output signal. If the alarm is selected to be non-
latching, the yellow start indicator LED keeps blinking as long as the fault is active,
whereas in the latching mode the indication has to be reset (see section Resetting).
Trip: The trip mode is also based on the DT timer. A trip causes common indications,
events and an output signal.
Operation criteria
1,2,3-phase: The function starts after a short delay*) if the current enters the operating
range in one or more phases (Figures 4 and 5).
3-phase: Similar to 1,2,3-phase criterion, but the function starts only if the current
enters the operating range in all three phases.
*) The short delay (approximately 40 ms) is set to avoid unnecessary starts when the
motor current is switched off (stop) or switched on (start-up) normally and internal
blocking is enabled.
Start current
Start current defines the upper limit for the operating range. The Start current
parameter is usually given a value slightly under the normal current range.
Operate time
undercurrent situation exceed the set definite operate time, the function block
operates. The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in the total operate
time. When the function block operates, the selected signal, TRIP or ALARM, is set
to TRUE. In Figure 3, the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the selected
operation criterion is true and FALSE when the criterion is false.
The DT timer is allowed to run only if the Ext. BLOCK and Int. BLOCK signals are
inactive, i.e their values are FALSE. When the blocking signals Ext. BLOCK and Int.
BLOCK are active, i.e. their values are TRUE, the timer will be stopped (frozen).
6
1
IN 0
START
BLOCK (Int.) (Ext.)
Block timer Blocking time
ALARM/TRIP
DT timer Operate time

motor startup
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKH'7WLPHUZKHQWKHVLJQDOV,QW%/2&.DQG([W%/2&.
DUHXVHG
Intern. blocking
Enabled: If internal blocking is enabled, the operating range is between the set start
current and the internal blocking current (8% of the In), which makes it possible to
stop the motor or switch off other protected units without making the function block
operate (see figure below).
The input parameter Intern. BLOCK is activated when all currents are below the
blocking current, but the indication BLOCK will not appear because the currents are
outside the operating range.
1.0 x In
Operation
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLQJUDQJHLILQWHUQDOEORFNLQJLVHQDEOHG
Disabled: If internal blocking is disabled, the operating range is between the set start
current and zero (0% of the In), which allows the external blocking signal to be used
instead of internal blocking. The external blocking signal may come e.g. from a
circuit breaker, a control function block or the process (see figure below).
Note! Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) is not available if internal blocking is

disabled.
7
1.0 x In
Operation
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLQJUDQJHLILQWHUQDOEORFNLQJLVGLVDEOHG
Blocking time
The blocking time from motor start-up can be set provided internal blocking is
enabled. The motor is assumed to be stopped if all phase currents are less than 8.0%
of the nominal current for about 60 ms. A motor start-up is assumed to begin when the
current exceeds the internal blocking current at least in one phase and the signal Inter.
BLOCK remains active until the set blocking time has elapsed (Figure 3). If the
operation criterion becomes true during the blocking time, the indication, event and
registration features are similar to those of the Extern. BLOCK signal.
The Intern. BLOCK signal can be deactivated before the set time has elapsed by
resetting the blocking time to value 0 s or by setting the Intern. Blocking parameter
to disabled. Note: if the parameter is set to disabled, the operating range changes.
This feature may be used to allow the motor start without load in various processes or
to allow for the pump to build up liquid pressure. (Figure 6)
I
normal motor stopped start-up without load load is switched on
situation
Phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3

( symmetrical situation )
motor is assumed to be blocking time from motor start-up t

stopped if t > 60 ms (input ,QWHUQEORFN remains active)
(input ,QWHUQEORFN = active)
)LJXUH 0RWRUVWDUWXSDQGEORFNLQJWLPH
8
Setting examples
Example1:
A pump is cooled by the liquid it pumps and a current under 0.6 x In means that there
is not enough load for cooling.
NUC3St1 NUC3St2
Operation mode: Alarm Trip
Oper. criteria: 1-,2-,3-phase 1-,2-,3-phase
Intern. blocking: Enabled Enabled
Example 2:
In the beginning of the process start, the motor is started up and the load is expected
to come on after 15 minutes. Loss of load means that the current falls below 0.5 x In,
which is to be indicated.
NUC3St_
Operation mode: Alarm
Oper. criteria: 1-,2-,3-phase
Start current: 0.50
Operate time: 5.0 s
Intern. blocking: Enabled
Blocking time: 1000 s ( 15min= 900s )
9
Example 3:
If the internal blocking current is not suitable and the internal blocking needs to be
disabled, the blocking can be done externally in two different ways:
1 The Extern. BLOCK signal is usually used for external blocking. Status of the
circuit breaker can be brought from the circuit breaker itself or from the circuit-
breaker function block (CBFB) to the BLOCK input of NUC3St_.
2 If BLOCK indications need to be avoided, NUC3St_ can be set to Not in use via
the GROUP input. In this case the setting group is selected according to the status
of the circuit breaker (see also section Setting groups).
(GROUP input = FALSE <=> setting group 1 is active)
(GROUP input = TRUE <=> setting group 2 is active)
NUC3St_, setting group 1 NUC3St_, setting group 2
Operation mode: Trip Not in use
Oper. criteria: 3-phase 3-phase
Intern. blocking: Disabled Disabled
Without the delayed reset function the DT timer would reset once the negative
sequence current drops off. This feature may be useful for example when the liquid of
the pump application is drying up.
In Figures 7 and 8, the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the current is
10
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
2.6 Setting groups
NUC3St_. Switching between the two groups can be done in the following three
ways:

1)
time.
11
2.7 Test mode
the TRIP signal remains active until the output is reset even if the operation criterion
has reset.
The ALARM output signal is an alternative for the TRIP signal. If it is used instead of
the TRIP signal, the CBFP is also ignored. The ALARM signal may have a non-
latching or latching feature. When the non-latching mode has been selected, the
ALARM signal remains active until the START situation is over and the active signal
is indicated by a blinking start LED (yellow). The latching mode of the ALARM
signal is similar to that of the TRIP signal.

status of each phase and they can be used if logic needs to be build outside the
function block. A single output remains active as long as the start situation of the
phase is on.
circuit breaker of the motor. The control parameter Trip pulse also sets the width of
the CBFP output signal. Please note that circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) is
not available if internal blocking is disabled.
12
2.9 Resetting
The TRIP output signal, the ALARM output signal and the registers can be reset
either via the RESET input, or over the serial bus or the local MMI.

1)
1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
13
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for NUC3St1 is 88 and that for NUC3St2 89.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
14
3.2 Setting values

direction
Oper. criteria S2 0 or 1 2) - 0 R Selection of operation criteria
Operate time S4 0.1...600.0 s 2.0 R Operate time in ALARM and

TRIP modes
Intern. blocking S5 0 or 1 3) - 1 R Enabling of internal

Blocking time S6 0...7200 s 0 R Blocking time from motor

start-up
1)
2)
3)

direction
Oper. criteria S42 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/W Selection of operation criteria
Operate time S44 0.1...600.0 s 2.0 R/W Operate time in ALARM and
TRIP modes


start-up
1)
2)
3)
15

direction
Oper. criteria S72 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/W Selection of operation

criteria
Operate time S74 0.1...600.0 s 2.0 R/W Operate time in ALARM and
TRIP modes


start-up
1)
2)
3)
16

direction
Drop-off time V2 0.0060.00 - 0 R/W Resetting time of the DT timer

2)
Group selection V3 0 ... 2 - 0 R/W Selection of the active setting
group

signal

TRIP output

and CBFP
CBFP
Alarm signal V9 0 or 1 5) - 0 R/W Selection of latching feature for

ALARM output
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - 0 W Resetting of latched alarm or

trip signal and registers

6)
Test ALARM V34 0 or 1 6) - - R/W Testing of ALARM
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Alarm signal 0 = Non-latching; 1 = Latching
6)
17
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Extern. BLOCK I4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M External BLOCK signal

1)
Intern. BLOCK I5 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Internal BLOCK signal

registers

the groups 1 and 2

recording function

of NUC3St_
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output TRIP O2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of TRIP signal

1)

1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
triggering input. The recording function can be blocked via the BSREG input.
18

1, Operation 2,...
The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the START or TRIGG signal. If the
START signal is followed by the ALARM or TRIP signal, the time stamp will be
updated.
3.3.3.3 Duration

3.3.3.4 Currents
of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 always originate from the same moment and are
recorded as multiples of the rated current In.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the inputs Extern. BLOCK and Intern. BLOCK and the Active
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Alarming or tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
19

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
20

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Activated
E6 64 1 ALARM signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Reset
E7 128 1 ALARM signal from 3I< stage 1 or 2 Activated
E8 256 0 External BLOCK signal of 3I< stage 1 or 2 Reset
E9 512 0 External BLOCK signal of 3I< stage 1 or 2 Activated
E10 1024 0 Internal BLOCK signal of 3I< stage 1 or 2 Reset
E11 2048 0 Internal BLOCK signal of 3I< stage 1 or 2 Activated
E12 4096 0 Test mode of 3I< stage 1 or 2 Off
E13 8192 0 Test mode of 3I< stage 1 or 2 On
21
4. Technical Data

TRIP output)



1)
2)

D -
E Section Delayed reset facility and drop-off time in DT mode added
Control parameter Drop-off time added
Task execution interval 20 ms 10 ms
22
1MRS100068 RE_5_ _
1MRS100069 Overexcitation Protection
Issued: 3/2000
Version: A Low-Set Stage (OE1Low)
Data subject to change without notice High-Set Stage (OE1High)
Contents
1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.5 IDMT type operation............................................................................ 8
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 14
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 15
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 15
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 16
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 17
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 17
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 17
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 18
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 19
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 20
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 20
4 Technical Data ........................................................................................ 23
RE_5_ _ OE1Low, OE1High ABB Automation
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
Single-phase overexcitation (Volts/Hertz) protection for generators and
transformers
Phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth voltage
Definite-time (DT) operation and two inverse-time characteristics
Maximum and minimum time settings in inverse-time modes
Voltage and its frequency can be measured with a conventional voltage
transformer or a voltage divider
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the overexcitation function blocks OE1Low
and OE1High used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The function blocks
are identical in operation.
The overexcitation protection function blocks OE1Low and OE1High are used to
protect generators and power transformers against the excessive flux density and
saturation of the magnetic core. The saturation leads to a stray flux which may cause
eddy currents and severe overheating in nonlaminated parts of a generator or a
transformer. Note that the terms (over)excitation level or U/f ratio are commonly used
to denote the flux density.
U/f> U/f>>
CBFP CBFP
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRIWKHIXQFWLRQEORFNV2(/RZDQG2(+LJK
080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI2(/RZDQG2(+LJK
2
ABB Automation OE1Low, OE1High RE_5_ _

U Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring voltage and frequency
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal
GROUP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Control signal for switching between setting
group 1 and setting group 2. When GROUP
RESET Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Input signal for resetting the trip signal and
registers of the function block

CBFP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Delayed trip signal for circuit-breaker
failure protection (CBFP)
ERR Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for indicating a configuration error
3
2.1 Configuration
Phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth voltage can be measured via conventional voltage

transformers or voltage dividers; note, however, that a voltage divider cannot be
directly connected between two phases. The measuring devices and signal types for
Configuration Tool. Digital inputs are configured in the same programming
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The voltage is connected to the input U
of the function block. This voltage can be any of the available phase-to-phase or
phase-to-earth voltages. Digital inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of the
function block, and the outputs of the function block are connected to the output
signals in the same way. The function block automatically detects the signal type of
the connected analogue input. The operation of the function block is prevented if the
signal type is not correct, i.e. if the input is something else than a phase-to-phase or
phase-to-earth voltage.
The frequency protection must be selected for the voltage input via the special
measurements dialogue box in the configuration tool. For further information, please
refer to Technical Reference Manual, Part 3, Configuration Guideline,
1MRS750745-MUM. If the frequency protection is not selected, the ERR output of
the function block will be activated and a channel supervision error for the voltage
channel will be sent.
The excecution interval of the program the function block OE1Low and OE1High is
instantiated within, must be 10 ms at 50 Hz. Otherwise, the ERR output of the
function block will be activated and an error event E11 is sent.
Voltage should be taken from the generator or power inlet side of the transformer.
Only if there is a tap-changer on this side of the transformer, the voltage connected to
this protection function should be taken from the other side.
2.2 Measuring mode
The operation of the function blocks OE1Low and OE1High is based on calculating
the U/f (Volts/Hertz) ratio of the voltage input because the flux density in the
magnetic core is directly proportional to the voltage and inversely proportional to the
frequency. The function block uses a special algorithm which is based on the
integrated value of the voltage signal. This algorithm enables a wide frequency range
and high insensitivity to harmonics at the same time.
4
The protection function block calculates the relative U/f ratio proportional to the
excitation level of the generator/transformer and compares this value to the setting
value. The function block picks up when the excitation exceeds the setting value and
trips when the set operate time has elapsed.
The calculated U/f ratio is scaled so that the value is 1.00 when the voltage and the
frequency are at nominal level. However, the user can define the highest allowed
continuous voltage (in p.u.) by setting the parameter U max cont. to change the
basis of the voltage. The measured voltage is then compared to this new base value to
obtain the excitation level. The same can be expressed as follows:
8P
IP 8 P IQ
0 = =
8 Q 8 max FRQW 8 Q 8 max FRQW I P
IQ
where:
0 = the excitation level (U/f ratio)
8m = measured voltage
Im = measured frequency
8n = nominal voltage
In = nominal frequency
8max cont = settable voltage base for excitation level
([DPSOH
Nominal values of the generator:
Un = 11 kV
fn = 50 Hz
Settings:
U max cont. = 1.00
Lets assume that the voltage of the generator terminal is 11.77 kV and the frequency
of the system is 49.98 Hz. The excitation level M of the generator is now
11.77 kV 50 Hz
M= = 1.07
11 kV 1.00 49.98 Hz
5
([DPSOH
The situation and the data is equal to the example 1. The manufacturer of the
generator allows the continuous operation 105 % of the rated voltage at the rated load
and this value is wanted to be used as the base for overexcitation. Note that usually
the U/f characteristics are specified so that the ratio is 1.00 at the rated voltage and the
rated frequency and therefore the value 1.00 for U max cont. is recommended.
Settings:
U max cont. = 1.05
The calculated excitation level M of the generator is therefore:
11.77 kV 50 Hz
M= = 1.02
11 kV 1.05 49.98 Hz
Note also that the scaling factors for the analogue channels have an influence on the
values seen by the protection function blocks. In this example, it is assumed that the
scaling factor for the voltage channel is equal to 1.00. For further information, please
refer to Technical Reference Manual, Part 1, General, 1MRS750915-MUM.
The function block can be configured to operate in a definite-time or in an inverse-

time operation mode. The definite-time operation is characterised by three values:
U/f Start DT, Operate time and Drop-off time. These values determine the
pick-up value of overexcitation, the time delay of the operation (see the figure below)
and the time-based limit for drop-off, respectively (see subsection Delayed reset
facility and drop-off time in DT mode). The inverse-time operation mode is
explained in the subsection IDMT type operation.
U/f start DT
hysteresis
Time
OE_DT1
Operate time
)LJXUH 'HILQLWHWLPHRSHUDWLRQZKHQWKH8IUDWLRUHPDLQVDERYHWKH8I6WDUW'7
VHWWLQJLQFOXGLQJK\VWHUHVLV0LVHTXDOWR8PIP8QIQ
The function block is equipped with a BLOCK input, activation of which will force
the TRIP and CBFP outputs in FALSE state. Note that the START output is not
influenced by the BLOCK input. Blocking will also prevent the definite-time counter
and the inverse-time integrator from increasing, while decreasing during drop-off is
still carried out normally. U/f ratio is calculated as normally even if the function block
is blocked.
6
The function block starts to measure the U/f ratio when the peak value of the voltage
exceeds the low limit (20% of the nominal voltage when phase-to-phase voltage is
used, 35% when phase-to-earth voltage is used). The operation of the function block
is prevented until this limit is exceeded.
Oscillation of the U/f ratio around a value specified by U/f Start DT would cause
the START signal to alternate between TRUE and FALSE. This would ultimately
prevent a long lasting non-stabile fault situation from being detected if the function
block were reset every time the U/f ratio drops below a specified limit. The delayed
reset facility is used to prevent this.
When the DT timer has started, it goes on running as normally even if the U/f ratio
drops below a specified limit (U/f Start DT-hysteresis), provided the drop-off period
is shorter than the set drop-off time. If the drop-off period is longer than the set drop-
off time, the DT timer will reset when the drop-off time elapses (Figure 4).
In Figure 4 and Figure 5 the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the
relative U/f ratio is above the set start value, and FALSE when the U/f ratio is below
the set start value.
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
)LJXUH 7KHVHWGURSRIIWLPHLVVKRUWHUWKDQWKHGURSRIISHULRG
7
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
)LJXUH 7KHVHWGURSRIIWLPHLVORQJHUWKDQWKHGURSRIISHULRG
The pick-up and drop-off sequence may occur several times before the TRIP is
activated. Note that the drop-off timer is reset every time the IN signal becomes
active.
2.5 IDMT type operation
Inverse-time operation is used when the operate time is wanted to depend on the level
of overexcitation. The higher the level of overexcitation, the higher the risk of
damage. Therefore, shorter operate times at high overexcitation levels might be
reasonable.
There are two types of curves available. They are named Curve #1 and Curve #2.
These curves approximate the shapes of the curves presented in the standard IEEE
C37.91-1985 but the setting parameters of the curves also enable different forms to
be obeyed. The curves can be classified as inverse definite minimum time (IDMT)
curves since both of them include a setting which allows the minimum time limit to be
set.
There are common setting parameters for the curves. Note that even though the same
parameters are used, the operate time of the function block is totally changed when
the operation mode is switched between these curves.
The definite-time (DT) operation is always present at both inverse-time modes. This
enables composite curves with one stage. Two stages can be used to fit the curve even
better to the characteristic of the protected device. In general, an IDMT curve
determines the operate times at a low level of overexcitation and a DT curve sets the
limit at a high level of overexcitation. If, however, the DT operation in IDMT mode is
not desired, it is possible to eliminate it by setting the Operate time and/or U/f start
DT above the selected IDMT curve.
8
The parameter U/f start IDMT determines the U/f ratio which is needed before the
function picks up in the inverse-time mode. The parameter U max cont. influences
the calculated U/f ratio as mentioned in the subsection Operation criteria. The
parameter k is used to set the sharpness of the IDMT curve and the parameter
Constant delay is used to set a constant time delay parameter. The parameter
Maximum time is used to limit the operate time to a reasonable level at low degrees
of overexcitation, and the parameter Cooling time models the thermal properties of
a transformer.
When the inverse-time operation is selected, the function block trips whenever the
built-in inverse-time integrator or the definite-time counter exceeds the limits. Note,
however, that in the inverse-time operation mode the definite-time counter is reset
whenever the U/f ratio drops below the limit specified by U/f start DT. This means
that the drop-off time facility described above will not be utilised in the IDMT mode.
The hysteresis of the DT mode is not used either, so the DT operation will reset
exactly when the U/f ratio falls below the U/f start DT value. Therefore, it is
essential that the U/f start DT setting is always bigger than the U/f start IDMT
setting at the IDMT mode; otherwise the function block will operate at the U/f start
DT setting with no hysteresis.
To prevent infinite start situations, the Maximum time setting is used to ensure a
trip after the set time if the overexcitation level remains slightly above the setting U/f
Start IDMT.
The built-in inverse-time integrator is decreased when the U/f ratio drops below a
value defined by U/f Start IDMT including hysteresis. This mimics the cooling
process of the transformer or the generator. Rate of decrease is linear and it is
determined by the setting parameter Cooling time. This setting is equal to the time
required for the device to fully recover from the overheating caused by overexcitation
(see Figure 6 and Figure 7).
TRIP LEVEL
IDMT MODE
100 %
2.
X
1.
Time
Moment Cooling time = Tc
U_f_cool1
Moment
of Start of Trip
)LJXUH $QH[DPSOHRIWKHFRROLQJSURFHVVDIWHUDWULSGXUDWLRQ 7KH

VHWWLQJSDUDPHWHU&RROLQJWLPHGHWHUPLQHVWKHWLPHWRFRROGRZQ
,IWKHIXQFWLRQEORFNSLFNHGXSEHIRUHWKHGHYLFHZDVWRWDOO\UHFRYHUHGWKH
VWDUWOHYHO;ZRXOGGHSHQGRQWKHPRPHQWRISLFNXS
9
TRIP LEVEL
IDMT MODE
100 %
40 %
1. 2.
Time
Moment 40 % Tc
of Start
U_f_cool2
of Drop-off
)LJXUH $QH[DPSOHRIWKHFRROLQJSURFHVVDIWHUDGURSRIIGXUDWLRQ 7KH

UHFRYHU\RIWKHGHYLFHWDNHVRIWKHVHWWLQJ&RROLQJWLPH
$SLFNXSDIWHUWKLVWLPHZRXOGVWDUWDW]HUROHYHO
Note that the U/f ratio during the cooling process has no influence as long as it stays
below the U/f Start IDMT setting. Note also that the cooling process is included in
the IDMT mode only; the parameter Cooling time is not used in the DT mode.
&XUYH
The inverse time curve Curve #1 complies with the following equation:
0.18N
W = &G +
(0 1)2
where &G is the setting parameter Constant delayNis the setting parameter k and
0 is the excitation level as stated in the chapter Operation criteria.
Some plots of Curve #1 at different values of k are presented in Figure 8.
10
Operation characteristics, "Curve #1"

10000
6000
2000
1000
600
200
100
Operate time, s
60 k
20 100
10 50
6.0
20
10
2.0
5
3
1.0 1
0.6
0.2
0.1
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0
Excitation level, M
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRI&XUYH$FRQVWDQWYDOXHLVXVHGIRU
WKHSDUDPHWHU&RQVWDQWGHOD\&GWKURXJKRXWWKHSORW6HYHQGLIIHUHQW
YDOXHVRINDUHXVHG
([DPSOH
The operation mode is Curve #1. Settings are as follows:
U/f start DT = 1.6
U/f start IDMT = 1.1
U max cont. = 1.00
Operate time = 0.5 s
k =5
Maximum time = 3600 s ( = 60 min = 1 h )
Constant delay = 0.8 s
Cooling time = 100 s
11
Operating curve of OE1 , "Curve #1"

10000
6000
2000
1000
600
200
100
Operate time, s
60
20
10
6.0
2.0
1.0
0.6
0.2
0.1
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
Excitation level, M
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLQJFXUYHRI&XUYHEDVHGRQWKHVHWWLQJVVSHFLILHGLQ
([DPSOH7KHWZRGRWVPDUNHGRQWKHFXUYHDUHUHIHUUHGWRLQWKHWH[W
If the overexcitation level stayed at 1.25, a trip would occur after 15.20 s. At the
overexcitation level of 1.42 the time to trip would be 5.90 seconds. These operating
points can also be found in Figure 9. Note that in this case the setting Maximum
time = 3600 s doesnt limit the maximum operate time because the operate time at
U/f start IDMT = 1.1 is approximately 75 s.
&XUYH
N
113.5+ 2 .5 100 0
W=H 3.04
whereNis the setting parameter k and 0 is the excitation level as stated in the
chapter Operation criteria. The setting parameter Constant delay is used as a
minimum time limit for Curve #2, i.e. operate times shorter than Constant delay
are not allowed.
12

100000
60000
20000
10000
6000
2000
1000
Operate time, s 600
200
100
60
20
10
6.0
2.0
1.0
0.6
0.2
1 2 4 7 11 16 k
0.1
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
Excitation level, M
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRI&XUYH6L[GLIIHUHQWYDOXHVRINDUH
XVHG1RWHWKDWWKHPLQLPXPRSHUDWHWLPHLVOLPLWHGE\WKHSDUDPHWHU
&RQVWDQWGHOD\
([DPSOH
U/f start DT = 1.5
U max cont. = 1.00
k =8
Maximum time = 600 s ( = 10 min )
Constant delay = 1.0 s ( = minimum time )
13
2000
1000
600
200
100
Operate time, s
60
20
10
6.0
2.0
1.0
0.6
0.2
0.1
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
Excitation level, M
A trip would occur after 22.76 s if the overexcitation level remained at 1.24. At the
overexcitation level of 1.38, the equation would give 0.23 s but now the Constant
delay setting limits the minimum operate time to 1.0 s. Note also that the setting
Maximum time would limit the operate time to 600 s, if the overexcitation level
stayed between 1.1 and 1.14.
In general, however, the overexcitation level seldom remains constant and for that
reason exact operate times in any inverse-time mode are difficult to predict.
2.6 Setting groups
function block. Switching between the two groups can be done in following three
ways:
2) Over the communication bus by writing the parameter V3 1)
3) By means of the input signal GROUP, when allowed via Group selection
(i.e. when V3 = 2 1)).
1)
time.
14
2.7 Test mode
corresponding output signal is set via a separate parameter on the MMI or through the
serial communication. If the START condition lasts longer than the set pulse width,
the START signal remains active until the START condition is over. The output
signal TRIP may have a non-latching or latching feature. When the latching mode has
been selected, the TRIP signal remains active until the output is reset, even though the
operation criteria have reset.
2.9 Resetting
The TRIP output signal and the recorded data can be reset via the RESET input, or
1)
RESET input of the function block x x
1)
Parameter F068V013 for OE1Low x x
1)
Parameter F069V013 for OE1High x x
2)
General parameter F001V011 x
2)
General parameter F001V012 x x
2)
General parameter F001V013 x x x
2)
Push-button C x
2)
Push-buttons C + E (2 s) x x
2)
Push-buttons C + E (5 s) x x x
1)
Local reset: resets the latched trip signal or recorded data of the particular function block.
2)
15
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for OE1Low is 68 and for OE1High 69.

R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
16
3.2 Setting values

direction
U/f start DT S1 1.00...2.00 x U/f 1.40 R Proportional overexcitation that
has to be reached before definite-
time operation
U/f start IDMT S2 1.00...2.00 x U/f 1.10 R Proportional overexcitation that
has to be reached before inverse-
time operation
U max cont. S3 0.80...1.60 x Un 1.00 R Maximum continuous operating
value without damage
Operate time S4 0.10...600.00 s 0.50 R Required duration of
overexcitation condition before
TRIP in definite-time operation
k S5 0.1...100.0 - 3.0 R Operation curve in IDMT
operation, multiplier
Maximum time S6 500...10000 s 1000 R Maximum operate time in IDMT
mode regardless of inverse
characteristic
Constant delay S7 0.1...120.0 s 0.8 R Operation curve in IDMT
operation, constant
Cooling time S8 5...10000 s 600 R Cooling time of the
generator/transformer

direction
U/f start DT S41 1.00...2.00 x U/f 1.40 R/W Proportional overexcitation that
time operation
U/f start IDMT S42 1.00...2.00 x U/f 1.10 R/W Proportional overexcitation that
time operation
U max cont. S43 0.80...1.60 x Un 1.00 R/W Maximum continuous operating
Operate time S44 0.10...600.00 s 0.50 R/W Required duration of
k S45 0.1...100.0 - 3.0 R/W Operation curve in IDMT
Maximum time S46 500...10000 s 1000 R/W Maximum operate time in IDMT
characteristic
Constant delay S47 0.1...120.0 s 0.8 R/W Operation curve in IDMT
operation, constant
Cooling time S48 5...10000 s 600 R/W Cooling time of the
17

direction
time operation
time operation
k S75 0.1...100.0 - 3.0 R/W Operation curve in IDMT
characteristic
operation, constant
18

direction
Drop-off time V2 0.05...10.00 s 0.10 R/W Resetting time of the operate time
counter at DT mode
group
signal
Trip signal V6 0 or 1 4) - 0 R/W Selection of latching for TRIP
output
CBFP
CBFP
registers
5)
1)
Operation mode 0=Not in use; 1=Definite-time; 2=Inv.curve #1; 3=Inv.curve #2
2)
Group selection 0=Group 1; 1= Group 2; 2=GROUP input
3)
Active group 0=Group 1; 1=Group 2
4)
Trip signal 0=Non-latching; 1=Latching
5)
3.3.1 Input data

direction
U/f ratio I1 0.00...20.00 x U/f 0.00 R/M Calculated U/f ratio
1)
Input BLOCK I2 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Signal for blocking the function
block
group 1 and 2
Input RESET I4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for resetting output signals
and registers of the function block
1)
Input 0=Not active; 1=Active
19
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Output ERR O3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of ERR signal
1)
Output 0=Not active; 1=Active
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips.
The data of last three operations (operation 1...3) are recorded and the values of the
1, Operation 2,...
3.3.3.3 Duration
The duration of the START condition is recorded as a percentage of the set operate
time at the DT mode of operation. When the inverse-time operation mode is selected,
the function block estimates the presumable operate time and updates the duration
according to the momentary level of overexcitation. Hence, the duration indicates
how near (in percent) the tripping will be since the activation of START.
The duration can be 100% only if the function block has tripped. If, for example, the
Drop-off time setting causes the start situation to be active over the set operate time
but a new exceeding of the operate value does not occur during the set drop-off time,
the duration will be 99%.
3.3.3.4 Overexcitation level
If the function block trips, the U/f ratio is updated at the moment of tripping i.e. on
the rising edge of the TRIP signal. If the function block starts but does not trip, the
U/f ratio captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz) after the
beginning of the start situation is recorded.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of BLOCK signal and the active setting group are recorded at the
20
3.3.3.6 Priority
The priority of the recording function is as follows:

1. Tripping
2. Starting

direction
U/f ratio V204 0.00...20.00 x U/f 0.00 R/M U/f ratio at the moment of
registration
BLOCK V205 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of BLOCK signal
2)
1)
Block signal 0=Not active; 1=Active
2)

direction
registration
2)
1)
2)
21

direction
registration
2)
1)
2)
3.3.3.10 Events
coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from U/f> or U/f>> Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from U/f> or U/f>> Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from U/f> or U/f >> Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from U/f> or U/f>> Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from U/f> or U/f>> Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from U/f> or U/f>> Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK signal from U/f> or U/f>> Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK signal of U/f> or U/f>> Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of the function block Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of the function block On
E10 0 0 - -
E11 2048 1 Configuration error signal from the Activated
function block
22
4 Technical Data
Operation accuracies Depends on the frequency as follows:
20 < f < 40 Hz: 4% of set value
f 40 Hz: 2% of set value
Start time Injected U/f > 2.0 x Un/fn internal time <60 ms
total time 1) <70 ms
Reset time 1001060 ms (depends on the set minimum pulse width for the TRIP
output)
Reset ratio 20 < f < 40 Hz: typ. 0.99 (range 0.97...0.99)
f 40 Hz: typ 0.97 (range 0.95...0.98)
Retardation time Total retardation time when the measured U/f drops below the setting
value <105 ms 2)
Operate time accuracy at Over the frequency range 20...80 Hz:
definite-time mode 4% of set value or 40 ms 2)
Operate time accuracy at 100 ms 2) or the accuracy appearing when the measured voltage
inverse-time modes varies 1.0%
10 ms, at the rated frequency fn = 50 Hz
1)
2)

D -
23
1MRS 752319-MUM OE1_
Issued: 3/2000
Overexcitation Protection
Low-Set Stage (OE1Low)
Data subject to change without notice High-Set Stage (OE1High)
Contents
1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 14
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 15
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 15
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 16
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 17
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 17
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 17
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 18
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 19
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 20
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 20
4 Technical Data ........................................................................................ 23

OE1 _ Substation Automation
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
Single-phase overexcitation (Volts/Hertz) protection for generators and
transformers
Phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth voltage
Definite-time (DT) operation and two inverse-time characteristics
Maximum and minimum time settings in inverse-time modes
Voltage and its frequency can be measured with a conventional voltage
transformer or a voltage divider
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the overexcitation function blocks OE1Low
and OE1High used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The function blocks
are identical in operation.
The overexcitation protection function blocks OE1Low and OE1High are used to
protect generators and power transformers against the excessive flux density and
saturation of the magnetic core. The saturation leads to a stray flux which may cause
eddy currents and severe overheating in nonlaminated parts of a generator or a
transformer. Note that the terms (over)excitation level or U/f ratio are commonly used
to denote the flux density.
U/f> U/f>>
CBFP CBFP
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRIWKHIXQFWLRQEORFNV2(/RZDQG2(+LJK
080
2
Substation Automation OE1_

U Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring voltage and frequency
GROUP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Control signal for switching between setting
group 1 and setting group 2. When GROUP
RESET Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Input signal for resetting the trip signal and
registers of the function block

CBFP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Delayed trip signal for circuit-breaker
failure protection (CBFP)
ERR Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for indicating a configuration error
3
2.1 Configuration
Phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth voltage can be measured via conventional voltage

transformers or voltage dividers; note, however, that a voltage divider cannot be
directly connected between two phases. The measuring devices and signal types for
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The voltage is connected to the input U
of the function block. This voltage can be any of the available phase-to-phase or
phase-to-earth voltages. Digital inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of the
function block, and the outputs of the function block are connected to the output
signals in the same way. The function block automatically detects the signal type of
the connected analogue input. The operation of the function block is prevented if the
signal type is not correct, i.e. if the input is something else than a phase-to-phase or
phase-to-earth voltage.
The frequency protection must be selected for the voltage input via the special
measurements dialogue box in the configuration tool. For further information, please
refer to Technical Reference Manual, Part 3, Configuration Guideline,
1MRS750745-MUM. If the frequency protection is not selected, the ERR output of
the function block will be activated and a channel supervision error for the voltage
channel will be sent.
The excecution interval of the program the function block OE1Low and OE1High is
instantiated within, must be 10 ms at 50 Hz. Otherwise, the ERR output of the
function block will be activated and an error event E11 is sent.
Voltage should be taken from the generator or power inlet side of the transformer.
Only if there is a tap-changer on this side of the transformer, the voltage connected to
this protection function should be taken from the other side.
2.2 Measuring mode
The operation of the function blocks OE1Low and OE1High is based on calculating
the U/f (Volts/Hertz) ratio of the voltage input because the flux density in the
magnetic core is directly proportional to the voltage and inversely proportional to the
frequency. The function block uses a special algorithm which is based on the
integrated value of the voltage signal. This algorithm enables a wide frequency range
and high insensitivity to harmonics at the same time.
4
The protection function block calculates the relative U/f ratio proportional to the
excitation level of the generator/transformer and compares this value to the setting
value. The function block picks up when the excitation exceeds the setting value and
trips when the set operate time has elapsed.
The calculated U/f ratio is scaled so that the value is 1.00 when the voltage and the
frequency are at nominal level. However, the user can define the highest allowed
continuous voltage (in p.u.) by setting the parameter U max cont. to change the
basis of the voltage. The measured voltage is then compared to this new base value to
obtain the excitation level. The same can be expressed as follows:
8P
IP 8 P IQ
0 = =
8 Q 8 max FRQW 8 Q 8 max FRQW I P
IQ
where:
0 = the excitation level (U/f ratio)
8m = measured voltage
Im = measured frequency
8n = nominal voltage
In = nominal frequency
8max cont = settable voltage base for excitation level
([DPSOH
Nominal values of the generator:
Un = 11 kV
fn = 50 Hz
Settings:
U max cont. = 1.00
Lets assume that the voltage of the generator terminal is 11.77 kV and the frequency
of the system is 49.98 Hz. The excitation level M of the generator is now
11.77 kV 50 Hz
M= = 1.07
11 kV 1.00 49.98 Hz
5
([DPSOH
The situation and the data is equal to the example 1. The manufacturer of the
generator allows the continuous operation 105 % of the rated voltage at the rated load
and this value is wanted to be used as the base for overexcitation. Note that usually
the U/f characteristics are specified so that the ratio is 1.00 at the rated voltage and the
rated frequency and therefore the value 1.00 for U max cont. is recommended.
Settings:
U max cont. = 1.05
The calculated excitation level M of the generator is therefore:
11.77 kV 50 Hz
M= = 1.02
11 kV 1.05 49.98 Hz
Note also that the scaling factors for the analogue channels have an influence on the
values seen by the protection function blocks. In this example, it is assumed that the
scaling factor for the voltage channel is equal to 1.00. For further information, please
refer to Technical Reference Manual, Part 1, General, 1MRS750915-MUM.
The function block can be configured to operate in a definite-time or in an inverse-

time operation mode. The definite-time operation is characterised by three values:
U/f Start DT, Operate time and Drop-off time. These values determine the
pick-up value of overexcitation, the time delay of the operation (see the figure below)
and the time-based limit for drop-off, respectively (see subsection Delayed reset
facility and drop-off time in DT mode). The inverse-time operation mode is
explained in the subsection IDMT type operation.
U/f start DT
hysteresis
Time
OE_DT1
Operate time
)LJXUH 'HILQLWHWLPHRSHUDWLRQZKHQWKH8IUDWLRUHPDLQVDERYHWKH8I6WDUW'7
VHWWLQJLQFOXGLQJK\VWHUHVLV0LVHTXDOWR8PIP8QIQ
The function block is equipped with a BLOCK input, activation of which will force
the TRIP and CBFP outputs in FALSE state. Note that the START output is not
influenced by the BLOCK input. Blocking will also prevent the definite-time counter
and the inverse-time integrator from increasing, while decreasing during drop-off is
still carried out normally. U/f ratio is calculated as normally even if the function block
is blocked.
6
The function block starts to measure the U/f ratio when the peak value of the voltage
exceeds the low limit (20% of the nominal voltage when phase-to-phase voltage is
used, 35% when phase-to-earth voltage is used). The operation of the function block
is prevented until this limit is exceeded.
Oscillation of the U/f ratio around a value specified by U/f Start DT would cause
the START signal to alternate between TRUE and FALSE. This would ultimately
prevent a long lasting non-stabile fault situation from being detected if the function
block were reset every time the U/f ratio drops below a specified limit. The delayed
reset facility is used to prevent this.
When the DT timer has started, it goes on running as normally even if the U/f ratio
drops below a specified limit (U/f Start DT-hysteresis), provided the drop-off period
is shorter than the set drop-off time. If the drop-off period is longer than the set drop-
off time, the DT timer will reset when the drop-off time elapses (Figure 4).
In Figure 4 and Figure 5 the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the
relative U/f ratio is above the set start value, and FALSE when the U/f ratio is below
the set start value.
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
7
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
The pick-up and drop-off sequence may occur several times before the TRIP is
activated. Note that the drop-off timer is reset every time the IN signal becomes
active.
Inverse-time operation is used when the operate time is wanted to depend on the level
of overexcitation. The higher the level of overexcitation, the higher the risk of
damage. Therefore, shorter operate times at high overexcitation levels might be
reasonable.
There are two types of curves available. They are named Curve #1 and Curve #2.
These curves approximate the shapes of the curves presented in the standard IEEE
C37.91-1985 but the setting parameters of the curves also enable different forms to
be obeyed. The curves can be classified as inverse definite minimum time (IDMT)
curves since both of them include a setting which allows the minimum time limit to be
set.
There are common setting parameters for the curves. Note that even though the same
parameters are used, the operate time of the function block is totally changed when
the operation mode is switched between these curves.
The definite-time (DT) operation is always present in both inverse-time modes. This
enables composite curves with one stage. Two stages can be used to fit the curve even
better to the characteristic of the protected device. In general, an IDMT curve
determines the operate times at a low level of overexcitation and a DT curve sets the
limit at a high level of overexcitation. If, however, the DT operation in IDMT mode is
not desired, it is possible to eliminate it by setting the Operate time and/or U/f start
DT above the selected IDMT curve.
8
The parameter U/f start IDMT determines the U/f ratio which is needed before the
function picks up in the inverse-time mode. The parameter U max cont. influences
the calculated U/f ratio as mentioned in the subsection Operation criteria. The
parameter k is used to set the sharpness of the IDMT curve and the parameter
Constant delay is used to set a constant time delay parameter. The parameter
Maximum time is used to limit the operate time to a reasonable level at low degrees
of overexcitation, and the parameter Cooling time models the thermal properties of
a transformer.
When the inverse-time operation is selected, the function block trips whenever the
built-in inverse-time integrator or the definite-time counter exceeds the limits. Note,
however, that in the inverse-time operation mode the definite-time counter is reset
whenever the U/f ratio drops below the limit specified by U/f start DT. This means
that the drop-off time facility described above will not be utilised in the IDMT mode.
The hysteresis of the DT mode is not used either, so the DT operation will reset
exactly when the U/f ratio falls below the U/f start DT value. Therefore, it is
essential that the U/f start DT setting is always bigger than the U/f start IDMT
setting in the IDMT mode; otherwise the function block will operate at the U/f start
DT setting with no hysteresis.
To prevent infinite start situations, the Maximum time setting is used to ensure a
trip after the set time if the overexcitation level remains slightly above the setting U/f
Start IDMT.
The built-in inverse-time integrator is decreased when the U/f ratio drops below a
value defined by U/f Start IDMT including hysteresis. This mimics the cooling
process of the transformer or the generator. Rate of decrease is linear and it is
determined by the setting parameter Cooling time. This setting is equal to the time
required for the device to fully recover from the overheating caused by overexcitation
(see Figure 6 and Figure 7).
TRIP LEVEL
IDMT MODE
100 %
2.
X
1.
Time
U_f_cool1
Moment
of Start of Trip
)LJXUH $QH[DPSOHRIWKHFRROLQJSURFHVVDIWHUDWULSGXUDWLRQ 7KH

VHWWLQJSDUDPHWHU&RROLQJWLPHGHWHUPLQHVWKHWLPHWRFRROGRZQ
,IWKHIXQFWLRQEORFNSLFNHGXSEHIRUHWKHGHYLFHZDVWRWDOO\UHFRYHUHGWKH
VWDUWOHYHO;ZRXOGGHSHQGRQWKHPRPHQWRISLFNXS
9
TRIP LEVEL
IDMT MODE
100 %
40 %
1. 2.
Time
Moment 40 % Tc
of Start
U_f_cool2
of Drop-off
)LJXUH $QH[DPSOHRIWKHFRROLQJSURFHVVDIWHUDGURSRIIGXUDWLRQ 7KH

UHFRYHU\RIWKHGHYLFHWDNHVRIWKHVHWWLQJ&RROLQJWLPH
$SLFNXSDIWHUWKLVWLPHZRXOGVWDUWDW]HUROHYHO
Note that the U/f ratio during the cooling process has no influence as long as it stays
below the U/f Start IDMT setting. Note also that the cooling process is included in
the IDMT mode only; the parameter Cooling time is not used in the DT mode.
&XUYH
0.18N
W = &G +
(0 1)2
where &G is the setting parameter Constant delayNis the setting parameter k and
0 is the excitation level as stated in the chapter Operation criteria.
10

10000
6000
2000
1000
600
200
100
Operate time, s
60 k
20 100
10 50
6.0
20
10
2.0
5
3
1.0 1
0.6
0.2
0.1
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0
Excitation level, M
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRI&XUYH$FRQVWDQWYDOXHLVXVHGIRU
WKHSDUDPHWHU&RQVWDQWGHOD\&GWKURXJKRXWWKHSORW6HYHQGLIIHUHQW
YDOXHVRINDUHXVHG
([DPSOH
U/f start DT = 1.6
U max cont. = 1.00
k =5
Maximum time = 3600 s ( = 60 min = 1 h )
Constant delay = 0.8 s
11

10000
6000
2000
1000
600
200
100
Operate time, s
60
20
10
6.0
2.0
1.0
0.6
0.2
0.1
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
Excitation level, M
If the overexcitation level stayed at 1.25, a trip would occur after 15.20 s. At the
overexcitation level of 1.42 the time to trip would be 5.90 seconds. These operating
points can also be found in Figure 9. Note that in this case the setting Maximum
time = 3600 s doesnt limit the maximum operate time because the operate time at
U/f start IDMT = 1.1 is approximately 75 s.
&XUYH
N
113.5+ 2 .5 100 0
W=H 3.04
whereNis the setting parameter k and 0 is the excitation level as stated in the
chapter Operation criteria. The setting parameter Constant delay is used as a
minimum time limit for Curve #2, i.e. operate times shorter than Constant delay
are not allowed.
12

100000
60000
20000
10000
6000
2000
1000
Operate time, s 600
200
100
60
20
10
6.0
2.0
1.0
0.6
0.2
1 2 4 7 11 16 k
0.1
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
Excitation level, M
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRI&XUYH6L[GLIIHUHQWYDOXHVRINDUH
XVHG1RWHWKDWWKHPLQLPXPRSHUDWHWLPHLVOLPLWHGE\WKHSDUDPHWHU
&RQVWDQWGHOD\
([DPSOH
U/f start DT = 1.5
U max cont. = 1.00
k =8
Maximum time = 600 s ( = 10 min )
Constant delay = 1.0 s ( = minimum time )
13
2000
1000
600
200
100
Operate time, s
60
20
10
6.0
2.0
1.0
0.6
0.2
0.1
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
Excitation level, M
A trip would occur after 22.76 s if the overexcitation level remained at 1.24. At the
overexcitation level of 1.38, the equation would give 0.23 s but now the Constant
delay setting limits the minimum operate time to 1.0 s. Note also that the setting
Maximum time would limit the operate time to 600 s, if the overexcitation level
stayed between 1.1 and 1.14.
In general, however, the overexcitation level seldom remains constant and for that
reason exact operate times in any inverse-time mode are difficult to predict.
2.6 Setting groups
function block. Switching between the two groups can be done in following three
ways:
2) Over the communication bus by writing the parameter V3 1)
3) By means of the input signal GROUP, when allowed via Group selection
(i.e. when V3 = 2 1)).
1)
time.
14
2.7 Test mode
corresponding output signal is set via a separate parameter on the MMI or through the
serial communication. If the START condition lasts longer than the set pulse width,
the START signal remains active until the START condition is over. The output
signal TRIP may have a non-latching or latching feature. When the latching mode has
been selected, the TRIP signal remains active until the output is reset, even though the
operation criteria have reset.
2.9 Resetting
The TRIP output signal and the recorded data can be reset via the RESET input, or
1)
RESET input of the function block x x
1)
Parameter F068V013 for OE1Low x x
1)
Parameter F069V013 for OE1High x x
2)
2)
General parameter F001V012 x x
2)
General parameter F001V013 x x x
2)
Push-button C x
2)
Push-buttons C + E (2 s) x x
2)
Push-buttons C + E (5 s) x x x
1)
Local reset: resets the latched trip signal or recorded data of the particular function block.
2)
15
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for OE1Low is 68 and for OE1High 69.

R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
16
3.2 Setting values

direction
U/f start DT S1 1.00...2.00 x U/f 1.40 R Proportional overexcitation that
time operation
U/f start IDMT S2 1.00...2.00 x U/f 1.10 R Proportional overexcitation that
time operation
U max cont. S3 0.80...1.60 x Un 1.00 R Maximum continuous operating
Operate time S4 0.10...600.00 s 0.50 R Required duration of
k S5 0.1...100.0 - 3.0 R Operation curve in IDMT
Maximum time S6 500...10000 s 1000 R Maximum operate time in IDMT
characteristic
Constant delay S7 0.1...120.0 s 0.8 R Operation curve in IDMT
operation, constant
Cooling time S8 5...10000 s 600 R Cooling time of the

direction
time operation
time operation
K S45 0.1...100.0 - 3.0 R/W Operation curve in IDMT
characteristic
operation, constant
17

direction
time operation
time operation
K S75 0.1...100.0 - 3.0 R/W Operation curve in IDMT
characteristic
operation, constant
18

direction
counter in DT mode
group
signal
Trip signal V6 0 or 1 4) - 0 R/W Selection of latching for TRIP
output
CBFP
CBFP
registers
5)
transmission (E0... E9 and E11)
1)
Operation mode 0=Not in use; 1=Definite-time; 2=Inv.curve #1; 3=Inv.curve #2
2)
Group selection 0=Group 1; 1= Group 2; 2=GROUP input
3)
4)
5)
3.3.1 Input data

direction
U/f ratio I1 0.00...20.00 x U/f 0.00 R/M Calculated U/f ratio
1)
block
group 1 and 2
and registers of the function block
1)
19
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Output ERR O3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of ERR signal
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips.
1, Operation 2,...
3.3.3.3 Duration
The duration of the START condition is recorded as a percentage of the set operate
time in the DT mode of operation. When the inverse-time operation mode is selected,
the function block estimates the presumable operate time and updates the duration
according to the momentary level of overexcitation. Hence, the duration indicates
how near (in percent) the tripping will be since the activation of START.
3.3.3.4 Overexcitation level
If the function block trips, the U/f ratio is updated at the moment of tripping i.e. on
the rising edge of the TRIP signal. If the function block starts but does not trip, the
U/f ratio captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz) after the
beginning of the start situation is recorded.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of BLOCK signal and the active setting group are recorded at the
20
3.3.3.6 Priority
The priority of the recording function is as follows:

1. Tripping
2. Starting

direction
registration
2)
1)
2)

direction
registration
2)
1)
2)
21

direction
registration
2)
1)
2)
3.3.3.10 Events
coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from U/f> or U/f>> Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from U/f> or U/f>> Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from U/f> or U/f >> Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from U/f> or U/f>> Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from U/f> or U/f>> Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from U/f> or U/f>> Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK signal from U/f> or U/f>> Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK signal of U/f> or U/f>> Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of the function block Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of the function block On
E10 0 0 - -
E11 2048 1 Configuration error signal from the Activated
function block
22
4 Technical Data
Operation accuracies Depends on the frequency as follows:
20 < f < 40 Hz: 4% of set value
f 40 Hz: 2.5% of set value
Start time Injected U/f > 2.0 x Un/fn internal time <90 ms
total time 1) <100 ms
Reset time 1001060 ms (depends on the set minimum pulse width for the TRIP
output)
Reset ratio 20 < f < 40 Hz: typ. 0.99 (range 0.97...0.99)
f 40 Hz: typ 0.97 (range 0.95...0.98)
Retardation time Total retardation time when the measured U/f drops below the setting
value <105 ms 2)
Operate time accuracy in Over the frequency range 20...80 Hz:
definite-time mode 4% of set value or 40 ms 2)
Operate time accuracy in 100 ms 2) or the accuracy appearing when the measured voltage
inverse-time modes varies 1.0%
1)
2)

D -
23
1MRS752320-MUM OL3Cap
Issued: 3/2000
Three-Phase Overload Protection
for Shunt Capacitor Banks
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.3 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6
2.4.1 Overload protection.................................................................... 6
2.4.2 Reconnection inhibit ................................................................... 9
2.5 Setting groups ................................................................................... 10
2.6 Test mode ......................................................................................... 10
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 11

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 12
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 13
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 13
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 13
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 14
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 16
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 16
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 17
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 20
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 21

OL3Cap Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Protection of capacitor banks against overload produced by harmonic currents and

overvoltage
Single-phase, two-phase and three-phase overload alarm stage with definite-time
(DT) characteristic
Single-phase, two-phase and three-phase overload tripping stage with inverse-time
(IDMT) characteristic based on the standards ANSI/IEEE 37.99 and IEC 60871-1
Operation based on the peak value of the integrated current that is directly
proportional to the voltage over the capacitor
Undercurrent protection for detection of capacitor disconnection
Breaker reconnection inhibit function for enabling the complete capacitor
discharging time to pass before reclosing
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase capacitor bank overload
protection function block OL3Cap used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The application area for the function block is the protection of power capacitor banks
intended for reactive power compensation and filtering of the harmonics. According
to the standards, a high voltage capacitor shall be able to withstand 10 % overload.
The function block OL3Cap is specially designed for the protection against overload
produced by harmonic currents and overvoltage. Furthermore, the protection against
reconnection of a charged capacitor to a live network is included.
2
Substation Automation OL3Cap
3I>
3I<
CBFP
Cap
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI2/&DS)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOH

,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORIWKHWKUHHSKDVHFDSDFLWRUEDQNRYHUORDG
SURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQEORFN2/&DS

BS1 Digital signal (BOOL, active External blocking signal for freezing the
high) timers
BS2 Digital signal (BOOL, active External blocking signal for blocking the
high) ALARM and TRIP signals
high)
high) setting groups 1 and 2. When GROUP is
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, Input signal for resetting the trip and
pos.edge) alarm signals and registers of OL3Cap
3

ST_Ib Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Start signal of the tripping stage
Ib>
TRIP_Ib Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Trip signal of the tripping stage Ib>
ST_Ia Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Start signal of the alarm stage Ia>
ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Alarm signal of the alarm stage Ia>
ST_Imin Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Start signal of the undercurrent
stage I<
TRIP_Imin Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Trip signal of the undercurrent
stage I<
AR_INH Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for inhibiting the breaker
autoreclosing
configuration error
4
2.1 Configuration

inputs are connected to the Boolean inputs of the function block and, in the same way,
the outputs of the function block are connected to the output signals. It is also possible
to use only one or two phase currents. However, the phase currents have to be
connected to the corresponding inputs, i.e. it is not possible to connect the phase
current IL1 to the input IL2 etc. If a configuration is not correct, the output ERR is
activated. The output should be connected to an indication, i.e. an MMIALARM_
function block. A configuration error will force the function block to the Not in use
mode.
configuration error.
Technical Reference Manual for REF54_.
5
2.3 Measuring mode
The operation of the tripping (Ib>) and alarm (Ia>) stages is based on peak value of the
integrated current. Thus the filtered currents will be directly proportional to the
voltage over the capacitor. The operation accuracy is defined in the frequency range
f/fn=0.95...1.05. In the peak measurement, the harmonics of the phase currents are not
suppressed. However, the operation of the undercurrent (I<) stage is based on the
numerically calculated fundamental frequency component of phase currents. The
operation is insensitive to the DC component and the operation accuracy is defined in
the frequency range f/fn=0.95...1.05. In fundamental frequency measurement the
harmonics suppression is at least -50 dB at f = k x fn, where k = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
Amplitude/dB
filter.CNV
Frequency/Hz
)LJXUH )LOWHUFKDUDFWHULVWLFIRUILOWHUHGSKDVHFXUUHQWVIQ +]
2.4.1 Overload protection
The tripping stage Ib> is based on an inverse-time characteristic and the inverse curve
is based on ANSI/IEEE 37.99 and IEC 60871-1 recommendations for the time-related
voltage withstand of the capacitor banks. The gradient of the curve can be changed by
a k-factor (parameter: Time multiplier). The set current value of the tripping stage
is normally 1.0 x In (2.2 Setting the rated values of the protected unit). If the current in
6
one of the phases exceeds the setting value of stage Ib> by 10%, the stage starts and an
IDMT timer is started. The operate time depends on two factors, the degree of
overload and the inverse time multiplier k. If the overload situation lasts long enough
to exceed the operate time, the stage trips. However, the overload protection is
internally blocked for one second during the capacitor bank switching and, if the
overload situation persists, the function block will start after the blocking period.
The operate times of the overload stage Ib>:
I/Ib> t [s] Standard durations [s] Standard

1.15 1799 1800 IEC 60871-1
1.20 299 300 IEC 60871-1
1.30 58 60 ANSI/IEEE 37.99, IEC 60871-1
1.40 13.5 15 ANSI/IEEE 37.99
1.70 0.9 1 ANSI/IEEE 37.99
2.00 0.29 0.3 ANSI/IEEE 37.99
2.20 0.1 0.12 ANSI/IEEE 37.99
Note! The minimum operate time is 100 ms
)LJXUH ,QYHUVHWLPHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYHVRI2/&DS7KHGXUDWLRQVVSHFLILHGLQ

WKHVWDQGDUGVDUHPDUNHGZLWKRLQWKHILJXUH
The reset ratio enables even detection of an intermittent overload situation. If the
current exceeds the setting level of the tripping stage for a short period, but does not
cause a trip due to the decrease of the current to the hysteresis area, the output ST_Ib
is kept active, but the IDMT timer is frozen. However, if the current exceeds the
setting value again, the timer will continue from the freezing point. Thus, the timer is
cumulative. On the other hand, if the current exceeds the setting value only once and
7
remains then in the hysteresis area for 24 hours, the timer and the output ST_Ib are
reset. The following figure will clarify the functionality:
I>
24h
1.1Ib>
Hysteresis limit
it-timer t
Output ST_Ib t
it-timer.cnv
1
0
t
)LJXUH 7KHEHKDYLRXURIWKH,'07WLPHUDQGWKHRXWSXW67B,E
The alarm stage (Ia>) has a definite-time characteristic. The stage is set as a p.u. value
of the setting value of the tripping stage (Ib>). If the current in one of the phases
exceeds the setting value of the stage Ia>, the stage starts and a DT timer is started. If
the overload period exceeds the set operate time, the stage provides an alarm signal.
The alarm signal is indicated by a blinking start LED (yellow).
Operation mode
Not in use: The OL3Cap is switched off.
In use: The alarm and the tripping stages function simultaneously. Both stages cause
specific text indications and events as well as corresponding output signals.
Operate time
When the tripping, alarm or undercurrent stage starts, the corresponding start signal is
set to TRUE. Should the specific situation exceed the set inverse (Ib>) or definite (Ia>,
I<) operate time, the stage operates. The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is
included in the total operate time. When the stage operates, the specific trip signal is
set to TRUE.
the timer will be stopped (frozen). When the blocking signal BS2 is active, no trip
signal can be activated.
8
2.4.2 Reconnection inhibit
The reconnection inhibit function is based on the undercurrent protection. The

undercurrent protection, operating with definite-time characteristic, detects possible
undercurrent in the capacitor bank. The undercurrent stage (I<) is set as a p.u. value of
the setting value of the tripping stage (Ib>). When all three phase currents are
operating below the starting value and the operate time has elapsed, the output
TRIP_Imin is activated. The output is pulse-shaped and will not stay active even if the
undercurrent condition continues. The output should only be used for opening the
circuit breaker of the capacitor bank. The reconnection inhibit function connected to
the undercurrent protection will be activated at the same time. The output signal
AR_INH is indicated by a blinking start LED (yellow) and the signal will be active
until the set reconnection inhibit time has elapsed and is used to inhibit the
reconnection of a charged capacitor bank to a live network. AR_INH should be
connected to the CLOSEENA input of the circuit-breaker function block (COCBx) of
the capacitor bank.
It should be noted that the output signal TRIP_Imin should always be connected to the
OPENDIR input of the circuit-breaker function block (COCBx) of the capacitor bank.
This way it can be ensured that the breaker of the capacitor bank is opened before the
reconnection inhibit timer will be started.
After a loss of auxiliary supply or whenever powered up, the output signal AR_INH is
activated and the timer is started to ensure that the relay will not reclose the breaker
until the capacitor bank is discharged to an acceptable level.
)LJXUH &RQILJXUDWLRQIRU2/&DSSURWHFWLRQWDVNPVIQ +]
9
)LJXUH &RQILJXUDWLRQIRU2/&DSFRQWUROWDVNPVIQ +]
2.5 Setting groups
OL3Cap. Switching between the two groups can be done in the following three ways:

1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
10
The start output signals ST_Ib, ST_Ia and ST_Imin are always pulse-shaped. The
minimum pulse width of the corresponding output signal is set via a separate
parameter on the MMI or the serial communication. If the start situation is longer than
the set pulse width, the specific start signal remains active until the start situation is
over. The output signals TRIP_Ib, ALARM and TRIP_Imin may have a non-latching
or latching feature. When the latching mode has been selected, the specific trip signal
remains active until the output is reset even if the operation criterion has reset.
The function block provides a delayed trip signal CBFP after the TRIP_Ib signal
unless the overload condition has disappeared during the set CBFP time delay. In
circuit-breaker failure protection, the CBFP output can be used to operate a circuit
breaker in front of the circuit breaker of the capacitor bank. The control parameter
Trip pulse also sets the width of the CBFP output signal.
2.8 Resetting
The TRIP_Ib, ALARM, TRIP_Imin output signals and the registers can be reset either
via the RESET input, or over the serial bus or the local MMI.

1)
1)
Parameter F116V013 for OL3Cap X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
11
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for OL3Cap is 116.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
12
3.2 Setting values

direction
Start current Ib S2 0.30...1.50 x In 1.00 R Start current of Ib> stage
Time multiplier S3 0.052.0 - 1.00 R Time multiplier k for stage Ib>
Start current Ia S4 0.80...1.20 x Ib 1.05 R Start current of Ia> stage
Operate time Ia S5 0.5...6000.0 s 300 R Operate time of Ia> stage
Start current I< S6 0.100.70 x Ib 0.50 R Start current of I< stage
Operate time I< S7 0.1...120 s 1.0 R Operate time of I< stage
Reconn. inhibit S8 0.5...6000 s 60 R Setting of reconnection inhibit

time trec
1)

direction
Start current Ib S42 0.30...1.50 x In 1.00 R/W Start current of Ib> stage
Time multiplier S43 0.052.0 - 1.00 R/W Time multiplier k for stage Ib>
Start current Ia S44 0.80...1.20 x Ib 1.05 R/W Start current of Ia> stage
Operate time Ia S45 0.5...6000.0 s 300 R/W Operate time of Ia> stage
Start current I< S46 0.100.70 x Ib 0.50 R/W Start current of I< stage
Operate time I< S47 0.1...120 s 1.0 R/W Operate time of I< stage
Reconn. inhibit S48 0.5...6000 s 60 R/W Setting of reconnection inhibit

time trec
1)
13

direction
Start current Ib S72 0.30...1.50 x In 1.00 R/W Start current of Ib> stage
Time multiplier S73 0.052.0 - 1.00 R/W Time multiplier k for stage Ib>
Start current Ia S74 0.80...1.20 x Ib 1.05 R/W Start current of Ia> stage
Operate time Ia S75 0.5...6000.0 s 300 R/W Operate time of Ia> stage
Start current I< S76 0.100.70 x Ib 0.50 R/W Start current of I< stage
Operate time I< S77 0.1...120 s 1.0 R/W Operate time of I< stage
Reconn. inhibit S78 0.5...6000 s 60 R/W Setting of reconnection inhibit

time trec
1)
14

direction
group
Start pulse V3 0...1000 ms 0 R/W Minimum pulse width of ST_Ib,

ST_Ia and ST_Imin signals

TRIP_Ib, ALARM and
TRIP_Imin outputs

TRIP_Ib, ALARM, TRIP_Imin
and CBFP
CBFP
Register I< V7 0 or 1 4) - 0 R/W Enable the registering caused

by an undercurrent situation
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - 0 W Resetting of latched trip signals

and registers
Test ST_Ib V31 0 or 1 5) - - R/W Testing of ST_Ib
Test TRIP_Ib V32 0 or 1 5) - - R/W Testing of TRIP_Ib

5)
Test ST_Ia V34 0 or 1 5) - - R/W Testing of ST_Ia

5)
Test ALARM V35 0 or 1 - - R/W Testing of ALARM
Test ST_Imin V36 0 or 1 5) - - R/W Testing of ST_Imin

5)
Test TRIP_Imin V37 0 or 1 - - R/W Testing of TRIP_Imin
1)
2)
3)
4)
Register I< 0 = OFF; 1 = ON
5)
15
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Current IL1 I1 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Filtered peak value of
phase current IL1

phase current IL2

phase current IL3

1)
registers

the groups 1 and 2

of OL3Cap
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output ST_Ib O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of ST_Ib signal
1)
Output TRIP_Ib O2 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of TRIP_Ib signal

1)
Output ST_Ia O4 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of ST_Ia signal

1)
Output ST_Imin O6 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of ST_Imin signal
Output O7 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of TRIP_Imin signal

TRIP_Imin
Output AR_INH O8 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/M Status of AR_INH signal

1)
16
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
triggering input. However, the start or the trip of the undercurrent stage will cause a
registration only if the control parameter Register I< is set to ON.
The data of the last three operations (operation 1...3) are recorded and the values of
the most recent operation always replace the data of the oldest operation. The
registers are updated in the following order: Operation 1, Operation 2, Operation 3,
Operation 1, Operation 2,...
The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the ST_Ib, ST_Ia, ST_Imin or TRIGG
signal. If the ALARM or TRIP signal follows the START signal, the time stamp will
be updated.
3.3.3.3 Duration
In the DT mode of operation (Ia>, I<), the duration of the start situation is recorded as
a percentage of the set operate time and in the IDMT mode of operation (Ib>) as a
percentage of the calculated operate time.
3.3.3.4 Currents
alarming or tripping, i.e. on the rising edge of the ALARM, TRIP_Ib or TRIP_Imin (if
enabled) signal. For external triggering, the current values are updated at the moment
of triggering, i.e. on the rising edge of the input signal TRIGG. If the function block
starts but does not alarm or trip, the current values captured one fundamental cycle
(20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz) after the beginning of the start situation are
recorded. Thus the values of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 always originate from
the same moment and are recorded as multiples of the rated current In.
Note! If the stage Ia> alarms and the stage Ib> starts but does not trip, the current
values are captured at the moment of starting of the Ib> stage.
17
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the inputs BS1 and BS2 and the parameter Active group are
recorded at the moment of triggering. The parameter Active group indicates the
setting group valid for the recorded data.
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping of Ib>
2 Starting of Ib>
3 Alarming of Ia>
4 Starting of Ia>
5 Tripping of I<
6 Starting of I<
which means that if the function block has started, an external triggering request will
be neglected.

direction
Duration Ib V203 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Duration of start situation of Ib>
Duration Ia V204 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Duration of start situation of Ia>
Duration Imin V205 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Duration of start situation of I<
IL1 peak V206 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Filtered value of IL1

1)

2)
1)
2)
18

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)

direction

1)

1)
2)
19
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from OL3Cap stage Ib> Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from OL3Cap stage Ib> Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from OL3Cap stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from OL3Cap stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from OL3Cap stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from OL3Cap stage Activated
E6 64 0 START signal from OL3Cap stage Ia> Reset
E7 128 0 START signal from OL3Cap stage Ia> Activated
E8 256 1 ALARM signal from OL3Cap stage Reset
E9 512 1 ALARM signal from OL3Cap stage Activated
E10 1024 0 START signal from OL3Cap stage I< Reset
E11 2048 0 START signal from OL3Cap stage I< Activated
E12 4096 0 TRIP signal from OL3Cap stage I< Reset
E13 8192 0 TRIP signal from OL3Cap stage I< Activated
E14 16384 1 Reconnection inhibit signal of OL3Cap stage Reset
E15 32768 1 Reconnection inhibit signal of OL3Cap stage Activated
E16 65536 0 BS1 signal of OL3Cap stage Reset
E17 131072 0 BS1 signal of OL3Cap stage Activated
E18 262144 0 BS2 signal of OL3Cap stage Reset
E19 524288 0 BS2 signal of OL3Cap stage Activated
E20 1048576 0 Test mode of OL3Cap stage Off
E21 2097152 0 Test mode of OL3Cap stage On
20
4. Technical Data


1)
total time < 40 ms
TRIP output)
Reset ratio Overload stages:

Typ. 0.95 (range 0.95...0.98)
Undercurrent stage:
Typ. 1.05 (range 1.02...1.05)


(Alarm stage Ia>, f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2% of set value or 20 ms2)
undercurrent stage I<)
(Trip stage Ib>) f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 10% of theoretical value or 40 ms2)

1)
2)

B
21
1MRS100092 (Stage 1) RE_5_ _
1MRS100093 (Stage 2) Three-Phase Directional
1MRS100094 (Stage 3)
Issued: 10/1998 Overpower Protection
Version: C
Stage 1 (OPOW6St1)
Stage 2 (OPOW6St2)
Stage 3 (OPOW6St3)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.4 Delayed reset facility and drop-off time in DT Mode ............................ 6
2.5 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 7
2.6 Test mode ........................................................................................... 7
2.8 Resetting............................................................................................. 8
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 9
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 10
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 10
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 10
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 10
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 12
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 12
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 12
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 15
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 16

RE_5_ _ OPOW6St1OPOW6St3 ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Directional overpower protection for generators

Adjustable characteristic angle enables the active or reactive power based
operation
Calculation of power is based on the fundamental frequency of voltages and
currents
Three-phase active and reactive power measurement
Use of positive-sequence components is also possible
Wide setting ranges
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the directional overpower function blocks
OPOW6St1, OPOW6St2 and OPOW6St3 used in products based on the RED 500
Platform. The three stages are identical in operation.
S>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI232:6WB)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQ
VLQJOHOLQHGLDJUDPVUHIHUWRWKHPDQXDO7HFKQLFDO'HVFULSWLRQVRI
)XQFWLRQV,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI232:6W232:6WDQG232:6W
2
ABB Automation OPOW6St1OPOW6St3 RE_5_ _

the setting groups 1 and 2
signal and registers of OPOW6St_

3
2.1 Configuration

voltage dividers. The analogue inputs are configured in the Relay Configuration Tool
included in the CAP 505 Tool Box. A special dialogue box in the configuration tool is
also used for selecting the analogue input combination used for power measurement.
The analogue input combinations listed below are available in the dialogue box of the
Q are calculated from positive-sequence components. The correct input combination
is selected via the configuration tool.

U1, U2, U3 and IL1, IL2, IL3 Positive sequence power
U1 and IL1 Phase currents and voltages are assumed to be
symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
4
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block OPOW6St_ measures fundamental frequency currents and

voltages and calculates three-phase active and reactive power. The use of positive
sequence components is also possible, which makes the determination of power
insensitive to possible asymmetry in currents or voltages and corresponds to the real
load of the prime mover.
With the rated frequency of 50 Hz, the active and reactive power values are updated
twice each fundamental frequency cycle, i.e. every 10 ms.
Power direction can be changed via the control parameter Power direction.
The directional overpower function block OPOW6St_ starts if the power reaches the
operating area. The direction is set with the parameter Angle. The setting parameter
Power Setting is the shortest distance between the origo and the operating line.
Hysteresis
Operates
3R ZH U
6H WW LQ J
P
.
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLQJFKDUDVWHULVWLFRI232:6WBZKHQWKHSDUDPHWHU$QJOHLV
DQGWKHSDUDPHWHU3RZHUGLUHFWLRQLV)RUZDUG
Hysteresis
Operates
3 RZ HU
6 H W WL QJ
$QJOH
P
5
2.4 Delayed reset facility and drop-off time in DT Mode
At reciprocating load conditions the power measuring element may pick up briefly
and periodically. The purpose of the delayed reset function is to ensure that the
function block operates within its predetermined operating time even in such power
swing conditions. Without the delayed reset function the DT timer would reset as
soon as the measuring element drops off.
When the DT timer has started, it goes on running normally even if the measuring
element drops off, provided the drop-off period is shorter than the set drop-off time. If
the drop-off period is longer than the set drop-off time, the DT timer will reset when
the drop-off time elapses (Figure 5).
In Figures 5 and 6 the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the measured
power is above the set start value and FALSE when the measured power is below the
set start value.
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
elapsed during the drop-off period, the function block will trip once the measured
power exceeds the set start value again (Figure 6).
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
6
2.5 Setting groups
OPOW6St_. Switching between the two groups can be done in the following three
ways:
1 Locally with the control parameter Group selection1) on the MMI

1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
corresponding output signal is set with a separate parameter on the MMI or on serial
have reset.
7
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F092V013 for OPOW6St1 X X
1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
8
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for OPOW6St1 is 92, that for OPOW6St2 93
and that for OPOW6St3 94.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
9
3.2 Setting values

Power setting S1 1.0...200.0 % Sn 100.0 R Start power
Angle S2 -90...90 0.0 R Power direction
Operate time S3 0.04...300.00 s 0.5 R Operate time

Power setting S41 1.0...200.0 % Sn 100.0 R/W Start power
Angle S42 -90...90 0 R/W Power direction
Operate time S43 0.04...300.00 s 0.5 R/W Operate time

10

direction
1)
OPOW6St# V1 0 or 1 2) - 1 R/W OPOW6St_ in use or not in use
counter
Measuring mode V3 0...13 3) - 0 R Power measurement mode
Power direction V4 0 or 1 4) - 0 R/W Direction of power flow

5)
Group selection V5 0...2 - 0 R/W Selection of the active setting group
Start pulse V7 0...1000 ms 0 R/W Min pulse width of START signal

TRIP output
Trip pulse V9 40...1000 ms 40 R/W Min pulse width of TRIP and CBFP
CBFP time V10 100...1000 ms 100 R/W Operate time of CBFP

registers

8)
(E0 ... E9)
(E0 ... E9)
(E0 ... E9)
(E0 ... E9)
1)
Parameter # denotes the stage number of the function block (1, 2 or 3)
2)
3)
Measuring mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = U1,U2,U3 & I1,I2,I3; 2=U12,U23,U0 & I1,I2,I3
3 = U23,U31,U0 & I1,I2,I3; 4 = U12,U31,U0 & I1,I2,I3; 5 = U12,U23 & I1,I2,I3;
6 = U23,U31 & I1,I2,I3; 7 = U12,U31 & I1,I2,I3; 8 = U1 & I1; 9 = U2 & I2;
10 = U3 & I3; 11 = U12 & I3; 12 = U23 & I1; 13 = U31 & I2
4)
Power direction 0 = Forward; 1 = Reverse
5)
6)
7)
8)
11
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Active power P I1 -10.00...10.00 x Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated active power
Reactive powerQ I2 -10.00...10.00 x Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated reactive power

1)

groups 1 and 2

OPOW6St_
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output START O1 0 or 11) - 0 R/M Status of start signal
Output TRIP O2 0 or 11) - 0 R/M Status of trip signal

1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips.
1, Operation 2,...
12
3.3.3.3 Duration
3.3.3.4 Active and reactive power
If the function block trips, the power values are updated at the moment of tripping i.e.
on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. If the function block starts but does not trip, the
power values captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz) after
the beginning of the start situation are recorded. Consequently, the active and reactive
power values P and Q always originate from the same moment and are recorded as
multiples of the rated power Sn.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the input signal BLOCK (Active or Not active) and the Active
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting

direction
Active power P V204 -10.00...10.00 x Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated active power
Reactive powerQ V205 -10.00...10.00 x Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated reactive power
BLOCK V206 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of BLOCK input

2)
1)
2)
13

direction

2)
1)
2)

direction

2)
1)
2)
14
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK signal of S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK signal of S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of S> stage 1, 2 or 3 On
15
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies 1.0 % of set value or 0.01 x rated value
Start time Injected power > 2.0 x Power setting:

1)
total time < 40 ms
Reset time 70...1030 ms (depends on the minimum pulse width set for the TRIP
output)
Retardation time Total retardation time when the measured power drops
below the value set for the Power setting parameter 2) < 45 ms
f/ fn = 0.95...1.05: 2% of set value or 20 ms2)

1)
2)

C -
16
1MRS752321-MUM OPOW6St _
Issued: 10/1998
Three-Phase Directional
Overpower Protection
Stage 1 (OPOW6St1)
Stage 2 (OPOW6St2)
Data subject to change without notice Stage 3 (OPOW6St3)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.5 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 7
2.6 Test mode ........................................................................................... 7
2.8 Resetting............................................................................................. 8
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 9
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 10
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 10
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 10
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 10
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 12
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 12
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 12
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 15
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 16

OPOW6St _ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Directional overpower protection for generators

Adjustable characteristic angle enables the active or reactive power based
operation
currents
Wide setting ranges
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the directional overpower function blocks
OPOW6St1, OPOW6St2 and OPOW6St3 used in products based on the RED 500
S>
2
Substation Automation OPOW6St _

signal and registers of OPOW6St_

3
2.1 Configuration


symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
4
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block OPOW6St_ measures fundamental frequency currents and

sequence components is also possible, which makes the determination of power
insensitive to possible asymmetry in currents or voltages and corresponds to the real
load of the prime mover.
The directional overpower function block OPOW6St_ starts if the power reaches the
operating area. The direction is set with the parameter Angle. The setting parameter
Power Setting is the shortest distance between the origo and the operating line.
Hysteresis
Operates
3R ZH U
6H WW LQ J
P
.
Hysteresis
Operates
3 RZ HU
6 H W WL QJ
$QJOH
P
5
At reciprocating load conditions the power measuring element may pick up briefly
power is above the set start value and FALSE when the measured power is below the
set start value.
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
power exceeds the set start value again (Figure 6).
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
6
2.5 Setting groups
OPOW6St_. Switching between the two groups can be done in the following three
ways:

1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
have reset.
7
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
8
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for OPOW6St1 is 92, that for OPOW6St2 93
and that for OPOW6St3 94.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
9
3.2 Setting values

Angle S2 -90...90 0.0 R Power direction


10

direction
1)
OPOW6St# V1 0 or 1 2) - 1 R/W OPOW6St_ in use or not in use
counter

5)
Group selection V5 0...2 - 0 R/W Selection of the active setting group
Start pulse V7 0...1000 ms 0 R/W Min pulse width of START signal

TRIP output
Trip pulse V9 40...1000 ms 40 R/W Min pulse width of TRIP and CBFP
CBFP time V10 100...1000 ms 100 R/W Operate time of CBFP

registers

8)
(E0 ... E9)
(E0 ... E9)
(E0 ... E9)
(E0 ... E9)
1)
2)
3)
Measuring mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = U1,U2,U3 & I1,I2,I3; 2=U12,U23,U0 & I1,I2,I3
6 = U23,U31 & I1,I2,I3; 7 = U12,U31 & I1,I2,I3; 8 = U1 & I1; 9 = U2 & I2;
10 = U3 & I3; 11 = U12 & I3; 12 = U23 & I1; 13 = U31 & I2
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
11
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Active power P I1 -1000.0... % Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated active power
1000.0
Reactive powerQ I2 -1000.0 % Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated reactive power

...1000.0
Input BLOCK I3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for blocking the function

groups 1 and 2

OPOW6St_
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output TRIP O2 0 or 11) - 0 R/M Status of trip signal

1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips.
1, Operation 2,...
12
3.3.3.3 Duration
3.3.3.4 Active and reactive power
3.3.3.5 Status data
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
13

direction
Active power P V204 -1000.0...1000.0 % Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated active power
Reactive powerQ V205 -1000.0...1000.0 % Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated reactive power

2)
1)
2)

direction

2)
1)
2)

direction

1)

1)
2)
14
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK signal of S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK signal of S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of S> stage 1, 2 or 3 Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of S> stage 1, 2 or 3 On
15
4. Technical Data

Start time Injected power > 2.0 x Power setting:

1)
total time < 40 ms
output)
Retardation time Total retardation time when the measured power drops
below the value set for the Power setting parameter 2) < 45 ms
f/ fn = 0.95...1.05: 2% of set value or 20 ms2)

1)
2)

C -
D -
16
1MRS100062 (OV3Low) RE_5_ _
1MRS100063 (OV3High) Three-Phase
Issued: 10/1997
Version: E Overvoltage Protection
Data subject to change without notice Low-Set Stage (OV3Low)
High-Set Stage (OV3High)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6
2.3.1 Operation hysteresis and reset ratio........................................... 7
2.4 IDMT type operation of OV3Low ......................................................... 8
2.5 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 9
2.6 Test mode ........................................................................................... 9
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 10
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 11
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 12
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 12
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 13
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 13
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 15
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 15
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 15
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 18
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 19

RE_5_ _ OV3Low ABB Automation
OV3High
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Single-phase, two-phase and three-phase overvoltage protection

OV3Low: two inverse-time (IDMT) characteristics
instantaneous peak-to-peak values of voltages or the numerically calculated
fundamental frequency voltages
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase overvoltage function blocks
OV3Low and OV3High used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The
inverse-time operation is only included in the OV3Low function block.
Faults in the network or a faulty tap changer or voltage regulator of a power

transformer may cause abnormal busbar voltages. The function blocks OV3Low and
OV3High are designed for the single-phase, two-phase and three-phase overvoltage
protection whenever the DT characteristic or, as concerns the low-set stage, the IDMT
(Inverse Definite Minimum Time) characteristic is appropriate. Suppression of
harmonics is possible.
3U> 3U>>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI29/RZDQG29+LJK)RU,(&V\PEROV

XVHGLQVLQJOHOLQHGLDJUDPVUHIHUWRWKHPDQXDO7HFKQLFDO'HVFULSWLRQV
RI)XQFWLRQV,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
2
ABB Automation OV3Low RE_5_ _
OV3High
3
OV3High

UL1_U12 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring the phase-to-phase
voltage U12 or the phase-to-earth voltage UL1
BS1 Digital signal (BOOL, Blocking signal 1
active high)
active high)
TRIGG Digital signal (BOOL, Control signal for triggering the registers
pos. edge)
active high) setting groups 1 and 2. When GROUP is
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, Input signal for resetting the trip signal and
pos. edge) registers of OV3Low or OV3High

STATUS1 Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Status of UL1_U12
error
4
OV3High
2.1 Configuration
Voltages can be measured with conventional voltage transformers or voltage dividers.

graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The phase-to-phase voltages U12, U23 and
U31 are connected to the corresponding UL1_U12, UL2_U23 and UL3_U31 inputs of
the function block. Digital inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of the function
block and in the same way, the outputs of the function block are connected to the
output signals.
1RWHIf phase voltages are measured, the phase voltage UL1 is connected to the
input U12, the phase voltage UL2 to the input U23 and the phase voltage UL3 to the
input U31. The control parameter Measuring mode has to be in position Mode 3.
Phase-to-phase voltages are derived from phase voltages within the function block as
follows:
U12 = UL1 UL2

U23 = UL2 UL3
U31 = UL3 UL1
The default value of the parameter Measuring mode is Mode 2, i.e. the relay
measures phase-to-phase voltages.
1RWHWhen phase-to-phase voltages are derived numerically in the relay, only the
fundamental frequency measurement can be used: peak-to-peak measurement is not
available (see section Measuring mode).
5
OV3High
2.2 Measuring mode
When phase-to-phase voltages are measured, the function block operates on two
alternative measuring principles: the average value of consecutive instantaneous peak-
to-peak values of voltages or the numerically calculated fundamental frequency
voltage. The measuring mode is selected with either an MMI parameter or a serial
communication parameter as follows:
Measuring mode Voltage types measured Measuring principle

Mode 1 Phase-to-phase voltages Peak-to-peak measurement
Mode 2 Phase-to-phase voltages Fundamental frequency
measurement
Mode 3 Phase-to-earth voltages Fundamental frequency
measurement
to-peak measurement, the harmonics of the voltages are not suppressed, whereas in
fundamental frequency measurement the harmonics suppression is about
If at least one phase-to-phase voltage measured by the function block exceeds the set
start voltage, the module delivers the START signal. When the function block starts,
the START signal and the STATUS_ output signal of the specific phase-to-earth or
phase-to-phase voltage are set to TRUE. Should the overvoltage situation exceed the
preset definite operate time or, at the inverse-time operation of OV3Low, the time
determined by the level of the measured voltage, the function block operates. At the
inverse-time operation, two different sets of voltage/time curves, A and B, are
available. The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in the total operate
time. In operation, the TRIP signal is set to TRUE.
TRIP signal can be blocked by activating the BS2 signal until the function block
drops off.
6
OV3High
2.3.1 Operation hysteresis and reset ratio
The Oper. hysteresis control parameter can be set to adjust the level of a
comparator. The operation hysteresis affects the reset ratio. If the hysteresis is set to
3%, for example, the reset ratio of an overvoltage function block (OV3_) will be 0.97.
On the other hand, the same setting for an undervoltage function block (UV3_) will
lead to the reset ratio of 1.03. Furthermore, an absolute operation hysteresis of 0.005
per unit is included. The absolute hysteresis affects the reset ratio when a low start
voltage setting is used. For example, if the start voltage setting is 0.2 x Un and the
operation hysteresis is set to 2%, the reset ratio would normally be 0.996 (OV_) or
1.004 (UV_). Due to the absolute hysteresis, however, the reset ratio will be 0.995
(OV_) or 1.005 (UV_).
The default setting of the parameter, which is 4%, is recommended. A lower

hysteresis setting may lead to repetitive starting of protection. Therefore, the
deviation from the nominal frequency and the total harmonic distortion (THD) of the
network should be carefully studied when using a setting lower than the default value,
since these factors affect the measurement accuracy. If a low hysteresis setting is
used, the following is recommended:
Network condition Recommended action

Low deviation from the nominal Use fundamental frequency measurement
frequency (Mode 2&3)
High deviation from the nominal Use peak-to-peak measurement (Mode 1)
frequency but low THD
High deviation from the nominal Increase the operation hysteresis setting
frequency and high THD
Figure 3 below clarifies the effect of the Oper. hysteresis parameter. The start
voltage of overvoltage protection is set to 1.1 x Un and that of undervoltage
protection to 0.9 x Un. Both protection functions have the same setting of 4% for the
Oper. hysteresis parameter.
U/Un
hysteresis zones
1
1.1
4%
2
4
0.9 4%
3
)LJXUH 3ULQFLSDORIWKHRSHUDWLRQK\VWHUHVLVRIYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQ2YHUYROWDJH

SURWHFWLRQVWDUWV7KHVWDUWRIRYHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQLVUHVHW
8QGHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQVWDUWV7KHVWDUWRIXQGHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQLV
UHVHW
7
OV3High
2.4 IDMT type operation of OV3Low
At the inverse-time characteristic, the operate time will the shorter, the more the
voltage deviates from the set start voltage. The relationship between time and voltage
can be expressed as follows:
ka
t= +c
U-U > p
(b U > -0.5)
,where
k adjustable time multiplier
U measured voltage
U> set start voltage
a constant 480
b constant 32
c constant 0.035
p constant (see the table below)
At the IDMT mode of operation, the integration of the operate time of the overvoltage
function block does not start until the voltage exceeds the set start value by 6%. The
operate time accuracy stated in the technical data applies when the voltage exceeds
the set value by 10%.
The overvoltage function block includes two selectable inverse-time characteristics,

curve A and curve B. The degree of inversity is determined by the factor p as follows:
Characteristic p (constant)
A 2
B 3

The parameter Operation mode is used for selecting the desired operate time
characteristic.
8
OV3High
2.5 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
9
OV3High
2.8 Resetting
The TRIP output signal and the registers can be reset either with the RESET input or

1)
1)
Parameter F062V013 for OV3Low X X
1)
Parameter F063V013 for OV3High X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
10
OV3High
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for OV3Low is 62 and that for OV3High 63.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
11
OV3High
3.2 Setting values
OV3Low

direction
inverse-time characteristic
Start voltage S2 0.10...1.60 x Un 1.10 R Start voltage

1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = Definite time; 2 = A curve; 3 = B curve
OV3High

direction

1)
12
OV3High
OV3Low

direction
Operation mode S41 0 ... 3 1) - 1 R/W Selection of operation mode and
Start voltage S42 0.10...1.60 x Un 1.10 R/W Start voltage
1)
OV3High

direction

1)
OV3Low

direction
1)
OV3High

direction

1)
13
OV3High

direction
Measuring mode V1 0 ... 2 1) - 0 R/W Selection of measuring mode

group

START signal

for TRIP output
Oper. hysteresis V7 1.05.0 % 4.0 R/W Operation hysteresis

and registers




1)
Measuring mode 0 = Mode 1; 1 = Mode 2; 2 = Mode 3
2)
3)
4)
5)
14
OV3High
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Voltage UL1_U12 I1 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Phase-to-phase voltage U12 or
phase-to earth voltage UL1



1)

registers

the groups 1 and 2

OV3Low or OV3High
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
15
OV3High
3.3.3.3 Duration

percentage of the set operate time and, as concerns OV3Low, at the IDMT mode of
3.3.3.4 Voltages
If the function block trips, the voltage values are updated at the moment of tripping,
i.e. on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. At external triggering, the voltage values are
If the function block starts but does not trip, the voltage values captured one
situation will be recorded. So, the values of the phase-to-phase voltages U12, U23 and
U31 are always recorded at the same moment, as multiples of the rated voltage Un.
3.3.3.5 Status data
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
16
OV3High

direction
Voltage UL1_U12 V204 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Filtered value of U12 or UL1
1)

2)
1)
2)

direction
1)

2)
1)
2)
17
OV3High

direction
1)

2)
1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from 3U> or 3U>> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from 3U> or 3U>> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from 3U> or 3U>> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from 3U> or 3U>> stage Activated
E4 16 0 BS1 signal of 3U> or 3U>> stage Reset
E5 32 0 BS1 signal of 3U> or 3U>> stage Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of 3U> or 3U>> stage Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of 3U> or 3U>> stage On
18
OV3High
4. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value
Start time Injected voltages = 1.1 x start voltage:
output)
Reset ratio Default 0.96 (range 0.95...0.995)
Depends on the value of the Oper. hysteresis parameter
Retardation time Total retardation time when the voltage drops

Operate time accuracy at Depends on the frequency of the voltage measured:

definite-time mode
Accuracy class index E at Depends on the frequency of the voltage measured:

inverse-time mode
(OV3Low) f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 20 ms2) or the accuracy appearing when the
measured voltage varies 2.5%

(see above) Mode 1 No suppression
Mode 2&3 -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...

1)
2)
19
OV3High

block revision
OV3Low B -
D Input names changed:

U12 UL1_U12
U23 UL2_U23
U31 UL3_U31
New outputs: STATUS1, STATUS2, STATUS3
Control parameter Oper. hysteresis added
Setting parameter values changed:

Start voltage: 0.801.60 0.101.60
Operate time: 0.0510.00 0.05300.00

Voltage U12 Voltage UL1_U12
OV3High B -
C See above: OV3Low D
20
1MRS752322-MUM OV3_
Issued: 10/1997
Three-Phase
Overvoltage Protection
Low-Set Stage (OV3Low)
Data subject to change without notice High-Set Stage (OV3High)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6
2.4 IDMT type operation of OV3Low ......................................................... 8
2.5 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 9
2.6 Test mode ........................................................................................... 9
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 10
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 11
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 12
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 12
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 13
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 13
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 15
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 15
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 15
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 18
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 19

OV3_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Single-phase, two-phase and three-phase overvoltage protection

OV3Low: two inverse-time (IDMT) characteristics
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase overvoltage function blocks
OV3Low and OV3High used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The
inverse-time operation is only included in the OV3Low function block.

transformer may cause abnormal busbar voltages. The function blocks OV3Low and
OV3High are designed for the single-phase, two-phase and three-phase overvoltage
3U> 3U>>

2
Substation Automation OV3 _
3

active high)
active high)
pos. edge)
pos. edge) registers of OV3Low or OV3High

error
4
2.1 Configuration

output signals.
1RWHIf phase voltages are measured, the phase voltage UL1 is connected to the
input U12, the phase voltage UL2 to the input U23 and the phase voltage UL3 to the
input U31. The control parameter Measuring mode has to be in position Mode 3.
Phase-to-phase voltages are derived from phase voltages within the function block as
follows:
U12 = UL1 UL2

U23 = UL2 UL3
U31 = UL3 UL1
1RWHWhen phase-to-phase voltages are derived numerically in the relay, only the
5
2.2 Measuring mode

measurement
measurement
If at least one phase-to-phase voltage measured by the function block exceeds the set
start voltage, the module delivers the START signal. When the function block starts,
the START signal and the STATUS_ output signal of the specific phase-to-earth or
phase-to-phase voltage are set to TRUE. Should the overvoltage situation exceed the
preset definite operate time or, at the inverse-time operation of OV3Low, the time
determined by the level of the measured voltage, the function block operates. At the
inverse-time operation, two different sets of voltage/time curves, A and B, are
available. The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in the total operate
time. In operation, the TRIP signal is set to TRUE.
TRIP signal can be blocked by activating the BS2 signal until the function block
drops off.
6
(OV_) or 1.005 (UV_).


U/Un
hysteresis zones
1
1.1
4%
2
4
0.9 4%
3

UHVHW
7
2.4 IDMT type operation of OV3Low
At the inverse-time characteristic, the operate time will the shorter, the more the
ka
t= +c
U-U > p
(b U > -0.5)
,where
U measured voltage
U> set start voltage
a constant 480
b constant 32
c constant 0.035
p constant (see the table below)
In the IDMT mode of operation, the integration of the operate time of the overvoltage
function block does not start until the voltage exceeds the set start value by 6%. The
operate time accuracy stated in the technical data applies when the voltage exceeds
the set value by 10%.
The overvoltage function block includes two selectable inverse-time characteristics,

curve A and curve B. The degree of inversity is determined by the factor p as follows:
Characteristic p (constant)
A 2
B 3

The parameter Operation mode is used for selecting the desired operate time
characteristic.
8
2.5 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
9
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F062V013 for OV3Low X X
1)
Parameter F063V013 for OV3High X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
10
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for OV3Low is 62 and that for OV3High 63.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
11
3.2 Setting values
OV3Low

direction
Time multiplier S4 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R Time multiplier in IDMT mode

1)
OV3High

direction

1)
12
OV3Low

direction
Time multiplier S44 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R/W Time multiplier in IDMT mode
1)
OV3High

direction

1)
OV3Low

direction
1)
OV3High

direction

1)
13

direction
Measuring mode V1 0 ... 2 1) - 0 R/W Selection of measuring mode

group

START signal

for TRIP output

and registers




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
14
3.3.1 Input data

direction



1)

registers

the groups 1 and 2

OV3Low or OV3High
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
15
3.3.3.3 Duration

percentage of the set operate time and, as concerns OV3Low, in the IDMT mode of
3.3.3.4 Voltages
3.3.3.5 Status data
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
16

direction
1)

2)
1)
2)

direction
1)

2)
1)
2)
17

direction
1)

2)
1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from 3U> or 3U>> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from 3U> or 3U>> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from 3U> or 3U>> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from 3U> or 3U>> stage Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of 3U> or 3U>> stage Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of 3U> or 3U>> stage On
18
4. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value
Start time Injected voltages = 1.1 x start voltage:
output)

Operate time accuracy in Depends on the frequency of the voltage measured:

definite-time mode
Accuracy class index E in Depends on the frequency of the voltage measured:

inverse-time mode
(OV3Low) f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 20 ms2) or the accuracy appearing when the
measured voltage varies 2.5%


1)
2)
19

block revision
OV3Low B -
D Input names changed:

U12 UL1_U12
U23 UL2_U23
U31 UL3_U31

Start voltage: 0.801.60 0.101.60
Operate time: 0.0510.00 0.05300.00

OV3High B -
C See above: OV3Low D
20
1MRS752335-MUM PQCU3H
Issued: 3/2000
Current Waveform Distortion
Measurement
Contents
1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Harmonic distortion ............................................................................. 3
1.3 Application........................................................................................... 4
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 6
2.1.1 Analogue channels..................................................................... 6
2.1.2 Digital inputs............................................................................... 6
2.1.3 Configuration error ..................................................................... 6
2.1.4 Configuration examples.............................................................. 7
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 8
2.4 Observation times ............................................................................... 9
2.5 Real time monitoring ........................................................................... 9
2.6 Harmonic limit supervision................................................................. 11
2.7 Statistics............................................................................................ 11
2.7.1 Background.............................................................................. 11
2.7.2 Measurement settings.............................................................. 12
2.7.3 Input values.............................................................................. 13
2.7.4 Calculated results..................................................................... 14
2.7.4.1 Recording banks ........................................................... 14
2.7.4.2 Maximum values ........................................................... 14
2.7.4.3 Percentiles .................................................................... 15
2.7.4.4 Fixed percentiles for selected harmonic ........................ 17
2.7.5 Output CUM_HIGH .................................................................. 17
2.7.6 Indications and events.............................................................. 17
2.7.7 Exceptions ............................................................................... 17
2.8 Setting examples............................................................................... 18
2.9 Step-by-step guide for settings.......................................................... 20
2.10 Measurement accuracy ..................................................................... 23
PQCU3H Substation Automation
2.11 Resetting ...........................................................................................24

3 Parameters and Events ..........................................................................25
3.1 General..............................................................................................25
3.2 Control settings..................................................................................26
3.2.1 Statistic limits............................................................................26
3.2.2 Settings ....................................................................................26
3.3.1 Inputs/ Outputs .........................................................................27
3.3.2 3 sec. values.............................................................................28
3.3.3 10 min. values ..........................................................................29
3.3.4 Recorded data ..........................................................................30
3.3.4.1 General..........................................................................30
3.3.4.2 A:Period info ..................................................................30
3.3.4.3 A:Maxim. values ............................................................31
3.3.4.4 A:Cumulat. prob.............................................................32
3.3.4.5 A:Selected harm. ...........................................................32
3.3.4.6 B:Period info ..................................................................33
3.3.4.7 B:Maxim. values ............................................................33
3.3.4.8 B:Cumulat. prob.............................................................34
3.3.4.9 B:Selected harm. ...........................................................34
3.3.4.10 Last exceeding...............................................................35
3.3.5 Events ......................................................................................35
4 Technical Data.........................................................................................36
2
Substation Automation PQCU3H
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
Harmonic distortion
Total Harmonic Distortion measurement (THD) or
Total Demand Distortion measurement (TDD)
Individual harmonics up to 13th:
short time average values for monitoring
statistics according to EN 50160 and IEC 61000-4-7 (standards for voltage
distortion measurements are applied to current distortion measurements)
Measurement activation via:
MMI
preset time
serial communication line or a parameter
Measurement frequency:
once (single measurement, e.g. one day)
continuously
periodically (e.g. every Tuesday)
Measurement with:
conventional current transformers
Rogowski coils
1.2 Harmonic distortion
In standards, power quality is defined through the characteristics of the supply

voltage. Transients, short and long duration voltage variations, unbalance and
waveform distortion are the key characteristics describing power quality. Ultimately,
power quality is, however, a customer-driven issue. It could be said that any power
problem concerning voltage or current that results in a failure or misoperation of
customer equipment is a power quality problem.
Harmonic distortion in a power system is caused by nonlinear devices. Electronic

power converter loads constitute the most important class of nonlinear loads in a
power system. Switch-mode power supplies in a number of single-phase electronic
equipment (personal computers, printers, copiers etc.) have a very high third-
harmonic content in the current. Three-phase electronic power converters (dc/ac
drives), on the other hand, do not generate third-harmonic currents. Still, they can be
significant sources of harmonics.
The harmonic voltage distortion in a power system depends on the current distortion
produced by nonlinear loads and on the impedance characteristics visible to each load.
The most sensitive equipment to voltage harmonics is usually data processing and
communication equipment; at the same time these devices are considerable current
harmonic sources. These devices are susceptible to misoperation caused by harmonic
distortion. For example, in computers and medical instruments considerably low
harmonic levels can result in malfunctions that can have serious consequences. In
3
rotating machinery, a major effect of harmonic voltages and currents is an increased

heating due to iron and copper losses at the harmonic frequencies.
Power quality monitoring is an essential service utilities can provide for their
industrial and key customers. Not only can a monitoring system provide information
about system disturbances and their possible causes, it can also detect problem
conditions throughout the system before they cause customer complaints, equipment
malfunctions, and even equipment damage or failure. Power quality problems are not
limited to the utility side of the system. In fact, the majority of power quality
problems are localized within customer facilities. Thus, power quality monitoring is
not only an effective customer service strategy, but also a way to protect a utilitys
reputation for quality power and service.
At present, power utilities obtain power quality information via measurements done
with portable measuring devices. Enhanced energy meters can also produce some
power quality information. The function block PQCU3H provides a convenient
method for monitoring power quality by means of current waveform distortion:
monitoring can be done together with feeder protection and control using products
based on the RED 500 Platform. Function block PQCU3H produces statistical data
about harmonic distortion for long term evaluation. In addition, the function block
provides short time average and maximum values for THD and individual harmonics.
1.3 Application
This document specifies the functions of the function block PQCU3H for current
waveform distortion measurement used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The function block PQCU3H is used for measuring the harmonics and monitoring the
power quality in distribution networks. Although the European Standard EN 50160
concerns voltage distortion, the same standard is applied to current distortion
measurements in PQCU3H. Data collection and analysis is done according to EN
50160. Measuring principles for individual harmonics and THD are adapted from the
International standard IEC 61000-4-7. The American standard IEEE Std 1159 is also
partly supported.
The function block measures quasi-stationary (slowly varying) harmonics up to 13th.

Distortion measurement does not include rapidly changing harmonics, interharmonics
or other spurious components.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI34&8+
4

FREQ_REF Analogue signal (SINT) Input for frequency reference
DISABLE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for disabling PQCU3H
TRIGG Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for triggering PQCU3H
RESET Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for resetting the registers of PQCU3H

HAR_HIGH Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Output signal for exceeding a setting limit for a
harmonic
CUM_HIGH Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Output signal for exceeding a setting limit for
cumulative probability of a harmonic
THD Analogue signal (REAL) Measured THD (or TDD)
5
2.1 Configuration
2.1.1 Analogue channels
Note: It is necessary that currents are connected to the inputs of the function block in
the correct order, cf. Input description above and Configuration examples below.
In order to carry out distortion measurement, it is recommended to connect a voltage

signal to the FREQ_REF input and set frequency measurement on for that channel. If
frequency measurement has already been set on for some analogue channel, it is
recommended to connect that channel to the FREQ_REF input.
Note: If frequency measurement is not available (only current signals), it is possible to

leave the FREQ_REF input unconnected. The function block will have the same
functionality as with the FREQ_REF connected. Without frequency reference,
however, the frequency range for reliable measurements is only f1 = fN 1 Hz.
Hence, the use of a frequency reference signal is recommended whenever possible.
At the rated frequency of 50 Hz, the function block can only be configured to the task
interval of 10 ms (at 60 Hz 8.33 ms). If any other task interval than that of 10 ms is
used, only the Not in use mode is available.
2.1.2 Digital inputs

DISABLE
DISABLE input is used for disabling the statistics calculation. If DISABLE is
active (=1), statistics are not calculated. However, the real time monitoring
continues despite the DISABLE signal.
TRIGG
TRIGG signal is used for measurement activation. An active TRIGG signal
starts a new observation time
RESET
RESET signal clears all recorded data except the statistical data from the
previous observation time. If there should be any changes to the settings after
the measurement has been started, RESET should be activated.
2.1.3 Configuration error
If the analogue channel configuration is wrong or the frequency measurement is not

selected, there is no measurement mode available (only the Not in use mode).
Measurement is disabled also if the task interval is set to other than 10 ms (at 50 Hz).
6
2.1.4 Configuration examples
Note: Check the detailed description of the measuring modes below in the
corresponding section.
Harmonics can be measured from phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3. With the analogue
channel configuration given in Figure 2 all phase currents and the worst case can be
measured.
)LJXUH $OOSKDVHFXUUHQWVFRQQHFWHG
It is not necessary to connect all inputs to the corresponding analogue channels. For
example, only IL2 can be connected to the input IL2 as shown in Figure 3, but in this
case harmonics can be measured only from IL2.
)LJXUH 2QO\SKDVHFXUUHQW,/FRQQHFWHG
Currents can be measured using conventional current transformers or Rogowski coils.

When a Rogowski coil is used, the accuracy recommendations given by IEC 61000-4-
7:1991 are not met. The measuring devices and signal types for analogue channels are
selected and configured in a special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool.
used).
7
2.2 Measuring mode
The following measuring modes are available:

Measuring mode Usage
Not in use Function block does not measure/record anything
L1 Phase current IL1 is measured
Worst phase Worst phase current is measured
When the measuring mode is set to Worst phase, a current with the highest THD (or
TDD) is measured. Because the worst case can vary during the observation time (first
IL1, then IL2 and then again IL1), the statistics can originate from different currents. The
monitored value Measured input indicates the actual phase all the time (phase
current with the highest THD).
The following criteria must be fulfilled:
1. Fundamental frequency:
I1 = 0.9 I 1 ...1.1 I 1
where I1 is the measured fundamental frequency and IN the network frequency.
2. Deviation of the fundamental frequency:
GI1 0.5 +] , GI1 = I1, max I1, min
where GI1 is the difference between the measured maximum and minimum values
of the fundamental frequency within one second.
3. Amplitude of the fundamental wave:
$1 1% , 1
Further, if the amplitude of the fundamental wave deviates rapidly, results will be
blocked out (possible transient).
If any of the criteria above is not fulfilled, PQCU3H will not show the values of the
harmonic amplitudes. In addition, these values are not included in statistics. These
operation criteria have been set in order to guarantee sufficient measurement
accuracy. Also the European Standard EN 50160 gives the maximum values for the
harmonic amplitudes in normal operation conditions.
8
2.4 Observation times
Time ranges involved in the statistical handling of harmonics measurements extend

from less than 1 s to one week or more. For data compression the IEC 61000-4-7
standard recommends the use of the following time intervals:
very short interval (TVs) : 3s
short interval (TSh) : 10 min
long interval (TL) : 1h
one day interval (TD) : 24 h
one week interval (TWk) : 7 days
PQCU3H monitors sliding average values from the time intervals of TVs (= 3 s) and
TSh (= 10 min), see the next section Real time monitoring. Other intervals are used
as observation times in PQCU3H. In addition to the standards recommendation,
intervals of 12 h and 2-6 days are also provided. T Vs and TSh values used for
monitoring are used in statistical analysis according to the IEC standard (see section
Statistics). Observation time can be selected via the parameter Observation time.
Available observation times are: 1 hour, 12 hours, 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5
days, 6 days and 1 week.
2.5 Real time monitoring
There are two sets of harmonic and THD values that can be monitored, namely T Vs
values (very short time, 3 s) and TSh values (short time, 10 min). Both TVs and TSh
values are sliding average values. The observation time corresponding to the time
interval TVs = 3 s consists of windows, within which the real time values are
calculated (effective measuring time), and gaps between those windows. Effective
measuring time windows are equally spaced within the observation time as the IEC
61000-4-7 standard recommends, see Figure 4.
TVs = 3 s M values
time
EffMeas
Real time values
)LJXUH (IIHFWLYHPHDVXULQJWLPHZLQGRZVGXULQJWKHREVHUYDWLRQWLPH
FRUUHVSRQGLQJWR79V V0 QXPEHURIVDPSOHV
TVs value of an individual harmonic n is calculated in RMS sense using the real time
RMS values (Cn,k) of the nth harmonic:
9
0
FQ N
2
,
& Q9V = N=1
In TVs sliding average calculation the length of the slide is the length of the effective
measuring time. That is, when a new set of real time values is ready, the oldest set is
rejected from the TVs window and the new set is included (Figure 5).
TVs = 3 s
time
SlidAver
Real time values
)LJXUH 9HU\VKRUWWLPHYDOXHVDUHFDOFXODWHGXVLQJVOLGLQJZLQGRZV
Short time values (TSh = 10 min) are calculated from very short time values in RMS
sense. The length of the slide for short time average values is equal to T Vs = 3s.
THD is calculated according to the definition (up to 13th):
13

N
,N
=2
2
7+' =
,1
where I1 is the RMS value of the fundamental component and Ik is the RMS value of
the kth harmonic. If the Settings parameter Distort. factor is set to TDD, Total
Demand Distortion is used instead of THD:
13

N
,N
=2
2
7'' =
,1
where IN is the rated current (nominal value)
The real time values can be read via the directories 3 sec. values and 10 min.
values.
10
2.6 Harmonic limit supervision
The limits for harmonics and THD (or TDD) set by the user (refer to sections Setting
examples and Last exceeding) are continuously compared to the TVs sliding
average values. If a TVs value for any harmonic should exceed the corresponding
limit, the HAR_HIGH output will be activated (TRUE). Furthermore, an event will be
sent and an MMI indication given. HAR_HIGH will remain active until every
harmonic has dropped under the set limit. An example is given in Figure 6.
TVs value for 3rd
Limit for 3rd

3rd:
TVs value for 13th

Limit for 13th
13th:
Max THD
THD:
HAR_HIGH:
time:
LimitSuperv
Time stamp + harmonic set Actual recording
)LJXUH ([FHHGLQJRIDKDUPRQLFOLPLW2WKHUKDUPRQLFVDUHXQGHUWKHVHWOLPLWV
EXWWKHUGDQGWKKDUPRQLFVH[FHHGWKHLUOLPLWV7KH+$5B+,*+RXWSXW
UHPDLQVDFWLYHXQWLOERWKKDUPRQLFVKDYHGURSSHGXQGHUWKHLUOLPLWV
During every exceeding of a limit the THD will be observed and the whole harmonic
set (TVs values) will be stored (with a time stamp) at the instant the THD has its
highest value. The actual recording (i.e. the recorded data is readable) is done and a
reset event will be sent when HAR_HIGH is deactivated.
2.7 Statistics
2.7.1 Background
Because there is no standard concerning the harmonic measurement for currents at the
moment, the European Standard for voltages EN 50160 is applied here.
Statistical calculations carried out by PQCU3H fulfil the requirements for statistical
analysis of harmonics declared in EN 50160. The recommendations for harmonics
measurement over the time intervals TL (1 h), TD (1 d) and TWk (1 week) declared in
IEC 61000-4-7 are also fulfilled.
In the following text statistics recorder refers to the part of PQCU3H that carries out
the statistical calculations.
11
2.7.2 Measurement settings
The function block PQCU3H calculates the statistics only if it has been triggered. A
triggering signal always starts a new observation time.
There are several possible ways for triggering, i.e. activating, the statistics. The
statistics can be triggered via a local MMI by activating the Settings parameter
Remote trigger. The same parameter can be used for remote triggering, e.g. for
activating the statistics via MicroSCADA in Network Control Center. The function
block can also be activated by an external digital input connected to the function
block input TRIGG. Setting this digital input from FALSE to TRUE activates the
statistics. Statistics can also be activated at some preset time and date. The user can
set the time of the activation via the Settings parameters Trigger year, Trigger
month, Trigger day and Trigger hour. Refer to section Setting examples for
further information.
Statistics are calculated over the elapsing observation time. This time period is set via
the Settings parameter Observation time. There are several possibilities from one
hour to one week.
The user can also select a preferable way of continuous statistics recordings over a
longer period of time (months, years). With the Settings parameter Trigger mode
the user can select how the next observation time will be activated after the former
one has finished. There are three possibilities: Single, Continuous and Periodic.
Active state of statistics recorder, i.e. calculation and storage of data, in each mode is
shown in Figure 7. In the trigger mode Single, data for one observation time is
calculated and stored. If another observation time is wanted, the statistics recorder
must be triggered again. In the trigger mode Continuous, the next observation time
starts automatically right after the former observation time has finished. In the
Periodic mode, there is a fixed time gap of one week between the beginning of the
former observation time and the beginning of the next observation time.
12
Start of Statistics
Trigger mode: Single
recordings,
Observation time: 1 week
Trigger: Activated
Time
1 week
Trigger mode: Continuous

Time

Observation time: 1 day
Time
Trigger mode: Periodic

ObsTimes
Time
)LJXUH 3HULRGVIRUVWDWLVWLFVUHFRUGHUZLWKGLIIHUHQWWULJJHUPRGHVDQG
REVHUYDWLRQWLPHV
2.7.3 Input values
The statistics recorder uses the TVs (3 s) and TSh (10 min) values in calculations
depending on the length of the observation time. If the observation time is shorter
than one day, statistics recorder uses the TVs values. If the observation time is one day
or longer, the TSh values are used.
13
2.7.4 Calculated results
2.7.4.1 Recording banks
Calculated results are stored in two recording banks. One bank includes data from the
previous observation time. The other bank includes data from the elapsing observation
time. Data in the active bank is updated continuously as long as the active observation
time is elapsing. When the active observation time ends, data is moved from the
active bank to the other bank.
Calculated data are stored in different directories. The directory Period info
includes general information about the observation time (start and end times of the
period, measuring mode); Maxim. values includes measured maximum values for
THD and individual harmonics, Cumulat. prob. (Cumulative probability) includes
percentiles (can be selected by the user) for THD and individual harmonics, and
Selected harm. (Selected harmonic) includes five fixed percentiles for one
selectable harmonic (or THD). Data from the active observation time are in
directories:
A:Period info
A:Maxim. values
A:Cumulat. prob.
A:Selected harm.
and data from the previous observation time:
B:Period info
B:Maxim. values
B:Cumulat. prob.
B:Selected harm.
The Time to end parameter in the A: Period info directory informs how long it is
to the end of the observation time. This parameter is useful when checking that the
triggering has succeeded. If Time to end is 0 min, the statistics are not calculated. If
Time to end is other than 0 min, it indicates that statistics are calculated just then.
2.7.4.2 Maximum values
Maximum values for THD and individual harmonics are real maximum TVs (3 s) or
TSh (10 min) values during the observation time. These are picked from continuously
updated sliding average values. This enables recording of the true worst values. There
is no time dependency between recorded maximum values for THD and individual
harmonics. Hence, maximum values can be from several different time instants.
14
2.7.4.3 Percentiles
Percentiles are values in a given set of observations that divide the data into 100 equal
parts. These values can be denoted by P1, P2,..., P99, where
1 % of the data falls below (is less than or equal to) P1; 2 % of the data falls
below P2; ... ; 99 % of the data falls below P99.
Thus, with percentiles it is possible to sketch the cumulative probability distribution

of the data.
Percentiles are calculated to verify the following part of EN 50160:
95 % of the 10 minutes mean RMS values of each individual harmonics shall

be less than or equal to given limit.
The purpose of percentiles is to find the harmonic amplitude so that, during the
observation time, 95 % of all the measured harmonic amplitudes are less than or equal
to the calculated percentile. As a default, 95th percentiles are calculated for each
harmonic, but also other percentiles can be calculated (parameter Cum. probability
in Statistic limits directory). The percentiles are found in the Selected harm.
directories.
Non-sliding and non-overlapping TVs (3 s) or TSh (10 min) average values are used in
percentile calculation depending on the length of the observation time. For example,
when the 10 min average values are used and the measurement is activated at
12:00:000, the first average used in the percentile calculation is measured during the
time interval 12:00:000 ... 12:10:000, the next one during the time interval 12:10:000
... 12:20:000 and so on.
All average values are divided into classifiers. The categorisation resolution, i.e. the
width of the classifiers, is dependent on the Limit p (set with Limit parameters in the
Statistic limits directory). Categorisation for each harmonic includes 16 classifiers
between values 0 and 2p. Hence, the classifier width a is
2 S
D=
1XP2I&ODVVLILHUV
For example, if the limit for the second harmonic is 10 %In, the classifier width a is
1.25 %In. If the average value I2,ave is
D < , 2,DYH 2D
the average value is put into classifier 2. Calculation of percentiles is shown in Figure
8.
15
Classifier 2
Limit p
2*p
10 30 30 ... 25 4 ... 1 0 0 0
0 a 2*a 3*a p-a p+a 2*p-3a 2*p-2a 2*p-a
Over
category
PQCUPercentileCalc1
a = 2*p/NumOfCategories
Value/%In
)LJXUH &DWHJRULVDWLRQRIPHDVXUHGYDOXHVDQGFDOFXODWLRQRIDSHUFHQWLOH
In Figure 8, the 95th percentile is calculated by categorising the measured average

values. Let us assume that during one observation time there are 100 measured
average values divided into classifiers as shown in Figure 8. There are 95 values
under and 5 values over the set limit p. This means that 95 % of all the measured
average values, i.e. harmonic amplitudes, are less than or equal to p %In. In this case,
the part of the EN 50160 concerning the cumulative probability distribution is
fulfilled.
Classifier 2
Limit p
2*p
10 30 30 ... 24 4 ... 2 0 0 0
0 a 2*a 3*a p-a p+a 2*p-3a 2*p-2a 2*p-a
Over cat-
egory
PQCUPercentileCalc2
Value/%In
Figure 9 presentsa situation where 6 values are in classifiers above the limit p. Hence,
the 95th percentile is greater than the set limit p, which means that the
recommendation of the European Standard EN 50160 would not be met.
16
2.7.4.4 Fixed percentiles for selected harmonic
For one harmonic or THD (selected by Selected harm. parameter in Settings

directory) a more accurate cumulative distribution is gained by calculating five fixed
percentiles (1st, 5th, 50th, 95th and 99th). Calculation is carried out in a similar way
as for the one percentile with the exception that now 32 classifiers are used.
With five percentiles more detailed information can be obtained from the cumulative
distribution of the selected harmonic, see Figure 10.
% In
14
12
10
8
6
4
PQCUFixed perc
2
Time
1% 5% 50 % 95 % 99 %
)LJXUH VWWKWKWKDQGWKSHUFHQWLOHVIRUVHOHFWHGKDUPRQLF
If a very small load compared to the nominal current is expected, it is recommended

to use TDD as a distortion factor. The fundamental component can have very small
values, which could increase THD considerably. If THD has most of the time very
high values, it is difficult to set a proper limit for THD. With a high limit, unnecessary
limit exceedings can be avoided but then the resolution used in percentile calculation
may be too low.
2.7.5 Output CUM_HIGH
If the calculated percentile is greater than the preset limit (i.e. more than 5 % of all
harmonic values are smaller than the preset limit), an indication will be given: the
output CUM_HIGH will be activated, an event sent and an MMI indication given.
The indication declares which harmonic exceeded the limit.
2.7.6 Indications and events
During the elapsing observation time there will be indications about the ending of the
observation time. The first warning event will be given 5 minutes before the end of
the elapsing observation time; the second event at the end of the observation time.
2.7.7 Exceptions
Exceptional usage of the function block is taken into account. There are two major
exceptions: changing the settings during an elapsing observation time and changing
the system clock to a new time. The latter is valid e.g. with daylight saving time.
17
Changes to the setting parameters during an elapsing observation time are taken into
account when the elapsing observation time has ended. If the new settings must be
activated at once, the function block has to be reset. This means that all data from the
elapsing observation time in the statistics recorder will be cleared and the statistics
recorder starts to wait for a new observation time (a new measurement activation).
Resetting can be done via the local MMI (parameter Reset registers) or by
activating the digital input RESET.
Changing the system clock back during an active observation time lengthens the
active observation time by the amount of the time change. On the contrary, changing
the system clock forward shortens the active observation time. With this functionality,
the end date and time of the active observation time remain as set.
2.8 Setting examples
There are several parameters that can be set by the user. Setting parameters are
explained in detail in the corresponding sections, for example the use of harmonic
limits (percentiles) is explained in the section Statistics. In the following, two
examples on the use of the setting parameters:
([DPSOH Current waveform survey
The recommendation gives values for each individual harmonic current in medium
voltage supply. THD shall be less than or equal to 14 %.
Let us say that phase current IL1 is under this survey and we want to verify its quality.
The survey should start at 8:00 am on Monday the 3rd of May, 1999 and last until
further notice. Let us also assume that we want to know the cumulative distribution of
the third harmonic values more precisely. The setting values would be:
Settings:
Measuring mode L1
Distort. factor THD
Observation time 1 week
Trigger mode Continuous
Trigger year 1999
Trigger month 5
Trigger day 3
Trigger hour 8
rd
Selected harm. 3 harmonic
18
Statistic limits:
Cum. probability 95 %
Limit THD 14.0 %
Limit 2nd harm. 4.0 % In
Limit 3rd harm. 10.0 % In
Limit 4th harm. 2.0 % In
Note: Check the sections Statistics and Real time monitoring for the effects of the
harmonic limits (% In).
The same recommended reference values are used as in example 1, but now we want
to survey the harmonics only on Mondays, starting at 0:00 am on Monday the 12th of
April, 1999.Let us also assume that we want to check the overall worst case of phase
currents (statistics are collected using the values from the phase current with the
highest THD at each moment). The third harmonic is once again observed more
closely than the others. Instead of THD, TDD is used, so the Distort. factor
parameter should be set to TDD.
Settings:
Measuring mode Worst phase

Distort. factor THD
Observation time 1 day
Trigger mode Periodic
Trigger year 1999
Trigger month 4
Trigger day 12
Trigger hour 0
rd
19
Statistic limits:
Limit THD 14.0 % (<-- TDD)
Harmonic limits shall be chosen carefully. The lower the limit, the higher resolution is
used in percentile calculation and vice versa: if the limit is high, the resolution
becomes lower. However, if too low a limit is chosen, harmonic values may exceed
the limit too easily.
2.9 Step-by-step guide for settings
The difference between real time monitoring and statistics should be noticed. Once
triggered, the 3 sec and 10 min values are monitored continuously even if the statistics
are not calculated (observation time has ended). The statistics, on the other hand, are
calculated over the selected observation time (from 1 hour to 1 week). The Time to
end parameter gives an indication of the elapsing observation time. If the Time to
end parameter has a value other than 0 min, the statistics are calculated just then.
Two fundamental rules for PQCU3H settings:
5HVHWWLQJ
If the statistics calculation is on and new settings are going to be made, PQCU3H
must be reset (RESET input or Reset registers parameter). Resetting the registers
stops the statistics calculations. If the statistics calculation has ended, reset is not
necessary. Alternatively, in case of the continuous or the periodic triggering mode,
new settings can be made without resetting the registers. Yet, the new settings become
valid after the elapsing observation time has ended and a new one has begun.
7ULJJHULQJ
New settings are not valid until they have been activated by triggering. The triggering
signal can be given via the Remote trigger parameter, the TRIGG input or the
trigger date (Trigger year, Trigger month, Trigger day and Trigger hour). In the single
mode, the settings are activated immediately after triggering. In the continuous and
the period triggering mode, the settings are activated at the preset triggering date
(year, month, day and hour); thus triggering via the Remote trigger parameter or the
TRIGG input is not possible.
20
Next, four setting examples are given for activation of PQCU3H. In addition to the
settings given here, statistical limits and a harmonic for closer percentile calculation
can be set before activating the settings
([DPSOH
Situation: PQCU3H is in Not in use mode

(Act. meas.mode is 'Not in use') No monitoring
Time to end parameter is 0 min No statistics calculation
Objective: One hour statistics for phase current IL1
Operation: 1) Set the Measuring mode parameter to L1

2) Set the Observation time parameter to 1 hour
3) Set the Tringger mode parameter to Single
4) Activate the settings (Remote trigger parameter or TRIGG input)
Check: PQCU3H should be in L1 mode

(Act. meas.mode) Monitoring phase current IL1
Time to end parameter should be Statistics calculation
60 min
([DPSOH
Situation: PQVO3H is in L1 mode

(Act. meas.mode is 'L1') Monitoring phase current IL1
Objective: One day continuous statistics for phase current IL3

2) Set the Observation time parameter to 1 day
3) Set the Tringger mode parameter to Continuous
4) Set the date and time for correct activation instant (Trigger year, Trigger
month, Trigger day and Trigger hour)
Because Trigger mode is Continuous, statistic calculation is not started until
the set time instant has passed.

1440 min
21
([DPSOH
Situation: PQCU3H is in L1 mode

Time to end parameter is other than Statistics calculation
0 min
Operation: Same settings as in example 2 but registers must be reset first.

1440 min
([DPSOH

0 min and Trigger mode is Continuous
Objective: Continue the statistic calculations with the current settings, but change the
monitored signal to IL3 for the next observation time.
Operation: Set the Measuring mode parameter to

L3
Check: When the elapsing observation time Monitoring phase current IL3
ends (Time to end is 0 min), the active
measuring mode should change to L3
Right after reaching 0 min, the Time to Statistics calculation
end parameter should change to show
the selected observation time in
minutes
Data from the previous observation Previous data stored in bank B
time should be in the recording bank B
(using IL1)
22
2.10 Measurement accuracy
In normal operating conditions, the harmonic measurement accuracy (for harmonics

from 1st to 10th) is in accordance with the standard IEC 61000-4-7 and the following
criteria are assumed to be fulfilled:
)XQGDPHQWDOIUHTXHQF\
I1 = I 1
+DUPRQLFDPSOLWXGHVLQWKHIUHTXHQF\UDQJHDERYH)V
30% $1
where AN is the highest harmonic amplitude within the frequency range from 0 Hz to
Fs/2, where Fs is the used sampling frequency (if fN = 50 Hz, Fs = 2000 Hz and if fN =
60 Hz, Fs = 2400 Hz).
$PSOLWXGHRIWKHIXQGDPHQWZDYH
0.01, 1 , 60 , 1
Measurement accuracy for a single measured harmonic Im (m=1,,10)
0.5% , 1 , if , P < 10% , 1 and
5% , P , if , P 10% , 1
where IN is the nominal input current.
For harmonics from 11th to 13th, the following accuracies apply
1.0% , 1 , if , P < 10% , 1 and
10% , P , if , P 10% , 1 .
When Rogowski coils are used for current measurement, the measurement accuracy of
IEC 61000-4-7 is not guaranteed.
23
2.11 Resetting
The registers can be reset either via the RESET input, or over the serial bus or the
local MMI.

Operation Recorded
indicators data
1, 4)
RESET input of the function block x
1), 4)
Parameter F512V025 x
2)
3)
3), 5)
2)
Push-button C x
3)
Push-buttons C + E (2 s) x
3), 5)
1)
Resets the recorded data of the particular function block
2)
3)
Resets also the latched trip signals of other function blocks
4)
Resets only the data of the elapsing period
5)
Resets the recorded data of the other function blocks
24
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for PQCU3H is 512.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
25
3.2.1 Statistic limits

direction
Limit THD V1 0.1...60.0 % 16.0 R/W Limit for Total
Harmonic Distortion
Limit 2nd harm. V2 0.1...40.0 %In 4.0 R/W Limit for 2nd harmonic
Limit 3rd harm. V3 0.1...40.0 %In 10.0 R/W Limit for 3rd harmonic
Limit 4th harm. V4 0.1...40.0 %In 2.0 R/W Limit for 4th harmonic
Cum. probability V14 90.0...99.5 %In 95.0 R/W Limit for cumulative
probability
3.2.2 Settings
direction
Measuring mode V15 0...4 1) - 0 R/W Measuring mode
2)
Distort. factor V16 0 or 1 - 1 R/W Selection of distortion
factor (THD or TDD)
Observation time V17 0...9 3) - 9 R/W Selection of
observation time
Trigger mode V18 0...2 4) - 0 R/W Selection of trigger
mode
Trigger year V19 1980...2400 y 1980 R/W Triggering year
Trigger month V20 1...12 m 1 R/W Triggering month
Trigger day V21 1...31 d 1 R/W Triggering day
Trigger hour V22 0...23 h 1 R/W Triggering hour
Remote trigger V23 1=Trigger - 0 W Remote or local
triggering
Selected harm. V24 0...13 5) - 3 R/W Selected harmonic for
recordings
Act. meas.mode V26 0...4 1) - 0 R Active measuring
mode
event transmission
event transmission
event transmission
event transmission
26
1)
Measuring mode 0=Not in use; 1=L1; 2=L2; 3=L3; 4=Worst phase
2)
Distortion factor 0=THD, 1=TDD
3)
Observation time 0=1 hour; 1=12 hours; 2=1 day; 3=2 days; 4=3 days; 5=4 days;
6=5 days; 7=6 days; 8=1 week
4)
Triggering mode 0=Single; 1=Continuous; 2=Periodic
5)
Selected harmonic 0=THD; 1=2nd harmonic; 2=3rd harmonic; 3=4th harmonic;
4=5th harmonic; 5=6th harmonic; 6=7th harmonic; 7=8th harmonic; 8=9th harmonic;
9=10th harmonic; 10=11th harmonic; 11=12th harmonic; 12=13th harmonic
3.3.1 Inputs/ Outputs

direction
Measured input I1 0...3 1) - 1 R/M Harmonic values are monitored
from this current input
Input DISABLE I17 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Signal for freezing registering of
average values and blocking
outputs
Out HAR_HIGH O1 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/M Status of output HAR_HIGH
Out CUM_HIGH O2 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/M Status of output CUM_HIGH
Out THD O3 0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Calculated total harmonic
distortion
1)
Input 0=None; 1=L1; 2=L2; 3=L3
2)
3)
27
3.3.2 3 sec. values

direction
THD I2 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of Total
Harmonic Distortion in percentage
Fund. I3 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 1st harmonic
component in percentage
2nd harmonic I4 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 2nd harmonic
in percentage
3rd harmonic I5 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 3rd harmonic
in percentage
4th harmonic I6 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 4th harmonic
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
28
3.3.3 10 min. values

direction
THD I18 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Short time sliding average value of
Total Harmonic Distortion in
percentage
2nd harmonic I19 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Short time sliding average value of
2nd harmonic in percentage
3rd harmonic I20 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Short time sliding average value of
3rd harmonic in percentage
4th harmonic I21 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Short time sliding average value of
4th harmonic in percentage
29
3.3.4 Recorded data
3.3.4.1 General
Recorded data includes two recording banks for statistics calculations and one bank
for recording individual harmonics at the time of the latest exceeding of a harmonic
limit. One statistics bank includes the data from the elapsing observation period and
the other bank similar information from the previous observation period.
5HFRUGHGGDWDIURPWKHODWHVWH[FHHGLQJ
Time stamp: indicates the start date and time for the last exceeding in THD or a
harmonic
Very short time (3 s) values of THD and harmonics when the exceeding of the
preset limit occurs
6WDWLVWLFVUHFRUGLQJV (x2, one set for the current observation period and one for the
previous period):
Period info: Start and end time stamps which indicate the start/end date and time
for the Observation period
Maximum values of THD and harmonics: the highest average period (e.g. 10 min)
harmonic value during the observation period is recorded
Xth percentiles for THD and harmonics
For one selected harmonic: the 1st, 5th, 50th, 95th and 99th percentiles
3.3.4.2 A:Period info

direction
Starting date V301 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Start date of active obs.
period
Starting time V302 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Start time of active obs.
period
End date V303 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M End date of active obs.
period
End time V304 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M End time of active obs.
period
Measuring V305 0...4 1) - 1 R/M Meas. mode of active
mode obs. period
Selected V319 0...13 2) - 3 R/M Selected harmonic for
harm. percentage monitoring
Time to end I16 0...10080 min 0 R/M Time to the end of the
observation period
1)
2)
Selected harmonic 0=THD; 1=2nd harmonic; 2=3rd harmonic; 3=4th harmonic; 4=5th harmonic;
5=6th harmonic; 6=7th harmonic; 7=8th harmonic; 8=9th harmonic; 9=10th
harmonic; 10=11th harmonic; 11=12th harmonic; 12=13th harmonic
30
3.3.4.3 A:Maxim. values

direction
Maximum V306 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Max THD at active obs.
THD period
Max 2nd V307 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Max 2nd harmonic at
harm. active obs. period
Max 3rd harm. V308 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Max 3rd harmonic at
active obs. period
Max 4th harm. V309 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Max 4th harmonic at
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
Max 10th V315 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Max 10th harmonic at
31
3.3.4.4 A:Cumulat. prob.

direction
X% val for THD V325 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Cum. prob. percentile for
THD
X% val for 2nd V326 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Cum. prob. percentile for
2nd harmonic
X% val for 3rd V327 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Cum. prob. percentile for
3rd harmonic
X% val for 4th V328 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Cum. prob. percentile for
4th harmonic
5th harmonic
6th harmonic
7th harmonic
8th harmonic
9th harmonic
10th harmonic
11th harmonic
12th harmonic
13th harmonic
3.3.4.5 A:Selected harm.

direction
1% value V320 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M 1% percentile
32
3.3.4.6 B:Period info

direction
Starting date V201 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Start date of last obs.
period
Starting time V202 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Start time of last obs.
period
End date V203 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M End date of last obs.
period
End time V204 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M End time of last obs.
period
Measuring V205 0...4 1) - 1 R/M Meas. mode of last obs.
mode period
1)
2)
5=6th harmonic; 6=7th harmonic; 7=8th harmonic; 8=9th harmonic;
3.3.4.7 B:Maxim. values

direction
Maximum V206 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Max THD from previous
THD obs. period
Max 2nd V207 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Max 2nd harmonic from
harm. previous obs. period
Max 3rd harm. V208 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Max 3rd harmonic from
previous obs. period
Max 4th harm. V209 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Max 4th harmonic from
Max 10th V215 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Max 10th harmonic from
33
3.3.4.8 B:Cumulat. prob.

direction
THD
2nd harmonic
3rd harmonic
4th harmonic
5th harmonic
6th harmonic
7th harmonic
8th harmonic
9th harmonic
10th harmonic
11th harmonic
12th harmonic
13th harmonic
3.3.4.9 B:Selected harm.

direction
34
3.3.4.10 Last exceeding

direction
Date V401 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Date for last exceeding
Time V402 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Time for exceeding
Fund. V403 0.0...1000.0 %n 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 1st harmonic
component for last exceeding
THD V404 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Vsh value of THD for last
exceeding
2nd harmonic V405 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 2nd harmonic
for last exceeding
3rd harmonic V406 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 3rd harmonic
for last exceeding
4th harmonic V407 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 4th harmonic
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
10th harmonic V413 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 10th
harmonic for last
exceeding
harmonic for last
exceeding
harmonic for last
exceeding
harmonic for last
exceeding
3.3.5 Events
coefficient mask
E0 1 1 PQCU3H:Harmonic limit Reset
E1 2 1 PQCU3H:Harmonic limit Exceeded
E2 4 1 PQCU3H:Cumulative limit Exceeded
E3 8 1 PQCU3H:Obs. period near end On
E4 16 1 PQCU3H:Obs. period ended On
35
4 Technical Data

D
36
1MRS752335-MUM PQCU3H
Issued: 3/2000
Current Waveform Distortion
Measurement
Contents
1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.3 Application........................................................................................... 4
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 6
2.1.2 Digital inputs............................................................................... 6
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 8
2.5 Real time monitoring ........................................................................... 9
2.7 Statistics............................................................................................ 11
2.7.1 Background.............................................................................. 11
2.7.3 Input values.............................................................................. 13
2.7.4.1 Recording banks ........................................................... 14
2.7.4.2 Maximum values ........................................................... 14
2.7.4.3 Percentiles .................................................................... 15
2.7.5 Output CUM_HIGH .................................................................. 17
2.7.7 Exceptions ............................................................................... 17
2.11 Resetting ...........................................................................................24

3 Parameters and Events ..........................................................................25
3.1 General..............................................................................................25
3.2.2 Settings ....................................................................................26
3.3.1 Inputs/ Outputs .........................................................................27
3.3.2 3 sec. values.............................................................................28
3.3.3 10 min. values ..........................................................................29
3.3.4 Recorded data ..........................................................................30
3.3.4.1 General..........................................................................30
3.3.4.2 A:Period info ..................................................................30
3.3.4.3 A:Maxim. values ............................................................31
3.3.4.4 A:Cumulat. prob.............................................................32
3.3.4.5 A:Selected harm. ...........................................................32
3.3.4.6 B:Period info ..................................................................33
3.3.4.7 B:Maxim. values ............................................................33
3.3.4.8 B:Cumulat. prob.............................................................34
3.3.4.9 B:Selected harm. ...........................................................34
3.3.4.10 Last exceeding...............................................................35
3.3.5 Events ......................................................................................35
4 Technical Data.........................................................................................36
2
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
Harmonic distortion
Total Harmonic Distortion measurement (THD) or
Total Demand Distortion measurement (TDD)
statistics according to EN 50160 and IEC 61000-4-7 (standards for voltage
distortion measurements are applied to current distortion measurements)
MMI
preset time
continuously
Measurement with:
conventional current transformers
Rogowski coils

problem concerning voltage or current that results in a failure or misoperation of

3

power quality information. The function block PQCU3H provides a convenient
method for monitoring power quality by means of current waveform distortion:
based on the RED 500 Platform. Function block PQCU3H produces statistical data
about harmonic distortion for long term evaluation. In addition, the function block
provides short time average and maximum values for THD and individual harmonics.
1.3 Application
This document specifies the functions of the function block PQCU3H for current
The function block PQCU3H is used for measuring the harmonics and monitoring the
power quality in distribution networks. Although the European Standard EN 50160
concerns voltage distortion, the same standard is applied to current distortion
measurements in PQCU3H. Data collection and analysis is done according to EN
50160. Measuring principles for individual harmonics and THD are adapted from the
International standard IEC 61000-4-7. The American standard IEEE Std 1159 is also
partly supported.

)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI34&8+
4

FREQ_REF Analogue signal (SINT) Input for frequency reference
DISABLE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for disabling PQCU3H
TRIGG Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for triggering PQCU3H
RESET Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for resetting the registers of PQCU3H

harmonic
THD Analogue signal (REAL) Measured THD (or TDD)
5
2.1 Configuration
Note: It is necessary that currents are connected to the inputs of the function block in
the correct order, cf. Input description above and Configuration examples below.
In order to carry out distortion measurement, it is recommended to connect a voltage

signal to the FREQ_REF input and set frequency measurement on for that channel. If
frequency measurement has already been set on for some analogue channel, it is
recommended to connect that channel to the FREQ_REF input.
Note: If frequency measurement is not available (only current signals), it is possible to

leave the FREQ_REF input unconnected. The function block will have the same
functionality as with the FREQ_REF connected. Without frequency reference,
however, the frequency range for reliable measurements is only f1 = fN 1 Hz.
Hence, the use of a frequency reference signal is recommended whenever possible.

DISABLE
TRIGG
starts a new observation time
RESET

6
Harmonics can be measured from phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3. With the analogue
channel configuration given in Figure 2 all phase currents and the worst case can be
measured.
)LJXUH $OOSKDVHFXUUHQWVFRQQHFWHG
It is not necessary to connect all inputs to the corresponding analogue channels. For
example, only IL2 can be connected to the input IL2 as shown in Figure 3, but in this
case harmonics can be measured only from IL2.
)LJXUH 2QO\SKDVHFXUUHQW,/FRQQHFWHG
Currents can be measured using conventional current transformers or Rogowski coils.

When a Rogowski coil is used, the accuracy recommendations given by IEC 61000-4-
7:1991 are not met. The measuring devices and signal types for analogue channels are
selected and configured in a special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool.
used).
7
2.2 Measuring mode

Worst phase Worst phase current is measured
When the measuring mode is set to Worst phase, a current with the highest THD (or
TDD) is measured. Because the worst case can vary during the observation time (first
IL1, then IL2 and then again IL1), the statistics can originate from different currents. The
monitored value Measured input indicates the actual phase all the time (phase
current with the highest THD).
I1 = 0.9 I 1 ...1.1 I 1
GI1 0.5 +] , GI1 = I1, max I1, min
where GI1 is the difference between the measured maximum and minimum values
of the fundamental frequency within one second.
$1 1% , 1
If any of the criteria above is not fulfilled, PQCU3H will not show the values of the
8

PQCU3H monitors sliding average values from the time intervals of TVs (= 3 s) and
as observation times in PQCU3H. In addition to the standards recommendation,
TVs = 3 s M values
time
EffMeas
Real time values
TVs value of an individual harmonic n is calculated in RMS sense using the real time
9
0
FQ N
2
,
& Q9V = N=1
rejected from the TVs window and the new set is included (Figure 5).
TVs = 3 s
time
SlidAver
Real time values
13

N
,N
=2
2
7+' =
,1
where I1 is the RMS value of the fundamental component and Ik is the RMS value of
the kth harmonic. If the Settings parameter Distort. factor is set to TDD, Total
Demand Distortion is used instead of THD:
13

N
,N
=2
2
7'' =
,1
where IN is the rated current (nominal value)
values.
10
The limits for harmonics and THD (or TDD) set by the user (refer to sections Setting
examples and Last exceeding) are continuously compared to the TVs sliding
average values. If a TVs value for any harmonic should exceed the corresponding
TVs value for 3rd
Limit for 3rd

3rd:
TVs value for 13th

Limit for 13th
13th:
Max THD
THD:
HAR_HIGH:
time:
LimitSuperv
2.7 Statistics
2.7.1 Background
Because there is no standard concerning the harmonic measurement for currents at the
moment, the European Standard for voltages EN 50160 is applied here.
Statistical calculations carried out by PQCU3H fulfil the requirements for statistical
IEC 61000-4-7 are also fulfilled.
In the following text statistics recorder refers to the part of PQCU3H that carries out
11
The function block PQCU3H calculates the statistics only if it has been triggered. A
triggering signal always starts a new observation time.
There are several possible ways for triggering, i.e. activating, the statistics. The
Remote trigger. The same parameter can be used for remote triggering, e.g. for
hour to one week.
12
Start of Statistics
recordings,
Trigger: Activated
Time
1 week

Time

Time

ObsTimes
Time
REVHUYDWLRQWLPHV
2.7.3 Input values
13
directories:
A:Period info
A:Maxim. values
A:Cumulat. prob.
A:Selected harm.
B:Period info
B:Maxim. values
B:Cumulat. prob.
B:Selected harm.
to the end of the observation time. This parameter is useful when checking that the
14
2.7.4.3 Percentiles

of the data.

The purpose of percentiles is to find the harmonic amplitude so that, during the
observation time, 95 % of all the measured harmonic amplitudes are less than or equal
directories.
... 12:20:000 and so on.
2 S
D=
1XP2I&ODVVLILHUV
For example, if the limit for the second harmonic is 10 %In, the classifier width a is
1.25 %In. If the average value I2,ave is
D < , 2,DYH 2D
the average value is put into classifier 2. Calculation of percentiles is shown in Figure
8.
15
Classifier 2
Limit p
2*p
10 30 30 ... 25 4 ... 1 0 0 0
0 a 2*a 3*a p-a p+a 2*p-3a 2*p-2a 2*p-a
Over
category
PQCUPercentileCalc1
Value/%In

average values, i.e. harmonic amplitudes, are less than or equal to p %In. In this case,
fulfilled.
Classifier 2
Limit p
2*p
10 30 30 ... 24 4 ... 2 0 0 0
0 a 2*a 3*a p-a p+a 2*p-3a 2*p-2a 2*p-a
Over cat-
egory
PQCUPercentileCalc2
Value/%In
Figure 9 presentsa situation where 6 values are in classifiers above the limit p. Hence,
16
For one harmonic or THD (selected by Selected harm. parameter in Settings

With five percentiles more detailed information can be obtained from the cumulative
% In
14
12
10
8
6
4
PQCUFixed perc
2
Time
1% 5% 50 % 95 % 99 %
If a very small load compared to the nominal current is expected, it is recommended

to use TDD as a distortion factor. The fundamental component can have very small
values, which could increase THD considerably. If THD has most of the time very
high values, it is difficult to set a proper limit for THD. With a high limit, unnecessary
limit exceedings can be avoided but then the resolution used in percentile calculation
may be too low.
harmonic values are higher than the preset limit), an indication will be given: the
2.7.7 Exceptions
17
The recommendation gives values for each individual harmonic current in medium
voltage supply. THD shall be less than or equal to 14 %.
Let us say that phase current IL1 is under this survey and we want to verify its quality.
The survey should start at 8:00 am on Monday the 3rd of May, 1999 and last until
further notice. Let us also assume that we want to know the cumulative distribution of
the third harmonic values more precisely. The setting values would be:
Settings:
Measuring mode L1
Distort. factor THD
Trigger year 1999
Trigger month 5
Trigger day 3
Trigger hour 8
rd
18
Statistic limits:
Limit THD 14.0 %
Note: Check the sections Statistics and Real time monitoring for the effects of the
harmonic limits (% In).
The same recommended reference values are used as in example 1, but now we want
to survey the harmonics only on Mondays, starting at 0:00 am on Monday the 12th of
April, 1999.Let us also assume that we want to check the overall worst case of phase
currents (statistics are collected using the values from the phase current with the
highest THD at each moment). The third harmonic is once again observed more
closely than the others. Instead of THD, TDD is used, so the Distort. factor
parameter should be set to TDD.
Settings:

Distort. factor THD
Trigger year 1999
Trigger month 4
Trigger day 12
Trigger hour 0
rd
19
Statistic limits:
Limit THD 14.0 % (<-- TDD)
Two fundamental rules for PQCU3H settings:
5HVHWWLQJ
If the statistics calculation is on and new settings are going to be made, PQCU3H
7ULJJHULQJ
the period triggering mode, the settings are activated at the preset triggering date
20
Next, four setting examples are given for activation of PQCU3H. In addition to the
can be set before activating the settings
([DPSOH
Situation: PQCU3H is in Not in use mode

Objective: One hour statistics for phase current IL1


60 min
([DPSOH


3) Set the Tringger mode parameter to Continuous

1440 min
21
([DPSOH

0 min

1440 min
([DPSOH

monitored signal to IL3 for the next observation time.

L3
Check: When the elapsing observation time Monitoring phase current IL3
ends (Time to end is 0 min), the active
minutes
(using IL1)
22

I1 = I 1
30% $1
Fs/2, where Fs is the used sampling frequency (if fN = 50 Hz, Fs = 2000 Hz and if fN =
60 Hz, Fs = 2400 Hz).
0.01, 1 , 60 , 1
Measurement accuracy for a single measured harmonic Im (m=1,,10)
0.5% , 1 , if , P < 10% , 1 and
5% , P , if , P 10% , 1
where IN is the nominal input current.
1.0% , 1 , if , P < 10% , 1 and
10% , P , if , P 10% , 1 .
When Rogowski coils are used for current measurement, the measurement accuracy of
IEC 61000-4-7 is not guaranteed.
23
2.11 Resetting
local MMI.

Operation Recorded
indicators data
1, 4)
1), 4)
2)
3)
3), 5)
2)
Push-button C x
3)
3), 5)
1)
Resets the recorded data of the particular function block
2)
3)
Resets also the latched trip signals of other function blocks
4)
Resets only the data of the elapsing period
5)
Resets the recorded data of the other function blocks
24
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for PQCU3H is 512.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
25

direction
Limit THD V1 0.1...60.0 % 16.0 R/W Limit for Total
Harmonic Distortion
Limit 2nd harm. V2 0.1...40.0 %In 4.0 R/W Limit for 2nd harmonic
Limit 3rd harm. V3 0.1...40.0 %In 10.0 R/W Limit for 3rd harmonic
Cum. probability V14 90.0...99.5 %In 95.0 R/W Limit for cumulative
probability
3.2.2 Settings
direction
2)
Distort. factor V16 0 or 1 - 1 R/W Selection of distortion
factor (THD or TDD)
Observation time V17 0...9 3) - 9 R/W Selection of
observation time
Trigger mode V18 0...2 4) - 0 R/W Selection of trigger
mode
Remote trigger V23 1=Trigger - 0 W Remote or local
triggering
Selected harm. V24 0...13 5) - 3 R/W Selected harmonic for
recordings
Act. meas.mode V26 0...4 1) - 0 R Active measuring
mode
event transmission
event transmission
event transmission
event transmission
26
1)
2)
Distortion factor 0=THD, 1=TDD
3)
4)
5)
4=5th harmonic; 5=6th harmonic; 6=7th harmonic; 7=8th harmonic; 8=9th harmonic;

direction
from this current input
outputs
Out CUM_HIGH O2 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/M Status of output CUM_HIGH
Out THD O3 0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Calculated total harmonic
distortion
1)
Input 0=None; 1=L1; 2=L2; 3=L3
2)
3)
27
3.3.2 3 sec. values

direction
THD I2 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of Total
Harmonic Distortion in percentage
Fund. I3 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 1st harmonic
component in percentage
2nd harmonic I4 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 2nd harmonic
in percentage
3rd harmonic I5 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 3rd harmonic
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
in percentage
28

direction
percentage
2nd harmonic I19 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Short time sliding average value of
2nd harmonic in percentage
3rd harmonic I20 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Short time sliding average value of
3rd harmonic in percentage
29
3.3.4 Recorded data
3.3.4.1 General
harmonic
preset limit occurs
previous period):
for the Observation period

direction
Starting date V301 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Start date of active obs.
period
Starting time V302 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Start time of active obs.
period
End date V303 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M End date of active obs.
period
End time V304 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M End time of active obs.
period
Measuring V305 0...4 1) - 1 R/M Meas. mode of active
mode obs. period
observation period
1)
2)
harmonic; 10=11th harmonic; 11=12th harmonic; 12=13th harmonic
30

direction
Maximum V306 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Max THD at active obs.
THD period
Max 2nd V307 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Max 2nd harmonic at
Max 3rd harm. V308 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Max 3rd harmonic at
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
31

direction
THD
2nd harmonic
3rd harmonic
4th harmonic
5th harmonic
6th harmonic
7th harmonic
8th harmonic
9th harmonic
10th harmonic
11th harmonic
12th harmonic
13th harmonic

direction
32

direction
period
period
period
period
Measuring V205 0...4 1) - 1 R/M Meas. mode of last obs.
mode period
1)
2)

direction
Maximum V206 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Max THD from previous
THD obs. period
Max 2nd V207 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Max 2nd harmonic from
Max 3rd harm. V208 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Max 3rd harmonic from
33

direction
THD
2nd harmonic
3rd harmonic
4th harmonic
5th harmonic
6th harmonic
7th harmonic
8th harmonic
9th harmonic
10th harmonic
11th harmonic
12th harmonic
13th harmonic

direction
34

direction
Fund. V403 0.0...1000.0 %n 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 1st harmonic
component for last exceeding
exceeding
2nd harmonic V405 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 2nd harmonic
for last exceeding
3rd harmonic V406 0.0...1000.0 %In 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 3rd harmonic
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
harmonic for last
exceeding
harmonic for last
exceeding
harmonic for last
exceeding
harmonic for last
exceeding
3.3.5 Events
coefficient mask
E0 1 1 PQCU3H:Harmonic limit Reset
E1 2 1 PQCU3H:Harmonic limit Exceeded
E2 4 1 PQCU3H:Cumulative limit Exceeded
E3 8 1 PQCU3H:Obs. period near end On
E4 16 1 PQCU3H:Obs. period ended On
35
4 Technical Data

D
36
1MRS752336-MUM PQVO3H
Issued: 3/2000
Voltage Waveform Distortion
Measurement
Contents
1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.3 Application........................................................................................... 4
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 6
2.1.2 Digital inputs............................................................................... 7
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 8
2.5 Real time monitoring ......................................................................... 10
2.7 Statistics............................................................................................ 12
2.7.1 Background.............................................................................. 12
2.7.3 Input values.............................................................................. 13
2.7.4.1 Recording banks ........................................................... 14
2.7.4.2 Maximum values ........................................................... 14
2.7.4.3 Percentiles .................................................................... 15
2.7.5 Output CUM_HIGH .................................................................. 17
2.7.7 Exceptions ............................................................................... 17
PQVO3H Substation Automation
2.11 Resetting ...........................................................................................24

3 Parameters and events...........................................................................25
3.1 General..............................................................................................25
3.2.2 Settings ....................................................................................26
3.3.1 Inputs/ Outputs .........................................................................27
3.3.2 3 sec. values.............................................................................28
3.3.3 10 min. values ..........................................................................29
3.3.4 Recorded data ..........................................................................30
3.3.4.1 General..........................................................................30
3.3.4.2 A:Period info ..................................................................30
3.3.4.3 A:Maxim. values ............................................................31
3.3.4.4 A:Cumulat. prob.............................................................32
3.3.4.5 A:Selected harm. ...........................................................32
3.3.4.6 B:Period info ..................................................................33
3.3.4.7 B:Maxim. values ............................................................33
3.3.4.8 B:Cumulat. prob.............................................................34
3.3.4.9 B:Selected harm. ...........................................................34
3.3.4.10 Last exceeding...............................................................35
3.3.5 Events ......................................................................................35
4 Technical Data.........................................................................................36
2
Substation Automation PQVO3H
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
Total Harmonic Distortion measurement (THD)
statistics according to EN 50160 and IEC 61000-4-7
MMI
preset time
continuously
Measurement with:
conventional voltage transformers
voltage dividers

problem concerning voltage or current that results in failure or misoperation of

3
power quality information. The function block PQVO3H provides a convenient
method for monitoring power quality by means of voltage waveform distortion:
based on the RED 500 Platform. Function block PQVO3H produces statistical data
about harmonic distortion that is immediately comparable to standard definitions
about power of good quality. In addition, the function block provides short time
average and maximum values for THD and individual harmonics.
1.3 Application
This document specifies the functions of the function block PQVO3H for voltage
The function block PQVO3H is used for measuring the harmonics and monitoring the
power quality in distribution networks. Power quality measurements carried out by
the function block PQVO3H follow the European Standard EN 50160. Data collection
and analysis is done according to EN 50160. Measuring principles for individual
harmonics and THD are adapted from the International standard IEC 61000-4-7. The
American standard IEEE Std 1159 is also partly supported.

)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI3492+
4

UL1_U12 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring phase-to-phase voltage U12 or
phase-to-earth voltage UL2
U0 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring residual voltage U0
FREQ_REF Analogue signal (SINT) Input for frequency reference voltage
DISABLE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for disabling PQVO3H
TRIGG Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for triggering PQVO3H
RESET Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for resetting the registers of PQVO3H

harmonic
THD Analogue signal (REAL) Measured THD
5
2.1 Configuration
Distortion measurement can be applied to phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltages.

If all phase-to-earth voltages are connected, it is possible to carry out the distortion
measurement for phase-to-phase voltages, too. In this case, phase-to-phase voltages
are calculated as follows:
U12 = (UL1 - UL2) / 3
U23 = (UL2 - UL3) / 3
U31 = (UL3 - UL1) / 3
Division by 3 is needed because the voltage definitions are proportioned to Un (e.g
U1=100%Un or U12=100%Un). If 100%Un is defined for phase voltage or phase-to-
phase voltage, the voltage value is nominal (normal).
Then again, if at least two of the phase-to-phase voltages and residual voltage are
connected, it is possible to carry out the distortion measurement for phase-to-earth
voltages. For example, if U0, U12 and U23 are connected, phase-to-earth voltages are
UL1 = 3 (U0 + 2*U12 + U23) /3
UL2 = 3 (U0 - U12 + U23) /3
UL3 = 3 (U0 - U12 - 2*U23) /3
Note: It is necessary that the voltages are connected to the inputs of the function block
in the correct order, cf. Input Description above and Configuration examples
below.
In order to carry out the distortion measurement, it is necessary to connect a voltage

(not U0) signal to the FREQ_REF input and set frequency measurement on for that
channel. If the frequency measurement has already been set on for some analogue
channel, it is recommended to connect that channel to the FREQ_REF input.
6

DISABLE
TRIGG
starts a new observation time.
RESET

1. 2.
3. 4.
)LJXUH 88DQG8FRQQHFWHG8/DQG8/FRQQHFWHG8/DQG

8/FRQQHFWHG$OOSKDVHWRSKDVHYROWDJHVDQGUHVLGXDOYROWDJH
FRQQHFWHG
7
Configurations in the figures above are all valid. In figure (1), phase-to-phase voltages
U12 and U23 and residual voltage U0 are connected in correct order. U12 is also
connected to the frequency reference input. This configuration allows all measuring
modes to be used except L3-L1 (cf. Measuring mode below). In figure (2), phase-
to-earth voltages UL2 and UL3 are connected in correct order. UL2 is also connected to
the frequency reference input. This configuration allows measuring modes L2, L3
and Worst phase. In figure (3), phase-to-earth voltages UL1 and UL3 are connected in
correct order. UL1 is used as frequency reference. This configuration allows measuring
modes L1, L3 and Worst phase. A basic configuration where all phase-to-phase
voltages and residual voltage are connected is presented in figure (4). This
configuration allows all measuring modes.
2.2 Measuring mode

L1 Phase-to-earth voltage UL1 is measured
Worst phase Worst phase-to-earth voltage is measured
L1-L2 Phase-to-phase voltage U12 is measured
Worst main Worst phase-to-phase voltage is measured
When the measuring mode is set to Worst phase, the phase-to-earth voltage with the
highest THD is measured. Because the worst case can vary during the observation
time (first UL1, then UL2 and then again UL1), the statistics can originate from different
phases. The monitored value Measured input indicates the actual phase all the time
(phase-to-earth voltage with the highest THD).
Operation with the measuring mode Worst main is the same as with Worst phase.
Now the highest THD is tracked from the phase-to-phase voltages.
8
I1 = 0.9 I 1 ...1.1 I 1
GI1 0.5 +] , GI1 = I1,max I1,min
where GI1 is the difference between the measured maximum and minimum values of
the fundamental frequency within one second.
$1 70%8 1
If any of the criteria above is not fulfilled, PQVO3H will not show the values of the

PQVO3H monitors sliding average values from the time intervals of TVs (= 3 s) and
as observation times in PQVO3H. In addition to the standards recommendation,
9
TVs = 3 s M values
time
EffMeas
Real time values
TVs value of individual harmonic n is calculated in RMS sense using the real time
0
FQ N
2
,
&Q9V = N=1
0
rejected from the TVs window and the new set is included (figure 4).
TVs = 3 s
time
SlidAver
Real time values
10
13
8
N =2
2
N
7+' =
81
where U1 is the RMS value of the fundamental component and Uk is the RMS value of
the kth harmonic.
values.
The limits for harmonics and THD set by the user (refer to sections Setting
examples and Last exceeding) are compared continuously to the TVs sliding
average values. If the TVs value for any harmonic should exceed the corresponding
TVs value for 3rd
Limit for 3rd

3rd:
TVs value for 13th

Limit for 13th
13th:
Max THD
THD:
HAR_HIGH:
time:
LimitSuperv
11
2.7 Statistics
2.7.1 Background
Statistical calculations carried out by PQVO3H fulfil the requirements for statistical
IEC 61000-4-7 are also fulfilled. EN 50160 states the requirements for power quality
(concerning harmonics) as follows:
During each individual period of one week:
-THD shall be less than or equal to the given limit

-95% of the 10 minutes mean RMS values of each individual harmonics shall
be less than or equal to the given limit
In the following text statistics recorder refers to the part of PQVO3H that carries out
PQVO3H calculates the statistics only if it has been triggered. A triggering signal
always starts a new observation time.
There are several possibilities for triggering, i.e. activating, the statistics. The
Remote trigger. The same parameter can be used for remote triggering, e.g.
hour to one week.
12
Start of Statistics
recordings,
Trigger: Activated
Time
1 week

Time

Time

ObsTimes
Time
REVHUYDWLRQWLPHV
2.7.3 Input values
13
directories:
A:Period info
A:Maxim. values
A:Cumulat. prob.
A:Selected harm.
B:Period info
B:Maxim. values
B:Cumulat. prob.
B:Selected harm.
to the end of the observation time. This parameter is useful when checking that
14
2.7.4.3 Percentiles

of the data.

The purpose of percentiles is to find the harmonic amplitude so that during the
observation time 95 % of all the measured harmonic amplitudes are less than or equal
directories.
... 12:20:000 and so on.
2 S
D=
1XP2I&ODVVLILHUV
For example, if the limit for the second harmonic is 10 %Un, the classifier width a is
1.25 %Un. If the average value U2,ave is
D < 8 2,DYH 2D ,
the average value is put into classifier 2. Calculation of percentiles is shown in

Figure 7.
15
Classifier 2
Limit p
2*p
10 30 30 ... 25 4 ... 1 0 0 0
0 a 2*a 3*a p-a p+a 2*p-3a 2*p-2a 2*p-a
Over
category
PQVOPercentileCalc1
Value/%Un

average values, i.e. harmonic amplitudes, are less than or equal to p %Un. In this case,
fulfilled.
Classifier 2
Limit p
2*p
10 30 30 ... 24 4 ... 2 0 0 0
0 a 2*a 3*a p-a p+a 2*p-3a 2*p-2a 2*p-a
Over
category
PQVOPercentileCalc2
Value/%Un
Figure 8 presents a situation where 6 values are in classifiers above the limit p. Hence,
16
For one harmonic or THD (selected by Selected harm. parameter in the Settings
With five percentiles, more detailed information can be obtained from the cumulative
% Un
14
12
10
8
6
4
PQVOFixed perc
2 Time
1% 5% 50 % 95 % 99 %
harmonic values are smaller than the preset limit), an indication will be given: the
2.7.7 Exceptions
17
([DPSOH Voltage waveform survey; the recommendations of the European

standard EN 50160 used as a reference.
The standard gives values for each individual harmonic voltage so that during each
period of one week, 95 % of the 10 minutes mean RMS values of each individual
harmonic voltage shall be less than or equal to those values. Also the THD shall be
less than or equal to 8 %.
Let us say that phase-to-earth voltage UL1 is under this survey and we want to verify
its quality according to EN 50160. The survey should start at 8:00 am on Monday the
3rd of May, 1999 and last until further notice. Let us also assume that we want to
know the cumulative distribution of the third harmonic values more precisely. The
setting values would be:
Settings:
Measuring mode UL1

Trigger year 1999
Trigger month 5m
Trigger day 3d
Trigger hour 8h
rd
18
Statistic limits:
Limit THD 8.0 %
Limit 2nd harm. 2.0 % Un
Limit 3rd harm. 5.0 % Un
Limit 4th harm. 1.0 % Un
Note: Check the sections Statistics recorder and Real time monitoring for the
effects of the harmonic limits (% Un).

standard 50160 used as a reference.
Again the used reference values are those given by EN 50160 but now we want to
survey the harmonics only on Mondays, starting at 0:00 am on Monday the 12th of
April, 1999. Let us also assume that we want to check the overall worst case of phase-
to-earth voltages (statistics are collected using the values from the phase-to-earth
voltage with the highest THD at each moment). The third harmonic is once again
observed more closely than the others.
Settings:

Trigger year 1999
Trigger month 4m
Trigger day 12 d
Trigger hour 0h
rd
19
Statistic limits:
Limit THD 8.0 %
Two fundamental rules for PQVO3H settings:
5HVHWWLQJ
If the statistics calculation is on and new settings are going to be made, PQVO3H
7ULJJHULQJ
the periodic triggering mode, the settings are activated at the preset triggering date
20
Next, four setting examples are given for activation of PQVO3H. In addition to the
can be set before activating the settings.
([DPSOH
Situation: PQVO3H is in Not in use mode

Objective: One hour statistics for phase voltage UL1

Check: PQVO3H should be in L1 mode

(Act. meas.mode) Monitoring phase voltage UL1
60 min
([DPSOH

(Act. meas.mode is 'L1') Monitoring phase voltage UL1
Objective: One day continuous statistics for phase voltage UL3

3) Set the Tringgering mode parameter to Continuous

1440 min
21
([DPSOH

0 min

1440 min
([DPSOH

monitored signal to UL3 for the next observation time.

L3
Check: When elapsing observation time ends Monitoring phase voltage UL3
(Time to end is 0 min), the active
minutes
(using UL1)
22

I1 = I 1
30% $1
Fs/2, where Fs is the used sampling frequency (if fN = 50 Hz, Fs = 2000 Hz and if
fN = 60 Hz, Fs = 2400 Hz).
0.98 1 8 1.18 1
Measurement accuracy for a single measured harmonic 8PP
0.15%8 1 , if 8 P < 3%8 1 and
5%8 P , if 8 P 3%8 1
where UN is the nominal input voltage.
0.3%8 1 , if 8 P < 3%8 1 and
10%8 P , if 8 P 3%8 1 .
23
2.11 Resetting
local MMI.

Operation Recorded
indicators data
1), 4)
1), 4)
2)
3)
3), 5)
2)
Push-button C x
3)
3), 5)
1)
Resets the recorded data of the particular function block.
2)
3)
Resets also the latched trip signals of other function blocks.
4)
Resets only the data of the elapsing period.
5)
Resets the recorded data of the other function blocks.
24
3 Parameters and events
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for PQVO3H is 513.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
25

direction
Limit THD V1 0.1...30.0 % 8.0 R/W Limit for Total Harmonic
Distortion
Limit 2nd harm. V2 0.1...20.0 %Un 2.0 R/W Limit for 2nd harmonic
Limit 3rd harm. V3 0.1...20.0 %Un 5.0 R/W Limit for 3rd harmonic
Limit 4th harm. V4 0.1...20.0 %Un 1.0 R/W Limit for 4th harmonic
Cum. probability V14 90.0...99.5 % 95.0 R/W Limit for cumulative
probability
3.2.2 Settings
direction
2)
Observation V16 0...9 - 9 R/W Selection of observation
time time
Trigger mode V17 0...2 3) - 0 R/W Selection of trigger mode
Remote trigger V22 1=Trigger - 0 W Remote or local triggering
4)
Selected harm. V23 0...13 - 3 R/W Selected harmonic for
recordings
Act. meas.mode V25 0...8 1) - 0 R Active measuring mode
transmission
transmission
transmission
transmission
1)
Measuring mode 0=Not in use; 1=L1; 2=L2; 3=L3; 4=Worst phase; 5=L1-L2; 6=L2-L3; 7=L3-L1;
8=Worst main
26
2)
3)
4)
harmonic; 9=10th harmonic; 10=11th harmonic; 11=12th harmonic; 12=13th
harmonic

direction
from this voltage input
outputs
3)
Out CUM_HIGH O2 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of output CUM_HIGH
Out THD O3 0.0...120.0 % 0.0 R/M Calculated total harmonic
distortion
1)
Input 0=None; 1=L1; 2=L2; 3=L3; 4=L1-L2; 5=L2-L3; 6=L3-L1
2)
3)
27
3.3.2 3 sec. values

direction
THD I2 0.0...120.0 % 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of Total Harmonic
Distortion in percentage
Fund. I3 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 1st harmonic in
component percentage
2nd harmonic I4 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 2nd harmonic in
percentage
3rd harmonic I5 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 3rd harmonic in
percentage
4th harmonic I6 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 4th harmonic in
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
28

direction
percentage
2nd harmonic I19 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Short time sliding average value of 2nd
harmonic in percentage
3rd harmonic I20 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Short time sliding average value of 3rd
4th harmonic I21 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Short time sliding average value of 4th
10th harmonic I27 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Short time sliding average value of
29
3.3.4 Recorded data
3.3.4.1 General
harmonic
preset limit occurs
previous period):
for the observation period

direction
Starting date V301 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Start date of active
obs. period
Starting time V302 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Start time of active
obs. period
End date V303 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M End date of active
obs. period
End time V304 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M End time of active
obs. period
Measuring mode V305 0...8 1) - 1 R/M Meas. mode of active
obs. period
Selected harm. V319 0...13 2) - 3 R/M Selected harmonic for
percentage monitoring
Observation period
1)
8=Worst main
2)
30

direction
Maximum THD V306 0.0...120.0 % 0.0 R/M Max THD at active
obs. period
Max 2nd harm. V307 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Max 2nd harmonic at
active obs. period
Max 3rd harm. V308 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Max 3rd harmonic at
active obs. period
Max 4th harm. V309 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Max 4th harmonic at
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
31

direction
X% val for THD V325 0.0...120.0 % 0.0 R/M Cum. prob. percentile
for THD
X% val for 2nd V326 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Cum. prob. percentile
for 2nd harmonic
X% val for 3rd V327 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Cum. prob. percentile
for 3rd harmonic
X% val for 4th V328 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Cum. prob. percentile
for 4th harmonic
for 5th harmonic
for 6th harmonic
for 7th harmonic
for 8th harmonic
for 9th harmonic
for 10th harmonic
for 11th harmonic
for 12th harmonic
for 13th harmonic

direction
1% value V320 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M 1% percentile
32

direction
period
period
period
period
Measuring mode V205 0...8 1) - 1 R/M Meas. mode of last
obs. period
1)
8=Worst main
2)
harmonic; 9=10th harmonic; 10=11th harmonic; 11=12th harmonic;
12=13th harmonic

direction
Maximum THD V206 0.0...120.0 % 0.0 R/M Max THD value in
Max 2nd harm. V207 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Max 2nd harmonic in
Max 3rd harm. V208 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Max 3rd harmonic in
Max 4th harm. V209 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Max 4th harmonic in
33

direction
value for THD
value for 2nd harmonic
value for 3rd harmonic
value for 4th harmonic

direction
1% value V220 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M 1% percentile value
34

direction
Fund. component V403 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 1st harmonic
for last exceeding
exceeding
2nd harmonic V405 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 2nd harmonic
for last exceeding
3rd harmonic V406 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 3rd harmonic
for last exceeding
4th harmonic V407 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 4th harmonic
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
3.3.5 Events
coefficient mask
E0 1 1 PQVO3H:Harmonic limit Reset
E1 2 1 PQVO3H:Harmonic limit Exceeded
E2 4 1 PQVO3H:Cumulative limit Exceeded
E3 8 1 PQVO3H:Obs. period near end On
E4 16 1 PQVO3H:Obs. period ended On
35
4 Technical Data

D
36
1MRS752336-MUM PQVO3H
Issued: 3/2000
Voltage Waveform Distortion
Measurement
Contents
1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.3 Application........................................................................................... 4
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 6
2.1.2 Digital inputs............................................................................... 7
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 8
2.5 Real time monitoring ......................................................................... 10
2.7 Statistics............................................................................................ 12
2.7.1 Background.............................................................................. 12
2.7.3 Input values.............................................................................. 13
2.7.4.1 Recording banks ........................................................... 14
2.7.4.2 Maximum values ........................................................... 14
2.7.4.3 Percentiles .................................................................... 15
2.7.5 Output CUM_HIGH .................................................................. 17
2.7.7 Exceptions ............................................................................... 17
2.11 Resetting ...........................................................................................24

3 Parameters and events...........................................................................25
3.1 General..............................................................................................25
3.2.2 Settings ....................................................................................26
3.3.1 Inputs/ Outputs .........................................................................27
3.3.2 3 sec. values.............................................................................28
3.3.3 10 min. values ..........................................................................29
3.3.4 Recorded data ..........................................................................30
3.3.4.1 General..........................................................................30
3.3.4.2 A:Period info ..................................................................30
3.3.4.3 A:Maxim. values ............................................................31
3.3.4.4 A:Cumulat. prob.............................................................32
3.3.4.5 A:Selected harm. ...........................................................32
3.3.4.6 B:Period info ..................................................................33
3.3.4.7 B:Maxim. values ............................................................33
3.3.4.8 B:Cumulat. prob.............................................................34
3.3.4.9 B:Selected harm. ...........................................................34
3.3.4.10 Last exceeding...............................................................35
3.3.5 Events ......................................................................................35
4 Technical Data.........................................................................................36
2
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
Total Harmonic Distortion measurement (THD)
statistics according to EN 50160 and IEC 61000-4-7
MMI
preset time
continuously
Measurement with:
conventional voltage transformers
voltage dividers

problem concerning voltage or current that results in failure or misoperation of

3
power quality information. The function block PQVO3H provides a convenient
method for monitoring power quality by means of voltage waveform distortion:
based on the RED 500 Platform. Function block PQVO3H produces statistical data
about harmonic distortion that is immediately comparable to standard definitions
about power of good quality. In addition, the function block provides short time
average and maximum values for THD and individual harmonics.
1.3 Application
This document specifies the functions of the function block PQVO3H for voltage
The function block PQVO3H is used for measuring the harmonics and monitoring the
power quality in distribution networks. Power quality measurements carried out by
the function block PQVO3H follow the European Standard EN 50160. Data collection
and analysis is done according to EN 50160. Measuring principles for individual
harmonics and THD are adapted from the International standard IEC 61000-4-7. The
American standard IEEE Std 1159 is also partly supported.

)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI3492+
4

U0 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring residual voltage U0
FREQ_REF Analogue signal (SINT) Input for frequency reference voltage
DISABLE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for disabling PQVO3H
TRIGG Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for triggering PQVO3H
RESET Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for resetting the registers of PQVO3H

harmonic
THD Analogue signal (REAL) Measured THD
5
2.1 Configuration
Distortion measurement can be applied to phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltages.

If all phase-to-earth voltages are connected, it is possible to carry out the distortion
measurement for phase-to-phase voltages, too. In this case, phase-to-phase voltages
are calculated as follows:
U12 = (UL1 - UL2) / 3
U23 = (UL2 - UL3) / 3
U31 = (UL3 - UL1) / 3
Division by 3 is needed because the voltage definitions are proportioned to Un (e.g
U1=100%Un or U12=100%Un). If 100%Un is defined for phase voltage or phase-to-
phase voltage, the voltage value is nominal (normal).
Then again, if at least two of the phase-to-phase voltages and residual voltage are
connected, it is possible to carry out the distortion measurement for phase-to-earth
voltages. For example, if U0, U12 and U23 are connected, phase-to-earth voltages are
UL1 = 3 (U0 + 2*U12 + U23) /3
UL2 = 3 (U0 - U12 + U23) /3
UL3 = 3 (U0 - U12 - 2*U23) /3
Note: It is necessary that the voltages are connected to the inputs of the function block
in the correct order, cf. Input Description above and Configuration examples
below.
In order to carry out the distortion measurement, it is necessary to connect a voltage

(not U0) signal to the FREQ_REF input and set frequency measurement on for that
channel. If the frequency measurement has already been set on for some analogue
channel, it is recommended to connect that channel to the FREQ_REF input.
6

DISABLE
TRIGG
starts a new observation time.
RESET

1. 2.
3. 4.
)LJXUH 88DQG8FRQQHFWHG8/DQG8/FRQQHFWHG8/DQG

8/FRQQHFWHG$OOSKDVHWRSKDVHYROWDJHVDQGUHVLGXDOYROWDJH
FRQQHFWHG
7
Configurations in the figures above are all valid. In figure (1), phase-to-phase voltages
U12 and U23 and residual voltage U0 are connected in correct order. U12 is also
connected to the frequency reference input. This configuration allows all measuring
modes to be used except L3-L1 (cf. Measuring mode below). In figure (2), phase-
to-earth voltages UL2 and UL3 are connected in correct order. UL2 is also connected to
the frequency reference input. This configuration allows measuring modes L2, L3
and Worst phase. In figure (3), phase-to-earth voltages UL1 and UL3 are connected in
correct order. UL1 is used as frequency reference. This configuration allows measuring
modes L1, L3 and Worst phase. A basic configuration where all phase-to-phase
voltages and residual voltage are connected is presented in figure (4). This
configuration allows all measuring modes.
2.2 Measuring mode

Worst phase Worst phase-to-earth voltage is measured
Worst main Worst phase-to-phase voltage is measured
When the measuring mode is set to Worst phase, the phase-to-earth voltage with the
highest THD is measured. Because the worst case can vary during the observation
time (first UL1, then UL2 and then again UL1), the statistics can originate from different
phases. The monitored value Measured input indicates the actual phase all the time
(phase-to-earth voltage with the highest THD).
Operation with the measuring mode Worst main is the same as with Worst phase.
Now the highest THD is tracked from the phase-to-phase voltages.
8
I1 = 0.9 I 1 ...1.1 I 1
GI1 0.5 +] , GI1 = I1,max I1,min
where GI1 is the difference between the measured maximum and minimum values of
the fundamental frequency within one second.
$1 70%8 1
If any of the criteria above is not fulfilled, PQVO3H will not show the values of the

PQVO3H monitors sliding average values from the time intervals of TVs (= 3 s) and
as observation times in PQVO3H. In addition to the standards recommendation,
9
TVs = 3 s M values
time
EffMeas
Real time values
TVs value of individual harmonic n is calculated in RMS sense using the real time
0
FQ N
2
,
&Q9V = N=1
0
rejected from the TVs window and the new set is included (figure 4).
TVs = 3 s
time
SlidAver
Real time values
10
13
8
N =2
2
N
7+' =
81
where U1 is the RMS value of the fundamental component and Uk is the RMS value of
the kth harmonic.
values.
The limits for harmonics and THD set by the user (refer to sections Setting
examples and Last exceeding) are compared continuously to the TVs sliding
average values. If the TVs value for any harmonic should exceed the corresponding
TVs value for 3rd
Limit for 3rd

3rd:
TVs value for 13th

Limit for 13th
13th:
Max THD
THD:
HAR_HIGH:
time:
LimitSuperv
11
2.7 Statistics
2.7.1 Background
Statistical calculations carried out by PQVO3H fulfil the requirements for statistical
IEC 61000-4-7 are also fulfilled. EN 50160 states the requirements for power quality
(concerning harmonics) as follows:
During each individual period of one week:
-THD shall be less than or equal to the given limit

-95% of the 10 minutes mean RMS values of each individual harmonics shall
be less than or equal to the given limit
In the following text statistics recorder refers to the part of PQVO3H that carries out
PQVO3H calculates the statistics only if it has been triggered. A triggering signal
always starts a new observation time.
There are several possibilities for triggering, i.e. activating, the statistics. The
Remote trigger. The same parameter can be used for remote triggering, e.g.
hour to one week.
12
Start of Statistics
recordings,
Trigger: Activated
Time
1 week

Time

Time

ObsTimes
Time
REVHUYDWLRQWLPHV
2.7.3 Input values
13
directories:
A:Period info
A:Maxim. values
A:Cumulat. prob.
A:Selected harm.
B:Period info
B:Maxim. values
B:Cumulat. prob.
B:Selected harm.
to the end of the observation time. This parameter is useful when checking that
14
2.7.4.3 Percentiles

of the data.

The purpose of percentiles is to find the harmonic amplitude so that during the
observation time 95 % of all the measured harmonic amplitudes are less than or equal
directories.
... 12:20:000 and so on.
2 S
D=
1XP2I&ODVVLILHUV
For example, if the limit for the second harmonic is 10 %Un, the classifier width a is
1.25 %Un. If the average value U2,ave is
D < 8 2,DYH 2D ,
the average value is put into classifier 2. Calculation of percentiles is shown in

Figure 7.
15
Classifier 2
Limit p
2*p
10 30 30 ... 25 4 ... 1 0 0 0
0 a 2*a 3*a p-a p+a 2*p-3a 2*p-2a 2*p-a
Over
category
PQVOPercentileCalc1
Value/%Un

average values, i.e. harmonic amplitudes, are less than or equal to p %Un. In this case,
fulfilled.
Classifier 2
Limit p
2*p
10 30 30 ... 24 4 ... 2 0 0 0
0 a 2*a 3*a p-a p+a 2*p-3a 2*p-2a 2*p-a
Over
category
PQVOPercentileCalc2
Value/%Un
Figure 8 presents a situation where 6 values are in classifiers above the limit p. Hence,
16
For one harmonic or THD (selected by Selected harm. parameter in the Settings
With five percentiles, more detailed information can be obtained from the cumulative
% Un
14
12
10
8
6
4
PQVOFixed perc
2 Time
1% 5% 50 % 95 % 99 %
harmonic values are higher than the preset limit), an indication will be given: the
2.7.7 Exceptions
17

standard EN 50160 used as a reference.
The standard gives values for each individual harmonic voltage so that during each
period of one week, 95 % of the 10 minutes mean RMS values of each individual
harmonic voltage shall be less than or equal to those values. Also the THD shall be
less than or equal to 8 %.
Let us say that phase-to-earth voltage UL1 is under this survey and we want to verify
its quality according to EN 50160. The survey should start at 8:00 am on Monday the
3rd of May, 1999 and last until further notice. Let us also assume that we want to
know the cumulative distribution of the third harmonic values more precisely. The
setting values would be:
Settings:
Measuring mode UL1

Trigger year 1999
Trigger month 5m
Trigger day 3d
Trigger hour 8h
rd
18
Statistic limits:
Limit THD 8.0 %
Note: Check the sections Statistics recorder and Real time monitoring for the
effects of the harmonic limits (% Un).

standard 50160 used as a reference.
Again the used reference values are those given by EN 50160 but now we want to
survey the harmonics only on Mondays, starting at 0:00 am on Monday the 12th of
April, 1999. Let us also assume that we want to check the overall worst case of phase-
to-earth voltages (statistics are collected using the values from the phase-to-earth
voltage with the highest THD at each moment). The third harmonic is once again
observed more closely than the others.
Settings:

Trigger year 1999
Trigger month 4m
Trigger day 12 d
Trigger hour 0h
rd
19
Statistic limits:
Limit THD 8.0 %
Two fundamental rules for PQVO3H settings:
5HVHWWLQJ
If the statistics calculation is on and new settings are going to be made, PQVO3H
7ULJJHULQJ
the periodic triggering mode, the settings are activated at the preset triggering date
20
Next, four setting examples are given for activation of PQVO3H. In addition to the
can be set before activating the settings.
([DPSOH
Situation: PQVO3H is in Not in use mode

Objective: One hour statistics for phase voltage UL1


60 min
([DPSOH


3) Set the Tringgering mode parameter to Continuous

1440 min
21
([DPSOH

0 min

1440 min
([DPSOH

monitored signal to UL3 for the next observation time.

L3
Check: When elapsing observation time ends Monitoring phase voltage UL3
(Time to end is 0 min), the active
minutes
(using UL1)
22

I1 = I 1
30% $1
Fs/2, where Fs is the used sampling frequency (if fN = 50 Hz, Fs = 2000 Hz and if
fN = 60 Hz, Fs = 2400 Hz).
0.98 1 8 1.18 1
Measurement accuracy for a single measured harmonic 8PP
0.15%8 1 , if 8 P < 3%8 1 and
5%8 P , if 8 P 3%8 1
where UN is the nominal input voltage.
0.3%8 1 , if 8 P < 3%8 1 and
10%8 P , if 8 P 3%8 1 .
23
2.11 Resetting
local MMI.

Operation Recorded
indicators data
1), 4)
1), 4)
2)
3)
3), 5)
2)
Push-button C x
3)
3), 5)
1)
Resets the recorded data of the particular function block.
2)
3)
Resets also the latched trip signals of other function blocks.
4)
Resets only the data of the elapsing period.
5)
Resets the recorded data of the other function blocks.
24
3 Parameters and events
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for PQVO3H is 513.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
25

direction
Limit THD V1 0.1...30.0 % 8.0 R/W Limit for Total Harmonic
Distortion
Limit 2nd harm. V2 0.1...20.0 %Un 2.0 R/W Limit for 2nd harmonic
Limit 3rd harm. V3 0.1...20.0 %Un 5.0 R/W Limit for 3rd harmonic
Cum. probability V14 90.0...99.5 % 95.0 R/W Limit for cumulative
probability
3.2.2 Settings
direction
2)
Observation V16 0...9 - 9 R/W Selection of observation
time time
Trigger mode V17 0...2 3) - 0 R/W Selection of trigger mode
Remote trigger V22 1=Trigger - 0 W Remote or local triggering
4)
Selected harm. V23 0...13 - 3 R/W Selected harmonic for
recordings
Act. meas.mode V25 0...8 1) - 0 R Active measuring mode
transmission
transmission
transmission
transmission
1)
8=Worst main
26
2)
3)
4)
harmonic; 9=10th harmonic; 10=11th harmonic; 11=12th harmonic; 12=13th
harmonic

direction
from this voltage input
outputs
3)
Out CUM_HIGH O2 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of output CUM_HIGH
Out THD O3 0.0...120.0 % 0.0 R/M Calculated total harmonic
distortion
1)
Input 0=None; 1=L1; 2=L2; 3=L3; 4=L1-L2; 5=L2-L3; 6=L3-L1
2)
3)
27
3.3.2 3 sec. values

direction
THD I2 0.0...120.0 % 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of Total Harmonic
Distortion in percentage
Fund. I3 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 1st harmonic in
component percentage
2nd harmonic I4 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 2nd harmonic in
percentage
3rd harmonic I5 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M 3 s average value of 3rd harmonic in
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
percentage
28

direction
percentage
2nd harmonic I19 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Short time sliding average value of 2nd
3rd harmonic I20 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Short time sliding average value of 3rd
29
3.3.4 Recorded data
3.3.4.1 General
harmonic
preset limit occurs
previous period):
for the observation period

direction
Starting date V301 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M Start date of active
obs. period
Starting time V302 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M Start time of active
obs. period
End date V303 YYYY-MM-DD - - R/M End date of active
obs. period
End time V304 hh:mm:ss.000 - - R/M End time of active
obs. period
Measuring mode V305 0...8 1) - 1 R/M Meas. mode of active
obs. period
Observation period
1)
8=Worst main
2)
30

direction
Maximum THD V306 0.0...120.0 % 0.0 R/M Max THD at active
obs. period
Max 2nd harm. V307 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Max 2nd harmonic at
active obs. period
Max 3rd harm. V308 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Max 3rd harmonic at
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
active obs. period
31

direction
for THD
for 2nd harmonic
for 3rd harmonic
for 4th harmonic
for 5th harmonic
for 6th harmonic
for 7th harmonic
for 8th harmonic
for 9th harmonic
for 10th harmonic
for 11th harmonic
for 12th harmonic
for 13th harmonic

direction
32

direction
period
period
period
period
Measuring mode V205 0...8 1) - 1 R/M Meas. mode of last
obs. period
1)
8=Worst main
2)
harmonic; 9=10th harmonic; 10=11th harmonic; 11=12th harmonic;
12=13th harmonic

direction
Maximum THD V206 0.0...120.0 % 0.0 R/M Max THD value in
Max 2nd harm. V207 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Max 2nd harmonic in
Max 3rd harm. V208 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Max 3rd harmonic in
33

direction
value for THD
value for 2nd harmonic
value for 3rd harmonic

direction
34

direction
Fund. component V403 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 1st harmonic
for last exceeding
exceeding
2nd harmonic V405 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 2nd harmonic
for last exceeding
3rd harmonic V406 0.0...120.0 %Un 0.0 R/M Vsh value of 3rd harmonic
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
for last exceeding
3.3.5 Events
coefficient mask
E0 1 1 PQVO3H:Harmonic limit Reset
E1 2 1 PQVO3H:Harmonic limit Exceeded
E2 4 1 PQVO3H:Cumulative limit Exceeded
E3 8 1 PQVO3H:Obs. period near end On
E4 16 1 PQVO3H:Obs. period ended On
35
4 Technical Data

D
36
1MRS100055 RE_ 5_ _
Issued: 3/2000
Version: A
Phase Reversal Protection
Data subject to change without notice (PREV3)
Contents
1 Introduction ....................................................................................2
1.1 Features.......................................................................................... 2
1.2 Application ...................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 Input and output configuration ............................................. 4
2.1.2 Setting the rated current of the protected unit ...................... 5
2.2 Measuring mode ............................................................................. 5
2.4 Setting groups................................................................................. 8
2.5 Test mode ....................................................................................... 8
2.6 Resetting......................................................................................... 9
3 Parameters and Events ...............................................................10
3.1 General ......................................................................................... 10

3.2 Setting values ............................................................................... 11
3.2.1 Actual settings ................................................................... 11
3.2.2 Setting group 1 .................................................................. 11
3.2.3 Setting group 2 .................................................................. 11
3.2.4 Control settings.................................................................. 12
3.3 Measurement values..................................................................... 13
3.3.1 Input data........................................................................... 13
3.3.2 Output data........................................................................ 13
3.3.3 Recorded data ................................................................... 13
3.3.4 Events................................................................................ 16
4 Technical Data..............................................................................17
RE_ 5_ _ PREV3 ABB Automation
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
Phase reversal protection for motors
Definite-time (DT) operation based on phase angle difference
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the phase reversal protection function block
PREV3 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The function block PREV3 is designed for the phase reversal protection of motors.
3I 3I
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI35(9)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOH
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI35(9
2
ABB Automation PREV3 RE_ 5_ _

IL1 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring the phase current IL1
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active BLOCK signal for blocking the TRIP
high) signal
high)
high) setting groups 1and 2. When GROUP is
edge) and registers of PREV3

error
3
2.1 Configuration
2.1.1 Input and output configuration

connected to the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs of the function block. If the
operation mode 2-phase is selected, the configuration possibilities are those shown
in Figure 3. In case of the operation mode 3-phase, the configuration is as presented
in Figure 4.
)LJXUH 3RVVLEOHDQDORJXHFKDQQHOFRQQHFWLRQVLQFDVHRIWZRSKDVHRSHUDWLRQ
ZKHUHQHXWUDOFXUUHQWLVDVVXPHGWREHLH,/,/,/
)LJXUH $QDORJXHFKDQQHOFRQQHFWLRQLQFDVHRIWKUHHSKDVHRSHUDWLRQ
Note! Using the signals IL1b, IL2b and IL3b instead of IL1, IL2 and IL3 is also
possible, but mixing these two signal sets is not allowed.
4
2.1.2 Setting the rated current of the protected unit
differences between the ratings of protected unit (generator, transformer, motor, etc.)
and those of the measuring device (CTs, VTs, etc.). The setting value 1.00 means that
the rated value of the protected unit is exactly the same as that of the measuring
device. For more information refer to the Technical Reference Manual for REM 54_.
2.2 Measuring mode
The operation based on the numerically calculated fundamental frequency component

of the current has the following features:
the operation is insensitive to the DC component
the harmonics suppression is about -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
The operation of PREV3 is based on phase angle differences between the currents IL1,
IL2 and IL3. Measured phase angle difference between two phase is set to 0 if current is
below 0.05 x In at least in other phase. Moreover, that forced value of phase angle
difference cant cause phase reversal operation even if it is in operating range when 3-
phase operation mode is used. The setting parameters with their features are described
below.
Operation mode:
Not in use:
PREV3 is switched off.
2-phase:
Operation is based on definite time and the value of the neutral current is assumed to
be 0 i.e. IL1+IL2+IL3=0. The function block operates if the phase difference between
two phases is -90...-150 and the expected rotation direction is forward. If the reverse
rotation direction is selected, the operating range is 90...150.
5
([DPSOH
Phases L1 and L2 are used for protection. The rotation direction selected with the
parameter Rotation dir. is forward and thus the operating range is -90...-150. In
Figure 5 (a), the actual rotation direction is forward and the phase difference between
currents IL1 and IL2 is 120. In figure 5 (b), the function block operates because the
actual direction is reverse and the phase difference is -120.
L1 L1
(a) (b)
(L1-L2) -120.0
-150.0
-90.0
120.0 (L1-L2)
L3 L2 L2 L3
Operating range
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIWZRSKDVHRSHUDWLRQ
3-phase:
Operation is based on definite time. The function block operates if the phase
difference between two phases is 2...-122 and the expected rotation direction is
forward. If the reverse rotation direction is selected, the operating range is -2...122.
If only two currents are above the blocking current value 0.05 x In, operation of the 3-
phase mode is similar to the 2-phase mode.
([DPSOH
All three phases are used for protection. The selected rotation direction is forward and
thus the operating range is 2...-122. In Figure 6 (a), the actual rotation direction is
forward and the phase differences are 120. In Figure 6 (b), the CT polarity of the
phase L3 has reversed. The function block operates because two phase difference
values are -60.
L1 L1
(a) (b)
-60.0 (L3-L1)
L3
(L1-L2)
(L3-L1) 120.0 120.0 (L1-L2) 120.0
-60.0 (L2-L3)
120.0
L2 Operating range L2
L3 (L2-L3)
)LJXUH ([DPSOHIRUWKUHHSKDVHRSHUDWLRQ
6
Operate time:
When the function block starts, the START signal is set to TRUE. Should the phase
reversal situation exceed the set definite operate time, the function block operates.
the function block operates, the TRIP signal is set to TRUE. In Figure , the input
signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the selected operation criterion is true and
FALSE when the criterion is false.
The DT timer is allowed to run only if the blocking signal BLOCK is inactive i.e. its
value is FALSE. When the blocking signal becomes active i.e. its value turns to
TRUE, the timer will be stopped (frozen).
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKHGHILQLWHWLPH'7WLPHU
Rotation dir. :
Forward:
Expected phase order is L1,L2,L3 and motor rotation direction forward.
L1 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
(L3-L1) 120.0 120.0 (L1-L2)
120.0
L3 (L2-L3) L2
)LJXUH 3KDVHDQJOHGLIIHUHQFHVZKHQWKHVLWXDWLRQLVV\PPHWULFDQGWKHURWDWLRQ
GLUHFWLRQLVIRUZDUG
7
Reverse:
Expected phase order is L1,L3,L2 and motor rotation direction reverse.
L1 L1 L3 L2 L1 L3 L2
(L1-L2) -120.0 -120.0 (L3-L1)
-120.0
L2 (L2-L3) L3
GLUHFWLRQLVUHYHUVH
If expected rotation direction is wanted to change during motor operation sequency, it
is recommended to select different rotation direction for setting parameter Rotation
dir. in Setting group1 and Setting group 2. Active setting group and likewise
active setting for Expected rot.can now be selected via GROUP input (see also
section Setting groups).
2.4 Setting groups
Two different groups of setting values, group1 and group 2, are available for the
ways:
1. Locally via the control parameter Group selection1) of the MMI

2. Over the communication bus by writing the parameter V11)
3. By means of the input signal GROUP when allowed via the parameter Group
selection (i.e. when V1=21))
1)
time.
2.5 Test mode
8
2.6 Resetting
The operation indicators, latched alarm or trip signal and recorded data can be reset as
follows:
indicators alarm or data
trip signal
1)
1)
Parameter F055V013 for PREV3 X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
Resets the latched alarm or trip signal and recorded data of the particular function block.
2)
9
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for PREV3 is 55.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
10
3.2 Setting values

direction
Operation mode S1 02 1) - 2 R Selection of operation
mode
Operate time S2 0.1010.00 s 0.5 R Operate time at DT
mode
Rotation dir. S3 0 or 1 2) - 0 R Selection of expected
rotation direction
1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = 2-phase; 2 = 3-phase
2)

direction
Operation mode S41 02 1) - 2 R/W Selection of operation
mode
Operate time S42 0.1010.00 s 0.5 R/W Operate time at DT
mode
Rotation dir. S43 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/W Selection of expected
rotation direction
1)
2)

direction
mode
Operate time S72 0.1010.00 s 0.5 R/W Operate time at DT
mode
rotation direction
1)
2)
11

direction
Group selection V1 02 1) - 0 R/W Selection of the active
setting group
Start pulse V3 01000 ms 0 R/W Minimum pulse width of
START signal
Trip signal V4 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/W Selection of latching
feature for TRIP output
Trip pulse V5 401000 ms 40 R/W Minimum pulse width of
TRIP
Reset registers V13 1 = Reset - 0 W Resetting of latched trip
4)
transmission (E0E7)
transmission (E0E7)
transmission (E0E7)
transmission (E0E7)
1)
2)
3)
4)
12
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Current IL1 I1 0.0060.00 x In 0.00 R/M Phase current IL1
Angle IL1-IL2 I4 -180180 0 R/M Phase difference of the
currents L1 and L2
currents L2 and L3
currents L3 and L1
Input BLOCK I7 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of BLOCK signal
1)
Input TRIGG I8 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of TRIGG signal
Input GROUP I9 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the signal for
switching between group 1
and 2
Input RESET I10 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the signal for
resetting the output
signals of PREV3
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
13
3.3.3.3 Status data
The status data of the BLOCK input (Active or Not active) and the Active group
3.3.3.4 Duration

3.3.3.5 Currents and phase differencies
If the function block alarms or trips, the current values and phase difference values
are updated at the moment of tripping, i.e. on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. For
external triggering, the current values and phase difference values are updated at the
moment of triggering, i.e. on the rising edge of the input signal TRIGG. If the
function block starts but does not trip, the current and phase difference values
captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz) after the beginning
of the start situation are recorded. So the values of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3
and phase angle difference values always originate from the same moment. The
current values are recorded as multiples of the rated current In and the phase
difference values are recorded in degrees.
3.3.3.6 Priority

1. Tripping
2. Starting
3. External triggering,
triggering request.
14

direction
Duration V203 0.0100.0 % 0.0 R/M Duration of start
situation
Current IL1 V204 0.0060.00 x In 0.00 R/M Phase current IL1
Angle IL1-IL2 V207 -180180 0 R/M Phase difference of the
currents IL1 and IL2
2)
1)
2)

direction
situation
2)
1)
2)
15

direction
situation
2)
1)
2)
3.3.4 Events
coefficient
E0 1 1 START signal from PREV3 Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from PREV3 Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from PREV3 Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from PREV3 Activated
E4 16 0 BLOCK signal of PREV3 Reset
E5 32 0 BLOCK signal of PREV3 Activated
E6 64 0 Test mode of PREV3 Off
E7 128 0 Test mode of PREV3 On
16
4 Technical Data
f/fn = 0.951.05: phase angle difference 2
current 0.01 x In
Start time Start time when the phase order is wrong
and the injected currents = 1.0 x In:
f/fn = 0.951.05: internal time < 72 ms
total time < 80 ms 1)
Reset time2) 401000 ms
Reset ratio Reset value for the phase angle difference: 3
Retardation time Total retardation time when the correct phase order is
restored < 60 ms 2)
f/fn = 0.951.05: 2% of set value or 20 ms 2)
Frequency dependence of Suppression of harmonics:
the settings and operate -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,
times (see above)
1)
2)

B -
17
1MRS 752323-MUM PREV3
Issued: 3/2000
Phase Reversal Protection
Contents
1 Introduction ....................................................................................2
1.1 Features.......................................................................................... 2
1.2 Application ...................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 Input and output configuration ............................................. 4
2.1.2 Setting the rated current of the protected unit ...................... 5
2.2 Measuring mode ............................................................................. 5
2.4 Setting groups................................................................................. 8
2.5 Test mode ....................................................................................... 8
2.6 Resetting......................................................................................... 9
3 Parameters and Events ...............................................................10
3.1 General ......................................................................................... 10

3.2 Setting values ............................................................................... 11
3.2.1 Actual settings ................................................................... 11
3.2.2 Setting group 1 .................................................................. 11
3.2.3 Setting group 2 .................................................................. 11
3.2.4 Control settings.................................................................. 12
3.3 Measurement values..................................................................... 13
3.3.1 Input data........................................................................... 13
3.3.2 Output data........................................................................ 13
3.3.3 Recorded data ................................................................... 13
3.3.4 Events................................................................................ 16
4 Technical Data..............................................................................17
PREV3 Substation Automation
1 Introduction
1.1 Features
Phase reversal protection for motors
Definite-time (DT) operation based on phase angle difference
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the phase reversal protection function block
PREV3 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The function block PREV3 is designed for the phase reversal protection of motors.
3I 3I
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI35(9)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOH
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI35(9
2
Substation Automation PREV3

BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active BLOCK signal for blocking the TRIP
high) signal
high)
high) setting groups 1and 2. When GROUP is
edge) and registers of PREV3

error
3
2.1 Configuration
2.1.1 Input and output configuration

connected to the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs of the function block. If the
operation mode 2-phase is selected, the configuration possibilities are those shown
in Figure 3. In case of the operation mode 3-phase, the configuration is as presented
in Figure 4.
)LJXUH 3RVVLEOHDQDORJXHFKDQQHOFRQQHFWLRQVLQFDVHRIWZRSKDVHRSHUDWLRQ
ZKHUHQHXWUDOFXUUHQWLVDVVXPHGWREHLH,/,/,/
)LJXUH $QDORJXHFKDQQHOFRQQHFWLRQLQFDVHRIWKUHHSKDVHRSHUDWLRQ
Note! Using the signals IL1b, IL2b and IL3b instead of IL1, IL2 and IL3 is also
possible, but mixing these two signal sets is not allowed.
4
2.1.2 Setting the rated current of the protected unit
differences between the ratings of protected unit (generator, transformer, motor, etc.)
and those of the measuring device (CTs, VTs, etc.). The setting value 1.00 means that
the rated value of the protected unit is exactly the same as that of the measuring
device. For more information refer to the Technical Reference Manual for REM 54_.
2.2 Measuring mode
The operation based on the numerically calculated fundamental frequency component

of the current has the following features:
the operation is insensitive to the DC component
the harmonics suppression is about -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
The operation of PREV3 is based on phase angle differences between the currents IL1,
IL2 and IL3. Measured phase angle difference between two phase is set to 0 if current is
below 0.05 x In at least in other phase. Moreover, that forced value of phase angle
difference cant cause phase reversal operation even if it is in operating range when 3-
phase operation mode is used. The setting parameters with their features are described
below.
Operation mode:
Not in use:
PREV3 is switched off.
2-phase:
Operation is based on definite time and the value of the neutral current is assumed to
be 0 i.e. IL1+IL2+IL3=0. The function block operates if the phase difference between
two phases is -90...-150 and the expected rotation direction is forward. If the reverse
rotation direction is selected, the operating range is 90...150.
5
([DPSOH
Phases L1 and L2 are used for protection. The rotation direction selected with the
parameter Rotation dir. is forward and thus the operating range is -90...-150. In
Figure 5 (a), the actual rotation direction is forward and the phase difference between
currents IL1 and IL2 is 120. In figure 5 (b), the function block operates because the
actual direction is reverse and the phase difference is -120.
L1 L1
(a) (b)
(L1-L2) -120.0
-150.0
-90.0
120.0 (L1-L2)
L3 L2 L2 L3
Operating range
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIWZRSKDVHRSHUDWLRQ
3-phase:
Operation is based on definite time. The function block operates if the phase
difference between two phases is 2...-122 and the expected rotation direction is
forward. If the reverse rotation direction is selected, the operating range is -2...122.
If only two currents are above the blocking current value 0.05 x In, operation of the 3-
phase mode is similar to the 2-phase mode.
([DPSOH
All three phases are used for protection. The selected rotation direction is forward and
thus the operating range is 2...-122. In Figure 6 (a), the actual rotation direction is
forward and the phase differences are 120. In Figure 6 (b), the CT polarity of the
phase L3 has reversed. The function block operates because two phase difference
values are -60.
L1 L1
(a) (b)
-60.0 (L3-L1)
L3
(L1-L2)
(L3-L1) 120.0 120.0 (L1-L2) 120.0
-60.0 (L2-L3)
120.0
L2 Operating range L2
L3 (L2-L3)
)LJXUH ([DPSOHIRUWKUHHSKDVHRSHUDWLRQ
6
Operate time:
When the function block starts, the START signal is set to TRUE. Should the phase
reversal situation exceed the set definite operate time, the function block operates.
the function block operates, the TRIP signal is set to TRUE. In Figure , the input
signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the selected operation criterion is true and
FALSE when the criterion is false.
The DT timer is allowed to run only if the blocking signal BLOCK is inactive i.e. its
value is FALSE. When the blocking signal becomes active i.e. its value turns to
TRUE, the timer will be stopped (frozen).
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQRIWKHGHILQLWHWLPH'7WLPHU
Rotation dir. :
Forward:
Expected phase order is L1,L2,L3 and motor rotation direction forward.
L1 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
(L3-L1) 120.0 120.0 (L1-L2)
120.0
L3 (L2-L3) L2
GLUHFWLRQLVIRUZDUG
7
Reverse:
Expected phase order is L1,L3,L2 and motor rotation direction reverse.
L1 L1 L3 L2 L1 L3 L2
(L1-L2) -120.0 -120.0 (L3-L1)
-120.0
L2 (L2-L3) L3
GLUHFWLRQLVUHYHUVH
If expected rotation direction is wanted to change during motor operation sequency, it
is recommended to select different rotation direction for setting parameter Rotation
dir. in Setting group1 and Setting group 2. Active setting group and likewise
active setting for Expected rot.can now be selected via GROUP input (see also
section Setting groups).
2.4 Setting groups
Two different groups of setting values, group1 and group 2, are available for the
ways:
1. Locally via the control parameter Group selection1) of the MMI

2. Over the communication bus by writing the parameter V11)
3. By means of the input signal GROUP when allowed via the parameter Group
selection (i.e. when V1=21))
1)
time.
2.5 Test mode
8
2.6 Resetting
The operation indicators, latched alarm or trip signal and recorded data can be reset as
follows:
indicators alarm or data
trip signal
1)
1)
Parameter F055V013 for PREV3 X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
Resets the latched alarm or trip signal and recorded data of the particular function block.
2)
9
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for PREV3 is 55.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
10
3.2 Setting values

direction
Operation mode S1 02 1) - 2 R Selection of operation
mode
Operate time S2 0.1010.00 s 0.5 R Operate time in DT
mode
Rotation dir. S3 0 or 1 2) - 0 R Selection of expected
rotation direction
1)
2)

direction
mode
Operate time S42 0.1010.00 s 0.5 R/W Operate time in DT
mode
rotation direction
1)
2)

direction
mode
Operate time S72 0.1010.00 s 0.5 R/W Operate time in DT
mode
rotation direction
1)
2)
11

direction
Group selection V1 02 1) - 0 R/W Selection of the active
setting group
Start pulse V3 01000 ms 0 R/W Minimum pulse width of
START signal
Trip signal V4 0 or 1 3) - 0 R/W Selection of latching
feature for TRIP output
Trip pulse V5 401000 ms 40 R/W Minimum pulse width of
TRIP
Reset registers V13 1 = Reset - 0 W Resetting of latched trip
4)
transmission (E0E7)
transmission (E0E7)
transmission (E0E7)
transmission (E0E7)
1)
2)
3)
4)
12
3.3.1 Input data

direction
currents L1 and L2
currents L2 and L3
currents L3 and L1
Input BLOCK I7 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of BLOCK signal
1)
Input TRIGG I8 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of TRIGG signal
Input GROUP I9 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the signal for
switching between group 1
and 2
Input RESET I10 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the signal for
resetting the output
signals of PREV3
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
13
3.3.3.3 Status data
The status data of the BLOCK input (Active or Not active) and the Active group
3.3.3.4 Duration

3.3.3.5 Currents and phase differencies
If the function block alarms or trips, the current values and phase difference values
are updated at the moment of tripping, i.e. on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. For
external triggering, the current values and phase difference values are updated at the
moment of triggering, i.e. on the rising edge of the input signal TRIGG. If the
function block starts but does not trip, the current and phase difference values
captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz) after the beginning
of the start situation are recorded. So the values of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3
and phase angle difference values always originate from the same moment. The
current values are recorded as multiples of the rated current In and the phase
difference values are recorded in degrees.
3.3.3.6 Priority

1. Tripping
2. Starting
3. External triggering,
triggering request.
14

direction
situation
2)
1)
2)

direction
situation
2)
1)
2)
15

direction
situation
2)
1)
2)
3.3.4 Events
coefficient
E0 1 1 START signal from PREV3 Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from PREV3 Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from PREV3 Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from PREV3 Activated
E4 16 0 BLOCK signal of PREV3 Reset
E5 32 0 BLOCK signal of PREV3 Activated
E6 64 0 Test mode of PREV3 Off
E7 128 0 Test mode of PREV3 On
16
4 Technical Data
f/fn = 0.951.05: phase angle difference 2
current 0.01 x In
Start time Start time when the phase order is wrong
and the injected currents = 1.0 x In:
f/fn = 0.951.05: internal time < 72 ms
total time < 80 ms 1)
Reset time2) 401000 ms
Reset ratio Reset value for the phase angle difference: 3
Retardation time Total retardation time when the correct phase order is
restored < 60 ms 2)
f/fn = 0.951.05: 2% of set value or 20 ms 2)
Frequency dependence of Suppression of harmonics:
the settings and operate -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,
times (see above)
1)
2)

B -
C -
17
1MRS100112 (Stage 1) RE_5_ _
1MRS100113 (Stage 2) Phase-Sequence Voltage
Issued: 3/2000
Version: A Protection
Data subject to change without notice Stage1 (PSV3St1)
Stage2 (PSV3St2)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.3 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 7
2.5 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 9
2.6 Test mode ........................................................................................... 9
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 10
3. Application of U1< Operation ................................................................ 11
3.1 Setting the U1< operation.................................................................. 12
3.2 Setting examples for U1< operation .................................................. 13
4. Application of U2> Operation ................................................................ 19

5.1 General ............................................................................................. 20
5.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 21
5.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 21
5.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 21
5.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 22
5.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 24
5.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 24
5.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 24
5.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 28
6. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 29
RE_5_ _ PSV3St1 ABB Automation
PSV3St2
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Negative-phase-sequence overvoltage operation U2>

Positive-phase-sequence undervoltage operation U1<
Positive-phase-sequence overvoltage operation U1>
Definite-time (DT operation)
All three operations can be active individually or simultaneously
Phase-sequence voltage can be calculated by means of all three or only two
voltage inputs
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the phase-sequence voltage function blocks
PSV3St1 and PSV3St2 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The two
The positive-sequence undervoltage operation U1< is designed for the protection of

small generating plants
against an asynchronous reclosure with the rest of the network. When a

generating plant will be isolated from the network due to a relay operation in that
network, the circuit breaker in the connection point of the plant is opened before
the relay operation in the network (loss-of-grid protection).
against a loss of synchronism. Heavy faults in the rest of the network may
endanger the stability of the embedded plant which is therefore isolated from that
network before it enters asynchronism.
Additionally, the U1< operation enables a successful autoreclosure by separating an
embedded plant from a faulty line when the fault current fed by the plant is too low to
start the overcurrent relay but high enough to maintain the arc.
The negative-sequence overvoltage operation U2> is designed for the protection of

motors
against failure on one or more phases (single phasing)

against excessive unbalance between phases
and for the protection of machines
against reversal of phase sequence, both with forward and reverse rotation
direction.
2
ABB Automation PSV3St1 RE_5_ _
PSV3St2
A faulty voltage transformer or sensor, or an incorrect connection of voltage

measuring devices causes apparent voltage unbalance. The phase-sequence-voltage
function blocks can therefore be used even for monitoring the condition of measuring
circuits.
The positive-sequence overvoltage operation U1> can be used in various applications

as an alternative to ordinary three-phase overvoltage protection.
U1<
U2>
U1>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI3696WB)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOH
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI3696WDQG3696W
3
PSV3St2

UL1_U12 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring the phase-to-earth
voltage UL1 or phase-to-phase voltage
U12
U23
U31
ROT_DIR Digital signal (BOOL, active Input signal for selecting the rotation
high)
edge) and registers of PSV3St_

error
4
PSV3St2
2.1 Configuration
Voltages can be measured by means of conventional voltage transformers or voltage

dividers. A special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool is used for selecting
and configuring the measuring devices and signal types for analogue channels. Digital
variant).
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. In case of phase-to-earth voltages, the
voltages UL1, UL2, and UL3 are connected to the corresponding UL1_U12, UL2_U23
and UL3_U31 inputs of the function block. In the same way, if the phase-to-phase
voltages are used, they are connected to the corresponding inputs of the function
block. Already two phase-to-phase voltages allow a correct calculation of positive-
and negative-sequence components. So, if all three phase-to-phase voltages are
connected, the two with the lowest amplitude are used in calculation to assure the best
possible accuracy. Examples of the connections are shown in Figure 3 below.
)LJXUH &RQQHFWLRQSRVVLELOLWLHVZKHQRQO\WZRSKDVHWRSKDVHYROWDJHVDUHXVHG
It is also possible to use only two phase-to-earth voltages. In this case the residual
voltage U0 is assumed to be zero and the analogue channels are connected to the first
two voltage inputs and the third input is left unconnected. Examples of the
connections are shown in Figure 4 below. All possible input combinations are
presented in Table 1 below.
5
PSV3St2
)LJXUH &RQQHFWLRQSRVVLELOLWLHVZKHQRQO\WZRSKDVHWRHDUWKYROWDJHVDUHXVHG
Table 1 Possible input combinations.

UL1,UL2 and UL3 Each voltage is connected to the corresponding voltage
input
U12 and U23 U31 (if available) may be connected to the third voltage input
but can also be left unconnected.
U23 and U31 Third voltage input is left unconnected
UL1 and UL2 Third voltage input is left unconnected and U0 is assumed to
be zero
be zero
be zero
Digital inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of the function block and, in the
The ROT_DIR input can be used to protect machines that can be driven both in
forward and in reverse directions. If the status information about the machine rotation
direction is available, it can be connected to the ROT_DIR input of the function
block. In this case the control setting parameter Dir. Selection must be set to value
Input ROT_DIR, which means that the measured negative- and positive-sequence
voltages and the operation of the function block are automatically adapted to the
machine rotation direction.
When the relay is started, the function block checks that at least two voltages are
connected to the first two analogue inputs. If two voltages are not connected, the ERR
cannot operate.
6
PSV3St2
2.3 Measuring mode
Negative- and positive-sequence voltages can be calculated by means of two or three

voltage inputs. For the possible input combinations refer to Table 1 in section
Configuration. The sequence voltage calculation is based on fundamental frequency
components of voltages.
When three phase-to-earth voltages are used, the sequence voltages are calculated as
follows:
positive-sequence voltage
1
U1 = U + aU S + a 2 U T (1)
3 R
negative-sequence voltage
1
U2 = U R + a 2 U S + aU T (2)
3
where UR, US and UT are phase-to-earth voltages and a is a phase-shifting operator
(a = 1120 and a2 = 1240).
In case of two phase-to-phase voltages:
1
U1 = U RS a 2 U ST (3)
3
1
U2 = U aU ST (4)
3 RS
where URS and UST are phase-to-phase voltages and a is a phase-shifting operator
(a = 1120 and a2 = 1240).
In case of two phase-to-earth voltages, the value of U0 is assumed to be zero,

i.e. UR+US+UT = 0.
The function block includes three independent operations: one for negative-sequence
overvoltage, one for positive-sequence undervoltage and one for positive-sequence
overvoltage. The operation mode can be selected via the setting parameter Operation
mode that allows selecting just one operation to be active at a time, all three
operations to be active simultaneously, or any combination of two operations to be
active at a time. All the possible operation modes are presented in Table 2 below.
7
PSV3St2
Table 2 Operation modes of PSV3St_

Mode Description
Not in use Function block is not in use
U1< & U2> & U1> The positive-sequence undervoltage,
negative-sequence overvoltage and
positive-sequence overvoltage operations
U1< & U2> The positive-sequence undervoltage and
negative-sequence overvoltage operations
U2> & U1> The negative-sequence overvoltage and
U1< & U1> Positive-sequence undervoltage and
U2> Negative-sequence overvoltage operation
U1< Positive-sequence undervoltage operation
U1> Positive-sequence overvoltage operation
If the U2> operation is in use, the function block starts when the measured negative-
sequence voltage exceeds the set start voltage value. Should the overvoltage situation
last the preset operate time, the function block trips.
If the U1< operation is in use, the function block starts when the measured positive-
sequence voltage falls below the set start voltage value. Should the undervoltage
situation last the preset operate time, the function block trips.
If the U1> operation is in use, the function block starts when the measured positive-
The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in preset operate times.
If any of the operations starts or trips, an event indicating the situation is generated.
An indication is also seen on the MMI of the relay. All the operations have their own
start and trip events and also the indication on the MMI includes the information of
the operation which has started or tripped.
To avoid unwanted operations e.g. during an auto-reclose sequence, starting and

tripping of the positive-sequence undervoltage operation can be blocked. The internal
blocking function is activated if the positive-sequence voltage falls below the fixed
value 0.2 x Un. The setting parameter Intern. blocking is used for enabling the
internal undervoltage blocking. The internal blocking affects only the U1< operation.
The DT timer is allowed to run only if the input signal BLOCK is inactive. If the
BLOCK signal is activated, the timer will be frozen. Moreover, the TRIP signal
cannot be activated when the BLOCK signal is active.
8
PSV3St2
2.5 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
The START and TRIP digital outputs of the function block can be activated with
remains active until the output is reset even if the operation criteria have reset. When
the non-latching mode has been selected, the TRIP signal remains active until the
operation criteria have reset and the time determined by the control parameter Trip
pulse has elapsed.
9
PSV3St2
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F112V013 for PSV3St1 X X
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
10
PSV3St2
3. Application of U1< Operation

U1< operation can be applied for protecting a power station used for embedded
generation, when a fault in the network causes a potentially dangerous situation for
the power station. Short circuits and phase-to-earth faults in transmission or
distribution lines are such faults. A network fault may be dangerous for the power
station for different reasons. Firstly, the operation of protection may cause an
islanding condition (also called loss-of-grid condition), in which the part of network
(an island) fed by the power station is isolated from the rest of the network. There is
then a risk of an autoreclosure taking place when the voltages of different parts of the
network are not in synchronism, which is a straining incident for the power station.
Secondly, the generator may lose synchronism during the network fault. Both risks
can be avoided by a sufficiently fast trip of the utility circuit breaker of the power
station.
The lower the three-phase symmetrical voltage of the network is, the higher is the
probability that the generator will lose synchronism. The positive phase-sequence
voltage gives the three-phase symmetrical component of voltage even during
unsymmetrical faults. It is therefore a more appropriate criterion for detecting the risk
of loss of synchronism than, for instance, the lowest phase-to-phase voltage.
Analyzing the loss of synchronism of a generator is rather complicated and requires

models of the generator with its prime mover and of the controllers. The generator
may be able to operate synchronously even if the voltage drops by tens of per cent for
some hundreds of milliseconds. The setting of U1< operation is thus determined by
the need to protect the power station from the risks of the islanding condition, since
that requires a higher value for the parameter Start value U1<. The settings are
therefore discussed in the following only from the loss-of-grid protection point of
view.
The loss of synchronism of a generator means that the generator is not able to operate
as a generator with the network frequency but enters an unstable condition, in which it
operates by turns as a generator and a motor. Such a condition stresses the generator
thermally and mechanically. This kind of loss of synchronism should not be mixed
with the one between an island and the utility network. In the islanding situation, the
condition of the generator itself is normal, but the phase angle and the frequency of a
phase-to-phase voltage may be different from the corresponding voltage in the rest of
the network. The island may get a frequency of its own relatively fast when fed by a
small power station with a low inertia.
In transmission networks, single-phase autoreclosures are a widely spread praxis. In

case of a single phase-to-earth fault, the different parts of the network will therefore
stay in contact with each other by the other two phases and there is no risk of an
autoreclosure taking place unsynchronously. When the circuit breaker is opened by all
three phases, an island is created with the risk of an asynchronous reclosure. The
positive-sequence voltage will drop the most in faults leading to a three-phase
operation of circuit breakers. The magnitude of U1 is therefore an appropriate
criterion for detecting a loss-of-grid condition.
The U1< operation complements other loss-of-grid protection principles based on

frequency and overcurrent protection.
11
PSV3St2
3.1 Setting the U1< operation
The magnitude of U1 in the fault point, U1f , can be calculated for different types of
faults by the following formulas.
three-phase short circuit:
=
81 = 0
I
= +=
I
N 1 I
two-phase short circuit:
= +=
81 = 0 .5
I N 2
= += +=
I
I N 2 N 1
two-phase earth fault:
= 2 (= + 3= )
81 = 0.33
N N 0 I
(= + = 2 )( = + 3= ) + = 1 =
I
N 1 N N 0 I N N 2
one-phase earth fault:
= += + 3=
81 = 0.67
N 2 N 0 I
= += += + 3=
I
N 1 N 2 N 0 I
were Zk1 , Zk2 and Zk0 are respectively positive-, negative- and zero-sequence
impedances of the faulted circuit and Zf is the fault impedance.
The approximations above are based on the assumption that the sequence impedances
consist mainly of sequence reactances (Xk1 , Xk2 , Xk0) and that Xk1 = Xk2 = Xk0 and
Zf = 0.
When the function block is to trip in an islanding situation, it will have to be set
according to the highest magnitude of U1 during the fault when the fault is in such an
area of the network that an island will be formed. The highest U1-value at the
measuring point of the relay appears when the fault occurs near the farthest circuit
breaker within the potential island.
Which type of fault the setting should be based on depends on the operating principle
of protection at single phase-to-earth faults. If a single phase-to-earth fault results in
the one-phase operation of circuit breakers, the fault must involve at least two phases
before an island is formed. The highest U1-value indicating a fault leading to a loss-
of-grid condition appears at a two-phase short circuit.
If, however, a three-phase circuit breaker operation will take place at all faults,
including a single phase-to-earth fault, the setting has to be calculated based on a
single phase-to-earth fault to get the highest during-the-fault value of U1.
12
PSV3St2
The U1< operation is naturally able to detect the islanding condition only when it has
been caused by a fault on the line between the power station and the transmission
network. However, the island may also be formed by the switchings related to
locating an earth fault in a medium voltage network or, for example, by the trip of a
Buchholz relay of a transformer. In these cases, no high-speed autoreclosures are
performed, and there is thus time to trip the utility circuit breaker of the power station
by a frequency protection function or manually by remote control.
The task of a U1< operation is to detect such fault situations in the network that will
OHDGWR a loss-of-grid condition. It is not able to identify the condition after it has been
created. The operate time of the U1< operation therefore has to be made so short, that
it will not drop off after the line protection of the network has cleared the fault and an
island has come about. The fast operate time (for instance 50 ms) also brings another
advantage: the high-speed autoreclosure is more likely to be a successful one, since
the U1< operation will de-energize the faulty line even in case the fault current fed by
the power station is too low to start the overcurrent protection between the power
station and the fault, but high enough to maintain the arc.
The disadvantage of the fast operation of the U1< operation is that it will issue a trip
even if the fault is on one of the medium voltage lines fed by the power station. This
is an undue trip, since such a fault would not lead to an islanding condition. This
drawback is, however, smaller than the benefit of having a reliable loss-of-grid
protection. Sometimes it is possible to improve the selectivity: if the U1< operation is
located in the same substation as the overcurrent protection functions protecting the
medium voltage lines, it is possible to block the U1< operation by the start signals of
the overcurrent function blocks.
3.2 Setting examples for U1< operation
The purpose of the following examples is to illustrate the setting principle. The
calculations may be more complicated in practice, especially if there are other
generators having an impact on the voltages at the generator in question. Fault
calculation tools or network simulators are recommended to be used in complicated
studies.
If there are several generators in the network, the during-the-fault voltages at the
measuring point of the relay depend on the number of generators actually connected
to the network when the fault occurs. One option is to use a fixed setting based on the
case that leads to the highest U1-value during the fault. In this case, the function block
will always trip when it is required to, but there may also appear unnecessary
operations. When maximum selectivity is pursued, the distribution management
system can be utilized for updating the settings as the switching state of the generators
or of the network changes. The two setting groups of the function block can also be
utilized for the same purpose.
([DPSOH
In Figure 5, a radial line leads from the substation A to the substation B. Tripping this
line will create an island fed by the power station. Let us assume that one-phase
autoreclosures are applied in single-phase earth faults. Only two- or three-phase short-
circuits will then lead to a loss-of-grid situation. The setting value for the parameter
13
PSV3St2
Start value U1< will therefore be calculated based on a two-phase short-circuit at

the farthest circuit breaker of the potential island (this point being at the substation
A).
The equivalent circuit presented in Figure 6 will be applied in the calculation. The U1-
value of the faulty point at a two-phase short circuit is U1f = 0.5 p.u. The transient U1-
value of the generator source voltage can be approximated as 1.1 p.u. The U1-voltage
appearing at the generator terminals during the fault is calculated as follows:
; N* ; N*
8 1* = 8 1 I + (1.1 8 1 I ) = 0.5 + (1.1 0.5)
; N* + ; G

; N* + ; G
where XkG is the short-circuit reactance between the power station and the fault
reduced to the voltage level of the power station. Xd is the transient reactance of
the generator of the power station.
Let us assume the following data to be known:
xd = 0.15
Sn = 5 MVA
Un = 10 kV
XkG = 2
The setting is then calculated as follows:
8 Q2 (100009 ) 2
; =[

G

G= 015
. = 3
6Q 50000009$
; N* 2
8 1* = 0.5 + 0.6 = 0.5 + 0.6 = 0.74
; N* + ; G

2+3
The actual setting should be slightly (for instance 10 %) higher than the value
calculated above to allow some marginal for the fault resistance and other factors that
may make the U1-value higher:
Start value U1< 1.1 0.74 = 0.81
14
PSV3St2
)LJXUH $IDXOWRQDUDGLDOOLQHUHVXOWLQJLQDORVVRIJULGFRQGLWLRQ
)LJXUH 7KHHTXLYDOHQWFLUFXLWXVHGLQWKHFDOFXODWLRQ8ILVWKHSRVLWLYHVHTXHQFH
FRPSRQHQWRIWKHYROWDJHGXULQJDIDXOWDWWKHIDUWKHVWSRLQWRIDSRWHQWLDO
LVODQGQHDUWKHVXEVWDWLRQ$VHH)LJXUH;N*LVWKHVKRUWFLUFXLW
UHDFWDQFHEHWZHHQWKHPHDVXULQJSRLQWRIWKHUHOD\DQGWKHIDXOWUHGXFHG
WRWKHYROWDJHOHYHORIWKHODWWHU;GLVWKHWUDQVLHQWUHDFWDQFHRIWKH
JHQHUDWRURIWKHSRZHUVWDWLRQ7KHSRVLWLYHSKDVHVHTXHQFHFRPSRQHQWRI
WKHWUDQVLHQWVRXUFHYROWDJHRIWKHJHQHUDWRUFDQEHDSSUR[LPDWHGE\
SX
([DPSOH
The lines between the substations A, B and C in Figure 7 are protected by distance
relays without communication schemes. Fast protection is obtained for the whole line
by making the first zone overreaching (covering for instance 120 % of the length of
the line) for the first trip. The possible second trip after the high-speed autoreclosure
15
PSV3St2
will take place according to the normal 1. zone (covering for instance 80-90 % of the
length of the line). The healthy line will thus be tripped only once. In the case
presented in Figure 7, the fault occurs in the beginning of the line BC, and both the
line AB and the line BC will be tripped at first, which results in a loss-of-grid
situation.
Let us assume that in this example, all circuit breaker operations are three-phase ones
for all faults. Then also a single phase-to-earth fault will result in an islanding
condition and the setting has to be calculated according to a one-phase fault.
)LJXUH 2YHUUHDFKLQJGLVWDQFHUHOD\VPD\JLYHULVHWRDORVVRIJULGVLWXDWLRQDWD
OLQHIDXOW
)LJXUH 7KHHTXLYDOHQWFLUFXLWXVHGLQWKHFDOFXODWLRQ
16
PSV3St2
The equivalent circuit in Figure 8 is now used in the calculation. The U1-value of the
fault-point voltage at a single phase-to-earth fault is U1f = 0.67 p.u. The positive-
phase-sequence component of the transient source voltage of a generator can be
approximated by 1.1 p.u. The U1-voltage appearing at the measuring point of the relay
is calculated using the following approximation formula:
;\ ; N* ;\
8 1* = 8 1 I + (1 8 1 I ) + ((1.1 8 1 I ) (1 8 1 I ) )
; N% + ; \ ; N* + ; G

; N% + ; \
where
XkG is the short circuit reactance between the farthest point of the created island
(the substation B in this case) and the measuring point of the relay reduced to the
voltage level of the latter.
Xd is the transient reactance of the generator of the power station.
XkB is the short circuit reactance of the network as seen from the substation B
towards either the substation A or the substation C. The smaller of these values
will be used in the calculation. The XkB is reduced to the voltage level of the
measuring point of the relay.
Xy is the higher of the overreachings of the distance relays of the substations A and
C. The value used in the calculation is reduced to the voltage level of the
xd = 0.2
Sn = 6 MVA
Un = 10 kV
8 Q2 (100009 ) 2
; G = [ G = 0.2 = 3.33
6Q 60000009$
XkG = 1 (reduced to the 10 kV voltage level)
The short-circuit reactance of the network seen from the substation B towards the
substation A is 1 and towards the substation C 1.2 => XkB = 1 .
The value reduced to the 10 kV voltage level is XkB = 1 (10/150)2 = 0.0044 .
The overreaching first zone of the distance relay of the substation A covers a length of
0.3 of the line BC. The overreaching first zone of the distance relay of the
substation C covers a length of 0.25 of the line BA => Xy = 0.3 .
The value reduced to the 10 kV voltage level is Xy = 0.3 (10/150)2 = 0.0013 .
The setting can now be calculated as follows:
17
PSV3St2
; \ ; N* ; \
8 1* = 0.67 + (1 0.67) + ((1.1 0.67) (1 0.67) )=
; N%

+ ; \ ; N* + ; G ; N% + ; \
0.0013 1 0.0013
0.67 + 0.33 + (0.43 0.33 ) = 0.83
0.0044 + 0.0013 1 + 3.33 0.0044 + 0.0013
The actual setting should be slightly (for instance 10 %) higher that the value
Start value U1< 1.1 0.83 = 0.91
1RWH In the examples above, it has been assumed that the generator is connected to
the 10 kV network without a power transformer in between. If there is such a
transformer, the same setting principles are still followed. The short-circuit reactance
of the transformer has to be added to the transient reactance of the generator if the
voltage is measured at the network-side of the transformer, or to the network short
circuit reactance if the voltage is measured at the generator-side of the transformer.
18
PSV3St2
4. Application of U2> Operation

For various reasons, continuous or temporary voltage unbalance may appear in the
network. Differences in phase-to-earth capacitances of the phases cause a continuous
zero-sequence voltage unbalance, the magnitude of which is normally a few per cent
at the highest and requires no protective actions. The other type of voltage unbalance
is caused by broken conductors and unsymmetrical, loads and is characterised by the
appearance of a negative-sequence component of voltage. Voltage unbalance results
in current unbalance in rotating machines, which in turn heats the rotors of the
machines. The rotating machines do therefore not tolerate continuous negative-phase-
sequence voltage higher than 1-2% Un.
The negative-phase-sequence current I2 drawn by an asynchronous or a synchronous

machine is linearly proportional to the negative-phase-sequence voltage U2. When U2
is p% Un, I2 is typically about 5 p% In.
Selective protection against voltage and current unbalance is accomplished by using

the negative-phase-sequence current protection function blocks (NPS3Low/High) for
every machine separately. Alternatively, the protection can be implemented with the
U2> operation of PSV3St1/St2 monitoring the voltage unbalance of the busbar.
If the machines have unbalance protection of their own, the U2> operation can be
applied as backup protection or it can be used only to give an alarm. The latter can be
applied when it is desired not to trip loads tolerating voltage unbalance better than
rotating machines.
If there is a considerable degree of voltage unbalance in the network, rotating

machines should not be connected to the network at all. This logic can be
implemented by inhibiting the closure of the circuit breaker if the U2> operation has
started. This scheme also prevents connecting the machine to the network if the
phase-sequence of the network is not correct.
An appropriate value for the setting parameter Start value U2> is approximately 3%
Un. A suitable value for the setting parameter Operate time U2> depends on the
application. If the U2> operation is used as backup protection, the operate time should
be set in accordance with the operate time of NPS3Low/High used as main protection.
If the U2> operation is used as main protection, the operate time should be
approximately one second.
19
PSV3St2
5.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for PSV3St1 is 112 and that for PSV3St2 113.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
relay terminal, the event mask value 56 (8 + 16 + 32) is written to the
32...63.
20
PSV3St2
5.2 Setting values

direction
Operation mode S1 07 1) - 1 R Selection of the operation mode
Start value U2> S2 0.011.00 x Un 0.03 R Start voltage of the negative-phase-

sequence overvoltage operation
Start value U1< S3 0.011.20 x Un 0.90 R Start voltage of the positive-phase-

sequence undervoltage operation
Start value U1> S4 0.801.60 x Un 1.10 R Start voltage of the positive-phase-

Operate time U2> S5 0.0460.00 s 0.04 R Operate time of the negative-phase-

Operate time U1< S6 0.0460.00 s 0.04 R Operate time of the positive-phase-

Operate time U1> S7 0.0460.00 s 0.04 R Operate time of the positive-phase-

1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = U1< & U2> & U1>; 2 = U1< & U2>; 3 = U2> & U1>;
4 = U1< & U1>; 5 =U2>; 6 = U1<; 7 = U1>

direction
Operation mode S41 07 1) - 1 R/W Selection of the operation mode
Start value U2> S42 0.011.00 x Un 0.03 R/W Start voltage of the negative-phase-
Start value U1< S43 0.011.20 x Un 0.90 R/W Start voltage of the positive-phase-
Start value U1> S44 0.801.60 x Un 1.10 R/W Start voltage of the positive-phase-
Operate time U2> S45 0.0460.00 s 0.04 R/W Operate time of the negative-phase-
Operate time U1< S46 0.0460.00 s 0.04 R/W Operate time of the positive-phase-
Operate time U1> S47 0.0460.00 s 0.04 R/W Operate time of the positive-phase-
1)
4 = U1< & U1>; 5 =U2>; 6 = U1<; 7 = U1>
21
PSV3St2

direction
1)
4 = U1< & U1>; 5 =U2>; 6 = U1<; 7 = U1>
22
PSV3St2

direction
group

3)
Dir. selection V3 02 - 0 R/W Selecting the rotation direction
Rotation dir. V4 0 or 1 4) - 0 R/M Rotation direction
Start pulse V5 01000 ms 0 R/W Minimum pulse width of START

signal

the TRIP output
Intern. blocking V8 0 or 1 6) - 1 R/W Enabling the internal positive-

phase-sequence undervoltage
blocking

and registers

7)
transmission (E0E15, E17)
1)
2)
3)
Dir. Selection 0 = Forward; 1 = Reverse; 2 = Input ROT_DIR
4)
5)
6)
7)
23
PSV3St2
5.3.1 Input data

direction
Pos. seq. volt. I1 0.002.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Positive-phase-sequence voltage
Neg. seq. volt. I2 0.002.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Negative-phase-sequence voltage
Input ROT_DIR I3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for switching between the

forward and reverse rotation
directions
Input BLOCK I4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Input for blocking the function

groups 1 and 2

signals and registers of PSV3St_
1)
5.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Output ERR O3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the configuration error

output signal
1)
5.3.3 Recorded data
5.3.3.1 General
The data of three last operations (operation 1...3) are stored, and the values of the
1, Operation 2,...
24
PSV3St2
5.3.3.3 Duration
The duration of start situation is recorded separately for all the operations (U2>, U1<
and U1>) included in the function block, which makes it it possible to conclude which
operation has started or tripped. The durations are recorded as percentages of the set
operate time. If more than one durations differ from zero per cent, more than one
operations can be concluded to have started at the same time.
5.3.3.4 Voltages
If the function block trips, the voltage values are updated at the moment of tripping
i.e. on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. If the function block starts but does not trip,
the voltage values captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz)
after the beginning of the start situation will be recorded.
5.3.3.5 Status data
The recorded status of the input signal BLOCK will be Active if the BLOCK signal
was activated during the start situation. In all other situations, the recorded status of
the input signal BLOCK will be Not active.
5.3.3.6 Priority
1) Tripping
2) Starting
25
PSV3St2

direction
Duration U2> V203 0.0100.0 % 0.0 R/M Duration of start situation of the
U2> operation
Duration U1< V204 0.0100.0 % 0.0 R/M Duration of start situation of the
U1< operation
U1> operation
Pos. seq. volt. V206 0.002.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Positive-sequence voltage
Neg. seq. volt. V207 0.002.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Negative-sequence voltage
BLOCK V208 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the BLOCK input

2)
1)
2)

direction
U2> operation
U1< operation
U1> operation

2)
1)
2)
26
PSV3St2

direction
U2> operation
U1< operation
U1> operation

2)
1)
2)
27
PSV3St2
5.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 PSV3St_ START U2> Reset
E1 2 1 PSV3St_ START U2> Activated
E2 4 1 PSV3St_ START U1< Reset
E3 8 1 PSV3St_ START U1< Activated
E6 64 1 PSV3St_ TRIP U2> Reset
E7 128 1 PSV3St_ TRIP U2> Activated
E8 256 1 PSV3St_ TRIP U1< Reset
E9 512 1 PSV3St_ TRIP U1< Activated
E12 4096 0 PSV3St_ BLOCK Reset
E13 8192 0 PSV3St_ BLOCK Activated
E14 16384 0 Test mode of PSV3St_ Off
E15 32768 0 Test mode of PSV3St_ On
E16 0 0 - -
28
PSV3St2
6. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value or 0.01 x Un.
Start time U2> operation:

Injected negative-seq. voltage = 1.1 x start value:
U1< operation:
Injected positive-seq. voltage = 0.50 x start value:

1)
total time < 40 ms
U1> operation:
TRIP output)
Reset ratio U2> operation:

Typ. 0.96 (range 0.900.98)
U1< operation:
Typ. 1.04 (range 1.021.10)
U1> operation:
Typ. 0.99
Retardation time Total retardation time when the negative-/positive-

sequence voltage passes the start value: < 45 ms2)
Operate-time accuracy Depends on the frequency of the current measured:

f/fn = 0.951.05: 2% of set value or 20 ms2)

1)
2)

B -
29
1MRS752324-MUM PSV3St _
Phase-Sequence Voltage
Issued: 3/2000
Protection
Version: B/25.1.2002 Stage1 (PSV3St1)
Data subject to change without notice Stage2 (PSV3St2)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.3 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 7
2.5 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 9
2.6 Test mode ........................................................................................... 9
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 10
3. Application of U1< Operation ................................................................ 11
3.1 Setting the U1< operation.................................................................. 12
3.2 Setting examples for U1< operation .................................................. 13
4. Application of U2> Operation ................................................................ 19

5.1 General ............................................................................................. 20
5.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 21
5.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 21
5.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 21
5.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 22
5.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 24
5.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 24
5.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 24
5.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 28
6. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 29
PSV3St _ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Negative-phase-sequence overvoltage operation U2>

Positive-phase-sequence undervoltage operation U1<
Positive-phase-sequence overvoltage operation U1>
Definite-time (DT operation)
All three operations can be active individually or simultaneously
Phase-sequence voltage can be calculated by means of all three or only two
voltage inputs
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the phase-sequence voltage function blocks
PSV3St1 and PSV3St2 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The two
The positive-sequence undervoltage operation U1< is designed for the protection of

small generating plants
against an asynchronous reclosure with the rest of the network. When a

generating plant will be isolated from the network due to a relay operation in that
network, the circuit breaker in the connection point of the plant is opened before
the relay operation in the network (loss-of-grid protection).
against a loss of synchronism. Heavy faults in the rest of the network may
endanger the stability of the embedded plant which is therefore isolated from that
network before it enters asynchronism.
Additionally, the U1< operation enables a successful autoreclosure by separating an
embedded plant from a faulty line when the fault current fed by the plant is too low to
start the overcurrent relay but high enough to maintain the arc.
The negative-sequence overvoltage operation U2> is designed for the protection of

motors
against failure on one or more phases (single phasing)

against excessive unbalance between phases
and for the protection of machines
against reversal of phase sequence, both with forward and reverse rotation
direction.
2
Substation Automation PSV3St _
A faulty voltage transformer or sensor, or an incorrect connection of voltage

measuring devices causes apparent voltage unbalance. The phase-sequence-voltage
function blocks can therefore be used even for monitoring the condition of measuring
circuits.
The positive-sequence overvoltage operation U1> can be used in various applications

as an alternative to ordinary three-phase overvoltage protection.
U1<
U2>
U1>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI3696WB)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOH
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI3696WDQG3696W
3

U12
U23
U31
ROT_DIR Digital signal (BOOL, active Input signal for selecting the rotation
high)
edge) and registers of PSV3St_

error
4
2.1 Configuration
Voltages can be measured by means of conventional voltage transformers or voltage

dividers. A special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool is used for selecting
and configuring the measuring devices and signal types for analogue channels. Digital
variant).
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. In case of phase-to-earth voltages, the
voltages UL1, UL2, and UL3 are connected to the corresponding UL1_U12, UL2_U23
and UL3_U31 inputs of the function block. In the same way, if the phase-to-phase
voltages are used, they are connected to the corresponding inputs of the function
block. Already two phase-to-phase voltages allow a correct calculation of positive-
and negative-sequence components. So, if all three phase-to-phase voltages are
connected, the two with the lowest amplitude are used in calculation to assure the best
possible accuracy. Examples of the connections are shown in Figure 3 below.
)LJXUH &RQQHFWLRQSRVVLELOLWLHVZKHQRQO\WZRSKDVHWRSKDVHYROWDJHVDUHXVHG
It is also possible to use only two phase-to-earth voltages. In this case the residual
voltage U0 is assumed to be zero and the analogue channels are connected to the first
two voltage inputs and the third input is left unconnected. Examples of the
connections are shown in Figure 4 below. All possible input combinations are
presented in Table 1 below.
5
)LJXUH &RQQHFWLRQSRVVLELOLWLHVZKHQRQO\WZRSKDVHWRHDUWKYROWDJHVDUHXVHG
Table 1 Possible input combinations.

UL1,UL2 and UL3 Each voltage is connected to the corresponding voltage
input
U12 and U23 U31 (if available) may be connected to the third voltage input
but can also be left unconnected.
be zero
be zero
be zero
Digital inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of the function block and, in the
The ROT_DIR input can be used to protect machines that can be driven both in
forward and in reverse directions. If the status information about the machine rotation
direction is available, it can be connected to the ROT_DIR input of the function
block. In this case the control setting parameter Dir. Selection must be set to value
Input ROT_DIR, which means that the measured negative- and positive-sequence
voltages and the operation of the function block are automatically adapted to the
machine rotation direction.
When the relay is started, the function block checks that at least two voltages are
connected to the first two analogue inputs. If two voltages are not connected, the ERR
cannot operate.
6
2.3 Measuring mode
Negative- and positive-sequence voltages can be calculated by means of two or three

voltage inputs. For the possible input combinations refer to Table 1 in section
Configuration. The sequence voltage calculation is based on fundamental frequency
components of voltages.
When three phase-to-earth voltages are used, the sequence voltages are calculated as
follows:
1
U1 = U + aU S + a 2 U T (1)
3 R
1
U2 = U + a 2 U S + aU T (2)
3 R
where UR, US and UT are phase-to-earth voltages and a is a phase-shifting operator
(a = 1120 and a2 = 1240).
In case of two phase-to-phase voltages:
1
U1 = U RS a 2 U ST (3)
3
1
U2 = U aU ST (4)
3 RS
where URS and UST are phase-to-phase voltages and a is a phase-shifting operator
(a = 1120 and a2 = 1240).
In case of two phase-to-earth voltages, the value of U0 is assumed to be zero,

i.e. UR+US+UT = 0.
The function block includes three independent operations: one for negative-sequence
overvoltage, one for positive-sequence undervoltage and one for positive-sequence
overvoltage. The operation mode can be selected via the setting parameter Operation
mode that allows selecting just one operation to be active at a time, all three
operations to be active simultaneously, or any combination of two operations to be
active at a time. All the possible operation modes are presented in Table 2 below.
7
Table 2 Operation modes of PSV3St_

Mode Description
Not in use Function block is not in use
U1< & U2> & U1> The positive-sequence undervoltage,
negative-sequence overvoltage and
U1< & U2> The positive-sequence undervoltage and
negative-sequence overvoltage operations
U2> & U1> The negative-sequence overvoltage and
U1< & U1> Positive-sequence undervoltage and
U2> Negative-sequence overvoltage operation
U1< Positive-sequence undervoltage operation
U1> Positive-sequence overvoltage operation
If the U2> operation is in use, the function block starts when the measured negative-
If the U1< operation is in use, the function block starts when the measured positive-
sequence voltage falls below the set start voltage value. Should the undervoltage
situation last the preset operate time, the function block trips.
If the U1> operation is in use, the function block starts when the measured positive-
The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in preset operate times.
If any of the operations starts or trips, an event indicating the situation is generated.
An indication is also seen on the MMI of the relay. All the operations have their own
start and trip events and also the indication on the MMI includes the information of
the operation which has started or tripped.
To avoid unwanted operations e.g. during an auto-reclose sequence, starting and

tripping of the positive-sequence undervoltage operation can be blocked. The internal
blocking function is activated if the positive-sequence voltage falls below the fixed
internal undervoltage blocking. The internal blocking affects only the U1< operation.
The DT timer is allowed to run only if the input signal BLOCK is inactive. If the
BLOCK signal is activated, the timer will be frozen. Moreover, the TRIP signal
cannot be activated when the BLOCK signal is active.
8
2.5 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
The START and TRIP digital outputs of the function block can be activated with
remains active until the output is reset even if the operation criteria have reset. When
the non-latching mode has been selected, the TRIP signal remains active until the
operation criteria have reset and the time determined by the control parameter Trip
pulse has elapsed.
9
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
10
3. Application of U1< Operation

U1< operation can be applied for protecting a power station used for embedded
generation, when a fault in the network causes a potentially dangerous situation for
the power station. Short circuits and phase-to-earth faults in transmission or
distribution lines are such faults. A network fault may be dangerous for the power
station for different reasons. Firstly, the operation of protection may cause an
islanding condition (also called loss-of-grid condition), in which the part of network
(an island) fed by the power station is isolated from the rest of the network. There is
then a risk of an autoreclosure taking place when the voltages of different parts of the
network are not in synchronism, which is a straining incident for the power station.
Secondly, the generator may lose synchronism during the network fault. Both risks
can be avoided by a sufficiently fast trip of the utility circuit breaker of the power
station.
The lower the three-phase symmetrical voltage of the network is, the higher is the
probability that the generator will lose synchronism. The positive phase-sequence
voltage gives the three-phase symmetrical component of voltage even during
unsymmetrical faults. It is therefore a more appropriate criterion for detecting the risk
of loss of synchronism than, for instance, the lowest phase-to-phase voltage.
Analyzing the loss of synchronism of a generator is rather complicated and requires

models of the generator with its prime mover and of the controllers. The generator
may be able to operate synchronously even if the voltage drops by tens of per cent for
some hundreds of milliseconds. The setting of U1< operation is thus determined by
the need to protect the power station from the risks of the islanding condition, since
that requires a higher value for the parameter Start value U1<. The settings are
therefore discussed in the following only from the loss-of-grid protection point of
view.
The loss of synchronism of a generator means that the generator is not able to operate
as a generator with the network frequency but enters an unstable condition, in which it
operates by turns as a generator and a motor. Such a condition stresses the generator
thermally and mechanically. This kind of loss of synchronism should not be mixed
with the one between an island and the utility network. In the islanding situation, the
condition of the generator itself is normal, but the phase angle and the frequency of a
phase-to-phase voltage may be different from the corresponding voltage in the rest of
the network. The island may get a frequency of its own relatively fast when fed by a
small power station with a low inertia.
In transmission networks, single-phase autoreclosures are a widely spread praxis. In

case of a single phase-to-earth fault, the different parts of the network will therefore
stay in contact with each other by the other two phases and there is no risk of an
autoreclosure taking place unsynchronously. When the circuit breaker is opened by all
three phases, an island is created with the risk of an asynchronous reclosure. The
positive-sequence voltage will drop the most in faults leading to a three-phase
operation of circuit breakers. The magnitude of U1 is therefore an appropriate
criterion for detecting a loss-of-grid condition.
The U1< operation complements other loss-of-grid protection principles based on

frequency and overcurrent protection.
11
3.1 Setting the U1< operation
The magnitude of U1 in the fault point, U1f , can be calculated for different types of
faults by the following formulas.
three-phase short circuit:
=
81 = 0
I
= +=
I
N 1 I
two-phase short circuit:
= +=
81 = 0 .5
I N 2
= += +=
I
I N 2 N 1
two-phase earth fault:
= 2 (= + 3= )
81 = 0.33
N N 0 I
(= + = 2 )( = + 3= ) + = 1 =
I
N 1 N N 0 I N N 2
one-phase earth fault:
= += + 3=
81 = 0.67
N 2 N 0 I
= 1 += += + 3=
I
N N 2 N 0 I
were Zk1 , Zk2 and Zk0 are respectively positive-, negative- and zero-sequence
impedances of the faulted circuit and Zf is the fault impedance.
The approximations above are based on the assumption that the sequence impedances
consist mainly of sequence reactances (Xk1 , Xk2 , Xk0) and that Xk1 = Xk2 = Xk0 and
Zf = 0.
When the function block is to trip in an islanding situation, it will have to be set
according to the highest magnitude of U1 during the fault when the fault is in such an
area of the network that an island will be formed. The highest U1-value at the
measuring point of the relay appears when the fault occurs near the farthest circuit
breaker within the potential island.
Which type of fault the setting should be based on depends on the operating principle
of protection at single phase-to-earth faults. If a single phase-to-earth fault results in
the one-phase operation of circuit breakers, the fault must involve at least two phases
before an island is formed. The highest U1-value indicating a fault leading to a loss-
of-grid condition appears at a two-phase short circuit.
If, however, a three-phase circuit breaker operation will take place at all faults,
including a single phase-to-earth fault, the setting has to be calculated based on a
single phase-to-earth fault to get the highest during-the-fault value of U1.
12
The U1< operation is naturally able to detect the islanding condition only when it has
been caused by a fault on the line between the power station and the transmission
network. However, the island may also be formed by the switchings related to
locating an earth fault in a medium voltage network or, for example, by the trip of a
Buchholz relay of a transformer. In these cases, no high-speed autoreclosures are
performed, and there is thus time to trip the utility circuit breaker of the power station
by a frequency protection function or manually by remote control.
The task of a U1< operation is to detect such fault situations in the network that will
OHDGWR a loss-of-grid condition. It is not able to identify the condition after it has been
created. The operate time of the U1< operation therefore has to be made so short, that
it will not drop off after the line protection of the network has cleared the fault and an
island has come about. The fast operate time (for instance 50 ms) also brings another
advantage: the high-speed autoreclosure is more likely to be a successful one, since
the U1< operation will de-energize the faulty line even in case the fault current fed by
the power station is too low to start the overcurrent protection between the power
station and the fault, but high enough to maintain the arc.
The disadvantage of the fast operation of the U1< operation is that it will issue a trip
even if the fault is on one of the medium voltage lines fed by the power station. This
is an undue trip, since such a fault would not lead to an islanding condition. This
drawback is, however, smaller than the benefit of having a reliable loss-of-grid
protection. Sometimes it is possible to improve the selectivity: if the U1< operation is
located in the same substation as the overcurrent protection functions protecting the
medium voltage lines, it is possible to block the U1< operation by the start signals of
the overcurrent function blocks.
3.2 Setting examples for U1< operation
The purpose of the following examples is to illustrate the setting principle. The
calculations may be more complicated in practice, especially if there are other
generators having an impact on the voltages at the generator in question. Fault
calculation tools or network simulators are recommended to be used in complicated
studies.
If there are several generators in the network, the during-the-fault voltages at the
measuring point of the relay depend on the number of generators actually connected
to the network when the fault occurs. One option is to use a fixed setting based on the
case that leads to the highest U1-value during the fault. In this case, the function block
will always trip when it is required to, but there may also appear unnecessary
operations. When maximum selectivity is pursued, the distribution management
system can be utilized for updating the settings as the switching state of the generators
or of the network changes. The two setting groups of the function block can also be
utilized for the same purpose.
([DPSOH
In Figure 5, a radial line leads from the substation A to the substation B. Tripping this
line will create an island fed by the power station. Let us assume that one-phase
autoreclosures are applied in single-phase earth faults. Only two- or three-phase short-
circuits will then lead to a loss-of-grid situation. The setting value for the parameter
13
Start value U1< will therefore be calculated based on a two-phase short-circuit at

the farthest circuit breaker of the potential island (this point being at the substation
A).
The equivalent circuit presented in Figure 6 will be applied in the calculation. The U1-
value of the faulty point at a two-phase short circuit is U1f = 0.5 p.u. The transient U1-
value of the generator source voltage can be approximated as 1.1 p.u. The U1-voltage
appearing at the generator terminals during the fault is calculated as follows:
; N* ; N*
8 1* = 8 1 I + (1.1 8 1 I ) = 0.5 + (1.1 0.5)
; N* + ; G

; N* + ; G
where XkG is the short-circuit reactance between the power station and the fault
reduced to the voltage level of the power station. Xd is the transient reactance of
the generator of the power station.
xd = 0.15
Sn = 5 MVA
Un = 10 kV
XkG = 2
The setting is then calculated as follows:
8 Q2 (100009 ) 2
; =[

G

G= 015
. = 3
6Q 50000009$
; N* 2
8 1* = 0.5 + 0.6 = 0.5 + 0.6 = 0.74
; N* + ; G

2+3
The actual setting should be slightly (for instance 10 %) higher than the value
Start value U1< 1.1 0.74 = 0.81
14
)LJXUH $IDXOWRQDUDGLDOOLQHUHVXOWLQJLQDORVVRIJULGFRQGLWLRQ
)LJXUH 7KHHTXLYDOHQWFLUFXLWXVHGLQWKHFDOFXODWLRQ8ILVWKHSRVLWLYHVHTXHQFH
FRPSRQHQWRIWKHYROWDJHGXULQJDIDXOWDWWKHIDUWKHVWSRLQWRIDSRWHQWLDO
LVODQGQHDUWKHVXEVWDWLRQ$VHH)LJXUH;N*LVWKHVKRUWFLUFXLW
UHDFWDQFHEHWZHHQWKHPHDVXULQJSRLQWRIWKHUHOD\DQGWKHIDXOWUHGXFHG
WRWKHYROWDJHOHYHORIWKHODWWHU;GLVWKHWUDQVLHQWUHDFWDQFHRIWKH
JHQHUDWRURIWKHSRZHUVWDWLRQ7KHSRVLWLYHSKDVHVHTXHQFHFRPSRQHQWRI
WKHWUDQVLHQWVRXUFHYROWDJHRIWKHJHQHUDWRUFDQEHDSSUR[LPDWHGE\
SX
([DPSOH
The lines between the substations A, B and C in Figure 7 are protected by distance
relays without communication schemes. Fast protection is obtained for the whole line
by making the first zone overreaching (covering for instance 120 % of the length of
the line) for the first trip. The possible second trip after the high-speed autoreclosure
will take place according to the normal 1. zone (covering for instance 80-90 % of the
15
length of the line). The healthy line will thus be tripped only once. In the case
presented in Figure 7, the fault occurs in the beginning of the line BC, and both the
line AB and the line BC will be tripped at first, which results in a loss-of-grid
situation.
Let us assume that in this example, all circuit breaker operations are three-phase ones
for all faults. Then also a single phase-to-earth fault will result in an islanding
condition and the setting has to be calculated according to a one-phase fault.
)LJXUH 2YHUUHDFKLQJGLVWDQFHUHOD\VPD\JLYHULVHWRDORVVRIJULGVLWXDWLRQDWD
OLQHIDXOW
)LJXUH 7KHHTXLYDOHQWFLUFXLWXVHGLQWKHFDOFXODWLRQ
16
The equivalent circuit in Figure 8 is now used in the calculation. The U1-value of the
fault-point voltage at a single phase-to-earth fault is U1f = 0.67 p.u. The positive-
phase-sequence component of the transient source voltage of a generator can be
approximated by 1.1 p.u. The U1-voltage appearing at the measuring point of the relay
is calculated using the following approximation formula:
;\ ; N* ;\
8 1* = 8 1 I + (1 8 1 I ) + ((1.1 8 1 I ) (1 8 1 I ) )
; N% + ; \ ; N* + ; G

; N% + ; \
where
XkG is the short circuit reactance between the farthest point of the created island
(the substation B in this case) and the measuring point of the relay reduced to the
voltage level of the latter.
Xd is the transient reactance of the generator of the power station.
XkB is the short circuit reactance of the network as seen from the substation B
towards either the substation A or the substation C. The smaller of these values
will be used in the calculation. The XkB is reduced to the voltage level of the
Xy is the higher of the overreachings of the distance relays of the substations A and
C. The value used in the calculation is reduced to the voltage level of the
xd = 0.2
Sn = 6 MVA
Un = 10 kV
8 Q2 (100009 ) 2
; =[
G = 0.2

G = 3.33
6Q 60000009$
XkG = 1 (reduced to the 10 kV voltage level)
The short-circuit reactance of the network seen from the substation B towards the
substation A is 1 and towards the substation C 1.2 => XkB = 1 .
The value reduced to the 10 kV voltage level is XkB = 1 (10/150)2 = 0.0044 .
The overreaching first zone of the distance relay of the substation A covers a length of
0.3 of the line BC. The overreaching first zone of the distance relay of the
substation C covers a length of 0.25 of the line BA => Xy = 0.3 .
The value reduced to the 10 kV voltage level is Xy = 0.3 (10/150)2 = 0.0013 .
The setting can now be calculated as follows:
17
; \ ; N* ; \
8 1* = 0.67 + (1 0.67) + ((1.1 0.67) (1 0.67) )=
; N%

+ ; \ ; N* + ; G ; N% + ; \
0.0013 1 0.0013
0.67 + 0.33 + (0.43 0.33 ) = 0.83
0.0044 + 0.0013 1 + 3.33 0.0044 + 0.0013
The actual setting should be slightly (for instance 10 %) higher that the value
Start value U1< 1.1 0.83 = 0.91
1RWH In the examples above, it has been assumed that the generator is connected to
the 10 kV network without a power transformer in between. If there is such a
transformer, the same setting principles are still followed. The short-circuit reactance
of the transformer has to be added to the transient reactance of the generator if the
voltage is measured at the network-side of the transformer, or to the network short
circuit reactance if the voltage is measured at the generator-side of the transformer.
18
4. Application of U2> Operation

For various reasons, continuous or temporary voltage unbalance may appear in the
network. Differences in phase-to-earth capacitances of the phases cause a continuous
zero-sequence voltage unbalance, the magnitude of which is normally a few per cent
at the highest and requires no protective actions. The other type of voltage unbalance
is caused by broken conductors and unsymmetrical, loads and is characterised by the
appearance of a negative-sequence component of voltage. Voltage unbalance results
in current unbalance in rotating machines, which in turn heats the rotors of the
machines. The rotating machines do therefore not tolerate continuous negative-phase-
sequence voltage higher than 1-2% Un.
The negative-phase-sequence current I2 drawn by an asynchronous or a synchronous

machine is linearly proportional to the negative-phase-sequence voltage U2. When U2
is p% Un, I2 is typically about 5 p% In.
Selective protection against voltage and current unbalance is accomplished by using

the negative-phase-sequence current protection function blocks (NPS3Low/High) for
every machine separately. Alternatively, the protection can be implemented with the
U2> operation of PSV3St1/St2 monitoring the voltage unbalance of the busbar.
If the machines have unbalance protection of their own, the U2> operation can be
applied as backup protection or it can be used only to give an alarm. The latter can be
applied when it is desired not to trip loads tolerating voltage unbalance better than
rotating machines.
If there is a considerable degree of voltage unbalance in the network, rotating

machines should not be connected to the network at all. This logic can be
implemented by inhibiting the closure of the circuit breaker if the U2> operation has
started. This scheme also prevents connecting the machine to the network if the
phase-sequence of the network is not correct.
An appropriate value for the setting parameter Start value U2> is approximately 3%
Un. A suitable value for the setting parameter Operate time U2> depends on the
application. If the U2> operation is used as backup protection, the operate time should
be set in accordance with the operate time of NPS3Low/High used as main protection.
If the U2> operation is used as main protection, the operate time should be
approximately one second.
19
5.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for PSV3St1 is 112 and that for PSV3St2 113.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
relay terminal, the event mask value 56 (8 + 16 + 32) is written to the
32...63.
20
5.2 Setting values

direction
Operation mode S1 07 1) - 1 R Selection of the operation mode
Start value U2> S2 0.011.00 x Un 0.03 R Start voltage of the negative-phase-

Start value U1< S3 0.011.20 x Un 0.90 R Start voltage of the positive-phase-

Start value U1> S4 0.801.60 x Un 1.10 R Start voltage of the positive-phase-

Operate time U2> S5 0.0460.00 s 0.04 R Operate time of the negative-phase-

Operate time U1< S6 0.0460.00 s 0.04 R Operate time of the positive-phase-

Operate time U1> S7 0.0460.00 s 0.04 R Operate time of the positive-phase-

1)
4 = U1< & U1>; 5 =U2>; 6 = U1<; 7 = U1>

direction
1)
4 = U1< & U1>; 5 =U2>; 6 = U1<; 7 = U1>
21

direction
1)
4 = U1< & U1>; 5 =U2>; 6 = U1<; 7 = U1>
22

direction
group

3)
Dir. selection V3 02 - 0 R/W Selecting the rotation direction
Rotation dir. V4 0 or 1 4) - 0 R/M Rotation direction

signal

the TRIP output
Intern. blocking V8 0 or 1 6) - 1 R/W Enabling the internal positive-

phase-sequence undervoltage
blocking

and registers

7)
1)
2)
3)
Dir. Selection 0 = Forward; 1 = Reverse; 2 = Input ROT_DIR
4)
5)
6)
7)
23
5.3.1 Input data

direction
Pos. seq. volt. I1 0.002.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Positive-phase-sequence voltage
Neg. seq. volt. I2 0.002.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Negative-phase-sequence voltage
Input ROT_DIR I3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for switching between the

forward and reverse rotation
directions
Input BLOCK I4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Input for blocking the function

groups 1 and 2

signals and registers of PSV3St_
1)
5.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Output ERR O3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the configuration error

output signal
1)
5.3.3 Recorded data
5.3.3.1 General
The data of three last operations (operation 1...3) are stored, and the values of the
1, Operation 2,...
24
5.3.3.3 Duration
The duration of start situation is recorded separately for all the operations (U2>, U1<
and U1>) included in the function block, which makes it it possible to conclude which
operation has started or tripped. The durations are recorded as percentages of the set
operate time. If more than one durations differ from zero per cent, more than one
operations can be concluded to have started at the same time.
5.3.3.4 Voltages
If the function block trips, the voltage values are updated at the moment of tripping
the voltage values captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz)
after the beginning of the start situation will be recorded.
5.3.3.5 Status data
The recorded status of the input signal BLOCK will be Active if the BLOCK signal
was activated during the start situation. In all other situations, the recorded status of
the input signal BLOCK will be Not active.
5.3.3.6 Priority
1) Tripping
2) Starting
25

direction
U2> operation
U1< operation
U1> operation

2)
1)
2)

direction
U2> operation
U1< operation
U1> operation

1)
BLOCK V308 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of the BLOCK input

1)
2)
26

direction
U2> operation
U1< operation
U1> operation

2)
1)
2)
27
5.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E2 4 1 PSV3St_ START U1< Reset
E3 8 1 PSV3St_ START U1< Activated
E8 256 1 PSV3St_ TRIP U1< Reset
E9 512 1 PSV3St_ TRIP U1< Activated
E12 4096 0 PSV3St_ BLOCK Reset
E13 8192 0 PSV3St_ BLOCK Activated
E14 16384 0 Test mode of PSV3St_ Off
E15 32768 0 Test mode of PSV3St_ On
E16 0 0 - -
28
6. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value or 0.01 x Un.
Start time U2> operation:

Injected negative-seq. voltage = 1.1 x start value:

1)
total time < 50 ms
U1< operation:
U1> operation:
TRIP output)
Reset ratio U2> operation:

Typ. 0.96 (range 0.900.98)
U1< operation:
Typ. 1.04 (range 1.021.10)
U1> operation:
Typ. 0.99
Retardation time Total retardation time when the negative-/positive-

sequence voltage passes the start value: < 45 ms2)
Operate-time accuracy Depends on the frequency of the current measured:

f/fn = 0.951.05: 2% of set value or 20 ms2)

1)
2)

B -
C -
29
1MRS 752325-MUM REF1A
Issued: 10/1998
High-Impedance Based
Restricted Earth-Fault Protection
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 The measuring configuration ............................................................... 5
2.5 Setting groups ................................................................................... 11
2.6 Test mode ......................................................................................... 11
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 12
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 13

3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 14
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 14
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 14
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 14
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 16
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 16
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 16
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 18
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 19
REF1A Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Restricted earth-fault protection of generators and power transformers based on the

high-impedance principle
Adjustable operating value
Short operate times at faults occuring in the zone to be protected (internal faults)
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of REF1A, the high-impedance based restricted
earth-fault protection for generators and transformers, used in products based on the
RED 500 Platform.
dIo>
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI5()$WKHVWDELOL]HGUHVWULFWHGHDUWKIDXOW
SURWHFWLRQ
2
Substation Automation REF1A

Ido Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring differential
neutral current Ido
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Blocking signal of REF1A
signal and registers of REF1A

configuration error
3
2.1 Configuration
Neutral differential current can be measured via the measuring configuration

presented in Figure 3. The measuring devices and signal types for the analogue
P2 P1
IL1
S2 S1
P1 P2
IL2
S1 S2
IL3
Variable resistor
Stabilizing
resistor
87N High-impedance relay
)LJXUH 5HVWULFWHGHDUWKIDXOWSURWHFWLRQIRUJHQHUDWRUVDQGWUDQVIRUPHUVEDVHG
RQKLJKLPSHGDQFHSULQFLSOH
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The differential neutral current Ido
composed by the external measuring configuration is connected to the corresponding
Ido input of the function block. Digital inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of
the function block and in the same way, the outputs of the function block are
4
2.2 The measuring configuration
The external measuring configuration is composed of four current transformers

measuring the currents and a stabilizing resistor (Figure 3). A variable resistor is
needed if high over voltages are expected. The value of the stabilizing resistor can be
calculated using the formula
Us
Rs = , (1)
Ir
where

Ir the setting value of the relay
I kmax
Us = ( R in + R m ) (2)
n
where

n the turns ratio of the CT
Rin the secondary internal resistance of the CT
Rm the resistance of the longest loop of secondary circuit
transformers.
The operating characteristic of the function block is determined by the parameter

Basic setting and by the stabilizing resistor. When the differential current exceeds
the basic setting value, the function block trips unless it is blocked by the external
5
The value of the stabilizing resistor, which has to be calculated before installation and
commissioning, mainly determines the stability of the relay. The Basic setting
parameter allows for fine tuning the sensitivity of the protection.

ratio.
function block is given by equation (2) in section The measuring configuration. The
required knee-point voltage Uk of the current transformer is calculated as follows:
Uk = 2 Us (3)
Iprim = n (Ir + Iu + m Ie) (4)
where

The value Io given in many catalogues is the excitation current at knee-point voltage.
Writing Ie = 0.5 Io gives a realistic value for Iprim in equation (4).
The choosing of current transformers can be divided into following procedures
1. Firstly, the nominal current In of the protected winding has to be known. It also
affects how high Ikmax is. Normally the Ikmax values are the following:
- for small transformers Ikmax = 16 In
- for big transformers Ikmax = 12 In
- for generators Ikmax = 6 In
2. The nominal primary current I1n of the CT must be higher than the nominal
current of the protected winding. The choice of the CT also specifies Rin.
6
3. The required Uk is calculated using the formula (3). If the Uk of the CT is not
high enough, another CT has to be chosen. The value of the Uk is given by the
manufacturer or in the case of class X current transformer it can be estimated using
the equation (5) below.
4. The sensitivity Iprim is calculated with the formula (4). If the achieved sensitivity
is sufficient, the present CT is chosen. If better sensitivity is needed, a CT with a
bigger core is chosen
Uk = 0.8 Fa I2n ( Rin + Rm ) (5)
where

Rin the secondary internal resistance of the CT
Rm the resistance of the longest loop of secondary circuit
Examples of the required knee-point voltages and achieved sensitivity are given
below (Examples 1 and 2). For transformer the value 12 In is given to Ikmax, In being
the nominal current of the protected winding of the power transformer. For generator
the value 6 In is used as Ikmax. When calculating Iprim, the value Ir = m Ie has been
given for the setting of the relay and the value Iu = 0 A for the current of the varistor.
Ir depends on the application. However, it is recommended that Ir m Ie. The
number of CTs connected in parallel is here m = 4.
1RWHThe formulae are based on worst-case analysis, i.e. choosing the CTs
1 If Uk is higher than required by the criterion, the stability is ensured

2 If Uk is higher than 50 % of the value recommended by the criterion, the stability
of the scheme is highly case-dependent
3 If Uk is lower than 50 % of the value recommended by the criterion, stability is not
achieved. Another CT has to be found
1RWHThe analysis of stability is based on the assumption that the ampere turns are
the same for individual CTs. If that is not the case, the selectivity may be endangered.
It is thus recommended that all the CTs used in the scheme are of the same type and
preferably from the the same batch.
7
Example 1
)LJXUH 5HVWULFWHGHDUWKIDXOWSURWHFWLRQRIDWUDQVIRUPHU
The data for the protected power transformer is as follows:
Sn = 20 MVA
U2n= 11 kV
The longest distance of the secondary circuit is 50 m (the whole loop being thus 100
m) and the area of the cross-section is 10 mm2.
In = Sn / (3 Un) = 1050 A
Ikmax = 12 In = 12600 A
Let us choose the CT-type IHBF 12 and the core size of 35 %. Let us choose 1200 A
for the primary current and 5 A for the secondary current.
Rin = 0.26 (value given by the manufacturer)

Uk = 40 V (value given by the manufacturer)
Io = 0.055 A (value given by the manufacturer)
Rm = 1.81 /km 2 0.05 km = 0.181 0.18
12600 (0.26 + 018

. )
Us = V 23 V
240
8
According to the criterion, Uk should be 2 Us = 2 23 V = 46 V. It depends on the

case whether the stability of the scheme is achieved by Uk = 40 V. Otherwise it is
possible to choose a bigger core of 65 % for which the following data is given:

Rm = 0.18
12600 (0.47 + 0.18)

Us = V 34 V
240
Uk = 2 Us = 68 V (required value)
As mentioned earlier, writing Ie = 0.5 Io gives a realistic value for Iprim in equation
(4). By writing Iu = 0 and Ir = m 0.5 Io the following value for the sensitivity can
be calculated:
Iprim = n m Io = 240 4 0.055 A 53 A ( = 5 % x In )

Ir = 4 0.5 0.055 A = 0.11 A
The resistance of the stabilizing resistor can now be calculated
Rs = Us / Ir = 34 V / 0.11 A 309
However, the sensitivity can be calculated more accurately when the actual values of
Iu and Ir are known.
In the example above it has been assumed that the stabilizing resistor of the relay is
not fixed but can be chosen freely.
Example 2
)LJXUH 5HVWULFWHGHDUWKIDXOWSURWHFWLRQRIDJHQHUDWRU
9
Sn = 8 MVA
Un = 6 kV
In = 770 A
Ikmax = 6 In = 6 770 A = 4620 A
Let us choose the CT-type KOFD 12 A 21 with the following data:
I1n = 1000 A (value given by the manufacturer)

I2n = 1 A (value given by the manufacturer)
Io = 0.012 A (value given by the manufacturer)
the area of the cross-section is 2.5 mm2:
Rm = 7.28 /km 2 0.1 km 1.46

Uk = 2 ( 4620 A / 1000 ) ( 15.3 + 1.46 ) 155 V

The value 155 V is lower than the value 323 V, which means that Uk is high enough.
As mentioned earlier, writing Ie = 0.5 Io gives a realistic value for Iprim in equation
(4). By writing Iu = 0 and Ir = m 0.5 Io the following value for the sensitivity can
be calculated:
Iprim = n m Io = 1000 4 0.012 A = 48 A ( 6 % x In )

Ir = 4 0.5 0.012 A = 0.024 A
The resistance of the stabilizing resistor can now be calculated
Rs = Us / Ir = 78 V / (2 Io) = 78 V / (2 0.012 A) = 3250

Let us choose for the relay setting Ir = 4 x 12 mA = 48 mA and assume Iu = 30 mA
Iprim = n ( Ir + Iu + m Ie ) = 1000 (48 + 30 + 24) mA = 102 A

(= 13 % In)
Rs = Us / Ir = 78 V / 48 mA 1630
In this example the relay has been supposed to be of such a type that the stabilizing
resistor can be chosen freely.
10
2.5 Setting groups
ways:

3 By means of the input signal GROUP, when allowed via the parameter Group
1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
11
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
12
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for REF1A is 102.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
13
3.2 Setting values

direction
Basic setting S1 0.5...50 % 0.5 R Lowest ratio of differential and
nominal current to cause trip

direction
Basic setting S41 0.5...50 % 0.5 R/W Lowest ratio of differential and

direction
Basic setting S71 0.5...50 % 0.5 R/W Lowest ratio of differential and
14

direction
REF1A V1 0 or 11) - 1 R/W Protection block in use or not in
use

group
Active group V3 0...3 3) - 0 R/M Active setting group
Trip signal V4 0 or 14) - 0 R/W Selection of latching feature for

TRIP output

and CBFP
CBFP

and registers
Test TRIP V32 0 or 15) - - R/W Testing of TRIP

5)




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
15
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Current Ido I1 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Neutral differential current
Input BLOCK I2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of block signal

1)
Input GROUP I3 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of signal for switching
between the groups 1 and 2
Input RESET I4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of signal for resetting

the output signals of REF1A
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Output ERR O2 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of configuration error
signal
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
1, Operation 2,...
the tripping.
16
3.3.3.3 Current
If the function block trips, the neutral differential current value is updated during 50
ms after the tripping, and the highest value during that time is recorded. The value of
the differential neutral current Ido is recorded as a multiple of the rated current In.
3.3.3.4 Status data

direction
Current Ido V203 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Neutral differential current

1)

direction

1)
1)

direction

1)
17
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 TRIP signal of REF1A Reset
E1 2 1 TRIP signal of REF1A Activated
E2 4 1 CBFP signal Reset
E3 8 1 CBFP signal Activated
E4 16 0 BLOCK signal of REF1A Reset
E5 32 0 BLOCK signal of REF1A Activated
E6 64 0 Test mode of REF1A Off
E7 128 0 Test mode of REF1A On
18
4. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value or 0.004 x In

(1
total time < 30 ms

Reset ratio 0.80...0.98
Retardation time This function block cannot retard. The function block trips if the current
even once exceeds the operate value.

1)

A -
B -
19
1MRS100044 (ROV1Low) RE_5_ _
1MRS100045 (ROV1High) Residual Overvoltage Protection
1MRS100046 (ROV1Inst)
Issued: 10/1997 Low-Set Stage (ROV1Low)
Version: E
High-Set Stage (ROV1High)
Instantaneous Stage (ROV1Inst)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.4 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 5
2.5 Test mode ........................................................................................... 5
2.7 Resetting............................................................................................. 6

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 7
3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 8
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 8
3.2.2 Setting group 1........................................................................... 8
3.2.3 Setting group 2........................................................................... 9
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 11
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 11
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 11
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 14
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 15

RE_5_ _ ROV1Low, ROV1High, ROV1Inst ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Residual overvoltage protection

Residual voltage measurement with a delta-connected voltage transformer
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the residual overvoltage protection function
blocks ROV1Low, ROV1High and ROV1Inst used in products based on the RED 500
Platform. The setting values of the low-set stage (ROV1Low) differ from those of the
high-set and instantaneous stages. Otherwise the three stages are identical in
operation.
The residual overvoltage protection function blocks are designed for sensitive earth-
fault protection. Suppression of harmonics is possible.
Uo> Uo>> Uo>>>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI529/RZ529+LJKDQG529,QVW)RU

)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI529/RZ529+LJKDQG529,QVW
2
ABB Automation ROV1Low, ROV1High, ROV1Inst RE_5_ _

active high)
active high)
pos. edge)
GROUP Digital signal (BOOL, Control input for switching between setting
active high) group 1 and group 2. When GROUP is
pos. edge) registers of ROV1Low, ROV1High or
ROV1Inst

error
3
2.1 Configuration
Residual voltage Uo can be measured using an open delta connection of conventional

voltage transformers. The measuring devices and signal types for analogue channels
are selected and configured in a special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool
included in the CAP 505 Tool Box. Digital inputs are configured in the same
and digital outputs depends on the hardware variant).
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The residual voltage Uo can be connected
to the Uo input of the function block. Furthermore, digital inputs are connected to the
boolean inputs of the function block and the outputs of the function block are
2.2 Measuring mode
fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage. An MMI parameter or a
serial communication parameter can be used for selecting the measuring mode.
to-peak measurement, the harmonics of the residual voltage are not suppressed,
The function block starts when the residual voltage of the busbar system exceeds the
set start voltage. When the function block starts, the signal START is set to TRUE.
Should the duration of the earth-fault exceed the set definite operate time, the function
operate time. When the function block operates, the signal TRIP is set to TRUE.
The DT timer will be allowed to run only if the signal BS1 is inactive, i.e. its value is
FALSE. When the blocking signal BS1 becomes active, i.e. its value turns to TRUE,
4
drops off.
2.4 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.5 Test mode
5
2.7 Resetting

1)
1)
1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
6
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for ROV1Low is 44, that for ROV1High 45
and that for ROV1Inst 46.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
7
3.2 Setting values
ROV1Low

direction

1)
ROV1High and ROV1Inst

direction

1)
ROV1Low

direction
Operation mode S41 0 or 11) - 1 R/W Selection of operation mode

1)

direction

1)
8
ROV1Low

direction
Operation mode S71 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Selection of operation
mode

1)

direction
mode

1)
9

direction
mode

setting group

START signal

for TRIP output

TRIP


5)




1)
Measuring mode 0 = Peak-to-peak; 1 = Fundam. freq.
2)
3)
4)
5)
10
3.3.1 Input data

direction

1)

registers

the groups 1 and 2
Input RESET I6 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for resetting the trip

signal and registers of
ROV1Low, ROV1High or
ROV1Inst
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
starts, trips, or when the recording function is triggered via the external TRIGG input.
1, Operation 2,...
11
3.3.3.2 Duration
3.3.3.3 Residual voltage
If the function block trips, the voltage value is updated at the moment of tripping i.e.
on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. At external triggering, the voltage value is
If the function block starts but does not trip, the residual voltage value captured one
situation will be recorded. The value of the residual voltage Uo is recorded as a
percentage value of the rated voltage Un.
3.3.3.4 Status data
3.3.3.5 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
12

direction
Voltage Uo V204 0.0...120.0 % Un 0.0 R/M Filtered value of Uo

1)

2)
1)
BS_ 0 = Not active; 1 =Active
2)

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
13
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage Activated
E4 16 0 BS1 signal of Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage Reset
E5 32 0 BS1 signal of Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage On
14
4. Technical Data

Start time Injected voltages > 2 x start voltage:
TRIP output)
Total retardation time when the voltage drops

Operate time accuracy Depends on the frequency of the voltage measured:


1)
2)

B -
15
1MRS 752326-MUM ROV1_
Issued: 10/1997
Residual Overvoltage Protection
Low-Set Stage (ROV1Low)
High-Set Stage (ROV1High)
Data subject to change without notice Instantaneous Stage (ROV1Inst)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 4
2.4 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 5
2.5 Test mode ........................................................................................... 5
2.7 Resetting............................................................................................. 6

3.1 General ............................................................................................... 7
3.2 Setting values...................................................................................... 8
3.2.1 Actual settings............................................................................ 8
3.2.2 Setting group 1........................................................................... 8
3.2.3 Setting group 2........................................................................... 8
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 10
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 10
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 10
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 13
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 14

ROV1_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Residual overvoltage protection

Residual voltage measurement with open-delta connected voltage transformers or
by digital addition of phase voltage signals
instantaneous peak-to-peak values of voltage or the numerically calculated
fundamental frequency voltage
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the residual overvoltage protection function
blocks ROV1Low, ROV1High and ROV1Inst used in products based on the RED 500
The residual overvoltage protection function blocks are designed for sensitive earth-
fault protection. Suppression of harmonics is possible.
Uo> Uo>> Uo>>>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI529/RZ529+LJKDQG529,QVW)RU

)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI529/RZ529+LJKDQG529,QVW
2
Substation Automation ROV1 _

active high)
active high)
pos. edge)
GROUP Digital signal (BOOL, Control input for switching between setting
active high) group 1 and group 2. When GROUP is
pos. edge) registers of ROV1Low, ROV1High or
ROV1Inst

error
3
2.1 Configuration
Residual voltage Uo can be measured using an open delta connection of conventional

voltage transformers. The measuring devices and signal types for analogue channels
are selected and configured in a special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool
included in the CAP 505 Tool Box. Digital inputs are configured in the same
and digital outputs depends on the hardware variant).
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The residual voltage Uo can be connected
to the Uo input of the function block. Furthermore, digital inputs are connected to the
boolean inputs of the function block and the outputs of the function block are
2.2 Measuring mode
fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage. An MMI parameter or a
serial communication parameter can be used for selecting the measuring mode.
to-peak measurement, the harmonics of the residual voltage are not suppressed,
The function block starts when the residual voltage of the busbar system exceeds the
set start voltage. When the function block starts, the signal START is set to TRUE.
Should the duration of the earth-fault exceed the set definite operate time, the function
operate time. When the function block operates, the signal TRIP is set to TRUE.
The DT timer will be allowed to run only if the signal BS1 is inactive, i.e. its value is
FALSE. When the blocking signal BS1 becomes active, i.e. its value turns to TRUE,
4
drops off.
2.4 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.5 Test mode
5
2.7 Resetting

1)
1)
1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
6
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for ROV1Low is 44, that for ROV1High 45
and that for ROV1Inst 46.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
7
3.2 Setting values
ROV1Low, ROV1High and ROV1Inst

direction
Operation mode S1 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/M Selection of operation mode
Start voltage S2 2.0...100.0 % Un 2.0 R/M Start voltage

1)

direction

1)

direction
mode

1)
8

direction
mode

setting group

START signal

for TRIP output

TRIP


5)
Test TRIP V32 0 or 1 - 0 R/W Testing of TRIP




1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
9
3.3.1 Input data

direction

1)

registers

the groups 1 and 2
Input RESET I6 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for resetting the trip

signal and registers of
ROV1Low, ROV1High or
ROV1Inst
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
starts, trips, or when the recording function is triggered via the external TRIGG input.
1, Operation 2,...
10
3.3.3.2 Duration
3.3.3.3 Residual voltage
If the function block trips, the voltage value is updated at the moment of tripping i.e.
on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. At external triggering, the voltage value is
If the function block starts but does not trip, the residual voltage value captured one
situation will be recorded. The value of the residual voltage Uo is recorded as a
percentage value of the rated voltage Un.
3.3.3.4 Status data
3.3.3.5 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
11

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
12
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of Uo> Uo>> or Uo>>> stage On
13
4. Technical Data

Start time Injected voltages > 2 x start voltage:
TRIP output)
Total retardation time when the voltage drops



1)
2)

B -
C -
D Start voltage the setting range extended
14
1MRS100070 (Stage 1) RE_5_ _
1MRS100071 (Stage 2) Synchro-Check/
Issued: 10/1998
Version: C Voltage-Check Function
Data subject to change without notice Stage 1 (SCVCSt1)
Stage 2 (SCVCSt2)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.3 Operation ............................................................................................ 5
2.3.1 Synchro-check ........................................................................... 5
2.3.2 Voltage-check ............................................................................ 7
2.3.3 Bypass mode ............................................................................. 8
2.3.4 Operation mode ......................................................................... 8
2.3.5 Voltage combine function ......................................................... 12
2.4 Setting groups ................................................................................... 13
2.5 Resetting........................................................................................... 14

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 15
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 16
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 16
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 16
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 16
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 18
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 18
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 18
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 21
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 22

RE_5_ _ SCVCSt1 ABB Automation
SCVCSt2
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Synchro-check and voltage-check functions for checking the conditions at circuit-

breaker closing.
- Synchro-check function for checking the synchronism when live lines/busbars are
to be connected together.
- Voltage-check function for checking the energizing conditions. Four energizing
directions selectable for each circuit breaker.
Two control modes available: continuous mode operation for applications where
the synchro-check function gives the close permission to another module and
command mode operation for applications where the synchro-check function
closes the circuit breaker via its own control output.
Alarm signal for a failed CB closing at the command mode operation.
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the synchro-check function blocks SCVCSt1
and SCVCSt2 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The function block SCVCSt_ is designed to be used for checking the conditions for
circuit-breaker closing. The function can be used for closing ring mains,
interconnecting busbars and connecting generators to the network. The harmonics are
suppressed.

)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI6&9&6WB)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOH
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
2
ABB Automation SCVCSt1 RE_5_ _
SCVCSt2
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI6&9&6WDQG6&9&6W

Command Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Command signal
U1 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring main voltage 1
group 2 is active.
RESET Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Signal for resetting the registers

SC_DUE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Synchro-check in progress
SC_OK Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Closing permission given
ALARM_NC Digital signal (BOOL, active high) CB closing failed
ALARM_CO Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Command signal too long
configuration error
3
SCVCSt2
2.1 Configuration
The special measurements dialogue box in the configuration tool is used for selecting
frequency protection for the voltage inputs.
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The phase-to-phase voltage U12 is
connected to the U1 input and correspondingly U12b is connected to the U2 input.
Furthermore, digital inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of the function block,
and in the same way the outputs of the function block are connected to the output
signals.
Note! Frequency measurement must be selected for the voltage inputs used in
SCVCSt_ from the special measurements dialogue box of the configuration tool. Note
that when the voltage combine function is used, frequency measurement must also be
selected for U2.
The criteria for the function are:
Voltages must be in accordance with the energizing direction.

In the cases Live-Dead, Dead-Live and Dead-Dead no other conditions are
checked.
In the case Live-Live also the following must be fulfilled:
U< dU setting
f< df setting
< dphi setting
Before the function block allows the CB closing, it ensures that the phase difference
will remain within the setting range until the CB closes.
4
SCVCSt2
2.3 Operation
The function tacts of the circuit-breaker close. This duration is determined on the
basis of the frequency of the voltages on opposite sides of the CB. The synchro-check
function block has two parallel functions: a synchro-check function and a voltage-
check function.
2.3.1 Synchro-check
The synchro-check function can be used for two different operating conditions. The
most typical case is one where both sides of the circuit breaker to be closed are live
and thus the synchronism is always checked before the circuit breaker is given the
permission to close. In the other situation one or both sides of the circuit breaker to be
closed are dead and, consequently, the frequency and phase differences cannot be
measured, in which case the relay checks the energizing direction.
The purpose of the synchro-check function is to find the instant when the voltages on
both sides of the circuit breaker are synchronized, i.e. they have the same frequency,
are in phase and are of such a magnitude that the concerned busbars or lines can be
regarded as live. When the frequency, phase angle and voltage conditions are
fulfilled, the duration of the synchronized state is checked on the basis of the
frequency and phase differences measured so as to ensure that the conditions will still
be met when the CB closes. Depending on the circuit breaker and the closing system,
the delay from the moment the closing signal is given until the circuit breaker finally
closes is about 50 - 250 ms. The CB operate time selected tells the relay for how long
the conditions at least have to persist.
To prevent unnecessary output relay oscillation, an internal hysteresis is implemented,

which has to be taken into account when setting the parameter dU (see figure
below).
)LJXUH +\VWHUHVLVRIRI8QLVDSSOLHGZKHQWKHDPSOLWXGHVRIYROWDJHVDUH
FKHFNHG
5
SCVCSt2
The synchro-check function is used for checking whether CB closing is permitted or

not. Before CB operation the following closing conditions must be fulfilled:
The network sections on both sides of the CB must be energized. The voltage
magnitudes of the energized networks are determined by the set value for the upper
threshold voltage Umax.
The voltage difference over the CB must be small enough. The voltage difference
allowed is determined by the set voltage difference value dU.
The frequencies of the network sections (voltages) to be connected shall not differ
too much from each other. The frequency conditions are fulfilled when the allowed
frequency difference of the networks to be connected is smaller than the set
frequency difference value df.
The network sections to be connected (voltages) have the same phase angle. The
phase angle conditions are fulfilled when the allowed phase angle difference
between the network voltages is smaller than the set phase angle difference dphi.
The validity time for CB closing conditions, achieved from frequency and phase-
angle differencies, must have a duration of at least the time needed for the closing
of the circuit breaker to be operated (operate time of CB).
When the closing conditions mentioned above are fulfilled simultaneously, the
network voltages are considered to be synchronized and a closing command signal
SC_OK is delivered to the CB.
2.3.1.1 Settings for the synchro-check function
The threshold voltage Umax, above which the measured bus/line network voltage
must be before the network is considered to be energized.
Voltage difference allowed, absolute value dU. The set value determines the
maximum allowed voltage difference for the synchro-check function.
Frequency difference allowed, absolute value df. The set value determines the
maximum allowed frequency difference for the synchro-check function.
The phase-angle difference allowed, dphi, is an absolute value which means that
there are no demands concerning the phase-angle direction. The set value
determines the maximum allowed phase-angle difference for the synchro-check
function.
The operate time of a circuit breaker is set via the parameter Oper. time of CB.
2.3.1.2 Synchronous/Asynchronous mode
The asynchronous or synchronous mode is chosen via the control parameter

SynchroMode. When the value of the parameter is 0, the synchro-check function is
not in use.
In asynchronous mode the synchro-check function checks that the voltage, frequency
and phase differences are within the set limits. From the frequency slip (f) the
function predicts the time remaining to the moment when the phase difference
6
SCVCSt2
exceeds the setting. CB closing is only allowed if the time required for CB closing is
shorter than the predicted time.
In synchronous mode the aim is that the phase difference at the moment of CB closing
is zero. The mode is only possible when the frequency slip on the network is below
0,04% of fn and all the other conditions are fulfilled. If the time required for reaching
a synchronized state exceeds the maximum check time, the function will fail.
2.3.2 Voltage-check
The energizing direction in the voltage-check function is chosen via the parameter
Energizing mode. When the value of the parameter is 0, the voltage-check function
is not in use.
The voltage-check function checks the energizing direction. Energizing is defined as a

situation where a dead section of the network is connected to an energized one. The
user is able to define the voltage range within which the measured voltage is
determined to be live or dead. The conditions of the network sections to be
controlled by the circuit breaker, i.e. which side has to be live and which dead, are
also determined via a setting. A situation where both sides are dead is possible as
well.
Energizing Energizing direction

mode
=0 Not in use
=1 U1 U2 or U1 U2
=2 U1 U2
=3 U1 U2
=4 U1 U2, U1 U2 or both dead
When the energizing direction corresponds to the settings, the situation has to remain
constant for a certain period of time before the close signal is permitted. The purpose
of the operate time (dead time) is to ensure that the dead side remains de-energized
and that the situation is not due to a temporary interference. Should the conditions not
persist for the specified time, the operate time is reset and the procedure is started
over when the conditions are fulfilled again. Circuit-breaker closing is thus not
permitted until the energizing situation has remained constant throughout the set
operate time.
7
SCVCSt2
2.3.2.1 Settings for the voltage-check function
must be before the network is considered to be energized. The set threshold value
applies to the synchro-check function as well.
The threshold value Umin, below which the measured bus/line network voltage
must be before the network is considered to be non-energized.
Note!
Because the setting ranges of the threshold voltages Umax and Umin partly overlap
each other, the setting conditions may be such that the setting of the non-energized
threshold value Umin is higher than that of the energized threshold value Umax. The
parameters should be set carefully by the user to avoid the setting conditions
mentioned above.
Operate time for the energizing operation (dead time).

The energizing direction is separately selected via the parameter Energizing
mode. For example, when the energizing direction is selected to be U1->U2, the
voltage U1 shall be higher than Umax and the voltage U2 lower than Umin before
the conditions of the energizing direction are fulfilled.
2.3.3 Bypass mode
If the parameters SynchroMode and Energizing mode are both set to Not in use,
the SCVCSt_ function block is in bypass mode. This means that in command mode,
the command input is wired straight through to the SC_OK output, and in continuous
mode, the SC_OK output is continuously FALSE. The bypass mode does not affect
the events that are sent.
2.3.4 Operation mode
The closing command conditions for the circuit breaker are checked by the synchro-
check and voltage-check functions. In addition to the closing command conditions,
the delivering of the final closing signal depends on the operation mode selected for
the synchro-check function. Selection of the operation mode depends on whether the
synchro-check function itself directly uses the output signal to close the circuit
breaker (command mode operation) or if another function block (for example a
control function block) performs the closing operation after having received a
command signal from the synchro-check function (continuous mode operation).
The operation mode is selected via the parameter Operate mode. In continuous
mode, the synchro-check function is running continuously checking the synchronism.
When synchronism is detected i.e. the conditions are fulfilled according to the
settings, the output SC_OK is set to TRUE and will remain so as long as the
conditions remain fulfilled.
8
SCVCSt2
A distinctive difference between the two operation modes is that in the command
mode operation the synchro-check function is controlled by an external command
signal but in the continuous mode operation no external signal is needed. In the
command mode operation the synchro-check function delivers the closing signal
directly to the object to be controlled (a circuit breaker) whereas in the continuous
mode operation the closing signal is delivered via another function block that delivers
the final closing signal.
2.3.4.1 Continuous mode
In the continuous mode operation the closing signal output of the synchro-check
function stays active as long as the closing conditions remain fulfilled and the signal
disappears when the conditions cease. The operation of the synchro-check function
can be blocked by applying a blocking signal to the function.
The continuous mode can be used to provide extra information on synchronism for an
external operating device.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHIRUDFRQILJXUDWLRQZKHUH6&9&6WBLVXVHGLQFRQWLQXRXVPRGH
LHWKHIXQFWLRQEORFNFKHFNVWKHV\QFKURQLVPFRQWLQXRXVO\7KH
LQIRUPDWLRQLVWUDQVIHUUHGWRDQH[WHUQDORSHUDWLQJGHYLFHYLDWKHVLJQDO
RXWSXW%,2BB621RWHWKDWLQWKHFRQWLQXRXVPRGHWKH&RPPDQG
LQSXWLVQRWFRQQHFWHGWKH6&B'8(RXWSXWLVQRWDFWLYHDQGWKHDODUP
RXWSXWVDUHQRWLQXVH
2.3.4.2 Command mode
In command mode operation, an external command signal, besides the normal closing
conditions, is needed for delivering the closing signal. The command signal shall
remain active for the set checking time. The closing signal from the synchro-check
function can be blocked by applying the blocking signal to the function.
In the command mode operation the synchro-check function itself controls the
selected object directly via its own output signal. In this case the control function
block delivers the command signal for closing to the synchro-check function for
releasing of a closing signal pulse to the circuit breaker. If, after the delivered
9
SCVCSt2
command signal for closing, the closing conditions are fulfilled during a permitted
check time, the synchro-check function delivers a closing signal to the circuit breaker.
The circuit-breaker function block COCB1/COCB2 is recommended to be configured

to 10 ms task instead of the normal 20 ms task when used together with SCVCSt_.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIDFRQILJXUDWLRQRI&2&%DQG6&9&6WIXQFWLRQVZKHQWKH
FRPPDQGPRGHLVVHOHFWHG6&YHULILHVWKHV\QFKURQLVPZKHQDFORVH
FRPPDQGLVJLYHQDQGFORVHVWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHUGLUHFWO\YLDLWVRZQ
FRQWURORXWSXWZKHQDOOFRQGLWLRQVDUHIXOILOOHG
The closing signal is delivered only once per activated external closing command
signal. The duration of the delivered closing signal is the set parameter value. If the
delivered command signal disappears or the closing conditions cease before the
maximum length of the command signal is reached, the closing signal will be the set
parameter value. If the external closing command signal and the closing conditions
persist longer than for the length of the set closing signal, the closing signal will have
the length of the set parameter value.
If the command signal delivered to the synchro-check function is too long, the alarm
ALARM_CO is given and the alarm state will persist until the closing command
signal is removed. A failed closing attempt produces the alarm signal ALARM_NC of
about 500 ms, after which the synchro-check function is ready for a new operation
sequence.
The most essential features of the command mode operation are shown in Figures 6, 7
and 8.
Abbreviations used in the diagrams:
Conditions OK Closing conditions

Command External closing command signal
BLOCK External blocking input
SC_OK Closing signal delivered by SCVCSt_
SC_DUE Synchro-check in progress
ALARM_NC Alarm signal delivered by SCVCSt_ (CB closing failed)
ALARM_CO Alarm signal delivered by SCVCSt_ (Command signal too
long)
10
SCVCSt2
The length of the closing signal is determined via the parameter Closing signal
length. If the external command signal disappears during the closing operation, the
function block delivers the closing signal as a set value.
Conditions OK
Command
SC_DUE
SC_OK t = Closing signal length

clossign
)LJXUH &ORVLQJVLJQDOOHQJWKLQFRPPDQGPRGH
The setting of the Check time parameter determines also the alarm limit for a
command signal that has remained active. If the command signal is still active after
the pre-set checking time + 5 seconds, the ALARM_CO signal is activated. The alarm
indicates that the control function block has not removed the command signal after
the performed checking operation. To avoid unnecessary alarms, the duration of the
command signal should be set in such a way that the maximum length of the closing
signal under normal conditions is always below checking time + 5 seconds.
Conditions OK
Command Check time
SC_DUE
5s
ALARM_CO
commsign
)LJXUH 'HWHUPLQDWLRQRIWKHDODUPOLPLWIRUDQDFWLYHFRPPDQGVLJQDO
Closing is permitted during the check time starting from the moment when the
external command signal is activated. The command signal has to be active during the
whole pre-set checking time, which means that the value of the set check time must
also be considered when the length of the external command signal to be delivered to
the function block is determined. If the closing conditions get fulfilled during the
check time, a closing signal is delivered to the circuit breaker. If the closing
conditions are not met, ALARM_NC will be activated for 500 ms after the check time
ceases.
11
SCVCSt2
Conditions OK
Command Check time
SC_DUE
SC_OK
ALARM_NC 500 ms chectime
)LJXUH 'HWHUPLQDWLRQRIWKHFKHFNLQJWLPHIRUFORVLQJ
2.3.5 Voltage combine function
When the voltage combine function is in use, the function block calculates phase-to-
phase voltage U12 internally from phase-to-earth voltages U1 and U2.
U1
U12
U3 U2
VoltComb
)LJXUH 'HILQLWLRQRI8
The signals that are connected to the inputs of SCVCSt_ are U1 and U12. Note that
phase-to-earth voltage U2 has to be available and measureable in one of the analogue
channels of the protection relay, otherwise a configuration error is generated.
When using the voltage combine function the voltage connected to the U2 pin should
always be U12.
)LJXUH &RQQHFWLRQRIYROWDJHVLJQDOVWR6&9&6WIXQFWLRQZKHQWKHYROWDJH
FRPELQHIXQFWLRQLVXVHG,QDGGLWLRQ8PXVWEHGHILQHGLQRQHRIWKH
DQDORJXHFKDQQHOV
12
SCVCSt2
REF54x
U12 SCVCSt1
U1 U1
U2
U3 U2
U12
U1
U2
U3
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIDFRQILJXUDWLRQZKHUHWKHYROWDJHFRPELQHIXQFWLRQFDQEH
XVHG
The voltage combine function can be taken into use by setting the control parameter
VoltCombine to 1. VoltCombine is a special parameter that affects the analogue
measurements of the feeder terminal. Thus, for the parameter to take effect, the new
parameter value has to be stored via the parameter Store and the relay has to be
reset via the parameter Software reset in the MMI menu Configuration/General.
Note! Do not reset the relay before storing has been completed successfully.
2.4 Setting groups
SCVCSt_. Switching between the two groups can be done in the following three
ways:

2 Over the communication bus writing the parameter V91)
1)
time.
13
SCVCSt2
2.5 Resetting
The recorded data can be reset either via the RESET input, or over the serial bus or
the local MMI.
Operation Recorded data

indicators
1)
RESET input of the function block X
1)
Parameter F070V011 for SCVCSt1 X
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
Push-buttons C + E (2 s) X
2)
1)
Resets the recorded data of this particular function block.
2)
14
SCVCSt2
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for SCVCSt1 is 70 and that for SCVCSt2 71.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
15
SCVCSt2
3.2 Setting values

direction
Umax S1 0.50...1.00 x Un 1.00 R Upper threshold voltage
Umin S2 0.10...0.80 x Un 0.10 R Lower threshold voltage
dU S3 0.02...0.50 x Un 0.02 R Voltage difference
dphase S4 5...60 5 R Phase angle difference
df S5 0.02...0.50 Hz 0.02 R Frequency difference

direction
Umax S41 0.50...1.00 x Un 1.00 R/W Upper threshold voltage
Umin S42 0.10...0.80 x Un 0.10 R/W Lower threshold voltage
dU S43 0.02...0.50 x Un 0.02 R/W Voltage difference
dphase S44 5...60 5 R/W Phase angle difference
df S45 0.02...0.50 Hz 0.02 R/W Frequency difference

direction
16
SCVCSt2

direction
Energizing mode V1 0..4 1) - 1 R/W Selection of energizing mode
Operation mode V2 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/W Selection of operation mode

3)
Synchro mode V3 0...2 - 1 R/W Selection of synchro mode
Operate time V4 0.10...20.0 s 0.1 R/W Operate time (dead time)
Check time V5 0.05...300.00 s 0.05 R/W Check time in command mode

operation
Close pulse V6 0.2...20.0 s 0.2 R/W Closing signal length

(command mode only)
Oper.time of CB V7 0.05...0.25 s 0.05 R/W Operate time of circuit breaker
Basic angle V8 -90...90 0 R/W Basic angle setting

4)
Group selection V9 0...2 - 0 R/W Selection of the active setting
group
Reset registers V11 1 = Reset - 0 W Resetting of latched trip signal

and registers
Voltage combine V12 0 or 1 6) - 0 R/W Enabling of voltage combining
1)
Energizing mode 0=Not in use, 1 = U1->U2 or U1<-U2, 2 = U1->U2, 3= U1<-U2,
4 = U1->U2 or U1<-U2 or both "cold"
2)
Operation mode 0 = Command mode, 1 = Continuous mode
3)
Synchro mode 0 = Not in use,1 = Asynchronous mode, 2 = Synchronous mode
4)
Group selection 0 = Group1, 1 = Group2, 2 = GROUP-input
5)
Active group 0 = Group1, 1 = Group2
6)
Voltage combine 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
17
SCVCSt2
3.3.1 Input data

direction
U1 I1 0.00...1.30 x Un 0.00 R/M Measurement value U1
dU I3 -1.30...1.30 x Un 0.00 R/M Meas. delta value (U1-U2)
f1 I4 45.00...65.00 Hz 0.00 R/M Measurement value f1
df I6 -20.00...20.00 Hz 0.00 R/M Measurement delta value (f1-f2)
phi1 I7 -180...180 0.0 R/M Measurement value 1
dphi I9 -180...180 0.0 R/M Meas. delta value (1- 2)
Input Command I10 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of Command signal

1)
Input BLOCK I11 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of BLOCK signal
Input GROUP I12 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of GROUP signal

1)
Input RESET I13 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of RESET signal
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
SC_DUE O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of SC_DUE signal
SC_OK O2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of SC_OK signal

1)
ALARM_NC O3 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of ALARM_NC signal
ALARM_CO O4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of ALARM_CO signal

1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
The information required for later analysis is recorded when the function block
activates the SC_OK output.
18
SCVCSt2

1, Operation 2,...
The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the SC_OK signal.
3.3.3.3 Voltages, phase angles and frequencies
If the function block trips, the measured voltage, phase angle and frequency values are
updated at the moment of tripping i.e. on the rising edge of the SC_OK signal. Thus
the values of the voltages, phase angles and frequencies always originate from the
same moment.
The voltages are recorded as multiples of the rated voltage Un. The phase angles are
recorded in degrees. The frequencies are recorded in Hertz.
3.3.3.4 Status data
The status data of the Active group parameter is recorded at the rising edge of the
SC_OK signal.

direction
Date V201 YYYY-MM-DD - 0 R/M Registration date
Time V202 hh:mm:ss.000 - 0 R/M Registration time
U1 V203 0.00...1.30 x Un 0.00 R/M Voltage 1 value
dU V205 -1.30...1.30 x Un 0.00 R/M Voltage difference
f1 V206 45.00...65.00 Hz 0.00 R/M Frequency f1
df V208 -20.00...20.00 Hz 0.00 R/M Frequency difference
phi1 V209 -180...180 0 R/M Phase 1
phi2 V210 -180...180 0 R/M Phase 2
dphase V211 -180...180 0 R/M Phase difference

1)
Active group 0 = Setting group 1, 1 = Setting group 2
19
SCVCSt2

direction
phi1 V309 -180...180 0 R/M Phase 1
phi2 V310 -180...180 0 R/M Phase 2

1)

direction
phi1 V409 -180...180 0 R/M Phase 1
phi2 V410 -180...180 0 R/M Phase 2

1)
20
SCVCSt2
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Synchro-check in progress Reset
E1 2 1 Closing permission given Activated
E2 4 1 Alarm; CB closing failed Reset
E3 8 1 Alarm; command signal too long Activated
E5 32 1 Alarm; CB closing failed Activated
E6 64 1 Alarm; command signal too long Reset
21
SCVCSt2
4. Technical Data

voltage measurement: 2.5% of set value or 0.01 x Un
frequency measurement: 10 mHz
phase angle measurement: 2
Reset time < 50 ms
Reset ratio Typ 0.975 x Un (range 0.96...0.98)


revision
SCVCSt1 E -
G Bypass mode added

Operate mode Operation mode
SyncroMode Synchro mode
Closing signal length Close pulse
VoltCombine Voltage combine
Event mask range changed: 015 0255
Events E4E7 added
SCVCSt2 D -
F (see above: SCVCSt1, G)
22
1MRS752327-MUM SCVCSt _
Synchro-Check/
Issued: 10/1998
Version: D/25.1.2002 Voltage-Check Function
Stage 1 (SCVCSt1)
Data subject to change without notice Stage 2 (SCVCSt2)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.3 Operation ............................................................................................ 5
2.3.1 Synchro-check ........................................................................... 5
2.3.2 Voltage-check ............................................................................ 7
2.3.3 Bypass mode ............................................................................. 8
2.3.4 Operation mode ......................................................................... 8
2.3.5 Voltage combine function ......................................................... 12
2.4 Setting groups ................................................................................... 13
2.5 Resetting........................................................................................... 14

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 15
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 16
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 16
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 16
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 16
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 18
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 18
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 18
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 21
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 22

SCVCSt_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Synchro-check and voltage-check functions for checking the conditions at circuit-

breaker closing.
- Synchro-check function for checking the synchronism when live lines/busbars are
to be connected together.
- Voltage-check function for checking the energizing conditions. Four energizing
directions selectable for each circuit breaker.
Two control modes available: continuous mode operation for applications where
the synchro-check function gives the close permission to another module and
command mode operation for applications where the synchro-check function
closes the circuit breaker via its own control output.
Alarm signal for a failed CB closing at the command mode operation.
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the synchro-check function blocks SCVCSt1
and SCVCSt2 used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The function block SCVCSt_ is designed to be used for checking the conditions for
circuit-breaker closing. The function can be used for closing ring mains,
interconnecting busbars and connecting generators to the network. The harmonics are
suppressed.

)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERORI6&9&6WB)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOH
,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
2
Substation Automation SCVCSt_
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI6&9&6WDQG6&9&6W

Command Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Command signal
group 2 is active.
RESET Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Signal for resetting the registers

SC_DUE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Synchro-check in progress
SC_OK Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Closing permission given
ALARM_NC Digital signal (BOOL, active high) CB closing failed
ALARM_CO Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Command signal too long
configuration error
3
2.1 Configuration
The special measurements dialogue box in the configuration tool is used for selecting
frequency protection for the voltage inputs.
graphic worksheet of the configuration tool. The phase-to-phase voltage U12 is
connected to the U1 input and correspondingly U12b is connected to the U2 input.
Furthermore, digital inputs are connected to the boolean inputs of the function block,
and in the same way the outputs of the function block are connected to the output
signals.
Note! Frequency measurement must be selected for the voltage inputs used in
SCVCSt_ from the special measurements dialogue box of the configuration tool. Note
that when the voltage combine function is used, frequency measurement must also be
selected for U2.
The criteria for the function are:
Voltages must be in accordance with the energizing direction.

In the cases Live-Dead, Dead-Live and Dead-Dead no other conditions are
checked.
In the case Live-Live also the following must be fulfilled:
U< dU setting
f< df setting
< dphi setting
Before the function block allows the CB closing, it ensures that the phase difference
will remain within the setting range until the CB closes.
4
2.3 Operation
The function tacts of the circuit-breaker close. This duration is determined on the
basis of the frequency of the voltages on opposite sides of the CB. The synchro-check
function block has two parallel functions: a synchro-check function and a voltage-
check function.
2.3.1 Synchro-check
The synchro-check function can be used for two different operating conditions. The
most typical case is one where both sides of the circuit breaker to be closed are live
and thus the synchronism is always checked before the circuit breaker is given the
permission to close. In the other situation one or both sides of the circuit breaker to be
closed are dead and, consequently, the frequency and phase differences cannot be
measured, in which case the relay checks the energizing direction.
The purpose of the synchro-check function is to find the instant when the voltages on
both sides of the circuit breaker are synchronized, i.e. they have the same frequency,
are in phase and are of such a magnitude that the concerned busbars or lines can be
regarded as live. When the frequency, phase angle and voltage conditions are
fulfilled, the duration of the synchronized state is checked on the basis of the
frequency and phase differences measured so as to ensure that the conditions will still
be met when the CB closes. Depending on the circuit breaker and the closing system,
the delay from the moment the closing signal is given until the circuit breaker finally
closes is about 50 - 250 ms. The CB operate time selected tells the relay for how long
the conditions at least have to persist.
To prevent unnecessary output relay oscillation, an internal hysteresis is implemented,

which has to be taken into account when setting the parameter dU (see figure
below).
)LJXUH +\VWHUHVLVRIRI8QLVDSSOLHGZKHQWKHDPSOLWXGHVRIYROWDJHVDUH
FKHFNHG
5
The synchro-check function is used for checking whether CB closing is permitted or

not. Before CB operation the following closing conditions must be fulfilled:
The network sections on both sides of the CB must be energized. The voltage
magnitudes of the energized networks are determined by the set value for the upper
threshold voltage Umax.
The voltage difference over the CB must be small enough. The voltage difference
allowed is determined by the set voltage difference value dU.
The frequencies of the network sections (voltages) to be connected shall not differ
too much from each other. The frequency conditions are fulfilled when the allowed
frequency difference of the networks to be connected is smaller than the set
frequency difference value df.
The network sections to be connected (voltages) have the same phase angle. The
phase angle conditions are fulfilled when the allowed phase angle difference
between the network voltages is smaller than the set phase angle difference dphi.
The validity time for CB closing conditions, achieved from frequency and phase-
angle differencies, must have a duration of at least the time needed for the closing
of the circuit breaker to be operated (operate time of CB).
When the closing conditions mentioned above are fulfilled simultaneously, the
network voltages are considered to be synchronized and a closing command signal
SC_OK is delivered to the CB.
2.3.1.1 Settings for the synchro-check function
must be before the network is considered to be energized.
Voltage difference allowed, absolute value dU. The set value determines the
maximum allowed voltage difference for the synchro-check function.
Frequency difference allowed, absolute value df. The set value determines the
maximum allowed frequency difference for the synchro-check function.
The phase-angle difference allowed, dphi, is an absolute value which means that
there are no demands concerning the phase-angle direction. The set value
determines the maximum allowed phase-angle difference for the synchro-check
function.
The operate time of a circuit breaker is set via the parameter Oper. time of CB.
2.3.1.2 Synchronous/Asynchronous mode
The asynchronous or synchronous mode is chosen via the control parameter

SynchroMode. When the value of the parameter is 0, the synchro-check function is
not in use.
In asynchronous mode the synchro-check function checks that the voltage, frequency
and phase differences are within the set limits. From the frequency slip (f) the
function predicts the time remaining to the moment when the phase difference
6
exceeds the setting. CB closing is only allowed if the time required for CB closing is
shorter than the predicted time.
In synchronous mode the aim is that the phase difference at the moment of CB closing
is zero. The mode is only possible when the frequency slip on the network is below
0,04% of fn and all the other conditions are fulfilled. If the time required for reaching
a synchronized state exceeds the maximum check time, the function will fail.
2.3.2 Voltage-check
The energizing direction in the voltage-check function is chosen via the parameter
Energizing mode. When the value of the parameter is 0, the voltage-check function
is not in use.
The voltage-check function checks the energizing direction. Energizing is defined as a

situation where a dead section of the network is connected to an energized one. The
user is able to define the voltage range within which the measured voltage is
determined to be live or dead. The conditions of the network sections to be
controlled by the circuit breaker, i.e. which side has to be live and which dead, are
also determined via a setting. A situation where both sides are dead is possible as
well.
Energizing Energizing direction

mode
=0 Not in use
=1 U1 U2 or U1 U2
=2 U1 U2
=3 U1 U2
=4 U1 U2, U1 U2 or both dead
When the energizing direction corresponds to the settings, the situation has to remain
constant for a certain period of time before the close signal is permitted. The purpose
of the operate time (dead time) is to ensure that the dead side remains de-energized
and that the situation is not due to a temporary interference. Should the conditions not
persist for the specified time, the operate time is reset and the procedure is started
over when the conditions are fulfilled again. Circuit-breaker closing is thus not
permitted until the energizing situation has remained constant throughout the set
operate time.
7
2.3.2.1 Settings for the voltage-check function
must be before the network is considered to be energized. The set threshold value
applies to the synchro-check function as well.
The threshold value Umin, below which the measured bus/line network voltage
must be before the network is considered to be non-energized.
Note!
Because the setting ranges of the threshold voltages Umax and Umin partly overlap
each other, the setting conditions may be such that the setting of the non-energized
threshold value Umin is higher than that of the energized threshold value Umax. The
parameters should be set carefully by the user to avoid the setting conditions
mentioned above.
Operate time for the energizing operation (minimal dead time).

The energizing direction is separately selected via the parameter Energizing
mode. For example, when the energizing direction is selected to be U1->U2, the
voltage U1 shall be higher than Umax and the voltage U2 lower than Umin before
the conditions of the energizing direction are fulfilled.
2.3.3 Bypass mode
If the parameters SynchroMode and Energizing mode are both set to Not in use,
the SCVCSt_ function block is in bypass mode. This means that in command mode,
the command input is wired straight through to the SC_OK output and in continuous
mode, the SC_OK output is continuously FALSE.
Note!
In bypass mode events are sent as in normal operation (ie. when output changes
accure).
2.3.4 Operation mode
The closing command conditions for the circuit breaker are checked by the synchro-
check and voltage-check functions. In addition to the closing command conditions,
the delivering of the final closing signal depends on the operation mode selected for
the synchro-check function. Selection of the operation mode depends on whether the
synchro-check function itself directly uses the output signal to close the circuit
breaker (command mode operation) or if another function block (for example a
control function block) performs the closing operation after having received a
command signal from the synchro-check function (continuous mode operation).
The operation mode is selected via the parameter Operate mode. In continuous
mode, the synchro-check function is running continuously checking the synchronism.
8
When synchronism is detected i.e. the conditions are fulfilled according to the
settings, the output SC_OK is set to TRUE and will remain so as long as the
conditions remain fulfilled.
A distinctive difference between the two operation modes is that in the command
mode operation the synchro-check function is controlled by an external command
signal but in the continuous mode operation no external signal is needed. In the
command mode operation the synchro-check function delivers the closing signal
directly to the object to be controlled (a circuit breaker) whereas in the continuous
mode operation the closing signal is delivered via another function block that delivers
the final closing signal.
2.3.4.1 Continuous mode
In the continuous mode operation the closing signal output of the synchro-check
function stays active as long as the closing conditions remain fulfilled and the signal
disappears when the conditions cease. The operation of the synchro-check function
can be blocked by applying a blocking signal to the function.
The continuous mode can be used to provide extra information on synchronism for an
external operating device.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHIRUDFRQILJXUDWLRQZKHUH6&9&6WBLVXVHGLQFRQWLQXRXVPRGH
LHWKHIXQFWLRQEORFNFKHFNVWKHV\QFKURQLVPFRQWLQXRXVO\7KH
LQIRUPDWLRQLVWUDQVIHUUHGWRDQH[WHUQDORSHUDWLQJGHYLFHYLDWKHVLJQDO
RXWSXW%,2BB621RWHWKDWLQWKHFRQWLQXRXVPRGHWKH&RPPDQG
LQSXWLVQRWFRQQHFWHGWKH6&B'8(RXWSXWLVQRWDFWLYHDQGWKHDODUP
RXWSXWVDUHQRWLQXVH
2.3.4.2 Command mode
In command mode operation, an external command signal, besides the normal closing
conditions, is needed for delivering the closing signal. The command signal shall
remain active for the set checking time. The closing signal from the synchro-check
function can be blocked by applying the blocking signal to the function.
9
In command mode operation, the synchro-check function itself controls the selected
object directly via its own output signal. In this case the control function block
delivers the command signal for closing to the synchro-check function for releasing of
a closing signal pulse to the circuit breaker. If, after the delivered command signal for
closing, the closing conditions are fulfilled during a permitted check time, the
synchro-check function delivers a closing signal to the circuit breaker.
The circuit-breaker function block COCB1/COCB2 is recommended to be configured

to 10 ms task instead of the normal 20 ms task when used together with SCVCSt_.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIDFRQILJXUDWLRQRI&2&%DQG6&9&6WIXQFWLRQVZKHQWKH
FRPPDQGPRGHLVVHOHFWHG6&YHULILHVWKHV\QFKURQLVPZKHQDFORVH
FRPPDQGLVJLYHQDQGFORVHVWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHUGLUHFWO\YLDLWVRZQ
FRQWURORXWSXWZKHQDOOFRQGLWLRQVDUHIXOILOOHG
The closing signal is delivered only once per activated external closing command
signal. The duration of the delivered closing signal is the set parameter value. If the
delivered command signal disappears or the closing conditions cease before the
maximum length of the command signal is reached, the closing signal will be the set
parameter value. If the external closing command signal and the closing conditions
persist longer than for the length of the set closing signal, the closing signal will have
the length of the set parameter value.
If the command signal delivered to the synchro-check function is too long, the alarm
ALARM_CO is given and the alarm state will persist until the closing command
signal is removed. A failed closing attempt produces the alarm signal ALARM_NC of
about 500 ms, after which the synchro-check function is ready for a new operation
sequence.
The most essential features of the command mode operation are shown in Figures 6, 7
and 8.
Abbreviations used in the diagrams:
Conditions OK Closing conditions

Command External closing command signal
BLOCK External blocking input
SC_OK Closing signal delivered by SCVCSt_
SC_DUE Synchro-check in progress
ALARM_NC Alarm signal delivered by SCVCSt_ (CB closing failed)
10
ALARM_CO Alarm signal delivered by SCVCSt_ (Command signal too

long)
The length of the closing signal is determined via the parameter Closing signal
length. If the external command signal disappears during the closing operation, the
function block delivers the closing signal as a set value.
Conditions OK
Command
SC_DUE

clossign
)LJXUH &ORVLQJVLJQDOOHQJWKLQFRPPDQGPRGH
The setting of the Check time parameter determines also the alarm limit for a
command signal that has remained active. If the command signal is still active after
the pre-set checking time + 5 seconds, the ALARM_CO signal is activated. The alarm
indicates that the control function block has not removed the command signal after
the performed checking operation. To avoid unnecessary alarms, the duration of the
command signal should be set in such a way that the maximum length of the closing
signal under normal conditions is always below checking time + 5 seconds.
Conditions OK
Command Check time
SC_DUE
5s
ALARM_CO
commsign
)LJXUH 'HWHUPLQDWLRQRIWKHDODUPOLPLWIRUDQDFWLYHFRPPDQGVLJQDO
Closing is permitted during the check time starting from the moment when the
external command signal is activated. The command signal has to be active during the
whole pre-set checking time, which means that the value of the set check time must
also be considered when the length of the external command signal to be delivered to
the function block is determined. If the closing conditions get fulfilled during the
check time, a closing signal is delivered to the circuit breaker. If the closing
conditions are not met, ALARM_NC will be activated for 500 ms after the check time
ceases.
11
Conditions OK
Command Check time
SC_DUE
SC_OK
ALARM_NC 500 ms chectime
)LJXUH 'HWHUPLQDWLRQRIWKHFKHFNLQJWLPHIRUFORVLQJ
2.3.5 Voltage combine function
When the voltage combine function is in use, the function block calculates phase-to-
phase voltage U12 internally from phase-to-earth voltages U1 and U2.
U1
U12
U3 U2
VoltComb
)LJXUH 'HILQLWLRQRI8
The signals that are connected to the inputs of SCVCSt_ are U1 and U12. Note that
phase-to-earth voltage U2 has to be available and measureable in one of the analogue
channels of the protection relay, otherwise a configuration error is generated.
When using the voltage combine function the voltage connected to the U2 pin should
always be U12.
)LJXUH &RQQHFWLRQRIYROWDJHVLJQDOVWR6&9&6WIXQFWLRQZKHQWKHYROWDJH
FRPELQHIXQFWLRQLVXVHG,QDGGLWLRQ8PXVWEHGHILQHGLQRQHRIWKH
DQDORJXHFKDQQHOV
12
REF54x
U12 SCVCSt1
U1 U1
U2
U3 U2
U12
U1
U2
U3
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIDFRQILJXUDWLRQZKHUHWKHYROWDJHFRPELQHIXQFWLRQFDQEH
XVHG
The voltage combine function can be taken into use by setting the control parameter
VoltCombine to 1. VoltCombine is a special parameter that affects the analogue
measurements of the feeder terminal. Thus, for the parameter to take effect, the new
parameter value has to be stored via the parameter Store and the relay has to be
reset via the parameter Software reset in the MMI menu Configuration/General.
Note! Do not reset the relay before storing has been completed successfully.
2.4 Setting groups
SCVCSt_. Switching between the two groups can be done in the following three
ways:

2 Over the communication bus writing the parameter V91)
1)
time.
13
2.5 Resetting
The recorded data can be reset either via the RESET input, or over the serial bus or
the local MMI.
Operation Recorded data

indicators
1)
RESET input of the function block X
1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
Push-buttons C + E (2 s) X
2)
1)
Resets the recorded data of this particular function block.
2)
14
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for SCVCSt1 is 70 and that for SCVCSt2 71.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
15
3.2 Setting values

direction
Umax S1 0.50...1.00 x Un 1.00 R Upper threshold voltage
Umin S2 0.10...0.80 x Un 0.10 R Lower threshold voltage
dU S3 0.02...0.50 x Un 0.02 R Voltage difference
dphase S4 5...90 5 R Phase angle difference
df S5 0.02...5.00 Hz 0.02 R Frequency difference

direction

direction
16

direction
Energizing mode V1 0..4 1) - 1 R/W Selection of energizing mode
Operation mode V2 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/W Selection of operation mode

3)
Synchro mode V3 0...2 - 1 R/W Selection of synchro mode
Operate time V4 0.10...20.0 s 0.1 R/W Operate time (dead time)
Check time V5 0.05...300.00 s 0.05 R/W Check time in command mode

operation
Close pulse V6 0.2...20.0 s 0.2 R/W Closing signal length

(command mode only)
Oper.time of CB V7 0.05...0.25 s 0.05 R/W Operate time of circuit breaker
Basic angle V8 -90...90 0 R/W Basic angle setting

4)
group
Reset registers V11 1 = Reset - 0 W Resetting of latched trip signal

and registers
Voltage combine V12 0 or 1 6) - 0 R/W Enabling of voltage combining
1)
Energizing mode 0=Not in use, 1 = U1->U2 or U1<-U2, 2 = U1->U2, 3= U1<-U2,
4 = U1->U2 or U1<-U2 or both "cold"
2)
Operation mode 0 = Command mode, 1 = Continuous mode
3)
Synchro mode 0 = Not in use,1 = Asynchronous mode, 2 = Synchronous mode
4)
Group selection 0 = Group1, 1 = Group2, 2 = GROUP-input
5)
Active group 0 = Group1, 1 = Group2
6)
Voltage combine 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
17
3.3.1 Input data

direction
dU I3 -1.30...1.30 x Un 0.00 R/M Meas. delta value (U1-U2)
df I6 -20.00...20.00 Hz 0.00 R/M Measurement delta value (f1-f2)
dphi I9 -180...180 0.0 R/M Meas. delta value (1- 2)
Input Command I10 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of Command signal

1)
Input BLOCK I11 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of BLOCK signal
Input GROUP I12 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of GROUP signal

1)
Input RESET I13 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of RESET signal
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
SC_DUE O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of SC_DUE signal
SC_OK O2 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of SC_OK signal

1)
ALARM_NC O3 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of ALARM_NC signal
ALARM_CO O4 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of ALARM_CO signal

1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
The information required for later analysis is recorded when the function block
activates the SC_OK output.
18

1, Operation 2,...
The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the SC_OK signal.
3.3.3.3 Voltages, phase angles and frequencies
If the function block trips, the measured voltage, phase angle and frequency values are
updated at the moment of tripping i.e. on the rising edge of the SC_OK signal. Thus
the values of the voltages, phase angles and frequencies always originate from the
same moment.
The voltages are recorded as multiples of the rated voltage Un. The phase angles are
recorded in degrees. The frequencies are recorded in Hertz.
3.3.3.4 Status data
The status data of the Active group parameter is recorded at the rising edge of the
SC_OK signal.

direction
phi1 V209 -180...180 0 R/M Phase 1
phi2 V210 -180...180 0 R/M Phase 2

1)
19

direction
phi1 V309 -180...180 0 R/M Phase 1
phi2 V310 -180...180 0 R/M Phase 2

1)

direction
phi1 V409 -180...180 0 R/M Phase 1
phi2 V410 -180...180 0 R/M Phase 2

1)
20
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 Synchro-check in progress Reset
E1 2 1 Synchro-check in progress Activated
E2 4 1 Closing permission given Reset
E3 8 1 Closing permission given Activated
E5 32 1 Alarm; CB closing failed Activated
E6 64 1 Alarm; command signal too long Reset
21
4. Technical Data

voltage measurement: 2.5% of set value or 0.01 x Un
frequency measurement: 10 mHz
phase angle measurement: 2
Reset time < 50 ms
Reset ratio Typ 0.975 x Un (range 0.96...0.98)


revision
SCVCSt1 E -
G Bypass mode added

Operate mode Operation mode
SyncroMode Synchro mode
Closing signal length Close pulse
VoltCombine Voltage combine
Event mask range changed: 015 0255
Events E4E7 added
H -
SCVCSt2 D -
F (see above: SCVCSt1, G)
G -
22
1MRS100030 RE_5_ _
Issued: 11/1997
Version: D
Switchgroups
(SWGRP1...SWGRP20)
Contents
1. Description................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
3. Setting Values........................................................................................... 5
3.1 Actual settings..................................................................................... 5

4. Technical Data .......................................................................................... 6
RE_5_ _ Switchgroups ABB Automation
SWGRP1...SWGRP20
1. Description
1.1 Features
The 20 switchgroups SWGRP1 to SWGRP20 are used for changing the functionality
of the configuration via the MMI or via serial communication. Each switchgroup
contains two checksums; checksum 1 and checksum 2. The actual checksum is
selected either with a boolean signal in the logic of the Relay Configuration Tool, or
by presetting the checksum via the local or external MMI.
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the 20 switchgroups SWGRP1 to

SWGRP20.
The SWGRP function blocks can be used in the Relay Configuration Tool to change
the functionality of configurations via the MMI.
)LJXUH $VDQH[DPSOHWKHIXQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI6:*53
2
ABB Automation Switchgroups RE_5_ _
SWGRP1...SWGRP20

IN1 BOOL Input signal
GROUP BOOL Selection signal

OUT1 BOOL Output signal
3
SWGRP1...SWGRP20
2.1 Configuration
The SWGRP functions have their own parameter settings, both on the local MMI and
in the Relay Setting Tool, with which the positions of switches inside the SWGRP
functions can be controlled.
The setting parameter Group selection (F030V01) is used for selecting the
checksum 1 or 2. When the parameter Group selection is set to Checksum1, the
checksum value is used for controlling the switchgroup switches SWGRP**/1....8. In
case the parameter is set to Checksum2, the value is used for switching control. The
group input of SWGRP takes place if the parameter Group selection is set to
Group input. A boolean signal is used to select between the checksum 1 (group
input is low: FALSE) and the checksum 2 (group input is high: TRUE). The group
input can be interconnected in the relay configuration to any boolean type of signal
such as digital inputs, protection/control/condition monitoring etc. function blocks,
boolean functions, flip-flops etc.
Switch Function Checksum

value
SWGRP**/1 When SWGRP**/1=1, IN1 signal is linked to OUT1 1
(**) Each of the switchgroups SWGRP1, SWGRP2, SWGRP3, etc. up to SWGRP20
have the 8 switches.
4
ABB Automation Switchgroups RE_5_ _
SWGRP1...SWGRP20
3. Setting Values
3.1 Actual settings

direction
Checksum S* 0...255 0 R Ruling checksum of SWGRP**
(*) The code number of the checksum parameter for e.g. SWGRP1 is S1, for
SWGRP2 S2, etc.
(**) The switchgroups are SWGRP1, SWGRP2, SWGRP3, etc. up to SWGRP20.

1)
direction
Group V* 0...2 2 R/W Ruling checksum of SWGRP**
selection
(*) The code number of the group selection parameter for e.g. SWGRP1 is V1, for
SWGRP2 V2, etc.

1)
Values for group selection: 0 = Checksum1; 1 = Checksum2; 2 = Group input
5
SWGRP1...SWGRP20
4. Technical Data

A -
6
1MRS752374-MUM SWGRP_
Issued: 11/1997
Version: E/19.04.2002
Switchgroups
(SWGRP1...SWGRP20)
Contents
1. Description................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2

2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
3. Parameters and events ............................................................................ 6
3.1 General ............................................................................................... 6

3.2 Actual settings..................................................................................... 6
3.3 Setting group 1.................................................................................... 7
3.4 Setting group 2.................................................................................... 7
4. Technical data .......................................................................................... 9
SWGRP_ Substation Automation
1. Description
1.1 Features
The 20 function blocks SWGRP1 to SWGRP20 can be used for changing the
functionality of the configuration via the HMI or via serial communication. Each
switchgroup contains two checksums: checksum 1 and checksum 2. The actual
checksum is selected either with a Boolean signal in the logic of the Relay
Configuration Tool, or by presetting the checksum via the local HMI or the Relay
Setting Tool.
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the 20 switchgroups SWGRP1 to

SWGRP20.
The SWGRP function blocks can be used in the Relay Configuration Tool to change
the functionality of configurations via the HMI.
)LJXUH$VDQH[DPSOHWKHIXQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI6:*53
2
Substation Automation SWGRP_

GROUP BOOL Control input for switching
and 2. When GROUP is
FALSE, group 1 is active.
When GROUP is TRUE, group
2 is active.

CHKSUM USINT Ruling checksum as a number
3
2.1 Configuration
Each of the SWGRP functions have their own parameter settings, accessible both on
the local HMI and in the Relay Setting Tool, with which the positions of switches
inside the SWGRP functions can be controlled.
The setting parameter Group selection is used for selecting the checksum 1 or 2.
Each switchgroup has its own group selection control setting, e.g. SWGRP1 =
F030V001, SWGRP2 = F030V002 etc. When the parameter Group selection is set
to Checksum1, the checksum value is used for controlling the switchgroup switches
SWGRP**/1....8. In case the parameter is set to Checksum2, the value is used for
switching control. The group input of SWGRP takes place if the parameter Group
selection is set to Group input. A Boolean signal is used for selecting between the
checksum 1 (group input is low: FALSE) and the checksum 2 (group input is high:
TRUE). The group input can be connected in the relay configuration to any Boolean
signal such as digital inputs, outputs of application function blocks, generic functions
etc.
Switch Function Checksum

value
(**) Each of the switchgroups SWGRP1, SWGRP2, SWGRP3, etc. up to SWGRP20 have the 8 switches.
When a switch is open, the corresponding output remains FALSE regardless of the
input. Parallel switches can be controlled individually by summing corresponding
weight factors to the checksum setting.
The active checksum is available as a number in the output CHKSUM. This value can
be used in the configuration directly as a general purpose setting value. The data type
of this output is unsigned short integer and the value range is 0...255. This value range
can be adjusted to the application requirements using generic functions.
4
)LJ$QH[DPSOHRIKRZWRXVHWKHDFWLYHFKHFNVXP
Above an example of how to use the active checksum value as a general purpose
setting value to have an adjustable time delay. The unsigned short integer is first
converted to an unsigned double integer. The preset time duration input PT in generic
timer TON is of data type TIME. The underlying representation of TIME data type in
the RED 500 devices is an unsigned double integer multiple of milliseconds.
Therefore the range of CHKSUM output is multiplied with 1000 to have a setting
value range of 0...255 seconds in steps of 1 second.
5
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for SWGRP1...20 is 30.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
visibility of events in the HMI or in serial communication (LON or SPA) as
follows:
32...63.
3.2 Actual settings

direction
Checksum S* 0...255 0 R/M Ruling checksum of SWGRP**
SWGRP2 S2, etc.
6
3.3 Setting group 1

direction
Checksum S* 0...255 0 R/W Checksum 1 of SWGRP**
SWGRP2 S2, etc.
3.4 Setting group 2

direction
Checksum S* 0...255 0 R/W Checksum 2 of SWGRP**
SWGRP2 S72, etc.
7

direction
1)
Group V* 0...2 2 R/W Selection of the active setting
selection group of SWGRP**
(*) The code number of the group selection parameter for e.g. SWGRP1 is V1, for
SWGRP2 V2, etc.

1)
Values for group selection: 0 = Checksum1; 1 = Checksum2; 2 = Group input
8
4. Technical data

A -
B A new output CHKSUM added
9
1MRS100047 RE_5_ _
Issued: 10/1998
Version: C
Three-Phase Thermal Overload
Data subject to change without notice Protection for Cables
(TOL3Cab)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 6
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6
2.3.1 Principle of the thermal model applied........................................ 7
2.3.2 TRIP output................................................................................ 8
2.3.3 START output ............................................................................ 8
2.3.4 CU_ALARM output..................................................................... 8
2.3.5 COND_TEMP & TEMP_PERCENT outputs ............................... 9
2.3.6 COOL_TIME output ................................................................. 10
2.3.7 TRIP_TIME output ................................................................... 10
2.3.8 Compensation of ambient temperature .................................... 10
2.3.9 Reclose inhibit.......................................................................... 11
2.3.10 Temperature sensor supervision .............................................. 11
2.3.11 BLOCK input ............................................................................ 11
2.4 Setting groups ................................................................................... 12
2.5 Test mode ......................................................................................... 12
2.7 Resetting........................................................................................... 13

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 14
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 15
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 16
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 16
RE_5_ _ TOL3Cab ABB Automation

3.3.1 Input data .................................................................................18
3.3.2 Output data...............................................................................19
3.3.3 Recorded data ..........................................................................19
3.3.4 Events ......................................................................................22
4. Technical Data.........................................................................................23
2
ABB Automation TOL3Cab RE_5_ _
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Three-phase thermal protection for cables

Adjustable percentual temperature limits for tripping, prior alarm and reclose
inhibit
Alarm for an overload current and estimate in minutes for the tripping of the
function block
Estimate in minutes on the time required for the cable to cool below the set limit
after the tripping
Ambient temperature compensation by external temperature sensor(s) or by
parameter setting
Temperature sensor supervision
The thermal model applied uses one time constant and the TRUE RMS current
measuring principle
1.2 Application
This document specifies the function of the three-phase thermal overload protection
function block TOL3Cab used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
TOL3Cab is designed for the thermal protection of three-phase power cables and
overhead lines.

,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
3
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI72/&DEWKHWKUHHSKDVHWKHUPDORYHUORDG
SURWHFWLRQIRUFDEOHV

IL1 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring the RMS-
value of the phase current IL1
SENSOR1 Analogue signal (REAL) External temperature sensor 1
for ambient temp. measurement
SENS_IV Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal indicating a sensor fault
i.e. an invalidity input for sensor
measurement
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for blocking the tripping of
the function block
TRIGG Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) External control signal for
triggering the registers
and 2. When GROUP is FALSE,
group 1 is active.
RESET Digital signal (BOOL, pos. edge) Input signal for resetting the trip
signal, sensor error signal and
registers of TOL3Cab
4

START Digital signal (BOOL, active Prior alarm signal
high)
TRIP Digital signal (BOOL, active Tripping signal
high)
CBFP Digital signal (BOOL, active Delayed trip signal for circuit-
high) breaker failure protection (CBFP)
CU_ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active Warning signal for overload
high) current
COND_TEMP Analogue signal (REAL) Calculated temperature of the
conductor
TEMP_PERCENT Analogue signal (REAL) Calculated temperature of the
conductor, per cent value
COOL_TIME Analogue signal (INT) Time which should be waited
before reclosuring is possible
TRIP_TIME Analogue signal (INT) Predicted time to the trip
SENSERR Digital signal (BOOL, active Signal for indicating a sensor
high) error
5
2.1 Configuration

connected to the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs of the function block. The
measuring principle for the current inputs is defined as TRUE RMS current
measurement. The variables indicating the invalidity of sensor measurement are
connected to the Boolean type of input SENS_IV as presented in Figure 3 below.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHIRUWKHFRQQHFWLRQRIWKH6(16B,9LQSXWWKDWLQGLFDWHVWKH
LQYDOLGLW\RIVHQVRUPHDVXUHPHQW
Provided the sensor measurement is not used to compensate the ambient temperature,
the SENS_IV, SENSOR1 and SENSOR2 inputs can be left unconnected. Digital
2.2 Measuring mode
The calculation of the thermal model is based on the TRUE RMS measuring
principle. The thermal load is calculated by means of the highest phase current value.
6
2.3.1 Principle of the thermal model applied
TOL3Cab applies the thermal model of one time constant for temperature
measurement, which means that both the temperature rise and the cooling follow an
exponential curve. The formula applied in calculating the cable temperature is
presented below.
2 t
I -
=[ ( MAX REF )] (1 e ) + AMB

I CABLE
where
Symbol Parameter Description
Output calculated conductor temperature (C)

COND_TEMP
Current Ilx The measured phase current with the highest

TRUE RMS value
CABLE Rated current Maximum sustained load current value allowed

for the cable
MAX Maximum temp Maximum temperature allowed for a cable under
sustained load. The value depends on the
insulation material used; for example, the
maximum temperature for cables with PEX
insulation is +90 C and for those with PVC
insulation +65 C
REF Reference temp temperature in which the rated current has been
defined; for example, +15 C for underground
cables and +25 C for overhead cables
Time constant time constant for the temperature rise and cooling
of a cable
AMB Ambient temp ambient temperature, which can be either a set
value or a one measured by sensors
7
In the initializing stage, i.e. when the auxiliary voltage is connected to the relay, the
function block assumes that the cable temperature has risen to 50% of the difference
between the parameter values Maximum temp and Ambient temp. For example, if
the maximum temperature has been set to + 90 C (cable with PEX insulation) and the
ambient temperature is + 20 C, the relay assumes a temperature of + 55 C for the
cable. The same temperature rise of 50% is also assumed for the cable when the
operation mode is set into use i.e. the parameter is set as follows:
1 = ON; no sensors,
2 = ON; Sensor 1 or
3 = ON; Sensors 1&2.
2.3.2 TRIP output
The TRIP output is activated if TEMP_PERCENT i.e. the conductor temperature-rise

measured in per cent exceeds the value of the Trip temperature parameter that can
be set in the range 80% to 120%.
The so-called delayed trip is set into use by giving the Trip temperature parameter a
value higher than 100% and the Trip delay parameter one higher than 0. For
example, the trip temperature can be set to 120% and the trip delay to 60 min, in
which case the function block trips when the cable load remains above 100% for 60
minutes but does not exceed 120%.
If the TRIP output is chosen not to be used, the parameter is set as follows: ...\Control
setting\Trip & Start = Disabled.
2.3.3 START output
The START output becomes active when the calculated conductor temperature
exceeds the setting of the Prior alarm parameter that can be given a value in the
range 40% to 100%. If the START output is chosen not to be used, the parameter is
set as follows: ...\Control setting\Trip & Start = Disabled.
2.3.4 CU_ALARM output
The CU_ALARM output is activated when one of the three phase currents becomes
so high that even if it remains the same, the cable temperature will exceed the
maximum temperature set for the cable. An active CU_ALARM output is indicated
by a blinking start LED (yellow) on the MMI.
8
2.3.5 COND_TEMP & TEMP_PERCENT outputs
The calculated conductor temperature (C) COND_TEMP as well as the percentual

temperature rise TEMP_PERCENT can be monitored in the following three ways:
1 Via the MMI of the relay, in the view MAIN MENU / Protection lib. / TOL3Cab /
Output data
2 Via serial communication provided the event E10 has not been excluded via the
Event mask control parameter of TOL3Cab. Note that only the percentual
temperature rise TEMP_PERCENT is sent with the event.
3 Via the MIMIC view of the relay provided the connection presented in Figure 4
below has been configured with the Relay Configuration Tool
)LJXUH *UDSKLFUHSUHVHQWDWLRQRIWKH&21'B7(03DQG7(03B3(5&(17
RXWSXWVLQWKH0,0,&YLHZRIWKHUHOD\
TOL3Cab sends an event containing the percentual temperature rise of the conductor
to serial communication once a minute at the most frequent. However, if the change in
the conductor temperature is less than 0,5% of the previous value sent, no event is
sent to serial communication even though one minute has passed since the previous
event.
9
2.3.6 COOL_TIME output
The COOL_TIME output indicates in full minutes the time required for the cable to
cool below the set temperature limit i.e. value of the Reclosure temp. parameter.
The cooling time left (min) can be monitored in the following three ways:
Output data
Event mask control parameter of TOL3Cab
3 Via the MIMIC view of the relay provided the connection has been configured
with the Relay Configuration Tool. For an exemplary connection, see Figure 4
above.
2.3.7 TRIP_TIME output
The TRIP_TIME output indicates the operate time of the function block when the
current remains at the present level. The time estimate can be monitored in the
Output data
above.
2.3.8 Compensation of ambient temperature
In the thermal model (see the formula above in section Principle of the thermal
model applied) the influence of ambient temperature is compensated by the
parameter Ambient temp which can be either a set value or one measured by
temperature sensors. Compensating the ambient temperature is crucial for the correct
function of the thermal model since the environmental conditions of cables to be
protected vary considerably.
The principle of ambient temperature compensation is defined via the control setting
parameter Operation mode. When no external sensors are used to measure the
ambient temperature, the Operation mode parameter is given the value 1 (=ON; no
sensors). In this case the temperature value applied in the thermal model is the one set
for the Ambient temp parameter. On the other hand, when external sensors are used,
the Operation mode parameter is given the value 2 or 3. When the value 2 (=Sensor
1) is set for the parameter, one temperature sensor is used which is connected to the
SENSOR1 input of the function block. The value 3 (=Sensors 1&2) means that two
sensors are used for measuring the ambient temperature, in which case the function
10
applies the higher of the two temperature values in the thermal model for
compensating the ambient temperature.
At any time, the ambient temperature value used for calculating the conductor
temperature can be checked via the MMI or via serial communication in the menu
... / TOL3Cab / Control setting / Ambient temp.
2.3.9 Reclose inhibit
After TOL3Cab has tripped, reclosing is not possible until the conductor temperature
calculated by the formula above (see section Principle of the thermal model
applied) falls below the value set for the Reclosure temp parameter, because the
function block holds the TRIP output active. If the reclosing inhibit is chosen not to
be used, the parameter is set to 100%.
2.3.10 Temperature sensor supervision
TOL3Cab will wait 10 seconds before starting the sensor measurement of ambient
temperature, after which, provided the average measurement value is not within the
allowable range of -40 to +70 degrees, the function block sends a Sensor error event
(E15) and activates the SENSERR output. Moreover, a fault detected in sensor
measurement always causes the start LED (yellow) to blink on the MMI. If the fault is
detected at start-up, the value set for the Ambient temp parameter is applied as
ambient temperature.
The SENSERR output is also activated if TOL3Cab later detects a rapid change of
more than 5 degrees in the measured temperature. As a result the function block sends
a Sensor error event and blinks the start LED again, after which it applies the set
temperature value for compensating the ambient temperature.
2.3.11 BLOCK input
If the BLOCK input is active, the TRIP output cannot be activated, but TOL3Cab still
continues measuring the conductor temperature. Thus, activating the BLOCK signal
prevents neither temperature measurement nor activation of the START or
CU_ALARM outputs.
11
2.4 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.5 Test mode
The START signal remains active until the start situation is over. The output signal
TRIP may have a non-latching or latching feature. When the latching mode has been
the fault has disappeared during the set CBFP delay. In circuit-breaker failure
The default value for the control parameter CBFP time is 0.00 s which means that
the circuit-breaker failure protection is not in use.
12
2.7 Resetting
The TRIP output signal, the sensor error signal and the registers can be reset either via
the RESET input or over the serial bus or the local MMI.

indicators & sensor err. data
1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
13
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for TOL3Cab is 47.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
14
3.2 Setting values

direction
Time constant S1 1...999 min 45 R Heating / cooling time constant
for the cable
Rated current S2 1.0...5000.0 A 300.0 R Maximum load current for the

protected cable
Maximum temp S3 40.0...150.0 C 90.0 R Maximum temperature permitted

for the conductor
Reference temp S4 -50.0...100.0 C 20.0 R Ambient temperature for

determination of the maximum
load current
Trip temperature S5 80.0...120.0 % 100.0 R Tripping temperature, per cent

value from the Maximum temp
Prior alarm S6 40.0...100.0 % 90.0 R Prior alarm temperature, per

cent value
Reclosure temp S7 40.0...100.0 % 80.0 R Temperature value which

enables reclosing
Ambient temp S8 -50.0...100.0 C 40.0 R Setting value for ambient

temperature
15

direction
Time constant S41 1...999 min 45 R/W Heating / cooling time constant for
the cable
Rated current S42 1.0...5000.0 A 300.0 R/W Maximum load current for the
protected cable
Maximum temp S43 40.0...150.0 C 90.0 R/W Maximum temperature permitted

for the conductor
Reference temp S44 -50.0...100.0 C 20.0 R/W Ambient temperature for

load current
Trip temperature S45 80.0...120.0 % 100.0 R/W Tripping temperature, per cent
Prior alarm S46 40.0...100.0 % 90.0 R/W Prior alarm temperature, per cent
value
Reclosure temp S47 40.0...100.0 % 80.0 R/W Temperature value which enables
reclosing
Ambient temp S48 -50.0...100.0 C 40.0 R/W Setting value for ambient
temperature

direction
the cable
protected cable

for the conductor

load current
value
reclosing
temperature
16

direction
Ambient temp V2 -50.0...100.0 C 0.0 R/M Ambient temperature value

2)
group

4)
Trip signal V6 0 or 1 - 0 R/W Selection of latching feature for
TRIP output

and CBFP
Trip delay V8 0...60000 min 0 R/W Operate time of the delayed trip
CBFP time V9 0.00...100.00 s 0.00 R/W Operate time of Circuit-Breaker

Failure Protection
Trip & Start V10 0 or 1 5) - 1 R/W Indicates whether the START

and TRIP outputs are enabled or
not
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - 0 W Resetting of latched trip signal,

sensor error signal and registers

6)




1)
Operation mode 0=Not in use; 1=ON: no sensors; 2=Sensor 1; 3=Sensors 1&2
2)
Group selection 0=Group 1; 1=Group 2; 2=GROUP input
3)
4)
5)
Trip & Start 0=Disabled; 1= Enabled
6)
Testing 0=Do not activate; 1=Activate
17
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Current IL1 I1 0.0...20000.0 A 0.0 R/M Phase current IL1
IL1 (%) I4 0.0...1000.0 % In 0.0 R/M Phase current IL1 in percent
Temp SENSOR1 I7 -50.0...100.0 C 0.0 R/M Temperature value from sensor 1

1)
Input SENS_IV I9 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Signal indicating sensor fault
Input BLOCK I10 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Blocking signal

2)

group 1 and 2

signals and registers of TOL3Cab
1)
Input SENS_IV 0 = Valid;1 = Invalid
2)
18
3.3.2 Output data

direction

1)
Output CU_ALARM O3 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of
CURRENT_ALARM signal
Output COND_TEMP O4 -100.0...300.0 C 0.0 R/M Calculated temperature of

the conductor
Output TEMP(%) O5 0000.0...1000.0 % 0000.0 R/M Per cent value of the

calculated temperature of
the conductor
Output COOL_TIME O6 0...99999 min 0 R/M Waiting time for the

successful reclosure
Output TRIP_TIME O7 0...99999 min 0 R/M Predicted time for the trip
in the overload situation
Output SENSERR O8 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of sensor error

signal
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
3.3.3.2 Parameter values
'DWHDQGWLPH The time stamp indicates the rising edge of the START, TRIP
or TRIGG signal.
2XWSXW75,3 Status of the TRIP signal.
,QSXW75,** Signal for triggering the registers externally.
19
7ULSGHOD\ The elapsed time is recorded as a percentage of the set trip

delay. The time starts accumulating when the temperature rise
exceeds 100%.
3ULPDU\FXUUHQW The measured primary current value ( TRUE RMS ) at the

moment of recording.
2XWSXW&21'B7(03 Temperature value of the conductor at the moment of

recording.
$PELHQWWHPS Ambient temperature value used in the thermal model.
3.3.3.3 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.

direction
Output TRIP V203 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of TRIP output

1)
Input TRIGG V204 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of TRIGG input
Trip delay V205 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Elapsed trip delay
Primary current V206 0.0...20000.0 A 0.0 R/M RMS current value

(maximum of IL1,IL2 & IL3)
Output COND_TEMP V207 -100.0...300.0 C 0.0 R/M Calculated temperature of

the conductor
Ambient temp V208 -50.0...100.0 C 0.0 R/M The ambient temperature

used for the calculation of
the thermal load
1)
20

direction

1)
Output TRIP V303 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of TRIP output
Input TRIGG V304 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of TRIGG input


the conductor

the thermal load
1)

direction

1)


the conductor

the thermal load
1)
21
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from TOL3Cab Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from TOL3Cab Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from TOL3Cab Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from TOL3Cab Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from TOL3Cab Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from TOL3Cab Activated
E6 64 0 Current alarm from TOL3Cab Reset
E7 128 0 Current alarm from TOL3Cab Activated
E8 256 0 BLOCK signal of TOL3Cab Reset
E9 512 0 BLOCK signal of TOL3Cab Activated
E10 1024 0 Calculated temperature of the conductor -
E11 2048 0 Cooling time for the successful reclosure -
E12 4096 0 Test mode of TOL3Cab Off
E13 8192 0 Test mode of TOL3Cab On
E14 16384 0 Sensor error signal from TOL3Cab Reset
E15 32768 0 Sensor error signal from TOL3Cab Activated
E16 65536 0 Predicted trip time from TOL3Cab -
22
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies Current measurement:
f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 1.0%, I = 0.1...10.0 x In
Reset ratio TRIP: (TEMP_PERCENT - 0.1) / Trip temperature
START: (TEMP_PERCENT - 0.1) / Prior alarm


C -
23
1MRS752328-MUM TOL3Cab
Issued: 10/1998
Data subject to change without notice Protection for Cables
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 6
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6
2.3.2 TRIP output................................................................................ 8
2.3.3 START output ............................................................................ 8
2.3.4 CU_ALARM output..................................................................... 8
2.3.5 COND_TEMP & TEMP_PERCENT outputs ............................... 9
2.3.6 COOL_TIME output ................................................................. 10
2.3.7 TRIP_TIME output ................................................................... 10
2.3.9 Reclose inhibit.......................................................................... 11
2.3.11 BLOCK input ............................................................................ 11
2.4 Setting groups ................................................................................... 12
2.5 Test mode ......................................................................................... 12
2.7 Resetting........................................................................................... 13

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 14
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 15
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 16
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 16
TOL3Cab Substation Automation
3.3.1 Input data .................................................................................18

3.3.2 Output data...............................................................................19
3.3.3 Recorded data ..........................................................................19
3.3.4 Events ......................................................................................22
4. Technical Data.........................................................................................23
2
Substation Automation TOL3Cab
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Three-phase thermal protection for cables

Adjustable percentual temperature limits for tripping, prior alarm and reclose
inhibit
Alarm for an overload current and estimate in minutes for the tripping of the
function block
Estimate in minutes on the time required for the cable to cool below the set limit
after the tripping
parameter setting
The thermal model applied uses one time constant and the TRUE RMS current
measuring principle
1.2 Application
function block TOL3Cab used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
TOL3Cab is designed for the thermal protection of three-phase power cables and
overhead lines.

,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
3
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI72/&DEWKHWKUHHSKDVHWKHUPDORYHUORDG
SURWHFWLRQIRUFDEOHV

SENS_IV Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal indicating a sensor fault
measurement
the function block
and 2. When GROUP is FALSE,
group 1 is active.
registers of TOL3Cab
4

START Digital signal (BOOL, active Prior alarm signal
high)
TRIP Digital signal (BOOL, active Tripping signal
high)
CBFP Digital signal (BOOL, active Delayed trip signal for circuit-
high) breaker failure protection (CBFP)
CU_ALARM Digital signal (BOOL, active Warning signal for overload
high) current
COND_TEMP Analogue signal (REAL) Calculated temperature of the
conductor
TEMP_PERCENT Analogue signal (REAL) Calculated temperature of the
conductor, per cent value
COOL_TIME Analogue signal (INT) Time which should be waited
before reclosuring is possible
TRIP_TIME Analogue signal (INT) Predicted time to the trip
SENSERR Digital signal (BOOL, active Signal for indicating a sensor
high) error
5
2.1 Configuration

measurement. The variables indicating the invalidity of sensor measurement are
the SENS_IV, SENSOR1 and SENSOR2 inputs can be left unconnected. Digital
2.2 Measuring mode
6
TOL3Cab applies the thermal model of one time constant for temperature
measurement, which means that both the temperature rise and the cooling follow an
exponential curve. The formula applied in calculating the cable temperature is
presented below.
2 t
I -
=[ ( MAX REF )] (1 e ) + AMB

I CABLE
where
Symbol Parameter Description
Output calculated conductor temperature (C)

COND_TEMP
Current Ilx The measured phase current with the highest

TRUE RMS value
CABLE Rated current Maximum sustained load current value allowed

for the cable
MAX Maximum temp Maximum temperature allowed for a cable under
sustained load. The value depends on the
insulation material used; for example, the
maximum temperature for cables with PEX
insulation is +90 C and for those with PVC
insulation +65 C
REF Reference temp temperature in which the rated current has been
defined; for example, +15 C for underground
cables and +25 C for overhead cables
Time constant time constant for the temperature rise and cooling
of a cable
AMB Ambient temp ambient temperature, which can be either a set
value or a one measured by sensors
7
In the initializing stage, i.e. when the auxiliary voltage is connected to the relay, the
function block assumes that the cable temperature has risen to 50% of the difference
between the parameter values Maximum temp and Ambient temp. For example, if
the maximum temperature has been set to + 90 C (cable with PEX insulation) and the
ambient temperature is + 20 C, the relay assumes a temperature of + 55 C for the
cable. The same temperature rise of 50% is also assumed for the cable when the
operation mode is set into use i.e. the parameter is set as follows:
1 = ON; no sensors,
2 = ON; Sensor 1 or
3 = ON; Sensors 1&2.
2.3.2 TRIP output
The TRIP output is activated if TEMP_PERCENT i.e. the conductor temperature-rise

measured in per cent exceeds the value of the Trip temperature parameter that can
be set in the range 80% to 120%.
which case the function block trips when the cable load remains above 100% for 60
minutes but does not exceed 120%.
setting\Trip & Start = Disabled.
2.3.3 START output
The START output becomes active when the calculated conductor temperature
exceeds the setting of the Prior alarm parameter that can be given a value in the
range 40% to 100%. If the START output is chosen not to be used, the parameter is
set as follows: ...\Control setting\Trip & Start = Disabled.
2.3.4 CU_ALARM output
The CU_ALARM output is activated when one of the three phase currents becomes
so high that even if it remains the same, the cable temperature will exceed the
maximum temperature set for the cable. An active CU_ALARM output is indicated
by a blinking start LED (yellow) on the MMI.
8
2.3.5 COND_TEMP & TEMP_PERCENT outputs
The calculated conductor temperature (C) COND_TEMP as well as the percentual

temperature rise TEMP_PERCENT can be monitored in the following three ways:
Output data
Event mask control parameter of TOL3Cab. Note that only the percentual
temperature rise TEMP_PERCENT is sent with the event.
)LJXUH *UDSKLFUHSUHVHQWDWLRQRIWKH&21'B7(03DQG7(03B3(5&(17
TOL3Cab sends an event containing the percentual temperature rise of the conductor
to serial communication once a minute at the most frequent. However, if the change in
the conductor temperature is less than 0,5% of the previous value sent, no event is
sent to serial communication even though one minute has passed since the previous
event.
9
The COOL_TIME output indicates in full minutes the time required for the cable to
cool below the set temperature limit i.e. value of the Reclosure temp. parameter.
The cooling time left (min) can be monitored in the following three ways:
Output data
above.
The TRIP_TIME output indicates the operate time of the function block when the
current remains at the present level. The time estimate can be monitored in the
Output data
above.
In the thermal model (see the formula above in section Principle of the thermal
model applied) the influence of ambient temperature is compensated by the
parameter Ambient temp which can be either a set value or one measured by
temperature sensors. Compensating the ambient temperature is crucial for the correct
function of the thermal model since the environmental conditions of cables to be
protected vary considerably.
10
applies the higher of the two temperature values in the thermal model for
At any time, the ambient temperature value used for calculating the conductor
temperature can be checked via the MMI or via serial communication in the menu
... / TOL3Cab / Control setting / Ambient temp.
2.3.9 Reclose inhibit
After TOL3Cab has tripped, reclosing is not possible until the conductor temperature
calculated by the formula above (see section Principle of the thermal model
applied) falls below the value set for the Reclosure temp parameter, because the
function block holds the TRIP output active. If the reclosing inhibit is chosen not to
be used, the parameter is set to 100%.
TOL3Cab will wait 10 seconds before starting the sensor measurement of ambient
allowable range of -40 to +70 degrees, the function block sends a Sensor error event
The SENSERR output is also activated if TOL3Cab later detects a rapid change of
2.3.11 BLOCK input
If the BLOCK input is active, the TRIP output cannot be activated, but TOL3Cab still
continues measuring the conductor temperature. Thus, activating the BLOCK signal
prevents neither temperature measurement nor activation of the START or
CU_ALARM outputs.
11
2.4 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.5 Test mode
TRIP may have a non-latching or latching feature. When the latching mode has been
the circuit-breaker failure protection is not in use.
12
2.7 Resetting
The TRIP output signal, the sensor error signal and the registers can be reset either via

1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
13
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for TOL3Cab is 47.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
14
3.2 Setting values

direction
Time constant S1 1...999 min 45 R Heating / cooling time constant
for the cable
Rated current S2 1.0...5000.0 A 300.0 R Maximum load current for the

protected cable
Maximum temp S3 40.0...150.0 C 90.0 R Maximum temperature permitted

for the conductor
Reference temp S4 -50.0...100.0 C 20.0 R Ambient temperature for

load current
Trip temperature S5 80.0...120.0 % 100.0 R Tripping temperature, per cent

Prior alarm S6 40.0...100.0 % 90.0 R Prior alarm temperature, per

cent value
Reclosure temp S7 40.0...100.0 % 80.0 R Temperature value which

enables reclosing
Ambient temp S8 -50.0...100.0 C 40.0 R Setting value for ambient

temperature
15

direction
the cable
protected cable

for the conductor

load current
value
reclosing
temperature

direction
the cable
protected cable

for the conductor

load current
value
reclosing
temperature
16

direction

2)
group

4)
TRIP output

and CBFP

Failure Protection

not
Reset registers V13 1=Reset - 0 W Resetting of latched trip signal,

sensor error signal and registers

6)




1)
Operation mode 0=Not in use; 1=ON: no sensors; 2=Sensor 1; 3=Sensors 1&2
2)
Group selection 0=Group 1; 1=Group 2; 2=GROUP input
3)
4)
5)
Trip & Start 0=Disabled; 1= Enabled
6)
Testing 0=Do not activate; 1=Activate
17
3.3.1 Input data

direction

1)

2)

group 1 and 2

signals and registers of TOL3Cab
1)
2)
18
3.3.2 Output data

direction

1)
Output CU_ALARM O3 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of
CURRENT_ALARM signal
Output COND_TEMP O4 -100.0...300.0 C 0.0 R/M Calculated temperature of

the conductor
Output TEMP(%) O5 0000.0...1000.0 % 0000.0 R/M Per cent value of the

calculated temperature of
the conductor
Output COOL_TIME O6 0...99999 min 0 R/M Waiting time for the

successful reclosure
Output TRIP_TIME O7 0...99999 min 0 R/M Predicted time for the trip
in the overload situation
Output SENSERR O8 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of sensor error

signal
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
or TRIGG signal.
19

exceeds 100%.
3ULPDU\FXUUHQW The measured primary current value ( TRUE RMS ) at the

2XWSXW&21'B7(03 Temperature value of the conductor at the moment of

recording.
3.3.3.3 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.

direction

1)


the conductor

the thermal load
1)
20

direction

1)


the conductor

the thermal load
1)

direction

1)


the conductor

the thermal load
1)
21
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from TOL3Cab Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from TOL3Cab Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from TOL3Cab Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from TOL3Cab Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from TOL3Cab Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from TOL3Cab Activated
E6 64 0 Current alarm from TOL3Cab Reset
E7 128 0 Current alarm from TOL3Cab Activated
E8 256 0 BLOCK signal of TOL3Cab Reset
E9 512 0 BLOCK signal of TOL3Cab Activated
E10 1024 0 Calculated temperature of the conductor -
E11 2048 0 Cooling time for the successful reclosure -
E12 4096 0 Test mode of TOL3Cab Off
E13 8192 0 Test mode of TOL3Cab On
E14 16384 0 Sensor error signal from TOL3Cab Reset
E15 32768 0 Sensor error signal from TOL3Cab Activated
22
4. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 1.0%, I = 0.1...10.0 x In
Reset ratio TRIP: (TEMP_PERCENT - 0.1) / Trip temperature
START: (TEMP_PERCENT - 0.1) / Prior alarm


C -
D -
23
1MRS100048 RE_5_ _
Issued: 10/1998
Version: C
Data subject to change without notice Protection for Devices
(TOL3Dev)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 6
2.3 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 7
2.4.2 TRIP output................................................................................ 7
2.4.3 START output ............................................................................ 8
2.4.4 TEMP(%), STATOR(%) and ROTOR(%) outputs....................... 8
2.4.5 COOL_TIME output ................................................................... 9
2.4.6 TRIP_TIME output ................................................................... 10
2.4.7 RESTART output ..................................................................... 10
2.4.10 BLOCK input ............................................................................ 11
2.5 Application examples ........................................................................ 11
2.5.1 Motor protection ....................................................................... 11
2.5.2 Generator protection ................................................................ 13
2.5.3 Transformer protection............................................................. 13
2.5.4 Starting temperatures at initialization ....................................... 14
2.5.5 Lowering the calculated temperature during operation ............. 14
2.6 Settings ............................................................................................. 14
2.6.1 Setting groups .......................................................................... 14
2.6.2 Setting the function block via basic settings alone.................... 15
2.6.3 Setting parameters................................................................... 15
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 17
RE_5_ _ TOL3Dev ABB Automation
2.9 Resetting ...........................................................................................18

3.1 General..............................................................................................19
3.2 Setting values ....................................................................................20
3.2.1 Actual settings ..........................................................................20
3.2.2 Basic settings ...........................................................................21
3.2.3 Advanced settings ....................................................................21
3.3.1 Input data .................................................................................23
3.3.2 Output data...............................................................................24
3.3.3 Recorded data ..........................................................................24
3.3.4 Events ......................................................................................28
4. Technical Data.........................................................................................29
5. Appendix: Tripping Curves ....................................................................30

5.1 Setting values used in the tripping characteristics..............................30
2
ABB Automation TOL3Dev RE_5_ _
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Three-phase thermal protection for motors, generators and transformers

The thermal model applied uses two time constants and the TRUE RMS current
measuring principle
The function block protects both the stator and the rotor in motor protection
Adjustable percentual temperature limits for tripping, prior alarm and restart
inhibit
Estimate in seconds for the tripping of the function block
Estimate in seconds on the time required for the object to cool below the set limit
after the tripping
parameter setting
1.2 Application
function block TOL3Dev used in products based on the RED 500 Platform, e.g.
motor, generator and transformer protection relays.

,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
3
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI72/'HY

SENS_IV Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal indicating a sensor fault,
measurement
the function block
registers of TOL3Dev
4

START Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Prior alarm signal
TRIP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Tripping signal
CBFP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Delayed trip signal for
circuit-breaker failure
protection (CBFP)
TEMP_PERCENT Analogue signal (REAL) Calculated temperature of
the device, per cent value
TEMP_ROTOR Analogue signal (REAL) Temperature of the rotor,
per cent value from the
maximum temp of the
rotor
TEMP_STATOR Analogue signal (REAL) Temperature of the stator,
maximum temp of the
stator
COOL_TIME Analogue signal (INT) Time in seconds which
should be waited before
restarting is possible
TRIP_TIME Analogue signal (INT) Predicted time to the trip in
seconds
EN_RESTART Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Restart enable signal
SENSERR Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for indicating a
sensor error
5
2.1 Configuration

measurement. The sensor inputs are connected to the inputs of TOL3Dev by means of
the temperature measurement variables found on the Global Variables sheet of the
configuration tool. The variables indicating the invalidity of sensor measurement are
the SENS_IV, SENSOR1 and SENSOR2 inputs can be left unconnected.
6
2.3 Measuring mode
TOL3Dev applies the thermal model of two time constants for temperature
measurement. The basic formula applied in calculating the temperature rise in degrees
Celsius above the ambient temperature is presented below.
= [p * (I / In)2 * n]* (1 - e-t/TC1) + [(1-p) * (I / In)2 * n] * (1 - e-t/TC2) (1)
where
calculated temperature rise (C) in the stator or the rotor

p weighting factor for the short time-constant
I the measured phase current with the highest TRUE RMS value
In rated current of the protected object
n temperature rise (C) with the rated current under sustained load
(=setting parameter Rise(C),I=In)
TC1 the short heating / cooling time-constant
TC2 the long heating / cooling time-constant
2.4.2 TRIP output
The TRIP output is activated if TEMP(%), i.e. the temperature-rise calculated in per
cent, exceeds the value of the Trip temperature parameter that can be set in the
range 80% to 120%.
7
which case the function block trips when the calculated temperature remains above
100% for 60 minutes but does not exceed 120%.
setting\Trip & Start = Disabled. The temperature-rise is however calculated normally.
If the TRIP output has been activated, it will remain active until the temperature
values calculated for the stator and the rotor have both fallen below the limit value set
for the Restart inhibit parameter.
2.4.3 START output
The START output becomes active when the calculated temperature exceeds the
setting of the Prior alarm parameter that can be given a value in the range 40% to
100%. If the START output is chosen not to be used, the parameter is set as follows:
...\Control setting\Trip & Start = Disabled. The temperature-rise is however calculated
normally.
The START output is useful in situations where the temperature of the protected
object approaches the tripping temperature and the alarm is needed beforehand.
2.4.4 TEMP(%), STATOR(%) and ROTOR(%) outputs
The calculated temperature rises TEMP(%) , STATOR(%) and ROTOR(%) can be

monitored in the following three ways:
1 Via the MMI of the relay, in the view MAIN MENU / Protection lib. / TOL3Dev /
Output data
Event mask control parameter of TOL3Dev. Note that only the percentual
temperature rise TEMP(%) is sent with the event.
8
)LJXUH *UDSKLFUHSUHVHQWDWLRQRIWKH7(0352725DQG67$725

TOL3Dev sends an event containing the percentual temperature rise of the object to
serial communication once a minute at the most frequent. However, if the change in
the object temperature is less than 0,5% of the previous value sent, no event is sent to
serial communication even though one minute has passed since the previous event.
If the parameter Device type is set to be MOTOR I, II, III, IV, the temperature rises
ROTOR(%) and STATOR(%) are both calculated and the higher of the two values is
shown in the TEMP(%) output. If the protected object is a generator or a transformer,
the temperature rise ROTOR(%) is not calculated.
The COOL_TIME output indicates in seconds the time required for the object to cool
below the set temperature limit, i.e. the value of the Restart inhibit parameter. The
cooling time left (s) can be monitored in the following three ways:
Output data
Event mask control parameter of TOL3Dev
above.
The COOL_TIME output will show the value 99999 if the TRIP output is not active
or the object is still loaded and can thus not be expected to cool below the set
temperature limit, i.e. the value of the Restart inhibit parameter.
9
The TRIP_TIME output indicates the operate time of the function block in seconds
when the current remains at the present level. The time estimate can be monitored in
the following three ways:
Output data
with the Relay Configuration Tool. For an examplary connection, see Figure 4
above.
The TRIP_TIME output will show the value 99999 if the current is so low that the
tripping temperature limit is not expected to be exceeded. The value 99999 is also
shown if the BLOCK input is activated or the parameter Trip & Start is set to
Disabled.
2.4.7 RESTART output
The RESTART output is TRUE when the calculated temperature TEMP(%) is below
the set value Restart inhibit. When the calculated temperature exceeds the set value,
the RESTART output turns to FALSE.
The influence of ambient temperature is compensated by the parameter Ambient

temp which can be either a set value or one measured by temperature sensors.
Compensating the ambient temperature is important for the correct function of the
thermal model since the environmental conditions of protected objects may vary
considerably.
block applies the higher of the two temperature values in the thermal model for
At any time, the ambient temperature value used in the thermal model can be checked
via the MMI or via serial communication in the menu ... / TOL3Dev / Control setting /
Ambient temp.
10
TOL3Dev will wait 10 seconds before starting the sensor measurement of ambient
allowed range of -40 to +70 degrees, the function block sends a Sensor error event
The SENSERR output is also activated if TOL3Dev later detects a rapid change of
2.4.10 BLOCK input
If the BLOCK input is active, the TRIP output cannot be activated, but TOL3Dev still
continues calculating the temperature of the protected object. Thus, activating the
BLOCK signal prevents neither temperature calculation nor activation of the START
output.
2.5 Application examples
2.5.1 Motor protection
2.5.1.1 Asynchronous motors
TOL3Dev is well suited for protecting squirrel-cage motors. The function block
protects a motor from both short-duration overloadings and long-time overloadings.
The start situation is a good example of short-duration overloadings since particularly
at start-up the rotor is in danger to be overloaded by the starting current, which can be
in the range of five to seven times the rated current of the motor. The start-ups of the
motor also load the stator windings. The stator may constitute a limitation regarding
thermal protection especially when a warm motor is restarted.
Because the function block calculates the temperature rise for both the stator and the
rotor individually, the motor can be fully protected by means of proper settings.
Furthermore, the thermal model of two time constants (formula 1) enables detecting
both the short-time and long-time overloadings.
The Figure 5 below shows an example of the thermal calculations in the loading
situation of an asynchronous motor.
11
The parameter values applied in the example are the following:
Device type = MOTOR IV

Ambient temp = 40 C
S: 1 = 16.5 min R: 1 = 4.1 min
S: 2 = 66.0 min R: 2 = 66.0 min
S: p-factor = 0.6 R: p-factor = 0.5
S:Rise(C), I=In = 90 C R:Rise(C), I=In = 90 C
S:Maximum temp = 155 C R:Maximum temp = 210 C
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIWKHUPDOFDOFXODWLRQVZKHQWKHORDGLQJVHTXHQF\LV6WDUW

VLWXDWLRQVHFRQGV, [,Q/RDGLQJPLQXWHV, [,Q6WDUW
VLWXDWLRQVHFRQGV, [,Q/RDGLQJPLQXWHV, [,Q
The cooling of the motor depends on its structure as well as on the cooling system
applied. In squirrel-cage induction motors the cooling fan is usually installed on the
shaft of the motor, i.e. the motor is self-cooled. Consequently, when the motor stops,
the circulation of cooling air is interrupted as well. As a result the stopped motor
cools down considerably slower than the rotating one. Provided the manufacturer does
not state any other value, the cooling time-constant can be set to3 x the heating time-
constant for fully closed motors with surface cooling and to 4 x the heating time-
constant for through-ventilated motors. For motors with a separate cooling system, the
cooling time-constant is the same as the heating time-constant, and the cooling is set
to 1 x .
Note! When the device type in motor protection (asynchronous or synchronous) is

MOTOR I, MOTOR II, MOTOR III or MOTOR IV, the parameter Gen. & Trafo
has no effect and does not need to be set.
12
2.5.1.2 Synchronous motors
If a synchronous motor is started connecting it directly to the mains, TOL3Dev can

also be used as back-up protection for the rotor, in which case the thermal curves
designed mainly for squirrel-cage motors can be used for the syncronous motor as
well. Especially the thermal curve of MOTOR II is suitable in this kind of a situation.
Provided the synchronous motor is started by means of a transformer or a reactor, the

starting current usually remains below2.5 x the rated current of the motor, in which
case GENERATOR I is the best choice for the parameter Device type. However, if
the motor only tolerates little overloading, the device type should be defined to be
GENERATOR II.
Provided the manufacturer does not state any other value, the cooling time-constant of
the synchronous motor can be set to 3 x the heating time-constant.
2.5.2 Generator protection
By means of the thermal model of two time constants (formula 1), TOL3Dev protects
generators from both short- and long-time overloadings. In generator protection, only
the temperature of the stator is calculated.
The thermal curve GENERATOR I is suitable for hydro generators and for small air-
cooled turbine generators, whereas the thermal curve GENERATOR II is best suited
for large turbine generators.
Provided the manufacturer does not state any other value, the heating time-constant,
i.e. the parameter Gen & Trafo , can be set to 13 min for GENERATOR I and to 7
min for GENERATOR II.
Note! When the device type in generator protection is GENERATOR I or

GENERATOR II, the parameters Starting current, Starting time and No of
starts have no effect and do not need to be set.
2.5.3 Transformer protection
TOL3Dev protects a transformer mainly from short-time overloadings. From long-

time overloadings the transformer is protected by the oil temperature detector
included in its equipment.
The thermal curve of two time constants is typical for a transformer. Provided the
manufacturer does not state any other value, the heating time-constant, i.e. the
parameter Gen & Trafo , can be set to 50 min for a distribution transformer and to
73 min for a supply transformer.
Note! When the device type in transformer protection is TRANSFORMER, the

parameters Starting current, Starting time and No of starts have no effect and
do not need to be set.
13
2.5.4 Starting temperatures at initialization
After a relay reset and an auxiliary power failure, the starting value of the temperature
rise for the stator is 80% and that for the rotor 30%. If the protected unit is not a
motor but a transformer or a generator, the temperature rise calculation is set to 80%
at the reset.
If the push-buttons C+E are pressed simultaneously for 5 s within 90 s from the reset,
the starting values of the temperature rise calculation are reset to zero for both the
stator and the rotor, which may be useful at testing. Note that pressing the push-
buttons later than within 90 s from the reset will have no effect on the temperature
rise calculation.
If the tripping temperature limit has been set below 100%, the calculation of the
temperature rise of the stator is started with the tripping temperature limit - 20%.
2.5.5 Lowering the calculated temperature during operation
If required, the temperature calculated by the relay can be lowered during operation
by setting the maximum temperature allowed for the stator (and the rotor) higher via
the menu Advanced settings of TOL3Dev.
2.6 Settings
2.6.1 Setting groups
The two setting groups available for TOL3Dev are basic settings and advanced
settings. Furthermore, the parameters used by the thermal model are shown under the
heading Actual setting. If the user is only able to set the basic settings, the
suggestions made by the relay for the advanced setting parameters are shown under
actual settings, i.e. the relay is able to internally calculate the advanced setting
parameters. The suggestions made by the relay are also presented in advanced
settings.
Advanced settings include more setting parameters than basic settings, and by means
of the advanced setting parameters the function of the thermal model can be set to be
more accurate. If the user knows e.g. that the short heating time-constant for the rotor
is three minutes, the particular parameter in advanced settings can be set by the user,
after which the relay will show the new set value for the short time-constant under the
heading Actual setting. Therefore, setting a parameter in advanced settings will
always overrule the suggestion the relay has made for the concerned parameter. The
remaining advanced setting parameters, i.e. those unknown by the user, are computed
by the relay.
All the parameters used by the thermal model are shown under the heading Actual
setting. However, these are read-only parameters and can thus not be set by the user.
14
2.6.2 Setting the function block via basic settings alone
The function block TOL3Dev can be set even if only the basic knowledge of the
motor is available. In other words, the information about the motor starting is
sufficient for setting the protection. These settings are meant to be simple, and
although the extra knowledge from the motor is not known, the basic settings suffice
to confirm the adequate function of overload protection.
For instance, the relay calculates one time constant from the motor start-up
information and then internally converts the result into two time constants separately
for the rotor and the stator, depending on the type of the device to be protected.
Unless the type of the device is MOTOR I, II, III or IV, only the temperature of the
stator is calculated.
2.6.3 Setting parameters
'HYLFHW\SHThe parameter specifies the protected object. There are four motor
types, two generator types and one transformer type available. The motor and
generator types are described below.
MOTOR I through-ventilated, rated power < 1500 kW

MOTOR II through-ventilated, rated power > 1500 kW
MOTOR III surface cooling, rated power < 500 kW
MOTOR IV surface cooling, rated power > 500 kW
GENERATOR I hydro generators and small air-cooled turbine
generators
GENERATOR II large turbine generators
There is a relation between the cooling process described in detail in the IEC standard
60034-6 and the motor types described above. For example, motors with the cooling
system IC 00, IC 01, IC 03, IC 06, IC 11 or IC 31 should be set to MOTOR I or
MOTOR II. Correspondingly, motors with e.g. the cooling system IC 00 41, IC 01 41,
IC 01 51, IC 01 61, IC W37 A71 or IC W37 A81 belong to the category MOTOR III
or MOTOR IV.
1RRIVWDUWVThe setting parameter defines how many times the motor is allowed to
be cold-started in succession.
&RROLQJ If all the phase currents of the motor fall below 12 % of the rated current,
the motor is presumed to be stopped. Typically, the cooling of the stopped motor is
slower than that of the rotating one since the cooling device installed on the motor
shaft , e.g. an air fan, will be stopped as well. The parameter Cooling is designed
to compensate the difference in cooling properties. The long time-constants of the
stator and the rotor are separately multiplied with the set value.
1: In the thermal model (formula 1) 1 is the short time-constant that describes the
warming of the windings with regard to iron.
15
2: In the thermal model 2 is the long time-constant utilized to describe the

warming of the iron with regard to cooling air.
SIDFWRUp - factor isthe weighting factor for the short time-constant 1. The figure
below describes the difference in the heating curves between the one time-constant
model and the two time-constant model. Using the two time-constant model, the relay
is able to follow both fast and slow changes in the temperature of the protected object.
As the Figure 6 shows, the higher the p - factor is, the larger is the share of the steep
part of the heating curve. The warming and cooling following the two time-constant
thermal curve is characteristic for motors, generators and transformers. If the p-factor
is set to zero, the thermal image will correspond to the one time-constant model.
)LJXUH (IIHFWRIWKHSIDFWRUDQGWKHGLIIHUHQFHEHWZHHQWKHWZRWLPHFRQVWDQW
DQGWKHRQHWLPHFRQVWDQWPRGHOV
5LVH&, ,QThe parameter defines in degrees Celsius how much the motor,
generator or transformer will warm up above the ambient temperature when loaded by
the rated current. The setting of the rated current is described in chapter
Configuration.
The rated power of ABB motors, for example, is usually based on a temperature rise
of the insulation class B. However, the insulation of the motors is usually made to
withstand class F temperatures. Therefore the default value of the parameter
S: Rise(C), I=In is 90 C, i.e. in accordance with the insulation class B.
When the object to be protected is a transformer, the default value of the parameter
S: Rise(C), I=In is 78 C, i.e. in accordance with the IEC standard 60354.
0D[WHPSHUDWXUHThe maximum temperature value allowed for a stator or a rotor.

For instance, the default maximum temperature of the stator is 155 C when the
Device type parameter is set to be MOTOR or GENERATOR. The value 155 C
corresponds to the insulation class F according to the norm IEC 60085.
16
When the protected object is a transformer, the default maximum temperature is

105 C. This value is chosen, since even though the IEC standard 60354 recommends
98 C as the maximum allowable temperature in long-time loading, the standard also
states that a transformer can withstand the emergency loading for weeks or even
months, which may produce the winding temperature of 140 C. Therefore 105 C is a
safe maximum temperature value for a transformer.
2.7 Test mode
TRIP may have a non-latching or latching feature. If the TRIP output has been set to
function in the latching mode, the TRIP output can only be deactivated by resetting,
which again is possible provided the calculated temperature is below the restart
inhibit level.
the circuit breaker failure protection is not in use.
17
2.9 Resetting
The TRIP output signal, SENSERR output signal and registers can be reset either via
The operation indicators, output signals and recorded data can be reset as follows:

1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
Resets the latched trip signal, sensor error signal and recorded data of this particular function block.
2)
18
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for TOL3Dev is 48.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
19
3.2 Setting values

direction
S: 1 S1 0.1...999.0 min 14.0 R Short time-constant for the stator
S: 2 S2 0.1...999.0 min 69.0 R Long time-constant for the stator
S: p-factor S3 0.00...1.00 - 0.50 R Weighting factor of the S:1
S: Rise(C),I=In S4 50.0...350.0 C 90.0 R Temperature rise of the stator

when loaded by the rated current
S: Maximum temp S5 50.0...350.0 C 155.0 R Maximum temperature allowed

for the stator
R: 1 S6 0.1...999.0 min 4.0 R Short time-constant for the rotor
R: 2 S7 0.1...999.0 min 69.0 R Long time-constant for the rotor
R: p-factor S8 0.00...1.00 - 0.25 R Weighting factor of the R:1
R: Rise(C),I=In S9 50.0...350.0 C 100.0 R Temperature rise of the rotor

R: Maximum temp S10 50.0...350.0 C 200.0 R Maximum temperature allowed

for the rotor
20
3.2.2 Basic settings

direction
Starting current S41 0.10...10.00 x In 6.0 R/W Starting current of the motor set as
a multiple of the rated current
Starting time S42 0.1...120.0 s 12.0 R/W Maximum starting time permitted for
the motor
No of starts S43 1...3 - 2 R/W Number of starts allowed from the

cold state
Device type S44 0...6 1) - 0 R/W Type of the device to be protected
Trip temperature S45 80.0...120.0 % 100 R/W Tripping temperature, per cent value
Prior alarm S46 40.0...100.0 % 90 R/W Prior alarm temperature, per cent
value
Restart inhibit S47 40.0...100.0 % 60 R/W Temperature limit for the successful
restarting
temperature
Cooling S49 1.0...10.0 x 4.0 R/W Cooling time-constant
Gen&Trafo S50 1...999 min 20 R/W Heating time-constant for generator

or transformer
1)
Device type: 0 = MOTOR I; 1 = MOTOR II; 2 = MOTOR III; 3 = MOTOR IV;
4 = GENERATOR I; 5 = GENERATOR II; 6 = TRANSFORMER
3.2.3 Advanced settings

direction
S: 1 V71 0.0...999.0 min 0.0 R/W Short time-constant for the stator
S: 2 V72 0.0...999.0 min 0.0 R/W Long time-constant for the stator
S: p-factor V73 0.00...1.00 - 0.00 R/W Weighting factor of the S:1
S: Rise(C),I=In V74 0.0...350.0 C 0.0 R/W Temperature rise of the stator when
loaded by the rated current
S: Maximum V75 0.0...350.0 C 0.0 R/W Maximum temperature allowed for

temp the stator
R: 1 V76 0.0...999.0 min 0.0 R/W Short time-constant for the rotor
R: 2 V77 0.0...999.0 min 0.0 R/W Long time-constant for the rotor
R: p-factor V78 0.00...1.00 - 0.00 R/W Weighting factor of the R:1
R: Rise(C),I=In V79 0.0...350.0 C 0.0 R/W Temperature rise of the rotor when
R: Maximum V80 0.0...350.0 C 0.0 R/W Maximum temperature allowed for

temp the rotor
21

direction

2)
TRIP output

and CBFP

Failure Protection

not

and registers

4)
1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1=ON: no sensors; 2=Sensor 1; 3=Sensors 1&2
2
3
Trip & Start 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
4
22
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Temp SENSOR1 I7 -50.0...100.0 C 0.0 R/M Temperature value from sensor

1
Temp SENSOR2 I8 -50.0...100.0 C 0.0 R/M Temperature value from sensor

2
Input SENS_IV I9 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal indicating sensor fault

2)

TOL3Dev
1)
2)
23
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output START O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of start signal (prior
alarm)
Output TEMP(%) O3 0000.0...1000.0 % 0000.0 R/M Calculated temp. of the

device, maximum from the
stator and the rotor
Output ROTOR(%) O4 0000.0...1000.0 % 0000.0 R/M Temperature of the rotor,

maximum temp of the rotor
Output STATOR(%) O5 0000.0...1000.0 % 0000.0 R/M Temperature of the stator,

maximum temp of the stator
Output COOL_TIME O6 0...86400 s 0 R/M Waiting time for the

successful restart
Output TRIP_TIME O7 0...86400 s 0 R/M Predicted time to the trip
Output RESTART O8 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Restart enable signal

1)
Output SENSERR O9 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of sensor error signal
1)
2)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
1, Operation 2,...
24
or TRIGG signal.

exceeds 100%.
3ULPDU\FXUUHQW The measured primary current value (TRUE RMS) at the

2XWSXW52725 Temperature value of the rotor at the moment of recording. For

recordings caused by the START output, ROTOR(%) shows
the maximum temperature value of the rotor between the rising
and the falling edge of the START signal.
2XWSXW67$725 Temperature value of the stator at the moment of recording.

For the recordings caused by the START output, STATOR(%)
shows the maximum temperature value of the stator between
the rising and the falling edge of the START signal.
3.3.3.3 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
25

direction

1)
Trip delay V205 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Elapsed trip delay in per
cent

(maximum of IL1,IL2 &
IL3)
Output ROTOR(%) V207 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Temperature of the rotor,

maximum temp of the
rotor
Output STATOR(%) V208 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Temperature of the stator,

maximum temp of the
stator

the thermal load
1)
26

direction

1)
Trip delay V305 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Elapsed trip delay in per cent
Primary current V306 0.0...20000.0 A 0.0 R/M RMS current value (maximum
of IL1,IL2 & IL3)
Output ROTOR(%) V307 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Temperature of the rotor, per
cent value from the maximum
temp of the rotor
Output STATOR(%) V308 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Temperature of the stator, per
temp of the stator

used for the calculation of the
thermal load
1)

direction

1)
Trip delay V405 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Elapsed trip delay in per cent
of IL1,IL2 & IL3)
Output ROTOR(%) V407 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Temperature of the rotor, per
temp of the rotor
Output STATOR(%) V408 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Temperature of the stator, per
temp of the stator

thermal load
1)
27
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from TOL3Dev Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from TOL3Dev Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from TOL3Dev Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from TOL3Dev Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from TOL3Dev Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from TOL3Dev Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK signal of TOL3Dev Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK signal of TOL3Dev Activated
E8 256 0 Calculated temperature -
E9 512 0 Cooling time for the successful restart -
E10 1024 0 Test mode of TOL3Dev Off
E11 2048 0 Test mode of TOL3Dev On
E12 4096 0 Sensor error signal from TOL3Dev Reset
E13 8192 0 Sensor error signal from TOL3Dev Activated
E14 16384 1 START from TOL3Dev <= STATOR Reset
E15 32768 1 START from TOL3Dev <= STATOR Activated
E16 65536 1 TRIP from TOL3Dev <= STATOR Reset
E17 131072 1 TRIP from TOL3Dev <= STATOR Activated
E18 262144 1 START from TOL3Dev <= ROTOR Reset
E19 524288 1 START from TOL3Dev <= ROTOR Activated
E20 1048576 1 TRIP from TOL3Dev <= ROTOR Reset
E21 2097152 1 TRIP from TOL3Dev <= ROTOR Activated
28
4. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 1.0%, I = 0.1...10.0 x In
Reset ratio TRIP: (TEMP(%) - 0.1) / Trip temperature
START: (TEMP(%) - 0.1) / Prior alarm
RESTART: (TEMP(%) - 0.1) / Restart inhibit


C -
29
5. Appendix: Tripping Curves
5.1 Setting values used in the tripping characteristics
Tripping curves (Figures 734) are based on the following setting values.
Device type S: 1 R: 1 S:Rise(oC), R:Rise(oC), S:Maxi- R:Maxi- S: p- R: p- Trip

I=In I=In mum mum fac- fac- tempe-
temp temp tor tor rature
Motor I 2 / 4 2 / 16 90 C 100 C 155 C 200 C 0.5 0.25 100 %
Motor II 2 / 4 2 / 16 90 C 100 C 155 C 200 C 0.5 0.35 100 %
Motor III 2 / 4 2 / 16 90 C 100 C 155 C 200 C 0.6 0.15 100 %
Motor IV 2 / 4 2 / 16 90 C 100 C 155 C 200 C 0.6 0.5 100 %
Generator I 2 / 16 90 C 155 C 0.6 100 %
Generator II 2 / 16 90 C 155 C 0.8 100 %
Transformer 2 / 16 78 C 105 C 0.4 100 %
30
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR1_1b.CNV
x In
)LJXUH 0RWRU,$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH R&,QLWLDOFRQGLWLRQ

&ROGPRWRUQRSUHORDGLQJ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR1_2b.CNV
x In

:DUPPRWRUORQJWLPHSUHORDGLQJZLWKWKHFXUUHQW[,Q
31
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR1_3b.CNV
x In

2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR1_4b.CNV
x
In

32
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR2_1b.CNV
x In
)LJXUH 0RWRU,,$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH R&,QLWLDOFRQGLWLRQ

2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR2_2b.CNV
x In

33
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR2_3b.CNV
x In

2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR2_4b.CNV
x In

34
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR3_1b.CNV
x In
)LJXUH 0RWRU,,,$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH R&,QLWLDOFRQGLWLRQ

2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR3_2b.CNV
x
In

35
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR3_3b.CNV
x In

2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR3_4b.CNV
x In

36
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR4_1b.CNV
x In
)LJXUH 0RWRU,9$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH R&,QLWLDOFRQGLWLRQ

2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR4_2b.CNV
x In

37
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR4_3b.CNV
x In

2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR4_4b.CNV
x In

38
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN1_1b.CNV
x In
)LJXUH *HQHUDWRU,$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH R&,QLWLDOFRQGLWLRQ

&ROGQRSUHORDGLQJ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN1_2b.CNV
x In

:DUPORQJWLPHSUHORDGLQJZLWKWKHFXUUHQW[,Q
39
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN1_3b.CNV
x In

&ROGQRSUHORDGLQJ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN1_4b.CNV
x In

40
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN2_1b.CNV
x In
)LJXUH *HQHUDWRU,,$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH R&,QLWLDOFRQGLWLRQ

&ROGQRSUHORDGLQJ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN2_2b.CNV
x In

41
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN2_3b.CNV
x In

&ROGQRSUHORDGLQJ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN2_4b.CNV
x In

42
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
TRAFO_1b.CNV
x In
)LJXUH 7UDQVIRUPHU$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH R&,QLWLDOFRQGLWLRQ

&ROGQRSUHORDGLQJ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
TRAFO_2b.CNV
x In

43
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
TRAFP_3b.CNV
x In

&ROGQRSUHORDGLQJ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
TRAFO_4b.CNV
15
x In

44
1MRS752329-MUM TOL3Dev
Issued: 10/1998
Version: D/16.04.2002
Data subject to change without notice Protection for Devices
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 3
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 3

2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 6
2.3 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 7
2.4.2 TRIP output................................................................................ 7
2.4.3 START output ............................................................................ 8
2.4.4 TEMP(%), STATOR(%) and ROTOR(%) outputs....................... 8
2.4.5 COOL_TIME output ................................................................... 9
2.4.6 TRIP_TIME output ................................................................... 10
2.4.7 EN_RESTART output............................................................... 10
2.4.10 BLOCK input ............................................................................ 11
2.5 Application examples ........................................................................ 11
2.5.1 Motor protection ....................................................................... 11
2.5.2 Generator protection ................................................................ 13
2.5.3 Transformer protection............................................................. 13
2.5.4 Starting temperatures at initialization ....................................... 14
2.5.5 Lowering the calculated temperature during operation ............. 14
2.6 Settings ............................................................................................. 14
2.6.1 Setting groups .......................................................................... 14
2.6.2 Setting the function block via basic settings alone.................... 15
2.6.3 Setting parameters................................................................... 15
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 17
TOL3Dev Substation Automation
2.9 Resetting ...........................................................................................18
3. Parameters and events...........................................................................19

3.1 General..............................................................................................19
3.2 Setting values ....................................................................................20
3.2.1 Actual settings ..........................................................................20
3.2.2 Basic settings ...........................................................................21
3.2.3 Advanced settings ....................................................................21
3.3.1 Input data .................................................................................23
3.3.2 Output data...............................................................................24
3.3.3 Recorded data ..........................................................................24
3.3.4 Events ......................................................................................29
4. Technical data .........................................................................................30
5. Appendix: Tripping curves.....................................................................31

5.1 Setting values used in the tripping characteristics..............................31
2
Substation Automation TOL3Dev
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Three-phase thermal protection for motors, generators and transformers

The thermal model applied uses two time constants and the TRUE RMS current
measuring principle
The function block protects both the stator and the rotor in motor protection
Adjustable percentual temperature limits for tripping, prior alarm and restart
inhibit
Estimate in seconds for the tripping of the function block
Estimate in seconds on the time required for the object to cool below the set
restarting limit
parameter setting
Reduced cooling rate for motor at standstill
1.2 Application
function block TOL3Dev used in products based on the RED 500 Platform, e.g.
motor, generator and transformer protection relays.

,QWURGXFWLRQ056080
3
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PERORI72/'HY

SENS_IV Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal indicating a sensor fault,
measurement
the function block
registers of TOL3Dev
4

START Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Prior alarm signal
TRIP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Tripping signal
CBFP Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Delayed trip signal for
circuit-breaker failure
protection (CBFP)
TEMP_PERCENT Analogue signal (REAL) Calculated temperature of
the device, percentage of
the maximum allowed
temperature rise of the
device
TEMP_ROTOR Analogue signal (REAL) Temperature of the rotor,
percent value from the
maximum allowed
rotor
TEMP_STATOR Analogue signal (REAL) Temperature of the stator,
maximum allowed
stator
COOL_TIME Analogue signal (DINT) Time in seconds which
should be waited before
restarting is possible
TRIP_TIME Analogue signal (DINT) Estimated time to the trip in
seconds under present
current level
EN_RESTART Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Restart enable signal
SENSERR Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Signal for indicating a
sensor error
5
2.1 Configuration

measurement. The sensor inputs are connected to the inputs of TOL3Dev by means of
the temperature measurement variables found on the global variables sheet of the
configuration tool. The variables indicating the invalidity of sensor measurement are
connected to the input SENS_IV as presented in Figure 2.1.-1 below.
Provided the sensor measurement is not used for compensating the ambient
temperature, the SENS_IV, SENSOR1 and SENSOR2 inputs can be left unconnected.
Digital inputs are connected to the Boolean inputs of the function block and in the
6
2.3 Measuring mode
TOL3Dev applies the thermal model of two time constants for temperature
measurement. The basic formula applied in calculating the temperature rise in degrees
Celsius above the ambient temperature is presented below.
= [p * (I / In)2 * n]* (1 - e-t/TC1) + [(1-p) * (I / In)2 * n] * (1 - e-t/TC2) (1)
where
calculated temperature rise (C) in the stator or the rotor

p weighting factor for the short time-constant
I the measured phase current with the highest TRUE RMS value
In rated current of the protected object
n temperature rise (C) with the rated current under sustained load
(=setting parameter Rise(C),I=In)
TC1 the short heating / cooling time-constant
TC2 the long heating / cooling time-constant
2.4.2 TRIP output
The TRIP output is activated if TEMP(%), i.e. the temperature-rise calculated in

percent, exceeds the value of the Trip temperature parameter that can be set in the
range 80% to 120%.
The so-called delayed trip is set in use by giving the Trip temperature parameter a
value higher than 100% and the Trip delay parameter a nonzero value. For example,
7
the trip temperature can be set to 120% and the trip delay to 60 min, in which case the
function block trips when the calculated temperature remains above 100% for 60
minutes but does not exceed 120%. If the temperature exceeds 120% during trip
delay, the function block trips immediately.
setting\Trip & Start = Disabled. The temperature-rise is however calculated normally.
If the TRIP output has been activated, it will remain active until the temperature
values calculated for the stator and the rotor have both fallen below the limit value set
for the Restart inhibit parameter.
2.4.3 START output
The START output becomes active when the calculated temperature exceeds the
setting of the Prior alarm parameter that can be given a value in the range 40% to
100%. If the START output is chosen not to be used, the parameter is set as follows:
...\Control setting\Trip & Start = Disabled. The temperature-rise is however calculated
normally.
The START output is useful in situations where the temperature of the protected
object approaches the tripping temperature and the alarm is needed beforehand.
2.4.4 TEMP(%), STATOR(%) and ROTOR(%) outputs
The calculated temperature rises TEMP(%), STATOR(%) and ROTOR(%) can be

monitored in the following three ways:
1 Via the HMI of the relay, in the view MAIN MENU / Protection lib. / TOL3Dev /
Output data
2 Via LON communication provided the event E8 has not been excluded via the
Event mask control parameter of TOL3Dev. Note that only the percentual
temperature rise TEMP(%) is sent with the event.
3 Via the MIMIC view of the relay provided the connection presented in Figure
2.4.4.-1 below has been configured with the Relay Configuration Tool
8
)LJXUH*UDSKLFUHSUHVHQWDWLRQRIWKH7(0352725DQG

67$725RXWSXWVLQWKH0,0,&YLHZRIWKHUHOD\
TOL3Dev sends an event containing the percentual temperature rise of the object to
serial communication once every minute. However, if the change in the object
temperature is less than 0,5% of the previous value sent, no event is sent to serial
communication even though one minute has passed since the previous event.
If the parameter Device type is set to be MOTOR I, II, III, IV, the temperature rises
ROTOR(%) and STATOR(%) are both calculated and the higher of the two values is
shown in the TEMP(%) output. If the protected object is a generator or a transformer,
the temperature rise ROTOR(%) is not calculated.
The COOL_TIME output indicates in seconds the time required for the object to cool
below the set temperature limit, i.e. the value of the Restart inhibit parameter. The
cooling time left (s) can be monitored in the following three ways:
Output data
with the Relay Configuration Tool. For an exemplary connection, see Figure
2.4.4.-1 above.
The COOL_TIME output will show the value 0 if the calculated temperature is below
the set "Restart inhibit" level. When temperature is over the restart inhibit level and
the value is still rising, the COOL_TIME output will show the value "99999". If the
calculated temperature is over the Restart inhibit level and the value is decreasing,
9
the value of COOL_TIME output will indicate the time when the thermal capacity
value will drop below the Restart inhibit level with actual load (stopped or
running).
The TRIP_TIME output indicates the operate time of the function block in seconds
when the current remains at the present level. The time estimate can be monitored in
the following three ways:
Output data
with the Relay Configuration Tool. For an examplary connection, see Figure
2.4.4.-1 above.
The TRIP_TIME output will show the value 99999 if the current is so low that the
tripping temperature limit is not expected to be exceeded. The value 99999 is also
shown if the BLOCK input is activated or the parameter Trip & Start is set to
Disabled. After a trip command, the TRIP_TIME will remain zero as long as the
TRIP output is active, or if the trip signal is latched, as long as the EN_RESTART is
active.
2.4.7 EN_RESTART output
The EN_RESTART output is TRUE when the calculated temperature TEMP(%) is

below the set value Restart inhibit. When the calculated temperature exceeds the set
value, the EN_RESTART output turns to FALSE.
The influence of ambient temperature is compensated by the parameter Ambient

temp in the Basic settings menu that can be either a set value or one measured by
temperature sensors. Compensating the ambient temperature is important for the
correct function of the thermal model since the environmental conditions of protected
objects may vary considerably.
parameter Operation mode. When no external sensors are used for measuring the
for the Ambient temp parameter. It is important to note that TOL3Dev smoothes
stepwise on-line changes to the "Ambient temp" parameter. This means that the set
changes are taken into use by exponential model having a time constant of 60
10
minutes. On the other hand, when external sensors are used, the Operation mode
parameter is given the value 2 or 3. When the value 2 (=Sensor 1) is set for the
parameter, one temperature sensor is used which is connected to the SENSOR1 input
of the function block. The value 3 (=Sensors 1&2) means that two sensors are used
for measuring the ambient temperature, in which case the function block applies the
higher of the two temperature values in the thermal model for compensating the
At any time, the ambient temperature value used in the thermal model can be checked
via the HMI or via serial communication in the menu ... / TOL3Dev / Control setting /
Ambient temp.
Provided the temperature measurement value is not within the allowed range of -40 to
+70 degrees, the function block sends a Sensor error event (E13) and activates the
SENSERR output. The same is done also if TOL3Dev detects a rapid change of more
than 5 degrees in the measured temperature. The SENSERR output is always latched
and must be reset as presented in chapter 2.9.
When TOL3Dev detects an error in a sensor measurement, it applies the set

2.4.10 BLOCK input
If the BLOCK input is active, the TRIP output cannot be activated, but TOL3Dev still
continues calculating the temperature of the protected object. Thus, activating the
BLOCK signal prevents neither temperature calculation nor activation of the START
output.
2.5 Application examples
2.5.1 Motor protection
2.5.1.1 Asynchronous motors
TOL3Dev is well suited for protecting squirrel-cage motors. The function block
protects a motor from both short-duration overloadings and long-time overloadings.
The start situation is a good example of short-duration overloadings since particularly
at start-up the rotor is in danger to be overloaded by the starting current, which can be
in the range of five to seven times the rated current of the motor. The start-ups of the
11
motor also load the stator windings. The stator may constitute a limitation regarding
thermal protection especially when a warm motor is restarted.
Because the function block calculates the temperature rise for both the stator and the
rotor individually, the motor can be fully protected by means of proper settings.
Furthermore, the thermal model of two time constants (formula 1) enables detecting
both the short-time and long-time overloadings.
The Figure 2.5.1.1.-1 below shows an example of the thermal calculations in the
loading situation of an asynchronous motor.
The parameter values applied in the example are the following:
Device type = MOTOR IV

Ambient temp = 40 C
S: 1 = 16.5 min R: 1 = 4.1 min
S: 2 = 66.0 min R: 2 = 66.0 min
S: p-factor = 0.6 R: p-factor = 0.5
S:Rise(C), I=In = 90 C R:Rise(C), I=In = 90 C
S:Maximum temp = 155 C R:Maximum temp = 210 C
)LJXUH([DPSOHRIWKHUPDOFDOFXODWLRQVZKHQWKHORDGLQJVHTXHQF\LV
6WDUWVLWXDWLRQVHFRQGV, [,Q/RDGLQJPLQXWHV, [,Q
6WDUWVLWXDWLRQVHFRQGV, [,Q/RDGLQJPLQXWHV, [,Q
The cooling of the motor depends on its structure as well as on the cooling system
applied. In squirrel-cage induction motors the cooling fan is usually installed on the
shaft of the motor, i.e. the motor is self-cooled. Consequently, when the motor stops,
the circulation of cooling air is interrupted as well. As a result the stopped motor
cools down considerably slower than the rotating one. Provided the manufacturer does
not state any other value, the cooling time-constant can be set to3 x the heating time-
constant for fully closed motors with surface cooling and to 4 x the heating time-
constant for through-ventilated motors. For motors with a separate cooling system, the
cooling time-constant is the same as the heating time-constant, and the cooling is set
to 1 x .
12
Note! When the device type in motor protection (asynchronous or synchronous) is

MOTOR I, MOTOR II, MOTOR III or MOTOR IV, the parameter Gen&Trafo
has no effect and does not need to be set.
2.5.1.2 Synchronous motors
If a synchronous motor is started connecting it directly to the mains, TOL3Dev can

also be used as back-up protection for the rotor, in which case the thermal curves
designed mainly for squirrel-cage motors can be used for the synchronous motor as
well. Especially the thermal curve of MOTOR II is suitable in this kind of a situation.
Provided the synchronous motor is started by means of a transformer or a reactor, the

starting current usually remains below2.5 x the rated current of the motor, in which
case GENERATOR I is the best choice for the parameter Device type. However, if
the motor tolerates only little overloading, the device type should be defined to be
GENERATOR II.
Provided the manufacturer does not state any other value, the cooling time-constant of
the synchronous motor can be set to 3 x the heating time-constant.
2.5.2 Generator protection
By means of the thermal model of two time constants (formula 1), TOL3Dev protects
generators from both short- and long-time overloadings. In generator protection, only
the temperature of the stator is calculated.
The thermal curve GENERATOR I is suitable for hydro generators and for small air-
cooled turbine generators, whereas the thermal curve GENERATOR II is best suited
for large turbine generators.
Provided the manufacturer does not state any other value, the heating time-constant,
i.e. the parameter Gen&Trafo , can be set to 13 min for GENERATOR I and to 7
min for GENERATOR II.
Note! When the device type in generator protection is GENERATOR I or

GENERATOR II, the parameters Starting current, Starting time and No of
starts have no effect and do not need to be set.
2.5.3 Transformer protection
TOL3Dev protects a transformer mainly from short-time overloadings. From long-

time overloadings the transformer is protected by the oil temperature detector
included in its equipment.
The thermal curve of two time constants is typical for a transformer. Provided the
manufacturer does not state any other value, the heating time-constant, i.e. the
13
parameter Gen & Trafo , can be set to 50 min for a distribution transformer and to
73 min for a supply transformer.
Note! When the device type in transformer protection is TRANSFORMER, the

parameters Starting current, Starting time and No of starts have no effect and
do not need to be set.
2.5.4 Starting temperatures at initialization
After a relay reset and an auxiliary power failure, the starting value of the temperature
rise for the stator is 80% and that for the rotor 30%. If the protected unit is not a
motor but a transformer or a generator, the temperature rise calculation is set to 80%
at the reset.
If the push-buttons C+E are pressed simultaneously for 5 s within 90 s from the reset,
the starting values of the temperature rise calculation are reset to zero for both the
stator and the rotor, which may be useful at testing. Note that pressing the push
buttons later than within 90 s from the reset will have no effect on the temperature
rise calculation.
If the tripping temperature limit has been set below 100%, the calculation of the
temperature rise of the stator is started with the tripping temperature limit - 20%.
2.5.5 Lowering the calculated temperature during operation
If required, the temperature TEMP(%) calculated by the relay can be lowered during
operation by setting the maximum temperature allowed for the stator (and the rotor)
higher via the menu Advanced settings of TOL3Dev.
2.6 Settings
2.6.1 Setting groups
The two setting groups available for TOL3Dev are basic settings and advanced
settings. Furthermore, the parameters used by the thermal model are shown under the
heading Actual setting. If the user is only able to set the basic settings, the
suggestions made by the relay for the advanced setting parameters are shown under
actual settings, i.e. the relay is able to internally calculate the advanced setting
parameters. The suggestions made by the relay are also presented in advanced
settings.
Advanced settings include more setting parameters than basic settings, and by means
of the advanced setting parameters the function of the thermal model can be set to be
more accurate. If the user knows e.g. that the short heating time-constant for the rotor
14
is three minutes, the particular parameter in advanced settings can be set by the user,
after which the relay will show the new set value for the short time-constant under the
heading Actual setting. Therefore, setting a parameter in advanced settings will
always overrule the suggestion the relay has made for the concerned parameter. The
remaining advanced setting parameters, i.e. those unknown by the user, are computed
by the relay.
All the parameters used by the thermal model are shown under the heading Actual
setting. However, these are read-only parameters and can thus not be set by the user.
2.6.2 Setting the function block via basic settings alone
The function block TOL3Dev can be set even if only the basic knowledge of the
motor is available. In other words, the information about the motor starting is
sufficient for setting the protection. These settings are meant to be simple, and
although the extra knowledge from the motor is not known, the basic settings suffice
to confirm the adequate function of overload protection.
For instance, the relay calculates one time constant from the motor start-up
information and then internally converts the result into two time constants separately
for the rotor and the stator, depending on the type of the device to be protected.
Unless the type of the device is MOTOR I, II, III or IV, only the temperature of the
stator is calculated.
2.6.3 Setting parameters
'HYLFHW\SHThe parameter specifies the protected object. There are four motor
types, two generator types and one transformer type available. The motor and
generator types are described below.
MOTOR I through-ventilated, rated power < 1500 kW

MOTOR II through-ventilated, rated power > 1500 kW
MOTOR III surface cooling, rated power < 500 kW
MOTOR IV surface cooling, rated power > 500 kW
GENERATOR I hydro generators and small air-cooled turbine
generators
GENERATOR II large turbine generators
There is a relation between the cooling process described in detail in the IEC standard
60034-6 and the motor types described above. For example, motors with the cooling
system IC 00, IC 01, IC 03, IC 06, IC 11 or IC 31 should be set to MOTOR I or
MOTOR II. Correspondingly, motors with e.g. the cooling system IC 00 41, IC 01 41,
IC 01 51, IC 01 61, IC W37 A71 or IC W37 A81 belong to the category MOTOR III
or MOTOR IV.
1RRIVWDUWVThe setting parameter defines how many times the motor is allowed to
be started from initial cold condition state.
15
&RROLQJ If all the phase currents of the motor fall below 12 % of the rated current,
the motor is presumed to be stopped. Typically, the cooling of the stopped motor is
slower than that of the rotating one since the cooling device installed on the motor
shaft, e.g. an air fan, will be stopped as well. The parameter Cooling is designed
to compensate the difference in cooling properties. The long time-constants of the
stator and the rotor are separately multiplied with the set value.
1: In the thermal model (formula 1) 1 is the short time-constant that describes the
warming of the windings with regard to iron.
2: In the thermal model 2 is the long time-constant utilized to describe the

warming of the iron with regard to cooling air.
SIDFWRUp - factor isthe weighting factor for the short time-constant 1. The figure
below describes the difference in the heating curves between the one time-constant
model and the two time-constant model. Using the two time-constant model, the relay
is able to follow both fast and slow changes in the temperature of the protected object.
As the Figure 2.6.3-1 shows, the higher the p - factor is, the larger is the share of the
steep part of the heating curve. The warming and cooling following the two time-
constant thermal curve is characteristic for motors, generators and transformers. If the
p-factor is set to zero, the thermal image will correspond to the one time-constant
model.
)LJXUH(IIHFWRIWKHSIDFWRUDQGWKHGLIIHUHQFHEHWZHHQWKHWZRWLPH
FRQVWDQWDQGWKHRQHWLPHFRQVWDQWPRGHOV
5LVH&, ,QThe parameter defines in degrees Celsius how much the motor,
generator or transformer will warm up above the ambient temperature when loaded by
the rated current. The setting of the rated current is described in chapter
Configuration.
16
The rated power of ABB motors, for example, is usually based on a temperature rise
of the insulation class B. However, the insulation of the motors is usually made to
withstand class F temperatures. Therefore the default value of the parameter
S: Rise(C),I=In is 90 C, i.e. in accordance with the insulation class B.
When the object to be protected is a transformer, the default value of the parameter
S: Rise(C),I=In is 78 C, i.e. in accordance with the IEC standard 60354.
0D[WHPSHUDWXUHThe maximum temperature value allowed for a stator or a rotor.

For instance, the default maximum temperature of the stator is 155 C when the
Device type parameter is set to be MOTOR or GENERATOR. The value 155 C
corresponds to the insulation class F according to the norm IEC 60085.
When the protected object is a transformer, the default maximum temperature is

105 C. This value is chosen, since even though the IEC standard 60354 recommends
98 C as the maximum allowable temperature in long-time loading, the standard also
states that a transformer can withstand the emergency loading for weeks or even
months, which may produce the winding temperature of 140 C. Therefore 105 C is a
safe maximum temperature value for a transformer.
2.7 Test mode
TRIP may have a non-latching or latching feature. If the TRIP output has been set to
function in the latching mode, the TRIP output can only be deactivated by resetting,
which again is possible provided the calculated temperature is below the restart
inhibit level.
The function block provides a delayed trip signal CBFP for the circuit-breaker failure
protection. The CBFP trip is issued after the trip if the circuit breaker has not been
able to break fault currents during the set CBFP delay. Unsuccessful breaker
operation is detected from phase currents. If any of the phase currents remain above
1% p.u. for the set CBFP operate time, the CBFP trip is activated. In circuit-breaker
failure protection, the CBFP output can be used for operating a circuit breaker in front
of the circuit breaker of the machine. The control parameter "Trip pulse" sets also the
width of the CBFP output signal.
the circuit breaker failure protection is not in use.
17
2.9 Resetting
The TRIP output signal, SENSERR output signal and registers can be reset either via
the RESET input or over the serial bus or the local HMI.
The operation indicators, output signals and recorded data can be reset as follows:

1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
Resets the latched trip signal, sensor error signal and recorded data of this particular function block.
2)
18
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for TOL3Dev is 48.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
19
3.2 Setting values

direction
S: 1 S1 0.1...999.0 min 14.0 R Short time-constant for the stator
S: 2 S2 0.1...999.0 min 69.0 R Long time-constant for the stator
S: p-factor S3 0.00...1.00 - 0.50 R Weighting factor of the S:1
S: Rise(C),I=In S4 50.0...350.0 C 90.0 R Temperature rise of the stator

S: Maximum temp S5 50.0...350.0 C 155.0 R Maximum temperature allowed

for the stator
R: 1 S6 0.1...999.0 min 4.0 R Short time-constant for the rotor
R: 2 S7 0.1...999.0 min 69.0 R Long time-constant for the rotor
R: p-factor S8 0.00...1.00 - 0.25 R Weighting factor of the R:1
R: Rise(C),I=In S9 50.0...350.0 C 100.0 R Temperature rise of the rotor

R: Maximum temp S10 50.0...350.0 C 200.0 R Maximum temperature allowed

for the rotor
20
3.2.2 Basic settings

direction
Starting current S41 0.10...10.00 x In 6.0 R/W Starting current of the motor set as
a multiple of the rated current
Starting time S42 0.1...120.0 s 12.0 R/W Maximum starting time permitted for
the motor
No of starts S43 1...3 - 2 R/W Number of starts allowed from the

cold state
Device type S44 0...6 1) - 0 R/W Type of the device to be protected
Trip temperature S45 80.0...120.0 % 100 R/W Tripping temperature, percent value
Prior alarm S46 40.0...100.0 % 90 R/W Prior alarm temperature, percent

value
Restart inhibit S47 40.0...100.0 % 60 R/W Temperature limit for the successful
restarting
temperature
Cooling S49 1.0...10.0 x 4.0 R/W Cooling time multiplier for motor at
standstill
Gen&Trafo S50 1...999 min 20 R/W Heating time-constant for generator

or transformer
1)
Device type: 0 = MOTOR I; 1 = MOTOR II; 2 = MOTOR III; 3 = MOTOR IV;
4 = GENERATOR I; 5 = GENERATOR II; 6 = TRANSFORMER
3.2.3 Advanced settings

direction
S: 1 V71 0.0...999.0 min 0.0 R/W Short time-constant for the stator
S: 2 V72 0.0...999.0 min 0.0 R/W Long time-constant for the stator
S: p-factor V73 0.00...1.00 - 0.00 R/W Weighting factor of the S:1
S: Rise(C),I=In V74 0.0...350.0 C 0.0 R/W Temperature rise of the stator when
S: Maximum V75 0.0...350.0 C 0.0 R/W Maximum temperature allowed for

temp the stator
R: 1 V76 0.0...999.0 min 0.0 R/W Short time-constant for the rotor
R: 2 V77 0.0...999.0 min 0.0 R/W Long time-constant for the rotor
R: p-factor V78 0.00...1.00 - 0.00 R/W Weighting factor of the R:1
R: Rise(C),I=In V79 0.0...350.0 C 0.0 R/W Temperature rise of the rotor when
R: Maximum V80 0.0...350.0 C 0.0 R/W Maximum temperature allowed for

temp the rotor
21

direction

2)
TRIP output

and CBFP

Failure Protection

not

and registers

4)
1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1= ON: no sensors; 2= ON: Sensor 1; 3 = ON: Sensors 1&2
2
3
Trip & Start 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
4
22
3.3.1 Input data

direction

1)

2)

signals and registers of TOL3Dev
1)
2)
23
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output START O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of start signal (prior
alarm)
Output TEMP(%) O3 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Calculated temp. of the

device, maximum from the
stator and the rotor
Output ROTOR(%) O4 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Temperature of the rotor,

maximum allowed
temperature rise of the rotor
Output STATOR(%) O5 0.0...1000.0 % 0.0 R/M Temperature of the stator,

maximum allowed
stator
Output COOL_TIME O6 0...86400 s 0 R/M Waiting time for the

successful restart
Output TRIP_TIME O7 0...86400 s 0 R/M Estimated time to the trip
Output O8 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Restart enable signal

EN_RESTART
Output SENSERR O9 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of sensor error signal

1)
2)
Output EN_RESTART 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
input.
No recordings are done if trip and start outputs are disabled via control setting "Trip
& Start". However, the TRIGG input is functional.
1, Operation 2,...
24
or TRIGG signal.

exceeds 100%.
3ULPDU\FXUUHQW The measured primary current value (TRUE RMS) at the

2XWSXW52725 Temperature value of the rotor at the moment of recording. For

recordings caused by the START output, ROTOR(%) shows
the maximum temperature value of the rotor between the rising
and the falling edge of the START signal.
2XWSXW67$725 Temperature value of the stator at the moment of recording.

For the recordings caused by the START output, STATOR(%)
shows the maximum temperature value of the stator between
the rising and the falling edge of the START signal.
3.3.3.3 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
25

direction

1)
Trip delay V205 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Elapsed trip delay in

percent


maximum allowed
rotor

maximum allowed
stator

the thermal load
1)
26

direction

1)
Trip delay V305 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Elapsed trip delay in percent
of IL1,IL2 & IL3)

maximum allowed

maximum allowed
temperature rise of the stator

thermal load
1)
27

direction

1)
Trip delay V405 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Elapsed trip delay in percent
of IL1,IL2 & IL3)

maximum allowed

maximum allowed
temperature rise of the stator

thermal load
1)
28
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from TOL3Dev Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from TOL3Dev Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from TOL3Dev Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from TOL3Dev Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from TOL3Dev Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from TOL3Dev Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK signal of TOL3Dev Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK signal of TOL3Dev Activated
E8 256 0 Calculated temperature -
E9 512 0 Cooling time for the successful restart -
E10 1024 0 Test mode of TOL3Dev Off
E11 2048 0 Test mode of TOL3Dev On
E12 4096 0 Sensor error signal from TOL3Dev Reset
E13 8192 0 Sensor error signal from TOL3Dev Activated
E14 16384 1 START from TOL3Dev <= STATOR Reset
E15 32768 1 START from TOL3Dev <= STATOR Activated
E16 65536 1 TRIP from TOL3Dev <= STATOR Reset
E17 131072 1 TRIP from TOL3Dev <= STATOR Activated
E18 262144 1 START from TOL3Dev <= ROTOR Reset
E19 524288 1 START from TOL3Dev <= ROTOR Activated
E20 1048576 1 TRIP from TOL3Dev <= ROTOR Reset
E21 2097152 1 TRIP from TOL3Dev <= ROTOR Activated
E22 4194304 0 Estimated trip time from TOL3Cab -
29
4. Technical data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 1.0%, I = 0.1...10.0 x In
Operate time accuracy 2% or 0.5s
Reset ratio TRIP: (TEMP(%) - 0.1) / Trip temperature
START: (TEMP(%) - 0.1) / Prior alarm
EN_RESTART: (TEMP(%) - 0.1) / Restart inhibit


C -
D - operation of the COOL_TIME output has been changed
30
5. Appendix: Tripping curves
5.1 Setting values used in the tripping characteristics
Tripping curves (Figures 5.1.-1 5.1.-28) are based on the following setting values.
Device type S: 1 R: 1 S:Rise(oC), R:Rise(oC), S:Maxi- R:Maxi- S: p- R: p- Trip

I=In I=In mum mum fac- fac- tempe-
temp temp tor tor rature
Motor I 2 / 4 2 / 16 90 C 100 C 155 C 200 C 0.5 0.25 100 %
Motor II 2 / 4 2 / 16 90 C 100 C 155 C 200 C 0.5 0.35 100 %
Motor III 2 / 4 2 / 16 90 C 100 C 155 C 200 C 0.6 0.15 100 %
Motor IV 2 / 4 2 / 16 90 C 100 C 155 C 200 C 0.6 0.5 100 %
Generator I 2 / 16 90 C 155 C 0.6 100 %
Generator II 2 / 16 90 C 155 C 0.8 100 %
Transformer 2 / 16 78 C 105 C 0.4 100 %
31
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR1_1b.CNV
x In

2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR1_2b.CNV
x In

32
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR1_3b.CNV
x In

2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR1_4b.CNV
x
In

33
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR2_1b.CNV
x In

2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR2_2b.CNV
x In

34
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR2_3b.CNV
x In

2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR2_4b.CNV
x In

35
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR3_1b.CNV
x In

2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR3_2b.CNV
x
In
)LJXUH0RWRU,,,$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH R&,QLWLDOFRQGLWLRQ
36
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR3_3b.CNV
x In

2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR3_4b.CNV
x In
)LJXUH0RWRU,,,$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH R&,QLWLDOFRQGLWLRQ
37
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR4_1b.CNV
x In
)LJXUH0RWRU,9$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH R&,QLWLDOFRQGLWLRQ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR4_2b.CNV
x In
38
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR4_3b.CNV
x In
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
MOTOR4_4b.CNV
x In
39
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN1_1b.CNV
x In
)LJXUH*HQHUDWRU,$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH R&,QLWLDOFRQGLWLRQ
&ROGQRSUHORDGLQJ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN1_2b.CNV
x In
40
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN1_3b.CNV
x In
&ROGQRSUHORDGLQJ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN1_4b.CNV
x In
41
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN2_1b.CNV
x In
)LJXUH*HQHUDWRU,,$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH R&,QLWLDOFRQGLWLRQ
&ROGQRSUHORDGLQJ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN2_2b.CNV
x In
42
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN2_3b.CNV
x In
&ROGQRSUHORDGLQJ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
GEN2_4b.CNV
x In
43
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
TRAFO_1b.CNV
x In
)LJXUH7UDQVIRUPHU$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH R&,QLWLDOFRQGLWLRQ
&ROGQRSUHORDGLQJ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
TRAFO_2b.CNV
x In
44
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
TRAFP_3b.CNV
x In
&ROGQRSUHORDGLQJ
2
min
120
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
TRAFO_4b.CNV
15
x In
45
1MRS100066 (UE6Low) RE_5_ _
1MRS100067 (UE6High) Three-Phase
Issued: 10/1998
Version: C Underexcitation Protection
Data subject to change without notice Low-Set Stage (UE6Low)
High-Set Stage (UE6High)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6
2.3.1 Underexcitation protection.......................................................... 6
2.3.2 Excitation current monitoring...................................................... 8
2.5 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 9
2.6 Test mode ......................................................................................... 10
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 11

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 12
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 13
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 13
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 13
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 13
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 15
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 15
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 16
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 19
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 20

RE_5_ _ UE6Low ABB Automation
UE6High
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Single-phase or three-phase protection against underexcitation / loss of excitation

for motors and generators
Underexcitation protection based on the offset-mho characteristic
Two alternative measuring principles: the numerically calculated fundamental
frequency component or the positive-sequence component of the impedance
Possibility for excitation current (EX_CU) monitoring
The operating direction forward or reverse can be selected
Internal undervoltage blocking (< 0.05 x Un) to prevent maloperation during low
voltage
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase underexcitation function

blocks UE6Low and UE6High used products based on the RED 500 Platform. The
low-set stage and the high-set stage are identical except for the operate time.
The function blocks UE6Low and UE6High are designed for the single-phase or
three-phase underexcitation protection of motors and generators whenever the DT
(Definite Time) characteristic is appropriate.
X<
X<<
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI8(/RZDQG8(+LJK)RU,(&V\PEROV
2
ABB Automation UE6Low RE_5_ _
UE6High
3
UE6High

U1 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring voltage U1 (or
U12)
U23)
U31)
GROUP Digital signal (BOOL, active Control input for switching between
high) the setting groups 1 and 2. When
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. Input signal for resetting the trip
edge) signal and registers of UE6Low or
UE6High
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active External blocking signal
high)
EX_CU Digital signal (BOOL, active Input for monitoring the excitation
high) current

configuration error
4
UE6High
2.1 Configuration

Rogowski coils and voltages by means of voltage transformers or voltage dividers.
connected to the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs of the function block and
correspondingly, the phase-to-earth voltages U1, U2 and U3 are connected to the inputs
U1, U2 and U3 of the function block. If phase-to-phase voltages are used, they are
connected as follows: U12 to the input U1, U23 to U2 and U31 to U3.
It is also possible to use the function block in a single-phase mode if there is only one
phase-to-earth voltage (U1) available. In this case the phase-to-earth voltage U1 and
current IL1 are connected to the corresponding inputs of the function block. If only one
phase-to-phase voltage (U12) is available, it is connected to the input U1 of the
function block. Note, however, that the two currents IL1 and IL2 are required if the
phase-to-phase voltage U12 is used. The following table explains all the allowed
connection configurations and the measuring modes that may be used with the
corresponding configurations.
Measuring mode Measuring Minimum requirements Display of the

mode number for signal connection1) measuring mode
on the MMI
Not in use 0 - Not in use
One phase, phase-earth voltage, 1 U1, IL1 U1&IL1

fund.freq.
One phase, phase-phase 2 U12, IL1, IL2 U12&IL1&IL2
voltage, fund. Freq.
Three phase, phase-earth 3 U1, U2, U3, IL1, IL2, IL3 3 phase-earth
voltages, fund. Freq.
Three phase, phase-phase 4 U12, U23, U31, IL1, IL2, IL3 3 phase-phase
Three phase, phase-earth 5 U1, U2, U3, IL1, IL2, IL3 3 p-e pos.seq.
voltages, pos.seq.
Three phase, phase-phase 6 U12, U23, U31, IL1, IL2, IL3 3 p-p pos.seq.
voltages, pos. seq.
1)
Use of a measuring mode is also possible when more signals than mentioned here are connected. If,
for example, all phase-to-phase voltages and currents are connected, one of the measuring modes 0,
2, 4 and 6 may be used. Signals must be connected to the corresponding inputs of the function block
(see text above).
5
UE6High
Note! The current signals should be connected from the neutral point side of the
generator (symbols IL1, IL2, IL3). The signals IL1b, IL2b and IL3b may be used
instead if, for some reason, the signals need to be connected from the network side.
As a default measuring mode UE6Low and UE6High use either U12&IL1&IL2 (=2)
or U1&IL1 (=1). The default value depends on the signal(s) connected to the voltage
input(s): for phase-to-phase voltage(s) the default value is 2 and for phase-to-earth
voltage(s) 1. If neither of the two measuring modes is possible due to a configuration
error, the measuring mode is set to Not in use (=0), a configuration error event E13
is sent and the ERR output is activated. The measuring mode remains Not in use
until the configuration error is corrected and the correct configuration is downloaded
to the relay.
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block operates on two alternative measuring principles: the numerically
calculated fundamental frequency components or the positive-sequence values of the
symmetrical components of currents and voltages. The measuring mode can be
selected with either an MMI parameter or a serial communication parameter. In one-
phase mode, only the fundamental frequency component calculation is possible.
duration of the underexcitation exceed the set definite operate time, the function block
operates (=the TRIP signal is set to TRUE). The delay of the heavy-duty output relay
is included in the total operate time.
The DT timer is allowed to run only if the BLOCK signal is inactive, i.e. its value is
FALSE. When the blocking signal becomes active, i.e. its value turns to TRUE, the
timer will be stopped (frozen).
2.3.1 Underexcitation protection
Underexcitation protection protects synchronous machines against an unstable

operating curve due to loss of excitation. Partial or total loss of excitation causes a
reactive-power intake from the network to a generator and the reactance of the system
viewed from the machine terminals turns negative. This kind of drop of reactance
condition can be detected by measuring the impedance of the system.
The low-set stage of underexcitation protection (UE6Low) is generally used to

produce a steady-state stability limit for the machine. The wide time setting range of
6
UE6High
the function block allows temporary underexcitation conditions and gives time for
corrective operations.
The high-set stage of underexcitation protection (UE6High) is generally used to

produce a dynamic-state stability limit for the machine. The time setting range of the
function block is more limited than that in the low-set stage. The purpose of the high-
set stage is to make an immediate trip.
The operation is based on the offset-mho characteristic. The impedance of the system
in any phase can be represented as a phasor in an impedance plane in which the
horizontal coordinate is resistance (R) and the vertical coordinate reactance (X). The
operating curve is a circle in the impedance plane and the circle is parameterized with
the following three setting values: circle offset, circle diameter and circle
displacement (Figure 3). If the calculated impedance value exceeds the setting limits
i.e. the phasor enters the circle in the impedance plane, the relay starts, and if the
impedance stays within the circle including hysteresis, the relay trips after the set
operate time. In three-phase mode the impedance is calculated in every phase (in
fundamental frequency modes) and the lowest impedance value is taken into account.
)LJXUH 6HWWLQJSDUDPHWHUVIRUWKHRIIVHWPKRFLUFOH1RWHWKDWRIIVHWLVWKH
GLVWDQFHEHWZHHQWKHUHVLVWDQFHD[LVDQGWKHWRSRIWKHFLUFOH
Setting values are calculated as follows:
2IIVHWDistance of the top of the circle from the R-axis. This is usually set equal to -
xd/2 , where xd is the transient reactance of the machine. The sign of the setting value
determines the location of the circle regarding the R-axis. If the sign is negative as
usual, the whole circle lies below the R-axis as in Figure 3.
'LDPHWHUNormally set equal to the generator synchronous reactance xd. Determines

the size of the impedance circle.
'LVSODFHPHQWDisplacement of the center of the circle from the reactance axis or, in
other words, the R -coordinate of the center. The setting can be used to adjust the
7
UE6High
sensitivity of the underexcitation protection. If the sign of the setting is positive, the
circle is shifted to the right i.e. closer to the normal operating point. Accordingly, if
the sign is negative, the circle is shifted to the left and moves thus away from the
normal operating point.
Note that the settings are given as per unit (p.u.) values. Usually the machine
manufacturers give the xd and xd values in p.u. but in case there are only ohm values
available, it is necessary to convert them to p.u. values. The base impedance (ZN) is
8 12
=1 =
61
where UN is the rated (phase-to-phase) voltage and SN the rated power of the protected
machine.
The p.u. value of the reactance (Xp.u.) is the ratio of the reactance in ohms (Xohm) to
the base impedance (ZN), that is
; RKP
; S.X. =
=1
2.3.2 Excitation current monitoring
If the status information of the excitation current is connected to the digital input
EX_CU of the relay and the excitation current monitoring is selected from the control
settings via the parameter Excit.curr.trip, total loss of the excitation current or a
failure in the excitation system will cause DT operation similar to that described
above. Indication of the excitation current can be a boolean input from the AVR
(Automatic Voltage Regulator), for example. The input signal is active high, i.e. the
input must be TRUE when the excitation current is lost. If the input signal is active
low, it can be easily inverted by means of the configuration tool.
Underexcitation / loss of excitation can contain so-called drop-off periods during

which the impedance is outside the set offset-mho characteristic. Without the delayed
reset function the DT timer would reset once the impedance drops off.
When the DT timer has started, it goes on running normally even if the impedance
In Figures 4 and 5 the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the impedance is
inside the set offset-mho circle and FALSE when the impedance is outside the circle.
8
UE6High
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
elapsed during the drop-off period, the function block will trip once the impedance
enters the circle again (Figure 5).
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
2.5 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
9
UE6High
2.6 Test mode
have reset.
10
UE6High
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F066V013 for UE6Low X X
1)
Parameter F067V013 for UE6High X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
11
UE6High
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for UE6Low is 66 and that for UE6High 67.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
12
UE6High
3.2 Setting values

direction
Circle offset S1 -10.00...10.00 p.u. -0.10 R Distance of the top of the
impedance circle from the R-axis
Circle diameter S2 0.01...60.00 p.u. 2.00 R Diameter of the impedance circle
Cir.displacem. S3 -10.00...10.00 p.u. 0.00 R Displacement of the center of the

impedance circle from the X-axis
Operate time S4 UE6Low: s 5.00 R Tripping time

0.06...60.00
UE6High: 1.00
0.06...10.00

direction
Circle offset S41 -10.00...10.00 p.u. -0.10 R/W Distance of the top of the
Circle diameter S42 0.01...60.00 p.u. 2.00 R/W Diameter of the impedance circle
Cir.displacem. S43 -10.00...10.00 p.u. 0.00 R/W Displacement of the center of the
Operate time S44 UE6Low: s 5.00 R/W Tripping time

0.06...60.00
UE6High: 1.00
0.06...10.00

direction

0.06...60.00
UE6High: 1.00
0.06...10.00
13
UE6High

direction
Measuring mode V1 0...6 1) - 1 or 2 8) R/W Selection of the measuring mode
Excit.curr.trip V2 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/W Selection of the excitation current

trip
Drop-off time V3 0.00...10.00 s 3.00 R/W Drop-off time

group

signal

TRIP output

CBFP
CBFP
Oper. direction V10 0 or 1 6) - 0 R/W Operation direction

registers

7)
1)
Measuring mode 0 = Not in use, 1 = One phase, phase-earth voltage, fund.freq.,
2 = One phase, phase-phase voltage, fund. freq.,
3= Three phase, phase-earth voltages, fund. freq.,
4 = Three phase, phase-phase voltages, fund. freq.,
5 = Three phase, phase-earth voltages, pos.seq.,
6 = Three phase, phase-phase voltages, pos. seq.
2)
Excit.curr.trip 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
3)
4)
5)
6)
Oper. direction 0 = Forward; 1 = Reverse; When the reverse direction has been selected, the
angle of the impedance is rotated +180. This can be used e.g. if the polarity
of voltages is opposite to the normal polarity in relay terminals.
7)
8)
The default value of the measuring mode depends on the connected signal(s) (refer to section
Configuration)
14
UE6High
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Impedance Z1 I1 0.00...20.00 p.u. 0.00 R/M Phase impedance Z1
Angle A1 I4 -180...180 1) 0 R/M Angle A1 of the impedance in

phase 1

phase 2

phase 3
Excit.cur.alarm I7 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Signal for supervising the exitation

current
Extern. BLOCK I8 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M External block signal

2)
Intern. BLOCK I9 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Internal block signal

group 1 and group 2

and registers of UE6Low or
UE6High
1)
Angle 0 is equal to the positive R-axis, whereas positive values are above the R-axis and
negative values below the R-axis.
2)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Output ERR O3 0 or 11) - 0 R/M Status of error signal

1)
15
UE6High
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips.
1, Operation 2,...
3.3.3.3 Duration
3.3.3.4 Impedances (magnitude and phase angle)
If the function block trips, the impedance values are updated at the moment of
tripping i.e. on the rising edge of the TRIP signal. If the function block starts but does
not trip, the impedance values captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated
frequency 50 Hz) after the beginning of the start situation are recorded. Thus the
impedance values (magnitudes ZL1, ZL2, ZL3 and phase angles AL1, AL2, AL3 ) always
originate from
2
the same moment and are recorded as multiples of the base impedance
(ZN = | UN / SN | ).
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the EX_CU and BLOCK input signals and the Active group
16
UE6High
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting

direction
Z1 V204 0.00...20.00 p.u. 0.00 R/M Calculated impedance in phase 1
A1 V207 -180...180 0 R/M Calculated angle of the

impedance in phase 1


Excit.cur.alarm V210 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the excitation current

1)

1)
2)
17
UE6High

direction




1)

1)
2)

direction




2)
1)
2)
18
UE6High
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from X< or X<< stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from X< or X<< stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from X< or X<< stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from X< or X<< stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from X< or X<< stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from X< or X<< stage Activated

1)
E6 64 0 L.O.E signal of X< or X<< stage Reset
E7 128 0 L.O.E signal of X< or X<< stage1) Activated
E8 256 0 BLOCK signal of X< or X<< stage Reset
E9 512 0 BLOCK signal of X< or X<< stage Activated
E10 1024 0 Test mode of X< or X<< stage Off
E11 2048 0 Test mode of X< or X<< stage On
E12 0 0 - -
E13 8192 1 Config. error of X< or X<< stage Activated

1)
A loss of excitation event (L.O.E) is sent if the U input is activated. Excitation current monitoring
must also be enabled (see section Excitation current monitoring).
19
UE6High
4. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 4.0% of set value or 0.02 p.u.
Start time Injected impedance = 0.50 x circle radius:

Reset ratio Reset ratio = (distance of the measured impedance from the center
of the circle during drop-off) / (radius of the circle).
Typ. 1.04 (range 1.01...1.04)
Retardation time Total retardation time when the impedance returns

from the operating circle2) < 45 ms

1)
2)

D -
20
1MRS752330-MUM UE6_
Three-Phase
Issued: 10/1998
Underexcitation Protection
Version: D/28.1.2002 Low-Set Stage (UE6Low)
Data subject to change without notice High-Set Stage (UE6High)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6
2.3.1 Underexcitation protection.......................................................... 6
2.3.2 Excitation current monitoring...................................................... 8
2.5 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 9
2.6 Test mode ......................................................................................... 10
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 11

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 12
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 13
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 13
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 13
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 13
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 15
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 15
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 16
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 19
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 20

UE6_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Single-phase or three-phase protection against underexcitation / loss of excitation

for motors and generators
Underexcitation protection based on the offset-mho characteristic
Two alternative measuring principles: the numerically calculated fundamental
frequency component or the positive-sequence component of the impedance
Possibility for excitation current (EX_CU) monitoring
The operating direction forward or reverse can be selected
Internal undervoltage blocking (< 0.05 x Un) to prevent maloperation during low
voltage
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase underexcitation function

blocks UE6Low and UE6High used products based on the RED 500 Platform. The
low-set stage and the high-set stage are identical except for the operate time.
The function blocks UE6Low and UE6High are designed for the single-phase or
three-phase underexcitation protection of motors and generators whenever the DT
(Definite Time) characteristic is appropriate.
X<
X<<
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI8(/RZDQG8(+LJK)RU,(&V\PEROV
2
Substation Automation UE6 _
3

U12)
U23)
U31)
high) the setting groups 1 and 2. When
RESET Reset signal (BOOL, pos. Input signal for resetting the trip
edge) signal and registers of UE6Low or
UE6High
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active External blocking signal
high)
EX_CU Digital signal (BOOL, active Input for monitoring the excitation
high) current

configuration error
4
2.1 Configuration

Rogowski coils and voltages by means of voltage transformers or voltage dividers.
U1, U2 and U3 of the function block. If phase-to-phase voltages are used, they are
connected as follows: U12 to the input U1, U23 to U2 and U31 to U3.
It is also possible to use the function block in a single-phase mode if there is only one
phase-to-earth voltage (U1) available. In this case the phase-to-earth voltage U1 and
current IL1 are connected to the corresponding inputs of the function block. If only one
phase-to-phase voltage (U12) is available, it is connected to the input U1 of the
function block. Note, however, that the two currents IL1 and IL2 are required if the
phase-to-phase voltage U12 is used. The following table explains all the allowed
connection configurations and the measuring modes that may be used with the
corresponding configurations.
Measuring mode Measuring Minimum requirements Display of the

mode number for signal connection1) measuring mode
on the MMI
Not in use 0 - Not in use
One phase, phase-earth voltage, 1 U1, IL1 U1&IL1

fund.freq.
One phase, phase-phase 2 U12, IL1, IL2 U12&IL1&IL2
voltage, fund. Freq.
Three phase, phase-earth 3 U1, U2, U3, IL1, IL2, IL3 3 phase-earth
Three phase, phase-phase 4 U12, U23, U31, IL1, IL2, IL3 3 phase-phase
Three phase, phase-earth 5 U1, U2, U3, IL1, IL2, IL3 3 p-e pos.seq.
voltages, pos.seq.
Three phase, phase-phase 6 U12, U23, U31, IL1, IL2, IL3 3 p-p pos.seq.
voltages, pos. seq.
1)
Use of a measuring mode is also possible when more signals than mentioned here are connected. If,
for example, all phase-to-phase voltages and currents are connected, one of the measuring modes 0,
2, 4 and 6 may be used. Signals must be connected to the corresponding inputs of the function block
(see text above).
5
As a default measuring mode UE6Low and UE6High use either U12&IL1&IL2 (=2)
or U1&IL1 (=1). The default value depends on the signal(s) connected to the voltage
input(s): for phase-to-phase voltage(s) the default value is 2 and for phase-to-earth
voltage(s) 1. If neither of the two measuring modes is possible due to a configuration
error, the measuring mode is set to Not in use (=0), a configuration error event E13
is sent and the ERR output is activated. The measuring mode remains Not in use
until the configuration error is corrected and the correct configuration is downloaded
to the relay.
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block operates on two alternative measuring principles: the numerically
calculated fundamental frequency components or the positive-sequence values of the
symmetrical components of currents and voltages. The measuring mode can be
selected with either an MMI parameter or a serial communication parameter. In one-
phase mode, only the fundamental frequency component calculation is possible.
duration of the underexcitation exceed the set definite operate time, the function block
operates (=the TRIP signal is set to TRUE). The delay of the heavy-duty output relay
is included in the total operate time.
2.3.1 Underexcitation protection
Underexcitation protection protects synchronous machines against an unstable

operating curve due to loss of excitation. Partial or total loss of excitation causes a
reactive-power intake from the network to a generator and the reactance of the system
viewed from the machine terminals turns negative. This kind of drop of reactance
condition can be detected by measuring the impedance of the system.
The low-set stage of underexcitation protection (UE6Low) is generally used to

produce a steady-state stability limit for the machine. The wide time setting range of
6
the function block allows temporary underexcitation conditions and gives time for
corrective operations.
The high-set stage of underexcitation protection (UE6High) is generally used to

produce a dynamic-state stability limit for the machine. The time setting range of the
function block is more limited than that in the low-set stage. The purpose of the high-
set stage is to make an immediate trip.
The operation is based on the offset-mho characteristic. The impedance of the system
in any phase can be represented as a phasor in an impedance plane in which the
horizontal coordinate is resistance (R) and the vertical coordinate reactance (X). The
operating curve is a circle in the impedance plane and the circle is parameterized with
the following three setting values: circle offset, circle diameter and circle
displacement (Figure 3). If the calculated impedance value exceeds the setting limits
i.e. the phasor enters the circle in the impedance plane, the relay starts, and if the
impedance stays within the circle including hysteresis, the relay trips after the set
operate time. In three-phase mode the impedance is calculated in every phase (in
fundamental frequency modes) and the lowest impedance value is taken into account.
)LJXUH 6HWWLQJSDUDPHWHUVIRUWKHRIIVHWPKRFLUFOH1RWHWKDWRIIVHWLVWKH
GLVWDQFHEHWZHHQWKHUHVLVWDQFHD[LVDQGWKHWRSRIWKHFLUFOH
Setting values are calculated as follows:
2IIVHWDistance of the top of the circle from the R-axis. This is usually set equal to -
xd/2 , where xd is the transient reactance of the machine. The sign of the setting value
determines the location of the circle regarding the R-axis. If the sign is negative as
usual, the whole circle lies below the R-axis as in Figure 3.
'LDPHWHUNormally set equal to the generator synchronous reactance xd. Determines

the size of the impedance circle.
'LVSODFHPHQWDisplacement of the center of the circle from the reactance axis or, in
other words, the R -coordinate of the center. The setting can be used to adjust the
7
sensitivity of the underexcitation protection. If the sign of the setting is positive, the
circle is shifted to the right i.e. closer to the normal operating point. Accordingly, if
the sign is negative, the circle is shifted to the left and moves thus away from the
normal operating point.
Note that the settings are given as per unit (p.u.) values. Usually the machine
manufacturers give the xd and xd values in p.u. but in case there are only ohm values
available, it is necessary to convert them to p.u. values. The base impedance (ZN) is
8 12
=1 =
61
where UN is the rated (phase-to-phase) voltage and SN the rated power of the protected
machine.
The p.u. value of the reactance (Xp.u.) is the ratio of the reactance in ohms (Xohm) to
the base impedance (ZN), that is
; RKP
; S.X. =
=1
2.3.2 Excitation current monitoring
If the status information of the excitation current is connected to the digital input
EX_CU of the relay and the excitation current monitoring is selected from the control
settings via the parameter Excit.curr.trip, total loss of the excitation current or a
failure in the excitation system will cause DT operation similar to that described
above. Indication of the excitation current can be a boolean input from the AVR
(Automatic Voltage Regulator), for example. The input signal is active high, i.e. the
input must be TRUE when the excitation current is lost. If the input signal is active
low, it can be easily inverted by means of the configuration tool.
Underexcitation / loss of excitation can contain so-called drop-off periods during

which the impedance is outside the set offset-mho characteristic. Without the delayed
reset function the DT timer would reset once the impedance drops off.
When the DT timer has started, it goes on running normally even if the impedance
In Figures 4 and 5 the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the impedance is
inside the set offset-mho circle and FALSE when the impedance is outside the circle.
8
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
elapsed during the drop-off period, the function block will trip once the impedance
enters the circle again (Figure 5).
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
2.5 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
9
2.6 Test mode
have reset.
10
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F066V013 for UE6Low X X
1)
Parameter F067V013 for UE6High X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
11
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for UE6Low is 66 and that for UE6High 67.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
12
3.2 Setting values

direction
Circle offset S1 -10.00...10.00 p.u. -0.10 R Distance of the top of the
Circle diameter S2 0.01...60.00 p.u. 2.00 R Diameter of the impedance circle
Cir.displacem. S3 -10.00...10.00 p.u. 0.00 R Displacement of the center of the

Operate time S4 UE6Low: s 5.00 R Tripping time

0.06...60.00
UE6High: 1.00
0.06...10.00

direction

0.06...60.00
UE6High: 1.00
0.06...10.00

direction

0.06...60.00
UE6High: 1.00
0.06...10.00
13

direction
Measuring mode V1 0...6 1) - 1 or 2 8) R/W Selection of the measuring mode
Excit.curr.trip V2 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/W Selection of the excitation current

trip
Drop-off time V3 0.00...10.00 s 3.00 R/W Drop-off time

group

signal

TRIP output

CBFP
CBFP
Oper. direction V10 0 or 1 6) - 0 R/W Operation direction

registers

7)
transmission (E0 ... E11 and E13)
1)
Measuring mode 0 = Not in use, 1 = One phase, phase-earth voltage, fund.freq.,
2 = One phase, phase-phase voltage, fund. freq.,
3= Three phase, phase-earth voltages, fund. freq.,
4 = Three phase, phase-phase voltages, fund. freq.,
5 = Three phase, phase-earth voltages, pos.seq.,
6 = Three phase, phase-phase voltages, pos. seq.
2)
Excit.curr.trip 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
3)
4)
5)
6)
Oper. direction 0 = Forward; 1 = Reverse; When the reverse direction has been selected, the
angle of the impedance is rotated +180. This can be used e.g. if the polarity
of voltages is opposite to the normal polarity in relay terminals.
7)
8)
The default value of the measuring mode depends on the connected signal(s) (refer to section
Configuration)
14
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Impedance Z2 I2 0.00... 999.99 p.u. 0.00 R/M Phase impedance Z2
Impedance Z3 I3 0.00... 999.99 p.u. 0.00 R/M Phase impedance Z3

phase 1

phase 2

phase 3
Excit.cur.alarm I7 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M Signal for supervising the exitation

current
Extern. BLOCK I8 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/M External block signal

2)
Intern. BLOCK I9 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Internal block signal

group 1 and group 2

and registers of UE6Low or
UE6High
1)
Angle 0 is equal to the positive R-axis, whereas positive values are above the R-axis and
negative values below the R-axis.
2)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
Output ERR O3 0 or 11) - 0 R/M Status of error signal

1)
15
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips.
1, Operation 2,...
3.3.3.3 Duration
3.3.3.4 Impedances (magnitude and phase angle)
frequency 50 Hz) after the beginning of the start situation are recorded. Thus the
impedance values (magnitudes ZL1, ZL2, ZL3 and phase angles AL1, AL2, AL3 ) always
originate from
2
the same moment and are recorded as multiples of the base impedance
(ZN = | UN / SN | ).
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the EX_CU and BLOCK input signals and the Active group
16
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting

direction
Z2 V205 0.00... 999.99 p.u. 0.00 R/M Calculated impedance in phase 2




1)

1)
2)
17

direction




1)

1)
2)

direction




2)
1)
2)
18
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from X< or X<< stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from X< or X<< stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from X< or X<< stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from X< or X<< stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from X< or X<< stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from X< or X<< stage Activated

1)
E6 64 0 L.O.E signal of X< or X<< stage Reset
E7 128 0 L.O.E signal of X< or X<< stage1) Activated
E8 256 0 BLOCK signal of X< or X<< stage Reset
E9 512 0 BLOCK signal of X< or X<< stage Activated
E10 1024 0 Test mode of X< or X<< stage Off
E11 2048 0 Test mode of X< or X<< stage On
E12 0 0 - -
E13 8192 1 Config. error of X< or X<< stage Activated

1)
A loss of excitation event (L.O.E) is sent if the U input is activated. Excitation current monitoring
must also be enabled (see section Excitation current monitoring).
19
4. Technical Data

Start time Injected impedance = 0.50 x circle radius:

Reset ratio Reset ratio = (distance of the measured impedance from the center
of the circle during drop-off) / (radius of the circle).
Typ. 1.04 (range 1.01...1.04)
Retardation time Total retardation time when the impedance returns

from the operating circle2) < 45 ms

1)
2)

D -
E -
20
1MRS100110 (UI6Low) RE_5_ _
1MRS100111 (UI6High) Three-Phase
Issued: 3/2000
Version: A Underimpedance Protection
Data subject to change without notice Low-Set Stage (UI6Low)
High-Set Stage (UI6High)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.1.1 Signal connection....................................................................... 5
2.1.2 Signal check............................................................................... 6
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 7
2.3.1 General ...................................................................................... 7
2.3.2 Underimpedance protection ....................................................... 7
2.4 Comparison between overcurrent and underimpedance protection..... 8
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 12
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 12
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 13
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 14
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 15
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 15
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 15
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 17
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 17
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 17
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 20
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 21
RE_5_ _ UI6Low ABB Automation
UI6High
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Non-directional two-phase or three-phase underimpedance protection for

generators and transformers
Adjustable non-directional (origin centric) operating characteristic
Phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth voltages can be used
Two alternative measuring principles for currents: the average value of
consecutive instantaneous peak-to-peak values or the numerically calculated
fundamental frequency components
Numerically calculated fundamental frequency components of voltages
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the underimpedance function blocks

UI6Low and UI6High used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The low-set
stage and the high-set stage are identical except for the default values of the
parameters Z-setting and Operate time.
Underimpedance protection is generally applied as back-up protection for generators

and transformers. Moreover, UI6Low and UI6High can be used instead of the
definite-time voltage-dependent overcurrent protection VOC6_ or, to obtain a limited
protection zone and the optimum operating time, instead of the non-directional
overcurrent protection NOC3_.
Z<
Z<<
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI8,/RZDQG8,+LJK)RU,(&V\PEROV
2
ABB Automation UI6Low RE_5_ _
UI6HIgh
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI8,/RZDQG8,+LJK
3
UI6High

UL1 Analogue signal (SINT) Input for measuring the phase-to-
phase (U12) or phase-to-earth (U1)
voltage
voltage
voltage
current IL1
current IL2
current IL3
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active Blocking signal
high)
high) the settings groups 1 and 2. When
group 2 is active.
DOUBLE Digital signal (BOOL, active Input signal for scaling the set start
high) value (Z) temporarily by the factor
0.5 at magnetizing inrush or start-up
signal and registers of UI6Low or
UI6High

error
4
UI6HIgh
2.1 Configuration
The underimpedance function block calculates the impedance by means of phase

currents and either phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltages. Phase currents can be
measured with conventional current transformers or Rogowski coils and voltages with
voltage transformers or voltage dividers. The measuring devices and signal types for
2.1.1 Signal connection
UL1, UL2 and UL3 of the function block. If phase-to-phase voltages are used, they
are connected as follows: U12 to the input UL1, U23 to UL2 and U31 to UL3. The
virtual phase-to-phase voltage signals derived from phase-to-earth voltages may also
be used if available. Furthermore, the digital inputs are connected to the boolean
inputs of the function block and the outputs of the function block are connected to the
output signals. Using the signals IL1b, IL2b and IL3b instead of IL1, IL2 and IL3 is
also possible, but mixing these two signal sets is not allowed.
Underimpedance protection is commonly used in a three-phase mode, in which case

the operation can be compared with three-phase overcurrent protection, and the three-
phase mode is recommended to be used whenever possible. However, the function
block can be used in a two-phase mode if the full set of voltage or current signals is
not available. In this case, the phase-to-earth (or phase-to-phase) voltages Ux (or Uxy)
and the currents ILx are connected to the corresponding inputs of the function block. If
only one phase-to-phase voltage (U12, for example) is available, it is connected to the
corresponding input of the function block (e.g. in case of U12 to the UL1 input) and in
addition, the currents IL1 and IL2 are required. If phase-to-earth voltages are used, the
minimum of two voltages are required.
The number of selectable measuring signal combinations increases as the amount of

correctly configured inputs increases. When all the inputs are connected and phase-to-
phase voltages are used, there are 7 measuring signal combinations available, whereas
for phase-to-earth voltages there are 4 measuring signal combinations. The measuring
signal options and the signal connections required for each option are explained in
Table 1 below.
5
UI6High
Table 1. Measuring signal options and the input signals required for each option
Measuring signals Number Input signals Impedance calculation Note

Not selected 0 - -
2-ph, ph-e 1&2 1 U1, U2; IL1, IL2 (U1 - U2) / (IL1 - IL2)
3-ph, ph-e 4 U1, U2, U3; IL1, IL2, IL3 (U1 - U2) / (IL1 - IL2); Recommended
(U2 - U3) / (IL2 - IL3);
(U3 - U1) / (IL3 - IL1)
2-ph, ph-ph 1&2 5 U12; IL1, IL2 U12 / (IL1 - IL2)
3-ph, U12&U23 8 U12, U23 ; IL1, IL2, IL3 U12 / (IL1 - IL2);
U23 / (IL2 - IL3);
(U12 + U23) / (IL3 - IL1)
U31 / (IL3 - IL1);
(U23 + U31) / (IL1 - IL2)
U12 / (IL1 - IL2);
(U31 + U12) / (IL2 - IL3)
3-ph, ph-ph 11 U12, U23, U31 ; IL1, IL2, IL3 U12 / (IL1 - IL2); Recommended
U23 / (IL2 - IL3);
U31 / (IL3 - IL1)
The default value of the Meas signals parameter depends on the signals connected.
The function block chooses the most covering Meas.signals option (checking order:
11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0).
2.1.2 Signal check
The built-in logic of the UI6_ function block checks the channel configuration, i.e. the
analogue signal connections to the current and voltage inputs, and ensures that at least
the minimum number of signals is properly configured and connected to the inputs.
The function block cannot be activated if there is an insufficient number of correct
input signal connections. Furthermore, the error output of the function block is
activated and a configuration error event (E11) is sent if some of the vital signals are
missing, e.g. there are no currents connected to the function block, or the signal
configuration is incorrect.
6
UI6HIgh
2.2 Measuring mode
The current measurement of the function block is based on the average value of
fundamental frequency components of currents, whereas the fundamental frequency
components are used for voltages in every case.
The impedance values are calculated from the current and voltage phasors. When
peak-to-peak values are used for currents, the impedance values are calculated using
these peak-to-peak values instead of the magnitude of the current phasor. The phase
angle is derived from the fundamental frequency calculation. Note, however, that
even though the impedance calculation is based on current and voltage phasors, only
the absolute values (or: the magnitudes) of the impedances are taken into account.
An impedance value will not be evaluated, i.e. the default value (100000.00 p.u.) will
be displayed in the monitored input data, if the current is below 0.02 x In.
2.3.1 General
duration of the underimpedance exceed the set definite operate time, the function
block operates (=the TRIP signal is set to TRUE). The delay of the heavy-duty output
relay is included in the total operate time.
2.3.2 Underimpedance protection
The relay measures the impedance by calculating the impedances of the incoming
voltages and currents. The operating characteristic is an origin-centric circular
characteristic on the impedance plane. The operation of the underimpedance function
block is based on comparing the impedances to the operating characteristic: the
function block operates if the measured impedance falls below the set limit i.e. enters
the circle. The lowest impedance value is taken into account when evaluating the
criterion above. As a result of the origin-centric characteristic, the operation is non-
directional since the angle of the impedance has no effect on the operation but only
the magnitude of the impedance determines the operating point.
The voltage should be measured from the generator terminals and the current from the
neutral point of the generator (Figure 3). The function block is usually set to protect
the zone between the generator windings (although total cover is impossible) and the
generator side windings of the step-up transformer. To prevent maloperation of the
7
UI6High
underimpedance protection in case of near-by faults that should not be detected by

UI6_, the settings must be reasonably dimensioned. A setting equal to ca. 70% of the
step-up transformer short-circuit impedance is commonly used. Therefore, if used in
directly connected machines where the impedance towards the network is limited only
by the lines/busbars, it must be secured that the UI6_ function block will not cause
any selectivity problems. In general, the voltage-dependent overcurrent protection
VOC6_ is recommended for the protection of directly connected machines.
)LJXUH /RFDWLRQRIPHDVXULQJSRLQWVIRUXQGHULPSHGDQFHSURWHFWLRQ
2.4 Comparison between overcurrent and underimpedance protection
Figure 4 presents a phase current in a three-phase short circuit when a fault occurs at
time 0 s (for simplicity, the offset of the fault current is assumed to be zero). In this
case, with an ordinary overcurrent relay having the current setting 1.2 x In (in the
picture this is presented by dashed lines that are set at 1.2 x 2 1.70 ), the time
setting should be less than 0.2 s since with a higher value, the short-circuit current
would decay below the set value and the relay would drop off. The current setting
may also be reduced to 1.1 x In although this provides no substantial rise in the exceed
time. In some situations, either of the above current settings would be appropriate, but
if longer tripping times are required to maintain the time selectivity, underimpedance
protection is needed.
8
UI6HIgh
Short circuit current and setting limits , tau = 0.1

5
2 Current setting = 1.2 * In
I / In 1
-1
-2
-3
-4
NOTE! Setting limits are multiplied by sqrt of 2
-5
-0.2 -0.1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
t (s)
)LJXUH 6KRUWFLUFXLWFXUUHQWZDYHIRUP)DXOWRFFXUVDWWLPHVDQGLVQRW
GLVFRQQHFWHG
Short circuit voltage

5
1
U / Un
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-0.2 -0.1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
t (s)
)LJXUH 6KRUWFLUFXLWYROWDJHZDYHIRUP)DXOWRFFXUVDWWLPHVDQGLVQRW
GLVFRQQHFWHG
The voltage drop caused by a three-phase fault provides more time for determining
the fault by means of an underimpedance relay because the ratio U/I = Z still remains
under the set value (Figure 6).
9
UI6High
)LJXUH ,PSHGDQFHWUDMHFWRU\GXULQJDVKRUWFLUFXLW
The operation of the underimpedance function block UI6_ must be restrained if the
voltage in one or more phases suddenly drops close to zero without any significant
change in the current observed at the same time. This situation is considered a fuse
failure or a miniature circuit-breaker operation in the voltage transformer secondary
circuit. The voltage drop could cause an unwanted operation of the function block
since the calculated impedance could fall below the set operating limit even if there
was no actual fault in the primary system. The actual blocking operation is provided
by an external function block, FuseFail, the output of which is connected to the
BLOCK input of the underimpedance function block (Figure 7).
)LJXUH 7KH)XVH)DLOIXQFWLRQEORFNFDQEHXVHGWRJHQHUDWHWKHEORFNLQJVLJQDO
IRUWKH8,/RZDQG8,+LJKIXQFWLRQEORFNVDVZHOODVIRUDQ\RWKHU
YROWDJHGHSHQGHQWIXQFWLRQEORFN1RWHDOVRWKHXVDJHRIWHPSRUDU\
YDULDEOHV
10
UI6HIgh
The operation of the function block is resumed only after the blocking signal is
restored to zero, i.e. the voltage measurement returns to a normal level. A fuse failure
should be repaired as soon as possible to restore the normal operation of the voltage-
dependent protection functions.
The moment when an underimpedance occurs may contain so-called drop-off periods
during which the impedance is outside the set characteristic. This may happen, for
instance, when a severe fault produces high asymmetrical fault currents that partially
saturate the current transformers. An apparent drop-off period of the secondary
current of the saturated current transformer might reset the DT timer. The adjustable
induction disc relays. Without the delayed reset function the DT timer would reset
once the impedance drops off.
When the DT timer has started, it goes on running as normally even if the impedance
In Figure 8 and Figure 9, the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the
impedance is inside the set offset-mho circle and FALSE when the impedance is
outside the circle.
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
11
UI6High
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
2.6 Setting groups
ways:

1)
The the control parameter Active group indicates the setting group valid at a given
time.
2.7 Test mode
12
UI6HIgh
have reset. When the non-latching mode has been selected, the TRIP signal remains
active until the operation criteria have reset and the time determined by the control
parameter Trip pulse has elapsed.
circuit breaker of the machine. The control parameter Trip pulse is used for setting
2.9 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F110V013 for UI6Low X X
1)
Parameter F111V013 for UI6High X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
13
UI6High
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for UI6Low is 110 and that for UI6High 111.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
14
UI6HIgh
3.2 Setting values
UI6Low
direction
Z-setting S1 0.0160.00 p.u. 0.07 R Start impedance
Operate time S2 0.04300.00 s 0.20 R Operate time
UI6High
direction
UI6Low
direction
Z-setting S41 0.0160.00 p.u. 0.07 R/W Start impedance
Operate time S42 0.04300.00 s 0.20 R/W Operate time
UI6High
direction
UI6Low
direction
UI6High
direction
15
UI6High

direction
UI6Low V1 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Function block in use or not in use
UI6High V1 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Function block in use or not in use

2) 8)
Meas. signals V2 011 - 11 R/W Selection of the measuring signal
combination
Measuring mode V3 0 or 1 3) - 1 R/W Selection of the measuring mode

(peak-to-peak or fund. freq.)
Drop-off time V4 0.0010.00 s 1.00 R/W Drop-off time

group

signal

the TRIP output
Trip pulse V9 401000 ms 40 R/W Minimum pulse width of TRIP and

CBFP
CBFP

registers

7)
transmission (E0 ... E9, E11)
1)
UI6_ 0 = Not in use; 1 = In use
2)
Meas. signals 0 = Not selected; 1 = 2-ph, ph-e 1&2; 2 = 2-ph, ph-e 2&3; 3 = 2-ph, ph-e 3&1;
4 = 3-ph, ph-e; 5 = 2-ph, ph-ph 1&2; 6 = 2-ph, ph-ph 2&3; 7 = 2-ph, ph-ph 3&1;
8 = 3-ph, U12&U23; 9 = 3-ph, U23&U31; 10 = 3-ph, U31&U12;
11 = 3-ph, ph-ph
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
The default value of the Meas signals parameter depends on the signals connected. The function
block chooses the most covering Meas.signals option
(checking order: 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0).
16
UI6HIgh
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Impedance Z1 I1 0.00100000.00 p.u. 100000.00 R/M Phase impedance Z1

1)
Input BLOCK I4 0 or 1 - 0 R/M External blocking signal

the groups 1 and 2
Input I6 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for reducing the Z-

DOUBLE setting value by factor 0.5
temporarily

signals and registers of UI6_
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output START O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the start signal

1)
Output ERR O3 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of the configuration
error signal
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips.
1, Operation 2,
17
UI6High
3.3.3.3 Duration
3.3.3.4 Impedances
of the impedances (magnitudes ZL1, ZL2, ZL3 ) always originate from the same moment
and are recorded as multiples of the base impedance (ZN = | UN2 / SN | ). Note that the
default value (100000.00 p.u.) remains in the monitored input data and in the recorded
data if the measuring signal selection limits the number of evaluated impedances.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the input signal BLOCK and the active setting group are recorded
at the moment of triggering.
3.3.3.6 Priority
1) Tripping
2) Starting.
18
UI6HIgh

direction
Duration V203 0.0100.0 % 0.0 R/M Duration of start situation
Z1 V204 0.00100000.00 p.u. 0.00 R/M Calculated impedance 1

1)

1)
2)

direction

2)
1)
2)
19
UI6High

direction

1)

1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from Z< or Z<< stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from Z< or Z<< stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from Z< or Z<< stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from Z< or Z<< stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from Z< or Z<< stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from Z< or Z<< stage Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK signal of Z< or Z<< stage Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK signal of Z< or Z<< stage Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of Z< or Z<< stage Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of Z< or Z<< stage On
E10 0 0 - -
E11 2048 1 Configuration error of Z< or Z<< stage Activated
20
UI6HIgh
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies Depends on the frequency of the voltage and current measured:
Start time Injected impedance = 0.50 x Z-setting:

output)
Reset ratio Reset ratio = (distance of the measured impedance from the center of
the circle during drop-off) / (radius of the circle).
Typ. 1.03 (range 1.01...1.04).
Retardation time Total retardation time when the impedance drops below
the start value < 45 ms 2)
Operate time accuracy Depends on the frequency of the voltage and current measured:

1)
2)

C -
21
1MRS752331-MUM UI6_
Issued: 3/2000
Three-Phase
Underimpedance Protection
Low-Set Stage (UI6Low)
Data subject to change without notice High-Set Stage (UI6High)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.1.1 Signal connection....................................................................... 5
2.1.2 Signal check............................................................................... 6
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 7
2.3.1 General ...................................................................................... 7
2.3.2 Underimpedance protection ....................................................... 7
2.4 Comparison between overcurrent and underimpedance protection..... 8
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 12
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 12
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 13
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 14
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 15
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 15
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 15
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 17
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 17
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 17
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 20
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 21
UI6_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Non-directional two-phase or three-phase underimpedance protection for

generators and transformers
Adjustable non-directional (origin centric) operating characteristic
Phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth voltages can be used
Two alternative measuring principles for currents: the average value of
fundamental frequency components
Numerically calculated fundamental frequency components of voltages
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the underimpedance function blocks

UI6Low and UI6High used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The low-set
stage and the high-set stage are identical except for the default values of the
parameters Z-setting and Operate time.
Underimpedance protection is generally applied as back-up protection for generators

and transformers. Moreover, UI6Low and UI6High can be used instead of the
definite-time voltage-dependent overcurrent protection VOC6_ or, to obtain a limited
protection zone and the optimum operating time, instead of the non-directional
overcurrent protection NOC3_.
Z<
Z<<
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI8,/RZDQG8,+LJK)RU,(&V\PEROV
2
Substation Automation UI6 _
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI8,/RZDQG8,+LJK
3

voltage
voltage
voltage
current IL1
current IL2
current IL3
BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, active Blocking signal
high)
high) the settings groups 1 and 2. When
group 2 is active.
DOUBLE Digital signal (BOOL, active Input signal for scaling the set start
high) value (Z) temporarily by the factor
0.5 at magnetizing inrush or start-up
signal and registers of UI6Low or
UI6High

error
4
2.1 Configuration
The underimpedance function block calculates the impedance by means of phase

currents and either phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltages. Phase currents can be
measured with conventional current transformers or Rogowski coils and voltages with
voltage transformers or voltage dividers. The measuring devices and signal types for
2.1.1 Signal connection
UL1, UL2 and UL3 of the function block. If phase-to-phase voltages are used, they
are connected as follows: U12 to the input UL1, U23 to UL2 and U31 to UL3. The
virtual phase-to-phase voltage signals derived from phase-to-earth voltages may also
be used if available. Furthermore, the digital inputs are connected to the boolean
inputs of the function block and the outputs of the function block are connected to the
output signals. Using the signals IL1b, IL2b and IL3b instead of IL1, IL2 and IL3 is
also possible, but mixing these two signal sets is not allowed.
Underimpedance protection is commonly used in a three-phase mode, in which case

the operation can be compared with three-phase overcurrent protection, and the three-
phase mode is recommended to be used whenever possible. However, the function
block can be used in a two-phase mode if the full set of voltage or current signals is
not available. In this case, the phase-to-earth (or phase-to-phase) voltages Ux (or Uxy)
and the currents ILx are connected to the corresponding inputs of the function block. If
only one phase-to-phase voltage (U12, for example) is available, it is connected to the
corresponding input of the function block (e.g. in case of U12 to the UL1 input) and in
addition, the currents IL1 and IL2 are required. If phase-to-earth voltages are used, the
minimum of two voltages are required.
The number of selectable measuring signal combinations increases as the amount of

correctly configured inputs increases. When all the inputs are connected and phase-to-
phase voltages are used, there are 7 measuring signal combinations available, whereas
for phase-to-earth voltages there are 4 measuring signal combinations. The measuring
signal options and the signal connections required for each option are explained in
Table 1 below.
5
Table 1. Measuring signal options and the input signals required for each option
Measuring signals Number Input signals Impedance calculation Note

Not selected 0 - -
3-ph, ph-e 4 U1, U2, U3; IL1, IL2, IL3 (U1 - U2) / (IL1 - IL2); Recommended
(U2 - U3) / (IL2 - IL3);
(U3 - U1) / (IL3 - IL1)
U23 / (IL2 - IL3);
(U12 + U23) / (IL3 - IL1)
U31 / (IL3 - IL1);
(U23 + U31) / (IL1 - IL2)
U12 / (IL1 - IL2);
(U31 + U12) / (IL2 - IL3)
3-ph, ph-ph 11 U12, U23, U31 ; IL1, IL2, IL3 U12 / (IL1 - IL2); Recommended
U23 / (IL2 - IL3);
U31 / (IL3 - IL1)
The default value of the Meas signals parameter depends on the signals connected.
The function block chooses the most covering Meas.signals option (checking order:
11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0).
2.1.2 Signal check
The built-in logic of the UI6_ function block checks the channel configuration, i.e. the
analogue signal connections to the current and voltage inputs, and ensures that at least
the minimum number of signals is properly configured and connected to the inputs.
The function block cannot be activated if there is an insufficient number of correct
input signal connections. Furthermore, the error output of the function block is
activated and a configuration error event (E11) is sent if some of the vital signals are
missing, e.g. there are no currents connected to the function block, or the signal
configuration is incorrect.
6
2.2 Measuring mode
The current measurement of the function block is based on the average value of
fundamental frequency components of currents, whereas the fundamental frequency
components are used for voltages in every case.
The impedance values are calculated from the current and voltage phasors. When
peak-to-peak values are used for currents, the impedance values are calculated using
these peak-to-peak values instead of the magnitude of the current phasor. The phase
angle is derived from the fundamental frequency calculation. Note, however, that
even though the impedance calculation is based on current and voltage phasors, only
the absolute values (or: the magnitudes) of the impedances are taken into account.
An impedance value will not be evaluated, i.e. the default value (100000.00 p.u.) will
be displayed in the monitored input data, if the current is below 0.02 x In.
2.3.1 General
duration of the underimpedance exceed the set definite operate time, the function
block operates (=the TRIP signal is set to TRUE). The delay of the heavy-duty output
relay is included in the total operate time.
2.3.2 Underimpedance protection
The relay measures the impedance by calculating the impedances of the incoming
voltages and currents. The operating characteristic is an origin-centric circular
characteristic on the impedance plane. The operation of the underimpedance function
block is based on comparing the impedances to the operating characteristic: the
function block operates if the measured impedance falls below the set limit i.e. enters
the circle. The lowest impedance value is taken into account when evaluating the
criterion above. As a result of the origin-centric characteristic, the operation is non-
directional since the angle of the impedance has no effect on the operation but only
the magnitude of the impedance determines the operating point.
The voltage should be measured from the generator terminals and the current from the
neutral point of the generator (Figure 3). The function block is usually set to protect
the zone between the generator windings (although total cover is impossible) and the
generator side windings of the step-up transformer. To prevent maloperation of the
underimpedance protection in case of near-by faults that should not be detected by
7
UI6_, the settings must be reasonably dimensioned. A setting equal to ca. 70% of the
step-up transformer short-circuit impedance is commonly used. Therefore, if used in
directly connected machines where the impedance towards the network is limited only
by the lines/busbars, it must be secured that the UI6_ function block will not cause
any selectivity problems. In general, the voltage-dependent overcurrent protection
VOC6_ is recommended for the protection of directly connected machines.
)LJXUH /RFDWLRQRIPHDVXULQJSRLQWVIRUXQGHULPSHGDQFHSURWHFWLRQ
2.4 Comparison between overcurrent and underimpedance protection
Figure 4 presents a phase current in a three-phase short circuit when a fault occurs at
time 0 s (for simplicity, the offset of the fault current is assumed to be zero). In this
case, with an ordinary overcurrent relay having the current setting 1.2 x In (in the
picture this is presented by dashed lines that are set at 1.2 x 2 1.70 ), the time
setting should be less than 0.2 s since with a higher value, the short-circuit current
would decay below the set value and the relay would drop off. The current setting
may also be reduced to 1.1 x In although this provides no substantial rise in the exceed
time. In some situations, either of the above current settings would be appropriate, but
if longer tripping times are required to maintain the time selectivity, underimpedance
protection is needed.
8
Short circuit current and setting limits , tau = 0.1

5
2 Current setting = 1.2 * In
1
I / In
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
NOTE! Setting limits are multiplied by sqrt of 2
-5
-0.2 -0.1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
t (s)
)LJXUH 6KRUWFLUFXLWFXUUHQWZDYHIRUP)DXOWRFFXUVDWWLPHVDQGLVQRW
GLVFRQQHFWHG
Short circuit voltage

5
1
U / Un
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-0.2 -0.1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
t (s)
)LJXUH 6KRUWFLUFXLWYROWDJHZDYHIRUP)DXOWRFFXUVDWWLPHVDQGLVQRW
GLVFRQQHFWHG
The voltage drop caused by a three-phase fault provides more time for determining
the fault by means of an underimpedance relay because the ratio U/I = Z still remains
under the set value (Figure 6).
9
)LJXUH ,PSHGDQFHWUDMHFWRU\GXULQJDVKRUWFLUFXLW
The operation of the underimpedance function block UI6_ must be restrained if the
voltage in one or more phases suddenly drops close to zero without any significant
change in the current observed at the same time. This situation is considered a fuse
failure or a miniature circuit-breaker operation in the voltage transformer secondary
circuit. The voltage drop could cause an unwanted operation of the function block
since the calculated impedance could fall below the set operating limit even if there
was no actual fault in the primary system. The actual blocking operation is provided
by an external function block, FuseFail, the output of which is connected to the
BLOCK input of the underimpedance function block (Figure 7).
)LJXUH 7KH)XVH)DLOIXQFWLRQEORFNFDQEHXVHGWRJHQHUDWHWKHEORFNLQJVLJQDO
IRUWKH8,/RZDQG8,+LJKIXQFWLRQEORFNVDVZHOODVIRUDQ\RWKHU
YROWDJHGHSHQGHQWIXQFWLRQEORFN1RWHDOVRWKHXVDJHRIWHPSRUDU\
YDULDEOHV
10
The operation of the function block is resumed only after the blocking signal is
restored to zero, i.e. the voltage measurement returns to a normal level. A fuse failure
should be repaired as soon as possible to restore the normal operation of the voltage-
dependent protection functions.
The moment when an underimpedance occurs may contain so-called drop-off periods
during which the impedance is outside the set characteristic. This may happen, for
instance, when a severe fault produces high asymmetrical fault currents that partially
saturate the current transformers. An apparent drop-off period of the secondary
current of the saturated current transformer might reset the DT timer. The adjustable
induction disc relays. Without the delayed reset function the DT timer would reset
once the impedance drops off.
When the DT timer has started, it goes on running as normally even if the impedance
In Figure 8 and Figure 9, the input signal IN of the DT timer is TRUE when the
impedance is inside the set offset-mho circle and FALSE when the impedance is
outside the circle.
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
11
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
2.6 Setting groups
ways:

1)
The the control parameter Active group indicates the setting group valid at a given
time.
2.7 Test mode
12
have reset. When the non-latching mode has been selected, the TRIP signal remains
active until the operation criteria have reset and the time determined by the control
parameter Trip pulse has elapsed.
circuit breaker of the machine. The control parameter Trip pulse is used for setting
2.9 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F110V013 for UI6Low X X
1)
Parameter F111V013 for UI6High X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
13
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for UI6Low is 110 and that for UI6High 111.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
14
3.2 Setting values
UI6Low
direction
UI6High
direction
UI6Low
direction
UI6High
direction
UI6Low
direction
UI6High
direction
15

direction
UI6Low V1 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Function block in use or not in use
UI6High V1 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Function block in use or not in use

2) 8)
Meas. signals V2 011 - 11 R/W Selection of the measuring signal
combination
Measuring mode V3 0 or 1 3) - 1 R/W Selection of the measuring mode

(peak-to-peak or fund. freq.)
Drop-off time V4 0.0010.00 s 1.00 R/W Drop-off time

group

signal

the TRIP output
Trip pulse V9 401000 ms 40 R/W Minimum pulse width of TRIP and

CBFP
CBFP

registers

7)
1)
UI6_ 0 = Not in use; 1 = In use
2)
Meas. signals 0 = Not selected; 1 = 2-ph, ph-e 1&2; 2 = 2-ph, ph-e 2&3; 3 = 2-ph, ph-e 3&1;
4 = 3-ph, ph-e; 5 = 2-ph, ph-ph 1&2; 6 = 2-ph, ph-ph 2&3; 7 = 2-ph, ph-ph 3&1;
8 = 3-ph, U12&U23; 9 = 3-ph, U23&U31; 10 = 3-ph, U31&U12;
11 = 3-ph, ph-ph
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
The default value of the Meas signals parameter depends on the signals connected. The function
block chooses the most covering Meas.signals option
(checking order: 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0).
16
3.3.1 Input data

direction

1)
Input BLOCK I4 0 or 1 - 0 R/M External blocking signal

the groups 1 and 2
Input I6 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for reducing the Z-

DOUBLE setting value by factor 0.5
temporarily

signals and registers of UI6_
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
Output START O1 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Status of the start signal

1)
Output ERR O3 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of the configuration
error signal
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips.
1, Operation 2,
17
3.3.3.3 Duration
3.3.3.4 Impedances
of the impedances (magnitudes ZL1, ZL2, ZL3 ) always originate from the same moment
and are recorded as multiples of the base impedance (ZN = | UN2 / SN | ). Note that the
default value (100000.00 p.u.) remains in the monitored input data and in the recorded
data if the measuring signal selection limits the number of evaluated impedances.
3.3.3.5 Status data
The status data of the input signal BLOCK and the active setting group are recorded
at the moment of triggering.
3.3.3.6 Priority
1) Tripping
2) Starting.
18

direction

1)

1)
2)

direction

1)

1)
2)

direction

2)
1)
19
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from Z< or Z<< stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from Z< or Z<< stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from Z< or Z<< stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from Z< or Z<< stage Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from Z< or Z<< stage Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from Z< or Z<< stage Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK signal of Z< or Z<< stage Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK signal of Z< or Z<< stage Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of Z< or Z<< stage Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of Z< or Z<< stage On
E10 0 0 - -
E11 2048 1 Configuration error of Z< or Z<< stage Activated
20
4. Technical Data

Operation accuracies Depends on the frequency of the voltage and current measured:
Start time Injected impedance = 0.50 x Z-setting:

1)
total time < 50 ms
output)
Reset ratio Reset ratio = (distance of the measured impedance from the center of
the circle during drop-off) / (radius of the circle).
Typ. 1.03 (range 1.01...1.04).
Retardation time Total retardation time when the impedance drops below
the start value < 45 ms 2)
Operate time accuracy Depends on the frequency of the voltage and current measured:

1)
2)

C -
D -
21
1MRS100095 (Stage 1) RE_5_ _
1MRS100096 (Stage 2) Three-Phase Underpower or
1MRS100097 (Stage 3)
Issued: 10/1998 Reverse Power Protection
Version: C
Stage 1 (UPOW6St1)
Stage 2 (UPOW6St2)
Stage 3 (UPOW6St3)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 Correction parameters for measuring devices............................ 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.5 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 9
2.6 Test mode ........................................................................................... 9
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 10

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 11
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 12
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 12
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 12
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 12
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 14
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 14
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 14
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 17
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 18

RE_5_ _ UPOW6St1UPOW6St3 ABB Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Reverse power protection (Operation mode = reverse power) or low forward

power monitoring (Operation mode = underpower) for generators
currents
Wide setting ranges
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase underpower or reverse power
function blocks UPOW6St1, UPOW6St2 and UPOW6St3 used in products based on
the RED 500 Platform. The three stages are identical in operation.
The primary application of the function block is the reverse power protection
(Operation mode = reverse power) of the prime mover of a generator. The function is
necessary for the following types of prime mover:
steam turbines
Francis and Kaplan hydro units
gas turbines
diesel motors
The function block can also be used for forward power monitoring (Operation mode =
reverse power). In case of parallel connected generators for example, the load of one
generator may be so low that it is better to disconnect it and let the remaining
generators feed the network.
P<
2
ABB Automation UPOW6St1UPOW6St3 RE_5_ _

signal and registers of UPOW6St_
DISABLE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for disabling
UPOW6St_ when the machine is
not yet synchronized

3
2.1 Configuration

2.1.1 Correction parameters for measuring devices
Where a low value of reverse power setting is required, e.g. 2%, and the primary
circuit operating values must not deviate significantly from this, the correction
parameters have be used in the relay to compensate for the measuring errors. The
manufacturer of the measuring devices is to be contacted to obtain information on the
measuring errors.
If the measuring errors are not compensated for, the underpower setting should not be
lower than the sum of the current and voltage measuring errors. For example, if the
error of the current measuring device is 2 % and that of the voltage measuring device
1 %, the minimum setting is ( 2 + 1 ) % = 3 %.
The correction parameters for measuring devices can be set in the Relay
Configuration Tool as well as via the MMI of the machine terminal. For more
information on setting the correction parameters refer to the Technical Reference
Manual of REM 543.
4

symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block UPOW6St_ measures fundamental frequency currents and

sequence components is also possible, which makes the determination of reverse
power insensitive to possible asymmetry in currents or voltages and corresponds to
the real load of the prime mover.
5
UPOW6St_ can be set to monitor either reverse power or low forward power via the
setting parameter Operation mode. The function block starts if the measured power
drops below the operating line.
:DUQLQJ The phase displacement errors of sensors, i.e. voltage dividers and
Rogowski coils, are not compensated for in the relay since they are generally
negligible from the practical point of view. However, in case of resistive voltage
dividers, the phase displacement error may be so large that it will cause an inaccuracy
of more than 1% x rated value in the operation of the function block. Therefore, a
setting lower that 1.5 % is not recommended to be used when voltages are measured
by resistive voltage dividers.
Q
s
e
t
a
P
r
e
p
Hysteresis
O
.
)LJXUH 7KHRSHUDWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLFRI832:6WBZKHQWKHRSHUDWLRQPRGHLV
UHYHUVHSRZHU
Q
s
e
t
a
P
r
e
p
Hysteresis
O
)LJXUH 7KHRSHUDWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLFRI832:6WBZKHQRSHUDWLRQPRGHLV
XQGHUSRZHU
6
When the parameter Disable mode is ON, the function block cannot operate if the
DISABLE input is active. When the DISABLE input is deactivated, the function
block still remains disabled for the time defined in the Wait time parameter. The
DISABLE input must be connected negated to the status of the circuit breaker. The
Wait time parameter and the DISABLE input are used when synchronizing the
generator.
When the parameter Disable mode is OFF, the DISABLE input has no effect.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIFRQILJXUDWLRQZKHQWKH',6$%/(LQSXWLVXVHG
Act. power Power setting

t
close
Status of CB open
START
TRIP
Wait time
Operation
allowed
)LJXUH 0HDQLQJRIWKH',6$%/(LQSXWDQG:DLWWLPHSDUDPHWHUZKHQ
'LVDEOHPRGH 21

t
close
Status of CB
open
START
TRIP
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQLVDOORZHGDOOWKHWLPHDQGWKH:DLWWLPHSDUDPHWHUKDVQR
HIIHFWLIWKH'LVDEOHPRGH 2))
7
At reciprocating load conditions, the power measuring element may pick up briefly
power is below the set start value and FALSE when the measured power is above the
set start value.
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
power drops below the set start value again (Figure 9).
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
8
2.5 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
have reset.
9
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F095V013 for UPOW6St1 X X
1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
10
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for UPOW6St1 is 95, that for UPOW6St2 96
and that for UPOW6St3 97.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
11
3.2 Setting values

direction
Operation mode S2 0 or 1 1) - 1 R Selection of underpower or

reverse power
Wait time S4 0.0...60.0 s 0.0 R Waiting time after closing a circuit

breaker
Disable mode S5 0 or 1 2) - 1 R Disable input in use or not in use

1)
Operation mode 0 = Underpower; 1 = Reverse power
2)
Disable mode 0 = OFF; 1 = ON

direction
Operation mode S42 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Selection of underpower or

reverse power
Wait time S44 0.0...60.0 s 0.0 R/W Waiting time after closing a circuit
breaker
Disable mode S45 0 or 1 2) - 1 R/W Disable input in use or not in use

1)
2)

direction
1)
Operation mode S72 0 or 1 - 1 R/W Selection of underpower or
reverse power
breaker

1)
2)
12

direction
UPOW6St# 1) V1 0 or 1 2) - 1 R/W UPOW6St_ in use or not in
use
Drop-off time V2 0.00...60.00 s 1.00 R/W Resetting time of the operate

time counter

5)
group

START signal

for TRIP output

and CBFP
trip CBFP

and registers

8)




1)
2)
3)
Measuring mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = U1,U2,U3 & I1,I2,I3; 2=U12,U23,U0 & I1,I2,I3;
6 = U23,U31 & I1,I2,I3; 7= U12,U31 & I1,I2,I3; 8 = U1 & I1; 9 = U2 & I2;
10 = U3 & I3; 11 = U12 & I3; 12 = U23 & I1; 13 = U31 & I2
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
13
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Active power P I1 -10.00...10.00 x Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated active power
Reactive powerQ I2 -10.00...10.00 x Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated reactive power

1)
Input BLOCK I3 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Signal for blocking the
function

the groups 1 and 2

UPOW6St_
Input DISABLE I6 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for disabling

UPOW6St_ when the
generator is not synchronized
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips.
1, Operation 2,...
14
3.3.3.3 Duration
3.3.3.4 Power
3.3.3.5 Status data
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
15

direction
Duration V203 0.0...100.0 % 0.0 R/M Duration of start

situation
Reactive powerQ V205 -10.00...10.00 x Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated reactive

power

2)
1)
2)

direction

situation

power

2)
1)
2)
16

direction

situation

power

2)
1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK signal of P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK signal of P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of P< stage 1, 2 or 3 On
E10 1024 0 DISABLE input inactivated Reset
E11 2048 0 DISABLE input activated Activated
17
4. Technical Data

or
1.5 % of set value or 0.015 x rated value, when resistive voltage

dividers are used
Start time Injected power < 0.5 x Power setting (Operation mode = underpower)
or 2.0 x Power setting (Operation mode = reverse power):

1)
total time < 40 ms
output)
Reset ratio Typ. 0.98 (range 0.8...0.98) when Operation mode = reverse power
Typ. 1.02 (range 1.2...1.02) when Operation mode = underpower
Retardation time Total retardation time when the power exceeds the
the value set for the Power setting parameter < 45 ms2)

1)
2)

D -
18
1MRS752332-MUM UPOW6St_
Issued: 10/1998
Three-Phase Underpower or
Reverse Power Protection
Stage 1 (UPOW6St1)
Stage 2 (UPOW6St2)
Data subject to change without notice Stage 3 (UPOW6St3)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 Correction parameters for measuring devices............................ 4
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.5 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 9
2.6 Test mode ........................................................................................... 9
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 10

3.1 General ............................................................................................. 11
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 12
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 12
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 12
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 12
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 14
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 14
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 14
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 17
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 18

UPOW6St _ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Reverse power protection (Operation mode = reverse power) or low forward

power monitoring (Operation mode = underpower) for generators
currents
Wide setting ranges
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase underpower or reverse power
function blocks UPOW6St1, UPOW6St2 and UPOW6St3 used in products based on
the RED 500 Platform. The three stages are identical in operation.
The primary application of the function block is the reverse power protection
(Operation mode = reverse power) of the prime mover of a generator. The function is
necessary for the following types of prime mover:
steam turbines
Francis and Kaplan hydro units
gas turbines
diesel motors
The function block can also be used for forward power monitoring (Operation mode =
reverse power). In case of parallel connected generators for example, the load of one
generator may be so low that it is better to disconnect it and let the remaining
generators feed the network.
P<
2
Substation Automation UPOW6St _

signal and registers of UPOW6St_
DISABLE Digital signal (BOOL, active high) Input signal for disabling
UPOW6St_ when the machine is
not yet synchronized

3
2.1 Configuration

2.1.1 Correction parameters for measuring devices
Where a low value of reverse power setting is required, e.g. 2%, and the primary
circuit operating values must not deviate significantly from this, the correction
parameters have be used in the relay to compensate for the measuring errors. The
manufacturer of the measuring devices is to be contacted to obtain information on the
measuring errors.
If the measuring errors are not compensated for, the underpower setting should not be
lower than the sum of the current and voltage measuring errors. For example, if the
error of the current measuring device is 2 % and that of the voltage measuring device
1 %, the minimum setting is ( 2 + 1 ) % = 3 %.
The correction parameters for measuring devices can be set in the Relay
Configuration Tool as well as via the MMI of the machine terminal. For more
information on setting the correction parameters refer to the Technical Reference
Manual of REM 543.
4

symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
symmetric
2.2 Measuring mode
The function block UPOW6St_ measures fundamental frequency currents and

sequence components is also possible, which makes the determination of reverse
power insensitive to possible asymmetry in currents or voltages and corresponds to
the real load of the prime mover.
5
UPOW6St_ can be set to monitor either reverse power or low forward power via the
setting parameter Operation mode. The function block starts if the measured power
drops below the operating line.
:DUQLQJ The phase displacement errors of sensors, i.e. voltage dividers and
Rogowski coils, are not compensated for in the relay since they are generally
negligible from the practical point of view. However, in case of resistive voltage
dividers, the phase displacement error may be so large that it will cause an inaccuracy
of more than 1% x rated value in the operation of the function block. Therefore, a
setting lower that 1.5 % is not recommended to be used when voltages are measured
by resistive voltage dividers.
Q
s
e
t
a
P
r
e
p
Hysteresis
O
.
)LJXUH 7KHRSHUDWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLFRI832:6WBZKHQWKHRSHUDWLRQPRGHLV
UHYHUVHSRZHU
Q
s
e
t
a
P
r
e
p
Hysteresis
O
)LJXUH 7KHRSHUDWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLFRI832:6WBZKHQRSHUDWLRQPRGHLV
XQGHUSRZHU
6
When the parameter Disable mode is ON, the function block cannot operate if the
DISABLE input is active. When the DISABLE input is deactivated, the function
block still remains disabled for the time defined in the Wait time parameter. The
DISABLE input must be connected negated to the status of the circuit breaker. The
Wait time parameter and the DISABLE input are used when synchronizing the
generator.
When the parameter Disable mode is OFF, the DISABLE input has no effect.
)LJXUH ([DPSOHRIFRQILJXUDWLRQZKHQWKH',6$%/(LQSXWLVXVHG

t
close
Status of CB open
START
TRIP
Wait time
Operation
allowed
)LJXUH 0HDQLQJRIWKH',6$%/(LQSXWDQG:DLWWLPHSDUDPHWHUZKHQ
'LVDEOHPRGH 21

t
close
Status of CB
open
START
TRIP
)LJXUH 2SHUDWLRQLVDOORZHGDOOWKHWLPHDQGWKH:DLWWLPHSDUDPHWHUKDVQR
HIIHFWLIWKH'LVDEOHPRGH 2))
7
At reciprocating load conditions, the power measuring element may pick up briefly
power is below the set start value and FALSE when the measured power is above the
set start value.
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
power drops below the set start value again (Figure 9).
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
8
2.5 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
have reset.
9
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
10
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for UPOW6St1 is 95, that for UPOW6St2 96
and that for UPOW6St3 97.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
11
3.2 Setting values

direction
Operation mode S2 0 or 1 1) - 1 R Selection of underpower or

reverse power
Wait time S4 0.0...60.0 s 0.0 R Waiting time after closing a circuit

breaker
Disable mode S5 0 or 1 2) - 1 R Disable input in use or not in use

1)
2)

direction
Operation mode S42 0 or 1 1) - 1 R/W Selection of underpower or

reverse power
breaker

1)
2)

direction
1)
Operation mode S72 0 or 1 - 1 R/W Selection of underpower or
reverse power
breaker

1)
2)
12

direction
UPOW6St# 1) V1 0 or 1 2) - 1 R/W UPOW6St_ in use or not in
use
Drop-off time V2 0.00...60.00 s 1.00 R/W Resetting time of the operate

time counter

5)
group

START signal

for TRIP output

and CBFP
trip CBFP

and registers

8)




1)
2)
3)
Measuring mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = U1,U2,U3 & I1,I2,I3; 2=U12,U23,U0 & I1,I2,I3;
6 = U23,U31 & I1,I2,I3; 7= U12,U31 & I1,I2,I3; 8 = U1 & I1; 9 = U2 & I2;
10 = U3 & I3; 11 = U12 & I3; 12 = U23 & I1; 13 = U31 & I2
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
13
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Active power P I1 -1000.0... % Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated active power
1000.0
Reactive powerQ I2 -1000.0... % Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated reactive power

1000.0
Input BLOCK I3 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for blocking the

function

the groups 1 and 2

UPOW6St_
Input DISABLE I6 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for disabling

UPOW6St_ when the
generator is not synchronized
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips.
1, Operation 2,...
14
3.3.3.3 Duration
3.3.3.4 Power
3.3.3.5 Status data
3.3.3.6 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
15

direction

situation
Reactive powerQ V205 -1000.0...1000.0 % Sn 0.00 R/M Calculated reactive

power

2)
1)
2)

direction

situation

power

2)
1)
2)
16

direction

situation

power

2)
1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK signal of P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK signal of P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of P< stage 1, 2 or 3 On
E10 1024 0 DISABLE signal of P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Reset
E11 2048 0 DISABLE signal of P< stage 1, 2 or 3 Activated
17
4. Technical Data

or
1.5 % of set value or 0.015 x rated value, when resistive voltage

dividers are used
Start time Injected power < 0.5 x Power setting (Operation mode = underpower)
or 2.0 x Power setting (Operation mode = reverse power):

1)
total time < 40 ms
output)
Reset ratio Typ. 0.98 (range 0.8...0.98) when Operation mode = reverse power
Typ. 1.02 (range 1.2...1.02) when Operation mode = underpower
Retardation time Total retardation time when the power exceeds the
the value set for the Power setting parameter < 45 ms2)

1)
2)

D -
E -
18
1MRS100064 (UV3Low) RE_5_ _
1MRS100065 (UV3High) Three-Phase Undervoltage Protection
Issued 10/1997
Version: E Low-Set Stage (UV3Low)
Data subject to change without notice High-Set Stage (UV3High)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.4 IDMT type operation of UV3Low ......................................................... 8
2.5 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 9
2.6 Test mode ........................................................................................... 9
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 10
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 11
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 12
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 12
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 12
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 13
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 15
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 15
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 15
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 18
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 19
RE_5_ _ UV3Low ABB Automation
UV3High
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Single-phase, two-phase and three-phase undervoltage protection

UV3Low: one inverse-time (IDMT) characteristic
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase undervoltage function blocks
UV3Low and UV3High used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The
inverse-time operation is only included in the UV3Low function block.

transformer may cause abnormal busbar voltages. The function blocks UV3Low and
UV3High are designed for the single-phase, two-phase and three-phase undervoltage
3U< 3U<<

2
ABB Automation UV3Low RE_5_ _
UV3High
3
UV3High

active high)
active high)
pos. edge)
pos. edge) registers of UV3Low or UV3High

error
4
UV3High
2.1 Configuration

output signals.
1RWH If phase voltages are measured, the phase voltage UL1 is connected to the
input UL1_U12, the phase voltage UL2 to the input UL2_U23 and the phase voltage
UL3 to the input UL3_U31. The control parameter Measuring mode has to be in
position Mode 3. Phase-to-phase voltages are derived from phase voltages within the
function block as follows:
U12 = UL1 UL2

U23 = UL2 UL3
U31 = UL3 UL1
1RWH When phase-to-phase voltages are derived numerically in the relay, only the
2.2 Measuring mode
5
UV3High

measurement
measurement
The phase-to-phase voltages used for undervoltage protection are selected with the
setting parameter Voltage select. If at least one phase-to-phase voltage of the
selected voltages falls below the set start voltage, the module delivers the START
signal. When the function block starts, the START signal and the STATUS_ output
signal of the specific phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltage are set to TRUE.
Should the undervoltage situation exceed the preset definite operate time or, at the
inverse-time operation of UV3Low, the time determined by the level of the measured
voltage, the function block operates. At the inverse-time operation, the voltage/time
curve C is available. The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in the total
To avoid unwanted operations, e.g. during an auto-reclose sequence, starting and

tripping of the undervoltage function block can be blocked. The internal blocking
function is activated if at least one of the used voltage signals falls below the fixed
internal undervoltage blocking.
The DT or IDMT timer is allowed to run only if the external blocking signal BS1 and
the internal undervoltage blocking are inactive. When the blocking signal or the
undervoltage blocking becomes active (TRUE), the timer will be stopped (frozen).
When the external blocking signal BS2 or the internal undervoltage blocking is active,
the TRIP signal cannot be activated. The TRIP signal can be blocked externally by
activating the BS2 signal until the function block drops off.
6
UV3High
(OV_) or 1.005 (UV_).


U/Un
hysteresis zones
1
1.1
4%
2
4
0.9 4%
3

UHVHW
7
UV3High
2.4 IDMT type operation of UV3Low
At the inverse-time characteristic, the operate time will be the shorter, the more the
ka
t= +c
U < -U p
(b U < - 0.5)
where

U measured voltage
U< set start voltage
a constant 480
b constant 32
c constant 0.055
p constant 2
This inverse-time characteristic is called the C curve. (For a graphical presentation of
the curve, refer to the manual Technical Descriptions of Functions, Introduction.)
At the IDMT mode of operation, the integration of the operate time of the
undervoltage function block will not start until the voltage falls to the level 6% below
the set start value. The operate time accuracy stated in the technical data applies at
voltage levels 10% below the set value.
The parameter Operation mode is used for selecting the definite-time or inverse-
time operation for UV3Low.
8
UV3High
2.5 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
9
UV3High
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F064V013 for UV3Low X X
1)
Parameter F065V013 for UV3High X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
10
UV3High
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for UV3Low is 64 and that for UV3High 65.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
11
UV3High
3.2 Setting values
UV3Low

direction

1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = Definite time; 2 = C curve
UV3High

direction

1)
UV3Low

direction
1)
12
UV3High
UV3High

direction

1)
UV3Low

direction
1)
UV3High

direction

1)
13
UV3High

direction
Voltage select. V2 1...7 2) - 7 R/W Selection of voltages

3)
group

signal

TRIP output
Intern. blocking V8 0 or 1 6) - 1 R/W Enabling of internal

undervoltage blocking

and registers




1)
2)
Voltage selection 1 = U12; 2 = U23; 3 = U12 & U23; 4 = U31; 5 = U12 & U31; 6 = U23
& U31; 7 = U12 & U23 & U31
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
14
UV3High
3.3.1 Input data

direction



1)

1)
groups 1 and 2

signals and registers of UV3Low
or UV3High
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
input.
1, Operation 2,...
15
UV3High
3.3.3.2 Duration

percentage of the set operate time and, as concerns UV3Low, at the IDMT mode of
3.3.3.3 Voltages
updated at the moment of triggering, i.e. on the rising edge of the input signal TRIGG.
3.3.3.4 Status data
3.3.3.5 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
16
UV3High

direction
1)

2)
1)
2)
Active group 0 = Group 1; 1 = Group

direction
1)

2)
1)
2)
17
UV3High

direction
1)

2)
1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from 3U< or 3U>> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from 3U< or 3U>> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from 3U< or 3U>> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from 3U< or 3U>> stage Activated
E4 16 0 BS1 signal of 3U< or 3U>> stage Reset
E5 32 0 BS1 signal of 3U< or 3U>> stage Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of 3U< or 3U>> stage Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of 3U< or 3U>> stage On
18
UV3High
4. Technical Data

Start time Injected voltages < 0.5 x start voltage:
output)


f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value2)
Accuracy class index E Depends on the frequency of the voltage measured:

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 35 ms2) or the accuracy appearing when the
(UV3Low)
measured voltage varies 2.5 %


1)
2)
19
UV3High

B -

U12 UL1_U12
U23 UL2_U23
U31 UL3_U31

Start voltage: 0.301.20 0.101.20
Operate time: 0.1120.0 0.1300.0

20
1MRS752333-MUM UV3 _
Issued 10/1997
Three-Phase Undervoltage Protection
Low-Set Stage (UV3Low)
Data subject to change without notice High-Set Stage (UV3High)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 5
2.4 IDMT type operation of UV3Low ......................................................... 8
2.5 Setting groups ..................................................................................... 9
2.6 Test mode ........................................................................................... 9
2.8 Resetting........................................................................................... 10
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 11
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 12
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 12
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 12
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 13
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 15
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 15
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 15
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 18
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 19
UV3 _ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Single-phase, two-phase and three-phase undervoltage protection

UV3Low: one inverse-time (IDMT) characteristic
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the three-phase undervoltage function blocks
UV3Low and UV3High used in products based on the RED 500 Platform. The
inverse-time operation is only included in the UV3Low function block.

transformer may cause abnormal busbar voltages. The function blocks UV3Low and
UV3High are designed for the single-phase, two-phase and three-phase undervoltage
3U< 3U<<

2
Substation Automation UV3 _
3

active high)
active high)
pos. edge)
pos. edge) registers of UV3Low or UV3High

error
4
2.1 Configuration

output signals.
1RWH If phase voltages are measured, the phase voltage UL1 is connected to the
input UL1_U12, the phase voltage UL2 to the input UL2_U23 and the phase voltage
UL3 to the input UL3_U31. The control parameter Measuring mode has to be in
position Mode 3. Phase-to-phase voltages are derived from phase voltages within the
function block as follows:
U12 = UL1 UL2

U23 = UL2 UL3
U31 = UL3 UL1
1RWH When phase-to-phase voltages are derived numerically in the relay, only the
2.2 Measuring mode
5

measurement
measurement
The phase-to-phase voltages used for undervoltage protection are selected with the
setting parameter Voltage select. If at least one phase-to-phase voltage of the
selected voltages falls below the set start voltage, the module delivers the START
signal. When the function block starts, the START signal and the STATUS_ output
signal of the specific phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltage are set to TRUE.
Should the undervoltage situation exceed the preset definite operate time or, at the
inverse-time operation of UV3Low, the time determined by the level of the measured
voltage, the function block operates. At the inverse-time operation, the voltage/time
curve C is available. The delay of the heavy-duty output relay is included in the total
To avoid unwanted operations, e.g. during an auto-reclose sequence, starting and

tripping of the undervoltage function block can be blocked. The internal blocking
function is activated if at least one of the used voltage signals falls below the fixed
internal undervoltage blocking.
The DT or IDMT timer is allowed to run only if the external blocking signal BS1 and
the internal undervoltage blocking are inactive. When the blocking signal or the
undervoltage blocking becomes active (TRUE), the timer will be stopped (frozen).
When the external blocking signal BS2 or the internal undervoltage blocking is active,
the TRIP signal cannot be activated. The TRIP signal can be blocked externally by
activating the BS2 signal until the function block drops off.
6
(OV_) or 1.005 (UV_).


U/Un
hysteresis zones
1
1.1
4%
2
4
0.9 4%
3

UHVHW
7
2.4 IDMT type operation of UV3Low
At the inverse-time characteristic, the operate time will be the shorter, the more the
ka
t= +c
U < -U p
(b U < - 0.5)
where

U measured voltage
U< set start voltage
a constant 480
b constant 32
c constant 0.055
p constant 2
This inverse-time characteristic is called the C curve. (For a graphical presentation of
the curve, refer to the manual Technical Descriptions of Functions, Introduction.)
In the IDMT mode of operation, the integration of the operate time of the
undervoltage function block will not start until the voltage falls to the level 6% below
the set start value. The operate time accuracy stated in the technical data applies at
voltage levels 10% below the set value.
The parameter Operation mode is used for selecting the definite-time or inverse-
time operation for UV3Low.
8
2.5 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.6 Test mode
9
2.8 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F064V013 for UV3Low X X
1)
Parameter F065V013 for UV3High X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
10
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for UV3Low is 64 and that for UV3High 65.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
11
3.2 Setting values
UV3Low

direction

1)
UV3High

direction

1)
UV3Low

direction
1)
12
UV3High

direction

1)
UV3Low

direction
1)
UV3High

direction

1)
13

direction
Voltage select. V2 1...7 2) - 7 R/W Selection of voltages

3)
group

signal

TRIP output
Intern. blocking V8 0 or 1 6) - 1 R/W Enabling of internal

undervoltage blocking

and registers




1)
2)
Voltage selection 1 = U12; 2 = U23; 3 = U12 & U23; 4 = U31; 5 = U12 & U31; 6 = U23
& U31; 7 = U12 & U23 & U31
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
14
3.3.1 Input data

direction



1)

1)
groups 1 and 2

signals and registers of UV3Low
or UV3High
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction
1)
1)
3.3.3 Recorded data
input.
1, Operation 2,...
15
3.3.3.2 Duration

percentage of the set operate time and, as concerns UV3Low, at the IDMT mode of
3.3.3.3 Voltages
updated at the moment of triggering, i.e. on the rising edge of the input signal TRIGG.
3.3.3.4 Status data
3.3.3.5 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting
triggering request.
16

direction
1)

2)
1)
2)
Active group 0 = Group 1; 1 = Group

direction
1)

2)
1)
2)
17

direction
1)

2)
1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from 3U< or 3U>> stage Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from 3U< or 3U>> stage Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from 3U< or 3U>> stage Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from 3U< or 3U>> stage Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of 3U< or 3U>> stage Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of 3U< or 3U>> stage On
18
4. Technical Data

Start time Injected voltages < 0.5 x start voltage:
output)


f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 2.5% of set value2)
Accuracy class index E Depends on the frequency of the voltage measured:

f/fn = 0.95...1.05: 35 ms2) or the accuracy appearing when the
(UV3Low)
measured voltage varies 2.5 %


1)
2)
19

B -

U12 UL1_U12
U23 UL2_U23
U31 UL3_U31

Start voltage: 0.301.20 0.101.20
Operate time: 0.1120.0 0.1300.0

D -
20
1MRS100091 (VOC6Low) RE_5_ _
1MRS100107 (VOC6High) Voltage-Dependent
Issued: 10/1998
Version: C Overcurrent Protection
Data subject to change without notice Low-Set Stage (VOC6Low)
High-Set Stage (VOC6High)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6
2.3.1 Voltage step ............................................................................... 6
2.3.2 Voltage slope ............................................................................. 7
2.3.3 Input step ................................................................................... 8
2.5.2 RI and RD curve groups........................................................... 11
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 12
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 12
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 13
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 14
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 15
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 16
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 16
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 18
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 18
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 19
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 22
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 23
RE_5_ _ VOC6Low ABB Automation
VOC6High
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Three-phase voltage-dependent overcurrent protection

Definite-time (DT) operation and six inverse-time (IDMT) characteristics
Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection based on the comparison of the
measured currents and voltages to the setting limits
Three different dependency modes: Voltage slope, Voltage step and Input step
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the voltage-dependent overcurrent function

blocks VOC6Low and VOC6High used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The low-set stage and the high-set stage are identical in operation.
The function blocks VOC6Low and VOC6High are designed for short-circuit
protection whenever the DT (Definite Time) or the IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum
Time) characteristic is appropriate.
I (U) >
I (U) >>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI92&/RZDQG92&+LJK)RU,(&

2
ABB Automation VOC6Low RE_5_ _
VOC6High
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI92&/RZDQG92&+LJK
3
VOC6High

BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, Blocking signal
active high)
DOUBLE Digital signal (BOOL, Input signal for doubling the set start
active high) current value temporarily at magnetizing
inrush or start-up
CONTROL Digital signal (BOOL, Input signal used for lower current
active high) setting in the control mode Input step
edge) and registers of VOC6Low or VOC6High

4
VOC6High
2.1 Configuration

coils and voltages via conventional voltage transformers or voltage dividers. The
measuring devices and signal types for analogue channels are selected and configured
in a special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool included in the CAP 505
Tool Box. Digital inputs are configured in the same programming environment (the
number of selectable analogue inputs, digital inputs and digital outputs depends on the
hardware used).
connected to the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs and the phase-to-phase
voltages U12, U23 and U31 (or phase-to-earth voltages U1, U2 and U3) to the
corresponding U1, U2 and U3 inputs of the function block. Furthermore, digital
Note ! If phase-to-earth voltages are used, the control parameter Voltage selection
(F091V002 for VOC6Low and F107V002 for VOC6High) has to be in position
Phase-to-earth. The phase-to-phase voltages are derived from phase-to-earth
voltages within the function block as follows:
U12 = U1 - U2
U23 = U2 - U3
U31 = U3 - U1
The default value of the parameter Voltage selection is Phase-to-phase, i.e. the
relay measures phase-to-phase voltages.
It is also possible to use one (or two) phase-to-phase voltage(s) and three currents in
case there are no more voltages available. In this case, the function block is to be
configured so that a voltage signal is connected to each voltage input of the function
block in the configuration tool. If two phase-to-phase voltages are used, one is
connected to the corresponding voltage input of the function block (e.g. voltage U12
to the input U12) and the other to the two remaining voltage inputs of the function
block (e.g. voltage U23 to the inputs U23 and U31). Note that at least one phase-to-
phase voltage is required (any of U12, U23 and U31) and the control parameter
Voltage selection is to be set to Phase-to-phase. It is recommended, however, that
three voltages and three currents are used whenever possible.
5
VOC6High
2.2 Measuring mode
fundamental frequency component of the short-circuit current.
The voltage-dependent overcurrent function block includes overcurrent protection.

The operation of the function block is similar to the non-directional overcurrent
protection (NOC3_) except that the start current setting is dependent on voltage. The
function block starts if the current exceeds the set start current in one or more phases.
The set start current is automatically doubled when the signal connected to the
DOUBLE input is active. The automatic doubling function can be used e.g. during a
The operating characteristic of start current is selected via the setting parameter
Control mode. The start current can be selected to be voltage-dependent in the three
different ways described below: Voltage step, Voltage slope and Input step.
The voltage dependency is phase sensitive, which means that one voltage controls
only the corresponding phase (e.g. voltage U12 controls the current setting in phase
L1 etc.). However, if only one voltage is connected, it controls all the phases (e.g. the
current setting for each phase is dependent on voltage U12) and if two voltages are
used, the one connected to two inputs of the function block also controls the
corresponding two phases.
The voltage dependency affects both the definite-time (DT) mode and the inverse
definite minimum time (IDMT) mode. In DT mode the voltage has an effect on the
current setting rather than on the operate time. In IDMT mode the voltage drop also
quickens the operate time if the fault current remains at the same level during a fault.
This can be considered as if an inverse-time curve was dropped according to the
current setting (which is dependent on voltage).
The DT or IDMT timer is allowed to run only if the blocking signal BLOCK is
inactive, i.e. its value is FALSE. When the blocking signal becomes active, i.e. its
value turns to TRUE, the timer will be stopped (frozen).
2.3.1 Voltage step
If the measured voltage drops below the value set for the Voltage limit parameter,
the start current is dropped by multiplying it by the value set for the Current
6
VOC6High
multiplier parameter (K). If the voltage rises above the voltage limit, the set start
current value is valid. The procedure is shown in Figure 3.
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQDOLW\RI92&/RZDQG92&+LJKLQWKHFRQWUROPRGH9ROWDJH
VWHS
The following equations determine how the start current is influenced by the voltage
in Voltage step mode:
When U < Voltage limit: , 6WDUW (8 ) = ., 6HWWLQJ
When U Voltage limit: , 6WDUW (8 ) = , 6HWWLQJ
2.3.2 Voltage slope
If the measured voltage is below the value Voltage limit 2, the start current is
dropped by multiplying it by the current multiplier (K). If the voltage is above the
value Voltage limit 2 but below the value Voltage limit 1, the start current is
calculated from the slope from point(Voltage limit 2, KI>) to point(Voltage limit 1,
I>). If the measured voltage rises above the value Voltage limit 1, the set start
VORSH
7
VOC6High
in Voltage slope mode:
When 8 < Voltage limit 2: , 6WDUW (8 ) = ., 6HWWLQJ
When Voltage limit 2 8 < Voltage limit 1:
" Voltage limit 1" 8

, 6WDUW (8 ) = , 6HWWLQJ 1 (1 . )
" Voltage limit 1" " Voltage limit 2"
When U Voltage limit 1: , 6WDUW (8 ) = , 6HWWLQJ
2.3.3 Input step
The start current value is dropped by multiplying it by the current multiplier (K) when
the CONTROL input is activated.
The following equations determine how the start current is influenced by the
CONTROL input in Input step mode:
When CONTROL input is active: , 6WDUW (8 ) = ., 6HWWLQJ

When CONTROL input is not active: , 6WDUW (8 ) = , 6HWWLQJ
8
VOC6High
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
At the inverse-time mode the operate time of the function block is a function of the
current; the higher the current, the shorter is the operate time. Six time/current curve
curve groups corresponding to the ABB praxis. The setting Operation mode is used
for selecting the desired operate time characteristic. (For a graphical presentation of
the curves, refer to the manual Technical Descriptions of Functions, Introduction.)
9
VOC6High


inverse-time operation of the function block are:
normal inverse (NI)

very inverse (VI)
kx
t[s] =
I
( ) 1
I>
where

I neutral current (RMS value)
I> adjustable start current
Inverse-time
characteristic
very inverse or extremely inverse, the function block has to start at the latest when the
by 1.1 times. The voltage-dependent overcurrent function block will start and the
IDMT integration will begin once the current exceeds the set start value.
10
VOC6High

2 2.22E 2.34E 2.44E 2.34E
5 1.13E 1.26E 1.48E 1.26E
7 - - - 1.00E
10 1.01E 1.01E 1.02E -
20 1.00E 1.00E 1.00E -
1966 for currents 2 and 5 times the setting. The function block complies with the
2.5.2 RI and RD curve groups

obtain time grading with mechanical relays. Mathematically, the characteristic can be
expressed as follows:
k
t s =
I>
0. 339 0. 236 x
I
I
t[s] = 5. 8 -1. 35 x ln
k x I>
11
VOC6High
2.6 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.7 Test mode
have reset.
12
VOC6High
2.9 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F091V013 for VOC6Low X X
1)
Parameter F107V013 for VOC6High X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
13
VOC6High
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for VOC6Low is 91 and that for VOC6High
107.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
14
VOC6High
3.2 Setting values

direction

2)
Control mode S5 0...2 - 0 R Selection of mode for voltage
control
Voltage limit S6 0.10...1.00 x Un 0.10 R Voltage setting value for voltage

step mode
Voltage limit 1 S7 0.60...1.00 x Un 0.60 R Upper voltage setting value for

voltage slope mode
Voltage limit 2 S8 0.10...0.59 x Un 0.10 R Lower voltage setting value for

voltage slope mode
Curr.multiplier S9 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R Multiplier for lower start current

value
1)
Operation mode 0 = Not in use; 1 = Definite time; 2 = Extremely inv.; 3 = Very inverse;
4 = Normal inverse; 5 = Long-time inv.; 6 = RI-type inv.; 7 = RD-type inv.
2)
Control mode 0 = Voltage step; 1 = Voltage slope; 2 = Input step
15
VOC6High

direction
2)
Control mode S45 0...2 - 0 R/W Selection of mode for voltage
control
Voltage limit S46 0.10...1.00 x Un 0.10 R/W Voltage setting value for voltage
step mode
Voltage limit 1 S47 0.60...1.00 x Un 0.60 R/W Upper voltage setting value for
voltage slope mode
Voltage limit 2 S48 0.10...0.59 x Un 0.10 R/W Lower voltage setting value for
voltage slope mode
Curr.multiplier S49 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R/W Multiplier for lower start current
value
1)
2)

direction
Control mode S75 0...2 2) - 0 R/W Selection of mode for voltage

control
step mode
voltage slope mode
voltage slope mode
value
1)
2)
16
VOC6High

direction
Voltage select. V2 0 or 1 2) - 0 R/W Selection of phase-to-phase or

phase-to-earth voltages
counter at DT and IDMT modes

group

signal

TRIP output

CBFP

mode
CBFP

registers

6)




1)
2)
Voltage select. 0 = Phase-to-phase voltages; 1 = Phase-to-earth voltages
3)
4)
5)
6)
17
VOC6High
3.3.1 Input data

direction
Current IL1 I1 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Input for measuring phase current
IL1
Current IL2 I2 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Input for meas. phase current IL2
Current IL3 I3 0.00...60.00 x In 0.00 R/M Input for meas. phase current IL3
Voltage U12 I4 0.00...2.00 x Un 0.00 R/M Input for measuring voltage U12
1)
Input BLOCK I7 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Blocking signal
Input GROUP I8 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Control input for switching between


current temporarily at magnetizing
inrush or start-up
Input CONTROL I10 0 or 1 1) - 0 R/M Signal for lower current setting in the
control mode Input step

signals and registers of VOC6Low
or VOC6High
1)
3.3.2 Output data

direction

1)
Output ERR O3 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of ERR signal
1)
18
VOC6High
3.3.3 Recorded data
3.3.3.1 General
starts or trips.
1, Operation 2,...
3.3.3.3 Duration

percentage of the set operate time and at the IDMT mode of operation as a percentage
3.3.3.4 Currents
the current values captured one fundamental cycle (20 ms at rated frequency 50 Hz)
after the beginning of the start situation are recorded. So the values of the phase
currents IL1, I L2 and I L3 always originate from the same moment and are recorded as
multiples of the rated current IN. Both the peak and the mean values of the current are
recorded for each phase.
3.3.3.5 Voltages
The voltage values are recorded using the same principle as for the currents. If only
one or two phase-to-phase voltages are used, the same voltage value is recorded more
than once. For example, if the voltage U12 is used to control all three phases, it is
recorded in the value fields for U12, U23 and U31.
19
VOC6High
3.3.3.6 Status data
The status data of the input signals BLOCK and DOUBLE (Active or Not active) and
the Active group parameter are recorded at the moment of triggering. The Active
3.3.3.7 Priority
1 Tripping
2 Starting

direction

1)
DOUBLE V214 0 or 1 - 0 R/M Status of DOUBLE input

1)
2)
20
VOC6High

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
21
VOC6High

direction

1)

2)
1)
2)
3.3.4 Events

coefficient mask
E0 1 1 START signal from VOC6Low or VOC6High Reset
E1 2 1 START signal from VOC6Low or VOC6High Activated
E2 4 1 TRIP signal from VOC6Low or VOC6High Reset
E3 8 1 TRIP signal from VOC6Low or VOC6High Activated
E4 16 1 CBFP signal from VOC6Low or VOC6High Reset
E5 32 1 CBFP signal from VOC6Low or VOC6High Activated
E6 64 0 BLOCK signal of VOC6Low or VOC6High Reset
E7 128 0 BLOCK signal of VOC6Low or VOC6High Activated
E8 256 0 Test mode of VOC6Low or VOC6High Off
E9 512 0 Test mode of VOC6Low or VOC6High On
22
VOC6High
4. Technical Data

f/fn = 0.95...1.05:
Current 2.5% of set value or 0.01 x In.
Voltage 2.5% of set value or 0.01 x Un.
TRIP output)



f/fn = 0.95...1.05: Class index E = 5.0 or 20 ms2)

0 No suppression
(see above)
For frequency deviations up to 20% the accuracy is 10%.

1)
2)

B -
23
1MRS752334-MUM VOC6_
Voltage-Dependent
Issued: 10/1998
Version: D/28.1.2002 Low-Set Stage (VOC6Low)
Data subject to change without notice High-Set Stage (VOC6High)
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 2
1.1 Features.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 Application........................................................................................... 2
2.1 Configuration....................................................................................... 5
2.2 Measuring mode ................................................................................. 6
2.3.1 Voltage step ............................................................................... 6
2.3.2 Voltage slope ............................................................................. 7
2.3.3 Input step ................................................................................... 8
2.5.2 RI and RD curve groups........................................................... 11
2.6 Setting groups ................................................................................... 12
2.7 Test mode ......................................................................................... 12
2.9 Resetting........................................................................................... 13
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 14
3.2 Setting values.................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Actual settings.......................................................................... 15
3.2.2 Setting group 1......................................................................... 16
3.2.3 Setting group 2......................................................................... 16
3.3.1 Input data ................................................................................. 18
3.3.2 Output data .............................................................................. 18
3.3.3 Recorded data.......................................................................... 19
3.3.4 Events ...................................................................................... 22
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................ 23
VOC6_ Substation Automation
1. Introduction
1.1 Features
Three-phase voltage-dependent overcurrent protection

Definite-time (DT) operation and six inverse-time (IDMT) characteristics
Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection based on the comparison of the
measured currents and voltages to the setting limits
Three different dependency modes: Voltage slope, Voltage step and Input step
1.2 Application
This document specifies the functions of the voltage-dependent overcurrent function

blocks VOC6Low and VOC6High used in products based on the RED 500 Platform.
The low-set stage and the high-set stage are identical in operation.
The function blocks VOC6Low and VOC6High are designed for short-circuit
protection whenever the DT (Definite Time) or the IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum
Time) characteristic is appropriate.
I (U) >
I (U) >>
)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PEROVRI92&/RZDQG92&+LJK)RU,(&

2
Substation Automation VOC6_
)LJXUH )XQFWLRQEORFNV\PEROVRI92&/RZDQG92&+LJK
3

BLOCK Digital signal (BOOL, Blocking signal
active high)
DOUBLE Digital signal (BOOL, Input signal for doubling the set start
active high) current value temporarily at magnetizing
inrush or start-up
CONTROL Digital signal (BOOL, Input signal used for lower current
active high) setting in the control mode Input step
edge) and registers of VOC6Low or VOC6High

4
2.1 Configuration

coils and voltages via conventional voltage transformers or voltage dividers. The
measuring devices and signal types for analogue channels are selected and configured
in a special dialogue box of the Relay Configuration Tool included in the CAP 505
Tool Box. Digital inputs are configured in the same programming environment (the
number of selectable analogue inputs, digital inputs and digital outputs depends on the
hardware used).
connected to the corresponding IL1, IL2 and IL3 inputs and the phase-to-phase
voltages U12, U23 and U31 (or phase-to-earth voltages U1, U2 and U3) to the
corresponding U1, U2 and U3 inputs of the function block. Furthermore, digital
Note ! If phase-to-earth voltages are used, the control parameter Voltage selection
(F091V002 for VOC6Low and F107V002 for VOC6High) has to be in position
Phase-to-earth. The phase-to-phase voltages are derived from phase-to-earth
voltages within the function block as follows:
U12 = U1 - U2
U23 = U2 - U3
U31 = U3 - U1
The default value of the parameter Voltage selection is Phase-to-phase, i.e. the
relay measures phase-to-phase voltages.
It is also possible to use one (or two) phase-to-phase voltage(s) and three currents in
case there are no more voltages available. In this case, the function block is to be
configured so that a voltage signal is connected to each voltage input of the function
block in the configuration tool. If two phase-to-phase voltages are used, one is
connected to the corresponding voltage input of the function block (e.g. voltage U12
to the input U12) and the other to the two remaining voltage inputs of the function
block (e.g. voltage U23 to the inputs U23 and U31). Note that at least one phase-to-
phase voltage is required (any of U12, U23 and U31) and the control parameter
Voltage selection is to be set to Phase-to-phase. It is recommended, however, that
three voltages and three currents are used whenever possible.
5
2.2 Measuring mode
fundamental frequency component of the short-circuit current.
The voltage-dependent overcurrent function block includes overcurrent protection.

The operation of the function block is similar to the non-directional overcurrent
protection (NOC3_) except that the start current setting is dependent on voltage. The
function block starts if the current exceeds the set start current in one or more phases.
The set start current is automatically doubled when the signal connected to the
DOUBLE input is active. The automatic doubling function can be used e.g. during a
The operating characteristic of start current is selected via the setting parameter
Control mode. The start current can be selected to be voltage-dependent in the three
different ways described below: Voltage step, Voltage slope and Input step.
The voltage dependency is phase sensitive, which means that one voltage controls
only the corresponding phase (e.g. voltage U12 controls the current setting in phase
L1 etc.). However, if only one voltage is connected, it controls all the phases (e.g. the
current setting for each phase is dependent on voltage U12) and if two voltages are
used, the one connected to two inputs of the function block also controls the
corresponding two phases.
The voltage dependency affects both the definite-time (DT) mode and the inverse
definite minimum time (IDMT) mode. In DT mode the voltage has an effect on the
current setting rather than on the operate time. In IDMT mode the voltage drop also
quickens the operate time if the fault current remains at the same level during a fault.
This can be considered as if an inverse-time curve was dropped according to the
current setting (which is dependent on voltage).
The DT or IDMT timer is allowed to run only if the blocking signal BLOCK is
inactive, i.e. its value is FALSE. When the blocking signal becomes active, i.e. its
value turns to TRUE, the timer will be stopped (frozen).
2.3.1 Voltage step
If the measured voltage drops below the value set for the Voltage limit parameter,
the start current is dropped by multiplying it by the value set for the Current
6
multiplier parameter (K). If the voltage rises above the voltage limit, the set start
VWHS
in Voltage step mode:
When U < Voltage limit: , 6WDUW (8 ) = ., 6HWWLQJ
When U Voltage limit: , 6WDUW (8 ) = , 6HWWLQJ
2.3.2 Voltage slope
If the measured voltage is below the value Voltage limit 2, the start current is
dropped by multiplying it by the current multiplier (K). If the voltage is above the
value Voltage limit 2 but below the value Voltage limit 1, the start current is
calculated from the slope from point(Voltage limit 2, KI>) to point(Voltage limit 1,
I>). If the measured voltage rises above the value Voltage limit 1, the set start
VORSH
7
in Voltage slope mode:
When 8 < Voltage limit 2: , 6WDUW (8 ) = ., 6HWWLQJ
When Voltage limit 2 8 < Voltage limit 1:
" Voltage limit 1" 8

, 6WDUW (8 ) = , 6HWWLQJ 1 (1 . )
" Voltage limit 1" " Voltage limit 2"
When U Voltage limit 1: , 6WDUW (8 ) = , 6HWWLQJ
2.3.3 Input step
The start current value is dropped by multiplying it by the current multiplier (K) when
the CONTROL input is activated.
The following equations determine how the start current is influenced by the
CONTROL input in Input step mode:
When CONTROL input is active: , 6WDUW (8 ) = ., 6HWWLQJ

When CONTROL input is not active: , 6WDUW (8 ) = , 6HWWLQJ
8
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff1.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
1
IN
0
START
TRIP
Drop-off time
Drop-off
timer
Dropoff2.fh7
Operate time
Operate
timer
In the inverse-time mode the operate time of the function block is a function of the
current; the higher the current, the shorter is the operate time. Six time/current curve
curve groups corresponding to the ABB praxis. The setting Operation mode is used
for selecting the desired operate time characteristic. (For a graphical presentation of
the curves, refer to the manual Technical Descriptions of Functions, Introduction.)
9


inverse-time operation of the function block are:
normal inverse (NI)

very inverse (VI)
kx
t[s] =
I
( ) 1
I>
where

I neutral current (RMS value)
I> adjustable start current
Inverse-time
characteristic
very inverse or extremely inverse, the function block has to start at the latest when the
by 1.1 times. The voltage-dependent overcurrent function block will start and the
IDMT integration will begin once the current exceeds the set start value.
10

2 2.22E 2.34E 2.44E 2.34E
5 1.13E 1.26E 1.48E 1.26E
7 - - - 1.00E
10 1.01E 1.01E 1.02E -
20 1.00E 1.00E 1.00E -
1966 for currents 2 and 5 times the setting. The function block complies with the
2.5.2 RI and RD curve groups

obtain time grading with mechanical relays. Mathematically, the characteristic can be
expressed as follows:
k
t s =
I>
0. 339 0. 236 x
I
I
t[s] = 5. 8 -1. 35 x ln
k x I>
11
2.6 Setting groups
ways:

1)
time.
2.7 Test mode
have reset.
12
2.9 Resetting

1)
1)
Parameter F091V013 for VOC6Low X X
1)
Parameter F107V013 for VOC6High X X
2)
2)
2)
2)
Push-button C X
2)
2)
1)
2)
13
3.1 General
parameters and events. The channel for VOC6Low is 91 and that for VOC6High
107.
R, R/M Read only
W Write only
R/W Read and write
follows:
32...63.
14
3.2 Setting values

direction
Time multiplier S4 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R Time multiplier in IDMT mode

2)
Control mode S5 0...2 - 0 R Selection of mode for voltage
control
Voltage limit S6 0.10...1.00 x Un 0.10 R Voltage setting value for voltage

step mode
Voltage limit 1 S7 0.60...1.00 x Un 0.60 R Upper voltage setting value for

voltage slope mode
Voltage limit 2 S8 0.10...0.59 x Un 0.10 R Lower voltage setting value for

voltage slope mode
Curr.multiplier S9 0.05...1.00 - 0.05 R Multiplier for lower start current

value
1)
2)
15

direction
2)
Control mode S45 0...2 - 0 R/W Selection of mode for voltage
control
step mode
voltage slope mode
voltage slope mode
value
1)
2)

direction
Control mode S75 0...2 2) - 0 R/W Selection of mode for voltage

control
step mode
voltage slope mode
voltage slope mode
value
1)
2)
16

direction
Measuring mode V1 0

Ref541 - Sve Zstitne Funkcije Mergano

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Ref541 - Sve Zstitne Funkcije Mergano

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

1MRS100080 RE_5_ _

2.4.11 CBFAIL alarm ...........................................................................20

3. Parameters and Events ..........................................................................24

One to five successive auto-reclose (AR) shots to select

Circuit breaker CLOSED OPEN CLOSED

b) Instant of fault *) This signal is not

Circuit breaker CLOSED OPEN CLOSED

)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERO )RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOHOLQH

1.3 Input description

Name Type Description

1.4 Output description

Name Type Description

2. Description of Operation

2.1.2 Relay configuration

$5 &/26( &%B&/26(

'28%/( &%23(1 6+27

2.1.3 AR shots and final trip function

Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5 Final Trip Lock-out

Advance Shot Pointer

AR1 oper. mode

AR1 start delay

2.1.4 Shot selection

Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable

2.1.5 Initiation of auto-reclosing

The start of the AR shots is subject to the following conditions:

2.1.6 Auto-reclose operation mode control

The operation mode of the AR5Func can be controlled in two ways:

1 When the setting parameter $5RSHUDWLRQV (ch80/S3) is 21LQSXW VHOHFW(2), the

2.1.7 Auto-reclose shot initiated by a trip signal

2.1.8 Auto-reclose shot initiated by a start signal

t =50 ms delay after

2.1.9 Auto-reclose shot blocked by an initiation signal

An auto-reclose shot can be blocked by a high-set overcurrent stage. If the activation

2.1.10 Circuit breaker position inputs

Circuit breaker Undefined OPEN CLOSED OPEN

2.1.11 Delaying the CLOSE output signal

the ARSYNC input must be TRUE if information about synchronism is required

2.1.12 Lock-out resetting

The LOCKOUT_RES input is edge-sensitive. The falling edge causes no operation,

2.2 Test mode

If required, the test functionality can be implemented with additional logic

Operation Latched Operation

The operation counters subject to reset are:

counters of DEF.TRIP alarms initiated by each of the four AR inputs (1XP

2.4.1 Discriminating time and reclaim time

2.4.2 Final trip function (6)

the circuit breaker operation failed

the auto-recloser is blocked by the frequent-operation counter

2.4.4 Interruption of auto-reclosing

An auto-reclose sequence (AR shots 1...5) can be interrupted or is interrupted in the

2.4.5 Secured control of the circuit breaker

allows multiple preselected operations to be accomplished simultaneously between

The parameters for secured control are:

ch900/V252 Same as ch80/V10. The command is broadcasted to other function

The parameters above are write-only parameters.

2.4.6 Circuit breaker supervision logic

the circuit breaker is open

2.4.7 Aids to circuit breaker maintenance

2.4.8 Frequent-operation counter

The frequent-operation counter is intended to block the auto-recloser in cases when

The frequent-operation counter can be described as a water tank with a small

after elapse of the reclaim time,

2.4.11 CBFAIL alarm

)LJXUH 3URWHFWLRQGLDJUDPV\PERO)RU,(&V\PEROVXVHGLQVLQJOHOLQH

$5 &/26( &%B&/26(

'28%/( &%23(1 6+27